HA 2022 B1 Structural 2148-2609

HONG KONG HOUSING AUTHORITY
SPECIFICATION LIBRARY 2022 (BATCH 1) EDITION
Structural EngineeringWorks Specification

CONCRETE WORKS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON CONCRETE WORKS
Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /1

CONCRETE WORKS CON > TABLE OF CONTENTS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1 INSITU CONCRETE ............................................................................... 30

MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 30
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 30
CON1.M010.9 STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 30
CON1.M020.9 STATUS OF THE SPECIFICATION .............................................................. 30
CON1.M025.9 STATUS OF THE WORKSECTION ............................................................... 30
CON1.M030.9 GRADES OF CONCRETE ............................................................................... 30
CON1.M040.9 CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT .......................................................................... 31
CON1.M050.9 FREE WATER/CEMENT RATIO ................................................................... 31
CEMENTS ........................................................................................................................................ 31
CON1.M110.9 SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................................ 31
CON1.M120.9 PORTLAND CEMENT (PC)............................................................................ 31
CON1.M130.9 SULPHATE RESISTING PORTLAND CEMENT (SRPC) ............................ 32
CON1.M140.9 HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT (HAC)................................................................ 32
CON1.M150.9 PULVERISED FUEL ASH (PFA).................................................................... 32
CON1.M160.9 PORTLAND FLY ASH CEMENT (PFAC) ..................................................... 32
CON1.M170.9 USE OF PULVERISED FUEL ASH ................................................................ 32
CON1.M180.9 GROUND GRANULATED BLASTFURNACE SLAG (GGBS) .................... 33
CON1.M190.A USE OF GGBS IN PRECAST FACADE, PRECAST STAIRCASE,
PRECAST REFUSE CHUTE, PRECAST PARTITION WALL AND
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL ..................................................................... 33
AGGREGATES ................................................................................................................................ 34
CON1.M215.9 RECYCLED COARSE AGGREGATES ......................................................... 34
CON1.M220.9 SOURCES OF AGGREGATES ....................................................................... 34
CON1.M230.9 COARSE AGGREGATE .................................................................................. 35
CON1.M240.9 FINE AGGREGATE ........................................................................................ 35
CON1.M250.9 ALL-IN AGGREGATE .................................................................................... 35
CON1.M260.9 LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE ...................................................................... 35
CON1.M270.9 AGGREGATES FOR AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING
STRUCTURES ................................................................................................. 35
CON1.M280.9 GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATES................................................. 35
WATER ............................................................................................................................................. 35
CON1.M310.9 WATER ............................................................................................................ 35
CON1.M320.9 RECYCLED WATER ...................................................................................... 36
ADMIXTURES ................................................................................................................................. 36
CON1.M410.9 ADMIXTURES GENERALLY ........................................................................ 36
CON1.M420.A SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................................ 36
CON1.M430.9 PIGMENTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT AND PORTLAND
CEMENT PRODUCTS .................................................................................... 36
CON1.M440.9 ADMIXTURES AND SUPERPLASTICISERS ............................................... 36
CURING COMPOUNDS ................................................................................................................. 36
CON1.M510.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 36
CON1.M530.9 PROPERTIES ................................................................................................... 37
CON1.M540.9 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION ....................................... 37
CON1.M550.9 STRUCTURES TO CONTAIN POTABLE WATER ...................................... 37
ANCILLARY MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 37
CON1.M610.9 UNDERLAYS TO CONCRETE PAVINGS AND SLABS ON
HARDCORE ..................................................................................................... 37
CON1.M620.9 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING FOR CURING .............................................. 37
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.M630.9 WATERPROOF ADHESIVE TAPE ................................................................ 37

CON1.M640.9 BITUMASTIC PAINT ...................................................................................... 37
CON1.M650.9 REPAIR MORTAR .......................................................................................... 37
CON1.M660.9 LOW VISCOSITY POLYMER RESIN ........................................................... 38
CON1.M670.9 EPOXY RESIN FOR INJECTION ................................................................... 38
CON1.M680.9 CAST IN STEEL INSERT CHANNELS ......................................................... 38
SOURCES OF SUPPLY OF CONCRETE .................................................................................... 38
CON1.M710.9 READY MIXED CONCRETE ......................................................................... 38
CON1.M720.9 SUBMISSION FOR APPROVAL .................................................................... 38
CON1.M730.9 SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE ........................................................................... 39
CON1.M740.9 WITHDRAWAL OF CERTIFICATION .......................................................... 40
CON1.M750.9 SITE BATCHING ............................................................................................. 40
CON1.M760.9 SITE BATCHING PLANT ............................................................................... 40
CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY ............................................................................................. 41
CON1.M810.9 CHLORIDE CONTENT ................................................................................... 41
CON1.M820.9 DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ................................................................... 41
CON1.M830.9 USE OF SULPHATE RESISTING PORTLAND CEMENT ........................... 41
CON1.M840.9 USE OF PFA AND PFAC ................................................................................ 41
CON1.M850.9 CONTROL OF ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIONS ................................. 41
NO FINES CONCRETE .................................................................................................................. 42
CON1.M910.9 COMPOSITION ............................................................................................... 42
CON1.M920.9 AGGREGATE/CEMENT CONTENT RATIO ................................................ 42
CON1.M930.9 CEMENT CONTENT ....................................................................................... 42
STANDARDISED DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS ........................................ 43
CON1.M1010.9 CEMENT .......................................................................................................... 43
CON1.M1020.9 MIX PROPORTIONS ....................................................................................... 43
CON1.M1030.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................ 44
CON1.M1040.9 USE OF ADMIXTURES .................................................................................. 44
DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES .................................................................................................. 44
CON1.M1120.9 MAXIMUM CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT .................................................... 44
CON1.M1130.9 MINIMUM CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT ...................................................... 44
CON1.M1150.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES ........................................ 45
CON1.M1160.9 INCREASING CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT ................................................. 45
CON1.M1170.9 MAXIMUM FREE WATER / CEMENT RATIO ............................................ 45
CON1.M1180.9 MINIMUM SLUMP VALUE ........................................................................... 45
CON1.M1190.A CEMENT CONTENT IN CONCRETE WITH PFA OR GGBS ...................... 45
CON1.M1200.9 ADJUSTMENT OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES IN
DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ................................................................... 46
MATERIALS FOR REMEDIAL WORK...................................................................................... 46
CON1.M1210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 46
WORKMANSHIP ..................................................................................................................... 47
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS ........................................................................ 47
CON1.W010.9 BAGGED CEMENT ......................................................................................... 47
CON1.W020.9 BULK CEMENT, PFA AND GGBS ................................................................ 47
CON1.W030.9 AGGREGATES ................................................................................................ 47
CON1.W040.9 ADMIXTURES AND CURING COMPOUNDS ............................................. 47
BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE..................................................................................... 48
CON1.W110.9 BATCHING PLANT ........................................................................................ 48
CON1.W120.9 ALLOWANCE FOR WATER CONTENT OF AGGREGATES..................... 48
CON1.W130.9 QUANTITY OF WATER ................................................................................. 48
CON1.W140.9 CONCRETE MIXING PLANT ........................................................................ 48
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.W150.9 MIXING CONCRETE ...................................................................................... 48

CON1.W160.9 CEMENT FROM DIFFERING SOURCES ..................................................... 48
CON1.W165.9 PRE-REQUISITES ON MIXING TWO CONCRETE MIXES WITH
CEMENT FROM TWO DIFFERING SOURCES ........................................... 48
CON1.W170.9 REMIXING ....................................................................................................... 49
CON1.W180.9 TRUCK MIXED CONCRETE ......................................................................... 49
CON1.W190.9 CLEANLINESS OF MIXER ............................................................................ 49
CON1.W200.9 LIGHT-WEIGHT CONCRETE ........................................................................ 49
CON1.W210.9 WATERPROOF CONCRETE .......................................................................... 49
PROGRAMME AND SITE RECORDS FOR CONCRETING ................................................... 49
CON1.W305.9 PROGRAMME FOR CONCRETING.............................................................. 49
CON1.W310.A REQUIREMENTS ON SITE RECORDS FOR CONCRETING ..................... 50
TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE ....................................................................... 51
CON1.W410.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 51
CON1.W420.9 CONCRETE BATCHED OFF-SITE ................................................................ 51
CON1.W430.9 CLEANLINESS ................................................................................................ 51
CON1.W440.9 APPROVAL BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE ............................................. 51
CON1.W450.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 51
CON1.W460.9 USE OF TRUNKING AND CHUTES ............................................................. 51
CON1.W465.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN FRESH CONCRETE ................................. 52
CON1.W470.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN MASSIVE STRUCTURAL
ELEMENTS ...................................................................................................... 52
TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE ....................................................................... 52
CON1.W480.9 CONCRETING PLAN...................................................................................... 52
FORMING CONSTRUCTION JOINTS........................................................................................ 52
CON1.W510.9 LOCATION OF JOINTS .................................................................................. 52
CON1.W520.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES ........................................ 52
CON1.W530.9 WALLS AND COLUMNS ............................................................................... 53
CON1.W540.9 EXPOSING AGGREGATE .............................................................................. 53
CON1.W550.9 FOOTINGS AND PILE CAPS PREPARED BY OTHERS ............................. 53
CON1.W560.9 PLACING ADJACENT CONCRETE .............................................................. 53
CON1.W570.9 INTERRUPTED POURS.................................................................................. 53
CON1.W580.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS FOR CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY
AND PAVED AREA ........................................................................................ 53
COMPACTION ................................................................................................................................ 53
CON1.W610.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 53
CON1.W620.9 VIBRATING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................. 54
CON1.W630.9 USING VIBRATORS ....................................................................................... 54
CON1.W640.9 NEW CONCRETE............................................................................................ 54
CON1.W650.9 COMPACTING NO-FINES CONCRETE ....................................................... 54
PUMPING CONCRETE.................................................................................................................. 54
CON1.W710.9 CM'S APPROVAL ........................................................................................... 54
CON1.W720.9 PUMPING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................. 54
CON1.W730.9 PIPELINES ....................................................................................................... 54
CON1.W740.9 LUBRICATING PIPELINES ........................................................................... 54
PLACING CONCRETE UNDER WATER ................................................................................... 55
CON1.W810.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 55
CON1.W820.9 STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 55
CON1.W830.9 TREMIES.......................................................................................................... 55
CON1.W840.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 55
CON1.W850.9 DEALING WITH BLOCKAGES ..................................................................... 55
CON1.W860.9 SURCHARGE AND CONTAMINATED CONCRETE .................................. 55

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LAYING HOLLOW BLOCK FOR SLABS .................................................................................. 55

CON1.W910.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 55
WATERTIGHT BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................... 55
CON1.W1010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 55
CON1.W1020.9 BLINDING LAYER ......................................................................................... 55
CON1.W1030.9 WATER/VAPOUR PROOF MEMBRANE ..................................................... 55
CON1.W1040.9 FORMWORK TIES .......................................................................................... 56
CON1.W1050.9 CONCRETE SUPPLY ...................................................................................... 56
CON1.W1060.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.............................................................................. 56
CON1.W1070.9 GROUND WATER .......................................................................................... 56
CON1.W1080.9 REMEDIAL WORK TO LEAKS ETC. ........................................................... 56
MASS CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS .................................................................................. 56
CON1.W1110.9 CONCRETE GRADE ....................................................................................... 56
CON1.W1120.9 ADDED STONES AND BOULDERS ............................................................. 56
CON1.W1130.9 WEEP HOLES .................................................................................................. 56
CON1.W1140.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL .......................................................................... 56
GROUND SLABS ............................................................................................................................. 56
CON1.W1210.9 LAYING UNDERLAYS TO SLABS LAID ON HARDCORE ....................... 56
CON1.W1220.9 BLINDING LAYER ......................................................................................... 56
KICKERS .......................................................................................................................................... 57
CON1.W1310.9 WALLS AND COLUMNS ............................................................................... 57
CURING ............................................................................................................................................ 57
CON1.W1410.9 METHODS OF CURING - GENERAL ........................................................... 57
CON1.W1420.9 CURING - METHOD A ................................................................................... 57
CON1.W1430.9 CURING - METHOD B ................................................................................... 57
CON1.W1440.9 CURING - METHOD C ................................................................................... 58
CON1.W1450.9 CURING - METHOD D ................................................................................... 58
CON1.W1460.9 CURING - METHOD E .................................................................................... 58
CON1.W1470.9 CURING - METHOD F .................................................................................... 58
CON1.W1480.9 PROTECTION OF NEW CONCRETE FROM THE WEATHER .................. 58
CON1.W1490.9 MINIMUM PERIODS OF PROTECTION FOR CONCRETE ........................ 58
CON1.W1500.9 TEMPORARY REMOVAL OF PROTECTION .............................................. 59
CON1.W1510.9 ENHANCED CURING CONTROL IN ROOF SLAB ..................................... 59
LOADING NEW CONCRETE STRUCTURES ........................................................................... 59
CON1.W1610.9 LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................. 59
WORKED FINISHES TO CONCRETE........................................................................................ 59
CON1.W1710.9 TYPES OF FINISH........................................................................................... 59
CON1.W1720.9 ADDED CEMENT OR WATER ...................................................................... 60
CON1.W1730.9 PROTECTION OF LIVING ROOM FLOORS ................................................ 60
APPLIED SURFACE FINISHES ................................................................................................... 60
CON1.W1810.9 HARDENING ................................................................................................... 60
CON1.W1820.9 SURFACE HARDENING ................................................................................ 60
CON1.W1830.9 METALLIC OR MINERAL TREATMENTS.................................................. 60
CRACK REPAIR ............................................................................................................................. 60
CON1.W1910.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 60
CON1.W1920.9 INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................ 60
CON1.W1930.9 METHOD STATEMENT ................................................................................. 60
CON1.W1940.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................ 60
CON1.W1950.9 PROCEDURE FOR CLASSIFICATION - TYPE OF MEMBER.................... 61
CON1.W1960.9 PROCEDURE FOR CLASSIFICATION - WIDTH OF CRACK .................... 61
CON1.W1970.9 PROCEDURE FOR CLASSIFICATION - DEPTH OF CRACK .................... 61
CON1.W1980.9 METHODS OF REMEDIAL REPAIR ............................................................. 61
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.W1990.9 REPAIR ACCORDING TO CLASSIFICATION ............................................ 62

CON1.W2000.N ASSESSMENT OF CUBE AND CORE TESTS RESULTS FOR
PROPOSED HIGHER GRADE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE ...................... 62
TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................................. 63
CON1.W2010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 63
TESTING ................................................................................................................................... 64
TRIALS OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ........................................................................... 64
CON1.T010.9 REQUIREMENT FOR TRIAL MIXES ........................................................... 64
CON1.T020.9 TIMING OF TRIALS ....................................................................................... 64
CON1.T030.9 PLANT AND LABORATORY TRIALS ......................................................... 64
CON1.T040.A PROCEDURE OF PLANT TRIALS FOR CONCRETE FROM
SINGLE BATCHING PLANT ......................................................................... 64
CON1.T045.9 PROCEDURE OF PLANT TRIALS FOR MIXING CONCRETES
FROM TWO BATCHING PLANTS WITH DIFFERENT CEMENT
SOURCES ......................................................................................................... 65
CON1.T050.9 PROCEDURE OF LABORATORY MIX TRIALS ......................................... 65
CON1.T070.9 STANDARD FOR APPROVAL OF PLANT TRIALS FOR
CONCRETE FROM SINGLE BATCHING PLANT ....................................... 65
CON1.T075.9 STANDARD FOR APPROVAL OF PLANT TRIALS FOR MIXING
CONCRETE FROM TWO BATCHING PLANTS WITH
DIFFERENT CEMENT SOURCES ................................................................. 66
CON1.T080.9 STANDARD FOR APPROVAL OF LABORATORY MIX TRIALS ............ 67
CON1.T085.9 PROVISIONAL APPROVAL OF PLANT AND LABORATORY
MIX TRIALS .................................................................................................... 67
CON1.T090.9 NON-COMPLIANCE ....................................................................................... 67
CON1.T100.9 VARIATIONS TO APPROVED MIXES ......................................................... 68
CON1.T110.9 PRACTICAL TESTS FOR SUITABILITY OF THE MIX .............................. 68
CON1.T120.9 CERTIFIED EVIDENCE OF MIX SUITABILITY ......................................... 68
SAMPLING AND TESTING GENERALLY ................................................................................ 68
CON1.T205.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 68
CON1.T210.9 DEFINITION OF "BATCH" ............................................................................ 68
CON1.T220.9 SAMPLES FOR TESTING BY DIRECT TESTING CONTRACTOR
(DTC) ................................................................................................................ 68
CON1.T230.9 TESTING PROGRAMME ............................................................................... 68
CON1.T240.9 SAMPLE SIZES ............................................................................................... 68
SAMPLING....................................................................................................................................... 69
CON1.T320.9 COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATES ............................................................ 69
CON1.T330.9 WATER FOR MAKING CONCRETE ............................................................ 69
CON1.T340.9 FRESH CONCRETE ........................................................................................ 70
CON1.T350.9 FACILITIES FOR SAMPLING FRESH CONCRETE .................................... 71
TESTS ON AGGREGATES ............................................................................................................ 71
CON1.T410.9 STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 71
CON1.T420.9 FURTHER ANALYSIS .................................................................................... 72
TESTS FOR WORKABILITY ....................................................................................................... 72
CON1.T510.9 STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 72
CON1.T520.9 ACCEPTANCE VALUES FOR APPROVED MIXES .................................... 73
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CUBES ....................................... 73
CON1.T610.9 STANDARD FOR CUBE TESTS .................................................................... 73
CON1.T620.9 SAMPLES FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ........................................ 74
CON1.T630.9 RESULTS FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES......................................... 74
CON1.T640.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ............. 75

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.T650.9 TABLE OF COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR DESIGNED

CONCRETE MIXES ........................................................................................ 75
CON1.T660.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ......................... 76
CON1.T670.9 FURTHER TESTS ON DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ............................. 76
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES....................................... 76
CON1.T710.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 76
CON1.T720.9 STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 76
CON1.T730.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF ROUTINE CORE TEST SAMPLES ..................... 77
CON1.T740.9 AGE OF CORE SAMPLES .............................................................................. 77
CON1.T750.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER CONCRETE CORE SAMPLES .............. 77
CON1.T760.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES.......... 78
CON1.T770.9 MAKING GOOD CORE HOLES .................................................................... 78
ADDITIONAL TESTS ..................................................................................................................... 78
CON1.T810.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 78
CON1.T820.9 CEMENT CONTENT TEST ............................................................................ 79
CON1.T830.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF CEMENT CONTENT TEST ................................. 79
CON1.T840.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES ........................................ 79
FAILURE TO MEET REQUIRED CRITERIA ........................................................................... 79
CON1.T910.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES ........................................ 79
TESTS FOR REPAIR MORTAR ................................................................................................... 79
CON1.T1010.9 SAMPLES FROM REPAIR MORTAR ........................................................... 79
TESTS ON GGBS ............................................................................................................................. 79
CON1.T1110.A PURCHASER TESTS ...................................................................................... 79
INVESTIGATION BY EXTENSIVE CORE TESTING .............................................................. 80
CON1.T1210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 80
CON1.T1220.9 INVESTIGATION AND REPORTS ................................................................ 80
CON1.T1230.9 INVESTIGATION PLAN SUBMISSION........................................................ 80
CON1.T1240.9 ASSESSMENT CRITERIA .............................................................................. 80
CON1.T1250.9 INVESTIGATION REPORT SUBMISSION ................................................... 81
CON1.T1260.9 RE-EXECUTION OF WORKS REPORT SUBMISSION ............................... 81
APPENDICES............................................................................................................................ 82
CON1.APPEND1.9 FORM A ........................................................................................................... 82
CON2 FORMWORK ........................................................................................... 83

DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................... 83
FORMWORK DESIGN GENERALLY ........................................................................................ 83
CON2.D010.9 LOADINGS ...................................................................................................... 83
CON2.D020.9 STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 83
CON2.D030.9 INCLINED SURFACES ................................................................................... 83
CON2.D040.9 DISMANTLING AND REMOVAL ................................................................. 83
CON2.D050.9 BRIDGE AND TRANSFER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION ..................... 83
CON2.D060.9 FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURAL WALLS IN DOMESTIC
BLOCKS ........................................................................................................... 83
FALSEWORK SPANNING PUBLIC HIGHWAYS..................................................................... 84
CON2.D110.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY ........................................................................... 84
CON2.D120.9 FALSEWORK SPANNING A PUBLIC HIGHWAY ...................................... 84
CON2.D130.9 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 84
SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................................................................. 84
CON2.D210.9 TIMING ............................................................................................................ 84
CON2.D220.9 FALSEWORK SPANNING A PUBLIC HIGHWAY ...................................... 84
CON2.D230.9 PLYWOOD SHEATHING ............................................................................... 84
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2.D240.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND SMALL PANEL METAL

FORMWORK FOR DOMESTIC BLOCK ....................................................... 84
CON2.D250.9 BRIDGE AND TRANSFER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION ..................... 85
CON2.D260.9 INSPECTION RECORDS ................................................................................ 85
DESIGN OF LARGE PANEL FORMWORK FOR DOMESTIC BLOCK ............................... 85
CON2.D310.9 GENERAL DEFINITION................................................................................. 85
CON2.D320.9 WALLS NOT EXCEEDING 7.5 M LONG...................................................... 85
CON2.D330.9 WALLS EXCEEDING 7.5 M LONG WITHOUT OPENINGS....................... 86
CON2.D340.9 WALLS EXCEEDING 7.5 M LONG WITH OPENINGS ............................... 86
CON2.D350.9 JUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 86
CON2.D360.9 USE OF OTHER TYPES OF FORMWORK ................................................... 86
CON2.D370.9 JOINTS IN SHEATHING ................................................................................ 86
CON2.D380.9 BACKING STRUCTURE ................................................................................ 86
CON2.D390.9 SEALING BASE OF WALLFORMS .............................................................. 86
CON2.D400.9 TOP BRACING ................................................................................................ 86
CON2.D410.9 SLAB EDGES ................................................................................................... 86
CON2.D420.9 ACCESS WALKWAY ..................................................................................... 86
CON2.D430.9 OTHER TYPES OF FORMWORK - ACCESS WALKWAY ......................... 87
CON2.D440.9 PATENT WALLFORM SYSTEMS ................................................................. 87
CON2.D450.9 ALTERNATIVE GROUT SEALING SYSTEMS ........................................... 87
DESIGN OF SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK FOR DOMESTIC BLOCK ............... 87
CON2.D510.9 GENERAL DEFINITION................................................................................. 87
CON2.D520.9 JUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 87
CON2.D530.9 JOINTS IN SHEATHING ................................................................................ 87
CON2.D540.9 BACKING STRUCTURE ................................................................................ 87
CON2.D550.9 SEALING BASE OF WALLFORMS .............................................................. 87
CON2.D560.9 TOP BRACING ................................................................................................ 87
CON2.D570.9 SLAB EDGES ................................................................................................... 88
CON2.D580.9 ACCESS WALKWAY ..................................................................................... 88
CON2.D590.9 PATENT WALLFORM SYSTEMS ................................................................. 88
CON2.D600.9 ALTERNATIVE GROUT SEALING SYSTEMS ........................................... 88
MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 89
DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 89
CON2.M010.9 FORMWORK OR FORM ................................................................................ 89
CON2.M020.9 FALSEWORK .................................................................................................. 89
CON2.M030.9 TRADITIONAL FORMWORK ....................................................................... 89
CON2.M040.9 PERMANENT OR LEFT IN FORMWORK .................................................... 89
CON2.M050.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK ....................................................................... 89
CON2.M060.9 SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK ........................................................ 89
CON2.M080.9 TIMBER FOR FORMWORK .......................................................................... 89
SHEATHING .................................................................................................................................... 89
CON2.M110.9 SUITABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................ 89
ANCILLARY MATERIALS ........................................................................................................... 89
CON2.M210.9 RELEASE AGENT ........................................................................................... 89
CON2.M220.9 SURFACE RETARDERS................................................................................. 89
CON2.M230.9 HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCKS FOR SLABS ............................................. 89
CON2.M240.9 PRECAST KICKER BLOCKS ......................................................................... 90
MATERIAL FOR SEALING FORMWORK TIE HOLES ......................................................... 90
CON2.M250.9 MORTAR.......................................................................................................... 90
CON2.M260.9 POLYURETHANE FOAM .............................................................................. 90
WORKMANSHIP ..................................................................................................................... 91
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
HANDLING AND STORAGE ........................................................................................................ 91

CON2.W010.9 FORMWORK ................................................................................................... 91
CON2.W020.9 ANCILLARY MATERIALS ............................................................................ 91
SAFETY AND PROTECTION ....................................................................................................... 91
CON2.W110.9 PERIMETER WALKWAY .............................................................................. 91
ERECTING FORMWORK ............................................................................................................. 91
CON2.W210.9 CHECKING AND INSPECTION .................................................................... 91
CON2.W220.9 KICKERS.......................................................................................................... 91
CON2.W230.9 JOINTS ............................................................................................................. 92
CON2.W240.9 TEMPORARY ACCESS .................................................................................. 92
CON2.W250.9 PIPE SLEEVES ETC ........................................................................................ 92
CON2.W260.9 FORMWORK FIXINGS GENERALLY .......................................................... 92
CON2.W270.9 FORMWORK TIES .......................................................................................... 92
CON2.W280.9 TIES IN STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS WITH WATERTIGHT
FUNCTION ...................................................................................................... 92
CON2.W290.9 FORMING CONSTRUCTION JOINTS .......................................................... 92
CON2.W300.9 LAYING HOLLOW BLOCKS FOR SLABS .................................................. 92
CON2.W310.9 JOINTS IN LARGE PANEL FORMWORK .................................................... 92
CON2.W315.9 JOINTS IN SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK ..................................... 93
CON2.W320.9 ARRISES .......................................................................................................... 93
KICKERS FOR LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND SMALL PANEL METAL
FORMWORK ................................................................................................................................... 93
CON2.W410.9 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................. 93
CON2.W420.9 PROVISION OF KICKERS ............................................................................. 93
CON2.W430.9 KICKERS FOR EXTERNAL WALLS ............................................................ 93
CON2.W440.9 KICKERS FOR INTERNAL WALLS ............................................................. 93
WORK BELOW GROUND ............................................................................................................ 94
CON2.W510.9 FORMING AGAINST EXCAVATION FACES ............................................. 94
STRIKING FORMWORK .............................................................................................................. 94
CON2.W610.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 94
CON2.W620.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................ 94
CON2.W630.9 MINIMUM PERIODS BEFORE STRIKING .................................................. 94
CON2.W640.9 STRIKING AT LOW TEMPERATURE .......................................................... 94
CON2.W650.9 STRIKING LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND SMALL PANEL
METAL FORMWORK .................................................................................... 94
CON2.W660.9 BACK PROPPING SOFFITS ........................................................................... 95
CON2.W670.9 LOADING THE STRUCTURE........................................................................ 95
TRIAL PANELS ............................................................................................................................... 95
CON2.W710.9 SAMPLES ......................................................................................................... 95
CON2.W720.9 CONSTRUCTION OF TRIAL PANEL ........................................................... 95
CON2.W730.9 SUB-STANDARD TRIALS ............................................................................. 95
STANDARD PANEL........................................................................................................................ 95
CON2.W810.9 INSITU STANDARD PANEL ......................................................................... 95
FORMED FINISHES FOR CONCRETE ...................................................................................... 96
CON2.W910.9 TYPE A : ROUGH BOARD FINISH ............................................................... 96
CON2.W920.9 TYPE B : FAIR-FACED FINISH ..................................................................... 96
MAINTENANCE OF FORMWORK ............................................................................................. 96
CON2.W1010.9 PREPARATION FOR RE-USE........................................................................ 96
CON2.W1020.9 DAMAGED AND DETERIORATED FORMWORK ..................................... 96
CON2.W1030.9 RUBBER SEALS.............................................................................................. 96
CON2.W1040.9 RE-USE OF TIMBER FORMWORK .............................................................. 96

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SEALING FORMWORK TIE HOLES ......................................................................................... 97

CON2.W1110.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 97
CON2.W1120.9 SEALING THE TIE HOLES ............................................................................ 97
TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................................. 97
CON2.W1210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 97
TESTING ................................................................................................................................... 99
TESTING OF MORTAR FOR SEALING FORMWORK TIE HOLES.................................... 99
CON2.T110.9 LABORATORY TESTING .............................................................................. 99
CON2.T120.9 TESTING FOR CHARACTERISTICS OF MORTAR .................................... 99
CON2.T130.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER TEST ........................................................ 99
CON2.T140.9 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST ON SITE ............................................................ 99
CON2.T150.9 FAILURE OF WATERTIGHTNESS TEST................................................... 100
CON2.T160.9 ADDITIONAL TESTS UPON FAILURE OF WATERTIGHTNESS
TEST ............................................................................................................... 100
CON2.T170.9 MAKE GOOD FORMWORK TIE HOLES ................................................... 100
CON2.T180.9 BLOWHOLES ................................................................................................ 101
CON3 REINFORCEMENT ...............................................................................102

MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 102
REINFORCEMENT GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 102
CON3.M010.9 STOCKIST'S OR SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATION ....................................... 102
CON3.M020.9 VERIFICATION OF SOURCE ...................................................................... 102
CON3.M030.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR FABRIC
REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................... 102
CON3.M035.9 PRODUCT CONFORMITY CERTIFICATION SCHEME FOR
FABRIC REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................ 102
CON3.M040.9 COLOUR CODE SYSTEM OF REINFORCEMENT ................................... 103
REINFORCEMENT ...................................................................................................................... 103
CON3.M110.9 BAR REINFORCEMENT .............................................................................. 103
CON3.M130.9 FABRIC REINFORCEMENT ........................................................................ 103
CON3.M140.9 REPLACING FABRIC REINFORCEMENT TO BAR
REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................... 103
ANCILLARY MATERIALS ......................................................................................................... 103
CON3.M210.9 COVER SPACERS ......................................................................................... 103
CON3.M220.9 CHAIRS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................ 104
CON3.M230.9 REINFORCEMENT TYING WIRE ............................................................... 104
EPOXY COATED REINFORCEMENT ..................................................................................... 104
CON3.M250.9 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENT AND TEST RESULTS ....................... 104
CON3.M260.9 EPOXY COATING TO REINFORCEMENT ................................................ 104
CON3.M270.9 CHAIRS, SUPPORTS AND SPACERS......................................................... 105
CON3.M280.9 TYING WIRE ................................................................................................. 105
MECHANICAL COUPLER.......................................................................................................... 105
CON3.M310.9 TYPE OF MECHANICAL COUPLER .......................................................... 105
CON3.M320.9 SUBMISSION ................................................................................................ 105
CON3.M330.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR MECHANICAL
COUPLER ...................................................................................................... 105
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 106

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 106
CON3.W010.9 STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT .............................................................. 106
CON3.W015.9 STORAGE OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT IN
FACTORY/STOCKYARD ............................................................................. 106
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON3.W020.9 SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCING STEEL ................................. 106

CON3.W030.9 CONTAMINATED OR HEAVILY RUSTED REINFORCEMENT ............. 106
CON3.W040.9 PROTECTION OF EXPOSED REINFORCEMENT ..................................... 106
CON3.W050.9 COLOUR MARKINGS OF REINFORCEMENT BY STOCKISTS
OR SUPPLIERS PRIOR TO DELIVERY ...................................................... 106
FIXING REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 107
CON3.W110.9 CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT ........................................ 107
CON3.W120.9 COLD BENDING ........................................................................................... 107
CON3.W130.9 SECURING REINFORCEMENT .................................................................. 107
CON3.W140.9 LOCATING REINFORCEMENT .................................................................. 107
CON3.W150.9 WELDING ...................................................................................................... 107
CON3.W160.9 CONCRETE COVER ..................................................................................... 107
CON3.W170.9 COMPLIANCE WITH DRAWINGS ............................................................. 107
CON3.W180.9 CM'S INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 108
TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................... 108
CON3.W210.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 108
CON3.W220.9 HANDLING OF REINFORCEMENT ........................................................... 108
CON3.W230.9 STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT .............................................................. 108
CON3.W240.9 CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT ........................................ 108
CON3.W250.9 REPAIRS TO EPOXY COATING ON SITE ................................................. 108
CON3.W310.9 QUALIFIED SUPERVISION......................................................................... 109
CON3.W320.9 INSPECTION LOG BOOK ............................................................................ 109
TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 110

DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 110
CON3.T010.9 BATCH OF BAR REINFORCEMENT .......................................................... 110
CON3.T020.9 BATCH AND LOT OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT ................................. 110
CON3.T025.9 BATCH OF MECHANICAL COUPLER ...................................................... 110
CON3.T030.9 TESTING BY DIRECT TESTING CONTRACTOR (DTC) AND
HOUSING DEPARTMENT'S MATERIALS TESTING
LABORATORY (HDMTL) ............................................................................ 110
CON3.T040.9 TESTING PROGRAMME ............................................................................. 110
PURCHASERS TESTING ............................................................................................................ 110
CON3.T110.9 RATE OF SAMPLING ................................................................................... 110
CON3.T120.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................. 111
CON3.T130.9 TESTING BY HDMTL .................................................................................. 111
CON3.T140.9 ADDITIONAL SAMPLES OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT
DELIVERED TO SITE................................................................................... 111
TESTING BY DTC......................................................................................................................... 111
CON3.T210.9 SCOPE AND NUMBER OF TESTS .............................................................. 111
CON3.T220.9 METHODS OF TESTING .............................................................................. 112
COMPLIANCE .............................................................................................................................. 112
CON3.T310.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA - BAR REINFORCEMENT .............................. 112
CON3.T320.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA - FABRIC REINFORCEMENT........................ 112
RE-TESTS ....................................................................................................................................... 112
CON3.T410.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR BAR REINFORCEMENT ...................................... 112
CON3.T420.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR FABRIC REINFORCEMENT ................................ 113
CON3.T430.9 STANDARD FOR REJECTION .................................................................... 113

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

CON3.T440.9 ADDITIONAL TEST SPECIMENS FOR EPOXY COATING TEST
FOR EACH BATCH....................................................................................... 113
CON3.T450.9 TESTING OF THE EPOXY COATING ........................................................ 113
CON3.T460.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR EPOXY COATINGS TO
REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................... 114
CON3.T470.9 NON-COMPLIANCE FOR THICKNESS, ADHESION AND
CONTINUITY TESTS ................................................................................... 114
CON3.T480.9 TIME REQUIRED FOR TESTING OF THE EPOXY COATED
REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................... 114
CON3.T520.9 METHOD OF TESTING ................................................................................ 115
CON3.T530.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA ........................................................................... 115
CON3.T540.9 TIME REQUIRED FOR TESTING................................................................ 115
CON4 PRECAST CONCRETE ........................................................................117

DESIGN .................................................................................................................................... 117
DESIGN PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................. 117
CON4.D010.9 PRECAST CONCRETE ................................................................................. 117
CON4.D020.9 STRUCTURAL JOINT DESIGN ................................................................... 117
CON4.D030.9 STEEL LIFTING FRAMES ........................................................................... 117
CON4.D040.9 LIFTING POINTS .......................................................................................... 117
DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS ......................................................................................... 117
CON4.D110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 117
DESIGN SUBMISSIONS............................................................................................................... 117
CON4.D210.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 117
CON4.D220.9 PROGRAMME FOR SUBMISSIONS ........................................................... 117
CON4.D230.9 SHOP DRAWINGS ........................................................................................ 117
JOINTS ............................................................................................................................................ 118
CON4.D310.9 JOINTS ........................................................................................................... 118
CON4.D320.9 GASKETS ....................................................................................................... 118
CON4.D330.9 MORTAR STOPS........................................................................................... 118
WEATHERPROOF JOINTS ........................................................................................................ 118
CON4.D410.9 JOINT DESIGN .............................................................................................. 118
CON4.D420.9 TYPES OF JOINT .......................................................................................... 118
CON4.D430.9 DESIGN WIDTH OF JOINTS ....................................................................... 118
CON4.D440.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY .......................................................... 118
MODIFICATIONS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE .......................................................... 118
CON4.D520.9 COMPLIANCE WITH GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS .................... 118
CON4.D530.9 REINFORCEMENT CHANGES.................................................................... 118
MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 119

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 119
CON4.M010.9 SUBSTITUTION OF NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ........................... 119
CON4.M020.9 PRECAST CONCRETE ................................................................................. 119
CON4.M030.9 PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ..................................................... 119
CON4.M040.9 OFF-SITE MANUFACTURE ........................................................................ 119
SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................... 119
CON4.M110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 119
CON4.M120.9 REINFORCEMENT CHANGES.................................................................... 119
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE GRADE .................................................................................................................... 119

CON4.M210.9 CONCRETE FOR LINTELS .......................................................................... 119
CON4.M220.9 CONCRETE FOR STAIRS ............................................................................ 120
CON4.M222.9 CONCRETE FOR REFUSE CHUTE ............................................................. 120
NON-SHRINK GROUT FOR PRECAST STAIRS .................................................................... 120
CON4.M230.9 APPROVED MIX ........................................................................................... 120
CON4.M240.9 CONSTITUENT MATERIALS OF NON-SHRINK GROUT ....................... 120
CON4.M250.9 WATER/POWDER RATIO OR WATER CONTENT .................................. 120
CON4.M260.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT ................................................................................. 120
CON4.M270.9 CONCRETE WITH NON-SHRINK ADDITIVES ........................................ 120
WEATHER PROOF JOINTS ....................................................................................................... 120
CON4.M310.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 120
CON4.M320.9 SEALANTS .................................................................................................... 121
CON4.M330.9 MORTAR STOP BACKING RODS .............................................................. 121
CON4.M340.9 DETAILS OF WEATHERPROOFING .......................................................... 121
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 122

CASTING PRECAST UNITS ....................................................................................................... 122
CON4.W005.9 QUALITY SYSTEMS AND QUALIFIED SUPERVISION ......................... 122
CON4.W010.9 PLACING CONCRETE ................................................................................. 122
CASTING LINTELS ...................................................................................................................... 122
CON4.W110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 122
CON4.W120.9 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT................................................................... 122
CON4.W130.9 BEARING ALLOWANCE ............................................................................. 122
CASTING STAIRS ......................................................................................................................... 122
CON4.W210.9 CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................... 122
CON4.W220.9 FORMWORK ................................................................................................. 122
CURING .......................................................................................................................................... 122
CON4.W310.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 122
CON4.W320.9 OTHER CURING METHODS ....................................................................... 123
STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING OF UNITS ................................................ 123
CON4.W410.9 STRENGTH OF UNITS ................................................................................. 123
CON4.W420.9 STORING UNITS........................................................................................... 123
CON4.W430.9 DAMAGED UNITS........................................................................................ 123
ERECTING PRECAST UNITS .................................................................................................... 123
CON4.W510.9 STANDARD AND SEQUENCE.................................................................... 123
CON4.W520.9 TEMPORARY BRACING ............................................................................. 123
CON4.W530.9 DOWEL FIXINGS FOR PRECAST STAIRS ................................................ 123
CON4.W540.9 BEDDING AND JOINTING PRECAST STAIRS ......................................... 123
ACCURACY AND TOLERANCES ............................................................................................. 123
CON4.W610.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 123
IDENTIFICATION FOR PRECAST UNITS .............................................................................. 124
CON4.W710.9 IDENTIFICATIONS AND RECORDS .......................................................... 124
DEFECTS ........................................................................................................................................ 124
CON4.W810.9 MINOR CHIPPING ........................................................................................ 124
CON4.W820.9 OTHER REPAIRS .......................................................................................... 124
TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 125

SAMPLING AND TESTING ........................................................................................................ 125
CON4.T010.9 FULL SCALE MOCK UP .............................................................................. 125
CON4.T020.9 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST .......................................................................... 125
CON4.T030.9 SAMPLING FOR WATERTIGHTNESS TEST ............................................ 125

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON4.T040.9 AGREED TEST PROCEDURES ................................................................... 125

CON4.T050.9 CRITERIA FOR FAILURE ............................................................................ 125
CON4.T060.9 REMEDIAL ACTION .................................................................................... 125
CON4.T070.9 TESTING OF NON-SHRINK GROUT.......................................................... 125
CON4.T080.9 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST FOR NON-SHRINK GROUT ............ 126
TESTING FIXINGS ....................................................................................................................... 126
CON4.T110.9 TENSILE TESTING ....................................................................................... 126
CON4.T120.9 SHEAR TESTING .......................................................................................... 126
CON5 PRECAST FACADE UNITS (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) .............127

DESIGN .................................................................................................................................... 127
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 127
CON5.D010.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS .............. 127
CON5.D020.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 127
SCOPE OF THE WORK ............................................................................................................... 127
CON5.D110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 127
CON5.D120.9 INSITU CONCRETE ELEMENTS INCLUDED ........................................... 128
CON5.D130.9 SCOPE OF THE DESIGN .............................................................................. 128
DESIGN PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................. 128
CON5.D210.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 128
CON5.D220.9 MINIMUM THICKNESSES .......................................................................... 128
CON5.D230.9 OVERHANG AT BASE OF UNITS .............................................................. 128
CON5.D240.9 WINDOW OPENINGS .................................................................................. 128
CON5.D250.9 LOADINGS .................................................................................................... 128
CON5.D260.9 MINIMUM CONCRETE GRADE ................................................................. 129
CON5.D270.9 CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCEMENT ............................................. 129
CON5.D280.9 LIFTING AND LOCATING DEVICES ........................................................ 129
CON5.D290.9 LOCATION POINTS ..................................................................................... 129
CON5.D300.9 PERMANENT CONNECTIONS ................................................................... 129
CON5.D310.9 ERECTION RESTRAINTS ............................................................................ 129
CON5.D320.9 ADJUSTMENT DEVICES ............................................................................. 129
CON5.D330.9 STRUCTURAL SUPPORT ............................................................................ 130
INSITU CONNECTION DESIGN ................................................................................................ 130
CON5.D410.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 130
CON5.D420.9 REINFORCEMENT, SHEAR CONNECTORS ETC .................................... 130
CON5.D430.9 VERTICAL CONNECTIONS ........................................................................ 130
CON5.D440.9 HORIZONTAL CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 130
MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................... 130
CON5.D510.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 130
CON5.D520.9 LOAD BEARING FIXINGS .......................................................................... 130
CON5.D530.9 TYING BACK FIXINGS................................................................................ 131
CON5.D540.9 LOCATION FIXINGS .................................................................................... 131
CON5.D550.9 TYPES OF ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE............................................ 131
CON5.D560.9 LINKS BETWEEN ANCHORAGES ............................................................. 131
CON5.D570.9 CONCEALMENT OF FIXINGS .................................................................... 131
CON5.D580.9 RESISTANCE TO CORROSION .................................................................. 131
WEATHERPROOF JOINTS ........................................................................................................ 131
CON5.D610.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 131
CON5.D640.9 COMBINATIONS OF JOINT TYPE AND STRUCTURAL
CONNECTIONS............................................................................................. 132
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

MODIFICATIONS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE .......................................................... 132
CON5.D720.9 TYPES OF MODIFICATION ........................................................................ 132
CON5.D730.9 COMPLIANCE WITH GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS .................... 132
CON5.D740.9 WIND LOADINGS ........................................................................................ 132
SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................... 132
CON5.D810.9 TENDER DESIGN PROPOSAL .................................................................... 132
CON5.D820.9 REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ................................................ 132
CON5.D860.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT ............................................... 133
CON5.D870.9 METHOD OF FIXING WINDOWS .............................................................. 133
CON5.D880.9 DETAILS OF WEATHERPROOFING .......................................................... 133
CON5.D890.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME ............................................................. 133
CON5.D900.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES ........................................................ 133
CON5.D910.9 PROGRAMMES ............................................................................................. 134
CON5.D920.9 LOADING OF INSITU STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ................................... 134
SUBMISSIONS FOR PRECASTING .......................................................................................... 134
CON5.D1010.9 PRELIMINARY DESIGN .............................................................................. 134
CON5.D1020.9 METHOD STATEMENTS ............................................................................. 134
CON5.D1030.9 CASTING FACILITIES ................................................................................. 134
CON5.D1040.9 PRELIMINARY PROGRAMME ................................................................... 134
MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 135

NON-SHRINK GROUT AND CONCRETE ............................................................................... 135
CON5.M010.9 APPROVED MIX ........................................................................................... 135
CON5.M020.9 CONSTITUENT MATERIALS OF NON-SHRINK GROUT ....................... 135
CON5.M030.9 WATER/POWDER RATIO OR WATER CONTENT .................................. 135
CON5.M040.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT ................................................................................. 135
CON5.M050.9 CONCRETE WITH NON-SHRINK ADDITIVES ........................................ 135
WEATHERPROOFING ................................................................................................................ 135
CON5.M110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 135
CON5.M120.9 SEALANTS .................................................................................................... 136
CON5.M130.9 MORTAR STOP BACKING RODS .............................................................. 136
CONDUIT SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 136
CON5.M210.9 STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 136
CON5.M220.9 COLOUR ........................................................................................................ 136
CON5.M230.9 FLAME RESISTANCE .................................................................................. 136
CON5.M240.9 TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION .......................................................... 136
RIGID PLAIN PVC CONDUITS.................................................................................................. 136
CON5.M310.9 CONSTRUCTION AND SIZE ....................................................................... 136
CON5.M320.9 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES ...................................................................... 136
CON5.M330.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUITS ............................. 136
PVC CONDUIT FITTINGS .......................................................................................................... 137
CON5.M410.9 CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................... 137
CON5.M420.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT FITTINGS............. 137
PVC CIRCULAR CONDUIT BOXES, PVC BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
AND PVC ADAPTABLE BOXES ................................................................................................ 137
CON5.M510.9 CONSTRUCTION AND DIMENSIONS ....................................................... 137
CON5.M530.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT BOXES ................. 138

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 139

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 139
CON5.W010.9 CASTING YARD ........................................................................................... 139
CON5.W015.A MANAGEMENT SCHEMES FOR OFF-SITE CASTING ............................ 140
CON5.W020.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR OFF-SITE CASTING ................ 140
CON5.W025.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR ON-SITE CASTING ................................... 140
CON5.W030.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME ............................................................. 140
CON5.W035.9 PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AUDITING
CONSULTANT .............................................................................................. 140
CON5.W050.9 RECTIFICATION TO QUALITY NON-COMPLIANCE ............................. 141
CON5.W060.9 EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................. 141
CON5.W070.9 USE OF CASTING YARD............................................................................. 142
CON5.W080.9 SUBMISSION AND PILOT PRODUCTION RUN BEFORE
APPROVAL.................................................................................................... 142
CON5.W090.9 FIRST JOINT INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY ........... 143
PRODUCING PRECAST UNITS ................................................................................................. 143
CON5.W110.9 MOULDS ........................................................................................................ 143
CON5.W120.9 DEFECTIVE MOULDS ................................................................................. 143
CON5.W130.9 HORIZONTAL CASTING ............................................................................. 143
CON5.W140.9 USE OF RELEASE AGENTS ........................................................................ 143
CON5.W150.9 CONCRETING, COMPACTION AND CURING GENERALLY ................ 143
CON5.W160.9 EXTERNAL VIBRATORS ............................................................................ 143
CON5.W170.9 CURING BY APPLICATION OF HEAT ...................................................... 143
CON5.W180.9 DEMOULDING GENERALLY ..................................................................... 144
CON5.W190.9 CONCRETE STRENGTH BEFORE DEMOULDING .................................. 144
CON5.W200.9 IDENTIFICATION AND RECORDS ............................................................ 144
CON5.W210.9 HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................... 144
CON5.W220.9 REQUIREMENTS OF OTHER TRADES AND COMPONENTS ................ 144
CON5.W230.9 WINDOWS FIXING TO FACADE UNITS................................................... 144
SURFACE FINISHES .................................................................................................................... 145
CON5.W310.9 EXTERNAL FACE ........................................................................................ 145
CON5.W320.9 EDGES AND OVERHANG SOFFIT ............................................................. 145
CON5.W330.9 INTERNAL FACE - LIVING / DINING / BEDROOMS .............................. 145
CON5.W340.9 INTERNAL FACE - BATHROOM................................................................ 145
CON5.W345.9 INTERNAL FACE - KITCHEN ..................................................................... 145
CON5.W350.9 INTERNAL FACE - UTILITY AREA ........................................................... 145
CON5.W410.9 MANUFACTURING AND ERECTION TOLERANCES ............................. 145
CON5.W420.9 CHECKING TOLERANCES ......................................................................... 145
CON5.W430.9 DEFECTIVE UNITS ...................................................................................... 146
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE............................................................... 146
CON5.W510.9 LIFTING FRAME .......................................................................................... 146
CON5.W520.9 LIFTING INSERTS AND SUPPORTS .......................................................... 146
CON5.W522.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS FOR TRANSPORTATION AND
STORAGE ...................................................................................................... 146
CON5.W530.9 INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 146
CON5.W540.9 LIFTING ......................................................................................................... 146
CON5.W550.9 LIFTING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................... 146
CON5.W570.9 TRANSPORTING FROM CASTING YARD ................................................ 147
CON5.W580.9 LOADING AND OFF-LOADING ................................................................. 147
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.W590.9 TRANSPORT VEHICLES ............................................................................. 147

ERECTING UNITS ........................................................................................................................ 147
CON5.W610.9 PROGRAMME ............................................................................................... 147
CON5.W620.9 SITE RECORDS ............................................................................................. 147
CON5.W640.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES ........................................................ 147
CON5.W650.9 LIFTING UNITS INTO POSITION ............................................................... 148
CON5.W660.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORT .............................................................................. 148
CON5.W670.9 UNITS DAMAGED ON TRANSPORTATION, LIFTING OR
ERECTION ..................................................................................................... 148
CON5.W680.9 APPROVAL FOR PERMANENT FIXING ................................................... 148
CON5.W690.9 PREPARING AND PLACING GROUTING MATERIALS ......................... 148
DEFECTS ........................................................................................................................................ 149
CON5.W710.9 MINOR CHIPPING ........................................................................................ 149
CON5.W720.9 OTHER REPAIRS .......................................................................................... 149
CON5.W730.9 REJECTED PANELS ..................................................................................... 149
JOINTS ............................................................................................................................................ 149
CON5.W810.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 149
CON5.W820.9 GASKETS ....................................................................................................... 149
CON5.W830.9 MORTAR STOPS........................................................................................... 149
CON5.W840.9 JOINT WIDTH ............................................................................................... 149
CONDUIT SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 149
CON5.W910.9 APPLICATION............................................................................................... 149
CON5.W920.9 SHOP DRAWINGS PREPARATION ............................................................ 149
CON5.W930.9 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL ................................................................. 149
CON5.W940.9 COMPLETION CERTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT
SYSTEM INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 150
CONDUIT AND WIRING INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 150
CON5.W1010.9 CONDUIT BENDS ......................................................................................... 150
CON5.W1020.9 BENDING, JOINTING AND TERMINATING OF CONDUITS ................. 150
TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 151

SAMPLING AND TESTING GENERALLY .............................................................................. 151
CON5.T010.9 RECORDS ...................................................................................................... 151
CON5.T020.9 WITNESSING SAMPLING AND TESTING BY THE CM ......................... 151
CON5.T030.9 TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY .............................................. 151
CON5.T040.9 INSTALLATION OF RFID TAG IN CONCRETE CUBE FOR CUBE
COMPRESSION TEST TO BE CARRIED OUT BY DTC OR
HDMTL .......................................................................................................... 151
TRIAL UNITS ................................................................................................................................ 152
CON5.T110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 152
CON5.T120.9 ADDITIONAL TRIAL UNITS....................................................................... 152
CON5.T130.9 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL .................................................................. 152
TESTS ON WORKABILITY ........................................................................................................ 152
CON5.T131.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 152
CON5.T132.9 ACCEPTANCE VALUES FOR APPROVED CONCRETE MIXES ............ 152
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CUBES ..................................... 153
CON5.T210.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 153
CON5.T211.9 SAMPLES FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ...................................... 153
CON5.T212.9 RESULTS FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES....................................... 153
CON5.T213.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES........... 153

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.T214.9 TABLES OF COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT FOR DESIGNED

CONCRETE MIXES ...................................................................................... 153
CON5.T215.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ....................... 153
CON5.T216.9 FURTHER TESTS ON DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES ........................... 153
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY CORES FOR PRECAST
FACADES ....................................................................................................................................... 153
CON5.T221.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 153
CON5.T222.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 154
CON5.T223.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF EARLY CORE SAMPLES .................................. 154
CON5.T224.9 AGE OF EARLY CORE SAMPLES .............................................................. 154
CON5.T225.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY CORES ............... 154
CON5.T226.9 NON-COMPLIANCE AND FURTHER TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR PRECAST FACADES ............ 154
CON5.T227.9 MAKING GOOD CORE HOLES .................................................................. 155
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES..................................... 155
CON5.T230.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 155
CON5.T231.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 155
CON5.T232.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF CORE SAMPLES ................................................ 155
CON5.T233.9 AGE OF CORE SAMPLES ............................................................................ 155
CON5.T234.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER CONCRETE CORE SAMPLES ............ 155
CON5.T235.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES........ 155
CON5.T240.9 NON-COMPLIANCE AND FURTHER TESTING....................................... 155
CON5.T245.9 MAKE GOOD CORE HOLES ....................................................................... 155
CON5.T250.9 TESTING ON NON-SHRINK GROUT ......................................................... 155
CON5.T260.9 TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF GROUT CUBES.................. 155
CON5.T280.9 COUTINHO RING TEST ............................................................................... 155
SCHMIDT HAMMER TESTS ...................................................................................................... 156
CON5.T290.9 TESTING FREQUENCY ............................................................................... 156
LABORATORY WATERTIGHTNESS TEST ........................................................................... 156
CON5.T310.9 NATURE AND PURPOSE OF TEST ............................................................ 156
CON5.T320.9 EXEMPTION FROM TEST ........................................................................... 156
CON5.T330.9 TEST PROCEDURE ...................................................................................... 156
CON5.T340.9 JOINT PERFORMANCE ............................................................................... 157
SITE WATERTIGHTNESS TESTS............................................................................................. 157
CON5.T410.9 TESTING TRIAL UNIT ................................................................................. 157
CON5.T420.9 TESTING INSTALLED JOINTS ................................................................... 157
CON5.T440.9 WITNESSES TO TEST .................................................................................. 157
CON5.T450.9 FAILURE OF UNITS ..................................................................................... 158
CON5.T460.9 REMEDIAL WORK TO UNITS FOR RE-TEST AND ADDITIONAL
TESTING ........................................................................................................ 158
TESTING FIXINGS ....................................................................................................................... 158
CON5.T510.9 TENSILE TESTING ....................................................................................... 158
CON5.T520.9 SHEAR TESTING .......................................................................................... 158
SURVEILLANCE INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 158
CON5.T710.9 JOINT INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY AND
BREAKING UP INSPECTION ...................................................................... 158
LIFTING ANCHOR....................................................................................................................... 159
CON5.T810.9 DEFINITION OF BATCH.............................................................................. 159
CON5.T820.9 TYPE AND LOAD CAPACITY .................................................................... 159
CON5.T840.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERION......................................................................... 159
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.T850.9 SUBMISSION ................................................................................................ 159
CON6 MOVEMENT JOINTS ...........................................................................161

MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 161
JOINT FILLERS ............................................................................................................................ 161
CON6.M010.9 COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER................................................................. 161
CON6.M020.9 INORGANIC COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLERS, BOND
BREAKERS AND BACKUP MATERIALS ................................................. 161
SEALANTS ..................................................................................................................................... 161
CON6.M110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 161
WATER STOPS ............................................................................................................................. 161
CON6.M210.9 WATER STOPS.............................................................................................. 161
PROPRIETARY EXPANSION JOINTS ..................................................................................... 161
CON6.M310.9 MECHANICAL EXPANSION JOINTS ........................................................ 161
CON6.M410.9 ADHESIVE FOR JOINT FILLER.................................................................. 161
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 162

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 162
CON6.W010.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................. 162
CON6.W020.9 APPLYING SEALANTS ................................................................................ 162
MOVEMENT JOINTS .................................................................................................................. 162
CON6.W110.9 FIXING JOINT FILLER ................................................................................. 162
CON6.W120.9 PLACING CONCRETE ................................................................................. 162
WATER STOPS ............................................................................................................................. 162
CON6.W210.9 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................ 162
CON6.W220.9 JOINTING ...................................................................................................... 162
CON6.W230.9 CONCRETING ............................................................................................... 162
CON7 PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)163

DESIGN .................................................................................................................................... 163
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 163
CON7.D010.9 SCOPE OF THE WORK ................................................................................ 163
SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................... 163
CON7.D110.9 LOADING OF INSITU STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ................................... 163
PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST BALCONY - DESIGN PARAMETERS ............................ 163
CON7.D210.9 ERECTION RESTRAINTS ............................................................................ 163
CON7.D220.9 ADJUSTMENT DEVICES ............................................................................. 163
MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 165

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 165
CON7.M010.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS .............. 165
PRECAST FACADE, PRECAST BALCONY, SEMI-PRECAST SLAB, PRECAST
STRUCTURAL WALL AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - CONDUIT SYSTEM ........ 165
CON7.M110.9 STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 165
CON7.M120.9 COLOUR ........................................................................................................ 165
CON7.M130.9 FLAME RESISTANCE .................................................................................. 165
CON7.M140.9 TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION .......................................................... 165

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

STRUCTURAL WALL AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - RIGID PLAIN PVC
CONDUITS ..................................................................................................................................... 166
CON7.M210.9 CONSTRUCTION AND SIZE ....................................................................... 166
CON7.M230.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUITS ............................. 166
STRUCTURAL WALL AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - PVC CONDUIT
FITTINGS ....................................................................................................................................... 166
CON7.M310.9 CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................... 166
CON7.M320.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT FITTINGS............. 166
STRUCTURAL WALL AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - PVC CIRCULAR
CONDUIT BOXES, PVC BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND PVC
ADAPTABLE BOXES ................................................................................................................... 167
CON7.M410.9 CONSTRUCTION AND DIMENSIONS ....................................................... 167
CON7.M430.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT BOXES ................. 167
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 169

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 169
CON7.W010.9 CASTING YARD ........................................................................................... 169
CON7.W015.A MANAGEMENT SCHEMES FOR OFF-SITE CASTING ............................ 170
CON7.W020.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR ON-SITE CASTING ................................... 170
CON7.W030.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR OFF-SITE CASTING ................................. 170
CON7.W040.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME ............................................................. 170
CON7.W045.9 PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AUDITING
CONSULTANT .............................................................................................. 171
CON7.W060.9 RECTIFICATION TO QUALITY NON-COMPLIANCE ............................. 171
CON7.W070.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT FOR ON-SITE
CASTING ....................................................................................................... 172
CON7.W080.9 PROGRAMME ............................................................................................... 172
CON7.W090.9 EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................. 172
CON7.W100.9 USE OF CASTING YARD............................................................................. 172
CON7.W110.9 SUBMISSION AND PILOT PRODUCTION RUN BEFORE
APPROVAL.................................................................................................... 172
CON7.W120.9 FIRST JOINT INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY ........... 173
PRODUCING PRECAST UNITS ................................................................................................. 173
CON7.W210.9 MOULDS ........................................................................................................ 173
CON7.W270.9 DEMOULDING GENERALLY ..................................................................... 174
CON7.W410.9 MANUFACTURING AND ERECTION TOLERANCES ............................. 175
CON7.W420.9 CHECKING TOLERANCES ......................................................................... 175
CON7.W430.9 DEFECTIVE UNITS ...................................................................................... 175
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE............................................................... 175

CON7.W510.9 LIFTING FRAME .......................................................................................... 175
CON7.W520.9 INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 175
CON7.W530.9 LIFTING ......................................................................................................... 175
CON7.W540.9 LIFTING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................... 175
CON7.W550.9 LOADING AND OFF-LOADING ................................................................. 176
CON7.W560.9 TRANSPORT VEHICLES ............................................................................. 176
ERECTING UNITS ........................................................................................................................ 176
CON7.W610.9 PROGRAMME ............................................................................................... 176
CON7.W640.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES ........................................................ 176
ERECTION ..................................................................................................... 177
TRIAL UNIT................................................................................................................................... 177
CON7.W710.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 177
PRODUCING PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST BALCONY UNITS..................................... 177
CON7.W810.9 SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................... 177
CON7.W820.9 MOULDS ........................................................................................................ 178
CON7.W830.9 HORIZONTAL CASTING ............................................................................. 178
CON7.W840.9 WINDOWS FIXING TO PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST
BALCONY UNITS ......................................................................................... 178
CON7.W850.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO EXTERNAL FACE ............................................. 178
CON7.W860.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO EDGES AND OVERHANG SOFFIT ................. 178
CON7.W870.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO LIVING / DINING / BEDROOMS ..................... 178
CON7.W880.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO BATHROOM ...................................................... 178
CON7.W890.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO KITCHEN............................................................ 178
CON7.W900.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO UTILITY AREA.................................................. 178
CON7.W920.9 TRANSPORTING FROM CASTING YARD ................................................ 179
CON7.W930.9 PROTECTIVE MEASURE FOR ERECTING UNITS .................................. 179
CON7.W960.9 CONDUIT INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 179
CON7.W970.9 SHOP DRAWINGS OF CONDUITS ............................................................. 179
CON7.W980.9 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF CONDUITS ...................................... 180
PRODUCING AND ERECTING SEMI-PRECAST SLAB ....................................................... 180
CON7.W1105.9 ERECTION OF SEMI-PRECAST SLAB ...................................................... 180
PRODUCING AND ERECTING SEMI-PRECAST SLAB ....................................................... 180
CON7.W1110.9 STORING AND TRANSPORTING............................................................... 180
CON7.W1120.9 CLEANSING AND CRACK INSPECTION BEFORE INSITU
CONCRETE TOPPING .................................................................................. 181

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

ERECTING PRECAST STAIRS .................................................................................................. 182
CON7.W1210.9 DOWEL FIXING ............................................................................................ 182
CON7.W1220.9 BEDDING AND JOINTING .......................................................................... 182
PRODUCING AND ERECTING PRECAST STRUCTURAL WALL / PRECAST
PARTITION WALL ...................................................................................................................... 182
CON7.W1310.9 STORING AND TRANSPORTING............................................................... 182
CON7.W1320.9 CLEANSING AND INSPECTION OF JOINTS BEFORE POURING
SLAB CONCRETE ........................................................................................ 182
CON7.W1340.9 PROTECTIVE MEASURE FOR ERECTING UNITS .................................. 182
CON7.W1350.9 BEDDING AND JOINTING .......................................................................... 183
TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 184

SAMPLING AND TESTING GENERALLY .............................................................................. 184
CON7.T010.9 RECORDS ...................................................................................................... 184
HDMTL .......................................................................................................... 184
CON7.T050.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 185
CON7.T052.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 185
CONCRETE MIXES ...................................................................................... 185
COMPRESSIVE TEST ON CONCRETE CUBES ..................................................................... 186
CON7.T110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 186
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY CORES FOR PRECAST
CONCRETE COMPONENTS EXCEPT SEMI-PRECAST SLAB AND PRECAST
PARTITION WALL ...................................................................................................................... 186
CON7.T121.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 186
CON7.T122.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 186
CON7.T125.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY CORES ............... 187

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR PRECAST CONCRETE
COMPONENTS.............................................................................................. 187
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES EXCEPT PRECAST
PARTITION WALL ...................................................................................................................... 188
CON7.T128.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 188
CON7.T129.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 188
CON7.T130.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF CORE SAMPLES ................................................ 188
CON7.T135.9 AGE OF CORE SAMPLES ............................................................................ 188
STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR SEMI-PRECAST SLAB ......... 188
CON7.T140.9 CORE TESTING FOR SEMI-PRECAST SLAB ........................................... 189
CON7.T150.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER CORE SAMPLES .................................. 189
CON7.T160.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES........ 189
CON7.T180.9 MAKE GOOD OF CORE HOLES ................................................................. 189
CON7.T190.9 TESTING OF NON-SHRINK GROUT .......................................................... 189
SITE WATERTIGHTNESS TESTS TO PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST BALCONY ...... 189
CON7.T210.9 TESTING TRIAL UNIT ................................................................................. 189
TESTING ........................................................................................................ 190
CORE TEST AND CRACK INSPECTION FOR SEMI-PRECAST SLAB............................. 191
CON7.T410.9 CORE TEST IN SAMPLE FLAT UNIT ........................................................ 191
SURVEILLANCE INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 191
BREAKING UP INSPECTION ...................................................................... 191
LIFTING ANCHOR....................................................................................................................... 192
CON7.T650.9 SUBMISSION ................................................................................................ 192
CON8 VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR

DOMESTIC BLOCKS ......................................................................................................193
DESIGN .................................................................................................................................... 193
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 193
CON8.D010.9 DEFINITION OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................... 193
CON8.D020.9 USE OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ............ 193
CON8.D030.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS .............. 193
CON8.D040.9 DESIGN STANDARDS ................................................................................. 194
SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................................ 194
CON8.D110.9 GENERAL (ENGINEER'S DESIGN) ............................................................ 194

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.D120.9 SCOPE OF THE DESIGN (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) ............................. 195

DESIGN PARAMETERS (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) .......................................................... 195
CON8.D210.9 STABILITY .................................................................................................... 195
CON8.D220.9 RESISTANCE TO PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE ......................................... 195
CON8.D230.9 DEFORMATIONS ......................................................................................... 195
CON8.D240.9 INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS .................. 195
CON8.D250.9 EXTERNAL FACES ...................................................................................... 195
CON8.D260.9 LOADING ...................................................................................................... 195
CON8.D270.9 MINIMUM CONCRETE GRADE ................................................................. 196
CON8.D280.9 CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCEMENT ............................................. 196
CON8.D290.9 CONCRETE COVER TO PVC CONDUIT ................................................... 196
CON8.D300.9 CONCEALMENT OF FIXINGS .................................................................... 196
JOINTS ............................................................................................................................................ 196
CON8.D410.9 JOINTS ........................................................................................................... 196
CON8.D420.9 GASKETS ....................................................................................................... 196
CON8.D430.9 MORTAR STOPS........................................................................................... 196
WEATHERPROOF JOINTS (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) .................................................... 196
CON8.D510.9 JOINT DESIGN .............................................................................................. 196
PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS ..................................................................... 197
CON8.D610.9 GENERAL (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) ..................................................... 197
CON8.D620.9 REINFORCEMENT, SHEAR CONNECTORS ETC .................................... 197
CON8.D630.9 VERTICAL PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS .................... 197
CON8.D640.9 HORIZONTAL PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS .............. 197
DESIGN TOLERANCES .............................................................................................................. 197
CON8.D710.9 OVERALL TOLERANCES (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) .......................... 197
CON8.D720.9 VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
MANUFACTURE TOLERANCE (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) ................. 197
ERECTION TOLERANCE ............................................................................ 198
LIFTING OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ............................. 198
CON8.D810.9 LIFTING DESIGN.......................................................................................... 198
CON8.D820.9 STEEL LIFTING FRAMES ........................................................................... 198
CON8.D830.9 LIFTING METHOD ....................................................................................... 198
SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................... 198
CON8.D910.9 TENDER DESIGN PROPOSAL .................................................................... 198
CON8.D920.9 REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ................................................ 198
CON8.D940.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT (CONTRACTOR'S
DESIGN) ......................................................................................................... 199
CON8.D950.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT (ENGINEER'S
DESIGN) ......................................................................................................... 199
STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE (ENGINEER'S
DESIGN).......................................................................................................................................... 200
CON8.D1010.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY (ENGINEER'S DESIGN) ................ 200
CON8.D1020.9 COMPLIANCE WITH GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS
(ENGINEER'S DESIGN) ................................................................................ 200
CON8.D1030.9 REINFORCEMENT CHANGES (ENGINEER'S DESIGN).......................... 200
STUDY MOCK-UP ........................................................................................................................ 200
CON8.D1110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 200
CON8.D1120.9 LOCATION OF CASTING YARD ................................................................ 201
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.D1130.9 SIZE OF STUDY MOCK-UP......................................................................... 201

CON8.D1140.9 EXTENT OF COVERAGE OF STUDY MOCK-UP ..................................... 201
CON8.D1150.9 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR ........................................... 201
CON8.D1170.9 CM'S COMMENT AND INSPECTION OF STUDY MOCK-UP ................. 202
CON8.D1180.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL ................................................. 202
CON8.D1190.9 MAINTENANCE MANUAL ......................................................................... 203
CON8.D1200.9 CM'S APPROVAL TO PROCEED ................................................................ 203
CON8.D1210.9 VALIDATION OF DESIGN ON STUDY MOCK-UP .................................. 203
CON8.D1310.9 CORE TEST TO STUDY MOCK-UP ............................................................ 203
MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 205

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 205
CON8.M010.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS .............. 205
SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................... 205
CON8.M110.9 CONCRETE MIX ........................................................................................... 205
CON8.M120.9 DETAILS OF WEATHERPROOFING .......................................................... 205
CON8.M130.9 CONDUIT SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 205
CONCRETE.................................................................................................................................... 205
CON8.M210.9 CONCRETE MIX ........................................................................................... 205
CON8.M220.9 CONCRETE STRENGTH .............................................................................. 206
CON8.M230.9 DURABILITY ................................................................................................ 206
CON8.M240.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT AND CONCRETE WITH NON-SHRINK
ADDITIVES ................................................................................................... 206
JOINTS ............................................................................................................................................ 206
CON8.M310.9 WEATHERPROOF JOINTS .......................................................................... 206
PERMANENT STRUCUTURAL CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 206
CON8.M410.9 RESISTANCE TO CORROSION .................................................................. 206
CONDUIT SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................... 206
CON8.M510.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 206
DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES .......................................................................................... 206
CON8.M610.9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK............................................................................... 206
ON SITE DELIVERY VERIFICATION ..................................................................................... 206
CON8.M710.9 INSPECTION ................................................................................................. 206
CON8.M720.9 BREAKING-UP INSPECTION ..................................................................... 208
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 211

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 211
CON8.W010.9 OFF SITE CASTING YARD ......................................................................... 211
CON8.W020.9 ARCHITECTURAL WORKS ........................................................................ 211
CON8.W030.9 BUILDING SERVICES INSTALLATION .................................................... 211
CON8.W040.9 QUALIFIED SUPERVISION FOR VOLUMETRIC PRECAST
CONCRETE COMPONENTS ........................................................................ 211
SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................................................... 211
CON8.W110.9 MOULDS ........................................................................................................ 211
CON8.W120.9 METHOD STATEMENT ............................................................................... 211
CON8.W130.9 CONDUIT SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS..................................................... 212
CON8.W140.9 PROGRAMMES ............................................................................................. 212
CON8.W150.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR MANUFACTURE OF
VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS .......................... 212
CON8.W160.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES FOR ERECTING
VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS .......................... 212

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MOULD ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................... 213

CON8.W210.9 TOLERANCE ................................................................................................. 213
CON8.W220.9 GROUT SEALS .............................................................................................. 213
CON8.W230.9 GAUGES ........................................................................................................ 213
CON8.W240.9 FITTINGS ....................................................................................................... 213
CON8.W250.9 EXTERNAL FACES ...................................................................................... 213
MANUFACTURING OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ......... 213
CON8.W310.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 213
CON8.W320.9 CONCRETE MIX ........................................................................................... 213
CON8.W340.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS............................................................................ 214
CON8.W370.9 DEMOULDING AND STRIPPING MOULDS ............................................. 214
CON8.W410.9 SCOPE OF MINOR REPAIR ......................................................................... 215
CON8.W420.9 DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS ....................................................................... 215
CON8.W430.9 CLEANING .................................................................................................... 215
CON8.W440.9 PROTECTION ................................................................................................ 215
CON8.W450.9 LIFTING ......................................................................................................... 215
CON8.W460.9 SIZE AND WEIGHT OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE
COMPONENTS FOR TRANSPORTATION AND CRANEAGE ................ 216
CON8.W470.9 TEMPORARY STORAGE SUPPORT .......................................................... 216
CON8.W480.9 TRANSPORTATION ..................................................................................... 216
ERECTING VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ............................... 216
ERECTION ..................................................................................................... 217
JOINTS AND PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS ............................................ 217
CON8.W610.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 217
CON8.W620.9 GROUTING OF PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTION ............... 217
CON8.W630.9 JOINT WIDTH ............................................................................................... 217
CONDUIT SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 217
CON8.W710.9 APPLICATION............................................................................................... 217
CON8.W720.9 COMPLETION CERTIFICATION ................................................................ 217
CONDUIT AND WIRING INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 218
PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP ............................................................................................................. 218
CON8.W910.9 PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP .............................................................................. 218
CON8.W920.9 REMOVAL OF PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP .................................................... 218
CON8.W930.9 VERIFICATION OF PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP ........................................... 218
TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 219

SAMPLING AND TESTING ........................................................................................................ 219
CON8.T010.9 RECORDS ...................................................................................................... 219
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

HDMTL .......................................................................................................... 219
CON8.T040.9 FULL SCALE MOCK UP FOR VPB AND VPK .......................................... 220
CON8.T045.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 220
CON8.T060.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 220
CONCRETE MIXES ...................................................................................... 220
MIX TESTS..................................................................................................................................... 221
CON8.T110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 221
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ON EARLY CORES FOR VPB, VPK,
VOLUMETRIC PRECAST LIFT SHAFT AND VOLUMETRIC PRECAST LIFT
MACHINE ROOM COMPONENTS ........................................................................................... 221
CON8.T130.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 221
CON8.T140.9 STANDARD ................................................................................................... 222
CON8.T170.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ON EARLY CORES............... 222
STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR VPB, VPK,
VOLUMETRIC PRECAST LIFT SHAFT AND VOLUMETRIC
PRECAST LIFT MACHINE ROOM COMPONENTS ................................. 222
CON8.T195.9 TESTING ON NON-SHRINK GROUT ......................................................... 223
TESTING FIXINGS ....................................................................................................................... 223
CON8.T210.9 TENSILE AND SHEAR TESTING ............................................................... 223
SITE WATERTIGHTNESS TESTS TO EXTERNAL FACES ELEMENT OF
VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS...................................................... 223
CON8.T350.9 REMEDIAL WORK TO VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE
COMPONENTS FOR RE-TEST .................................................................... 224
SITE TESTING OF JOINTS AND PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS ......... 224
CON8.T410.9 SITE TESTING OF JOINTS AND PERMANENT STRUCTURAL
CONNECTIONS............................................................................................. 224
LIFTING ANCHOR....................................................................................................................... 225
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

CON8.T550.9 SUBMISSION ................................................................................................ 225
FACTORY VERIFICATION TESTS .......................................................................................... 225
CON8.T610.9 WATER FLOOD TEST TO INTERNAL INSTALLATIONS....................... 225
CON9 OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR PREFABRICATION

YARD 227
GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 227
SCOPE AND TYPES ..................................................................................................................... 227
CON9.G005.9 APPLICATION............................................................................................... 227
CON9.G010.9 SCOPE OF OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR
PREFABRICATION YARD .......................................................................... 227
CON9.G020.A TYPES OF OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR
PREFABRICATION YARD .......................................................................... 227
SUBMISSION ................................................................................................................................. 228
CON9.G110.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 228
CON9.G120.9 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................... 229
TYPE 1 YARD ................................................................................................................................ 229
CON9.G210.9 SURVEILLANCE AUDIT / INSPECTION ................................................... 229
CON9.G220.9 TRACEABILITY............................................................................................ 229
CON9.G230.9 PREFABRICATED STEEL REINFORCING BAR PRODUCTS
SUMMARY REPORT .................................................................................... 229
CON9.G240.9 OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR PREFABRICATION YARD
REMOVED FROM THE LIST....................................................................... 230
TYPE 2 AND TYPE 3 YARDS...................................................................................................... 230
CON9.G310.9 REQUIREMENTS ON SECURITY PROCEDURE ...................................... 230
CON9.G320.9 REQUIREMENTS ON TRACEABILITY PROCEDURE ............................. 232
CON9.G330.9 PREFABRICATED STEEL REINFORCING BAR PRODUCTS
SUMMARY REPORT .................................................................................... 232
MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 233

REINFORCEMENT GENERALLY ............................................................................................ 233
CON9.M010.9 STOCKIST'S OR SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATION ....................................... 233
CON9.M020.9 VERIFICATION OF SOURCE ...................................................................... 233
CON9.M030.9 COLOUR CODE SYSTEM OF REINFORCEMENT ................................... 233
REINFORCEMENT ...................................................................................................................... 233
CON9.M110.9 BAR / COIL REINFORCEMENT .................................................................. 233
CON9.M210.9 COVER SPACERS ......................................................................................... 234
CON9.M220.9 CHAIRS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................ 234
CON9.M230.9 REINFORCEMENT TYING WIRE ............................................................... 234
WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 235

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 235
CON9.W010.9 STORAGE OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR DELIVERED TO
OSRPY BEFORE PREFABRICATION......................................................... 235
CON9.W020.9 SURFACE CONDITION OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR ........................ 235
CON9.W030.9 CONTAMINATED OR HEAVILY RUSTED REINFORCEMENT ............. 235
CON9.W040.9 COLOUR MARKINGS OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR BY
STOCKISTS OR SUPPLIERS PRIOR TO DELIVERY TO THE
OSRPY ............................................................................................................ 235

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

CON9.W110.9 CUTTING AND BENDING STEEL REINFORCING BAR ......................... 235
CON9.W120.9 COLD BENDING ........................................................................................... 236
CON9.W130.9 SECURING REINFORCEMENT .................................................................. 236
CON9.W140.9 LOCATING REINFORCEMENT .................................................................. 236
CON9.W150.9 WELDING ...................................................................................................... 236
CON9.W160.9 CONCRETE COVER ..................................................................................... 236
CON9.W170.9 COMPLIANCE WITH DRAWINGS ............................................................. 236
TOLERANCES ............................................................................................................................... 237
CON9.W210.9 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 237
TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 238

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................... 238
CON9.T010.9 TESTING ARRANGEMENT ......................................................................... 238
DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 238
CON9.T110.9 BATCH OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR ................................................... 238
CON9.T120.9 TESTING BY DIRECT TESTING CONTRACTOR (DTC) AND
HOUSING DEPARTMENT'S MATERIALS TESTING
LABORATORY (HDMTL) ............................................................................ 238
CON9.T130.9 TESTING PROGRAMME ............................................................................. 238
PURCHASERS TESTING ............................................................................................................ 238
CON9.T220.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................. 239
CON9.T230.9 TESTING BY HDMTL .................................................................................. 240
TESTING BY DTC......................................................................................................................... 240
CON9.T310.9 SCOPE AND NUMBER OF TESTS .............................................................. 240
CON9.T320.9 METHODS OF TESTING .............................................................................. 240
COMPLIANCE .............................................................................................................................. 240
CON9.T410.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA – STEEL REINFORCING BAR ....................... 240
RE-TESTS ....................................................................................................................................... 241
CON9.T510.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL REINFORCING BAR ............................... 241
CON9.T520.9 STANDARD FOR REJECTION .................................................................... 241

INSITU CONCRETE CON1 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1 INSITU CONCRETE

MATERIALS
GENERAL
CON1.M010.9 STANDARD
Unless otherwise specified, comply with 'Code of Practice for Structural Use of
Concrete 2013' issued by the Buildings Department, BS8007:1987 and
BS5400:Part 4:1990 as appropriate.
CON1.M020.9 STATUS OF THE SPECIFICATION

Where any clauses in this Specification vary from the Regulations of the HKQAA
"Quality Scheme for the Production and Supply of Concrete", the clauses in this
Specification shall take precedence.
CON1.M025.9 STATUS OF THE WORKSECTION

Worksection EXT2 takes precedence over this Worksection for the construction of
the concrete carriageways and bus terminus as indicated on the Drawings specified
in the Project Specific Specification.
CON1.M030.9 GRADES OF CONCRETE

In this Specification:
1. The grade of Designed mix concrete is denoted by the characteristic strength in
MPa and the nominal maximum size of aggregate in mm with suffix "D";
2. The grade of Standardised designed mix concrete is denoted by the characteristic
strength in MPa and the nominal maximum size of aggregate in mm with suffix
"S";
3. The characteristic strength of Designed mix concrete with any type of cement is
the 28 day cube strength below which not more than 5% of the test results are
expected to fall;
4. For any clause of this Section where no suffice "D" or "S" is indicated in the
concrete grade, the requirements of that particular clause shall deem to apply to
both Designed mix and Standardised designed mix concrete;
5. Obtain CM's approval prior to the use of concrete of grade above 60 in the
Works;
6. Where any grade of concrete is designated in other Worksections of this
Specification, in Drawings, in design guidelines, in Bills of Quantities or in any
other documents relating to this Contract, as one of the grades listed in column
(1) of the Table below, such grade is deemed to be the grade of concrete set out
in the corresponding column (2) below:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
(1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2)

Designated Grade of Designated Grade of Designated Grade of
Grade Concrete Grade Concrete Grade Concrete
A 20/20 A1 20/40
B 25/20 B1 25/40
C 30/20 C1 30/40 C2 30/10
D 35/20 - - D2 35/10
H 15/20 H1 15/40
K 10/20 K1 10/40
CON1.M040.9 CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT

Cementitious content of concrete, for the purpose of this Specification, is defined as:
1. The mass of cement per cubic metre of compacted concrete if sub-clause (2) is
not applicable; or
2. The combined mass of the mass of cement and the mass of either pulverised fuel
ash (PFA) or ground granulated blastfurnace slag (GGBS) per cubic metre of
compacted concrete, if either PFA or GGBS is used as a partial cement
replacement.
CON1.M050.9 FREE WATER/CEMENT RATIO

Free water/cement ratio, for the purpose of this Specification, is defined as the ratio
between the mass of the free water in the concrete mix and the cementitious content.
CEMENTS
CON1.M110.9 SUBMISSIONS
Submit to the CM for Approval, a sample for each type of cement, PFA and GGBS
together with a certificate issued by an Approved laboratory within six months
before the submission, showing the following:
1. For each type of cement:
a. The manufacturer's name;
b. The date and place of manufacture;
c. With test results that the cement complies with the requirements of this
Specification.
2. For PFA:
a. The manufacturer's name (it must be stated explicitly if high lime PFA, as
defined in CON1.M150 (1)(b), is submitted);
c. With test results that the PFA complies with the requirements of this
Specification and the tests required in Clause 14.1 of BS 3892:Part 1:1997.
3. For GGBS:
a. The manufacturer's name;
c. With test results that the GGBS complies with the requirements of this
Specification and the tests required for factory production control as
stipulated in CON1.M180.
CON1.M120.9 PORTLAND CEMENT (PC)

1. To BS EN 197-1:2011: type CEM I with strength class of cement for structural
concrete to be 52.5N, unless otherwise approved by the CM;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Comply with the limiting values given in Table NB.1 of National annex NB of
BS EN 197-1:2011 for acceptance inspection of cement at delivery.
CON1.M130.9 SULPHATE RESISTING PORTLAND CEMENT (SRPC)

1. To BS EN 197-1:2011: types CEM I-SR 0, CEM I-SR 3 or CEM I-SR 5 with
strength class of cement for structural concrete to be 52.5N, unless otherwise
approved by the CM;
CON1.M140.9 HIGH ALUMINA CEMENT (HAC)

Do not use high alumina cement in structural concrete.
CON1.M150.9 PULVERISED FUEL ASH (PFA)

To BS3892:Part 1:1997 with the following modifications:
1. Lime content in PFA:
a. PFA shall contain up to 10% total lime content; or
b. High lime PFA shall contain up to 20% total lime content and with
soundness value not more than 10 mm.
2. Water requirement and strength factor at 28 days: not requirements of this
Specification, but the values as determined shall be stated in the certificates for
submission;
3. Cement to be used to determine water requirement, strength factor at 28 days,
soundness and initial setting time: Portland cement CEM I (strength class 52.5N)
to BS EN 197-1.
CON1.M160.9 PORTLAND FLY ASH CEMENT (PFAC)

1. To BS EN 197-1:2011: types CEM II/A-V and CEM II/B-V with strength class
of cement for structural concrete to be 42.5N or higher, unless otherwise
approved by the CM;
CON1.M170.9 USE OF PULVERISED FUEL ASH

1. Incorporate PFA to Portland cement (PC) only, as a partial cement replacement:
a. In all structural concrete for foundation works including caissons, bored
piles, caisson caps, pile caps (including pile caps to driven piles), tie beams
and footings of all structures. PFA content to be 35% by mass of the
cementitious content of the concrete;
b. In all structural concrete shown as PFA concrete up to grade 60D on the
Drawings. PFA content to be 25% by mass of the cementitious content of
the concrete;
c. In all concrete, with the exception of sprayed concrete, for external works
including concrete carriageway, other paving and hard landscaping unless
otherwise specified. PFA content to be 25% by mass of the cementitious
content of the concrete;
d. Notwithstanding the minimum striking period stipulated in CON2.W630,
submit for the CM's agreement on the striking period of vertical formwork
for PFA concrete in sub-clauses (1)(b) and (1)(c) above but in no case less
than 1 day.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. At the discretion of the Contractor and where approved by the CM, incorporate
PFA to PC as a partial cement replacement in structural concrete not shown as
PFA concrete on the Drawings. PFA content to be 25% by mass of the
cementitious content of the concrete;
3. Prior to the use of PFA concrete in sub-clause (2) above:
a. Carry out necessary tests and trials to provide evidence to the satisfaction of
the CM that the use of PFA concrete shall not adversely affect the
construction cycle, curing of the concrete and the application of finishes; and
b. Submit details for sub-clause (3)(a) before carrying out the tests and trials
for the Approval of the CM.
4. PFAC may be used where PFA concrete with PFA content of 25% by mass of
the cementitious content of concrete is specified or permitted;
5. Use of PC in the works specified in sub-clauses (1)(a) to (1)(c) above may be
accepted provided that:
a. Satisfactory evidence can be furnished to the CM showing that supply of
PFA or PFAC from all available sources cannot be obtained;
b. The highest grade of PC concrete for caissons and bored piles shall not
exceed 35/20D. For pile caps or footings and transfer structures submit a
detailed method statement of the proposed temperature control and
monitoring strategy as stipulated in CON1.W470 to the CM for approval at
least 7 days before concreting;
c. Where necessary, submit re-design of the foundation works resulting from
such a change to the CM for approval at least 21 days before
commencement of affected works. Submit re-design according to
PIL1.D030 and any other requirement as detailed elsewhere in this
Specification;
d. Be liable for any additional cost or time as a result of any such change. The
Surveyor shall, if he considers that there is a saving in cost arising from any
such change determine the sum which in his opinion shall be deducted from
the contract sum as result of such saving and certify in accordance with the
General Conditions of Contract.
CON1.M180.9 GROUND GRANULATED BLASTFURNACE SLAG (GGBS)

To BS EN 15167-1:2006 with the following modifications:
1. Cement to be used to determine initial setting time and activity indices at 7 days
and 28 days: Portland cement CEM I (strength class 52.5N) to BS EN 197-
1:2011;
2. Factory production control: In the absence of autocontrol testing, proof of the
GGBS manufacturer's testing on the quality control for Class S95 in accordance
with Chinese National Standard GB/T 18046:2017 is acceptable.
CON1.M190.A USE OF GGBS IN PRECAST FACADE, PRECAST STAIRCASE,

PRECAST REFUSE CHUTE, PRECAST PARTITION WALL AND
PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL
1. Incorporate GGBS as a partial replacement of Portland cement (PC) in the
production of precast facade, precast staircase, precast refuse chute, precast
partition wall and precast concrete panel;
2. GGBS content to be 35% by mass of the cementitious content of the concrete;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The use of PC concrete without GGBS to produce precast facade, precast

staircase, precast refuse chute, precast partition wall and precast concrete panel
for the period from December to March will be allowed. Inform the CM in
advance if PC concrete will be used for the production of precast façade, precast
staircase, precast refuse chute, precast partition wall and precast concrete panel
in such period.
AGGREGATES
Submit to the CM, for Approval, a sample of each type of aggregate together with a
certificate showing that the aggregate producer has a quality assurance system
certified to the ISO 9001, and a certificate for each nominal maximum aggregate size
showing:
1. The name of the quarry / locality of the aggregate and documentary evidence
from the supplier for subsequent verification;
2. Where available, evidence that the aggregates from the same source have been
used in other HA Contracts in the past 12 months;
3. That the aggregate complies with the requirements of this Specification;
4. Results of tests carried out by HOKLAS laboratories and presented in HOKLAS
endorsed test reports of all the typical properties listed in CS3:2013 Clause 6.2.2
with the following validity period on the test data:
a. Issued within three months before the submission:
i. Grading.
b. Issued within six months before the submission:
i. All other properties.
CON1.M215.9 RECYCLED COARSE AGGREGATES

1. Use recycled coarse aggregates produced by crushing old concrete and
complying with the requirements in CON1.T410 for external works as specified
in the Contract or as permitted by the CM. The concrete shall be with 100%
recycled coarse aggregates for grade strength 20 MPa and 20% for grade
strengths 25-35 MPa. Recycled coarse aggregates shall not be used in concrete
above grade strength 35 MPa for Portland cement concrete and 30 MPa for PFA
concrete;
2. Thoroughly wet recycled coarse aggregates before use;
3. Store recycled coarse aggregates in separate stockpiles or silos to prevent
inadvertent mixing with natural aggregates. Provide a separate compartment for
recycled coarse aggregates in the batching plant;
4. Obtain recycled coarse aggregates for incorporation into the Works from
Approved source as specified or permitted by the CM.
CON1.M220.9 SOURCES OF AGGREGATES

1. Obtain crushed rock aggregates for each Approved Designed concrete mix from
a single Approved source which may be either an Approved quarry or an
Approved source of rock;
2. Where the aggregates are obtained through a crushing plant, the rock from which
the aggregates for the Approved Designed concrete mix are obtained must be
from the same single Approved source;
3. Obtain natural sand fine aggregates for each Approved Designed concrete mix
from a single Approved locality within a defined boundary agreed with the CM;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Clear overburden as far as practicable from the working area prior to rock
excavation. Overburden is defined as all unwanted material including vegetation,
top soil and material of varying degrees of decomposition from the parent rock.
The latter category may appear as intrusive bands between volumes of massive
rock;
5. Remove rock from igneous intrusions as far as practicable from the working area;
6. Incorporate sufficient scalping and screening facilities in the aggregate
production plant to remove all overburden from the aggregates;
7. Keep separate in clearly defined areas the materials both before and after
processing where the aggregate production plant is rock from more than one
quarry or rock source.
CON1.M230.9 COARSE AGGREGATE

1. Clean, hard, durable crushed rock complying with CS3:2013 except for the
requirement of Aggregate Impact Value and Los Angeles Value;
2. The fine aggregates classified as alkali “Reactive” category in accordance with
Section 22 or 23 of CS1:2010 shall not be used unless otherwise approved by the
CM.
CON1.M240.9 FINE AGGREGATE

1. Clean, hard durable crushed rock, complying with CS3:2013;
2. Do not use natural sand unless with prior agreement of the CM;
3. The fine aggregates classified as alkali “Reactive” category in accordance with
Section 22 or 23 of CS1:2010 shall not be used unless otherwise approved by the
CM.
CON1.M250.9 ALL-IN AGGREGATE

Do not use all-in aggregate.
CON1.M260.9 LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE

To BS 3797:1990 except not to use clinker and furnace bottom ash.
CON1.M270.9 AGGREGATES FOR AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES

Having a water absorption, as measured in accordance with CS3:2013 Section 17 of
not greater than 3%.
CON1.M280.9 GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATES

The grading of the combined fine and coarse aggregates must ensure a dense
concrete of suitable workability, using the specified proportions of cement and water.
WATER
CON1.M310.9 WATER
1. In accordance with PRE.B10.1210 to PRE.B10.1260 or PRE.C11.090 as
appropriate, and;
2. Use only clean fresh water from Water Supplies Department mains supply for
making concrete. Unless otherwise specified, do not use recycled water;
3. If the water from Water Supplies Department mains supply is not available,
submit to the CM for Approval:
a. The source of water;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. A certificate showing that the water complies with the requirement of this
Specification.
4. Where specified in the Contract, use recycled water to make concrete for minor
structures.
CON1.M320.9 RECYCLED WATER

1. Where specified on the Drawings, use recycled water in the mixing of concrete
of grade strength not exceeding 30 MPa for minor structures, including ground
pavings not subjected to vehicular traffic, footpaths, benches and stools, planter
walls and non-structural concrete fill;
2. Produce recycled water by combining clean fresh water from Water Supplies
Department mains supply with wash water from mixer washout operations in
compliance with the properties specified in CON1.T330;
3. Submit method of batching of the recycled water for Approval.
ADMIXTURES
CON1.M410.9 ADMIXTURES GENERALLY
Ensure that the chloride ion content of admixtures for concrete containing embedded
metal or for concrete made with SRPC does not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture
or 0.03% by mass of the cementitious content, whichever is the less.
CON1.M420.A SUBMISSIONS
Submit to the CM for Approval:
1. Manufacturer's information on admixtures;
2. Certificate issued within 6 months before the submission from the manufacturer
that the admixtures comply with the requirements of this Specification;
3. Details of toxicity, proposed dosage, detrimental effects, if any, of under-dosage
or over-dosage;
4. Details of chloride content and method of adding to the concrete mix;
5. One sample of each type of admixtures.
CON1.M430.9 PIGMENTS FOR PORTLAND CEMENT AND PORTLAND CEMENT

PRODUCTS
To BS 1014:1975.
CON1.M440.9 ADMIXTURES AND SUPERPLASTICISERS

To BS EN 934-2:2009+A1:2012.
CURING COMPOUNDS
CON1.M510.9 GENERAL
1. Of an Approved type and:
a. Having an efficiency index of at least 85% when tested to BS 7542:1992;
b. Either wax or aluminised resin based and containing a fugitive dye.
2. Do not use curing compound containing organic solvents for public roads and
bus terminuses which are to be handed over to the Highways Department of the
HKSAR on completion.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Submit to the CM for Approval:
1. Manufacturer's information on curing compounds showing that the curing
compounds comply with the requirements of this Specification;
2. Test certificates prepared by an Approved testing laboratory, to show that the
curing compounds will provide the required efficiency index;
3. A sample of each type of curing compound.
CON1.M530.9 PROPERTIES
The compound when applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations must:
1. Be stable and impervious to evaporation of water from the concrete surface
within 60 minutes after application;
2. Not react chemically with the concrete to be cured and not crack, peel or
disintegrate within 1 week after application;
3. Degrade completely within 3 weeks after application.
CON1.M540.9 CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY CONSTRUCTION

Non-pigmented liquid resin or wax-resin based membrane curing compound of a
proprietary brand, and available both with and without a fugitive dye.
CON1.M550.9 STRUCTURES TO CONTAIN POTABLE WATER

Concrete curing compound for use on concrete surfaces against which potable or
fresh water will be stored or conveyed must be non-toxic and incapable of imparting
a taste to the water.
ANCILLARY MATERIALS
CON1.M610.9 UNDERLAYS TO CONCRETE PAVINGS AND SLABS ON HARDCORE
Either:
1. Subsoil grade reinforced waterproof building paper to BS 1521:1972, grade B1F;
or
2. 0.125 mm nominal thick impermeable polythene sheet.
CON1.M620.9 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING FOR CURING

Impermeable and of a minimum thickness of 0.125 mm.
CON1.M630.9 WATERPROOF ADHESIVE TAPE

Of proprietary manufacture.
CON1.M640.9 BITUMASTIC PAINT

Tar based complying with BS 1070:1993, type B.
CON1.M650.9 REPAIR MORTAR

1. Of proprietary manufacture and certified to the "Product Conformity
Certification Scheme for Repair Mortars" (PCCS-RM) published by the Hong
Kong Concrete Institute. The product conformity certificate shall be issued by a
certification body accredited by Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) or
its Multilateral Recognition Arrangement (MRA) partners;
2. Cement based product comprising Portland cement, fines /sand, admixture
and/or non-shrink additives packed in bags and complying with the performance
characteristics given in the Table below:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Performance
Properties Testing method
characteristics
Compressive strength at CS1:2010 Section 12, using  grade strength of

28 days (MPa) 100 mm cube test specimens parent concrete + 7
Elastic modulus (GPa) CS1:2010 Section 17  23
Chloride ion content CS1:2010 Section 21  0.05%
Expansion (H) within

24 hours
ASTM C827-16 0%  H  4%
Expansion (V) between

3 days to 28 days
ASTM C1090-15 0%  V  0.4%
3. The repair mortar shall not release substances hazardous to health, hygiene and
environment;
4. Submit the following for CM's information:
a. The original or a certified true copy of the product conformity certificate to
PCCS-RM stipulated in sub-clause (1). Certified true copy shall be certified
true by the issuer of the original copy or by the QCM;
b. A summary of the results on tests stipulated in the 'initial type test' and 'audit
testing' of the PCCS-RM. The summary shall be prepared by the accredited
laboratory who carried out the testing or by the certified manufacturer. If so
directed by CM, submit a full set of the audit test reports to CM for
information.
CON1.M660.9 LOW VISCOSITY POLYMER RESIN

CON1.M670.9 EPOXY RESIN FOR INJECTION

CON1.M680.9 CAST IN STEEL INSERT CHANNELS

As MET1.M080.
SOURCES OF SUPPLY OF CONCRETE

CON1.M710.9 READY MIXED CONCRETE
Ready-mixed concrete and any concrete batched off site, may be used only with
Approval and must comply with all requirements of this Specification in respect of
materials, quality and strength of such concrete.
CON1.M720.9 SUBMISSION FOR APPROVAL

1. Submit the following information to CM for approval, upon commencement of
the Contract or during the course of Contract when concrete supply from a new
source is to be used, at a minimum time specified in sub-clause (2):
a. A statement advising whether the concrete is to be site-batched or ready-
mixed. In case on-site concrete batching is proposed, submit further details
to the CM on suitability of the plant in relation with statutory requirements
and possible effects on adjoining localities;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. The name(s) of the proposed concrete supplier(s) as specified in

CON1.M730 (who may be the Contractor) and details of the concrete supply;
c. The name of each supplier's Quality Representative taking specific
responsibility and authority for ensuring compliance with the requirements
of the following:
i. “Quality Scheme for the Production and Supply of Concrete” (QSPSC)
issued by the Hong Kong Quality Assurance Agency (HKQAA);
ii. ISO 14001 on environmental management.
d. For high strength concrete works (concrete of grade strength higher than 60
MPa), a quality assurance proposal with sufficient preliminary test results is
required to confirm that reliable and consistent concrete can be produced.
The proposal should include a detailed assessment of the concreting
materials, the mix design and the quality control procedures of the batching
plant. In this respect the designed mean resistance to crushing, it shall
initially exceed the specified resistance to crushing by a margin of not less
than 12 MPa. Details of any subsequent revision of the mix design are to be
submitted.
2. The time of submission for Approval for the respective concrete shall be at least:
a. Concrete to be ready-mixed: 7 days before placing concrete or 7 days
before the trial mixes if trial mixes are made;
b. Concrete to be site-batched: 52 days for the first submission and a further
45 days for each re-submission before the commencement of batching plant
erection.
3. Where Approval has been given by the CM on site-batched concrete supply
referred in sub-clause (1) above, submit to CM for approval the following
documents certified by Registered Structural Engineer for the on-site concrete
batching plant:
a. Location plan of the on-site concrete batching plant;
b. General arrangement plans with adequate details for construction;
c. Structural and foundation plans and calculations;
d. Approval from relevant Government Departments, where applicable.
4. Do not commence plant erection without written approval from CM;
5. Submit Form ICU 13 to CM for approval on commencement of operation of the
plant at least 22 days before completion of plant erection;
6. Programme the Works by taking into account of the submission and re-
submissions that may be required under sub-clauses (3) to (5);
7. Comply with sub-clauses (3) to (6) for any subsequent relocation of the on-site
concrete batching plant.
CON1.M730.9 SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE

1. Obtain concrete only from suppliers who have achieved the following
certification in respect of each batching plant supplying concrete under the
Contract:
a. QSPSC as stipulated in CON1.M720 for concrete production;
b. ISO 14001 for environmental management.
2. Submit a copy of the certificates as stated in sub-clause (1) above in respect of
each batching plant to the CM. All certification bodies shall be accredited by:
a. The Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) or an accreditation body
which has entered into a mutual recognition agreement with HKAS to
QSPSC in the category of product certification system;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. The HKAS or the China National Accreditation Service (CNAS), or an

accreditation body which has entered into a mutual recognition agreement
with HKAS to ISO 14001 in the category of environmental management
system.
3. Newly erected batching plant shall be deemed to have achieved the certification
valid for the following period if evidence is provided to CM that the concrete
supplier has given written notice to the concerned certification body:
a. QSPSC: in accordance with the Administrative Regulations of QSPSC;
b. ISO 14001: not more than 2 months or such lesser time that is required for
assessment and certification.
CON1.M740.9 WITHDRAWAL OF CERTIFICATION

In the event that certification in CON1.M730 is not obtained, suspended or
withdrawn in respect of any supplier or batching plant supplying concrete under the
Contract:
1. Inform the CM immediately and cease using concrete from that supplier or
batching plant;
2. Do not resume the supply of concrete from that supplier or batching plant
without Approval, notwithstanding any suspended or withdrawn certification
being subsequently reinstated.
CON1.M750.9 SITE BATCHING

Where site batching plant is used, concrete supply from plants as defined in
CON1.M760 below may be acceptable under the following conditions provided that
evidence can be furnished to the CM showing that supply from other sources,
including the contingency measure proposal as required under CON1.M1110
complying with CON1.M730 cannot be obtained:
1. At the first two months from commencement before operation of the site
batching plant;
2. After dismantling of the site batching plant with only minor concrete work
including small concrete structures still outstanding.
CON1.M760.9 SITE BATCHING PLANT

Concrete supplied by the following plants may be acceptable if CON1.M750 as
given above is satisfied:
1. Plants operated in another Housing Authority contract by the same Contractor,
and having achieved certification under the QSPSC for concrete production and
ISO 14001 for environmental management as approved by CM. Evidence must
also be furnished to the CM to show that the proposal shall not affect the
progress and works on the projects with the proposed plants;
2. Plants operated within the Contract, without a QSPSC and/or ISO 14001
certificate may only supply concrete under the condition as stated in sub-clause
(2) of CON1.M750, provided that the following requirements are satisfied:
a. The operation of the plants is to comply with the Technical Regulations of
QSPSC and ISO 14001 for environmental management;
b. Minor specific deviations from the Technical Regulations to cater for
smaller plants may be acceptable. These may include tolerance on weighing
equipments and use of single hopper for all constituent materials. All
deviations must be submitted to the CM for approval;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. An Independent Qualified Person (IQP) holding the qualification of MHKIE,

MIStructE or MICE shall be engaged and is responsible for monitoring the
quality standards of the said plant. IQP is required to submit monthly
statement to CM to confirm that the required quality standards and
environmental management system are maintained. Submit details of IQP to
CM for approval.
CONCRETE MIXES GENERALLY

CON1.M810.9 CHLORIDE CONTENT
The total chloride content of the concrete must not exceed the limits shown in the
Table below, expressed as a percentage relationship between chloride ion and
cementitious content of mix:
Chloride content
Type of concrete Maximum total chloride content %
Prestressed concrete. Steam cured 0.1
structural concrete
Reinforced concrete. Concrete with 0.35
embedded metal
Concrete made with SRPC 0.2
CON1.M820.9 DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

Use Designed concrete mixes for all concrete.
CON1.M830.9 USE OF SULPHATE RESISTING PORTLAND CEMENT

Do not use pulverised fuel ash with sulphate resisting Portland cement.
CON1.M840.9 USE OF PFA AND PFAC

Do not use pulverised fuel ash in addition to Portland fly ash cement.
CON1.M850.9 CONTROL OF ALKALI-AGGREGATE REACTIONS

1. Submit measures to control the occurrence of alkali-aggregate reaction in
concrete for Approval;
2. In the absence of Approved alternative proposals, the reactive alkali content of
concrete expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O) content per cubic
metre of concrete shall not exceed 3.0 kg:
a. The equivalent Na2O shall be calculated by the expression:
The equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O) content of the concrete shall be
calculated by the following expression:
Equivalent Na2O content = A + B + C
where A is the sum of the acid-soluble alkali content
(expressed as equivalent Na2O) of cement,
admixtures and water;
B is equal to either 1/6 the total alkali content of
PFA (expressed as equivalent Na2O) or 1/2 of the
total alkali content of GGBS (expressed as
equivalent Na2O); and
C is equal to 0.76 times the chloride ion (Cl‾)
content of the aggregate.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. The acid-soluble alkali content of the cement shall be determined in

accordance with BS EN 196-2:2005 and shall be taken as the average of the
latest 25 daily determinations of equivalent sodium oxide plus twice the
standard deviation of the results;
c. The acid-soluble alkali content of admixtures shall be determined in
accordance with BS 1881:Part 124:1988;
d. The acid-soluble alkali content of water shall be determined in accordance
with BS EN 1008:2002;
e. The total alkali content of the PFA or the GGBS shall be determined in
accordance with BS EN 196-2:2005 and shall be taken as the average of 25
weekly determinations plus twice the standard deviation of the results. For a
casting yard where there are less than twenty-five weekly determinations
available, use the average and the standard deviation of all the available
weekly determinations for calculation;
f. The chloride ion (Cl‾) content of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be
measured in accordance with CS3:2013.
3. Submit the following particulars for each concrete mix to the CM:
a. At Contract commencement:
i. HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates, issued in less than six months' time
from the date of commencement of the Works, giving the results of tests
required in sub-clauses (2)(b) to (2)(f) above;
ii. Calculation of the reactive alkali content of the proposed mix;
iii. Documentation of a quality system to control the reactive alkali content
in the concrete.
b. At quarterly intervals after Approval:
i. HOKLAS-endorsed test certificates giving the results of tests required in
sub-clauses (2)(b) to (2)(f) above;
ii. Any further calculations necessary to demonstrate that the mix continues
to comply with the limit on reactive alkali content given in sub-clause (2)
above during the period of delivery of the Approved concrete mix to the
Site.
4. When Instructed, arrange for the parallel sampling of constituent materials in
sub-clauses (2)(b) to (2)(f) by the HDMTL or the DTC for testing.
NO FINES CONCRETE
CON1.M910.9 COMPOSITION
1. Cement: Portland cement;
2. Aggregate: nominal maximum size 20 mm of which not more than 15% by
mass is retained on a 20 mm BS test sieve, and not more than 10% by mass
passes a 10 mm BS test sieve.
CON1.M920.9 AGGREGATE/CEMENT CONTENT RATIO

Lying within the range 10 to 15 by weight.
CON1.M930.9 CEMENT CONTENT

The cement content is such that each particle of aggregate is coated with cement
paste but the compacted concrete has an open texture which permits the flow of
water through the hardened concrete.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STANDARDISED DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX

PROPORTIONS
CON1.M1010.9 CEMENT
To be Portland cement type CEM I in BS EN 197-1:2011.
CON1.M1020.9 MIX PROPORTIONS

1. Except for concrete with recycled coarse aggregates, select the mix proportions
for standardised designed mix concrete from Tables A and B below. Select the
appropriate content of water and water-reducing admixtures in accordance with
CON1.M1170 and CON1.M1040 respectively. If mix proportions are so
selected, no trial mixes as stipulated in CON1.T010 to CON1.T120 are required:
Table A. Weights of any aggregate to be used with 100 kg cement
Nominal
Specified
maximum size
grade 40 20 10
of aggregate
strength
(mm)
(MPa) Slump (mm) 85-170 75-150 65-130
10 800 690 -
15 Total 550 500 400
Aggregate
20, 25 (kg) 490 440 360
30 440 380 300
Table B. Percentage by weight of fine aggregate to total aggregate

Specified Grading of
Grade fine aggregate Nominal maximum size of aggregate (mm)
strength
(MPa) 40 20 10
10, 15 C, M or F 30-45 35-50 -
C 30-40 35-45 45-55
20, 25 or 30 M 25-35 30-40 40-50
F 25-30 25-35 35-45
2. For concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse aggregates, mix to
give a slump value of 75 mm and in the following proportions:
Portland Cement 100 kg
Recycled Coarse aggregate
20 mm 180 kg
10 mm 90 kg
Fine aggregate 180 kg
a. Fine aggregates to be within the limits of grading M in Table 3.2 of
CS3:2013;
b. Do not derive fine aggregates from concrete rubble;
c. Conduct laboratory trial mix for concrete with recycled coarse aggregates in
accordance with CON1.T050 prior to Approval.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.M1030.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

Notwithstanding full compliance with the other provisions of this Worksection, the
Contractor's attention is drawn to his full responsibility in ensuring compliance with
the strength, workability and all other requirements for Designed concrete mixes,
taking due consideration of the characteristics of the materials used in the mix, and
the Specification provisions allowed for Contractor's design within specified ranges.
CON1.M1040.9 USE OF ADMIXTURES

Do not use admixtures, other than water-reducing admixtures, without Approval.
DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

Submit details of mix design to the CM for Approval at least 7 days before trial
mixes are made or, if trial mixes are not required, at least 7 days before the mix is
placed in the permanent work. Include the following:
1. Quantities of each constituent per m³ of compacted concrete;
2. Details of aggregates, including specific gravities and absorbencies, in support of
sub-clause (1)(a) above;
3. Nominal grading details of fine and coarse aggregates in tabular and graphic
form;
4. Nominal grading details, in tabular and graphic form, of the combined aggregate;
5. Free water / cement ratio by weight;
6. Designed workability, in terms of designed slump value or designed flow value;
7. Type of plant to be used, location of offsite ready-mixed plant, and a
contingency proposal to demonstrate that continuous and adequate supply of
concrete can be secured in the event of disruption to the planned supply. Include
in such proposal measures to mitigate sudden break down of concrete supply
during concreting;
8. System of mixing, i.e. what proportion of the minimum required mixing time
will be carried out at the batching plant;
9. Total chloride ion content of mix;
10. Method of controlling the temperature of fresh concrete as stipulated in
CON1.W465.
CON1.M1120.9 MAXIMUM CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT

1. The cementitious content of any mix up to Grade 60 must not exceed:
a. 400 kg/m³for concrete containing PC only, used for aqueous liquid retaining
structures;
b. 450 kg/m³ for concrete containing either (a) PFA and PC, or (b) GGBS and
PC or (c) PFAC, used for aqueous liquid retaining structures;
c. 550 kg/m³for concrete used for any other structures.
2. Mass of cement of the cementitious content of any mix higher than Grade 60
should be limited to not more than 450 kg/m3.
CON1.M1130.9 MINIMUM CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT

Design mix of Grade 20 or greater in reinforced concrete or prestressed concrete to
have the required minimum cementitious content, in kg/m³, given in the Table below:
PC/PFA Grade Strength 20 25 30 35 40 45 ≥50
/GGBS (MPa)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Reinforced Nominal 10 mm 330 330 350 370 390 415 440

Concrete maximum
aggregate 20 mm 290 290 310 330 350 375 400
size 40 mm 260 260 280 300 320 345 370
Grade Strength 35 40 45
(MPa)
Prestressed Nominal 10 mm 400 420 445
Concrete maximum
aggregate 20 mm 340 360 385
size 40 mm 340 360 385
CON1.M1150.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES

Subject to the limits set out in the Table to CON1.M1130 above the minimum
cementitious content for aqueous liquid retaining structures is 325 kg/m³. The
maximum cementitious content for aqueous liquid retaining structures shall be in
accordance with CON1.M1120.
CON1.M1160.9 INCREASING CEMENTITIOUS CONTENT

After Approval of the designed concrete mixes, the Approved cementitious content
may be increased by up to 20 kg/m³ without the CM's consent, provided that the
specified maximum and minimum limits for cementitious content are maintained.
CON1.M1170.9 MAXIMUM FREE WATER / CEMENT RATIO

Do not exceed the following maximum free water/cement ratio figures for concrete
grades 20D and above:
1. Unreinforced concrete: 0.60 or the ratio stipulated in Table 4.4 of 'Code of
Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013' issued by the Buildings
Department, whichever is the less;
2. Reinforced concrete: 0.55 or the ratio stipulated in Table 4.2 of 'Code of
Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013' issued by the Buildings
Department, whichever is the less;
3. Aqueous liquid retaining concrete: 0.50.
CON1.M1180.9 MINIMUM SLUMP VALUE

The designed slump value must not be less than 75 mm except:
1. Blinding, unreinforced mass concrete and road pavement concrete;
2. Where otherwise agreed by the CM.
CON1.M1190.A CEMENT CONTENT IN CONCRETE WITH PFA OR GGBS

1. When PFA is used as a partial cement replacement and incorporated into the
concrete as a separate material, ensure that:
a. For foundation works, 65% by mass of the cementitious content of the mix
is Portland cement to BS EN 197-1:2000: type CEM I;
b. For all other works, 75% by mass of the cementitious content of the mix is
Portland cement to BS EN 197-1:2000: type CEM I.
2. When GGBS is used as a partial cement replacement and incorporated into the
concrete as a separate material for the production of precast facade, precast
staircase, precast refuse chute, precast partition wall and precast concrete panel,
ensure that 65% by mass of the cementitious content of the mix is Portland
cement to BS EN 197-1:2000: type CEM I.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.M1200.9 ADJUSTMENT OF FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATES IN DESIGNED

CONCRETE MIXES
After Approval of the designed concrete mixes, the Approved fine and coarse
aggregate content may be adjusted without the CM's consent up to a maximum of
±20 kg per 100 kg of cementitious content provided that the adjusted mixes comply
with all requirements of this Specification in respect of materials, quality and
strength of such mixes, and the aggregate / cementitious content ratio is kept
unchanged. In the event that the Approved fine aggregate content is adjusted, the
Approved coarse aggregate content shall be adjusted accordingly to keep the
Approved aggregate / cementitious content ratio unchanged. The same is for the
adjustment of the Approved coarse aggregate content.
MATERIALS FOR REMEDIAL WORK

CON1.M1210.9 GENERAL
Obtain Approval for all materials for remedial work.

INSITU CONCRETE CON1 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

CON1.W010.9 BAGGED CEMENT
Store cement in bags:
1. In a dry, weatherproof store with a raised floor;
2. Cover every stock of more than 20 bags of cement or dry pulverized fuel ash
(PFA) or dry ground granulated blastfurnace slag (GGBS) entirely with
impervious sheeting or place them in an area sheltered on the top and the three
sides;
3. With each delivery identified and kept separate;
4. For use in the order of delivery.
CON1.W020.9 BULK CEMENT, PFA AND GGBS

Store bulk cement, PFA and GGBS:
1. In dry, weatherproof and closed silos fitted with overflow detection device so
that when the silo is approaching overflowing, a high level audible alarm is
triggered and the material filling stops automatically within one minute. Do not
overfill silos;
2. Carry out the loading, unloading, transfer, handling or storage of bulk cement or
dry PFA or dry GGBS; or any cement or dry PFA during or after the debagging
process in a totally enclosed system or facility and fit any vent or exhaust with
fabric filter or equivalent air pollution control system or equipment;
3. Of different types and from different sources in separate silos clearly marked to
identify the different contents of each.
CON1.W030.9 AGGREGATES
1. Do not handle or store aggregates in a manner which will result in the mixing of
different types and sizes or in the segregation or contamination of the aggregates;
2. Store different types and sizes of aggregates in separate hoppers or in separate
stockpiles. Provide the stockpiles with well drained concrete floors and dividing
walls of sufficient height to keep the different aggregates separate.
CON1.W040.9 ADMIXTURES AND CURING COMPOUNDS

1. Store admixtures and curing compounds:
a. In sealed containers, marked to identify the contents;
b. Protected from exposure to conditions which may affect the material;
c. In accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
2. Do not use the materials after the recommended shelf life has been exceeded.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE

CON1.W110.9 BATCHING PLANT
1. Maintain the weighing mechanisms for all batching plant in good working order
and ensure their accuracy is maintained within the tolerances given in the
"Quality Scheme for the Production and Supply of Concrete" (QSPSC) issued by
the Hong Kong Quality Assurance Agency (HKQAA). Check them against
accurate weights and volumes at least once per month when required by the CM.
Use separate weighing equipment for cement and aggregates. Arrange for
calibration of all weighing mechanisms, water meters and admixture dispensers
at three monthly intervals by an Approved independent consultant;
2. Obtain Approval for all dispensing equipment for admixtures which shall be
accurate to within ±5% of the quantity of any admixture being used. The
weights of cement, PFA, water and each size of aggregate as indicated by the
mechanisms employed shall be accurate to within ±2% of the respective weights
per batch agreed by the CM.
CON1.W120.9 ALLOWANCE FOR WATER CONTENT OF AGGREGATES

Adjust the weights fine and coarse aggregates to allow for the free water contained in
them.
CON1.W130.9 QUANTITY OF WATER

Add that quantity of water to the mix required to produce concrete of the Approved
workability.
CON1.W140.9 CONCRETE MIXING PLANT

Mixing plant must comply with BS 1305:1974 and BS 4251:1980 for batch and
truck type concrete mixers respectively, and the requirement in BS 4251:1980 for
revolution counters on truck mixer drum is not mandatory.
CON1.W150.9 MIXING CONCRETE

1. Comply with the mixer manufacturer's recommended batch capacity, method of
loading, mixing time and speed of operation and do not change mixing time
without Approval;
2. For production of concrete using bagged cement, dry PFA or dry GGBS in a
standard bag (not exceeding 50 kg), carry out de-bagging, batching and mixing
processes in an area sheltered on the top and the three sides.
CON1.W160.9 CEMENT FROM DIFFERING SOURCES

The use of cement from differing sources in same concrete pour and same structure
shall be subject to the standards stipulated in CON1.W165 and CON1.T075 and
approved by the CM, unless:
1. At different locations without any physical contact;
2. In the same structure with a construction joint already formed in accordance with
CON1.W510 to CON1.W570 prior to the placing of fresh concrete with different
cement source against the hardened concrete.
CON1.W165.9 PRE-REQUISITES ON MIXING TWO CONCRETE MIXES WITH

CEMENT FROM TWO DIFFERING SOURCES
1. Each of the two concrete mixes, when used individually, shall comply with all
requirements in the Specification, including the strength, workability and
durability requirements;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. The grade of strength, workability, durability and maximum size of aggregate of

the two concrete mixes must be the same;
3. The types and proportions of the cementitious materials used in the two concrete
mixes must be the same;
4. The types and brand of admixtures used in the two concrete mixes must be the
same. The difference in the dosages of the admixtures between the two concrete
mixes shall not be more than 5%, unless otherwise approved by the CM;
5. The difference in the water / cementitious materials ratio between the two
concrete mixes shall not be more than 0.02;
6. The two concrete mixes may be produced from different sources of aggregates
provided that the sources of the two difference aggregates have each been
approved before for concrete production and the aggregates are of the same type.
The difference in the fines content of the fine aggregate between the two
concrete mixes shall not be more than 5%.
CON1.W170.9 REMIXING
Do not remix partially hardened concrete with or without additional cement,
aggregate or water.
CON1.W180.9 TRUCK MIXED CONCRETE

When using truck mixed concrete:
1. Add water at the batching plant as agreed by the CM;
2. Do not add water in transit;
3. Do not add water at the Site without Approval.
CON1.W190.9 CLEANLINESS OF MIXER

1. Do not load mixer in excess of its rated capacity and empty the mixer before
recharging;
2. Clean mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes before fresh
concrete is mixed; and whenever there is a change in the type of cement being
used.
CON1.W200.9 LIGHT-WEIGHT CONCRETE

Mix and place light-weight concrete as indicated on the Drawings in accordance
with the aggregate manufacturer's instructions and as required by the CM.
CON1.W210.9 WATERPROOF CONCRETE

For concrete specified as "waterproof," incorporate water-proofing material strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and complying with aqueous
liquid retaining concrete.
PROGRAMME AND SITE RECORDS FOR

CONCRETING
CON1.W305.9 PROGRAMME FOR CONCRETING
1. Provide monthly programme for concreting showing concreting works for the
coming month for information and discussion at each Monthly Site Meeting;
2. Provide the monthly programme for concreting in sub-clause (1) above to the
concrete supplier for advanced planning within one week after each Monthly
Site Meeting;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Submit a summary report on concrete supply status monthly or at an agreed

interval with the CM for record for any concrete pour larger than 100 m3. The
report shall include, but not be limited to, the name of the supplier, the quantities
and the dates of each concrete grade ordered and delivered on Site, and the dates
that the orders are placed within the reporting period. In case if any order is
cancelled, the date that the cancellation order is placed and an explanation for
the cancellation shall be provided in the report.
CON1.W310.A REQUIREMENTS ON SITE RECORDS FOR CONCRETING

1. Provide delivery notes with a QR code and the format shall be agreed with the
CM for Development and Construction Site Mobile System (DCSMS) on Site,
relating to each delivery of concrete available for inspection by the CM at all
times and containing the following information:
a. Serial number of delivery note;
b. Date;
c. Name of supplier and location of batching and mixing plant;
d. Registration number of delivery vehicle;
e. Name of purchaser;
f. Name and location of the Site;
g. Sources and actual quantities of each constituent, including admixtures, if
any;
h. Designation of concrete mix and approved workability value;
i. Quantity of concrete;
j. Time of introduction of cement to the mix.
2. Keep records of concreting operations on the Site available for inspection by the
CM at all times, and containing the following details:
a. Date;
b. Designation of concrete mix and approved workability value;
c. Serial number of delivery note;
d. Arrival time of delivery vehicle;
e. Time of completion of discharge;
f. Position where concrete is placed;
g. Results of workability tests in terms of measured slump or flow table values
as appropriate;
h. Details of test cubes markings, and whether test cubes were taken from the
delivery;
i. Total quantity of each concrete mix placed that day;
j. Temperature of fresh concrete when it is placed in position where
temperature control is required in accordance with CON1.W470. (For
practical reasons the CM may accept that the temperature of concrete
measured immediately before it is place in position is taken as the
temperature of concrete when it is placed in position.)
3. For public roads and bus termini which will become the properties of the
Highways Department of the HKSAR after the handing over of the works,
submit all the related Delivery Notes and record book to the Employer on
completion of the Works;
4. Certificates/documents issued within 6 months before the submission showing
the source of constituent mentioned in sub-clause (1)(g) of this clause shall be
kept on the Site available for inspection by the CM at all times.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE

CON1.W410.9 GENERAL
1. Transport and place concrete by Approved methods which ensure that there is no
contamination, segregation or loss of the constituent materials;
2. Place and compact concrete in such a way as to avoid disturbance to the
formwork and reinforcement. Where sections of the work are carried out in lifts,
support the reinforcement projecting above the lift being cast to prevent
movement of the bars during the casting and setting of the concrete.
CON1.W420.9 CONCRETE BATCHED OFF-SITE

For concrete batched off-site:
1. Carry the concrete in purpose made agitators operating continuously, or in truck
mixers;
2. Submit to the CM for verification details of the methods for agitating the
concrete during transport and immediately prior to placing.
CON1.W430.9 CLEANLINESS
1. Clean all areas where concrete is to be placed and, except for concrete placed
under water, remove all standing water immediately before placing the concrete;
2. Protect slab formwork surfaces from concrete droppings and spillage during
concreting.
CON1.W440.9 APPROVAL BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE

1. Do not place concrete in any part of the structure until Approval has been given;
2. Obtain Approval again if concreting is not started within 24 hours of Approval
being given.
CON1.W450.9 PROCEDURE
1. Place concrete continuously between construction joints as close as practicable
to its final position;
2. Do not allow concrete to free fall in excess of 2.7 m unless otherwise Approved;
3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding
450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 150 mm in all other cases unless
otherwise Approved. Do not force concrete into place by vibrator;
4. Do not place fresh concrete against insitu concrete which has been in position for
more than 30 minutes unless the insitu concrete has been kept damp with a layer
of wet hessian and protected from the weather to the satisfaction of the CM;
5. When insitu concrete has been in place for 4 hours or in the opinion of the CM
the concrete has stiffened to such an extent that it no longer responds to the
action of an internal vibrator, do not place further concrete against it for a further
20 hours unless otherwise Approved and form a construction joint in accordance
with CON1.W510 to CON1.W570 as appropriate;
6. Compact concrete in its final position within 2½ hours of the introduction of
cement to the mix. Concrete, which in the opinion of the CM is no longer
sufficiently workable, will be rejected;
7. Place concrete by skip or such other Approved methods as specified by the
requirements of the Specifications;
8. Do not place concrete in flowing water.
CON1.W460.9 USE OF TRUNKING AND CHUTES

Keep trunking or chutes clean and use them in such a way as to avoid segregation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.W465.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN FRESH CONCRETE

1. Submit to the CM for approval details of measures on control of fresh concrete
to a temperature not higher than 30C:
a. For the structural elements with concrete grade strength greater than 60 MPa;
b. For the massive structural elements as specified in CON1.W470;
c. For mass concrete retaining walls with concrete grade strength greater than
60MPa.
2. The CM may reject any concrete for which the temperature, as measured on Site
by the DTC, exceeds 30C.
CON1.W470.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL IN MASSIVE STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

1. Comply with CON1.W465 and submit the following to the CM for approval on
the temperature control for massive structural elements as specified in the
Project Specific Specification at least two months before concreting:
a. A method statement of the proposed temperature control;
b. Calculations of the forecast concrete temperature, temperature gradients and
resulting stresses. The calculation of temperature in concrete shall be in
accordance with the CIRIA Report No. C660 "Early Age Thermal Crack
Control in Concrete" or other Approved recognised method.
TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE

CON1.W480.9 CONCRETING PLAN
Submit a concreting plan, supplemented by a soft copy in suitable Portable
Document Format (PDF), for each concreting pour to the CM at least one week prior
to commencement of concreting works of the respective pour for agreement. The
concreting plan shall demonstrate that the concreting works is able to be completed
within the statutorily permitted working hours, with content including but not limited
to the following:
1. Volume of the pour and planned timeline of the concreting works; and
2. Contingency measures to be taken once there is a slippage in concreting
affecting the timely completion of the scheduled concreting works within the
permitted working hours. The contingency measures shall include planning and
details of construction joint(s) to be formed if necessary;
3. Up-to-date Master Inspection Record covering the previous typical floor and
other parts of the same floor (typical and non-typical) concerned.
FORMING CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

CON1.W510.9 LOCATION OF JOINTS
1. Obtain Approval for the position and details of any construction joints not
specified in the Contract;
2. Arrange such joints so as to minimise the possibility of the occurrence of
shrinkage cracks;
3. Arrange construction joints horizontally or vertically unless otherwise Approved.
CON1.W520.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES

1. Cast the bottom slab and walls of aqueous liquid retaining structures in one
operation where no pre-determined construction joints are specified, unless
otherwise Approved;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Where construction joints are shown on Drawings, provide Approved

proprietary type waterstops at construction joints and:
a. Securely fix waterstops in position to formwork in such a manner that
compaction of the concrete will not be affected;
b. Make in-situ joints in waterstops using methods and equipment
recommended by the manufacturer;
c. Protect exposed waterstops from exposure to conditions that may affect the
waterstops; and
d. Keep the waterstops free from rust, hydrocarbons and other deleterious
material.
CON1.W530.9 WALLS AND COLUMNS

Finish the upper surface of lifts of concrete walls and columns horizontally and clean
the formwork of adhering concrete before the next lift is placed.
CON1.W540.9 EXPOSING AGGREGATE

Remove laitance and all loose material and expose the aggregate by an Approved
method as soon as is practical after casting, but:
1. Where an air jet is used-allow a minimum period of 4 hours after casting to
elapse;
2. Where a water jet is used-allow a minimum period of 12 hours after casting to
elapse.
CON1.W550.9 FOOTINGS AND PILE CAPS PREPARED BY OTHERS

Where the footings or pile caps have been constructed by others:
1. Hack off and expose aggregate by an Approved method of all construction joints
of columns and walls on footings and pile caps prepared by a previous contractor;
2. Remove the cement slurry coating on column and wall starter bars.
CON1.W560.9 PLACING ADJACENT CONCRETE

Ensure the surface of the construction joint is clean and moist when fresh concrete is
placed against it.
CON1.W570.9 INTERRUPTED POURS

Form construction joint(s) in accordance with the provisions of the preceding clauses
of this subsection under the following circumstances:
1. Placing of concrete has to be unexpectedly stopped; or
2. There is a slippage in concreting which may affect the timely completion of the
scheduled concreting works within the statutorily permitted working hours.
CON1.W580.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS FOR CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAY AND

PAVED AREA
Arrange construction joints normal to the axis or plane of the element being
constructed unless otherwise permitted by the CM.
COMPACTION
CON1.W610.9 GENERAL
Compact concrete to produce a dense homogeneous mass with vibrators unless
otherwise Approved and:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Provide types of vibrating equipment which will effectively compact the

concrete;
2. Provide a sufficient number of vibrators in serviceable condition on Site to
ensure that reserves are always immediately available in the event of
breakdowns.
CON1.W620.9 VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

The vibrating equipment shall::
1. Internal vibrators: operating at a minimum of 10,000 cycles per minute;
2. External vibrators: operating at a minimum of 3,000 cycles per minute;
3. Vibrating tables: operating at a minimum of 5,000 oscillations per minute may
be used for pre-cast elements subject to Approval;
4. Do not use external clamp-on type vibrators without Approval.
CON1.W630.9 USING VIBRATORS

Use vibrators in such a manner that vibration is applied continuously and
systematically during placing of the concrete until the expulsion of air has practically
ceased and:
1. Do not use vibrators in a manner which will result in segregation;
2. Do not apply vibration by way of the reinforcement;
3. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used, avoid all contact with
reinforcement, formwork and inserts as far as is practicable;
4. Do no use vibration as a means of distributing concrete into position.
CON1.W640.9 NEW CONCRETE

Do not vibrate concrete between 4 and 24 hours after compaction.
CON1.W650.9 COMPACTING NO-FINES CONCRETE

Compact using a minimum amount of punning.
PUMPING CONCRETE
CON1.W710.9 CM'S APPROVAL
Do not use concrete pumps without prior Approval.
CON1.W720.9 PUMPING EQUIPMENT

Operate and maintain concrete pumps in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and:
1. Keep pumps and pipelines maintained in a clean condition;
2. Do not use pipelines with internal surfaces of aluminium;
3. Ensure joints in pipelines are tightly fixed and do not permit grout loss.
CON1.W730.9 PIPELINES
Position concrete pumps such that pipelines are as short and straight as practicable
and require as little repositioning as practicable and arrange bends in such a manner
that the concrete, formwork, reinforcement or built-in components are not disturbed.
CON1.W740.9 LUBRICATING PIPELINES

Lubricate pipelines by passing cement grout or concrete through the pipeline before
the concrete is pumped. Do not place the initial discharge of pumped concrete in the
permanent work.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PLACING CONCRETE UNDER WATER

CON1.W810.9 GENERAL
Do not place concrete underwater without prior Approval.
CON1.W820.9 STANDARD
Place underwater concrete in accordance with the recommendations given in Code of
Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013.
CON1.W830.9 TREMIES
Securely support tremies used to place concrete in position and ensure the joints are
watertight. Use a temporary seal of an Approved type to keep the water and the
concrete separate at the start of concreting.
CON1.W840.9 PROCEDURE
After the concrete is flowing, raise the tremie in a manner agreed by the CM and:
1. Keep the lower end of the tremie immersed in the concrete to a depth of a least
1 m;
2. Prevent water, mud and other deleterious material from entering the tremie after
concreting has started.
CON1.W850.9 DEALING WITH BLOCKAGES

Unless otherwise permitted by the CM, stop concreting immediately if the tremie
becomes blocked or is removed from the concrete and:
1. Do not recommence concreting for at least 24 hours without Approval;
2. Remove contaminated concrete before concreting recommences.
CON1.W860.9 SURCHARGE AND CONTAMINATED CONCRETE

1. Surcharge concrete placed by tremie above the specified level by an amount
which is sufficient to allow for the removal of any contaminated concrete;
2. Remove contaminated concrete.
LAYING HOLLOW BLOCK FOR SLABS

CON1.W910.9 GENERAL
See CON2.W300.
WATERTIGHT BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION

CON1.W1010.9 GENERAL
Ensure that the completed work is free from leaks and damp patches.
CON1.W1020.9 BLINDING LAYER

Lay blinding layer to the grade and thickness shown on the Drawings, to form a
clean and dry base for the main structural slab, ensuring that there is no loss of
cement to, nor gain of water from the base.
CON1.W1030.9 WATER/VAPOUR PROOF MEMBRANE

Exercise special care to prepare the surface for application of asphalt waterproofing
in accordance with Worksection WAT1 and to avoid damage to the membrane after
application.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.W1040.9 FORMWORK TIES

Use only formwork-ties which leave no open holes through the concrete.
CON1.W1050.9 CONCRETE SUPPLY

If ready-mixed concrete is used, supply to the site at regular intervals.
CON1.W1060.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

1. Provide waterstops as specified in CON6.M210 and CON6.W210 to
CON6.W230 for all construction joints, plan the positions of the construction
joints according to planned daily production of concrete and keep their number
to a minimum;
2. Position the joint between the base slab and the walls a minimum of 250 mm
above the top of the base slab.
CON1.W1070.9 GROUND WATER

Keep ground water levels below the blinding level so that the cast concrete will not
be subjected to water pressure until it has attained sufficient strength.
CON1.W1080.9 REMEDIAL WORK TO LEAKS ETC.

Carry out remedial work required to eliminate any leaks and damp patches that occur,
and obtain Approval of method to be used.
MASS CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS

CON1.W1110.9 CONCRETE GRADE
Grade 20/20, unless otherwise specified.
CON1.W1120.9 ADDED STONES AND BOULDERS

The addition of granite stones or boulders will be Approved provided that their
weight does not exceed 20% of that of the finished concrete and that any two stones
or boulders are spaced at a clear distance of at least 225 mm.
CON1.W1130.9 WEEP HOLES

Build in 75 mm diameter plastic weep pipes through the full thickness of walls,
falling to the outside and spaced at staggered centres of 1.5 m.
CON1.W1140.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Comply with the provisions of CON1.W470 when specified grade strength greater
than 20 MPa and up to 60 MPa.
GROUND SLABS
CON1.W1210.9 LAYING UNDERLAYS TO SLABS LAID ON HARDCORE
Lap and tape underlays at least 300 mm at joints.
CON1.W1220.9 BLINDING LAYER

Unless otherwise specified, provide a blinding layer of Grade 15/20 concrete to
underside of all reinforced concrete works in contact with earth to the following
thicknesses:
1. Pilecaps and footings: 75 mm;
2. All other cases: 50 mm.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
KICKERS
CON1.W1310.9 WALLS AND COLUMNS
See CON2.W410 to CON2.W440.
CURING
CON1.W1410.9 METHODS OF CURING - GENERAL
1. Immediately after compaction, protect finished concrete against the harmful
effects of weather, running water and drying out;
2. Close any cracks developed on the concrete surface immediately while the
concrete is still plastic with suitable methods such as trowelling and brushing
before curing;
3. Ensure proper protection by using one of the following methods which are
minimum requirements and apply them for the minimum periods stated in
CON1.W1490:
a. Method A (as CON1.W1420): For all concrete slabs in domestic floors and
transfer structures except for areas which in the opinion of the CM are of
such irregular shape which renders the method impractical;
b. Method F (as CON1.W1470): For caps or footings where the least
dimension exceeds 500 mm;
c. Methods B, C, D or E (as CON1.W1430 to CON1.W1460): At the
Contractor's option for all other concrete elements including domestic floor
slabs and transfer structures with irregular shapes.
4. Where concrete is to be kept moist by spraying water for curing methods
stipulated in sub-clause (3), or during temporary removal of the protection to
facilitate construction stipulated in CON1.W1500, take due consideration and
necessary measures to avoid thermal shock to the concrete;
5. Agree with the CM within 4 weeks from the notified date of commencement of
the Works on the format and size of site works photographic records. Submit
one set of photographic records to the CM on each working day showing the
concrete surfaces being cured at all locations.
CON1.W1420.9 CURING - METHOD A

Cover the concrete with waterproof Approved tarpaulin sheets of good quality and
condition suitable for the intended purpose, and:
1. Make tarpaulin sheets to size to suit the shape, size and number of slab panels
such that the number of tarpaulin sheets to cover the area is as few as is practical;
2. Lap tarpaulin sheets 600 mm (minimum) at joints;
3. Effectively hold down the tarpaulin sheets during the curing period in such a
manner as not to damage the concrete surface;
4. Ensure the concrete is constantly moist;
5. For strips not more than 300 mm wide around walls or columns, use hessian or
similar absorbent material in lieu of tarpaulin sheets and keep constantly wet.
CON1.W1430.9 CURING - METHOD B

Except for surfaces against which concrete or applied finishes have subsequently to
be placed, cure the concrete by the application of an Approved liquid curing
compound and apply:
1. By means of a low-pressure spray at the rate recommended by the manufacturer;
2. On horizontal surfaces immediately after finishing the concrete;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. On vertical surfaces immediately after removing the formwork.
CON1.W1440.9 CURING - METHOD C

After thoroughly wetting, cover the concrete with polyethylene sheeting, lapped and
securely held in position in such a manner as not to damage the concrete surface, and
ensure the concrete is kept constantly moist.
CON1.W1450.9 CURING - METHOD D

Cover the concrete with a layer of fine aggregate minimum 25 mm thick, then
hessian, sacking, canvas or similar absorbent material, lapped and securely held in
position in such a manner as not to damage the concrete surface. Keep this covering
layer constantly wet.
CON1.W1460.9 CURING - METHOD E

1. Cover the concrete with polythene sheeting, lapped and securely held in position
in such a manner as not to damage the concrete surface, until the concrete has
hardened sufficiently for water curing to be carried out;
2. Water cure by spraying the concrete surface continuously with water or by
ponding immediately after the sheeting is removed.
CON1.W1470.9 CURING - METHOD F

1. Formwork is to be stripped at least 3 days after concreting;
2. After thoroughly wetting the concrete, cover the concrete with polyethylene
sheeting, lapped and securely held in position in such a manner as not to damage
the concrete surface, then cover the polyethylene sheeting with hessian bags, and
ensure the hessian bags are kept wet throughout the curing period. This also
applies to the locations of columns and walls with starter bars.
CON1.W1480.9 PROTECTION OF NEW CONCRETE FROM THE WEATHER

Provide adequate amount of polyethylene sheets to protect freshly placed concrete
against heavy rain as required or directed by the CM.
CON1.W1490.9 MINIMUM PERIODS OF PROTECTION FOR CONCRETE

1. Maintain the following minimum curing periods after the concrete has been
placed:
Minimum Periods of Protection of Concrete
Minimum Period of
Protection (Days)
Concrete
Concrete
not
Method of Containing
Type of Structure Containing
Protection PFA, PFAC
PFA, PFAC
or GGBS
or GGBS
Aqueous liquid retaining and B 7 7
watertight structures
Aqueous liquid retaining and C, D, E 7 9
watertight structures
Cap or footing where the least B 7 7
dimension exceed 500 mm
F 10 10
Others B 7 7
Others A, C, D, E 4 5
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Minimum Periods of Protection of Concrete

Minimum Period of
Protection (Days)
Concrete
Concrete
not
Method of Containing
Type of Structure Containing
Protection PFA, PFAC
PFA, PFAC
or GGBS
or GGBS
Transfer structure A 10 10
2. The figures given in the above table may be reduced by the number of days
during which formwork has been left in place.
CON1.W1500.9 TEMPORARY REMOVAL OF PROTECTION

Where protection to concrete slabs must temporarily be removed to facilitate setting
out or other follow-up operations, ensure that the exposed concrete is adequately
sprayed with water and kept moist for the duration of these operations and that the
protective covering is restored as soon as practicable.
CON1.W1510.9 ENHANCED CURING CONTROL IN ROOF SLAB

1. In addition to the curing measures in CON1.W1410, provide the following
enhanced curing control to the roof slab of domestic blocks:
a. Artificial fogging from nozzles to the concrete slab surface immediately
after concrete is cast until the slab is proper protected;
b. Ensure that the protection is implemented at the shortest possible time but
shall not be more than two hours under all circumstances.
2. Where specified in Project Specific Specification, cast the wing slabs and central
core slab in separate pours and allow for late cast strips between the slabs.
LOADING NEW CONCRETE STRUCTURES

CON1.W1610.9 LIMITATIONS
Unless otherwise specified, do not subject concrete at any time to a loading which
will induce a compressive stress exceeding 33% of the compressive strength of the
concrete at the time of loading, or of the grade strength whichever is the least and:
1. When determining the loading, make due allowance for the self-weight of the
concrete;
2. For the purpose of this clause, the assessment of the strength of concrete and the
stresses produced by the loads is subject to Approval.
WORKED FINISHES TO CONCRETE

CON1.W1710.9 TYPES OF FINISH
Apply to the following finishes where shown or scheduled on the Drawings and
execute in an Approved manner:
1. Wood float: to give an even textured surface;
2. Steel trowel or power float: to give a smooth untextured surface;
3. Scratch with a stiff brush: to give a slightly roughened even texture;
4. Tamp with the edge of a board: to give an even texture of parallel ribs.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.W1720.9 ADDED CEMENT OR WATER

Do not, without Approval:
1. Wet the surface to assist working;
2. Add cement to produce the specified finish.
CON1.W1730.9 PROTECTION OF LIVING ROOM FLOORS

Protect from damage the power float finish of all living room floor slabs of domestic
flats. Obtain Approval for method of protection.
APPLIED SURFACE FINISHES

CON1.W1810.9 HARDENING
Where shown or scheduled on the Drawings mix the concrete with an Approved
hardening admixture in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CON1.W1820.9 SURFACE HARDENING

Where shown or scheduled on the Drawings, apply an Approved liquid surface
hardener in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CON1.W1830.9 METALLIC OR MINERAL TREATMENTS

Where shown or scheduled on the Drawings, apply an Approved metallic or mineral
surface treatment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CRACK REPAIR
All visual cracks to hardened structural and non-structural concrete in domestic and
non-domestic buildings discovered during the construction period and/or
Maintenance Period, whether they are less than, equal to or greater than the
calculated maximum crack width as stated in Code of Practice for Structural Use of
Concrete 2013, shall be regarded as defects, imperfections or faults for which the
Contractor is liable under GCC Clause 10.3(2), unless such cracks are proved by the
Contractor to be due to a design fault of the Authority. If any cracks prove to be due
to a design fault of the Authority, then the expense incurred in any investigation and
remedial work carried out by the Contractor, as hereunder specified, will be valued
in accordance with GCC Clause 10.3(3).
CON1.W1920.9 INVESTIGATION
Investigate all visual cracks as directed by the CM and repair in accordance with the
classification methods described in the Table contained in CON1.W1990.
CON1.W1930.9 METHOD STATEMENT

Before commencement of repairs to cracks, submit, for Approval, a method
statement detailing the materials and methods to be used.
CON1.W1940.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

1. Take responsibility for initiating the inspection of cracks and the programming
of subsequent remedial repairs to ensure all such cracks are repaired before
hand-over of the structures to the Authority;
2. Likewise define and repair all visible cracks discovered during the Maintenance
Period in accordance with the remaining clauses in this Section.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.W1950.9 PROCEDURE FOR CLASSIFICATION - TYPE OF MEMBER

Types of elements are classified in this specification as follows:
1. (U) All concrete placed below ground level which is not part of a water-retaining
structure or water barrier;
2. (S) Slabs (including ribbed slabs): horizontal or inclined elements of concrete in
which two dimensions in the horizontal or inclined plane exceed the dimension
in the vertical plane;
3. (B) Beams: horizontal elements of concrete in which one dimension in the
horizontal plane exceeds the other dimension in the horizontal plane and also
exceeds the dimension in the vertical plane;
4. (W) Walls: vertical elements of concrete in which one dimension in the vertical
plane and one dimension in the horizontal plane both exceed the other dimension
in the horizontal plane;
5. (C) Columns: vertical elements in which one dimension in the vertical plane
exceeds the other two dimensions in the horizontal plane.
CON1.W1960.9 PROCEDURE FOR CLASSIFICATION - WIDTH OF CRACK

Determine the width of the crack at the surface of the concrete with the aid of a
transparent sheet on which lines of different width are printed or by examining the
crack with a low power microscope incorporating a measuring graticule. The
classifications of crack width in this specification are:
1. F: maximum width at any point 0.3 mm or less.
2. C: maximum width at any point greater than 0.3 mm.
CON1.W1970.9 PROCEDURE FOR CLASSIFICATION - DEPTH OF CRACK

Determine the depth of a crack in one of the following ways:
1. Slabs: observe whether water on the top surface of the slab passes through the
crack and can be seen as a moistened patch on the underside of the slab:
a. If water is seen to pass through the slab, the crack is deemed to be a through
crack of type T;
b. In all other cases it is deemed to be a non-through crack of type NT.
2. In all other elements, if the line of the crack on one surface can be traced on
another surface parallel to the first surface or in the case of a beam, if the crack
can be seen to traverse two adjacent surfaces in different planes, it is deemed to
be a through crack of type T;
3. If a crack follows an irregular pattern on one surface of an element only and is
branched at least two points it is deemed to be a non-through crack of type NT.
CON1.W1980.9 METHODS OF REMEDIAL REPAIR

Use the following permissible methods for rectifying cracks according to the overall
classification of the crack as given in the table in CON1.W1990:
1. Simply surface seal the crack by brushing into it, wherever it is visible, a coat of
heavy grade bitumastic paint or other approved durable inert waterproof material;
2. Fill the crack by brushing in dry cement and moistening after the treatment;
3. Brush cement grout or cement paint into the crack until it appears to be filled;
4. Cut a V-groove and fill with repair mortar, applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, or other equivalent Approved material;
5. Seal by arranging for a low viscosity polymer resin to flow, under the influence
of gravity or injection, into the crack to fill it and harden;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Inject epoxy resin under pressure into the crack until it exudes at weep holes
located so as to ensure that when this occurs the crack may reasonably be
expected to have been completely filled and all air to have been displaced by
resin; and
7. Apply the method in sub-clause (6), and a coat of heavy grade bitumastic paint
over the surface of the crack or other method as approved by CM.
CON1.W1990.9 REPAIR ACCORDING TO CLASSIFICATION

Carry out crack repair according to the treatment method in the following table
unless otherwise instructed by CM:
Element Width Depth Treatment
Method
U: Underground Sub-clauses of
S: Slabs F: 0.3 mm or less NT: Non-through CON1.W1980:
B: Beams C: >0.3 mm T: Through (1), (2), (3), (4),
W-C: Wall/Columns (5), (6) or (7)
U F NT, T (1)
C NT, T (7)
S F NT (2)
S (Soffit only) F NT (3)
S F T (5)
S C NT (3)
S C T (5)
B F NT (3)
B F T (5)
B C NT (4)
B C T (6)
W-C F NT (3)
W-C F T (5)
W-C C NT (4)
W-C C T (5)
CON1.W2000.N ASSESSMENT OF CUBE AND CORE TESTS RESULTS FOR PROPOSED

HIGHER GRADE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
1. Propose to use higher grade strength of concrete for superstructure and external
works to enhance works quality and/or resolve construction difficulties for the
CM’s Approval when necessary at Contractor’s own cost and time. The CM
may approve the proposal at his own discretion and the Approval shall not
relieve the Contractor from any responsibility imposed by the Contract;
2. The cube and core test results of the proposed higher grade concrete shall be
assessed in accordance with the following:
a. Cube tests of the concrete shall be assessed based on the proposed higher
grade strength in accordance with Clauses CON1.T620 to CON1.T660. If
any of the cube test results, except for the results from CON1.T640 (1)(d)
and CON1.T660 (1), does not comply with the strength requirements for the
proposed higher grade strength of concrete but comply with the grade
strength of concrete as specified in the Drawings for the concrete structures
concerned, no further concrete core test to CON1.T750 (3) is required;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Core tests of the concrete shall be assessed based on the grade strength of
concrete as specified in the Drawings in accordance with Clause
CON1.T760.
3. Bear all associated costs and the extra time for complying with the requirements
of this clause.
TOLERANCES
1. For tolerances other than civil engineering works and slopeworks, refer to:
a. Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013 published by the BD;
b. Appendix H "Schedule of Tolerances" to this Specification;
c. Where any ambiguity, discrepancy or conflict arises between sub-clauses 1(a)
and 1(b) above, the provisions given in Appendix H shall prevail.
2. For any abrupt projections in excess of 5 mm at inner surfaces of liftwell walls:
a. Use Approved non-shrink cementitious material to form a hard smooth
surface to splay the abrupt projections, to an angle of not less than 75º from
the horizontal plane, and extend for a distance of not less than 20 mm;
b. Submit remedial details for the CM's approval.
3. For civil engineering works and slopeworks, tolerances given in this
Worksection should be read in conjunction with additional tolerances given in
Worksection FOR. Tolerances on joints:
a. The best fit straight line of straight joints shall be within 25 mm of a
specified line. The line of straight joints shall be within 10 mm of the best
fit straight line;
b. The best fit curved line of curved joints shall be as agreed by the CM and
shall be within 25 mm of the specified line. The line of curved joints shall
be within 10 mm of the best fit curved line;
c. Joints shall be continuous across intersections of joints to within 5 mm of the
best fit straight lines or best fit curved lines of each joint.

INSITU CONCRETE CON1 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
TRIALS OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

CON1.T010.9 REQUIREMENT FOR TRIAL MIXES
1. Trial mixes are not required for Designed concrete mix of grade strength 20 MPa
and below;
2. Where a Designed concrete mix of grade strength above 20 MPa is to be used,
carry out trial mixes to determine the suitability of the proposed mix proportions
for production of concrete of the required quality, at the intended workability for
compaction of the concrete in the position, shape and location as described on
the Drawings.
CON1.T020.9 TIMING OF TRIALS

Prepare trial mixes on receipt of the Approval of the mix design under CON1.M1110
and complete at least 35 days before commencement of concreting.
CON1.T030.9 PLANT AND LABORATORY TRIALS

Testing arrangements:
1. Make trial mixes for Approved mix designs details under CON1.M1110 using
the plant proposed for the Works for Plant Trials and in an Approved Laboratory
for Laboratory Mix Trials. Sample the concrete, make and test concrete cubes in
accordance with CS1:2010;
2. Plant Trials may be required, if test or trial mix data for designed concrete mix
of the proposed grade with similar materials to that of the proposed mix and
produced in plant other than that proposed for the Works are submitted and are
acceptable to the CM;
3. Laboratory Mix Trials may be required, if test or trial mix data for designed
concrete mix of similar grade or with different materials to that of the proposed
mix and produced in plant proposed for the Works are submitted and are
acceptable to the CM;
4. Laboratory Mix Trials may be required in addition to Plant Trials, if no
satisfactory test or trial mix data for designed mix concrete or if test or trial mix
data submitted do not demonstrate the suitability of the proposed plant and mix
design.
CON1.T040.A PROCEDURE OF PLANT TRIALS FOR CONCRETE FROM SINGLE

BATCHING PLANT
Testing samples:
1. Make one trial mix on each of three different days for each mix design using
materials typical of the proposed supply, the volume of each to be at least 60%
of the nominal volume of the mixer's discharge;
2. Take three samples on each day from each mix in accordance with the sampling
method stipulated in CS1:2010;
3. Allow sufficient size of each sample for the following:
a. Carry out one slump test or one flow table test as instructed by the CM to
determine the workability;
b. Make two test cubes for compressive strength test at 28 days.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. For the GGBS concrete in the production of precast facade, precast staircase,
precast refuse chute, precast partition wall and precast concrete panel, make two
additional test cubes on each day for compressive strength test at the time of
demoulding.
CON1.T045.9 PROCEDURE OF PLANT TRIALS FOR MIXING CONCRETES FROM

TWO BATCHING PLANTS WITH DIFFERENT CEMENT SOURCES
The two concrete mixes from two different batching plants (plant A and plant B)
shall be added with water and mixed at their batching plants within 10 minutes from
each other. Upon delivery to testing area, the two concrete mixes shall be mixed
together following the mix proportions shown below:
1. 100% from plant A + 0% from plant B (unmixed concrete A);
2. 80% from plant A + 20% from plant B;
5. 0% from plant A + 100% from plant B (unmixed concrete B).
Testing samples:
1. Make one trial mix on each of three different days for each mixed concrete of
the three different mix proportions and each of the two unmixed concretes
mentioned above, using materials typical of the proposed supply, the volume of
each to be at least 60% of the nominal volume of the mixer's discharge;
2. Take three samples on each day from each mixed concrete of the three different
mix proportions and each of the two unmixed concrete in accordance with the
sampling method stipulated in CS1:2010;
a. Carry out one slump test or one flow table test as instructed by the CM to
b. Make two test cubes for compressive strength test at 28 days.
CON1.T050.9 PROCEDURE OF LABORATORY MIX TRIALS

Testing samples:
1. Make 3 separate batches of concrete for each mix design using materials typical
of the proposed supply;
2. Take one sample from each batch in accordance with the sampling method
stipulated in CS1:2010;
a. Carry out two slump tests or two flow table tests as instructed by the CM to
b. Make six test cubes for compressive strength test at 28 days.
CON1.T070.9 STANDARD FOR APPROVAL OF PLANT TRIALS FOR CONCRETE

FROM SINGLE BATCHING PLANT
1. The results of tests for compressive strength at 28 days of the test cubes must
comply with the following requirements:
a. The average strength of the eighteen test cubes exceeds the specified
characteristic strength by at least 12 MPa;
b. The compressive strength of each individual test cube exceeds the specified
characteristic strength by at least 5 MPa.
2. The results of tests for workability must comply with the following requirements:
a. Slump test:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
i. The range of the three measured slump values for each of the three days
must not exceed the average of the three measured slump values by
±20%;
ii. The average of the nine measured slump values for the three days must
fall within ±20 mm or ±25% of the designed slump value, whichever is
the greater.
b. Flow table test:
i. The range of the three measured flow values for each of the three days
must not exceed the designed flow value by ±70 mm;
ii. The average of the nine measured flow values for the three days must
fall within ±50 mm of the designed flow value.
3. The results of tests on compressive strength of concrete in precast concrete
components at demoulding of the test cubes must comply with the following
requirement:
a. The compressive strength of each individual test cube attains a compressive
strength of at least 15 MPa.
CON1.T075.9 STANDARD FOR APPROVAL OF PLANT TRIALS FOR MIXING

CONCRETE FROM TWO BATCHING PLANTS WITH DIFFERENT
CEMENT SOURCES
1. The results of tests for compressive strength at 28 days of the five mixed
concretes, consisted of the three different mix proportions and the two unmixed
concretes, stipulated in CON1.T045 must comply with the following
requirements:
a. The average strength of the 90 test cubes, consisted of the 18 test cubes from
each of the five mixed concretes prepared on the three days, exceeds the
specified characteristic strength by at least 12MPa;
characteristic strength by at least 5 MPa.
2. The results of tests for workability of the five mixed concretes, consisted of the
three different mix proportions and the two unmixed concretes, stipulated in
CON1.T045 must comply with the following requirements:
a. Slump test:
i. The range of the 15 measured slump values, consisted of the three
measured slump values from each of the five mixed concretes taken on
each of the three days, must not exceed the average of the 15 measured
slump values by ±20%;
ii. The average of the 45 measured slump values, consisted of the nine
the three days, must fall within ±20 mm or ±25% of the designed slump
value, whichever is the greater.
b. Flow table test:
i. The range of the 15 measured flow values, consisted of the three
each of the three days, must not exceed the designed flow value by
±70 mm;
ii. The average of the 45 measured flow values, consisted of the nine
the three days, must fall within ±50 mm of the designed flow value.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.T080.9 STANDARD FOR APPROVAL OF LABORATORY MIX TRIALS

1. Except for concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse aggregates,
the results of tests for compressive strength at 28 days of the test cubes must
comply with the following requirements:
a. The average strength of the eighteen test cubes exceeds the specified grade
strength by at least 14 MPa, or 10 MPa if test data submitted show that the
operating standard deviation of the proposed plant does not exceed 5.5 MPa
and the data are acceptable to the CM;
grade strength by at least 7 MPa, or 3 MPa if test data submitted show that
the operating standard deviation of the proposed plant does not exceed
5.5 MPa and the data are acceptable to the CM.
2. For concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse aggregates, the
compressive strength of each individual test cube at 28 days shall exceed the
specified grade strength by at least 6 MPa;
3. The results of tests for workability must comply with the following requirements:
a. Slump test: the average of the six measured slump values for the three
batches must fall within ±20 mm or ±25% of the designed slump value,
whichever is the greater;
b. Flow table test: the average of the six measured flow values for the three
batches must fall within ±50 mm of the designed flow value.
CON1.T085.9 PROVISIONAL APPROVAL OF PLANT AND LABORATORY MIX

TRIALS
Provisional approval of the proposed mixes based on 7-days cube results may be
given provided that the following are satisfied:
1. Prepare test cubes (from the corresponding batch of concrete taken for 28-days
strength test) for compressive strength test at 7 days in accordance with
CON1.T040 and CON1.T050;
2. The results of tests for compressive strength at 7 days of the test cubes must
comply with CON1.T070 and CON1.T080 except that the specified grade
strength (and the difference between average strength/individual compressive
strength and specified grade strength) given in CON1.T070 and CON1.T080 can
be reduced by 25%;
3. The results of tests for workability comply with the specified requirements;
4. If the results of tests for compressive strength at 28 days of the test cubes are
subsequently found not to comply with CON1.T070 and CON1.T080, the
provisional approval of concrete shall be nullified. The concrete cast for the
works based on the provisional approval shall be deemed to be unacceptable and
where necessary, carry out Approved remedial works and bear all the cost and
time of such works.
CON1.T090.9 NON-COMPLIANCE
If the result of any test for workability or strength of trial mix concrete, whether the
trial mix concrete is as stated in CON1.T040 or as stated in CON1.T045, does not
comply with the specified requirements, particulars of proposed changes to details of
mix design under CON1.M1110 shall be submitted to the CM for Approval. Further
trial mixes are to be made until the results of every test complies with the specified
requirements of trial mix concrete.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.T100.9 VARIATIONS TO APPROVED MIXES

When the mix has been Approved do not make variations in the proportions and
sources of materials or in the type, size and grading of aggregates without the
consent of the CM, who may require further trial mixes to be made.
CON1.T110.9 PRACTICAL TESTS FOR SUITABILITY OF THE MIX

The CM may also require practical tests to be made on Site by filling trial moulds or
by pumping to confirm the suitability of the mix for the Works. Ensure that, in such
tests, the type of plant used for mixing, transporting and placing, the method of
compaction used, the formwork face to the mould and the size and disposition of
reinforcement are similar in all respects to those intended for use in the Works.
CON1.T120.9 CERTIFIED EVIDENCE OF MIX SUITABILITY

Trial mixes need not be made, if test or trial mix data for designed concrete mix of
the proposed grade with similar materials to that of the proposed mix and produced
in the plant proposed for the Works are submitted and are acceptable to the CM.
SAMPLING AND TESTING GENERALLY

CON1.T205.9 GENERAL
When Instructed:
1. Arrange and provide attendance necessary for the sampling of cement, PFA,
GGBS, aggregates (excluding recycled aggregates) and other concrete
constituent materials by the DTC; and
2. Submit the samples to the CM in accordance with CON1.T220 to CON1.T240.
CON1.T210.9 DEFINITION OF "BATCH"

In this Specification:
1. A batch of cement, PFA, GGBS, aggregate, admixture or curing compound is
defined as any quantity of the material of the same type, manufactured or
produced at the same time in the same place, covered by the same certificates
and delivered to the site, or stored at the ready-mixed concrete plant, at any one
time;
2. A batch of fresh concrete for testing purposes is as defined in clause 1.2 of
CS1:2010.
CON1.T220.9 SAMPLES FOR TESTING BY DIRECT TESTING CONTRACTOR (DTC)

When Instructed, arrange and submit to the CM, one sample of each type of material,
from each specified concreting day that the concrete is placed in the permanent work,
for testing by Direct Testing Contractors (DTC) employed by the Housing Authority.
CON1.T230.9 TESTING PROGRAMME

For recycled aggregates to be tested by DTC, ascertain and allow sufficient time for
carrying out the tests and issue of test results by DTC.
CON1.T240.9 SAMPLE SIZES

When Instructed, take samples of the sizes and using the methods of sampling stated
in the Table below:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sample Sizes and Methods of Sampling

Material Size of Sample Method of Sampling
Cement 20 kg BS EN 196-7:2007
PFA 20 kg BS EN 196-7:2007
GGBS 20 kg BS EN 196-7:2007
PFAC 20 kg BS EN 196-7:2007
Coarse Aggregate 50 kg CS3:2013 Section 8
Fine Aggregate 10 kg CS3:2013 Section 8
Water 10 litre BS EN 1008:2002
Admixture
(powdered) 1 kg BS EN 934-2:2009+A1:2012
(liquid) 1 litre BS EN 934-2:2009+A1:2012
Curing compound 5 litre BS EN 934-2:2009+A1:2012 /
BS7542:1992
SAMPLING
CON1.T320.9 COARSE AND FINE AGGREGATES
1. Except for recycled coarse aggregates, the DTC shall sample coarse and fine
aggregates at each stockpile and carry out sieve analyses only when instructed
by the CM;
2. For recycled coarse aggregates from a particular source, the DTC shall carry out
tests stipulated in CON1.T410 once at the start of the Contract and at weekly
intervals thereafter.
CON1.T330.9 WATER FOR MAKING CONCRETE

1. If clean fresh water from Water Supplies Department mains supply is not
available, provide:
a. One sample of water at the same time as particulars of the water are
submitted to the CM in accordance with PRE.B10.1230 or PRE.C11.090 as
appropriate; and
b. One sample of water, for testing by the DTC, during each month that the
concrete is being placed in the permanent work unless otherwise Approved.
2. For recycled water specified in CON1.M320:
a. Arrange to use laboratories which have obtained HOKLAS accreditation to
carry out the required tests, unless otherwise permitted by the CM;
b. Obtain samples of recycled water at each batching plant for testing by the
Approved laboratory according to the test frequency in the following table:
Property Limit Test method Test
frequency
(i) Density ≤ 1,030 kg/m³ BS 718:1991 Appendix E At least once
(Alternative test method per day
may be used subject to the
CM's approval)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Property Limit Test method Test

frequency
(ii) Initial setting time Deviation not BS EN 196- Once every 3
of cement with earlier than 1 hour 3:2005+A1:2008 months for the
recycled water and not later than first year; once
1.5 hour as from every 6
that of control months for
cubes (Test in subsequent
parallel with those years
using recycled
water is required
on control cubes
using clean fresh
water only to
determine the
initial setting time
and the deviation)
(iii) Chloride content Once every
(as Cl) week for the
first two
- Prestressed ≤ 500 ppm American Public Health months; once
concrete or Association (APHA) every month
steam cured Standard, APHA 4500-Cl- for subsequent
structural B, 18th edition (1992) months
concrete
- Concrete with ≤ 1,000 ppm APHA 4500-Cl-B, 18th
reinforcement edition (1992)
or other
embedded metal
(iv) Sulphate content ≤ 3,000 ppm APHA 4500-SO42-C, 18th
(as SO4) edition (1992)
(v) Acid-soluble alkali ≤ 600 ppm BS EN 1008:2002
content
c. Submit test reports to the CM to show that the recycled water is in

compliance with this Specification;
d. If the test results do not comply with the limits:
i. Suspend the use of recycled water immediately and carry out
investigation to propose remedial works;
ii. Submit two sets of consecutive satisfactory test results taken from the
same source for the CM's consideration to resume the use of recycled
water for subsequent concrete mixing.
CON1.T340.9 FRESH CONCRETE

1. Sampling of concrete for testing will be carried out by the DTC in accordance
with the requirements given in CS1:2010 and as follows:
a. Location of batches to be sampled: as required by the CM;
b. The times of day at which samples are taken will be at random;
c. Frequency of sampling for compressive strength testing:
i. Except for concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse
aggregates or concrete of grade strength higher than 60MPa, the
sampling rates are as set out in the table below, provided that a
minimum of one sample is taken from each mix of concrete produced on
any one day. Where the type of structure is not specified all concrete is
deemed to be for 'other types' of structure;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sampling Rates of Fresh Concrete for Compressive Strength Testing

Types of Structure Approximate quantity of concrete to be
represented by each sample
Masts, Cantilevers with 10 m³or 10 batches whichever is the
span 3 m, Prestressed smaller volume
elements, Columns and
shear walls, Transfer
beams and transfer plates,
other critical elements
Other types 25 m³or 25 batches whichever is the
smaller volume
Solid rafts, Pile caps, Mass 100 m³or 100 batches whichever is the
concrete smaller volume
ii. For concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse aggregates,
make four test cubes for compressive strength testing on each concreting
day, two to be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days;
iii. For concrete of grade 15/20 or below, take a minimum of one sample
per 100 m³, irrespective of concreting day, for compressive strength test;
iv. For high strength concrete of grade strength higher than 60 MPa, take at
least one sample of concrete from every ready mixed vehicle arriving on
Site. If the concrete is site batched, take a minimum of one sample per
every 10 m³, irrespective of concreting day, for compressive strength
test.
d. To determine the workability of the concrete: one sample of concrete from
each batch of concrete;
e. The CM may agree to a reduced frequency of sampling for exceptionally
large pours;
f. For concrete used for construction of hoardings and associated covered
walkways and gantries, the frequency of sampling stated in the sub-clauses
(1)(c) and 1(d) above may be reduced at the discretion of the CM;
g. For blinding layer concrete to underside of pile caps and suspended ground
slabs / beams in contact with earth, the tests stated in sub-clauses (1)(c) and
1(d) above are not required.
2. Tests on workability, making and curing of concrete cubes for precast concrete
components shall be carried out by the Contractor / manufacturer of the precast
concrete components. Tests on compressive strength of concrete cubes shall be
carried out by the DTC and / or HDMTL.
CON1.T350.9 FACILITIES FOR SAMPLING FRESH CONCRETE

Provide, at the normal point or points of discharge of the mixer, a mobile
shelter/shelters to accommodate workability test and cube making processes.
TESTS ON AGGREGATES
CON1.T410.9 STANDARD
1. The DTC shall test recycled coarse aggregates for the following properties:
Requirements Limits Testing Method
Minimum dry particle density 2000 kg/m³ CS3:2013 Section 17

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Requirements Limits Testing Method

Maximum water absorption 10% CS3:2013 Section 17
Maximum content of wood 0.5% Manual sorting in
and other material less dense accordance with BRE
than water (by mass) Digest 433
Maximum content of other 1.0% Manual sorting in
foreign material (e.g. metals, accordance with BRE
plastics, clay lumps, asphalt Digest 433
and tar, glass etc.) (by mass)
Maximum fines (by mass) 4% CS3:2013 Section 10
Maximum content of sand 5% m/m CS3:2013 Section 10
(<4 mm) (by mass)
Maximum content of sulphate 1% m/m CS3:2013 Section 21
(by mass)
Flakiness index 40% CS3:2013 Section 11
10% fines test 100 kN CS3:2013 Section 16
Grading Table 3.1 of CS3:2013 Section 10
CS3:2013 for
single-sized
20 mm and 10 mm
aggregates
Maximum chloride content Table 5.1 of CS3:2013 Section 21
CS3:2013 - 0.05%
by mass of
chloride ion of
combined
aggregate
Alkali-silica reactivity Table 10 of CS1:2010 Section 22
CS1:2010 for for ultra-accelerated
ultra-accelerated mortar bar test
mortar bar test CS1:2010 Section 23
Table 13 of for concrete prism test
CS1:2010 for
concrete prism test
2. Limits of acceptance in accordance with the values in the Table above.
CON1.T420.9 FURTHER ANALYSIS

The CM may require further analysis, including submission stated in CON1.M210,
to be made if there is any alteration to the type of aggregate.
TESTS FOR WORKABILITY

1. Sample for workability testing shall:
a. Be in accordance with CS1:2010;
b. Not be taken from the first 0.3 m³ and the last 0.3 m³ of concrete discharged
from the truck;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. Be remixed and divided into two specimens. Each specimen shall be tested
by DTC to determine the workability of the concrete either by the slump test
or by the flow table test all in accordance with CS1:2010.
2. Unless otherwise specified by the CM, adopt the testing method for workability
as below:
Normal Workability High Workability
(designed slump value (designed flow value
from 20 mm to 200 mm) from 340 mm to 600 mm)
Slump Test Flow Table Test
(For designed slump value exceeding
175mm and ≤ 200mm, see the Note to
Clause 2.1.1 of CS1)
3. Notwithstanding the sampling requirement specified in sub-clause (1)(b) above,
the first 0.3 m³ discharged concrete may be used in the Works provided that:
a. The discharged concrete is properly protected from contamination to CM's
satisfaction; and
b. The measured workability of the concrete is in compliance with this
Specification.
4. For pre-batched concrete or concrete with volume less than 1 m3 as defined in
Clause 1.2 of CS1:2010, the requirement to disregard the first 0.3 m3 and the last
0.3m3 of concrete before sampling from a mixer for making concrete cube is
waived.
CON1.T520.9 ACCEPTANCE VALUES FOR APPROVED MIXES

1. The Approved workability value is that used to produce the mix Approved under
CON1.T010 to CON1.T120;
2. For standardised designed mixes: the average of two measured slumps shall be
within the corresponding range specified in Table A of CON1.M1020;
3. For designed concrete mixes:
a. Where slump test is used to determine the workability, the average of the
two measured slumps must fall within ±25 mm or ±33% of the Approved
designed slump value, whichever is greater, up to the limit of ±50 mm. No
correction to the nearest 5 mm shall be made in determining the average of
the measured slumps and the acceptance limits;
b. Where flow table test is used, the average of the two measured flow values
must fall within ±60 mm of the Approved designed flow value, and no
correction to the nearest 10 mm shall be made in determining the average of
the measured flow values.
4. The CM may reject any concrete for which the measured workability falls
outside the limits specified in sub-clauses (2) and (3) as appropriate.
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF

CONCRETE CUBES
CON1.T610.9 STANDARD FOR CUBE TESTS
1. For compressive strength testing on concrete cast on Site, the DTC will take
samples, make, cure and test concrete cubes of 100 mm size in accordance with
CS1:2010;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. For compressive strength testing on concrete cast at manufacturer’s factory, the

Contractor / manufacturer of precast concrete components shall take samples,
make and cure the concrete cubes of 100 mm size and the DTC and / or HDMTL
shall test the concrete cubes in accordance with CS1:2010.
CON1.T620.9 SAMPLES FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

Testing samples:
1. Prepare two cubes from a single sample taken at random from a batch of
concrete selected at random as follows:
a. At the point of discharge from the mixer; or,
b. In the case of ready-mixed concrete, at the point of discharge from the
delivery vehicle; or
c. Elsewhere as directed by the CM;
d. In no case to be from the first 0.3 m³of concrete discharged from the truck.
2. For concrete cast on Site, Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) tag to be
provided and installed on the surface of each cube by the Direct Testing
Contractor, to authenticate the identity of the cube throughout the whole testing
process. A typical RFID tag is shown on Sketch no. RFID/TAG/SK-01;
3. For concrete cast at manufacturer’s factory where precast concrete components
are constructed, Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) tag is to be provided by
DTC or the CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory, and is
to be installed by the manufacturer’s factory, to authenticate the identity of the
cube throughout the whole testing process. A typical RFID tag is shown on
Sketch no. RFID/TAG/SK-01;
4. On completion of curing for 28 days, the two tagged cubes will be tested and the
average of the two results taken as the test result;
5. If requested, or if the CM instructs that the concrete be tested for compressive
strength at ages other than 28 days, provide additional samples;
6. Take cubes with installed RFID tags for 7 days work cube compressive strength
tests at a frequency of 2 cubes per concrete mix used per day for all concreting
days, or at any other frequency as considered appropriate by the CM.
CON1.T630.9 RESULTS FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

1. The results of tests on compressive strength at 28 days of designed mix concrete
must comply with the following requirements:
a. Individual test results: to comply with the strength determined from limits
given in Column A in the Table to CON1.T650 below;
b. Average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results:
to comply with the strength determined from limits given in Column B in
the Table in CON1.T650 below. Where there are less than four available
test results, treat the average of the first two or first three consecutive test
results in the same manner as groups of four consecutive test results.
2. If the difference between the compressive strengths of 2 test cubes made from
one sample of designed mix concrete exceeds 15% but does not exceed 20% of
the test result:
a. Use the higher of the compressive strengths of the 2 test cubes to assess
compliance as stated in sub-clause (1)(a) above; and
b. Do not use the test results for that sample to assess compliance as set out in
sub-clause (1)(b) above nor to calculate the standard deviation.
3. If the difference between the compressive strengths of 2 test cubes made from
one sample of designed mix concrete exceeds 20% of the test result:
a. Discard the test result for that sample; and
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Propose investigation for Approval to establish if the concrete represented

by the sample is acceptable or not.
CON1.T640.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

1. Except for concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse aggregates,
a. Apply compliance criteria C3 given in the table to CON1.T650 for concrete
of grade below 20;
b. Adopt compliance criteria C2 under the following conditions for concrete of
grade 20 and above:
i. Where there is sufficient previous production data using similar
materials from the same plant under similar supervision to establish that
the standard deviation for at least 40 test results will not exceed 5.5 MPa;
or
ii. Where the calculated standard deviation of 40 previous consecutive test
results does not exceed 5.5 MPa.
c. Adopt compliance criteria C1 if compliance criteria C2 in sub-clause (1)(b)
is not applicable;
d. For concrete grade 20 and above, the standard deviation is the standard
deviation for each mix of concrete to be calculated after every test result
using the last 40 test results judged by the same compliance criteria. Apply
compliance criteria C2 to subsequent test results if the standard deviation
does not exceed 5.5 MPa. Apply compliance criteria C1 to subsequent test
results if the standard deviation exceeds 5.5 MPa.
2. For concrete of grade strength 20 MPa with recycled coarse aggregates, the
result of any test on compressive strength shall not be less than:
a. 70% of the grade strength when tested at 7 days; or
b. The grade strength when tested at 28 days.
3. If the compliance criteria is changed from C1 to C2 or from C2 to C1, in the
table to CON1.T650, apply the new compliance criteria from the 35th day after
making the last pair of test cubes in the set of 40 on which the decision to change
was based. For the purpose of sub-clause CON1.T630 (1)(b), treat test results
immediately before and after the change separately.
CON1.T650.9 TABLE OF COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR DESIGNED CONCRETE

MIXES
The specified grade strength for concrete shall deem to have been attained if the test
results comply with both of the requirements specified in Column A and Column B
of the table below:
Strength compliance requirements for designed concrete mixes
Column A Column B
Specified Compliance Individual test result Average of any 4
Grade Criteria must not be less than consecutive test
Strength the specified grade results must exceed
strength by the specified grade
strength by
20 and above C1 2 MPa 7 MPa
C2 2 MPa 5 MPa
Below 20 C3 2 MPa 3 MPa

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.T660.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

1. When the following situation occurs, place no further concrete in the permanent
work until an investigation of the materials, mix design and methods of
production has been carried out and measures have been taken which, in the
opinion of the CM, will result in restoring a satisfactory standard of quality
control:
a. For concrete grade not exceeding 60D, the calculated standard deviation
exceeds 8.5 MPa;
b. For concrete grade exceeding 60D, the coefficient of variation as calculated
after every 40 test results exceeds 14%.
2. If the average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test
results, or the first two or first three consecutive test results if applicable, fails to
meet the requirement of Column B in table to CON1.T650, then all the concrete
in all the batches represented by the samples to be deemed defective. For the
purposes of this clause, the batches of concrete represented by a group of two,
three or four consecutive test results include the batches from which the first and
last samples in the group were taken together with all the intervening batches.
When there is a period exceeding two weeks between any two consecutive test
results in a group, the CM may direct that the test results immediately before and
immediately after the intervening period be treated separately;
3. If any individual test result fails to meet the requirement in Column A of the
Table to CON1.T650, then that result may be considered to represent only the
particular batch of concrete from which the sample was taken, provided that the
average of any 4 consecutive results, which contained the failed individual test
result, satisfies the requirement of Column B of the Table.
CON1.T670.9 FURTHER TESTS ON DESIGNED CONCRETE MIXES

If the strength requirements of this Specification are not satisfied, comply with any
Instruction of the CM for further testing, including chemical analysis of samples of
hardened concrete in the structure, that he considers necessary.

CONCRETE CORES
CON1.T710.9 GENERAL
Provide all necessary facilities and attendance for coring and testing of concrete
cores carried out by DTC.
1. Comply with CS1:2010 in respect of the method of preparing, inspecting and
testing concrete cores to determine compressive strength;
2. Witness the sampling of cores by the DTC who shall avoid the following
concrete as far as practicable:
a. The top 50 mm or 20% layer of concrete in a lift, whichever is the greater,
where the depth of lift is less than 1.5 m;
b. The top 300 mm layer of concrete in a lift, where the depth of lift is 1.5 m or
more.
3. Agree with the CM on the section of the core samples to be selected as test
specimens, including those cores sampled from concrete in thin lift where such
layer stated in sub-clause (2) cannot be avoided.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.T730.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF ROUTINE CORE TEST SAMPLES

Testing samples:
1. Provide necessary facilities and attendance for taking 3 Nos. or 12 Nos. of the
following core samples for testing by DTC from finished concrete works for the
same concreting day, at locations selected by the CM:
a. 150 mm diameter core samples: for 40 mm aggregate concrete;
b. 75 mm diameter core samples: early core test for volumetric precast
bathroom (VPB), volumetric precast kitchen (VPK), volumetric precast lift
shafts and volumetric precast lift machine room components as described
under Worksection CON8, precast façades, precast structural walls, precast
balconies and precast staircases as described under Worksections CON5 and
CON7;
c. 100 mm diameter core samples: for 20 mm aggregate concrete and all cases
other than sub-clauses (1)(a) and (1)(b) above.
2. Provide necessary facilities and attendance for taking core samples by DTC from
the finished high strength concrete works of which the concrete grade strength is
higher than 60 MPa for each concreting day. The number of cores and locations
are to be decided by the CM and in accordance with the coring proposal
acknowledged by ICU;
3. The length of core samples shall be at least 95% of the core diameter after end
preparation;
4. The ratio of core diameter to the maximum aggregate size shall be not less than
3;
5. The diameter of cores should preferably be 150 mm for 40 mm aggregate and
100 mm for 20 mm aggregate or less, and must not be less than 75 mm;
one set of photographic records to the CM within 24 hours upon completion of
the concrete coring work for each working day showing the concrete core
positions at various stages (i.e. before, during and after the coring of concrete
cores).
CON1.T740.9 AGE OF CORE SAMPLES

1. Do not take cores for strength test at ages less than 28 days except the cores for
early core tests on volumetric precast bathroom (VPB), volumetric precast
kitchen (VPK), volumetric precast lift shafts and volumetric precast lift machine
room as described under Worksection CON8 and precast façades, precast
structural walls, precast balconies and precast staircases as described under
Worksections CON5 and CON7;
2. Do not make any adjustment to the measured strength in respect of the age of the
core when tested.
CON1.T750.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER CONCRETE CORE SAMPLES

Carry out further concrete core tests if any of the following apply:
1. Failure of recycled aggregate:
Should a test result on recycled aggregate used in the concrete fail to meet any of
the properties as stipulated in CON1.T410, comply with any instruction of the
CM for the taking of three core samples (these cores are exclusive from the
routine core tests in CON1.T730), in each concreting day for further tests and
bear all the cost and time of such extra work;
2. Low concrete core strength:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Where 3 core samples have been taken in accordance with CON1.T730 or

CON1.T750 (1), and the estimated insitu cube strength of any individual core is
less than 85% of the specified grade strength, comply with any instruction of the
CM for the taking of additional core samples to make up a total of 12 numbers of
core samples in the same concreting day for further tests. Allow the time
without any claim for extension of time and bear all the costs for such extra work;
3. Failure of concrete cube test:
If concrete represented by test cubes in any concreting day fails to meet the
standard of acceptance specified in CON1.T640 and CON1.T650, comply with
any instruction of the CM for the taking of additional core samples (in addition
to the routine cores required under CON1.T730) to make up a total of 12
numbers of cores in the same concreting day for further tests. Allow the time
without any claim for extension of time and bear all costs for such extra work.
CON1.T760.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES

1. In assessing the results of compressive strength on concrete cores for cases other
than that stated in sub-clause (2) below, all relevant concrete represented by the
cores in the same concreting day is deemed not to comply with this Specification
if the strength of the core, when adjusted for length / diameter ratio and
converted to estimated insitu cube strength in accordance with CS1:2010, is
either:
a. Less than 85% of the specified grade strength, for an average result of
twelve cores; or
b. Less than 75% of the specified grade strength for any individual result.
2. In assessing the results of compressive strength of concrete cores for the case
where a reduction factor of 0.8 is applied to the design stresses of concrete
placed under water (Type 1(c) and Type 3 piles), all concrete represented by the
cores in the same concreting day is deemed not to comply with this Specification
if the compressive strength of the core, when adjusted for length / diameter ratio
and converted to estimated in-situ cube strength in accordance with CS1:2010, is
either:
a. Less than 70% of the specified grade strength, for an average result of three
cores; or
b. Less than 60% of the specified grade strength for any individual result.
CON1.T770.9 MAKING GOOD CORE HOLES

Make good core holes to Approval with cement mortar or concrete of same concrete
strength to that originally specified for the parent concrete.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
CON1.T810.9 GENERAL
1. During the progress of the Works, the CM has the power to order tests other than
cube tests and core tests. Comply with CS1:2010 or with the relevant British
Standard and Code of Practice where CS1:2010 does not apply;
2. The method of sampling, preparing and testing of hardened concrete to
determine cement content is to be in accordance with CS1:2010.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON1.T820.9 CEMENT CONTENT TEST

For Portland cement (PC) concrete, test all core samples taken in the same
concreting day to determine their cement content should the estimated in-situ cube
strength of any individual core taken in accordance with CON1.T710 to CON1.T760
be less than 85% of the specified strength. The test is to be carried out after the
completion of the core compression test and by the Direct Testing Contractors
employed by the Housing Authority.
CON1.T830.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF CEMENT CONTENT TEST

Should the average of the test results of all core samples taken in the same concreting
day be less than 83% of the minimum cement content stated in CON1.M1130 to
CON1.M1160, all relevant concrete represented by these samples in the same
concreting day to be deemed not to comply with Specification.
CON1.T840.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES

Test aqueous liquid retaining structures such as water tanks in accordance with
clause 9.2 of BS 8007:1987.
FAILURE TO MEET REQUIRED CRITERIA

CON1.T910.9 AQUEOUS LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES
Non-compliance:
1. If any aqueous liquid retaining structure fails to meet the requirements of
CON1.T630, CON1.T640 or CON1.T650 or evidence of seepage is observed
during testing according to CON1.T840, then the structure is deemed defective.
TESTS FOR REPAIR MORTAR

CON1.T1010.9 SAMPLES FROM REPAIR MORTAR
When Instructed, take testing samples in accordance with the following sub-clauses:
1. A set of two 100 mm or a set of three 70.7 mm cubes from a single sample taken
from a batch of repair mortar selected at random for compressive strength test
for each testing age as directed by the CM;
2. RFID tag to be provided and installed on the surface of each cube by the Direct
Testing Contractor, to authenticate the identity of the cube throughout the whole
testing process. A typical RFID tag is shown on Sketch no. RFID/TAG/SK-01;
3. Take the average of the cube results in the set as the test result.
TESTS ON GGBS
CON1.T1110.A PURCHASER TESTS
1. Employ an Approved testing laboratory as stipulated in CON7.W010 for
carrying out the tests to verify the physical and chemical properties of GGBS in
accordance with BS EN 15167-1:2006 before production of the precast facade,
precast staircase, precast refuse chute, precast partition wall and precast concrete
panel units;
2. Submit the test reports to the CM in accordance with CON7.T010.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INVESTIGATION BY EXTENSIVE CORE TESTING

CON1.T1210.9 GENERAL
1. When concrete is deemed not complying with this Specification as assessed in
accordance with CON1.T750 or CON1.T830, the CM shall issue a
condemnation letter;
2. Apply the procedure in CON1.T1220 to CON1.T1260 to investigate the extent
of non-compliance and re-execute the works;
3. The provisions stated hereinafter shall be without prejudice to the Employer's
right, the CM's power and the Contractor's obligations in connection with the
removal of unsatisfactory material and work, and subsequent re-execution of
work under the Contract.
CON1.T1220.9 INVESTIGATION AND REPORTS

1. Within 14 days from the date of condemnation letter issued by the CM, submit
the following for Approval:
a. A statement of request to identify the extent of non-complying concrete in
the affected structural elements on the concreting day(s) as stated in the
condemnation letter;
b. An investigation plan as stipulated in CON1.T1230;
c. A statement of undertaking to complete the investigation and re-execution of
works within a duration agreed by the CM; and
d. A statement of confirmation to bear all costs and time so incurred in
connection with or arising from the investigation.
2. Confirm in writing to accept the conditions, if any, as stipulated by the CM
related to the Approval in sub-clause (1) before the investigation proceeds;
3. Within 7 days upon completion of the investigation, report to the CM with
details as stipulated in CON1.T1250 for Approval;
4. Confirm in writing to accept the conditions, if any, as stipulated by the CM
related to the Approval in sub-clause (3) before re-execution of works proceeds;
and
5. Within 7 days upon completion of the re-execution of works, report to the CM
with details as stipulated in CON1.T1260.
CON1.T1230.9 INVESTIGATION PLAN SUBMISSION

The investigation plan shall be endorsed by an Approved RSE and shall include the
following details:
1. Delineation of concrete to be investigated;
2. Method statement of the extensive core testing and the details of a HOKLAS
accredited laboratory, to be approved by the CM, responsible for sampling and
carrying out the compressive strength test;
3. Volume of concrete represented by each core; and
4. Programme of the investigation works.
CON1.T1240.9 ASSESSMENT CRITERIA

1. Include the cores taken in accordance with CON1.T750 in addition to the cores
obtained from the investigation plan in identifying the extent of non-complying
concrete; and
2. The volume of concrete represented by an individual core is deemed not to
comply with this Specification if the following test result of the individual core
is found:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Criterion applicable to all types of concrete: The estimated in-situ cube

strength is less than 85% of the specified grade strength; or
b. Criterion applicable to Portland Cement (PC) concrete only: The cement
content is less than 83% of the minimum cement content stated in
CON1.M1130 to CON1.M1160, for Portland cement (PC) concrete.
CON1.T1250.9 INVESTIGATION REPORT SUBMISSION

Submit an investigation report, endorsed by the Approved RSE in CON1.T1230,
with the following details:
1. Delineation of non-complying concrete;
2. Method statement for the re-execution of works; and
3. Programme of the re-execution of works including verification testings.
CON1.T1260.9 RE-EXECUTION OF WORKS REPORT SUBMISSION

Submit a report, substantiated by results of verification testings and endorsed by the
Approved RSE in CON1.T1230, to confirm that the Works subsequent to the re-
execution of works comply with this Specification.

INSITU CONCRETE CON1 > APPENDICES
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDICES
CON1.APPEND1.9 FORM A
APPENDIX CON1/I - FORM A
NAME OF CONTRACT
CONTRACT NO. ………….
RECEIPT OF RECYCLED COARSE AGGREGATES
Date: ………………… Receipt No. …………………
Vehicle Reg. Mark: …………………
Time In: ………………… Time Out: …………………
Type(s) of Recycled Coarse Aggregates Received:
10 mm 20 mm
Please tick
Weight In: …………………
Weight Out: ………………… Net Weight Unloaded: …………………
Use of the Material Received: …………………
Remarks:
Name and Authorised Chop of

Concrete Batching Operator on use of
Recycled Coarse Aggregates

FORMWORK CON2 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2 FORMWORK
DESIGN
FORMWORK DESIGN GENERALLY

CON2.D010.9 LOADINGS
Design and construct falsework and formwork to withstand any combination of the
following loadings and to maintain the position and shape of the formwork to
achieve the required shape and finish of the hardened concrete:
1. Total weight of formwork, falsework and wet concrete;
2. Construction loads including dynamic effects of placing, compacting and
construction traffic;
3. Wind loads in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong
Kong 2004 issued by the Buildings Department;
4. Any other relevant loading described in BS 5975:1982.
CON2.D020.9 STANDARD
Comply with the requirements of BS 5975:1982 regarding design, construction and
dismantling of falsework and formwork.
CON2.D030.9 INCLINED SURFACES

Provide formwork to the top surface of concrete where inclined at a slope exceeding
15° to the horizontal.
CON2.D040.9 DISMANTLING AND REMOVAL

Design falsework and formwork so that they can be dismantled and removed without
disturbing or overloading the finished concrete work or the structure.
CON2.D050.9 BRIDGE AND TRANSFER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION

1. Appoint a Registered Structural Engineer to design and control the temporary
works for the construction of the bridge and the transfer structure;
2. The submission shall include drawings and supporting calculations and shall be
submitted to the CM not less than 4 weeks before the Contractor proposes to put
such work in hand. Do not commence the proposed work without the prior
consent of the CM. Such consent shall, however, in no way relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities for the design of the falsework;
3. Monitor falsework levels and make any necessary adjustments for settlement or
other deflection or movements;
4. Unless otherwise approved by the CM, the falsework supporting system for the
transfer structure shall be carried down directly to the pile cap levels and shall
not impose any additional loadings on the floors, columns and walls.
CON2.D060.9 FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURAL WALLS IN DOMESTIC BLOCKS

1. Design and use large panel formwork, in accordance with CON2.D310, for all
structural walls in domestic floors between first domestic floor level and main
roof level;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. For domestic blocks without rotational symmetry and where the use of large
panel formwork at critical areas of a domestic floor would lead to an
unacceptable prolonged construction cycle, the Contractor may propose the use
of small panel metal formwork, together with justification in the submission
stipulated in CON2.D240, for CM's approval.
FALSEWORK SPANNING PUBLIC HIGHWAYS

CON2.D110.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
Employ a Registered Structural Engineer to take responsibility for the design and
construction of all temporary works and falsework spanning public highways. No
consent or dissent of the CM will relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility for
the falsework design, construction and obtaining Approval.
CON2.D120.9 FALSEWORK SPANNING A PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Ensure the falsework system does not interfere with normal traffic flow and does not
reduce the width of the traffic lanes. Design clearances to falsework spanning a
public highway in accordance with Section 35 of the Transport Planning and Design
Manual Volume 2 - Highway Design Characteristics.
CON2.D130.9 APPROVALS
1. Take responsibility for obtaining all necessary approvals of any proposed
falsework design and construction, through the Authority, from the Highways
Department, the Commissioner of Police and the Commissioner for Transport;
2. Do not commence any temporary works, including falsework spanning a public
highway, unless the falsework design and construction method has been
approved by the Highways Department and Commissioner of Police and
Commissioner for Transport.
SUBMISSIONS
CON2.D210.9 TIMING
Submit details of formwork and falsework to the CM for information before
commencement of construction.
CON2.D220.9 FALSEWORK SPANNING A PUBLIC HIGHWAY

Submit proposals for falsework spanning a public highway to the CM in the form of
proper, numbered, fully dimensioned drawings accompanied by full structural
calculations endorsed by the Contractor's Registered Structural Engineer. Make any
amendments required by the CM and submit copies to the CM in order to obtain all
necessary approvals from the Highways Department and Commissioners. See also
CON2.D130 (2) above.
CON2.D230.9 PLYWOOD SHEATHING

Before commencement of the superstructure and where the sheathing is timber
plywood, submit for Approval, details of the method of identifying and recording the
number of uses to which the sheathing will be subjected to. Upon Approval, provide
all labour and equipment and carry out marking and recording to the satisfaction of
the CM.
CON2.D240.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND SMALL PANEL METAL

FORMWORK FOR DOMESTIC BLOCK
Submit the following information for CM's approval:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Details of the system, including drawings and calculations;

2. Details of safety requirements regarding the designated storage yard for large
panel formwork as stipulated in PRE.B8.262;
3. Details for holding down and stabilising the panels of the wallforms including
horizontal ties at the top of wallforms;
4. Details of kicker construction, both for precast kicker blocks and cast-in-situ
kickers, including proposed bedding and grouting material for precast kicker
blocks;
5. Details of metal formwork, and its fixings, for slab edges which form an integral
part of wall elevations;
6. Proposals for curing and protecting the concrete;
7. Method statement for placing and compacting the concrete;
8. Details of any relaxation to the minimum periods for retaining formwork and
falsework in position before striking as stated in CON2.W630 which may be
required to suit the proposed formwork systems;
9. Details of assembling and striking of any small panel metal formwork, including
the maintenance of the panels for repeated uses;
10. Documentary evidence, such as previous project references, indicating that the
finished concrete surface produced by the small panel metal formwork is not to
be of a lesser standard than that produced by the large panel formwork, together
with a method statement for applying skim coat to the wall joints in accordance
with CON2.W315.
CON2.D250.9 BRIDGE AND TRANSFER STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION

Submit the following details of formwork and falsework to the CM at least 4 weeks
before commencement of construction:
1. Details of the system, including drawings and calculations;
2. Details of holding down and stabilising the system including horizontal ties;
3. Method statement for construction of the structure;
4. Proposal for curing and protecting the concrete; and
5. Method statement for placing and compacting the concrete.
CON2.D260.9 INSPECTION RECORDS

Submit records of inspection on the completed formwork and falsework to the CM
for information before carrying out any further works that may affect the stability of
the formwork and falsework. Such records are to be certified by a contractor's
superintendent holding qualification equivalent to TCP Grade T4 in civil or
structural engineering discipline.
DESIGN OF LARGE PANEL FORMWORK FOR

DOMESTIC BLOCK
CON2.D310.9 GENERAL DEFINITION
Large panel formwork refers to metal formwork complying clauses CON2.D320 to
CON2.D450.
CON2.D320.9 WALLS NOT EXCEEDING 7.5 M LONG

For walls not exceeding 7.5 m long, design the whole of the formwork assembly for
one face of the wall per storey as one complete reusable panel.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2.D330.9 WALLS EXCEEDING 7.5 M LONG WITHOUT OPENINGS

For walls exceeding 7.5 m long, without door or window openings, design the whole
of the formwork assembly, for one face of the wall per storey, as one or two
complete reusable panels.
CON2.D340.9 WALLS EXCEEDING 7.5 M LONG WITH OPENINGS

For walls exceeding 7.5 m long with door/window openings, the whole of the
formwork assembly for one face of the wall per storey may comprise a no. of panels
provided that any joints between panels must fall within the width of the
door/window openings.
CON2.D350.9 JUNCTIONS
At any wall junction, where it is not practicable to position the edge of the formwork
assembly at the junction, position the edge at a clear distance of not more than
300 mm from the junction line.
CON2.D360.9 USE OF OTHER TYPES OF FORMWORK

Where it is not practicable to use large panel formwork, e.g. at staircases, columns at
wall ends etc, adopt other types of formwork, including small panel metal formwork
or traditional formwork, and submit details for Approval.
CON2.D370.9 JOINTS IN SHEATHING

1. Design the sheathing of the formwork free of horizontal joints;
2. Position any vertical joints at minimum 1 m centres maintaining a continuous
smooth surface across the joints.
CON2.D380.9 BACKING STRUCTURE

Support the sheathing with a backing structure of metal or other Approved material.
CON2.D390.9 SEALING BASE OF WALLFORMS

With the exception of where in-situ monolithic kickers are used, seal the toes of all
wallforms with a compressible rubber hose placed between the floor slab and the
base of the wallform, backed with a cement mortar seal to prevent grout loss.
CON2.D400.9 TOP BRACING

Securely brace every panel of wallform at the top by at least two horizontal ties to
ensure vertical alignment.
CON2.D410.9 SLAB EDGES

Fabricate slab edge formwork in metal to match the wallform system where any part
of a wall is formed as a slab edge.
CON2.D420.9 ACCESS WALKWAY

In addition to GCC Clauses 7.1(2):
1. Provide continuous walkway around the edges of the building under
construction. Working platforms and table forms may be used;
2. Comply with details of safety requirements regarding working platforms as
stipulated in PRE.B8.262;
3. Provide a minimum walkway width of at least 1000 mm with a minimum width
of 650 mm at joints with any adjacent walkway. The walkway must be close
boarded or planked in timber of 25 mm minimum thickness, plated or of
metalwork;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Provide toe boards to a minimum height of 200 mm on the platform side where a
person or object could fall for more than two metres;
5. Read this Specification in conjunction with drawing No. SES/LP/S/EG001 in
Appendix B which details the access walkway.
CON2.D430.9 OTHER TYPES OF FORMWORK - ACCESS WALKWAY

Propose and provide alternative platforms and access walkway and maintain
continuity where large panel formwork is not used in accordance with CON2.D360
and obtain Approval before use, provided that the alternative is not of a lesser
standard in conforming to the requirements in CON2.D420.
CON2.D440.9 PATENT WALLFORM SYSTEMS

Obtain prior Approval for use of patent wallform systems not complying with this
Specification, provided that the finished products produced by such system proposed
are not to be of a lesser standard than that produced by formwork conforming to the
above formwork design requirements.
CON2.D450.9 ALTERNATIVE GROUT SEALING SYSTEMS

Obtain Approval before using any alternative grout sealing system:
1. The CM may Approve any other proposed system, provided that the Contractor
can demonstrate that the finished product provided can match the requirements
of the Specification before commencement of construction;
2. At any time the CM may withdraw such Approval of the proposed system if he
considers that it will fail to produce the required finished product;
3. In such a case, revert to the system described in this Specification. No monetary
claims whatsoever will be entertained or extensions of time granted in the event
of such a withdrawal of Approval.
DESIGN OF SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK

FOR DOMESTIC BLOCK
CON2.D510.9 GENERAL DEFINITION
Small panel metal formwork, e.g. aluminium formwork, refers to small metal
formwork complying clauses CON2.D520 to CON2.D600.
CON2.D520.9 JUNCTIONS
As CON2.D350.
CON2.D530.9 JOINTS IN SHEATHING

Maintain a continuous smooth surface across all horizontal and vertical joints.
CON2.D540.9 BACKING STRUCTURE

As CON2.D380.
CON2.D550.9 SEALING BASE OF WALLFORMS

As CON2.D390.
CON2.D560.9 TOP BRACING

1. For walls not exceeding 7.5 m long, securely brace each wallform at the top by
at least two horizontal ties to ensure vertical alignment;
2. For walls exceeding 7.5 m long, securely brace each wallform at the top by at
least four horizontal ties to ensure vertical alignment.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2.D570.9 SLAB EDGES

As CON2.D410.
CON2.D580.9 ACCESS WALKWAY

As CON2.D420.
CON2.D590.9 PATENT WALLFORM SYSTEMS

As CON2.D440.
CON2.D600.9 ALTERNATIVE GROUT SEALING SYSTEMS

As CON2.D450.

FORMWORK CON2 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
DEFINITIONS
CON2.M010.9 FORMWORK OR FORM
That section of the temporary works used to give the required shape and support to
poured concrete, consisting of sheathing material in direct contact with the concrete
and joists or stringers that directly support the sheathing.
CON2.M020.9 FALSEWORK
Any temporary structure used to support a permanent structure while it is not self-
supporting.
CON2.M030.9 TRADITIONAL FORMWORK

Formwork assembled from individual elements comprising sheathing material as
described in BS 5975:1982 and separate backing structure supporting the sheathing.
CON2.M040.9 PERMANENT OR LEFT IN FORMWORK

Formwork designed to remain in position as part of the permanent work.
CON2.M050.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK

Formwork as CON2.D310.
CON2.M060.9 SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK

Formwork as CON2.D510.
CON2.M080.9 TIMBER FOR FORMWORK

Use sustainable timber as specified in PRE.B8.2450 and reuse timber whenever
possible as specified in PRE.B8.2460.
SHEATHING
CON2.M110.9 SUITABLE MATERIALS
Material against which the concrete will be cast must be suitable for providing the
specified concrete finish, formed for example, in metal, timber, plywood, film faced
plywood or plastic.
ANCILLARY MATERIALS
CON2.M210.9 RELEASE AGENT
An Approved type which will not:
1. Stain or colour the concrete;
2. Affect the adhesion between the concrete and any subsequent finishings.
CON2.M220.9 SURFACE RETARDERS

An Approved type which will not stain or colour the concrete.
CON2.M230.9 HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCKS FOR SLABS

Manufactured as follows:
FORMWORK CON2 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Concrete:
a. Mix comprising cement, granite fines and granite aggregate passing a
10 mm sieve but retained on a 5 mm sieve;
b. Grade: 20/10.
2. Dimensions:
a. Outer casing and web: 25 mm thick;
b. With a 25 mm x 5 mm groove formed along both sides for key.
CON2.M240.9 PRECAST KICKER BLOCKS

Of solid construction and:
1. Cast in the same grade of concrete as the wall into which they are to be cast.
Provide evidence of the grade of concrete to CM for approval;
2. Having a length of 100 mm parallel to the wall face, the same thickness as the
wall and a minimum height of 75 mm above the highest slab abutting the wall at
the level at which the kicker is formed.
MATERIAL FOR SEALING FORMWORK TIE

HOLES
CON2.M250.9 MORTAR
Shall be:
1. One-part prebagged non-shrink cementitious mortar made by mixing on Site
with water to form a trowellable consistency in application;
2. In accordance with mortar manufacturer's specified application procedures
(including bond cost if required by the mortar manufacturer);
3. All mortar shall be subject to tests specified in CON2.T110, CON2.T120,
CON2.T130, CON2.T140 (2), CON2.T150 and CON2.T160 before approval by
the CM.
CON2.M260.9 POLYURETHANE FOAM

1. The polyurethane foam shall be formed from a system of components which
expands and sets to become a rigid foam;
2. The polyurethane foam shall be subjected to watertightness test specified in
CON2.T140 (1) & (2)(b), before approval by the CM.

FORMWORK CON2 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
HANDLING AND STORAGE

CON2.W010.9 FORMWORK
1. For superstructure works:
a. Store formwork, including large panel formwork and small panel metal
formwork, off a levelled, well-drained and maintained hard-standing ground
on level supports and in a manner which will not result in damage,
deformation or contamination;
b. Store large panel formwork and small panel metal formwork safely and
securely with struts or supports according to the method statement approved;
c. Comply with details of safety requirements regarding prevention of falling
objects as stipulated in PRE.B8.262.
2. For works other than that in sub-clause (1):
a. Store formwork off the ground on level supports and in a manner which will
not result in damage or deformation to the formwork or in contamination of
the formwork.
CON2.W020.9 ANCILLARY MATERIALS

Store:
1. Release agents and surface retarders in sealed containers marked to identify the
contents and protected from exposure to conditions which may affect the
material;
2. All materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and do not
use the materials after the recommended shelf life has been exceeded.
SAFETY AND PROTECTION

CON2.W110.9 PERIMETER WALKWAY
Do not stack any materials or debris on the perimeter formwork walkway at any time.
ERECTING FORMWORK
CON2.W210.9 CHECKING AND INSPECTION
Check the alignment of all kickers and wallforms prior to concreting and:
1. Allow the CM to inspect the completed formwork before any work, including
fixing reinforcement adjacent to formwork, makes access for inspection difficult;
2. Inform the CM 24 hours, or sooner if agreed with the CM, before carrying out
such work.
CON2.W220.9 KICKERS
Fix wall and column forms tightly against kickers by an Approved method.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2.W230.9 JOINTS
Construct joints between formwork panels, stop ends and adjoining concrete to
prevent loss of grout. Cut formwork in such a manner that reinforcement and built-
in components passing through the formwork are maintained in position and grout
loss is prevented.
CON2.W240.9 TEMPORARY ACCESS

Provide temporary openings in the formwork for cleaning or inspection if required.
CON2.W250.9 PIPE SLEEVES ETC

1. Provide galvanised mild steel or PVC pipe sleeves through floors and walls etc
as required for all trades as specified elsewhere;
2. Fix pipe sleeves, inserts, void formers and box outs to specified sizes and in
correct positions before placing concrete. Do not cut hardened concrete to
provide holes or chases unless otherwise Approved;
3. Do not use polystyrene for void formers or box outs larger than 150 mm x
150 mm x 150 mm unless otherwise Approved.
CON2.W260.9 FORMWORK FIXINGS GENERALLY

Do not allow any devices for securing formwork and falsework to remain within the
specified concrete cover.
CON2.W270.9 FORMWORK TIES

Fix formwork ties and components in such a manner that they do not touch
reinforcement or any other built-in component. Any part left in the concrete must be
at least 40 mm or the specified nominal cover to the reinforcement, whichever is
greater, from the concrete surface.
CON2.W280.9 TIES IN STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS WITH WATERTIGHT FUNCTION

1. Use only ties which leave no open holes through the concrete having a
watertight function, including:
a. Aqueous liquid retaining structures;
b. All structural elements constructed below finished ground level; and
c. Roof parapets below the upturn level of waterproofing membrane as shown
on Drawings.
2. Provide precautionary measures, which may be nylon, epoxy, plastics or other
dielectric material coating, to ties left in aqueous liquid retaining structures to
avoid damaging the epoxy coating of reinforcement bar.
CON2.W290.9 FORMING CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Ensure formwork to construction joints is rigid and accommodates projecting
reinforcement without bending or displacement.
CON2.W300.9 LAYING HOLLOW BLOCKS FOR SLABS

1. Do not use blocks within 28 days of their being cast;
2. Lay on formwork in straight rows with butt joints;
3. Seal exposed, open ends with similar concrete to a depth of 25 mm.
CON2.W310.9 JOINTS IN LARGE PANEL FORMWORK

Ensure close contact between the edges of panels used on the same wall side, with
maximum tolerance measured perpendicular to the wall not to exceed 3 mm after
concreting.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2.W315.9 JOINTS IN SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK

1. Ensure close contact between the edges of panels used on the same wall side,
with maximum tolerance on abrupt changes/irregularities of a continuous fair-
face finished concrete surface measured perpendicular to the wall tightened to
not to exceed 2 mm after concreting;
2. Unless otherwise instructed by the CM, apply skim coat as specified in
FIN7.M790 to the wall joints to cover up and smoothen any abrupt
changes/irregularities notwithstanding that the tolerance on abrupt
changes/irregularities is met. Bear all associated costs and no extension of time
shall be allowed.
CON2.W320.9 ARRISES
Erect formwork to provide smooth arrises free from damage and cracks.
KICKERS FOR LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND

SMALL PANEL METAL FORMWORK
CON2.W410.9 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Worksection the following apply:
1. An external wall is defined as a complete length or section of a wall which is
abutted by a floor slab on one side only, at the level where the kicker is formed;
2. An internal wall is defined as a complete length or section of a wall which is
abutted by floor slabs on both sides, at the level where the kicker is formed.
CON2.W420.9 PROVISION OF KICKERS

Provide kickers at the toes of all walls constructed by large panel formwork and/or
small panel metal formwork for the purpose of maintaining correct alignment and
preventing grout loss.
CON2.W430.9 KICKERS FOR EXTERNAL WALLS

1. Form in-situ kicker, using metal formwork, monolithically with the floor slab
abutting the wall in one continuous casting operation;
2. The concrete grade of the kicker shall be the same as that of the abutting floor
slab and the dimensional details are as follows:
a. Length: over the whole length of the wall;
b. Thickness: same as that of the wall;
c. Top level: 100 mm above the highest level of the abutting floor slab.
CON2.W440.9 KICKERS FOR INTERNAL WALLS

Use evenly spaced precast blocks as specified in CON2.M240 to form the kickers of
internal walls, with a minimum of two blocks provided per wall as follows:
1. Place the kicker blocks in position after the slabs abutting walls have been cast
and bed to the correct level using an approved bedding material;
2. Fix the blocks firmly to the top of the slabs either by cast in or drilled anchor
bolts. Fill any voids around bolts with an Approved grouting material. Ensure
fixings prevent blocks being displaced during the wall construction;
3. Adjust reinforcement locally, and only with prior Approval, to enable precast
kicker blocks to be fixed.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORK BELOW GROUND

CON2.W510.9 FORMING AGAINST EXCAVATION FACES
Do not cast concrete below ground against sides of excavation unless with the CM's
prior Approval.
STRIKING FORMWORK
CON2.W610.9 GENERAL
Strike formwork and falsework without disturbing, damaging or overloading the
finished concrete work or the structure and without affecting other formwork and
falsework.
CON2.W620.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

Notwithstanding any other clauses in this Specification accept sole responsibility for
the safe removal of formwork and falsework.
CON2.W630.9 MINIMUM PERIODS BEFORE STRIKING

Minimum periods for retaining formwork and falsework in position are as follows:
Striking Time
Type of Formwork and Falsework Period
Inclined formwork to top Surfaces 12 hours
Vertical formwork to columns, beams and walls (unloaded) 16 hours
Soffit formwork to Slabs (Props left under) 3 days
Props to slabs (unloaded) 7 days
Soffit formwork to beams (Prop left under) 7 days
Props to beams (unloaded) 16 days
Prop to cantilevers (unloaded) 28 days
CON2.W640.9 STRIKING AT LOW TEMPERATURE

Obtain instructions from the CM for increased striking times of formwork at lower
temperatures. The periods stated in CON2.W630 are for Portland cement at 15°C
ambient temperature and the conditions stated in the table.
CON2.W650.9 STRIKING LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND SMALL PANEL METAL

FORMWORK
Alternative minimum periods before striking large panel formwork and small panel
metal formwork may be Approved, if the design allows, provided that:
1. Props for soffits of insitu slabs or combined precast and insitu slab construction,
must remain in place for a minimum of five days and until the concrete has
achieved two thirds of the required 28 day crushing strength;
2. The props supporting the floor immediately below the cast slab or soffit must
remain in place for a minimum period of 2½ days after the upper floor is
concreted and until the concrete has achieved a crushing strength of 10 MPa, or
twice the stress to which the concrete will be subjected, whichever is the greater.
No re-propping is permitted within the minimum periods;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. In the event that a request for relaxation of the minimum periods before striking,
if any, is not accepted by the CM, the design of the formwork system is deemed
to have been prepared on the basis of the minimum periods detailed in
CON2.W630 or this sub-clause, provided the conditions referred to are complied
with;
4. As evidence that concrete placed insitu or in combined precast and insitu slabs
has attained the minimum strengths specified, from test results obtained from the
laboratory established on site in accordance with the requirements for testing
contained in the Preliminaries PRE.B9 of this Specification.
CON2.W660.9 BACK PROPPING SOFFITS

Where the props are to be left in place whilst the soffit formwork to slabs and beams
are removed, design such props either to remain in position throughout the striking
process without having to be temporarily removed or alternatively, if agreed by the
CM, so that a few can be removed at a time and replaced immediately.
CON2.W670.9 LOADING THE STRUCTURE

Do not place construction loads on any unshored portion of the structure under
construction. Agree the number of floors requiring propping with the CM, according
to the design loads of such floors.
TRIAL PANELS
CON2.W710.9 SAMPLES
Provide samples of any exposed formed or worked finishes as detailed in the Project
Specific Specification, and obtain Approval.
CON2.W720.9 CONSTRUCTION OF TRIAL PANEL

Subject to CM's instruction, construct on Site a trial panel before the commencement
of typical floor construction as detailed in the Project Specific Specification to
demonstrate that the proposed formwork and falsework system is adequate in
providing the required quality standard of finishes to concrete.
CON2.W730.9 SUB-STANDARD TRIALS

Should the finish to the trial panels not be to the standard specified and not to the
satisfaction of the CM, modify the formwork system and construct further trial
panels until, in the opinion of the CM, the finish to the concrete produced is
satisfactory. Adopt the formwork system producing the required finish as the
standard for all subsequent formwork used.
STANDARD PANEL
CON2.W810.9 INSITU STANDARD PANEL
As soon as is practical after commencement of superstructure work, select a sample
area from the insitu works as being representative of the minimum standard of the
specified finish for inspection by the CM. Upon agreement in writing by the CM the
finish to the sample area will become the minimum standard for that specified finish
for all subsequent concrete.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FORMED FINISHES FOR CONCRETE

CON2.W910.9 TYPE A : ROUGH BOARD FINISH
1. Formwork or formwork linings to consist of Approved rough textured seasoned
wood boards with moisture content of between 10% and 20%;
2. Arrange boards of varying textures to give uniform overall effect;
3. Assemble boards to prevent leakage of grout between them;
4. Soak formwork with water before erecting, and keep damp until concrete is
placed;
5. Position cover spacers and bolts to the satisfaction of the CM;
6. The number of uses of formwork lining will be limited to its ability to provide
the required finish;
7. The finish to be left as struck. Do not make good until inspected by the CM;
8. Discoloration will not be permitted;
9. Fill minor voids and irregularities on surfaces with a matching mortar to
Approval, using a sponge rubber face float.
CON2.W920.9 TYPE B : FAIR-FACED FINISH

1. Produce an even finish with a sheet material (e.g. plywood);
2. Arrange panels in pattern as specified;
3. The finish to be left as struck. Submit method statement for rectification works
for approval prior to carrying out any remedial works. Do not make good until
inspected by the CM;
4. Blowholes not exceeding 10 mm diameter will be permitted, but otherwise
surface to be free from voids, honey-combing or other large defects;
5. Variations in colour will be permitted when the finished concrete is to receive an
applied decoration;
6. Make good small defects, and fill blowholes and formwork tie holes with
Approved materials.
MAINTENANCE OF FORMWORK
CON2.W1010.9 PREPARATION FOR RE-USE
Clean and repair formwork which has been previously used before it is re-erected.
CON2.W1020.9 DAMAGED AND DETERIORATED FORMWORK

Do not re-use formwork where strength and composition has so far deteriorated due
to repeated use that, in the opinion of the CM, it will no longer adequately perform
its function in accordance with the Specification but remove it from Site.
CON2.W1030.9 RUBBER SEALS

Properly maintain the rubber hose seals and replace when required or as Instructed
but in no case subject seals to more than nine uses.
CON2.W1040.9 RE-USE OF TIMBER FORMWORK

Do not subject plywood sheathing to formwork to more than nine uses, irrespective
of the use of one or both faces of such sheathing.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SEALING FORMWORK TIE HOLES

Seal all tie holes left in walls by formwork ties and components in accordance with
Sketch no. SES/TB/S/SK-001/A.
CON2.W1120.9 SEALING THE TIE HOLES

1. Procedures for external walls with tile finishes:
a. Knock out the PVC tubing;
b. Drive in and secure a piece of minimum 30 mm thick cork at 40 mm from
each end of a formwork tie hole;
c. Wet thoroughly to achieve saturation and clean concrete surfaces inside the
hole to remove dust and loose materials prior to applying mortar (and bond
coat if required by the mortar manufacturer);
d. Using the cork as a backing, apply and completely fill the hole ends by
prebagged non-shrink cementitious mortar as described and Approved in
accordance with CON2.M250;
e. Cure the mortar to CON1.W1410 or in accordance with the mortar
manufacturer's recommendations as Approved by the CM.
2. Procedures for external walls without tile finishes:
b. Clean thoroughly concrete surfaces inside the hole to remove dust and loose
materials prior to applying polyurethane foam;
c. Drive in and secure a piece of minimum 30 mm thick cork at 40 mm from
the external side of the wall;
d. Using the cork as a backing, apply the polyurethane foam Approved by the
CM in accordance with CON2.M260 from the internal side of the wall in
such quantity that it expands, fills the hole entirely and moves it way out
away from the backing cork. Allow adequate time for full development and
setting of the foam rigidity as recommended by the manufacturer;
e. Cut back all excess polyurethane foam by 40 mm from the internal side of
the wall. Remove all traces of foam remaining on the hole concrete surfaces;
f. Repeat procedures as described in CON2.W1120 (1)(c) to (1)(e) for
application of mortar (and bond coat if required by the mortar manufacturer)
at either end of the hole.
3. Procedures for internal walls:
b. Wet thoroughly to achieve saturation and clean concrete surfaces inside the
hole to remove dust and loose materials prior to applying mortar (and bond
coat if required by the mortar manufacturer);
c. Apply and completely fill the hole by prebagged non-shrink cementitious
mortar as described and Approved in accordance with CON2.M250;
d. Cure the mortar to CON1.W1410 or in accordance with the mortar
manufacturer's recommendations as Approved by the CM.
TOLERANCES
Refer to Appendix H "Schedule of Tolerances" to this Specification.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

FORMWORK CON2 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
TESTING OF MORTAR FOR SEALING

FORMWORK TIE HOLES
CON2.T110.9 LABORATORY TESTING
1. Submission requirements:
a. Submit technical details and test reports done by Approved local
independent testing laboratory at Contractor's own costs to demonstrate the
following mortar characteristics:
i. 1-4% of change in height of specimen tested to ASTM C827 - 95a(97);
ii. Minimum value of 200 seconds for Figg air permeability.
2. Testing samples:
a. Submit samples of mortar for carrying out one set of the tests as stated in
CON2.T110 (1) by the Direct Testing Contractor to demonstrate the mortar
characteristics for Approval and thereafter every 750 kg of mortar to be used
on site for routine monitoring test as instructed by the CM;
b. Unless otherwise Approved or specified elsewhere, testing of mortar shall be
carried out by the Direct Testing Contractor;
c. Allow sufficient time for testing of the materials by the Direct Testing
Contractor.
CON2.T120.9 TESTING FOR CHARACTERISTICS OF MORTAR

Testing methods:
1. Early change in height test: test shall be carried out to C827 - 95a(97) as
specified by American Society for Testing and Materials;
2. Permeability test: the permeability of the mortar shall be determined by the
modified Figg air permeability test described in "Improvements to the Figg
method for determining the air permeability of concrete" Cather, Figg, Marsden
and O'Brien. Mag. Conc. Res 36 No. 129 Dec 1984. The specimen shall be a
100 mm cast cube conditioned at a temperature of 27± 2ºC and 55± 5% relative
humidity, demoulded 72 hours after casting and kept in the same environment
for a further 18 days. The permeability test shall be carried out after
conditioning at 50ºC for 14 days.
CON2.T130.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER TEST

Non-compliance:
1. Two additional tests shall be carried out by the Direct Testing Contractor for
each failure of the laboratory test result obtained for any one mortar
characteristic;
2. The mortar is considered as not complying with the specified property if the
result of any additional test fails to comply with the specified requirements for
the property;
3. Submit another mortar for Approval.
CON2.T140.9 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST ON SITE

1. All watertightness tests made on Site are at Contractor's own costs, time and to
be witnessed and certified both by the CM and the Contractor's representative.
Testing procedures to carry out watertightness test as follows:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Construct working platforms where necessary for carrying out water test
safely;
b. A continuous jet of water is to be sprayed from a nozzle at water pressure of
210 to 240 KPa at the nozzle inlet to the joint and along the longitudinal axis
of the formwork tie hole for a minimum of 5 minutes. The nozzle shall be
stationary while an observer inspects carefully on the indoor side of the
formwork tie hole with the assistance of adequate lighting where necessary.
The nozzle used for the tests shall be to the requirements of Architectural
Aluminium Manufacturers' Association (AAMA) 501.2-83, unless otherwise
Approved.
2. Before sealing any formwork tie holes, carry out watertightness test on Site for
the following:
a. Watertightness test for mortar only: the CM to select 10 nos. of formwork
tie holes sealed with mortar at one end of hole only and without
polyurethane, prepared in accordance with CON2.W1120. Watertightness
test to be applied on the mortar side for a minimum of 5 minutes;
b. Watertightness test for polyurethane foam only: the CM to select 10 nos. of
formwork tie holes sealed with polyurethane foam only and without mortar,
prepared in accordance with CON2.W1120 (2)(a) to (2)(f). Watertightness
test to be applied on the cork side for a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Carry out watertightness test for completely sealed formwork tie holes on Site
for 10% of formwork tie holes at each floor of every block sealed complete in
accordance with CON2.W1120 (1) or CON2.W1120 (2) and selected by the CM.
Watertightness test to be applied on one side of a wall only (external side if
applicable) for a minimum of 5 minutes.
CON2.T150.9 FAILURE OF WATERTIGHTNESS TEST

If sign of water seeping through the hole, including sign of damp patches, is
observed on the opposite side of the wall face subject to test during the test and
within the subsequent 2 hours after the test, the watertightness test is deemed to have
failed.
CON2.T160.9 ADDITIONAL TESTS UPON FAILURE OF WATERTIGHTNESS TEST

Is carried out in accordance with the following procedures:
1. For any one hole failed for the watertightness test made in accordance with
CON2.T140 (2)(a) or (2)(b), two additional holes are selected by the CM for
watertightness test in accordance with CON2.T140 (1);
2. The mortar or polyurethane foam is considered not complying with the specified
field watertightness requirements when result of any additional test made upon
mortar or polyurethane foam respectively according to CON2.T140 (2)(a) or
(2)(b) fails in accordance with CON2.T150;
3. For any tests carried out according to CON2.T140 (3) and fails in accordance
with CON2.T150 the Contractor shall carry out further tests progressively as
described in CON2.T160 (1) above until all tests are successful.
CON2.T170.9 MAKE GOOD FORMWORK TIE HOLES

The work is carried out in accordance to the following:
1. Make good all formwork tie holes which have failed the watertightness test
carried out in accordance with CON2.T140 (3) and CON2.T160 (3) to CM's
satisfaction at Contractor's own costs and time;
2. All repaired holes shall be subject to watertightness test as specified in
CON2.T140 (1).

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON2.T180.9 BLOWHOLES
All blowholes shall be filled with one-part prebagged non-shrink cementitious
mortar Approved in CON2.M250.

REINFORCEMENT CON3 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON3 REINFORCEMENT
MATERIALS
REINFORCEMENT GENERALLY
CON3.M010.9 STOCKIST'S OR SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATION
Submission requirements:
1. For bar reinforcement, submit certificates from quality assured stockist
and/or supplier to demonstrate that the bar reinforcement supplied complies
with the requirements of CS2: 2012 Section 4 to the CM for Approval.
2. For fabric reinforcement, submit a certificate from the manufacturer to the
CM for Approval, stating:
a. That the fabric reinforcement supplied has been tested and complies
with the requirements of BS 4449:2005, BS 4483:2005 and this
Specification;
b. Evidence that the cold reduced steel wire in fabric reinforcement has
complied with the bond classification as specified in BS 4449:2005.
CON3.M020.9 VERIFICATION OF SOURCE

When Instructed provide evidence that each load of steel reinforcement which
includes the bars for fabric reinforcement delivered to site forms part of the same
consignment and originates from the same source as that in respect of which the
specimen and the manufacturer's certificate relate.
CON3.M030.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

1. Obtain a quality assurance scheme from the manufacturer and submit for
Approval. Details of the scheme must include a routine inspection complying
with BS 8666:2005 Annex A;
2. Unless the quality assurance scheme has been certified under ISO 9001, it shall
be assessed by an Approved third party certification authority who shall audit the
manufacturer's inspection records in accordance with BS 8666:2005 Annex B.
If so directed by the CM, submit the audit report to the CM for information.
CON3.M035.9 PRODUCT CONFORMITY CERTIFICATION SCHEME FOR FABRIC

REINFORCEMENT
1. Submit original or a certified true copy of the product conformity certificate to
the "Product Conformity Certification Scheme For Mesh Reinforcements"
(PCCS-MR) published by the Hong Kong Concrete Institute for Approval. The
product conformity certificate shall be issued by a certification body accredited
by the Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) or an accreditation body
which has entered into a multilateral recognition arrangement with HKAS. If a
photocopy of the product conformity certificate is submitted, it shall be certified
true by the certification body or by the QCM;
2. The product conformity certificate shall either be submitted before the first
delivery to Site or precast concrete casting yard whichever the earlier, or at a
time not later than 12 months from the date of commencement of the Works;
3. When directed by CM, submit full set of original or certified true copy of the test
reports under the audit testing of the PCCS-MR:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. The test reports shall be issued by a laboratory accredited by Hong Kong

Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or an accredited laboratory
which has entered into a mutual recognition arrangement with HOKLAS,
showing full compliance with the requirements of PCCS-MR. If a
photocopy of the test report is submitted, it shall be certified true by the
accredited laboratory carried out the testing or by the QCM;
b. The date of the test report shall be within three years prior to the date of
commencement of the Works.
CON3.M040.9 COLOUR CODE SYSTEM OF REINFORCEMENT

Submit for Approval a colour code system in the Quality Control System as
stipulated in PRE.B8.1425 for identification of reinforcement unloaded to designated
areas by the Contractor on Site:
1. For different batches, as defined in CON3.T010, before any testing:
a. Use white, yellow, blue, grey or other specific colours at the ends of
reinforcement bar as directed by the CM;
b. Avoid to use any colours similar to rust and do not use green and/or red
colours.
2. For each batch available with all test results, including the re-test results as
permitted in the Specification, add:
a. Green colour: for reinforcement conforming to the Specification;
b. Red colour: for reinforcement not conforming to the Specification.
REINFORCEMENT
CON3.M110.9 BAR REINFORCEMENT
Quality requirements:
1. Hot rolled steel bars: to CS2:2012;
2. Cold reduced steel wire used for fabric reinforcement: to BS 4449:2005.
CON3.M130.9 FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

Quality Requirements: to BS4483:2005.
CON3.M140.9 REPLACING FABRIC REINFORCEMENT TO BAR REINFORCEMENT

Do not replace the fabric reinforcement by bar reinforcement. Where bar
reinforcement proposed for replacement in the event of non-availability of fabric
reinforcement, the bar reinforcement proposed for replacement conforming with the
equivalent standards set for fabric reinforcement as shown on drawings will be
acceptable subject to Approval.
ANCILLARY MATERIALS
CON3.M210.9 COVER SPACERS
1. Unless specified elsewhere, type as shown on Standard Drawing
STD/FD/S/EG001 or STD/FD/S/EG001/A as appropriate, and as small as
practicable, consistent with their purposes, capable of supporting the weight of
reinforcement and construction loads without breaking, deforming or
overturning;
2. Be one of the following types:
a. Plastic: Approved type(s);
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Concrete (for foundations only): precast or proprietary concrete of strength

and durability not less than that of the surrounding concrete. Provide
evidence of the grade of concrete to CM for approval.
CON3.M220.9 CHAIRS AND SUPPORTS

1. To BS7973:Part 1:2001;
2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, to be steel with plastic-coated feet or
Approved anti-rust treatment if not properly protected by concrete. Steel is cut
and bent to BS8666:2005.
CON3.M230.9 REINFORCEMENT TYING WIRE

1. Diameter of annealed iron wire:
a. For bars up to and including 16 mm diameter: 0.9 mm;
b. For bars of 20 mm diameter and over: 1.2 mm.
EPOXY COATED REINFORCEMENT

CON3.M250.9 MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENT AND TEST RESULTS
1. Submit the following particulars, including certificates and test results, for each
batch of epoxy coated reinforcement bars at least 60 days before the first
delivery of the epoxy coated reinforcement bars to Site for Approval:
a. Name and location of the coating factory;
b. Mill sheets of the steel reinforcement bars complying with CS2:2012;
c. Date and place of the coating application;
d. Certificate of the coating materials in compliance with BS 7295:Part1:1990,
including:
i. Corrosion resistance;
ii. Chemical resistance;
iii. Cathodic disbonding of coating;
iv. Adhesion;
v. Abrasion resistance;
vi. Impact strength;
vii. Hardness.
e. A contingency plan for dealing with epoxy coated reinforcement bars which
are found to be non-conforming to the requirements of Worksection CON3.
2. Re-submit the particulars in sub-clause (1)(d) when the relevant tests have been
carried out over 5 years before the submission or when there are changes in the
composition of the coating materials, whichever the earlier.
CON3.M260.9 EPOXY COATING TO REINFORCEMENT

1. Epoxy coatings and patching materials for epoxy coating to BS 7295:Part 1 &
2:1990 except as stated in CON3.M260 (3), CON3.W250, CON3.T450,
CON3.T460 and CON3.T470;
2. Epoxy coating applied by electrostatic spray method to BS 7295:Part 1:1990 at a
factory approved by CM;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The bond classification of coated bars determined in bond performance tests not
less than that of uncoated bars.
CON3.M270.9 CHAIRS, SUPPORTS AND SPACERS

1. Steel coated with nylon, epoxy, plastics or other dielectric material for epoxy
coated reinforcement.
CON3.M280.9 TYING WIRE

1. 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed steel wire coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or
other dielectric material.
MECHANICAL COUPLER
CON3.M310.9 TYPE OF MECHANICAL COUPLER
Quality Requirements of mechanical coupler: Type 1 and Type 2 mechanical
couplers as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013
published by the Buildings Department.
CON3.M320.9 SUBMISSION
1. Commencement of the mechanical coupler works is subject to CM's written
permission;
2. Submit the following details to the CM for approval at least 30 days prior to the
commencement of the mechanical coupler works:
a. The name and model number of the mechanical coupler;
b. The name of the manufacturer and the address of manufacturing factory;
c. The information / documents of the quality assurance scheme as set out in
CON3.M330;
d. A description of the sampling procedures including the arrangement from
collecting samples to delivery of samples to laboratory for testing the quality
of the mechanical splice assemblies;
e. For Type 2 mechanical coupler, the quality supervision plan as set out in
CON3.W310.
3. Upon completion of the mechanical splice works, submit the following
documents to the CM for record: -
a. The inspection log book as detailed in CON3.W320;
b. A copy of mill certificates of the constituent materials used to produce the
couplers.
CON3.M330.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR MECHANICAL COUPLER

The quality assurance scheme of the manufacturer shall include the information as
specified in the Project Specific Specification.

REINFORCEMENT CON3 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
CON3.W010.9 STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT
1. Store:
a. All reinforcement clear of a levelled, well-drained and maintained hard-
standing ground in a manner that will avoid damage, deformation and
contamination of the reinforcement;
b. Fabric reinforcement horizontally;
c Different types and sizes of reinforcement separately.
one set of photographic records to the CM on each working day showing the
reinforcement at all storage locations.
CON3.W015.9 STORAGE OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT IN FACTORY/STOCKYARD

Provide a fenced-off area in the manufacturer’s factory or stockyard for the exclusive
storage of fabric reinforcement.
CON3.W020.9 SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCING STEEL

Clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil, grease or any substance, which
in the opinion of the CM, is likely to reduce the bond or affect the reinforcement or
concrete chemically.
CON3.W030.9 CONTAMINATED OR HEAVILY RUSTED REINFORCEMENT

Remove contaminated or heavily rusted reinforcement from Site unless it has been
cleaned or satisfactorily treated by an Approved method.
CON3.W040.9 PROTECTION OF EXPOSED REINFORCEMENT

Where specified or instructed by the CM, protect reinforcement left exposed after
completion of the Works by the specified method or by other Approved methods.
CON3.W050.9 COLOUR MARKINGS OF REINFORCEMENT BY STOCKISTS OR

SUPPLIERS PRIOR TO DELIVERY
1. Obtain reinforcement preferably without red and green colour markings from
stockists /suppliers;
2. If reinforcement with red colour marking, or with a colour marking covering a
previous red colour, or with green colour marking is to be supplied:
a. Provide in advance an explanation to the CM before delivery to Site. In
addition, for reinforcement with red colour marking or a colour marking
covering a previous red colour, provide to the CM before delivery to Site
confirmation each from the Contractor and the stockist /supplier that as far
as it is aware, the reinforcement is not non compliant with CS2 and/or
rejected by other project;
b. The CM may refuse entry of reinforcement to Site if:
i. No explanation is provided in advance; or
ii. The provided explanation is not satisfactory.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FIXING REINFORCEMENT
CON3.W110.9 CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement bars are to be cut and bent in accordance with the dimensional
requirements of BS 8666:2005 unless otherwise shown on Drawing.
CON3.W120.9 COLD BENDING

Bend bars cold, using a proprietary bending machine, and do not rebend unless
permitted by the CM.
CON3.W130.9 SECURING REINFORCEMENT

1. Secure with tying wire of the correct gauge for the sizes of bars, steel clips of an
Approved type, or where Approved, by tack welding;
2. Ensure that the tying wire, including the wire ends, tying devices and clips do
not encroach into the nominal cover to the reinforcement;
3. Demonstrate the adequacy of the system employed when Instructed;
4. Submit method statement on the fabrication of reinforcement cages of Barrette
or Large Diameter Bored Piles to the CM for approval. The method statement
shall include:
a. Set-up of the fabrication yard;
b. Step-by-step procedures of reinforcement cage fabrication;
c. Stability support system;
d. Working platform arrangement;
e. Safety plan.
5. The Contractor shall refer to the conceptual method for fixing single layer of
reinforcement bars for Large Diameter Bored Piles as shown in Drawings
No.CPT/LDBP/S/SK-001 to SK-004 and the conceptual method for fixing
double layers of reinforcement bars for Large Diameter Bored Piles as shown in
Drawings No. CPT/LDBP/S/SK-101 to SK-106 in Appendix C to this
Specification. The Drawings are for reference only and are given in good faith
without prejudice to the Contractor's responsibilities and liability under the
Contract;
6. Riggers with Silver Card will also be accepted as skilled trade tested workers for
fixing of U-bolts for the reinforcement cages.
CON3.W140.9 LOCATING REINFORCEMENT

Provide sufficient cover spacers, chairs and supports, having regard to Table 3 of
BS 8000:Part 2:Section 2.2:1990, to maintain the reinforcement in its correct
location and to maintain the specified cover at all positions.
CON3.W150.9 WELDING
1. Do not weld bars without Approval;
2. Where Approved, weld in accordance with BS EN ISO 17660-1:2006, and the
relevant parts of Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013.
CON3.W160.9 CONCRETE COVER

Provide minimum 25mm concrete cover to all reinforcement unless otherwise
specified in Drawing.
CON3.W170.9 COMPLIANCE WITH DRAWINGS

Check that completed reinforcement complies with the drawings, in particular with
respect to:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Bar conditions;
2. Size of bars;
3. Provision of trimming bars;
4. Number of bars;
5. Spacing;
6. Cover.
CON3.W180.9 CM'S INSPECTION

1. Ensure all completed reinforcement is inspected by the CM before carrying out
any work, including erecting any formwork adjacent to the reinforcement, which
makes access for inspection difficult;
2. Notify the CM 24 hours, or a shorter period agreed by the CM, prior to carrying
out such work.
TOLERANCES
CON3.W210.9 GENERAL
Refer to Appendix H "Schedule of Tolerances" to this Specification.

CON3.W220.9 HANDLING OF REINFORCEMENT
1. Do not subject the reinforcement to rough handling, shock loading or dropping
from a height;
2. Lift epoxy coated reinforcement with nylon, rope or padded slings and lift
bundles with strongback or with multiple supports to prevent abrasion.
CON3.W230.9 STORAGE OF REINFORCEMENT

Store on wooden or padded cribbing.
CON3.W240.9 CUTTING AND BENDING REINFORCEMENT

1. Bend epoxy coated reinforcement cold;
2. Provide padded supports for bar cutting and bar bending equipment for epoxy
coated reinforcement and fit all contact areas of the equipment with nylon or
plastic mandrels.
CON3.W250.9 REPAIRS TO EPOXY COATING ON SITE

1. Do not use the epoxy reinforcement in the permanent work if the coating is
delaminated, split or damaged:
a. At any point by an amount exceeding 25 mm² in area or 50 mm in length;
b. At more than three points in a 1 m length by amounts each even not
exceeding 25 mm² in area and 50 mm in length;
c. At more than six points in the cut and bent length of a bar by amounts each
even not exceeding 25 mm² in area or 50 mm in length.
2. Repair all cut ends and damaged areas not exceeding 25 mm² in area or 50 mm
in length with patching material applied in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations;
3. Carry out repairs to epoxy coatings within 8 hours of cutting or damage and
remove traces of rust from the surface of the reinforcement before carrying out
the repair.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MECHANICAL COUPLER
CON3.W310.9 QUALIFIED SUPERVISION
1. Assign a Mechanical Coupler Quality Control Coordinator (MCQCC), with a
minimum qualification and experience of a Grade T1 TCP for Type 1
mechanical coupler and a Grade T3 TCP for Type 2 mechanical coupler under
the Registered Contractor’s stream in the CoPSS, to:
a. Supervise mechanical splice works and ensure that these are all carried out
in accordance with approved plans and comply with the requirements on
quality and workmanship;
b. Devise inspection check list of the mechanical couplers works;
c. Provide full time continuous supervision of the manufacturing process of the
connecting ends of the steel reinforcing bars and the installation of steel
reinforcing bars to the mechanical couplers.
2. For Type 1 mechanical coupler, submit the details as specified in the Project
Specific Specification to the CM for approval;
3. For Type 2 mechanical coupler, submit a quality supervision plan as specified in
the Project Specific Specification to the CM for approval;
4. The duties of MCQCC can be taken up by SQCC as stipulated in PRE.B6.130.
CON3.W320.9 INSPECTION LOG BOOK

1. Record the following details in an inspection log book:
a. The names and qualifications of the supervisory personnel assigned by the
CM and by the Contractor as stipulated in CON3.W310;
b. The date, time, items inspected and inspection results.
2. Keep the inspection log book on Site for CM’s inspection when required and
submit the inspection log book to CM upon completion of the mechanical splice
works.

REINFORCEMENT CON3 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
DEFINITIONS
CON3.T010.9 BATCH OF BAR REINFORCEMENT
1. Subject to the maximum tonnage in sub-clause (2) below, a batch of bar
reinforcement is the quantity of bar reinforcement delivered to Site within a
week under one delivery order, of one nominal diameter, and one steel grade and
produced by the same manufacturer;
2. The maximum tonnage of a batch shall not exceed:
a. For bars of diameter 20 mm and above : 200 tonnes;
b. For bars of diameter less than 20 mm : 100 tonnes..
CON3.T020.9 BATCH AND LOT OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

1. A batch of fabric reinforcement is any quantity of fabric reinforcement of the
same combination of steel grades and diameters, produced by the same welding
machine with defined bar pattern, covered by the same mill and testing
certificates and produced and properly identified by the CM in an Approved
fenced off area in factory or in the stockholder's yard under one consignment;
2. A lot of fabric reinforcement is any quantity of fabric reinforcement of the same
combination of steel grades and diameters, produced by the same welding
machine with defined bar pattern, covered by the same mill and testing
certificates and delivered to Site at any one time.
CON3.T025.9 BATCH OF MECHANICAL COUPLER

In this Specification, a batch of mechanical coupler is any quantity of coupler of the
same type and size delivered to the Site as one consignment and covered by the same
mill and testing certificates.
CON3.T030.9 TESTING BY DIRECT TESTING CONTRACTOR (DTC) AND HOUSING

DEPARTMENT'S MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY (HDMTL)
Unless otherwise Approved or specified elsewhere, provide reinforcement samples
to the CM for testing by the DTC or HDMTL.

1. Allow sufficient time for the testing of specimens;
2. Do not cut, bend, fix or incorporate steel reinforcement into permanent works
until all relevant test specimens have successfully passed all tests carried out by
the DTC and HDMTL.
PURCHASERS TESTING
CON3.T110.9 RATE OF SAMPLING
1. For bar reinforcement, provide adequate test specimens from each batch
delivered to the Site in accordance with CS2:2012. The number of test
specimens taken from each batch and the rate of sampling shall be in accordance
with Table 10 of CS2:2012;
2. For fabric reinforcement in factory/stockholder's yard, provide samples from
each batch as follows:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sampling Rate of Fabric Reinforcement

Size of Batch No. of Samples per Batch
0 - 50 tonnes 1
Each additional 50 tonnes or part of 50 tonnes 1
3. For reinforcement used for construction of hoardings and associated covered
walkways and gantries, the rate of sampling stated in the sub-clauses (1) and (2)
above may be reduced at the discretion of the CM.
CON3.T120.9 PROCEDURE
Testing arrangement:
1. Under the supervision of the CM,
a. Cut and take test specimens selected at random from bar reinforcement on
Site or samples selected at random from fabric reinforcement in
factory/stockholder's yard;
b. Ensure size of specimens/samples to be:
i. Bar reinforcement: each specimen to be minimum 1 m long;
ii. Fabric reinforcement: each sample to be 1.2 m long x 1.2 m wide
containing at least four wires in each direction.
c. Appropriately mark and deliver the test specimens or samples to the DTC
for testing.
CON3.T130.9 TESTING BY HDMTL

Testing samples:
1. Provide additional bar reinforcement specimens to HDMTL for test as follows:
a. Take specimens from bars adjacent to those from which specimens have
been cut for testing by the DTC;
b. Rate of sampling: approximately one-fifth of the rate specified in
CON3.T110 with same number of test specimens or samples;
c. Size of specimens/samples: in accordance with CON3.T120;
d. Scope, number of tests and method of testing as specified in CON3.T210
and CON3.T220.
2. Provide additional samples from fabric reinforcement in factory/stockholder's
yard under the same testing regime in sub-clause (1).
CON3.T140.9 ADDITIONAL SAMPLES OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT DELIVERED

TO SITE
When Instructed, provide additional samples of fabric reinforcement for testing by
DTC. The rate of sampling shall be minimum one sample for every total 100 tonnes
of fabric reinforcement delivered to Site, irrespective of batches/consignments
numbers assigned in the factory/stockholder's yard. Each sample so selected by the
CM represents the particular lot delivered to Site.
TESTING BY DTC
CON3.T210.9 SCOPE AND NUMBER OF TESTS
Testing samples:
1. Tests will be carried out on each specimen of bar reinforcement in accordance
with CS2:2012;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Number of tests on each specimen of bar reinforcement in accordance with

Table 10 of CS2:2012;
3. Tests will be carried out on each sample of fabric reinforcement to determine:
a. Yield stress;
b. Elongation;
c. Tensile strength;
d. Rebending and/or bending properties;
e. Unit mass;
f. Pitch dimension;
g. Surface geometry (determination for relative rib area (fR) only).
4. Number of tests on each sample of fabric reinforcement as follow:
Type and Number of Tests
Description Tensile Bend Rebend Unit Pitch Surface
Mass Dimension Geometry
Steel fabric
- fabric sheet - - - 1 - -
- longitudinal 1 - 1 - 1 1
wire
- transverse 1 - 1 - 1 1
wire
CON3.T220.9 METHODS OF TESTING

Tests will be carried out at a temperature between 5C to 35C and in accordance
with the following standards:
1. CS2:2012: for hot rolled steel bars;
2. BS4449:2005: for cold reduced steel bars;
3. BS4483:2005: for steel fabric.
COMPLIANCE
CON3.T310.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA - BAR REINFORCEMENT
A batch of bar reinforcement is deemed to comply with the specification if the test
results meet the requirements of CS2:2012. Any non-complying batch of bar
reinforcement is to be removed from Site.
CON3.T320.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA - FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

A batch of fabric reinforcement is deemed to comply with the Specification if the
test results meet the requirements of BS 4483:2005, except the test for shear force of
welded joint.
RE-TESTS
CON3.T410.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR BAR REINFORCEMENT
Non-compliance:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. If the result of any test for bar reinforcement does not comply with the specified
requirements for the property, provide additional test specimens from the same
batch for additional tests for the property in accordance with CS2:2012. The
number of additional specimens must be as stated in CS2:2012.
CON3.T420.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

Non-compliance:
1. If the result of any test for fabric reinforcement for elongation, tensile strength,
bending, rebending, unit mass, pitch dimension and surface geometry does not
comply with the specified requirements for the property, provide additional
samples from the same batch for additional tests for the property. The number
of additional samples is the total number of samples taken in accordance with
CON3.T110 and each additional sample shall comprise 2 pieces of 1200 mm x
1200 mm fabric reinforcement;
2. Test in accordance with the following:
a. Number of tests on each additional sample of fabric reinforcement in
accordance with the following table:
Type and Number of Tests
Description Tensile Bend Rebend Unit Pitch Surface
Mass Dimension Geometry
Steel fabric
- fabric sheet - - - 2 - -
- longitudinal 2 - 2 - 2 2
wire
- transverse 2 - 2 - 2 2
wire
CON3.T430.9 STANDARD FOR REJECTION

The batch or lot of reinforcement is considered as not complying with the specified
requirements for any particular property if the result of any additional test does not
comply with the specified requirements for that property, then:
1. The non-complying batch of bar reinforcement or lot of fabric reinforcement
shall be removed from Site;
2. The non-complying batch of fabric reinforcement in the factory/stockholder's
yard shall not be delivered to Site.

CON3.T440.9 ADDITIONAL TEST SPECIMENS FOR EPOXY COATING TEST FOR
EACH BATCH
1. Provide and cut 2 test specimens each two metre length from each batch of
reinforcement, as directed by CM for epoxy coating tests;
2. Cut each specimen at least 1 m from the ends of a 12 m length bar and select test
specimens from different bundles of the reinforcement batch.
CON3.T450.9 TESTING OF THE EPOXY COATING

The DTC shall carry out thickness, adhesion and continuity tests on each additional
test specimen as selected in accordance with CON3.T440:
1. Perform the tests in accordance with the following Standards:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Adhesion and continuity tests: to BS 7295:Part 1:1990 with 180° bend test
replaced by 90°;
b. Thickness test for bars of 12 mm diameter or below: to Method No. 6Aa of
BS 3900:Part C5:1992;
c. Thickness test for bars of 16 mm diameter or above to: Method No. 6Aa or
No. 6Ab of BS 3900:Part C5:1992.
2. Carry out tests on specimens within a temperature range of between 5 degree
Celsius and 30 degree Celsius;
3. Take 5 pairs of readings along two opposite sides of each specimen for thickness
test (a total of ten recorded measurements per bar). A single recorded thickness
measurement is the average of three individual reading obtained in between the
ribs of three consecutive deformations;
4. Perform two bend tests for adhesion at a uniform rate within 15 seconds.
CON3.T460.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR EPOXY COATINGS TO

REINFORCEMENT
Results of tests for thickness, adhesion and continuity for epoxy coatings to
reinforcement to comply with the following requirements:
1. All coating thickness measured from the 2 specimens not less than 0.13 mm.
The average of the recorded thickness measurements of coating not less than
0.18 mm and not exceed 0.30 mm;
2. Cracking or debonding of the coating not visible to the unaided eye on any part
of the bent bar;
3. The continuity of the coating to BS 7295:Part 1:clause 4.2:1990.
CON3.T470.9 NON-COMPLIANCE FOR THICKNESS, ADHESION AND CONTINUITY

TESTS
1. Retests of specimens of the same batch are permitted if one test specimen fails to
meet the coating thickness, coating adhesion or coating continuity requirements;
2. Take two further specimens from the same batch for the test or tests in which the
original specimens failed;
3. The batch is deemed to comply with the specification if both additional
specimens pass the retests;
4. The batch is deemed not to comply with the specification if either or both
specimens fails in the retests;
5. Reject and remove the non-complying batch from Site.
CON3.T480.9 TIME REQUIRED FOR TESTING OF THE EPOXY COATED

REINFORCEMENT
1. Allow minimum 20 working days for the availability of test results after delivery
of the test specimens to the DTC;
2. Do not use the epoxy coated reinforcement until the relevant test specimens have
passed all tests.
MECHANICAL COUPLER
Provide test specimens, each with two reinforcing bars of the relevant diameter
either threaded or grouted in sleeve in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommended assembly method, from each batch for testing by DTC as follows;
1. For Type 1 mechanical coupler:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Sampling Rate of Mechanical Coupler

Size of batch
Minimum number of test specimens per batch
(No.)
Less than 100 3
100 – 500 6
Exceeding 500 9
2. For Type 2 mechanical coupler:
Minimum number of test specimens per batch
Size of batch Tests as per clause 3.2.8.4 (b), Test as per clause 3.2.8.4(a)
(No.) (c) & (d) of the CoP for of the CoP for Structural Use
Structural Use of Concrete of Concrete 2013
2013 (per test)
Less than 100 5 3
100-500 6 6
Exceeding 500 9 9
CON3.T520.9 METHOD OF TESTING

The testing for splicing assemblies of Type 1 and Type 2 mechanical couplers shall
be in accordance with the Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete 2013
published by the Buildings Department.
CON3.T530.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA

1. A batch of Type 1 mechanical coupler is deemed to comply with the
specification if the test results of all the splicing assemblies meet the
requirements of clause 3.2.8.3 of the Code of Practice for Structural Use of
Concrete 2013;
2. A batch of Type 2 mechanical coupler is deemed to comply with the
specification if the test results of all the splicing assemblies meet the
requirements of clause 3.2.8.4 of the Code of Practice for Structural Use of
Concrete 2013;
3. For Type 2 mechanical coupler, if any one of the tests as specified in sub-clause
(2) above cannot be completed due to the reinforcement breakage with the
testing load below 125% of the characteristic yield strength of the reinforcement,
disregard the test result and provide another test specimen for repetition of that
particular test;
4. For Type 2 mechanical coupler, further repetition of tests may be carried out if
there is subsequent failure with reinforcement breakage at below 125% of the
characteristic yield strength of the reinforcement;
5. Any non-complying batch is to be removed from Site.
CON3.T540.9 TIME REQUIRED FOR TESTING

1. Allow minimum 15 days for the availability of test results after delivery of the
test specimens to the DTC;
2. Allow extra time for carrying out repetition of tests as mentioned in sub-clauses
(3) and (4) of CON3.T530;
3. Do not use the batch of mechanical couplers until the relevant test specimens
have passed all tests.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

PRECAST CONCRETE CON4 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON4 PRECAST CONCRETE

DESIGN
DESIGN PARAMETERS
CON4.D010.9 PRECAST CONCRETE
1. Design in accordance with this Worksection and Worksection CON1;
2. Where any ambiguity, discrepancy or conflict arises between this Worksection
and any clauses in any other Worksections of this Specification, ensure that the
provisions of this Worksection prevail.
CON4.D020.9 STRUCTURAL JOINT DESIGN

Design structural joints between precast concrete units and insitu concrete to transmit
the worst anticipated combination of moment, shear, axial force, temperature stresses,
shrinkage, creep and torsion in accordance with Worksection CON1 unless specified
otherwise.
CON4.D030.9 STEEL LIFTING FRAMES

Design and construct steel lifting frames in accordance with the Code of Practice for
the Structural Use of Steel 2011 issued by the Buildings Department.
CON4.D040.9 LIFTING POINTS

Submit for Approval the proposed positions of lifting holes and/or points of
attachment of lifting slings to precast concrete units if not shown on the Drawings.
DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS

CON4.D110.9 GENERAL
All drawings and calculations relating to the structural design must be prepared and
signed by a Registered Structural Engineer who is registered under the Buildings
Department.
DESIGN SUBMISSIONS
CON4.D210.9 GENERAL
Where appropriate, submit all necessary design, calculation and drawings pertinent
to CON4.D010 to CON4.D110, CON4.D310 to CON4.D530 for Approval.
CON4.D220.9 PROGRAMME FOR SUBMISSIONS

Agree a programme for all submissions during the Contract with the CM prior to the
notified date for commencement of Works.
CON4.D230.9 SHOP DRAWINGS

Unless otherwise agreed, submit five sets of fully dimensioned shop drawings for
Approval in accordance with CON4.D220.

PRECAST CONCRETE CON4 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
JOINTS
CON4.D310.9 JOINTS
For application of back-up materials, bond breakers and sealants, see Worksection
WAT5.
CON4.D320.9 GASKETS
Gasket may be used in weatherproofing joint provided that:
1. The joint is horizontal; and
2. The gasket is always under compression.
CON4.D330.9 MORTAR STOPS

Use backing rods or other Approved method as mortar stops in grouting panel joints
when necessary.
WEATHERPROOF JOINTS
CON4.D410.9 JOINT DESIGN
Design weatherproof external joints to ensure airtightness and watertightness and in
accordance with BS 6093:1993.
CON4.D420.9 TYPES OF JOINT

Use weatherproof joints of one of the following types and in accordance with
BS 6093:1993:
1. Sealed joint (one-stage joint);
2. Drained joint (two-stage joint).
CON4.D430.9 DESIGN WIDTH OF JOINTS

Design the joint width in accordance with BS 6093:1993 and BS 6213:1982.
CON4.D440.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

Approval of the proposed jointing system including the weatherproofing materials
does not relieve the Contractor from any liability on the performance of the joints.
MODIFICATIONS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE

The Contractor's responsibility for the design of his proposed modification is
covered under GCC Clauses 5.15 and 11.8 and the Appendix E to the Specification.

Any proposed structural modifications must comply with the following:
1. The relevant structural design guidelines published by the Housing Department
and included as Appendix E to this Specification; and
2. The Regulations currently in use.
CON4.D530.9 REINFORCEMENT CHANGES

Obtain CM's approval for any proposed changes to reinforcement details, as shown
on the Drawings, required to suit the proposed method of casting and installation.

PRECAST CONCRETE CON4 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
GENERAL
CON4.M010.9 SUBSTITUTION OF NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
1. Submit for Approval any proposal to substitute non-structural insitu concrete or
non-structural partitions, excluding panel wall partitions, with precast concrete.
CON4.M020.9 PRECAST CONCRETE

Where precast work is proposed and Approved, comply with the relevant provisions
of:
1. Worksection CON1;
2. Worksection CON2 or FOR; and
3. Worksection CON3.
CON4.M030.9 PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS

See Worksection CON7.
CON4.M040.9 OFF-SITE MANUFACTURE

Obtain Approval for off-site manufacture. For precast concrete components, see
CON7.D010.
SUBMISSIONS
CON4.M110.9 GENERAL
Submit the following details for Approval:
1. Drawings, calculations and any other information indicating the location and/or
element of precast concrete and any changes resulting from the use of precast
concrete;
2. Calculations which show all loading imposed on the precast concrete due to
lifting, handling, stacking, shock or any other reason, complies with the relevant
British Standards, unless specified otherwise;
3. A method for identifying and recording the daily production of precast concrete
units and their final position after installation;
4. The joints required between the proposed precast concrete and insitu concrete;
5. Drawings and calculations of lifting frames for precast units where specified.
CON4.M120.9 REINFORCEMENT CHANGES

Obtain prior Approval for any proposed changes to reinforcement details, as shown
on the Drawings and/or to the bar bending schedules, required to suit the proposed
method of casting and installation.
CONCRETE GRADE
CON4.M210.9 CONCRETE FOR LINTELS
Cast precast lintels in concrete Grade 35/20, unless otherwise specified.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON4.M220.9 CONCRETE FOR STAIRS

Cast precast stairs in concrete Grade 35/20, unless otherwise specified.
CON4.M222.9 CONCRETE FOR REFUSE CHUTE

Cast precast refuse chute in concrete Grade 35/20, unless otherwise specified.
NON-SHRINK GROUT FOR PRECAST STAIRS

CON4.M230.9 APPROVED MIX
For non-shrink grout, the submitted grout mix shall have the specified characteristic
as stated in CON4.M260. Submit samples of non-shrink grout for carrying out the
tests as stated in CON4.M260 by the Direct Testing Contractor for Approval.
CON4.M240.9 CONSTITUENT MATERIALS OF NON-SHRINK GROUT

To be a pre-packaged cement base product which contains Portland cement, selected
sand and non-shrink additives.
CON4.M250.9 WATER/POWDER RATIO OR WATER CONTENT

For pre-packaged non-shrink grout product, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
CON4.M260.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT

1. To be pre-packaged cement based product which contains Portland cement,
selected sand and non-shrink additives with the following required properties:
a. A 28 days strength equal to or higher than the grade of the adjoining
structures. The compressive strength shall be determined by compressive
strength test as CON4.T080;
b. Chloride content of grout shall not exceed 0.1% by mass of the cement.
Submit documentary evidence that the summation of chloride contents of
constituent materials complies with the aforesaid requirement;
c. Setting time of the non-shrink grout when tested in accordance with
ASTM C953 - 87(97) shall be greater than 1 hour for initial set and be less
than 24 hours for final set;
d. Free expansion within 24 hours shall be of maximum 4% when measured in
accordance with ASTM C827 - 95a(97). Expansion between 3 to 28 days
when measured in accordance with ASTM C1090 - 96 shall be between 0%
to 0.4%.
CON4.M270.9 CONCRETE WITH NON-SHRINK ADDITIVES

Submit for Approval and:
1. Maximum aggregate size: 10 mm;
2. Grade strength: a 28 days strength equal to or higher than the grade strength of
the adjoining structure;
3. To comply with the manufacturer's recommendations on non-shrink additives;
4. Do not contain chlorides.
WEATHER PROOF JOINTS

CON4.M310.9 GENERAL
Weatherproofing materials to comply with BS 6093:1993 and subject to Approval.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON4.M320.9 SEALANTS
As WAT5.M180.
CON4.M330.9 MORTAR STOP BACKING RODS

Polyethylene foam or other Approved.
CON4.M340.9 DETAILS OF WEATHERPROOFING

1. Submit details of weatherproofing materials in accordance with CON4.M310
and CON4.M330 for Approval, including technical information, samples, test
reports and proven performance records of proposed materials.

PRECAST CONCRETE CON4 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
CASTING PRECAST UNITS

CON4.W005.9 QUALITY SYSTEMS AND QUALIFIED SUPERVISION
Comply with CON7.W010 to CON7.W120 and relevant provisions of Worksection
CON7 on quality systems and qualified supervision for precast works.
CON4.W010.9 PLACING CONCRETE

Cast precast concrete in a single pour unless otherwise Approved.
CASTING LINTELS
CON4.W110.9 GENERAL
Except where unusual or exceptional loading conditions apply or specified elsewhere,
construct lintels as shown below:
Lintels
Clear Span Depth of Lintel No. and diameter of mild
(metres) (mm) steel bars per 105 mm (or part) in width
0-1 150 one 12 mm
1-2 225 one 16 mm
2-3 300 one 20 mm
CON4.W120.9 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT

Unless otherwise specified, provide 25 mm minimum concrete cover to steel bar
reinforcement.
CON4.W130.9 BEARING ALLOWANCE

Unless otherwise specified, allow for a minimum bearing of 150 mm over its full
width at each end.
CASTING STAIRS
CON4.W210.9 CONSTRUCTION
Construct stairs in accordance with details given on the Drawings specified in the
Project Specific Specification.
CON4.W220.9 FORMWORK
As CON2.W920, unless otherwise specified.
CURING
CON4.W310.9 GENERAL
Cure concrete in accordance with CON1.W1410 to CON1.W1490, unless otherwise
Approved.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON4.W320.9 OTHER CURING METHODS

Carry out a full scale trial, where curing methods other than those specified in
CON4.W310 are proposed, to demonstrate satisfactory performance. Obtain
Approval before precast concrete work commences.
STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND LIFTING OF

UNITS
CON4.W410.9 STRENGTH OF UNITS
Unless otherwise specified, do not lift precast units for at least 24 hours after casting
or until the concrete has attained a strength adequate to resist the resultant stresses
without inducing cracking or other damage to the concrete.
CON4.W420.9 STORING UNITS

1. For superstructure works:
a. Store units on a levelled, well-drained and maintained hard-standing ground
which will not result in damage, contamination or injury to others, and
separate using Approved methods. Store different types of precast units
separately. Protect as necessary from the weather and from staining;
2. For works other than that in sub-clause (1):
a. Store units on a clean, firm base and separate using Approved methods.
Store different types of precast units separately. Protect as necessary from
the weather and from staining.
CON4.W430.9 DAMAGED UNITS

Replace or repair all units damaged by handling, hoisting into position or during
transporting.
ERECTING PRECAST UNITS

CON4.W510.9 STANDARD AND SEQUENCE
Erect precast units in accordance with BS 5531:1988 and in an Approved sequence.
CON4.W520.9 TEMPORARY BRACING

Provide temporary bracing to units where appropriate.
CON4.W530.9 DOWEL FIXINGS FOR PRECAST STAIRS

Locate box cutouts of precast stairs over cast-in dowel bars and fill with non-shrink
grout.
CON4.W540.9 BEDDING AND JOINTING PRECAST STAIRS

Bed and joint precast stairs in non-shrink grout or cement mortar where shown on
Drawings.
ACCURACY AND TOLERANCES

CON4.W610.9 GENERAL
1. Refer to:
a. Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction 2016 published by the
BD;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Appendix H "Schedule of Tolerances" to this Specification.

2. Where any ambiguity, discrepancy or conflict arises between sub-clauses (1)(a)
and (1)(b) above, the provisions given in Appendix H shall prevail.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PRECAST UNITS

CON4.W710.9 IDENTIFICATIONS AND RECORDS
Submit a method for identifying and recording the daily production of precast
concrete units and their final position after installation.
DEFECTS
CON4.W810.9 MINOR CHIPPING
Subject to Approval, carry out repairs to minor chipping only by patching up after
installation.
CON4.W820.9 OTHER REPAIRS

For repairs to other damaged units, carry out any repair work to the satisfaction of
the CM.

PRECAST CONCRETE CON4 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
SAMPLING AND TESTING

CON4.T010.9 FULL SCALE MOCK UP
Where required by the CM, provide full scale mock up to demonstrate the precast
units and the system of joints proposed as detailed in the Project Specific
Specification, all to the satisfaction of the CM.
CON4.T020.9 WATERTIGHTNESS TEST

Before Approval to use precast concrete as CON4.M110, carry out watertightness
test on the mock up on the precast unit of a particular type, with the jointing system
in place.
CON4.T030.9 SAMPLING FOR WATERTIGHTNESS TEST

Testing samples:
1. Carry out full scale watertightness test on the precast unit of a particular type,
with the jointing system in place, at the rate of 0.5% or each type proposed or
one precast unit, whichever is the greater.
CON4.T040.9 AGREED TEST PROCEDURES

Test with a water pressure, duration, frequency and procedure as agreed by the CM.
CON4.T050.9 CRITERIA FOR FAILURE

The precast units and joints will be deemed failures if any sign of water seeping
through the joints or the body of the cast unit, including signs of damp patches, is
observed during the test.
CON4.T060.9 REMEDIAL ACTION

Non-compliance:
1. Upon failure of the watertightness test as CON4.T050:
a. Remove the precast unit and scrape out all jointing materials;
b. Redesign the precast unit or the jointing system, if the CM considers
appropriate; and
c. Reconstruct and retest as directed by the CM.
CON4.T070.9 TESTING OF NON-SHRINK GROUT

Testing method and testing samples:
1. Test grout in accordance with CS1:2010 as follows:
a. Provide one sample for each grout mix from every 10 batches of grout or
every 10 m3 of grout produced in a day, whichever is the lesser. At least one
sample shall be provided for each grout mix produced on any one day or less
than 10m3 of grout produced. For the purpose of this clause, a batch of grout
is any quantity of grout produced in one cycle of operations of a mixer;
b. Each sample provided in sub-clause (1)(a) above shall not be taken at a time
more than one hour after the grout is mixed and shall be protected from
weather before test cubes are made.

PRECAST CONCRETE CON4 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON4.T080.9 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST FOR NON-SHRINK GROUT

1. The DTC shall prepare two grout cubes of 100 mm size from each sample, cure
and test the grout cubes for crushing strength at 28 days in accordance with
CS1:2010;
2. The average of the crushing strengths of the two grout cubes shall be taken as the
test result. The compliance criteria C1 and C2 shall be adopted as appropriate
for assessing compliance requirements stipulated in CON1.T640 and
CON1.T660;
3. The test result shall comply with the following requirements:
a. Individual test results: comply with the requirement given in Column A of
the Table specified in CON1.T650;
b. Average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results:
comply with the requirement given in Column B of the Table specified in
CON1.T650. Where there are less than four available test results, treat the
average of the first two or first three consecutive test results in the same
manner as groups of four consecutive test results.
4. If the difference between the compressive strengths of two grout cubes made
from one sample of grout mix exceeds 15% but does not exceed 20% of the test
result:
a. Use the higher of the compressive strengths of the two grout cubes to assess
compliance as stated in sub-clause (3)(a) above; and
b. Do not use the test results for that sample to assess compliance as set out in
sub-clause (3)(b) above nor to calculate the standard deviation.
5. If the difference between the compressive strengths of two grout cubes made
from one sample of grout mix exceeds 20% of the test result:
a. Discard the test result for that sample; and
b. Propose investigation for Approval to establish if the grout represented by
the sample is acceptable or not.
TESTING FIXINGS
CON4.T110.9 TENSILE TESTING
Testing method:
1. When directed, test fixings and anchors to BS 5080:Part 1:1993.
CON4.T120.9 SHEAR TESTING

Testing method:
1. When directed, test fixings and anchors to BS 5080:Part 2:1986.

PRECAST FACADE UNITS (CONTRACTOR'S...... CON5 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5 PRECAST FACADE UNITS

(CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)
DESIGN
GENERAL
CON5.D010.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS
1. Design and construct precast facades in accordance with this Worksection and
with the relevant provisions of the following Worksections:
a. CON1, Insitu Concrete;
b. CON2, Formwork;
c. CON3, Reinforcement;
d. CON4, Precast Concrete;
e. COM11, Radio Frequency Identification and Web-Based Database System
for Building Components.
2. Where any ambiguity, discrepancy or conflict arises between this Worksection,
CON5.D020.9 STANDARD
Comply particularly with CON1.M010.
SCOPE OF THE WORK

CON5.D110.9 GENERAL
1. Refer to the Drawings for the definition of the extent of the precast facades
including window installation;
2. For off-Site casting, coordinate with the precast facade supplier for the
installation of windows, pre-formed holes, surface finishes, earthing lugs as
shown on the Drawings;
3. Include the following with the precast facades delivered to or fabricated on Site:
a. Precast concrete panel as shown on the Drawings;
b. Aluminium or uPVC window obtained from a supplier approved by the CM;
c. Pre-formed holes for the installation of drainage pipes;
d. Earthing lugs as shown on the Drawings;
e. Concealed electrical PVC conduit system installations as shown on
Drawings and as specified;
f. A certificate indicating the date of casting;
g. Work completion certificate for pre-installed electrical conduit system
installation;
h. Embed Radio Frequency Identification tag as specified.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.D120.9 INSITU CONCRETE ELEMENTS INCLUDED

In addition to the precast elements shown on the Drawings, any insitu facades at F1
and roof-minus-one floors and any other floor indicated as such on the Drawings,
designed and cast as insitu concrete, also form part of the whole precast facade
system. For such insitu facade elements, comply with Worksections CON1, CON2,
CON3 and CON6 of this Specification and those provisions of this Worksection as
may apply to insitu facades.
CON5.D130.9 SCOPE OF THE DESIGN

Include the following in the scope of the design of the precast facade system:
1. The structural design of the facade units to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings;
2. The design of the structural connections by which the facade units are joined
monolithically with the building structure;
3. The design of one-stage weatherproof joints between the facade units and the
building structure;
4. The design of the connection to the supporting system for the air conditioning
unit as shown on the Drawings, (maximum net weight 100 kg);
5. The design of the fixing of the windows to the openings;
6. The design of electrical conduit system installation.
DESIGN PARAMETERS
CON5.D210.9 GENERAL
Design the facade units generally as a one-piece design.
CON5.D220.9 MINIMUM THICKNESSES

Design each facade unit with the line of the inner side of the unit fixed as shown on
the Drawings and:
1. With a general minimum thickness of not less than 150 mm;
2. With the thickness of the ledge for the air conditioning hood not less than
125 mm.
CON5.D230.9 OVERHANG AT BASE OF UNITS

Incorporate a 575 mm overhang at the base of each facade unit designed
monolithically with the wall of that facade unit.
CON5.D240.9 WINDOW OPENINGS

Design openings for windows in the facade unit:
1. To the dimensions shown on the Drawings;
2. Restrained at the top with a beam and at either side with a wall or a post.
CON5.D250.9 LOADINGS
Design facade units to sustain all possible loadings acting upon the units. In
particular, take the following loading conditions into account:
1. Dead loads and superimposed loads;
2. Wind loads in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong
Kong 2004 issued by the Buildings Department except that the total pressure
coefficient (Cp) is 1.4;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Eccentric loads which arise either as a result of the centre of gravity of the
facade units being offset from the support or from random inaccuracies
occurring during construction. Allow a minimum of 25 mm eccentricity in the
design for such random inaccuracies;
4. Tensile loads if the facade units are designed to be hung from the top or from the
sides;
5. Buckling loads if the facade units are subject to vertical compression;
6. Temperature stresses;
7. Temporary loads which arise during demoulding, storage, lifting, transporting
and erection of the facade units. In particular, design for the complex stresses
arising out of lifting from stacked position into lifting position.
CON5.D260.9 MINIMUM CONCRETE GRADE

For facade units: Grade 35/20.
CON5.D270.9 CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCEMENT

Minimum cover to reinforcing bars in facade units:
1. External face: 30 mm;
2. Internal face: 25 mm.
CON5.D280.9 LIFTING AND LOCATING DEVICES

1. Design lifting and location devices for embedding or fixing to the facade units in
accordance with the Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction 2016
issued by the BD;
2. Allow a minimum safety factor of 4 for lifting inserts under normal
circumstances;
3. Check and make necessary provisions in the facade units to prevent local rupture
or cracking as a result of using lifting and locating devices.
CON5.D290.9 LOCATION POINTS

1. Make provision on each facade unit for locating, plumbing and levelling to the
designed location within acceptable tolerance limits;
2. Include details of location points as part of the submission under sub-clause (7)
of CON5.D860.
CON5.D300.9 PERMANENT CONNECTIONS

Design permanent structural connections using one, or a combination of both, of the
following methods:
1. Insitu connection by which the facade units are joined monolithically with the
building structure;
2. Mechanical connections by which the facade units are secured to the building
structure at attachment points using brackets, cleats and fixings.
CON5.D310.9 ERECTION RESTRAINTS

1. Design vertical and horizontal restraints for temporary connections of the facade
units to the main structure such that displacement of the facade unit cannot occur
before making the permanent structural connection;
2. Design horizontal restraint to resist a minimum horizontal live load of
± 0.5 kN/m run acting at 1.5 m from the base of the facade unit.
CON5.D320.9 ADJUSTMENT DEVICES

1. Provide the facade units with separate vertical and horizontal adjustment devices;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do not use adjustment devices in the vertical plane for horizontal location
devices or horizontal restraint and do not design such devices to take any
permanent shear (horizontal) loads;
3. Do not design any adjustment devices in the horizontal plane to take permanent
vertical loads.
CON5.D330.9 STRUCTURAL SUPPORT

1. Design the facade units at each floor to derive their support from the building
structure at the same floor via the specified permanent structural connections;
2. Do not allow any permanent loading from the facade units to be transferred to
the facade units above or below.
INSITU CONNECTION DESIGN

CON5.D410.9 GENERAL
Design the insitu connection as CON5.D130:
1. To withstand the stresses induced by the facade units described in CON5.D250,
sub-clauses (1) to (6);
2. To be watertight;
3. In concrete of the same grade as that for the precast units.
CON5.D420.9 REINFORCEMENT, SHEAR CONNECTORS ETC

Ensure reinforcement, shear connectors, etc used for the insitu connection design are
adequately embedded or anchored into the building structure.
CON5.D430.9 VERTICAL CONNECTIONS

For vertical insitu connections:
1. If the minimum dimension of the void to be in filled is more than 150 mm, use
non-shrink grout or concrete with non-shrinking additives;
2. If the minimum dimension of the void is less than 150 mm, use only non-shrink
grout.
CON5.D440.9 HORIZONTAL CONNECTIONS

Concrete with non-shrinking additives may be permitted for horizontal insitu
connections, in lieu of non-shrink grout, subject to the provisions of CON5.M050.
MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS
CON5.D510.9 GENERAL
Design the mechanical connections referred to in sub-clause (2) of CON5.D130 to
withstand the stresses transmitted by the facade units to the building structure,
described in CON5.D250 sub-clauses (1) to (6), in one of the following two groups:
1. Tying back fixing;
2. Location fixing.
CON5.D520.9 LOAD BEARING FIXINGS

Adopt load bearing fixing where the facade unit is designed to bear upon the
building structure. Design the fixing so that the supporting area is adequate to carry
the weight of the facade unit.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.D530.9 TYING BACK FIXINGS

Adopt tying back fixing for securing the facade units into position. Design the fixing
and the facade units to sustain the forces due to the restraint of the relative movement
between the facade units and the building structure including movements cause by
the effect of temperature, moisture movement, shrinkage and creep based on Hong
Kong conditions.
CON5.D540.9 LOCATION FIXINGS

Adopt location fixing for positioning and levelling the facade unit before it is
connected. Allow for all handling and positioning loads.
CON5.D550.9 TYPES OF ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE

1. Fix the facade units to the building structure by one of the following methods:
a. Cast in anchorages (Type A);
b. Grouted in dowel bars (Type B);
c. Expanding anchorages (Type C).
2. Comply with CON5.D530 to CON5.D540 for Type A and B anchorages;
3. For Type C anchorages, submit manufacturer's certificates and conduct pull out
tests to check compliance with manufacturer's recommendations;
4. Submit for Approval any proposed alternative anchorage methods.
CON5.D560.9 LINKS BETWEEN ANCHORAGES

Angle cleats may be used to form the link between anchorages. Assembly
adjustments may be made in three dimensions using horizontal and vertical slotted
holes. Submit for Approval any proposed alternative devices to link between
anchorages.
CON5.D570.9 CONCEALMENT OF FIXINGS

Conceal all permanent fixing connections by Approved methods.
CON5.D580.9 RESISTANCE TO CORROSION

All metal parts of connections must either be:
1. Corrosion resistant, being constructed of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel but
avoiding any contact of such materials with the reinforcement; or
2. Protected against corrosion by an Approved method.
WEATHERPROOF JOINTS
CON5.D610.9 GENERAL
Design weatherproof joints between the facade units and the structure or between
two adjacent facade units to ensure air and water tightness and in accordance with
BS 6093:1993 and include joint seals in accordance with CON5.M110 and
CON5.M120.

Use weatherproof joints of one of the following types:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.D640.9 COMBINATIONS OF JOINT TYPE AND STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS

Use only the following combinations of weatherproof joint and permanent structural
connection in the design of the precast facades:
1. Either one-stage or two-stage weatherproof joint with insitu connections
specified in CON5.D300 (1);
2. Two-stage weatherproof joint with mechanical connections specified in
CON5.D300 (2).

Approval of the proposed jointing system including the weatherproofing materials
does not relieve the Contractor from any liability on the performance of the joints.
MODIFICATIONS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE

CON5.D720.9 TYPES OF MODIFICATION

Modification to the design of the building structure to accommodate the precast
facade design is permitted under the following circumstances subject to detailed
submissions and Approval:
1. Modification for constructing the permanent structural connections.
Reinforcement may be required to be relocated and/or added to the building
structure provided that the resulting reinforcement arrangements produce an
equivalent or higher overall design strength to that of the original structure;
2. Modification to incorporate the weatherproof joints. Grooves may be required to
be formed provided that the resulting section produces an equivalent or higher
overall design strength to that of the original structure.

Any proposed structural modifications to accommodate the precast facade design
must comply with the Regulations currently in use.
CON5.D740.9 WIND LOADINGS

For the purposes of designing for wind, the values and requirements must be not less
than those specified in relevant structural design guidelines published by the
Housing Department and included as Appendix E to this Specification.
SUBMISSIONS
CON5.D810.9 TENDER DESIGN PROPOSAL
Submit for Approval, full details of tender design proposals including drawings,
layouts, details, calculations and any other information required by the CM.
CON5.D820.9 REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

All structural drawings, layouts, details and calculations submitted to the CM,
including those submitted with tender, must be prepared and signed by a Registered
Structural Engineer registered under Buildings Department of Hong Kong
Government.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Agree a programme for all submissions during the Contract to the CM prior to the
notified date for commencement of Works. Include in the programme, the CM's
undertaking to reply to design submissions within the following periods:
1. Initial submission - Within 28 days;
2. Resubmission - Within 14 days.

Within two months of the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit five
sets of fully dimensioned shop drawings for each type of facade unit, including shop
drawings for windows to COM2.D210 and electrical conduit system complete with
its accessories, for approval.
CON5.D860.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT

Within two months of the notified dated for commencement of the works, submit,
for agreement, the following items:
1. Design of moulds, layout arrangements, casting methods (horizontal or vertical),
tilting mechanism (if any), demoulding methods and the provision for
attachments of openings for window fixing;
2. The complete procedures for fabrication, curing, demoulding, application of
finishes, lifting, transporting, storage, erection and installation of weatherproof
joints;
3. Method of protecting the facade units from damage at all times;
4. Minimum concrete strength required for the facade units for demoulding,
handling, storage, transportation and erection;
5. Position and design of lifting points;
6. Calculated weights of the facade units;
7. The proposed Radio Frequency Identification tag and the fixing method as
specified in the Worksection COM11.
CON5.D870.9 METHOD OF FIXING WINDOWS

Within two months of the notified date for the commencement of the Works, submit
for agreement, the method of fixing window frames or windows before casting of the
facade units commences. Obtain either aluminium or uPVC windows from a
supplier approved by CM.
CON5.D880.9 DETAILS OF WEATHERPROOFING

Within two months of the notified dated for the commencement of the Works,
submit details of weatherproofing materials in accordance with CON5.M110 and
CON5.M120 for Approval, including technical information, samples, test reports and
proven performance records of proposed materials.
CON5.D890.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME

Within two months of the notified date for the commencement of the Works, submit
details of the Quality Assurance Scheme for manufacturing the facade units, in
accordance with CON5.W030 to CON5.W050 as applicable, for Approval.
CON5.D900.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES

Within three months from the notified date for commencement of Works, submit for
Approval, details of quality control procedures for erection of the facade units in
accordance with CON5.W640.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.D910.9 PROGRAMMES
Within one month of the notified date for the commencement of the Works, submit,
for agreement:
1. When instructed by the CM, the programme for the design and the testing of the
trial samples of the facade units;
2. The programme for manufacture of the facade units showing the rate of
production for each month and the dates for clearing the area of casting yard and
associated plant upon completion of the manufacture of the facade units;
3. The programme for the erection of facade units in accordance with CON5.W610.
CON5.D920.9 LOADING OF INSITU STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

Submit calculations to demonstrate that the insitu structural members are not subject
to excessive stresses arising from the erection method of the facade units and to
demonstrate the adequacy of any temporary supports which may be required.
SUBMISSIONS FOR PRECASTING

CON5.D1010.9 PRELIMINARY DESIGN
Submit preliminary design of moulds indicating the material to be used, layout
arrangements, casting methods (horizontal or vertical), tilting mechanism (if any),
demoulding methods of the main and side panels of the moulds and the provision for
attachments of openings for window fixing.
CON5.D1020.9 METHOD STATEMENTS

Submit a method statement:
1. Describing the complete procedures for fabrication, curing, demoulding,
application of finishes, lifting, transporting, storage, erection including fixing,
grouting and installation of weatherproof joints;
2. Designed to ensure the dimensional accuracy both of the facade units and the
structural elements adjoining them.
CON5.D1030.9 CASTING FACILITIES

Submit for Approval in accordance with CON5.W010.
CON5.D1040.9 PRELIMINARY PROGRAMME

Submit a preliminary programme for the design, manufacture, erection, testing and
full size trial samples of the facade units including dates for clearing the area of any
on-Site casting yard and associated plant upon completion of manufacture of the
facade units.

PRECAST FACADE UNITS (CONTRACTOR'S...... CON5 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
NON-SHRINK GROUT AND CONCRETE

CON5.M010.9 APPROVED MIX
For non-shrink grout, the submitted grout mix shall have the specified characteristic
as stated in CON5.M040. Submit samples of non-shrink grout for carrying out the
tests as stated in CON5.M040 by the Approved testing laboratory.
CON5.M020.9 CONSTITUENT MATERIALS OF NON-SHRINK GROUT

To be a pre-packaged cement base product which contains Portland cement, selected
sand and non-shrink additives.
CON5.M030.9 WATER/POWDER RATIO OR WATER CONTENT

For pre-packaged non-shrink grout product, comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
CON5.M040.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT

1. To be pre-packaged cement base product with the following required properties:
a. A 28 days strength equal to or higher than the grade of the adjoining
structures. The compressive strength shall be determined by compressive
strength test as CON5.T260;
b. Chloride content of grout shall not exceed 0.1% by mass of the cement.
Submit documentary evidence that the summation of chloride contents of
constituent materials complies with the aforesaid requirement;
c. Setting time of the non-shrink grout when tested in accordance with
ASTM C953 - 87(97) shall be greater than 1 hour for initial set and be less
than 24 hours for final set;
d. Free expansion within 24 hours shall be of maximum 4% when measured in
accordance with ASTM C827 - 95a(97). Expansion between 3 to 28 days
when measured in accordance with ASTM C1090 - 96 shall be between 0%
to 0.4%.
CON5.M050.9 CONCRETE WITH NON-SHRINK ADDITIVES

Submit for Approval and:
1. Maximum aggregate size: 10 mm;
2. Grade strength: a 28 days strength equal to or higher than the grade strength of
the adjoining structure;
3. To comply with the manufacturer's recommendations on non-shrink additives;
4. Do not contain chlorides.
WEATHERPROOFING
CON5.M110.9 GENERAL
1. Weatherproofing materials to comply with BS 6093:1993 and subject to
Approval.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.M120.9 SEALANTS
As shown or scheduled on the Drawings as WAT5.M180.
CON5.M130.9 MORTAR STOP BACKING RODS

Polyethylene foam or other Approved.
CONDUIT SYSTEM
CON5.M210.9 STANDARDS
1. For rigid plain polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduits, conduit fittings and PVC
boxes, comply with the following British Standards:
Conduits and Fittings British Standards
PVC conduits: BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988)
PVC conduits fittings: BS 4607:Part 1:1984(1993)&
BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
PVC circular conduit boxes: BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
PVC boxes for electrical BS 4662:1970(1989)
accessories:
2. Ensure that all PVC conduits, fittings and boxes are of the same make.
CON5.M220.9 COLOUR
PVC conduits, fittings and boxes: white in colour.
CON5.M230.9 FLAME RESISTANCE

PVC conduits, fittings and boxes: non-flame-propagating and self-extinguishing.
CON5.M240.9 TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION

1. For all PVC conduits, fittings and boxes, comply with the temperature
classification of -5 in accordance with BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988);
2. For PVC conduits, where the ambient temperature at the country of manufacture
is likely to be below -5ºC, the temperature classification is -25.
RIGID PLAIN PVC CONDUITS

CON5.M310.9 CONSTRUCTION AND SIZE
1. PVC conduits: rigid, plain and of a non-threadable type;
2. Nominal diameter of PVC conduits: within the range of 20 mm to 32 mm unless
otherwise specified.
CON5.M320.9 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

PVC conduits are:
1. Of heavy mechanical strength;
2. Capable of withstanding the heavy compression and impact tests specified in
BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982 (1988).
CON5.M330.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUITS

1. Rigid plain PVC conduits shall be type-tested for complete compliance with
BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988) by an Independent Accredited Laboratory or an
Independent Short-Circuit Testing Organisation;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Upon request from CM, provide documentary evidence that the

batch/consignment of PVC conduits delivered to Site have satisfied the
requirement as stipulated in the relevant British Standards mentioned in sub-
clause (1) above.
PVC CONDUIT FITTINGS

CON5.M410.9 CONSTRUCTION
1. Use plain, moulded slip-type couplers and expansion type couplers to
BS 4607:Part 5:1982 (1988) in the jointing of conduits;
2. Use saddles and spacers in compliance with BS 4607:Part 1:1984 (1993) for
fixing of conduits unless otherwise specified.
CON5.M420.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. PVC conduit fittings shall be type-tested for complete compliance with the
following British Standards by an Independent Accredited Laboratory or an
Independent Short-Circuit Testing Organisation:
PVC Conduit Fittings British Standards
Plain moulded slip type coupler BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
Male bush and female adaptor BS 4607:Part 1:1984(1993)
batch/consignment of PVC conduit fittings delivered to Site have satisfied the
clause (1) above.
PVC CIRCULAR CONDUIT BOXES, PVC BOXES

FOR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND PVC
ADAPTABLE BOXES
CON5.M510.9 CONSTRUCTION AND DIMENSIONS
1. For PVC boxes and their covers, comply with the relevant British Standard
specification listed in CON5.M210;
2. Fit all screw holes with metal inserts. Except for PVC adaptable boxes, provide
each box with a brass earthing terminal complete with screw for the connection
of circuit protective conductor (CPC);
3. Ceiling-mounted circular conduit boxes: deep pattern type having an internal
depth of not less than 60 mm;
4. For extension rings, comply with BS 4607:Part 5:1982 (1988);
5. Mould each PVC box in one piece;
6. For dimensions of PVC adaptable boxes, comply with
BS 4568:Part 2:1970 (1988).

1. For PVC boxes, comply with the requirements for mechanical properties stated
in the relevant British Standard specification listed in CON5.M210;
2. PVC adaptable boxes are:
a. Moulded;
b. Of sufficient mechanical strength to withstand forces encountered in
concealed conduit wiring system application;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. Complete with provision for prevention of deformation of the boxes where

necessary.
3. Plastic boxes are of:
a. Dimensions: can be interchangeable with steel boxes;
b. Wall thickness: 2 mm minimum;
c. Cover sizes: larger than the adaptable box on each edge by at least 5 mm.
4. Where considerable heat is produced, fit boxes for the suspension of luminaires
or other equipment with steel insert clips;
5. Do not use plastic boxes where:
a. Temperature of the box is likely to exceed 60ºC;
b. The mass suspended from the box exceeds 3 kg.
CON5.M530.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT BOXES

1. PVC circular conduit boxes, PVC boxes for electrical accessories and PVC
adaptable boxes shall be type-tested for complete compliance with the following
British Standards by an Independent Accredited Laboratory or an Independent
Short-Circuit Testing Organisation:
PVC Conduit Boxes British Standards
PVC circular conduit boxes BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988) with the
following conditions:
a. The marking of the PVC circular conduit
boxes shall be 60/10 kg.
b. The PVC circular conduit boxes shall be
type-tested to 10 kg suspended load.
accessories
PVC adaptable boxes a. BS 4568:Part 2:1970(1988)
Clause 6 Dimensions
b. BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
Clause 7.3 Safety on impact test
Clause 8 Resistance to heat
Clause 9 Resistance to burning
Clause 10 Insulting characteristics
batch/consignment of PVC conduit boxes delivered to Site have satisfied the
clause (1) above.

PRECAST FACADE UNITS (CONTRACTOR'S...... CON5 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
CON5.W010.9 CASTING YARD
Within one month from the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit
for Approval on the following:
1. For on-Site casting:
a. The location of casting yard for manufacture of precast concrete components;
b. Details of plant and equipment including the location, boom radii and lifting
capacities of cranes, gantry capacities, curing facilities, number of moulds
and means of transporting the concrete components within the Site.
2. For off-Site casting:
a. The name, casting yard address with street maps and job reference of the
manufacturer and the following:
i. Details of organisation structure and top management;
ii. Self-certified true copy of the business licence of the manufacturer;
iii. Annual production capacity of the casting yard in terms of concrete
volume, numbers of products and the current workload;
iv. Details of the Quality Assurance Scheme required in CON5.W030;
v. Details of the audit plan and previous audit report, if any, carried out by
the Precast Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant required in
CON5.W050;
vi. Details of compliance with requirements of this specification on
batching plant and concrete mixes in accordance with Worksection
CON1;
vii. Test results for quality tests being carried out for the precast concrete
components to demonstrate the compliance with requirements of this
specification;
viii. Other details of construction quality as required in CON5.W090 (1).
b. Scaled and dimensioned layout plan of the casting yard with fenced
boundaries showing the office, the production lines for the products
including hardstanding and covered casting yards, disposition of steel
moulds, vibration plant, handling and lifting plants, steam or hot air curing
room / facilities, storage areas for finished products, steel reinforcement
storage and bending yards, storage sheds for incoming materials, samples
room, batching plant if any, testing laboratory, concrete cubes curing
facilities, means of transporting the concrete components to the Site;
c. The laboratory for carrying out the tests and issuing test certificates shall be
approved by the Housing Department, or accredited either by Hong Kong
Accreditation Scheme (HKAS) under the Hong Kong Laboratory
Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS), or an equivalent organization which has
signed a mutual recognition agreement with HOKLAS. All expenses / costs
related to the tests carried out by the laboratory shall be borne by the
Contractor.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.W015.A MANAGEMENT SCHEMES FOR OFF-SITE CASTING

1. Ensure that the casting yards for the off-Site casting of precast concrete
components are operating on the following management schemes:
a. An Environmental Management Scheme certified under ISO 14001;
b. An Occupational Health and Safety Management Scheme certified under
ISO 45001.
2. Submit the original or certified true copy of the respective certificates for the
manufacturing plant within the following time frame:
a. ISO 14001: At not later than 15 days before the commencement of the
production of precast concrete components;
b. ISO 45001: At not later than 12 months from the notified date for
3. When the photocopy of certificate is submitted, it shall be certified by the
certification body or by the QCM. The certification body shall be accredited by
the Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS), or the China National
Accreditation Service (CNAS), or an accreditation body which has entered into a
mutual recognition agreement with HKAS for the respective certification.
CON5.W020.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR OFF-SITE CASTING

Ensure that casting yards for the off-Site casting of units are operating on an
Approved Quality Assurance Scheme in accordance with CON5.W030 to
CON5.W050.
CON5.W025.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR ON-SITE CASTING

Within two months from the notified date for the commencement of the Works,
submit for Approval details of the Quality Assurance Scheme for manufacturing the
precast concrete components, in accordance with CON5.W030 to CON5.W040 as
applicable.
CON5.W030.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME

1. Ensure that the facade units are manufactured under a Quality Assurance
Scheme which covers the following items and is certified under ISO 9001:
a. Quality control tests of materials, including proprietary products such as
lifting anchors for handling precast concrete components;
b. Calibration of laboratory equipment for quality control tests;
c. Efficiency and proper operation of equipment at the casting yard;
d. Production process;
e. Sampling / testing procedures and requirements by an independent
Approved laboratory;
f. Quality control procedures including the frequency and extent of inspection
by manufacturer's staff and independent parties;
g. Regular audits at a minimum frequency of once per month by manufacturer's
staff and independent parties.
2. Endorse the Quality Assurance Scheme and submit to the CM for approval at
least 15 days before the commencement of the production of precast facade.
CON5.W035.9 PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AUDITING CONSULTANT

1. Select a consultant on the Architectural and Associated Consultants Selection
Board's (AACSB) List of Structural Engineering Consultants (the "List") for
CM's approval as the Precast Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant to
carry out technical audits at the manufacturer's factory in accordance with the
Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction 2016 issued by the BD;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. A Precast Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant on the "List" in sub-

clause (1) appointed by the manufacturer may be proposed for Approval;
3. Notify the CM immediately if there is any subsequent change of the Precast
Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant during the course of services.

1. Assign a Precast Quality Control Manager (PQCM), with a minimum
qualification and experience of a Grade T4 TCP in the civil or structural
engineering discipline under the Registered Contractor's stream in the CoPSS, to
certify all control documentation or test certificates required for the QA Scheme;
2. Assign a Precast Quality Control Coordinator (PQCC), with a minimum
qualification and experience of a Grade T3 TCP under the Registered
Contractor's stream in the CoPSS, to provide continuous supervision of the
precast concrete production works at the casting yard;
3. Submit the details of the PQCM and the PQCC for Approval. For on-Site
casting, it is permissible for the PQCM to be the same person as the QCM and
the PQCC to be the same person as the SQCC;
4. Provide attendance to an RSE who is nominated by the CM, to carry out audit
checks to the casting yard at least once every month;
5. The Authorized Signatory as stipulated in PRE.B6.060 is to carry out inspection
and audit checks to the casting yard at least once every month and submit a
monthly audit report to the RSE as stipulated in sub-clause (4) above and then to
the CM for endorsement and onward submission to ICU.
CON5.W050.9 RECTIFICATION TO QUALITY NON-COMPLIANCE

1. For off-Site casting in CON5.W010 (2), the manufacturer shall be under regular
technical audits in a manner as stipulated in CON5.W030 (5) and supervision of
the CM or his representatives resident at the manufacturer's factory;
2. The Contractor shall:
a. Ensure that the manufacturer shall rectify any non-conformance to the
Specification revealed by the audit or the supervision of the CM or his
representatives resident at manufacturer's factory and if necessary, modify
the QA Scheme and temporarily suspend the manufacture of the precast
facade panels until the non-conformance is rectified;
b. Report to the CM of the non-conformance and rectification carried out.
3. Notwithstanding sub-clause (2) above, bear full responsibility to assure that all
the precast concrete components delivered to Site comply with the requirements
of the Specification at all times.

1. Record the following in an inspection log book:
b. The details of concrete production, inspection, auditing and testing.
2. Keep the inspection log book in the casting yard and provide a duplicate of the
inspection log book on Site for CM's inspection when required.
CON5.W060.9 EQUIPMENT
Ensure casting yards, erected on-Site or off-Site are equipped with all the necessary
facilities, including efficient vibration plant, necessary curing facilities, storage,
handling and lifting facilities to secure compliance with all the provisions of this
Specification.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.W070.9 USE OF CASTING YARD

Do not use any on-Site casting yard for manufacture of any components for other
sites. See PRE.B8.010.
CON5.W080.9 SUBMISSION AND PILOT PRODUCTION RUN BEFORE APPROVAL

1. Submission:
a. Submit the shop drawings, for the production of the precast components for
Approval, including any proposed changes to the products so as to suit
individual production process / plant;
b. Use concrete mix for the manufacture of precast components all in
accordance with the requirements in Worksection CON1;
c. Provide relevant information / samples associated with the proposed precast
components for Approval including:
i. Engraved manufacturer's logo and casting date;
ii. Printed precast concrete components identity numbers on surface of
products;
iii. Schmidt hammer test certificate and covermeter tests record endorsed by
the manufacturer's Quality Control Personnel;
iv. Delivery Order / Invoice;
v. Import and Export Manifests or Bill of Lading.
2. Before obtaining Approval for mass production, carry out a pilot production run
with the CM on the proposed manufacturer to demonstrate the technical
capability and effectiveness of the Quality Management System;
3. In the pilot production run:
a. Provide, for each category of products:
i. One sample with the reinforcement fixed in steel mould for the
inspection of workmanship including reinforcement fixing and provision
of bar spacers;
ii. One sample with concrete cast in steel mould for the inspection of
conditions of the steel mould, checking of the finished sample.
b. Carry out trial run to demonstrate the manufacturing process including
installation of windows, lifting operation, curing, storage, fixing of mosaic
tiles, quality tests at factory laboratory, applied finishes and quality controls
in accordance with the required drawings and specification;
c. Carry out verification check for engraved logo, casting date, identity number,
Schmidt hammer test certificate and covermeter tests record, dimensions,
size, spacing, position of starter bars and finishes.
4. The pilot production run may not be required, if the following documents are
submitted and are acceptable to the CM:
a. Track records on similar types of precast concrete components supplied by
the proposed manufacturer to other HA construction projects, within five
years prior to the notified date for commencement of the Works; or
b. In the absence of the track records, detailed records of the pilot production
run for similar types of precast concrete components carried out in other HA
construction projects, within five years prior to the notified date for

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.W090.9 FIRST JOINT INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY

1. Prior to mass production, carry out the first joint inspection between the
Contractor and the CM at factory for Approval on the minimum standard of the
product for all subsequent concrete and the specified finish. Arrange for the
transportation and provide all facilities for the first joint inspection;
2. Provide samples, including those samples in CON5.W080 (3)(a) and those
accepted samples in previous pilot production run carried out in accordance with
CON5.W080, for Approval as being representative of the minimum standard of
the product for all subsequent concrete and the specified finish;
3. Maintain accepted facade sample at a minimum of one number, or as directed by
the CM, in an area in the factory and do not remove the accepted samples from
the area unless otherwise instructed by the CM. Incorporate a further set of
samples to the trial panel on Site;
4. Carry out further joint inspections as in CON5.T710.
PRODUCING PRECAST UNITS

CON5.W110.9 MOULDS
1. Construct moulds from steel or other materials to produce a standard suitable for
the 'Surface finishes' specified in CON5.W310 to CON5.W350;
2. Construct and maintain moulds so that:
a. Dismantling and re-assembly of moulds after each casting allows the
production of subsequent facade units within permitted tolerance limits;
b. The positioning of securing components and fixings etc. are within the
permitted tolerances;
c. Adequate stiffness for the control of dimensional tolerances is maintained.
CON5.W120.9 DEFECTIVE MOULDS

Replace any mould which fails to produce facade units within the permitted
tolerance limits as specified in Appendix H, the "Schedule of Tolerances", or to the
standards of surface finishes as CON5.W310 to CON5.W350.
CON5.W130.9 HORIZONTAL CASTING

Provide moulds designed to facilitate horizontal casting with devices to enable
rotation from horizontal to vertical through 90° so that the facade units can be lifted
vertically on demoulding.
CON5.W140.9 USE OF RELEASE AGENTS

Apply mould release agent of an Approved type, to the surfaces of moulds either by
brush or by spraying before the fixing of steel reinforcement at a rate in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
CON5.W150.9 CONCRETING, COMPACTION AND CURING GENERALLY

See CON1.
CON5.W160.9 EXTERNAL VIBRATORS

Obtain Approval for the use of external vibrators.
CON5.W170.9 CURING BY APPLICATION OF HEAT

Obtain Approval for heat curing by means of steam, hot air, etc. and:
1. Ensure that the total chloride content of the concrete mix for facade units subject
to heat curing, is less than 0.1% by weight of that of the cement;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Carry out a site trial to demonstrate the adequacy of the proposed method to the
satisfaction of the CM.
CON5.W180.9 DEMOULDING GENERALLY

1. Unless otherwise Approved, do not disturb the facade units within 24 hours of
casting;
2. Demould by means of an Approved method and:
a. Do not use crowbars;
b. Do not subject the mould to any form of impact.
CON5.W190.9 CONCRETE STRENGTH BEFORE DEMOULDING

1. Demould the facade units only after concrete has achieved the Approved
strength;
2. To determine the concrete strength required for demoulding or handling:
a. Make the necessary concrete cubes in pairs from the same batch of concrete
used for casting the facade units and cure the concrete cubes under the same
conditions as the concrete in the facade units;
b. Specially identify the cubes and do not use them for normal quality control
or for compliance testing;
c. Determine the concrete cube strength by compression test as
CON5.T210 and satisfy the CM that the concrete cubes have acquired the
required strength before the demoulding or handling the facade units.
3. If Instructed, prepare beam specimens for determination of flexural strength for
those facade units that are subject to bending during demoulding and lifting.
CON5.W200.9 IDENTIFICATION AND RECORDS

1. Mark all precast facade and precast acoustic balcony units with date of
manufacture and a unique reference number;
2. Record in a master register the dates of casting, the concrete grades and the final
locations of all facade and precast acoustic balcony units;
3. Update records specified in above sub-clause (2) for all precast facade and
precast acoustic balcony units to the RFID Web-Based Database System;
4. Upon delivery on Site, carry out covermeter tests to precast façade and precast
acoustic balcony at specified locations as instructed by the CM.
the Works on the format and size of site works photographic records of
covermeter tests for precast façade and precast acoustic balcony units. Submit
one set of photographic records to the CM within 24 hours after the day of
covermeter test showing all measurement locations and results.
CON5.W210.9 HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

If the facade units are designed for handling in a particular direction only, make this
clear by means of instructions on shop drawings and appropriate markings on the
facade units.
CON5.W220.9 REQUIREMENTS OF OTHER TRADES AND COMPONENTS

Incorporate the requirements of all trades such as blockouts, recesses, notches,
embedded metal works or any other items before casting the facade units.
CON5.W230.9 WINDOWS FIXING TO FACADE UNITS

Fix window frames / windows complete with or without opening sashes before
casting the facade units as specified in COM2 Worksection and:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Obtain Approval for the method of fixing window frames / windows;

2. Do not fix window frames / windows into preformed openings after casting;
3. For off-Site casting, coordinate with the PCF and window suppliers approved by
the CM.
SURFACE FINISHES
CON5.W310.9 EXTERNAL FACE
Finish outside faces except edges and overhang soffits to give an even textured
surface suitable for fixing glazed ceramic tiles by adhesive, or cast the tiles into the
mould as required by the Contract.
CON5.W320.9 EDGES AND OVERHANG SOFFIT

Finish top, edge and soffit of overhang to give a smooth untextured surface suitable
for applying acrylic paint.
CON5.W330.9 INTERNAL FACE - LIVING / DINING / BEDROOMS

Finish to give:
1. A smooth untextured surface suitable for applying plastic emulsion paint for
rental blocks;
2. An even textured surface suitable for receiving internal cement lime plaster for
SSF blocks as required by the Contract.
CON5.W340.9 INTERNAL FACE - BATHROOM

Finish to give an even textured surface suitable for fixing glazed ceramic tiles in
accordance with FIN5.W210 and FIN5.W220 as appropriate.
CON5.W345.9 INTERNAL FACE - KITCHEN

Finish to give an even textured surface suitable for fixing glazed ceramic tiles in
accordance with FIN5.W210 and FIN5.W220 as appropriate.
CON5.W350.9 INTERNAL FACE - UTILITY AREA

Finish to give an even textured surface suitable for fixing glass mosaic tiles by
adhesive.

CON5.W410.9 MANUFACTURING AND ERECTION TOLERANCES
1. Refer to:
BD;
CON5.W420.9 CHECKING TOLERANCES

Check the manufacturing dimensional tolerances of the facade units by an Approved
method at a rate of 1 in every 10 facade units produced and report the result to CM
within two days of checking.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.W430.9 DEFECTIVE UNITS

1. Any facade unit that falls outside the tolerance limits is considered defective and
must be replaced as Instructed. Indelibly mark rejected facade units for
identification purposes;
2. In the event of the CM agreeing to accept any defective facade unit, execute all
necessary remedial and modification work to the CM's satisfaction.
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

CON5.W510.9 LIFTING FRAME
Lift facade units within the casting yard by means of a purpose-made steel lifting
frame designed to the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 issued by
the Buildings Department.
CON5.W520.9 LIFTING INSERTS AND SUPPORTS

Determine exact number, size and location of lifting inserts and proper supports with
locations for transportation and storage.
CON5.W522.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS FOR TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

Determine proper supports with locations for transportation and storage.
CON5.W530.9 INSPECTION
Inspect each facade unit before lifting to ensure that neither damage nor hazard
occurs during lifting.
CON5.W540.9 LIFTING
During lifting, keep the facade units vertical and:
1. Ensure that all connections between the lifting frame and lifting points remain
vertical as far as possible;
2. Lift the facade units only at appropriate lifting points as shown on the Approved
shop drawings;
3. Locate lifting points that the line of the resistant force passes through the centre
of gravity of the facade unit.
CON5.W550.9 LIFTING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

1. Ensure plant used for lifting including cranes, hoists, lifting frames, hooks, etc
possess adequate safety margins, are maintained in good working order and are
regularly tested. Provide details of plant and maintenance records and current
test certificates when required by the CM;
2. Maintain crane rope in a sound condition. Discard all frayed bridle ropes or
slings;
3. Notwithstanding sub-clause (1) above, provide test certificates of lifting anchors
to the CM in accordance with CON5.T810 to CON5.T850.

1. Store the facade units in the vertical plane on a level, well drained and
maintained concrete surface and protect against staining or physical damage;
2. Support the facade units by an Approved method to prevent their warping,
bowing, chipping or cracking;
3. Store different types of facade units separately;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. The facade units shall be supported by a device in storage area to prevent

toppling. For off-site casting yards, racks shall be used and detailed in the
submitted QA scheme.
CON5.W570.9 TRANSPORTING FROM CASTING YARD

Stack facade units vertically on vehicles during transportation from the casting yard
and:
1. Support the units on special cradles so that the units are completely protected
against damage and adverse stresses;
2. Provide the details of the support and the support locations to the CM for
comment.
CON5.W580.9 LOADING AND OFF-LOADING

Carry out lifting for loading or off-loading the facade units in one movement. Lift
off and re-position any facade unit which is not properly positioned after lifting,
rather than levering it into place.
CON5.W590.9 TRANSPORT VEHICLES

Maintain lorries or trolleys used for the transportation of the facade units in a good
condition. Ensure trolleys are equipped with suspension systems to minimise shock
loading.
ERECTING UNITS
CON5.W610.9 PROGRAMME
Provide a programme for the erection of the facade units. showing the rate of
erection for each month. Make due allowance for all restrictions on the age of
concrete in the facade units for handling, storage, transportation and erection.
CON5.W620.9 SITE RECORDS

Provide, at the end of each week during erection of the facade units, records in a
form to be agreed with the CM, showing:
1. Dates and the locations of structural connections completed;
2. Dates of removal and locations of props and temporary supports to the facade
units.

Allow and facilitate inspection of the facade units at any time before erection and
after installation.
CON5.W640.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES

Carry out erection of the facade units under Approved quality control procedures
covering the following:
1. Protective measures to avoid cracking and chipping of the facade units and
damage to the applied finishes and to the built-in items such as window frames;
2. Checking the accuracy of the insitu structural members receiving the facade
units, including location and level of all bearing surfaces, joints, bolts, horizontal
and vertical restraining devices and adjustment devices. Carry out checking by
means of a template or measurement frame or a similar Approved method;
3. Checking of erection tolerances;
4. Testing of the compressive strength of the grouting materials in accordance with
CON5.T250.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.W650.9 LIFTING UNITS INTO POSITION

1. Lift the facade units by steel lifting frame complying with CON5.W510 except
otherwise stipulated in sub-clause (4) below;
2. Maintain all cables connecting the lifting frame and the lifting points of the
facade units in a vertical direction. Provide the cables with devices for the
adjustment of their length;
3. Do not allow devices such as sockets or bolts for lifting purposes to be used for
fixing the facade units to the main structure;
4. Submit detailed method statement including the design, drawing and installation
procedures with endorsement of the Contractor’s RSE demonstrating to the
satisfaction of the CM that the precast concrete component will not subject to
excessive stresses arising from their proposed erection method without the steel
lifting frame, exemption from using the steel lifting frame as stated in sub-clause
(1) above can be allowed only for the lifting of precast façade with the maximum
horizontal dimension less than or equal to 1.8m;
5. In connection with sub-clause (4) above, address the safety use of the proposed
lifting anchor system, including but not limited to the proprietary anchor bolt
with clutch. The proposed lifting anchor system shall be flexible enough to
allow for both vertical and slant lifting sling.
CON5.W660.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORT

1. During fixing of the facade units, prop adjacent insitu structural members
adequately to avoid excessive deflection or adverse stresses;
2. Maintain all temporary supports, props and restraints in position during casting
of concrete / grout in the structural joint. Remove temporary supports, props and
restraints upon satisfactory testing and calculation to Approval;
3. Unless specifically designed for, do not allow temporary support to be derived
from the facade units fixed at lower floors;
4. For off-Site casting, coordinate with the supplier regarding the details of all
temporary supports, props and inserts to suit the proposed lifting and installation
method;
5. For the temporary support of the facade on the floor, refer to the drawings
detailed in Project Specific Specification, which are provided for reference only;
6. Submit design calculations and detail drawings of installation and fixing for the
CM's approval at least 4 weeks before commencement of constructing the
temporary support.
CON5.W670.9 UNITS DAMAGED ON TRANSPORTATION, LIFTING OR ERECTION

Replace any facade unit which has been damaged on transportation, lifting or
erection.
CON5.W680.9 APPROVAL FOR PERMANENT FIXING

Do not carry out permanent jointing or connection between any facade unit and
another, or to any part of the insitu structure, without prior Approval.
CON5.W690.9 PREPARING AND PLACING GROUTING MATERIALS

Obtain Approval for the method of preparing and placing grouting materials in
structural joints between the facade units and insitu structural members.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
DEFECTS
CON5.W710.9 MINOR CHIPPING
Carry out repairs only to minor chipping by patching up after installation subject to
Approval.
CON5.W720.9 OTHER REPAIRS

The CM may at his discretion approve other proposals for repairs to damaged facade
units. Carry out any repair work to the satisfaction of the CM.
CON5.W730.9 REJECTED PANELS

Replace any defective or damaged facade panels rejected by the CM.
JOINTS
CON5.W810.9 GENERAL
1. Prepare and construct joints strictly in accordance with the Drawings and in
accordance with the relevant manufacturer's recommendations so as to provide
continuous weathertightness of buildings and give a neat, uniform and smooth
appearance;
2. For application of back-up materials, bond breakers and sealants, see
Worksection WAT5.
CON5.W820.9 GASKETS
Gasket may be used in weatherproofing joint provided that:
CON5.W830.9 MORTAR STOPS

Use backing rods or other Approved method as mortar stops in grouting panel joints
when necessary.
CON5.W840.9 JOINT WIDTH

Unless otherwise Approved, the installed joint width must not be less than 6 mm nor
greater than 30 mm.
CONDUIT SYSTEM
CON5.W910.9 APPLICATION
Supply and install conceal rigid plain PVC conduit system complete with steel draw
wires for precast facade as indicated on the Drawings.
CON5.W920.9 SHOP DRAWINGS PREPARATION

Prepare shop drawings, coordinate and agree with the Nominated Sub-contractor for
electrical installation and Supplier for precast facade before submitting shop
drawings for Approval.
CON5.W930.9 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL

Submit for Approval technical details, samples and type-tested certificates for the
conduit system as specified in clauses CON5.M330, CON5.M420 and CON5.M530.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. All conduits, fittings and accessories installed have to be certified by at least
Grade A2 of Registered Electrical Workers (REW);
2. When delivered to Site, the precast facade units must be accomplished with a
Work Completion Certificate Form WR1(A) specified by Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department which shall be duly signed by a Registered
Electrical Contractor and a REW certifying that the conduit system installation is
in full compliance with the Specification and the Code of Practice for the
Electricity (Wiring) Regulations;
3. A single certificate can be issued for delivered lots of precast concrete
components which are produced in each production lot. The certificate shall
also carry information e.g. reference number etc. for traceability purpose;
4. Provide CM and the Nominated Sub-contractor for Electrical Installation each a
copy of the Work Completion Certificate for record.
CONDUIT AND WIRING INSTALLATION

CON5.W1010.9 CONDUIT BENDS
Internal radius: At least 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit.
CON5.W1020.9 BENDING, JOINTING AND TERMINATING OF CONDUITS

Follow conduit manufacturers' recommendation for:
1. Method of carrying out the conduit bends and conduit joints;
2. Method of fixing conduits to boxes without spouts;
3. Use of tools and materials.

PRECAST FACADE UNITS (CONTRACTOR'S...... CON5 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING

CON5.T010.9 RECORDS
1. Keep a complete record of all sampling and testing, in a form agreed with the
CM;
2. Submit test reports and certificates to the CM within 14 days from the date of
test.
CON5.T020.9 WITNESSING SAMPLING AND TESTING BY THE CM

The CM will witness any sampling and testing carried out under the Quality
Assurance Scheme:
1. Make the records of sampling and testing available for inspection by the CM or
his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory;
2. The CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory is entitled to
reject individual facade unit represented by any failed test result on the facade
unit.
CON5.T030.9 TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY

Provide samples, all necessary facilities and attendance to the DTC or the CM or his
representatives resident at manufacturer's factory to carry out the following tests:
1. Schmidt hammer tests and covermeter tests on the construction quality of precast
concrete components;
2. Tests on concrete constituent materials, tests on compressive strength of concrete
cubes and concrete cores, tests on reinforcement bars and tests on fabric
reinforcement by the DTC and / or HDMTL.

COMPRESSION TEST TO BE CARRIED OUT BY DTC OR HDMTL
1. Install a Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) tag as detailed on Sketch no.
RFID/TAG/SK-01 onto the trowelled surface of each of the concrete cubes
immediately after preparation of cubes at the manufacturer’s factory under the
witness of the CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory unless
otherwise instructed by the CM;
2. The RFID tags are to be provided by DTC or the CM or his representatives
resident at manufacturer's factory in batches;
3. Validate and scan the RFID tag with the Bluetooth RFID reader provided by
DTC or the CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory before
use, and ensure that information such as tag unique identification (UID),
electronic product code (EPC) number and timestamp have been uploaded to the
PC provided by the DTC or the CM or his representatives resident at
manufacturer's factory and incorporated into the DTC’s database system
(through 3G or above internet service);
4. Input the mould number and / or sampling certificate number against the
concerned tag EPC number through the DTC’s database system;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Before the tagged cubes are sent from the manufacturer’s factory to HDMTL or
are collected by the DTC, scan the tag again using the Bluetooth RFID reader
and ensure that information such as tag UID, EPC number and timestamp have
been uploaded to the PC and incorporated into the DTC’s database system
6. Deliver the tagged cubes to HDMTL or arrange the tagged cubes to be collected
by the DTC with due care at a time such that a minimum of 4 days is allowed for
curing the cubes in DTC or HDMTL before testing on compressive strength at
28 days by DTC or HDMTL;
7. In case any damaged RFID tags are discovered, report to the CM or his
representatives resident at manufacturer's factory immediately without any delay;
8. Maintain an inventory record of all RFID tags including those damaged and
submit the inventory record to the CM or his representatives resident at
manufacturer's factory.
TRIAL UNITS
CON5.T110.9 GENERAL
Prior to mass production of the facade units:
1. Produce a full size trial sample for the Type T1 facade unit or as specified in the
Project Specific Specification complete with joints, windows, glazing and the
electrical conduit system installation etc. and all finishing at ground level for
Approval;
2. Maintain the Approved sample facade unit as the yardstick for the standard and
quality necessary for all facade units unless otherwise required under the terms
of CON5.T120;
3. When construction of a trial panel is required in CON2.W720, structurally
connect the trial sample to surrounding structural frames and with interfacing
services as detailed on the Drawings.
CON5.T120.9 ADDITIONAL TRIAL UNITS

Non-compliance:
1. In the event that the trial sample, in the opinion of the CM, cannot represent any
one of the other facade types due to different designs proposed or methods of
manufacture and erection, the CM is entitled to order additional trial samples for
those different facade types including the surrounding structural frames all at the
Contractor's own expense and without detriment to the programme.
CON5.T130.9 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL

Ensure that the Approved sample facade units remain undamaged and remove both
the samples and surrounding structural frames upon the completion of erection of all
facade units.
TESTS ON WORKABILITY
As CON1.T510.
CON5.T132.9 ACCEPTANCE VALUES FOR APPROVED CONCRETE MIXES

As CON1.T520.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

CONCRETE CUBES
As CON1.T610.

As CON1.T620.

As CON1.T630.

As CON1.T640.

CONCRETE MIXES
As CON1.T650.

As CON1.T660.

As CON1.T670.
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY

CORES FOR PRECAST FACADES
CON5.T221.9 GENERAL
1. Provide all necessary facilities and attendance for carrying out coring and testing
of concrete cores by DTC, including the provision of a secure and lockable
storage for DTC to store the coring machine and other associated equipment;
2. Tests are to be witnessed and endorsed by the Contractor's representative and the
CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer’s factory;
3. Allow 2-day advance notice for preparation by DTC before the taking of core
samples at the manufacturer’s factory;
4. Upon completion of the taking of core samples by DTC at the manufacturer’s
factory, allow a minimum of 6 more days and a maximum of 15 more days for
DTC to provide the core test results;
5. Make due allowance in the programme for the aforesaid arrangement and no
claim for extension of time shall be allowed;
6. Subject to CM’s approval, omission of early core test may be permitted for a
particular batch of precast facades in order not to affect the construction work on
Site. In such case, core test shall be carried out in accordance with the
procedures set out in CON1.T710 to CON1.T760 to prove the compliance of
that particular batch of precast facades to compressive test on cores as stipulated
in this Specification.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Comply with CS1:2010 in respect of the method of preparing, inspecting and testing
concrete cores to determine the compressive strength except the measurement of
saturated density.
CON5.T223.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF EARLY CORE SAMPLES

Testing samples:
1. Provide necessary facilities and attendance to the taking of 3 Nos. of core
samples by the DTC from the precast facades of the same concreting day, at
locations decided by the CM, for test as follows:
a. 75 mm diameter core samples;
b. For vertically casted precast facades, the length of core samples shall be at
least 90 mm;
c. For horizontally casted precast facade, the length of core samples shall be at
least 90 mm plus top 50 mm or 20% of depth of concrete being cored
whichever is greater.
CON5.T224.9 AGE OF EARLY CORE SAMPLES

1. Do not take cores for compressive test at ages less than 3 days;
2. Do not carry out compressive test on the core samples at ages less than 9 days.
CON5.T225.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY CORES

In assessing the compressive strength of early cores, the precast facades of the same
concreting day represented by the early cores are deemed to comply with this
Specification if the compressive strength of the early core, when adjusted for length /
diameter ratio and converted to estimated insitu cube strength in accordance with
CS1:2010, is:
1. Not less than 85% of the specified grade strength for any individual results.

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR PRECAST FACADES
1. For precast facades of the same concreting day represented by the early cores
that the compressive strength of the early cores comply with CON5.T225, their
core test results are deemed to be acceptable under this Specification, and further
coring test at 28 days is not necessary unless compressive strength test of
concrete cube of the same batch of concrete not comply with CON5.T212 or
instructed otherwise by the CM;
2. For precast facades of the same concreting day represented by the early cores
that the compressive strength of the early cores do not comply with CON5.T225:
a. if the concreting ages of the precast facades are less than 28 days, carry out
further early core tests by DTC. If the result of the further early core test
does not comply with CON5.T225, the precast facades are not allowed to be
lifted into place or installed on Site, and further early core test may be
carried out in accordance with this sub-clause;
b. if the concreting ages of the precast facades are 28 days or over, carry out
further core test by DTC in accordance with CON1.T710 to CON1.T760. If
the result of this further core test does not comply with CON1.T760, the
precast facades are not allowed to be lifted into place or installed on Site. All
relevant concrete of precast facades represented by this further core test in
the same concreting day is deemed not complying with this Specification.
Investigate the extent of non-compliance and re-execute the works in
accordance with CON1.T1210 to CON1.T1260.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Make due allowance in the programme for the aforesaid arrangement and bear
all time and cost for compliance with this clause.

As CON1.T770.

CONCRETE CORES
CON5.T230.9 GENERAL
As CON1.T710.
As CON1.T720.
CON5.T232.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF CORE SAMPLES

Testing samples:
1. Provide necessary facilities and attendance for taking 3 Nos. of 100 mm
diameter core samples from the facade units for the same concreting day, at the
location selected by CM;
2. Take concrete cores at the rate of three per precast facade unit so selected.

As CON1.T740.
CON5.T234.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER CONCRETE CORE SAMPLES

As CON1.T750.

As CON1.T760.
CON5.T240.9 NON-COMPLIANCE AND FURTHER TESTING

Should any core fail to meet the requirements of compressive strength of concrete
cores as specified in CON1.T760:
1. All relevant concrete represented by the cores in the same concreting day is
deemed not to comply with this Specification;
2. The CM may order further tests on cores taken from the failed precast facade
units or other precast facade units cast from the same batch of concrete used for
casting the failed units all at the Contractor's own expense.
CON5.T245.9 MAKE GOOD CORE HOLES

As CON1.T770.
CON5.T250.9 TESTING ON NON-SHRINK GROUT

As CON4.T070.
CON5.T260.9 TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF GROUT CUBES

As CON4.T080.
CON5.T280.9 COUTINHO RING TEST

Testing method:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. The mould for this test shall be formed from steel to provide an annular
specimen with an inner diameter of 115  0.1 mm, an outer diameter of
175  0.1 mm and a depth of 50  0.1 mm;
2. The grout shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's specification and
placed within the mould. Materials, moulds and specimens shall be kept at a
temperature of 27C  2C and a relative humidity of 55%  5%;
3. After 72 hours the outer mould ring shall be removed from the hardened grout
specimen and the specimen with the inner ring still in place shall be returned to
the conditioning environment.
4. The grout specimen shall be examined at 7, 14, 21 and 28 days and any cracking
shall be reported.
SCHMIDT HAMMER TESTS

CON5.T290.9 TESTING FREQUENCY
1. Provide all necessary facilities and attendance for carrying out of Schmidt
hammer test on all precast facades by the CM or his representatives resident at
manufacturer’s factory when the concreting age of the precast facades is at least
3 days;
2. Subject to CM’s approval, the testing frequency may be reduced when
satisfactory and consistent standard is established.
LABORATORY WATERTIGHTNESS TEST

CON5.T310.9 NATURE AND PURPOSE OF TEST
1. Prior to the Approval of the proposed jointing system, carry out the
watertightness test at an Approved independent laboratory to demonstrate that
the proposed jointing system within the facade unit resists water penetration as
CON5.T450;
2. Where an insitu connection, specified in CON5.D410 to CON5.D440, is
designed in combination with joint sealing compound specified in CON5.M120,
carry out the watertightness test without the joint sealing compound in place to
test the watertightness of the insitu connection.
CON5.T320.9 EXEMPTION FROM TEST

Laboratory testing of the proposed jointing system is not required if satisfactory test
evidence relating to a similar joint system can be furnished to the CM. Test data for
such a similar jointing system made from the Works or used on other Authority
contracts may be accepted for this purpose.
CON5.T330.9 TEST PROCEDURE

Arrange for testing to be carried out generally in accordance with the procedure
stipulated in BS 5368:Part 2:1980 with the following modifications:
1. Test specimen prepared according to the Drawings and submitted to the
Approved independent laboratory for testing;
2. The water-spraying system employed according to method No. 2 of
BS 5368:Part 2:1980 but installed with additional nozzles to provide uniformity
of water spray at the jointing system of the test specimen;
3. The spray set to apply water at a minimum rate of 5.0 litres/m²/min;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. A maximum pressure difference Pmax maintained, as stated in

BS 5368:Part 2:1980 Clause 8, of 1 kPa, together with the water spray for
15 minutes.
CON5.T340.9 JOINT PERFORMANCE

Do not cast or manufacture facade units prior to the proposed jointing system
performing satisfactorily in the laboratory tests.
SITE WATERTIGHTNESS TESTS

CON5.T410.9 TESTING TRIAL UNIT
1. Carry out watertightness tests to the jointing system of the full size trial samples
specified in CON5.T110 in accordance with the procedures set out in
CON5.T430;
2. Extend the watertightness tests to cover testing on joints of windows fixed to the
full size trial sample all to the requirements specified in COM2.T210.
CON5.T420.9 TESTING INSTALLED JOINTS

Testing samples:
1. Carry out watertightness tests in accordance with the procedures set out in
CON5.T430 to all joints of the properly installed facade units not connected
monolithically to in-situ concrete at the rate of 50% of each particular type in
locations as instructed by the CM or his representatives;
2. Where a jointing system is constructed in combination with joint sealing
compound specified in CON5.M120, carry out the watertightness test prior to
the application of the sealing compound to test the watertightness of the joint.

Test joints of each selected facade unit according to the procedures as follows:
1. Construct working platforms where necessary for carrying out water test safely;
2. Working from the exterior, wet the facade unit selectively, starting from the
lowest horizontal joint, followed by the vertical joints and then the horizontal
joint above;
3. Spray a continuous jet of water from a nozzle at a water pressure of 210 to
240 kPa at the nozzle inlet to the joint and perpendicular to the face of the facade
unit. Move the nozzle slowly along the joint, at a distance of 300 mm from it,
for a period of 5 minutes in every 1.5 metre of joint length while an observer
carefully inspects on the interior side of the facade unit with the assistance of
adequate lighting where necessary;
4. Unless otherwise Approved, use a nozzle to the requirements of the
Architectural Aluminium Manufacturer's Association (AAMA) 501.2-83;
5. Repeat the process specified in sub-clause (3) above on all joints and joint
intersections using increments of exposed joint length not exceeding 1.5 metres
upward until all the joints are covered.
CON5.T440.9 WITNESSES TO TEST

All watertightness tests carried out on Site must be witnessed and certified both by
the CM and the Contractor's representative.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON5.T450.9 FAILURE OF UNITS

The facade units and joints are deemed to have failed if signs of water seeping
through the joints or through the facade unit, including signs of damp patches, are
observed during the test and within the subsequent 2 hours after the test.

TESTING
Non-compliance:
1. Carry out remedial work to facade units and joints which have failed the
watertightness test. Methods of carrying out the remedial work are subject to
Approval;
2. After the remedial work is completed, re-test the facade units and joints in
accordance with the procedures set out in CON5.T430;
3. Repeat sub-clauses (1) & (2) above until the facade unit and joint comply with
the specified criteria of watertightness;
4. For any one facade unit fails the watertightness test, carry out additional tests as
follows:
a. Select three additional samples as instructed by the CM or his
representatives for testing. Each sample shall comprise three facade units of
the same type as the failed facade unit;
b. Carry out watertightness test to the additional samples in accordance with
the procedures set out in CON5.T430;
c. When any facade unit fails the test, repeat sub-clauses (1) & (2) above until
the facade unit and joint comply with the specified criteria of watertightness.
5. Repeat sub-clause (4) above until all testing facade units and joints have
complied with specified criteria of watertightness;
6. Bear all associated costs for the re-tests and additional tests as specified in the
above sub-clauses. No extension of time will be allowed.
TESTING FIXINGS
CON5.T510.9 TENSILE TESTING
Testing method:
1. When directed test fixings and anchors to BS 5080:Part 1:1993.
CON5.T520.9 SHEAR TESTING

Testing method:
1. When directed test fixings and anchors to BS 5080:Part 2:1986.
SURVEILLANCE INSPECTION
BREAKING UP INSPECTION
For off-site casting:
1. Arrange transportation for the CM and/or his representatives and carry out joint
inspections at the manufacturer's factory;
2. Carry out up to 4 breaking-up inspections which may be instructed by the CM,
each comprising the following:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Provide a sample of precast standard facade unit randomly selected by the

CM or his representatives, break up the unit for inspection and remove the
broken unit after inspection;
b. Carry out the following inspection in the presence of the CM or his
representatives:
i. Reinforcement details including total number of bars and bar size in
accordance with standard design drawings;
ii. Bar pattern of the reinforcement used against the Mill Certificate and the
requirements of purchaser test in CS2:2012;
iii. The installation, markings and brand name of concealed electrical
conduit, fittings and conduit accessories etc. when pre-installed
electrical conduit system is installed.
3. In the event of sample failing to meet any one of the requirements in the
breaking-up inspection above, take further samples according to the following
formula until all samples satisfy the requirements as above:
Nos. of further samples = (n² - 2n +3)
where n is equal to the total number of unsuccessful components;
4. Bear the costs of all further breaking up inspections that may be required under
sub-clause (3) above and no extension of time will be allowed.
LIFTING ANCHOR
CON5.T810.9 DEFINITION OF BATCH
In this Specification, a batch is defined as any quantity of lifting anchor of the same
type and same working load capacity, delivered to the casting yard as one
consignment and covered by the same test certificate issued by the lifting anchor
manufacturer.
CON5.T820.9 TYPE AND LOAD CAPACITY

Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, lifting anchors shall be either eye anchor
type or foot anchor type, and with a working load of 0.25 times the ultimate load
capacity.

1. The rate of sampling for ultimate load capacity for each batch of lifting anchor
shall be a minimum of one sample, which comprises three test specimens, for
every 3,000 anchors or part thereof;
2. When Instructed, provide an additional sample comprising three test specimens
for testing by DTC.
CON5.T840.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERION

No test result of ultimate load capacity of individual test specimen shall be less than
4 times the working load as stipulated in CON5.T820.
CON5.T850.9 SUBMISSION
Prior to the production of precast concrete components, provide test certificates
issued by:
1. The lifting anchor manufacturer/agent supplier; and
2. An Approved testing laboratory employed by the manufacturer of precast
concrete component on the ultimate load capacity of lifting anchors for each
batch under the Quality Assurance System as stipulated in CON5.W030.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

MOVEMENT JOINTS CON6 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON6 MOVEMENT JOINTS

MATERIALS
JOINT FILLERS
CON6.M010.9 COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLER
1. Firm, compressible, single thickness, non-rotting proprietary type approved by
the CM.
CON6.M020.9 INORGANIC COMPRESSIBLE JOINT FILLERS, BOND BREAKERS

AND BACKUP MATERIALS
1. Sheet form or strip and cord sections of an Approved type.
SEALANTS
CON6.M110.9 GENERAL
Refer to Worksection WAT5 for all sealants, primers, back-up materials and bond
breakers.
WATER STOPS
CON6.M210.9 WATER STOPS
1. Of an Approved type made with prefabricated angle and intersection pieces with
details on the type of materials required, its intended location and purpose of use
as specified in the Project Specific Specification and on the Drawings.
PROPRIETARY EXPANSION JOINTS

CON6.M310.9 MECHANICAL EXPANSION JOINTS
1. From an Approved manufacturer with details on the type of materials required,
its intended location and purpose of use as specified in the Project Specific
Specification and on the Drawings.
ANCILLARY MATERIALS
CON6.M410.9 ADHESIVE FOR JOINT FILLER
1. Bituminous type recommended by the joint filler manufacturer.

MOVEMENT JOINTS CON6 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
CON6.W010.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
1. Construct joints strictly in accordance with the drawings and in accordance with
the relevant manufacturer's recommendations;
2. Keep edges true, free from cracks, spalling or other imperfections. Ensure that
edges or joints are clean and free from dust or grease immediately before fixing
fillers or applying sealants.
CON6.W020.9 APPLYING SEALANTS

Refer to the Workmanship section of Worksection WAT5 for the application of
primers, back-up materials bond breakers and sealants.
MOVEMENT JOINTS
CON6.W110.9 FIXING JOINT FILLER
Fix joint filler to the concrete with bituminous adhesive before casting the adjoining
bay. Form a sealing slot by casting in a removable former.
CON6.W120.9 PLACING CONCRETE

Do not place concrete on both sides of a movement joint simultaneously.
WATER STOPS
CON6.W210.9 INSTALLATION
Adequately install waterstops to ensure their correct position is maintained during
concrete placement.
CON6.W220.9 JOINTING
Make all joints using hot or cold vulcanizing.
CON6.W230.9 CONCRETING
Compact concrete fully around waterstops to ensure that no voids or porous areas
remain.

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS...... CON7 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7 PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS (ENGINEER'S
DESIGN)
DESIGN
GENERAL
CON7.D010.9 SCOPE OF THE WORK
Precast concrete components specified in this Worksection include:
1. Precast facades (including precast roof parapet);
2. Semi-precast slabs (including semi-precast roof slabs and semi-precast corridor
slabs);
3. Precast balconies;
4. Precast staircases (including precast roof staircases);
5. Precast structural walls; and
6. Precast partition walls.
Refer to the Drawings for the extent of fixtures, finishing, fittings and building
services installations associated with precast concrete components.
Refer to the Drawings and relevant Specification clauses for the scope of builders,
structural and building services works to be prefabricated in off-site yards.
SUBMISSIONS
CON7.D110.9 LOADING OF INSITU STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
Submit calculations to demonstrate that the insitu structural members are not subject
to excessive stresses arising from the erection method of the precast concrete
components and to demonstrate the adequacy of any temporary supports which may
be required.
PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST BALCONY - DESIGN

PARAMETERS
CON7.D210.9 ERECTION RESTRAINTS
1. Design vertical and horizontal restraints for temporary connections of the precast
façade / precast balcony to the main structure such that displacement of the
precast façade / precast balcony unit cannot occur before making the permanent
structural connection;
2. Design horizontal restraint to resist a minimum horizontal live load of
±0.5 kN/m run acting at 1.5 m from the base of the precast façade / precast
balcony unit.
CON7.D220.9 ADJUSTMENT DEVICES

1. Provide the precast façade / precast balcony units with separate vertical and
horizontal adjustment devices;
PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS...... CON7 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Do not use adjustment devices in the vertical plane for horizontal location
devices or horizontal restraint and do not design such devices to take any
permanent shear (horizontal) loads;
3. Do not design any adjustment devices in the horizontal plane to take permanent
vertical loads.

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS...... CON7 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
GENERAL
CON7.M010.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS
1. Construct precast concrete components for Standards Domestic in accordance
with this Worksection and with the relevant provisions of the following
Worksections:
a. CON1, Insitu Concrete;
b. CON2, Formwork;
e. COM11, Radio Frequency Identification and Web-Based Database System
2. Construct aluminium window or uPVC window frames in accordance with
Worksections COM2 or COM3 respectively;
PRECAST FACADE, PRECAST BALCONY, SEMI-

PRECAST SLAB, PRECAST STRUCTURAL WALL
AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - CONDUIT
SYSTEM
CON7.M110.9 STANDARDS
1. For rigid plain polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduits, conduit fittings and PVC
boxes, comply with the following British Standards:
Conduits and Fittings British Standards
PVC conduits: BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988)
PVC conduits fittings: BS 4607:Part 1:1984(1993)&
BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
PVC circular conduit boxes: BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
accessories:
2. Ensure that all PVC conduits, fittings and boxes are of the same make.
CON7.M120.9 COLOUR
PVC conduits, fittings and boxes: white in colour.
CON7.M130.9 FLAME RESISTANCE

PVC conduits, fittings and boxes: non-flame-propagating and self-extinguishing.
CON7.M140.9 TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION

1. For all PVC conduits, fittings and boxes, comply with the temperature
classification of -5 in accordance with BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988);
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. For PVC conduits, where the ambient temperature at the country of manufacture
is likely to be below -5ºC, the temperature classification is -25.

AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - RIGID PLAIN
PVC CONDUITS
CON7.M210.9 CONSTRUCTION AND SIZE
1. PVC conduits: rigid, plain and of a non-threadable type;
2. Nominal diameter of PVC conduits: within the range of 20 mm to 32 mm unless

PVC conduits are:
1. Of heavy mechanical strength;
2. Capable of withstanding the heavy compression and impact tests specified in
BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988).
CON7.M230.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUITS

1. Rigid plain PVC conduits shall be type-tested for complete compliance with
BS 6099:Section 2.2:1982(1988) by an Independent Accredited Laboratory or an
Independent Short-Circuit Testing Organisation;
batch/consignment of PVC conduits delivered to Site have satisfied the
clause (1) above.

AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - PVC CONDUIT
FITTINGS
CON7.M310.9 CONSTRUCTION
1. Use plain, moulded slip-type couplers and expansion type couplers to
BS 4607:Part 5:1982 (1988) in the jointing of conduits;
2. Use saddles and spacers in compliance with BS 4607:Part 1:1984 (1993) for
fixing of conduits unless otherwise specified.
CON7.M320.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. PVC conduit fittings shall be type-tested for complete compliance with the
following British Standards by an Independent Accredited Laboratory or an
Independent Short-Circuit Testing Organisation:
PVC Conduit Fittings British Standards
Plain moulded slip type coupler BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
Male bush and female adaptor BS 4607:Part 1:1984(1993)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

batch/consignment of PVC conduit fittings delivered to Site have satisfied the
clause (1) above.

AND PRECAST PARTITION WALL - PVC
CIRCULAR CONDUIT BOXES, PVC BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES AND PVC
ADAPTABLE BOXES
CON7.M410.9 CONSTRUCTION AND DIMENSIONS
1. For PVC boxes and their covers, comply with the relevant British Standard
specification listed in CON7.M110;
2. Fit all screw holes with metal inserts. Other than for PVC adaptable boxes,
provide each box with a brass earthing terminal complete with screw for the
connection of circuit protective conductor (CPC);
3. Ceiling-mounted circular conduit boxes: Deep pattern type having an internal
depth of not less than 60 mm. Extension rings shall comply with
BS 4607:Part 5:1982 (1988);
4. Mould each PVC box in one piece;
5. For dimensions of PVC adaptable boxes, comply with
BS 4568:Part 2:1970 (1988).

1. For PVC boxes, comply with the requirements for mechanical properties stated
in the relevant British Standard specification listed in CON7.M110;
2. PVC adaptable boxes are:
a. Moulded;
b. Of sufficient mechanical strength to withstand forces encountered in
concealed conduit wiring system application;
c. Complete with provision for prevention of deformation of the boxes where
necessary.
3. Plastic boxes are of:
a. Dimensions: can be interchangeable with steel boxes;
b. Wall thickness: 2 mm minimum;
c. Cover sizes: larger than the adaptable box on each edge by at least 5 mm.
4. Fit boxes for the suspension of luminaires or other equipment, where
considerable heat will be produced with steel insert clips;
5. Do not use plastic boxes where:
a. Temperature of the box is likely to exceed 60ºC; or
b. The mass suspended from the box exceeds 3 kg.
CON7.M430.9 TYPE-TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL PVC CONDUIT BOXES

1. PVC circular conduit boxes, PVC boxes for electrical accessories and PVC
adaptable boxes shall be type-tested for complete compliance with the following
British Standards by an Independent Accredited Laboratory or an Independent
Short-Circuit Testing Organisation:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PVC Conduit Boxes British Standards

PVC circular conduit BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988) with the following
boxes conditions:
a. The marking of the PVC circular conduit
boxes shall be 60/10 kg;
b. The PVC circular conduit boxes shall be type-
tested to 10 kg suspended load.
accessories
PVC adaptable boxes a. BS 4568:Part 2:1970(1988)
Clause 6 Dimensions
b. BS 4607:Part 5:1982(1988)
Clause 7.3 Safety on impact test
Clause 8 Resistance to heat
Clause 9 Resistance to burning
Clause 10 Insulating characteristics
batch/consignment of PVC conduit boxes delivered to Site have satisfied the
clause (1) above.

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS...... CON7 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
CON7.W010.9 CASTING YARD
Within one month from the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit
for Approval on the following:
1. For on-Site casting:
a. The location of casting yard for manufacture of precast concrete components;
b. Details of plant and equipment including the location, boom radii and lifting
capacities of cranes, gantry capacities, curing facilities, number of moulds
and means of transporting the concrete components within the Site;
2. For off-Site casting:
a. The name, casting yard address with street maps and job reference of the
manufacturer and the following:
i. Details of organisation structure and top management;
ii. Self-certified true copy of the business licence of the manufacturer;
iii. Annual production capacity of the casting yard in terms of concrete
volume, numbers of products and the current workload;
iv. Details of the Quality Assurance Scheme required in CON7.W030;
v. Details of the audit plan and previous audit report, if any, carried out by
the Precast Concrete Construction Audit Consultant required in
CON7.W060;
vi. Details of compliance with requirements of this specification on
batching plant and concrete mixes in accordance with Worksection
CON1;
vii. Test results for quality tests being carried out for the precast concrete
components to demonstrate the compliance with requirements of this
specification;
viii. Other details of construction quality as required in CON7.W120 (1).
b. Scaled and dimensioned layout plan of the casting yard with fenced
boundaries showing the office, the production lines for the products
including hardstanding and covered casting yards, disposition of steel
moulds, vibration plant, handling and lifting plants, steam or hot air curing
room / facilities, storage areas for finished products, steel reinforcement
storage and bending yards, storage sheds for incoming materials, samples
room, batching plant if any, testing laboratory, concrete cubes curing
facilities, means of transporting the concrete components to the Site;
c. The laboratory for carrying out the tests and issuing test certificates shall be
approved by the Housing Department, or accredited either by Hong Kong
Accreditation Scheme (HKAS) under the Hong Kong Laboratory
signed a mutual recognition agreement with HOKLAS. All expenses / costs
related to the tests carried out by the laboratory shall be borne by the
Contractor.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.W015.A MANAGEMENT SCHEMES FOR OFF-SITE CASTING

1. Ensure that the casting yards for the off-Site casting of precast concrete
components are operating on the following management schemes:
a. An Environmental Management Scheme certified under ISO 14001;
b. An Occupational Health and Safety Management Scheme certified under
ISO 45001.
2. Submit the original or certified true copy of the respective certificates for the
manufacturing plant within the following time frame:
a. ISO 14001: At not later than 15 days before the commencement of the
production of precast concrete components;
b. ISO 45001: At not later than 12 months from the notified date for
3. When the photocopy of certificate is submitted, it shall be certified by the
certification body or by the QCM. The certification body shall be accredited by
the Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS), or the China National
Accreditation Service (CNAS), or an accreditation body which has entered into a
mutual recognition agreement with HKAS for the respective certification.
CON7.W020.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR ON-SITE CASTING

Within two months from the notified date for the commencement of the Works,
submit for Approval details of the Quality Assurance Scheme for manufacturing the
precast concrete components, in accordance with CON7.W040 to CON7.W050 as
applicable.
CON7.W030.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR OFF-SITE CASTING

Ensure that casting yards for the off-Site casting of precast concrete components are
operating on a Quality Assurance Scheme certified under ISO 9001 in accordance
with CON7.W040 to CON7.W060.
CON7.W040.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME

1. Ensure that the precast concrete components are manufactured under a Quality
Assurance Scheme which covers the following items and is certified under
ISO 9001:
a. Quality control tests of materials, including proprietary products such as
lifting anchors for handling precast concrete components;
b. Calibration of laboratory equipment for quality control tests;
c. Efficiency and proper operation of equipment at the casting yard;
d. Production process;
e. Sampling/testing procedures and requirements by an independent Approved
laboratory;
f. Quality control procedures including the frequency and extent of inspection
by manufacturer's staff and independent parties;
g. Regular audits at a minimum frequency of once per month by manufacturer's
staff and independent parties.
2. Endorse the Quality Assurance Scheme and submit to CM for approval at least
15 days before the commencement of the production of precast concrete
components.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.W045.9 PRECAST CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION AUDITING CONSULTANT

1. Select a consultant on the Architectural and Associated Consultants Selection
Board's (AACSB) List of Structural Engineering Consultants (the "List") for
CM's approval as the Precast Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant to
carry out technical audits at the manufacturer's factory in accordance with the
Code of Practice for Precast Concrete Construction 2016 issued by the BD;
2. A Precast Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant on the "List" in sub-
clause (1) appointed by the manufacturer may be proposed for Approval;
3. Notify the CM immediately if there is any subsequent change of the Precast
Concrete Construction Auditing Consultant during the course of services.

1. Assign a Precast Quality Control Manager (PQCM), with a minimum
qualification and experience of a Grade T4 TCP in the civil or structural
engineering discipline under the Registered Contractor's stream in the CoPSS, to
certify all control documentation or test certificates required for the QA Scheme;
2. Assign a Precast Quality Control Coordinator (PQCC), with a minimum
qualification and experience of a Grade T3 TCP under the Registered
Contractor's stream in the CoPSS, to provide continuous supervision of the
precast concrete production works at the casting yard;
3. Submit the details of the PQCM and the PQCC for Approval. For on-Site
casting, it is permissible for the PQCM to be the same person as the QCM and
the PQCC to be the same person as the SQCC;
4. Provide attendance to an RSE who is nominated by the CM, to carry out audit
checks to the casting yard at least once every month;
5. The Authorized Signatory as stipulated in PRE.B6.060 is to carry out inspection
and audit checks to the casting yard at least once every month and submit a
monthly audit report to the RSE as stipulated in sub-clause (4) above and then to
the CM for endorsement and onward submission to ICU.

1. Record the following in an inspection log book:
b. The details of concrete production, inspection, auditing and testing.
2. Keep the inspection log book in the casting yard and provide a duplicate of the
inspection log book on Site for CM's inspection when required.
CON7.W060.9 RECTIFICATION TO QUALITY NON-COMPLIANCE

1. For off-Site casting in CON7.W010 (2), the manufacturer shall be under regular
technical audits in a manner as stipulated in CON7.W040 (1)(g) and supervision
of the CM or his representatives resident at the manufacturer's factory;
2. The Contractor shall:
a. Ensure that the manufacturer shall rectify any non-conformance to the
Specification revealed by the audit or the supervision of CM's resident
representatives and if necessary, modify the QA Scheme and temporarily
suspend the manufacture of the precast concrete components until the non-
conformance is rectified;
b. Report to the CM of the non-conformance and rectification carried out.
3. Notwithstanding sub-clause (2) above, bear full responsibility to assure that all
the precast concrete components delivered to Site comply with the requirements
of the Specification at all times.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.W070.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT FOR ON-SITE CASTING

Within two months of the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit, for
agreement, the following items:
1. Details of moulds, layout arrangements, casting methods (horizontal or vertical),
tilting mechanism (if any), demoulding methods and the provision for
attachments of openings for window fixing (if any);
finishes, lifting, transporting, storage, erection, grouting (if any);
3. Method of protecting the precast concrete components from damage at all times;
4. The proposed Radio Frequency Identification tag and the fixing method as
Provide a programme for manufacture of the precast concrete components showing
the rate of production for each month. For on site precasting, the dates for clearing
the area of casting yard and associated plant upon completion of the manufacture of
the precast concrete components must also be shown.
CON7.W090.9 EQUIPMENT
Ensure casting yards, erected on-Site or off-Site are equipped with all the necessary
facilities, including efficient vibration plant, necessary curing facilities, storage,
handling and lifting facilities to secure compliance with all the provisions of this
Specification.
CON7.W100.9 USE OF CASTING YARD

Do not use any on-Site casting yard for manufacture of any components for other
sites. See PRE.B8.010.
CON7.W110.9 SUBMISSION AND PILOT PRODUCTION RUN BEFORE APPROVAL

1. Submission:
a. Submit the shop drawings, for the production of the precast components for
Approval, including any proposed changes to the products so as to suit
individual production process / plant;
b. Use concrete mix for the manufacture of precast components all in
accordance with the requirements in Worksection CON1;
c. Provide relevant information / samples associated with the proposed precast
components for Approval including:
i. Engraved manufacturer's logo and casting date;
ii. Printed precast concrete components identity numbers on surface of
products;
iii. Schmidt hammer test certificate and covermeter tests record endorsed by
the manufacturer's Quality Control Personnel;
iv. Delivery Order / Invoice;
v. Import and Export Manifests or Bill of Lading.
d. The proposed Radio Frequency Identification tag and the fixing method as
2. Before obtaining Approval for mass production, carry out a pilot production run
with the CM or his representatives on the proposed manufacturer to demonstrate
the technical capability and effectiveness of the Quality Management System;
3. In the pilot production run:
a. Provide, for each category of products:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
i. One sample with the reinforcement fixed in steel mould for the
inspection of workmanship including reinforcement fixing and provision
of bar spacers;
ii. One sample with concrete cast in steel mould for the inspection of
conditions of the steel mould, checking of the finished sample.
b. Carry out trial run to demonstrate the manufacturing process including
installation of windows, lifting operation, curing, storage, fixing of mosaic
tiles, quality tests at factory laboratory, applied finishes and quality controls
in accordance with the required drawings and specification;
c. Carry out verification check for engraved logo, casting date, identity number,
Schmidt hammer test certificate and covermeter tests record, dimensions,
size, spacing, position of starter bars and finishes.
4. The pilot production run may not be required, if the following documents are
submitted and are acceptable to the CM:
a. Track records on similar types of precast concrete components supplied by
the proposed manufacturer to other HA construction projects, within five
years prior to the notified date for commencement of the Works; or
b. In the absence of the track records, detailed records of the pilot production
run for similar types of precast concrete components carried out in other HA
construction projects, within five years prior to the notified date for
CON7.W120.9 FIRST JOINT INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY

1. Prior to mass production, carry out the first joint inspection between the
Contractor and the CM at factory for Approval on the minimum standard of the
product for all subsequent concrete and the specified finish. Arrange for the
transportation and provide all facilities for the first joint inspection;
2. Provide samples, including those samples in CON7.W110 (3)(a) and those
accepted samples in previous pilot production run carried out in accordance with
CON7.W110, for Approval as being representative of the minimum standard of
the product for all subsequent concrete and the specified finish;
3. Maintain accepted sample of precast façade / precast balcony and semi-precast
slab at a minimum of one number, or as directed by the CM, in an area in the
factory and do not remove the accepted samples from the area unless otherwise
instructed by the CM. Incorporate a further set of samples to the trial panel on
Site;
4. Carry out further joint inspections as in CON7.T510.
PRODUCING PRECAST UNITS

CON7.W210.9 MOULDS
Construct and maintain moulds so that:
1. Dismantling and re-assembly of moulds after each casting allows the production
of subsequent precast concrete components within permitted tolerance limits;
2. The positioning of securing components and fixings etc. are within the permitted
tolerances;
3. Adequate stiffness for the control of dimensional tolerances is maintained.

Replace any mould which fails to produce precast concrete components within the
permitted tolerance limits as specified in Appendix H, the "Schedule of Tolerances".
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Apply mould release agent of an Approved type, to the surfaces of moulds either by
brush or by spraying before the fixing of steel reinforcement at a rate in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.

See CON1.


1. Ensure that the total chloride content of the concrete mix for precast concrete
components subject to heat curing, is less than 0.1% by weight of that of the
cement;
2. Carry out a site trial to demonstrate the adequacy of the proposed method to the
CON7.W270.9 DEMOULDING GENERALLY

Demould by means of an Approved method and:
1. Do not use crowbars;
2. Do not subject the mould to any form of impact.

1. Demould the precast concrete components only after concrete has achieved the
required strength;
2. To determine the concrete strength required for demoulding or handling:
used for casting the concrete components and cure the concrete cubes under
the same conditions as the concrete in the precast concrete components;
c. Determine the concrete cube strength by compression test as CON7.T110
and satisfy the CM that the concrete cubes have acquired the required
strength before the demoulding or handling the precast concrete components.

1. Mark all precast concrete components with date of manufacture and a unique
reference number;
locations of all precast concrete components;
3. Update records specified in above sub-clause (2) for all precast façade / precast
balcony units to the RFID Web-Based Database System;
4. Upon delivery on Site, carry out covermeter tests to precast façade and precast
acoustic balcony at specified locations as instructed by the CM.
the Works on the format and size of site works photographic records of
covermeter tests for precast façade and precast acoustic balcony units. Submit
one set of photographic records to the CM within 24 hours after the day of
covermeter test showing all measurement locations and results.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

embedded metal works or any other items before casting the precast concrete
components units.

CON7.W410.9 MANUFACTURING AND ERECTION TOLERANCES
1. Refer to:
BD;
CON7.W420.9 CHECKING TOLERANCES

Check the manufacturing dimensional tolerances of the precast concrete components
by an Approved method for each type of components at a rate of 1 in every 10 units
produced and report the result to CM within two days of checking.
CON7.W430.9 DEFECTIVE UNITS

1. Any precast concrete components that falls outside the tolerance limits is
considered defective and must be replaced as Instructed. Indelible mark on
rejected units for identification purposes;
2. In the event of the CM agreeing to accept any defective precast concrete
components, execute all necessary remedial and modification work to the CM's
satisfaction.
HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

CON7.W510.9 LIFTING FRAME
Lift precast concrete components within the casting yard by means of a purpose-
made steel lifting frame designed to the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of
Steel 2011 issued by the Buildings Department.
CON7.W520.9 INSPECTION
Inspect each precast concrete components before lifting to ensure that neither
damage nor hazard occurs during lifting.
CON7.W530.9 LIFTING
Lift the precast concrete components only at appropriate lifting points as shown on
the Drawings.
CON7.W540.9 LIFTING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

1. Ensure plant used for lifting including cranes, hoists, lifting frames, hooks, etc
possess adequate safety margins, are maintained in good working order and are
regularly tested. Provide details of plant and maintenance records and current
test certificates when required by the CM;
2. Maintain crane rope in a sound condition. Discard all frayed bridle ropes or
slings;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Notwithstanding sub-clause (1) above, provide test certificates of lifting anchor

to the CM in accordance with CON7.T610 to CON7.T650.
CON7.W550.9 LOADING AND OFF-LOADING

Carry out lifting for loading or off-loading the precast concrete components in one
movement. Lift off and re-position any precast concrete components which is not
properly positioned after lifting, rather than levering it into place.
CON7.W560.9 TRANSPORT VEHICLES

Maintain lorries or trolleys used for the transportation of the precast concrete
components in a good condition. Ensure trolleys are equipped with suspension
systems to minimize shock loading.
ERECTING UNITS
Provide a programme for the erection of the precast concrete components showing
the rate of erection for each month. Make due allowance for all restrictions on the
age of concrete in the precast concrete components for handling, storage,
transportation and erection.

Provide, at the end of each week during erection of the precast concrete components,
records in a form to be agreed with the CM, showing:
1. Dates and the locations of structural connections completed;
2. Dates of removal and locations of props and temporary supports to the precast
concrete components.

Allow and facilitate inspection of the precast concrete components at any time before
erection and after installation.
CON7.W640.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES

Within three months from the notified date of commencement of Works, submit for
Approval, details of erection of the precast concrete components under Approved
quality control procedures covering the following:
1. Protective measures to avoid cracking and chipping;
2. Checking the accuracy of the insitu structural members receiving the precast
concrete components, including location and level of all bearing surfaces, joints,
bolts, horizontal and vertical restraining devices and adjustment devices. Carry
out checking by means of a template or measurement frame or a similar
Approved method;
3. Checking of erection tolerances.

1. Lift the precast concrete components by steel lifting frame complying with
CON7.W510 except otherwise stipulated in sub-clause (4) and (5) below;
precast concrete components in a vertical direction. Provide the cables with
devices for the adjustment of their length;
fixing the precast concrete components to the main structure;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Submit detailed method statement including the design, drawing and installation
procedures with endorsement of the Contractor’s RSE demonstrating to the
satisfaction of the CM that the precast concrete component will not subject to
excessive stresses arising from their proposed erection method without the steel
lifting frame, exemption from using the steel lifting frame as stated in sub-clause
(1) above can be allowed only for the lifting of the following precast concrete
components.
a. Vertically lifting precast elements:
Precast façade, precast balcony, precast structural wall, precast partition wall,
precast refuse chute, lost form (semi-precast wall), precast roof parapet and
precast A/C hood with the maximum horizontal dimension less than or equal
to 1.8m;
b. Horizontally lifting precast elements:
Full precast slab, semi-precast slab, precast staircase and precast tie beam
with the maximum horizontal dimension less than or equal to 6m.
5. In connection with sub-clause (4) above, address the safety use of the proposed
lifting anchor system, including but not limited to the proprietary anchor bolt
with clutch. The proposed lifting anchor system shall be flexible enough to
allow for both vertical and slant lifting sling.

Replace any precast concrete components which has been damaged on transportation,
lifting or erection.
TRIAL UNIT
CON7.W710.9 GENERAL
Prior to mass production of the precast concrete component units:
1. Produce a full size trial sample for the precast façade / precast balcony unit and
semi-precast slabs (if any) complete with joints, windows and glazing and the
electrical conduit system installation and all finishing;
2. Maintain the Approved sample units as the yardstick for the standard and quality
necessary for all precast concrete components;
3. When construction of a trial panel is required in CON2.W720, structurally
connect the trial sample to surrounding structural frames and with interfacing
services as detailed on the Drawings.
PRODUCING PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST

BALCONY UNITS
CON7.W810.9 SCOPE OF WORK
For off-Site casting, coordinate with the precast concrete components supplier and
include the following provisions with the precast facades and / or precast balconies
delivered to Site.
1. Aluminium windows or uPVC windows obtained from a supplier approved by
the CM in accordance with COM2.M005 or COM3.M010 respectively;
2. Pre-formed holes for the installation of drainage pipes;
3. Earthing lugs as shown on the Drawings;
4. Concealed electrical PVC conduit system installations as shown on the
Drawings and as specified;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. A certificate indicating the date of casting;

6. Work completion certificate for pre-installed electrical conduit system
installation;
7. Embed Radio Frequency Identification tag as specified.
CON7.W820.9 MOULDS
Construct moulds from steel or other materials to produce a standard in accordance
with the 'Surface finishes' specified in CON7.W850 to CON7.W900. Replace any
mould which fails to comply with the standard.
CON7.W830.9 HORIZONTAL CASTING

Provide moulds designed to facilitate horizontal casting with devices to enable
rotation from horizontal to vertical through 90° so that the precast façade / precast
balcony units can be lifted vertically on demoulding.
CON7.W840.9 WINDOWS FIXING TO PRECAST FAÇ ADE / PRECAST BALCONY

UNITS
Fix window frames / windows complete with or without opening sashes before
casting the precast facade / precast balcony units as specified in COM2 Worksection
and:
1. Obtain Approval for the method of fixing window frames / windows;
2. Do not fix window frames / windows into preformed openings after casting.
CON7.W850.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO EXTERNAL FACE

Finish outside faces except edges and overhang soffits to give an even textured
surface suitable for fixing glazed ceramic tiles by adhesive, or cast the tiles into the
mould.
CON7.W860.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO EDGES AND OVERHANG SOFFIT

Finish top, edge and soffit of overhang to give a smooth untextured surface suitable
for applying acrylic paint.
CON7.W870.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO LIVING / DINING / BEDROOMS

Finish to give:
1. A smooth untextured surface suitable for applying plastic emulsion paint for
rental blocks;
2. An even textured surface suitable for receiving internal cement lime plaster for
SSF blocks as required by the Contract.
CON7.W880.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO BATHROOM

Finish to give an even textured surface suitable for fixing tiles by method as shown
or specified on the Drawings.
CON7.W890.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO KITCHEN

Finish to give an even textured surface suitable for fixing tiles by method as shown
or specified on the Drawings.
CON7.W900.9 SURFACE FINISHES TO UTILITY AREA

Finish to give an even textured surface suitable for fixing glass mosaic tiles by
adhesive.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

1. Store the precast facade / precast balcony units in the vertical plane on a level,
well drained and maintained concrete surface and protect against staining or
physical damage;
2. Support the precast facade / precast balcony units by an Approved method to
prevent their warping, bowing, chipping or cracking;
3. Store different types of precast facade / precast balcony units components
separately;
4. The precast facade / precast balcony units shall be supported by a device in
storage area to prevent toppling. For off-site casting yards, racks shall be used
and detailed in the submitted QA scheme.
CON7.W920.9 TRANSPORTING FROM CASTING YARD

Stack precast facade / precast balcony units vertically, on vehicles during
transportation from the casting yard and:
1. Support the precast facade / precast balcony units on special cradles so that the
units are completely protected against damage and adverse stresses;
2. Provide the details of the support and the support locations to the CM for
comment.
CON7.W930.9 PROTECTIVE MEASURE FOR ERECTING UNITS

Provide protective measures to avoid cracking and chipping of the precast facade /
precast balcony units and damage to the applied finishes and to the built-in items
such as window frames.

1. During fixing of the precast facade / precast balcony units, prop adjacent insitu
structural members adequately to avoid excessive deflection or adverse stresses;
2. Maintain all temporary supports, props and restraints in position during casting
of concrete in the structural joint. Remove temporary supports, props and
restraints upon satisfactory testing and calculation to Approval;
3. Unless specifically designed for, do not allow temporary support to be derived
from the precast facade / precast balcony units fixed at lower floors;
4. For off-Site casting, coordinate with the supplier regarding the details of all
method.

Do not carry out permanent jointing or connection between any precast facade /
precast balcony unit and another, or to any part of the insitu structure, without prior
Approval.
CON7.W960.9 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

Supply and install conceal rigid plain PVC conduit system complete with steel draw
wires for precast facade and / or precast balcony as indicated on the Drawings.
CON7.W970.9 SHOP DRAWINGS OF CONDUITS

Prepare shop drawings, coordinate and agree with the Nominated Sub-contractor for
electrical installation and Supplier for precast facade and / or precast balcony before
submitting shop drawings for Approval.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.W980.9 SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF CONDUITS

Submit for Approval technical details, samples and type-tested certificates for the

Internal radius: at least 4 times the outside diameter of the conduit.


SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. All conduits and accessories installed have to be certified by at least Grade A2 of
Registered Electrical Workers (REW);
2. When delivered to Site, the precast concrete components must be accompanied
with a Work Completion Certificate Form WR1(A) specified by Electrical and
Electrical Contractor and a REW certifying that the pre-installed conduit system
installation is in full compliance with the Specification and the Code of Practice
for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations;
PRODUCING AND ERECTING SEMI-PRECAST

SLAB
CON7.W1105.9 ERECTION OF SEMI-PRECAST SLAB
1. For erection of semi-precast slab, refer to the drawings detailed in Project
Specific Specification, which are provided for reference only;
2. Submit design calculations and detail drawings of the shoring layouts and details
for CM's approval at least 4 weeks before commencement of constructing the
erection support.
PRODUCING AND ERECTING SEMI-PRECAST

SLAB
CON7.W1110.9 STORING AND TRANSPORTING
1. Unless otherwise Approved, the semi-precast slabs must be stacked and
separated by 75 mm x 75 mm timber joints to the full length of the elements
symmetrically placed next to the lifting hook and vertically aligned;
2. Provide details of the support and the support locations to the CM for comment;
3. Ensure that stacking of semi-precast slab does not generate unintended bearing,
compressive, tensile or flexural stresses on the prefabricated reinforcement and
conduit system.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.W1120.9 CLEANSING AND CRACK INSPECTION BEFORE INSITU CONCRETE

TOPPING
1. Remove all laitance, loose materials, dirt and grease from the top surface of the
semi-precast slab to the satisfaction of the CM before applying insitu concrete
topping:
a. Use water jet with a minimum pressure of 10,000 kPa (100 bar) for
cleansing;
b. Maintain the cleansing as specified in sub-clause (a) above for a minimum
period of 4 minutes per flat of about 30 m² and adjust the operation duration
for different flat size.
2. After water-jet cleansing in sub-clause (1) above, check for cracks at the
underside of semi-precast slab:
a. Through cracks are deemed to exist if signs of water seepage or damp
patches are observed at the bottom of semi-precast slab;
b. Carry out crack remedial work under CON1.W1980 before applying insitu
concrete topping to the semi-precast slabs.

Supply and install concealed rigid plain PVC conduit system completed with draw
wires for semi-precast slab as shown on Drawings.

Submit to the CM for approval within two months prior to production, 5 sets shop
drawings of conduits mounted on semi-precast slab, which have been coordinated
and agreed with all relevant building services Nominated Sub-contractors and
suppliers.

Submit for approval technical details, samples and type-tested certificates for the



SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. All conduits and accessories installed have to be certified by Registered
Electrical Workers (REW) of Grade A2 or above;
2. When delivered to Site, the precast concrete components shall be accompanied

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. A single or multiple certificates shall be issued for delivered lots of precast

concrete components which are produced in each production lot. The certificate
shall also carry information, e.g. reference number, etc., for traceability purpose;
4. Provide the CM and the Nominated Sub-contractor for Electrical Installation
each a copy of the Work Completion Certificate for record.
ERECTING PRECAST STAIRS

CON7.W1210.9 DOWEL FIXING
Locate box cutouts of precast stairs over cast-in dowel bars and fill with non-shrink
grout.
CON7.W1220.9 BEDDING AND JOINTING

Bed and joint precast stairs in non-shrink grout or cement mortar where shown on
Drawings.
PRODUCING AND ERECTING PRECAST

STRUCTURAL WALL / PRECAST PARTITION
WALL
CON7.W1310.9 STORING AND TRANSPORTING
Unless otherwise Approved, the precast structural walls / precast partition walls must
be stacked and separated by 75 mm x 75 mm timber joints to the full length of the
elements symmetrically placed next to the lifting hook and vertically aligned.
CON7.W1320.9 CLEANSING AND INSPECTION OF JOINTS BEFORE POURING SLAB

CONCRETE
1. Before fixing the concealed conduits and void formers, remove all laitance,
loose materials, dirt and grease from the top of the precast structural walls /
precast partition walls by using high pressure waterjet with minimum pressure of
10,000 Kpa (100 bar) to the satisfaction of the CM;
2. Allow and facilitate inspection of joints by the CM before applying insitu
concrete topping to the semi-precast slabs.

1. During fixing the precast structural walls / precast partition walls, prop adjacent
insitu structural members adequately to avoid excessive deflection or adverse
stresses;
2. Maintain all temporary supports, props and restraints in position during applying
insitu concrete topping to the semi-precast slabs. Remove temporary supports,
props and restraints upon satisfactory testing and calculation to Approval;
3. Do not use precast partition walls as temporary or permanent supports for other
structural and non-structural members;
4. For off site casting, coordinate with the supplier regarding the details of all
method.
CON7.W1340.9 PROTECTIVE MEASURE FOR ERECTING UNITS

Provide protective measures to avoid cracking and chipping of the precast structural
walls / precast partition walls and damage to the applied finishes and to the built-in
items such as fabricated U-channels and embedded steel plates.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.W1350.9 BEDDING AND JOINTING

Locate embedded steel plates of precast structural walls / precast partition walls over
cast-in locking steel plates. Bed and joint precast structural walls / precast partition
walls in non-shrink cement mortar where shown on Drawings.

Do not carry out permanent jointing or connection between any precast structural
walls / precast partition walls and another, or to any part of the insitu structure,
without prior Approval.

Supply and install concealed rigid plain PVC conduit system completed with draw
wires for precast structural walls / precast partition walls / precast lift shafts /
volumetric precast concrete components etc. as shown on Drawings.

Submit to the CM for approval within two months prior to production, 5 sets shop
drawings of conduits mounted on precast structural walls / precast partition walls,
which have been coordinated and agreed with all relevant building services
Nominated Sub-contractors and suppliers.

Submit for approval technical details, samples and type-tested certificates for the



SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. All conduits and accessories installed have to be certified by at least Grade A2 of
Registered Electrical Workers (REW);
2. Where delivered to Site, the precast concrete components must be accompanied

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS...... CON7 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING

CON7.T010.9 RECORDS
CM;
test.

Assurance Scheme:
1. Make the records of sampling and testing available for inspection by the CM or
his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory;
2. The CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory is entitled to
reject individual precast concrete components represented by any failed test
result on the precast concrete component.

1. Schmidt hammer tests and covermeter tests on the construction quality of precast
concrete components;

witness of the CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory unless
resident at manufacturer's factory in batches;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
representatives resident at manufacturer's factory immediately without any delay;
manufacturer's factory for endorsement.
As CON1.T510.

As CON1.T520.

CONCRETE CUBES
As CON1.T610.

As CON1.T620.

As CON1.T630.

As CON1.T640.

CONCRETE MIXES
As CON1.T650.

As CON1.T660.

As CON1.T670.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
COMPRESSIVE TEST ON CONCRETE CUBES

CON7.T110.9 GENERAL
1. Carry out tests on workability, make and cure concrete cubes made from the
concrete used for casting the precast concrete components, by the Contractor /
manufacturer for precast concrete components;
2. All details, including sampling frequency, of the concrete cubes tests must be in
accordance with Worksection CON1;
3. The tests on compressive strength of concrete cubes shall be carried out by the
DTC and / or HDMTL.
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY

CORES FOR PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
EXCEPT SEMI-PRECAST SLAB AND PRECAST
PARTITION WALL
CON7.T121.9 GENERAL
particular batch of precast concrete components in order not to affect the
construction work on Site. In such case, core test shall be carried out in
accordance with the procedures set out in CON1.T710 to CON1.T760 to prove
the compliance of that particular batch of precast concrete components to
compressive test on cores as stipulated in this Specification.
saturated density.

Testing samples:
samples by the DTC from each of the following precast concrete components for
the same concreting day, at locations selected by the CM:
a. Precast facades (including precast roof parapet);
b. Precast balconies;
c. Precast staircases (including precast roof staircases);
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
d. Precast structural walls;

e. Other precast elements as directed by the CM.
2. Size of core samples:
a. 75 mm diameter core samples for precast concrete components;
b. For vertically casted precast concrete components, the length of core
samples shall be at least 90 mm;
c. For horizontally casted precast concrete components, the length of core
samples shall be at least 90 mm plus top 50 mm or 20% of depth of concrete
being cored whichever is greater.

CON7.T125.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF EARLY CORES

In assessing the compressive strength of early cores, the precast concrete
components of the same concreting day represented by the early cores are deemed to
comply with this Specification if the compressive strength of the early core, when
adjusted for length / diameter ratio and converted to estimated insitu cube strength in
accordance with CS1:2010, is :

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR PRECAST CONCRETE
COMPONENTS
1. For precast concrete components of the same concreting day represented by the
early cores that the compressive strength of the early cores comply with
CON7.T125, their core test results are deemed to be acceptable under this
Specification, and further coring test at 28 days is not necessary unless
compressive strength test of concrete cube of the same batch of concrete not
comply with CON7.T054 or instructed otherwise by the CM;
2. For precast concrete components of the same concreting day represented by the
early cores that the compressive strength of the early cores do not comply with
CON7.T125:
a. if the concreting ages of the precast concrete components are less than 28
days, carry out further early core tests by DTC. If the result of the further
early core test does not comply with CON7.T125, the precast concrete
components are not allowed to be lifted into place or installed on Site, and
further early core test may be carried out in accordance with this sub-clause;
b. if the concreting ages of the precast concrete components are 28 days or over,
carry out further core test by DTC in accordance with CON1.T710 to
CON1.T760. If the result of this further core test does not comply with
CON1.T760, the precast concrete components are not allowed to be lifted
into place or installed on Site. All relevant concrete of precast concrete
components represented by this further core test in the same concreting day
is deemed not complying with this Specification. Investigate the extent of
non-compliance and re-execute the works in accordance with CON1.T1210
to CON1.T1260.

As CON1.T770.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

CONCRETE CORES EXCEPT PRECAST
PARTITION WALL
CON7.T128.9 GENERAL
As CON1.T710.
As CON1.T720.
CON7.T130.9 SIZE AND NUMBER OF CORE SAMPLES

1. Testing samples:
a. Provide necessary facilities and attendance for taking 3 Nos. 100 mm
diameter cores by DTC from each of the following precast concrete
components for the same concreting day, at the location selected by the CM:
i. Precast facades (including precast roof parapets);
ii. Semi-precast slabs with insitu concrete topping;
iii. Precast balconies;
iv. Precast staircases (including precast roof staircases);
v. Volumetric precast bathroom (VPB) and / or Combined VPB
components;
vi. Volumetric precast kitchen (VPK) and / or Combined VPK and / or
Combined VPB and VPK components;
vii. Volumetric precast lift shafts;
viii. Volumetric precast lift machine room;
ix. Other precast elements as directed by the CM.
b. Provide necessary facilities and attendance for taking 3 Nos. 75 mm
diameter cores by DTC from the precast structural walls for the same
concreting day, at the location selected by the CM.

As CON1.T740.

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR SEMI-PRECAST SLAB
1. In the event that any of the core samples taken from the semi-precast slab with
the insitu concrete topping debonds at the location between the semi-precast slab
and insitu concrete topping, the core is deemed to be unacceptable for
compression test. Take core from another slab that its insitu topping was cast on
the same concreting day as the semi-precast slab with debonded core sample for
compression test;
2. For the semi-precast slab panel with debonded core sample, the slab panel is
deemed to be unacceptable. In addition, to confirm that debonding will not
occur in other semi-precast slab panel of the same concreting day when insitu
topping was cast, take further cores according to the following formula:
Nos. of further cores = (n²-2n+3).
Where n is equal to the total number of unsuccessful cores, progressively until
all cores are satisfactory (i.e. no debonding occurs). All semi-precast slab panels
at which the cores had deboned shall be demolished and recast to the satisfaction
of the CM all at contractor's own expense.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON7.T140.9 CORE TESTING FOR SEMI-PRECAST SLAB

In respect of semi-precast slab, the concrete represented by the cores is to include:
1. The insitu concrete for the same concreting day;
2. The precast concrete slabs manufactured in the casting yard within the same
casting day.
CON7.T150.9 REQUIREMENT FOR FURTHER CORE SAMPLES

As CON1.T750.

As CON1.T760.
CON7.T180.9 MAKE GOOD OF CORE HOLES

As CON1.T770.
CON7.T190.9 TESTING OF NON-SHRINK GROUT

As CON4.T070.

As CON4.T080.

hammer test on all structural element(s) of precast concrete components by the
CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer’s factory when the concreting
age of the precast concrete components is at least 3 days;
SITE WATERTIGHTNESS TESTS TO PRECAST

FAÇ ADE / PRECAST BALCONY
CON7.T210.9 TESTING TRIAL UNIT
1. Carry out watertightness tests to the jointing system of the full size trial samples
specified in CON7.W710 in accordance with the procedures set out in
CON7.T230;
full size trial sample all to the requirements specified in COM2.T210.

Testing samples:
1. Carry out watertightness tests in accordance with the procedures set out in
CON7.T230 to all joints of the properly installed precast facade / precast balcony
units not connected monolithically to in-situ concrete at the rate of 50% of each
particular type in locations as instructed by the CM or his representatives.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Test joints of each selected precast facade / precast balcony unit according to the
procedures as follows:
2. Working from the exterior, wet the precast facade / precast balcony unit
selectively, starting from the lowest horizontal joint, followed by the vertical
joints and then the horizontal joint above;
240 kPa at the nozzle inlet to the joint and perpendicular to the face of the
precast facade / precast balcony unit. Move the nozzle slowly along the joint, at
a distance of 300 mm from it, for a period of 5 minutes in every 1.5 metre of
joint length while an observer carefully inspects on the interior side of the
precast facade / precast balcony unit with the assistance of adequate lighting
where necessary;


The precast facade / precast balcony units and joints are deemed to have failed if
signs of water seeping through the joints or through the precast facade / precast
balcony unit, including signs of damp patches, are observed during the test and
within the subsequent 2 hours after the test.

TESTING
Non-compliance:
1. Carry out remedial work to precast facade / precast balcony units and joints
which have failed the watertightness test. Methods of carrying out the remedial
work are subject to Approval;
2. After the remedial work is completed, re-test the precast facade / precast balcony
units and joints in accordance with the procedures set out in CON7.T230;
3. Repeat sub-clauses (1) & (2) above until the precast facade / precast balcony unit
and joint comply with the specified criteria of watertightness;
4. For any one precast facade / precast balcony unit fails the watertightness test,
carry out additional tests as follows:
a. Select three additional samples as instructed by the CM or his
representatives for testing. Each sample shall comprise three precast facade
/ precast balcony units of the same type as the failed precast facade / precast
balcony unit;
b. Carry out watertightness test to the additional samples in accordance with
the procedures set out in CON7.T230;
c. When any precast facade / precast balcony unit fails the test, repeat sub-
clauses (1) & (2) above until the precast facade / precast balcony unit and
joint comply with the specified criteria of watertightness.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Repeat sub-clause (4) above until all testing precast facade / precast balcony
units and joints have complied with specified criteria of watertightness;
6. Bear all associated costs for the re-tests and additional tests as specified in the
above sub-clauses. No extension of time will be allowed.
CORE TEST AND CRACK INSPECTION FOR SEMI-

PRECAST SLAB
CON7.T410.9 CORE TEST IN SAMPLE FLAT UNIT
1. Testing samples:
The CM may select 3 Nos. of samples of standard cores through the roof slab at
Trial Panels in CON7.W710 to determine the cleansing standard of semi-precast
slab.
2. Non-compliance:
If debonding is observed at the interface between the semi-precast slab and
topping concrete, the cleansing standard under CON7.W1120 should be
reviewed and the roof slab at Trial Panels recast for further core testing to the
SURVEILLANCE INSPECTION
BREAKING UP INSPECTION
For off-site casting:
1. Arrange transportation for the CM and/or his representatives and carry out joint
inspections at the manufacturer's factory;
2. Carry out up to 4 breaking-up inspections which may be instructed by the CM,
each comprising the following:
a. Provide samples of precast concrete component randomly selected by the
CM or his representatives, break up the component for inspection and
remove the broken component after inspection;
b. Carry out the following inspection in the presence of the CM or his
representatives:
i. Reinforcement details including total number of bars and bar size in
accordance with standard design drawings;
ii. Bar pattern of the reinforcement used against the Mill Certificate and the
requirements of purchaser test in CS2:2012;
iii. The installation, markings and brand name of concealed electrical
conduits, fittings and conduit accessories etc. when pre-installed
electrical conduit system is installed.
3. In the event of samples of a type of components failing to meet any one of the
requirements in the breaking-up inspection above, take further precast concrete
components of that particular type according to the following formula until all
precast concrete components satisfy the requirements as above:
Nos. of further samples = (n² - 2n +3)
where n is equal to the total number of unsuccessful components;
4. Bear the costs of all further breaking-up inspections that may be required under
sub-clause (3) above and no extension of time will be allowed.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
LIFTING ANCHOR
manufacturer.

capacity.

for testing by DTC.

issued by:

VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE...... CON8 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8 VOLUMETRIC PRECAST

CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR
DOMESTIC BLOCKS
DESIGN
GENERAL
CON8.D010.9 DEFINITION OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE
CONSTRUCTION
Construction of three-dimensional precast concrete building components or units,
with fixtures, fittings and finishes, but excluding the following precast concrete
components:
1. Precast facades (including precast roof parapet) (refer to CON7);
2. Semi-precast slabs (including semi-precast roof slabs and semi-precast corridor
slabs) (refer to CON7);
3. Precast balconies (refer to CON7);
4. Precast staircases (including precast roof staircases) (refer to CON7);
5. Precast structural walls (refer to CON7);
6. Precast partition walls (refer to CON7);
7. Precast refuse chutes (refer to CON4).
CON8.D020.9 USE OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS

Volumetric precast concrete components, including but not limited to the following,
are covered by the specification in this Worksection:
1. Volumetric precast lift lobbies;
2. Volumetric precast kitchens;
3. Volumetric precast lift shafts;
4. Volumetric precast bathrooms;
5. Volumetric precast roof water tanks;
6. Volumetric precast ground floor water tanks;
7. Volumetric precast lift machine room.
CON8.D030.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS

1. Comply with the requirements of this Worksection and relevant provisions of the
Specification, in particular, the following Worksections:
a. CON1, In-situ Concrete;
b. CON2, Formwork;
e. CON6, Movement Joints;
f. CON7, Precast Concrete Components;
g. COM2, Aluminium Windows and Louvres;
h. COM3, uPVC Windows;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
i. COM5, Timber Doorsets;

j. COM11, Radio Frequency Identification and Web-based Database System
for Building Components;
k. DRA1, Drainage Above Ground;
l. FIN1, Plastered and Rendered Finishes;
m. FIN3, Screeds;
n. FIN5, Floor and Wall Tiles and Slabs;
o. FIN6, Flexible Sheet and Tile Finishes;
p. FIN7, Painting;
q. MAS1, Brickwork, Blockwork and Panel Partitions;
r. MAS3, Mortar;
s. MET1, General Metalwork;
t. STR1, Structural Steel;
u. PLU1, Water Supply;
v. PLU2, Sanitary Appliances;
w. WAT5, Sealants;
x. WAT6, Proprietary Tanking and Waterproofing Systems.
2. Where building services installations are associated with volumetric precast
concrete components, comply with the requirements and relevant provisions of
the following Worksections:
a. ELE1 - ELE31, Electrical Installation;
b. FWP1 - FWP14, Fire Services & Water Pump Installation;
c. LTE1 - LTE2, Lift Installation.
and any clauses in any other Worksections, the provisions of this Worksection
prevail.
CON8.D040.9 DESIGN STANDARDS

1. For reinforced concrete structures, comply with CON1.M010;
2. For precast concrete, comply with CON4.D010 and Code of Practice for Precast
Concrete Construction 2016 published by Buildings Department;
3. For structural joint design, comply with CON4.D020;
and any clauses in any other Worksections or standards, the most onerous
conditions shall apply. Agree with the CM on the interpretation in advance of
design.
SCOPE OF WORK
CON8.D110.9 GENERAL (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)
1. Refer to the Drawings for the extent of volumetric precast concrete components
including the identification of parts of the component that will function as
facades;
2. Refer to the Drawings for the extent of fixtures, finishing, fittings and building
services installations associated with volumetric precast concrete components;
3. Refer to the Drawings and relevant Specification clauses for the scope of
builders, structural and building services works to be prefabricated in off-site
yards.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.D120.9 SCOPE OF THE DESIGN (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)

Design the volumetric precast concrete components in accordance with the
requirements specified in this Worksection, Worksections CON4 and CON7 as
appropriate. Include the following in the scope of the design of those components:
1. The structural design of the volumetric precast concrete components;
2. The design of permanent structural connections between volumetric precast
concrete components and/or building structure;
3. The design of the waterproof joints between volumetric precast concrete
components functioning as a facade and/or the building structure;
4. The design of the installation of fixtures and finishes, including the finishing
textures, associated with volumetric precast concrete components;
5. Building services installations as required and included in the fabrication of
volumetric precast concrete components as a whole module;
6. Inspection method.
DESIGN PARAMETERS (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)

CON8.D210.9 STABILITY
Design the volumetric precast concrete components to be stable at all times. Provide
designs for both the component and for any necessary temporary props, ties and
supports.
CON8.D220.9 RESISTANCE TO PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE

Design the volumetric precast concrete components in two ways, both as an
assembly of individual walls and floors, and also as a complete unit in a progressive
collapse design situation, providing additional ties to the rest of the structure for each
case.
CON8.D230.9 DEFORMATIONS
Design the volumetric precast concrete components to be located in the structure
without deforming excessively before all of the joints and permanent structural
connections are made. Include consideration of any temporary stiffening, support
jigs or frames in the design.
CON8.D240.9 INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS

Design the volumetric precast concrete components so that all interfaces between
other volumetric precast concrete components or the rest of the structure can be
made neatly to the required standards of finish and tolerance.
CON8.D250.9 EXTERNAL FACES

Design the volumetric precast concrete components so that any external faces can be
inspected before erection and the main jointing can be made safely from within the
structural envelope.
CON8.D260.9 LOADING
1. Design the volumetric precast concrete components to be either load bearing or
non load bearing to sustain all possible loading acting upon them;
2. If load bearing, then design the component to carry the loads placed on it in both
the temporary and permanent situations taking into consideration of any creep on
vertical shortening of walls which may be more highly stressed than outer
adjacent precast or in-situ vertical load bearing elements;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Submit calculations to demonstrate that in-situ structural members are not

subject to excessive stresses arising from the erection method of the volumetric
precast concrete components and to demonstrate the adequacy of any temporary
supports which may be required;
4. Where volumetric precast concrete components include a facade element, the
loading conditions should be determined in accordance with CON5.D250.
CON8.D270.9 MINIMUM CONCRETE GRADE

Where volumetric precast concrete components include a facade element, the
minimum concrete grade shall be Grade 35/20.
CON8.D280.9 CONCRETE COVER TO REINFORCEMENT

Minimum cover to reinforcing bars in the facade elements of the volumetric precast
concrete components:
1. External face: 30 mm;
2. Internal face: 25 mm.
CON8.D290.9 CONCRETE COVER TO PVC CONDUIT

Minimum cover to PVC conduits concealed within volumetric precast concrete
components: 30 mm.
CON8.D300.9 CONCEALMENT OF FIXINGS

Conceal all permanent fixing connections by Approved methods.
JOINTS
CON8.D410.9 JOINTS
Apply back-up materials, bond breakers and sealants in accordance with
Worksection WAT5.
CON8.D420.9 GASKETS
Gaskets may be used in weatherproofing joints provided that:
CON8.D430.9 MORTAR STOPS

Use backing rods or other Approved methods as mortar stops in grouting panel joints
when necessary.
WEATHERPROOF JOINTS (CONTRACTOR'S

DESIGN)
CON8.D510.9 JOINT DESIGN
Design weatherproof external joints to be maintenance free, and ensure airtightness
and watertightness in accordance with BS 6093:1993.

Use one of the following types of weatherproof joints in accordance with
BS 6093:1993:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS

CON8.D610.9 GENERAL (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)
Design the permanent structural connections:
1. To withstand the stresses induced by the volumetric precast concrete
components described in CON8.D260;
2. To be watertight;
3. To be of the same grade of concrete as that for the volumetric precast concrete
components.
CON8.D620.9 REINFORCEMENT, SHEAR CONNECTORS ETC

Ensure reinforcement, shear connectors, etc used for the permanent structural
connections are adequately embedded or anchored into the building structure.
CON8.D630.9 VERTICAL PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS

At the vertical permanent structural connections between volumetric precast concrete
components that are to be infilled,
1. Use non-shrink grout or concrete with non-shrinking additives if the minimum
dimension is more than 150 mm;
2. Use only non-shrink grout if the minimum dimension is less than 150 mm.
CON8.D640.9 HORIZONTAL PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS

For horizontal permanent structural connections, concrete with non-shrinking
additives in lieu of non-shrink grout may be permitted subject to the provisions of
CON4.M270.
DESIGN TOLERANCES
CON8.D710.9 OVERALL TOLERANCES (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)
1. Design the volumetric precast concrete components and the associated
joints/connections to the in-situ structure, other volumetric precast concrete
components, precast concrete components, architectural and building services
installations, including all cast in elements, to conform with the relevant
tolerances given in Appendix H and the Code of Practice for Precast Concrete
Construction 2016;
2. Where any ambiguity, discrepancy or conflict arises between the tolerances
given in Appendix H and the CoP for Precast Concrete Construction, the
provisions given in Appendix H shall prevail.

MANUFACTURE TOLERANCE (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)
Design the volumetric precast concrete components and propose the manufacture
tolerances in order to satisfy the overall tolerances given in Appendix H and Code of
Practice for Precast Concrete Construction 2016, taking into account the erection
tolerances.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.D730.9 VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ERECTION

TOLERANCE
Propose a set of erection tolerances that is in compliance with the overall tolerance
allowed when taken together with the set of manufacture tolerances proposed taking
into consideration all possible interfaces with adjacent precast units or in situ
elements.
LIFTING OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS
CON8.D810.9 LIFTING DESIGN
1. Ensure that the design of the lifting mechanism for volumetric precast concrete
components provides a safe and robust means of lifting and holds the component
in a truly vertical position and is adjustable to ensure verticality if necessary;
2. Submit for Approval the proposed lifting positions and any points of attachments
on the components for lifting slings if not shown on the drawings.
CON8.D820.9 STEEL LIFTING FRAMES

Design and construct steel lifting frames in accordance with the Code of Practice for
the Structural Use of Steel 2011 issued by the Buildings Department.
CON8.D830.9 LIFTING METHOD

Ensure that:
1. The design for lifting takes into account all loads on the component, friction
against mould faces, snatch, impact and self weight of all fittings, lifting frame
and equipment with an appropriate factor of safety;
2. Any lifting system that has a number of bolts, chains or ropes that work in
parallel, is either designed such that all internal loads are calculable and
statically determinate or, if not, that each bolt, chain, or rope possesses sufficient
reserve of strength for any likely load distribution;
3. The equipment is capable of supporting the component if any single individual
fastening, chain or bolt fails, taking into account any realignment of the
component as it moves to place the centre of gravity under the new lifting
arrangement.
SUBMISSIONS
CON8.D910.9 TENDER DESIGN PROPOSAL
Submit for Approval, full details of tender design proposals including drawings,
specifications, layouts, details, calculations and any other information required.
CON8.D920.9 REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

All structural drawings, layouts, details and calculations submitted, including those
submitted with tender, must be prepared and signed by a Registered Structural
Engineer registered under Buildings Department of the Government of Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region.

1. Agree with the CM a programme for all submissions during the Contract prior to
the notified date for commencement of Works;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Agree with the CM a programme for all ICU submissions for building works
prior to the notified date for commencement of Works;
3. Within one month after the notified date for commencement of the Works,
submit to the CM for approval, a programme for the design, planning and
coordination with NSCs, ICU approval, manufacturing, erection and testing of a
study mock up of the volumetric precast concrete components;
4. No extension of time will be allowed for any delay related to ICU's approval.
CON8.D940.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN)

Within two months after the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit
the following to the CM for review and comment:
1. 5 sets of design drawings;
2. 5 sets of shop drawings including, but not limited to, coordinated services
drawings, combined builder's works drawings, building services drawings,
fixtures and fittings drawings. All shop drawings shall be fully dimensioned
with tolerances and properly coordinated;
3. Calculations and any other information indicating the location of the volumetric
precast concrete components and any changes resulting from the use of
volumetric precast concrete components;
4. Calculations which show all loading imposed on the volumetric precast concrete
components due to lifting, handling, stacking, shock or any other reason,
complies with the relevant standards, unless specified otherwise;
5. Jointing details and/or permanent structural connections, which can
accommodate building movements, between the proposed volumetric precast
concrete components and insitu concrete;
6. Design of moulds with tolerance, layout arrangements, casting methods
(horizontal or vertical), tilting mechanism, demoulding methods and the
provision for attachments of openings for door and / or window fixing;
finishes, lifting, transporting, storage, erection of volumetric precast concrete
components, installation of weatherproof joints, and its associated temporary
works;
8. Method for identifying and recording the daily production of volumetric precast
concrete components and their final position after installation;
9. Method of protecting the volumetric precast concrete components, including all
building services installations and associated equipment fabricated within the
units, from damage at all times;
10. Minimum concrete strength required for the volumetric precast concrete
components for demoulding, handling, storage, transportation and erection;
11. Position and design of lifting points with tolerances;
12. Calculated weight and size, including projections beyond transportation vehicles,
of each type of volumetric precast concrete components;
13. The proposed Radio Frequency Identification tag and the associated fixing
method as stipulated in Worksection COM11.
CON8.D950.9 DRAWINGS AND METHOD STATEMENT (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)

the following to the CM for review and comment:
1. Design of moulds with tolerance, layout arrangements, casting methods
(horizontal or vertical), tilting mechanism, demoulding methods and the
provision for attachments of openings for door and/or window fixing;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

finishes, lifting, transporting, storage, erection of volumetric precast concrete
components, installation of weatherproof joints and its associated temporary
works;
3. Method for identifying and recording the daily production of volumetric precast
concrete components and their final position after installation;
4. Method of protecting the volumetric precast concrete components, including all
building services installations and associated equipment fabricated within the
units, from damage at all times;
5. The proposed Radio Frequency Identification tag and the associated fixing method
as stipulated in Worksection COM11;
6. 5 sets shop drawings of volumetric precast concrete components, which have
been coordinated and agreed with all relevant building services Nominated Sub-
contractors and suppliers.
STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE

BUILDING STRUCTURE (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)
CON8.D1010.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)
CON8.D1020.9 COMPLIANCE WITH GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS (ENGINEER'S

DESIGN)
Any proposed structural modifications to the building structure must comply with
the following:
1. The structural design guidelines as appropriate to the building structure
published by the Housing Department and included as Appendix E to this
Specification;
2. The relevant Regulations, PNAP, CoP, etc. currently in use.
CON8.D1030.9 REINFORCEMENT CHANGES (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)

Obtain CM's Approval for any proposed changes to reinforcement details, as shown
on the Drawings, required to suit the proposed method of casting and installation.
STUDY MOCK-UP
CON8.D1110.9 GENERAL
1. Set up a study mock-up in order to demonstrate, prior to mass production, that
the use of the proposed volumetric precast concrete components is feasible and
that the volumetric precast concrete components are constructable, structurally
safe, architecturally and functionally satisfactory when gauging against the
following aspects:
a. Buildability - speed, safety, structural & building services connections &
interfaces, safe system of working;
b. Tolerances, accuracy;
c. Quality;
d. Manufacturing process;
e. Joint integrity;
f. Testing on watertightness, strength and, structural integrity.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Implement any improvements shown to be necessary to the proposed volumetric

precast concrete components in a timely manner to ensure that mass production
of such components will meet the required standards and to minimise risk
associated with new construction processes and methods.
CON8.D1120.9 LOCATION OF CASTING YARD

Within one month of the notified date for the awarded tender, state the location of
the casting yard for the manufacture of the study mock-up for CM's approval.
CON8.D1130.9 SIZE OF STUDY MOCK-UP

1. Unless otherwise agreed by the CM, the study mock-up should be at least 2
storeys high, comprising all the different types of volumetric precast concrete
components (except volumetric precast lift shafts) that will be adopted for
construction in a typical floor with modular layout, for demonstrating all
interfaces and joints with adjacent units, either in-situ or precast elements;
2. The study mock-up shall be in accordance with the overall size, shape, layout
and external envelope of the typical floor. For Engineer's design, the actual
extent of the study mock up is as shown on Drawings.
CON8.D1140.9 EXTENT OF COVERAGE OF STUDY MOCK-UP

Unless otherwise agreed by the CM, the study mock-up should include all internal
and external finishes, doors and windows, electrical lighting, fittings, sockets,
concealed conduits, sanitary fittings, internal and external services, plumbing and
drainage, and any other accessories required for the proper functioning of the
volumetric precast concrete components.
CON8.D1150.9 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

1. Be responsible for the design, submission, manufacture, transportation and
installation of the proposed volumetric precast concrete components for the
study mock-up;
2. All structural submissions, such as design principles, calculation and
construction details, etc. shall be prepared and endorsed by a Registered
Structural Engineer (RSE), registered with the Buildings Department as
mentioned in CON8.D920;
3. Demonstrate that the design of the study mock-up can sustain the required dead,
imposed, wind load and any other loads;
4. Design and execute any temporary works for the safe erection of the study
mock-up;
5. Coordinate the interfacing works of the building services installation contained
within the proposed volumetric precast concrete components of the study mock-
up;
6. Allow adequate time for the application of design approval from the ICU prior to
mass production of the volumetric precast concrete components;
7. Acquire the necessary approval from the relevant Authorities related to the
following aspects:
a. Architectural;
b. Structural;
c. Building services;
d. Safety;
e. Environmental.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Submit a method statement, together with all necessary shop drawings, for the
study mock-up for review and comment by the CM prior to its execution. The
method statement shall contain details on the manufacturing and transportation
of the volumetric precast concrete components as well as their construction
methodology, construction cycle, labour force required, major machineries and
plants to be employed, and detailed work program;
9. Construct the study mock-up in strict accordance with the commented shop
drawings and all methods of the study mock-up joint assembly are to faithfully
represent actual job conditions. Do not use special measures or techniques that
are not representative of those to be used on the building;
10. After the completion of the erection of the study mock-up, submit a report
detailing the following:
a. Assessment of the performance of the study mock-up and identification of
any deficiencies or defects, conflicts or interface with building services;
b. Proposed improvement measures, covering the design, manufacture,
transportation and erection aspects of the study mock-up;
c. Dimensional checking results;
d. Test results;
e. RSE's appraisal of the jointing system;
f. Digital photographs and video records of the erection procedures, in
particular the fixing of the jointing system, and any in-situ testing.
11. Bear all costs for any required laboratory and field tests, including any additional
fees, penalties or retest costs, and no extension of time will be allowed for any
delay related to ICU's approval.

1. Coordinate the study mock-up drawings in order to construct the mock-up
including adjacent interfacing elements, either in-situ or other precast
components;
2. Submit 2 sets of shop drawings of the study mock-up, which include plans,
elevations, sections and jointing details for review and comment by the CM prior
to its manufacturing;
3. Submit 2 sets of Coordinated Services Drawings (CSD) and/or Combined
Builders Work (CBW) Drawings of the study mock-up, demonstrating the
proper coordination of interfacing works of the building services installation, for
review and comment by the CM prior to its manufacturing.
CON8.D1170.9 CM'S COMMENT AND INSPECTION OF STUDY MOCK-UP

1. Do not commence the manufacturing and erection of the study mock-up until the
comments from CM on the submitted shop drawings and proposed method
statement had been received;
2. Alter or revise the study mock-up as directed upon CM's inspection.
CON8.D1180.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL

1. Submit one set of as-built drawings, including as-built CSD and/or CBW,
immediately upon completion of the study mock-up for Approval;
2. Incorporate and clearly shown on the as-built drawings any changes made to the
study mock-up or deviations from the previously commented shop drawings.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.D1190.9 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Submit a maintenance manual for the replaceable structural items of the volumetric
precast concrete components. This should be developed in parallel with the study
mock-up and should include, but not be limited to, the following information:
1. Name, address and telephone number of each firm and/or Sub-contractor
involved in the supply of materials, components and/or assemblies of the
replaceable structural items;
2. A clear and concise description of the method used to construct the concerned
3. Copies of certification and test reports of the material and/or component of the
4. A method statement covering the procedures for replacement of damaged or
otherwise defective materials or components of the structural items, and
materials and components that have a design life less than the design life of the
volumetric precast concrete components and will therefore require replacement
during the life of the volumetric precast concrete components;
5. Recommendations for routine maintenance, cleaning, suitable cleaning agents
and any special inspection method of the materials and/or components of the
6. A full set of Approved as-built drawings, described in CON8.D1180, with
particular emphasis on the details of the replaceable structural items;
7. The terms and conditions of any guarantees or warranties associated with the
installed materials or components of the replaceable structural items.
CON8.D1200.9 CM'S APPROVAL TO PROCEED

Obtain CM's Approval to proceed with the mass production of volumetric precast
concrete components.
CON8.D1210.9 VALIDATION OF DESIGN ON STUDY MOCK-UP

1. Conduct testing to the study mock-up in accordance with the relevant clauses of
Worksections CON4, CON7 and CON8, subject to CM's agreement;
2. All joints and permanent structural connections, as demonstrated on the study
mock-up which are designed to withstand any loadings, shall be tested in a
HOKLAS laboratory to demonstrate their effectiveness in the transfer of
loadings;
3. Carry out watertightness test to all external vertical and horizontal joints and
permanent structural connections, as demonstrated on the study mock-up, in
accordance with the procedures set out in CON8.T320;
4. Where a joint or permanent structural connection, as demonstrated on the study
mock-up, is designed in combination with joint sealing compound specified in
WAT5.M180, carry out the watertightness test prior to the application of the
sealing compound to test the watertightness of the joint or permanent structural
connection;
5. Conduct all necessary tests to the study mock-up in the presence of the CM or
his representatives.
CON8.D1310.9 CORE TEST TO STUDY MOCK-UP

1. Upon completion of grouting of joints and permanent structural connections,
with large box out, of the study mock-up, provide all necessary facilities and
attendance for concrete cores to be taken out from the grouted joints and
permanent structural connections;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Take 3 nos. 100 mm diameter cores from selected grouted joints or permanent
structural connections, as demonstrated on the study mock-up, to validate the
effectiveness of the proposed grouting procedure for the joints or permanent
structural connections;
3. In the event that any of the cores taken show any signs of irregularity or voids,
such core and grouting procedure are deemed to be unacceptable. Review and
revise the grouting procedures accordingly;
4. Replace and re-grout all such joints or permanent structural connections on the
study mock-up, at which the cores show signs of irregularity or voids, and repeat
the core test as described in sub-clause (2) above to the satisfaction of the CM;
5. Bear all costs of any further cores and no extension of time will be allowed.

VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE...... CON8 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
GENERAL
CON8.M010.9 RELEVANCE OF OTHER SPECIFICATION WORKSECTIONS
1. Construct volumetric precast concrete components in accordance with this
Worksection and the relevant provisions of the following Worksections:
a. CON1, In-situ Concrete;
b. CON2, Formwork;
e. CON6, Movement Joints;
f. CON7, Precast Concrete Components;
g. COM11, Radio Frequency Identification and Web-based Database System
2. Construct architectural, plumbing & drainage and structural works in accordance
with the Worksections listed in CON8.D030;
3. Construct building services installations in accordance with the Worksections
listed in CON8.D030;
and any clauses in any other Worksections of this specification, the provisions of
this Worksection shall prevail.
SUBMISSIONS
CON8.M110.9 CONCRETE MIX
As CON1.
CON8.M120.9 DETAILS OF WEATHERPROOFING

Within two months of the notified date for the commencement of Works, submit
details of weatherproofing materials in accordance with CON4.M310 and
CON4.M320 for Approval, including technical information, samples, test reports and
proven performance records of proposed materials.
CON8.M130.9 CONDUIT SYSTEM

Submit technical details and samples of the conduit system for Approval before
commencement of works.
CONCRETE
CON8.M210.9 CONCRETE MIX
The concrete mix shall satisfy the requirements of CON1.M810 - CON1.M850,
CON1.M1010 - CON1.M1040, CON1.M1110 - CON1.M1200, the functional and
durability requirements of the volumetric precast concrete components, and comply
with the relevant provisions of CON1.M730.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.M220.9 CONCRETE STRENGTH

Design the mix to have a sufficient compressive and tensile strength. The
compressive strength of the mix in load bearing components shall be compatible
with the strength of other adjacent load bearing components.
CON8.M230.9 DURABILITY
Use the appropriate concrete mix for volumetric precast concrete components which
is compatible with the defined exposure conditions of the internal and external faces
of the components.
CON8.M240.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT AND CONCRETE WITH NON-SHRINK

ADDITIVES
As CON4.M230 to CON4.M270.
JOINTS
CON8.M310.9 WEATHERPROOF JOINTS
As CON4.M310 to CON4.M340.
PERMANENT STRUCUTURAL CONNECTIONS

CON8.M410.9 RESISTANCE TO CORROSION
All metal parts of permanent structural connections must either be:
1. Corrosion resistant, being constructed of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel but
avoiding any contact of such materials with the reinforcement; or
2. Protected against corrosion by an Approved method.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
CON8.M510.9 GENERAL
Conduit systems incorporated into volumetric precast concrete components shall
comply in general with the requirements of clauses CON7.M110 to CON7.M430
inclusive.
DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

CON8.M610.9 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
1. Ensure that manufacture tolerances are met by checking the volumetric precast
concrete components using suitably designed jigs and gauges;
2. Provide a means of checking the jigs and gauges which cannot be damaged.
ON SITE DELIVERY VERIFICATION

CON8.M710.9 INSPECTION
1. Carry out the following verifications for volumetric precast concrete components
upon delivery on Site in the presence of the CM or his representatives:
a. Method:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Verification Items Method Acceptance Standards

Date of manufacture and Visual inspection, No anomalies, evidence of
unique reference number document check QA checks
against master
register
Required finishes (both Visual inspection Full compliance with
internal and external), Approved as-built drawings
provisions and fixtures for the study mock-up, no
damage, no substandard
repair
Sharp corners Visual inspection No damage, no substandard
repair
Embedded conduits Visual inspection Open ends properly
plugged; availability of
draw wire inside conduits,
correct brand name, size,
alignment and setting out as
per Approved as-built
drawings of the study
mock-up
Conduit boxes Visual inspection Properly sealed, no signs of
inflow of concrete
Socket / switch boxes Visual inspection No damage, correct brand
name and size as per
Approved as-built drawings
of the study mock-up
Starter bars Visual inspection Correct size and numbers as
per Approved as-built
drawings of the study
mock-up
b. Frequency:
Verification Items Sampling Representative
Frequency Consignment
Date of manufacture and 100% All volumetric precast
unique reference number concrete components
delivered to Site
Required finishes (both 100% All volumetric precast
internal and external), concrete components
provisions and fixtures delivered to Site
Sharp corners 100% All volumetric precast
concrete components
delivered to Site
Embedded conduits 100% All volumetric precast
concrete components
delivered to Site
Conduit boxes 100% All volumetric precast
concrete components
delivered to Site
Socket / switch boxes 100% All volumetric precast
concrete components
delivered to Site

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Starter bars 100% All volumetric precast
concrete components
delivered to Site
c. Keep proper record of inspections, together with photographs, for CM's
inspection at any time.
2. Non-compliance:
a. In case of non-compliance, identify clearly such volumetric precast concrete
components;
b. Repair such identified volumetric precast concrete components in
accordance with the Approved repair methods / procedures as per
CON8.W420.
CON8.M720.9 BREAKING-UP INSPECTION

1. When instructed, provide a sample of volumetric precast concrete components
randomly selected by the CM or his representatives upon delivery on Site, break
up the component, carry out the following verifications in the presence of the
CM or his representatives and remove the broken component after verification:
a. Method:
Verification Items Method Acceptance Standards
Reinforcement details Visual inspection Full compliance with
including total no. of Approved as-built drawings
bars and bar size for the study mock-up
Bar pattern of Visual inspection Compliance with Mill
reinforcement Certificate and the
requirements of purchaser
test in CS2:2012
Cover to reinforcement By measurement Full compliance with
Approved as-built drawings
Concrete strength Coring and Compressive strength in
compressive test compliance with required
concrete strength
Embedded conduit By measurement Full compliance with
cover and bends Approved as-built drawings
Sizes and routing of By measurement Full compliance with
embedded conduit Approved as-built drawings
Embedded conduits, Visual inspection Bearing the same marking,
accessories and brand name or standard as
adaptable boxes per Approved sample
Embedded conduits and Visual inspection Connections are properly
/ or connections with jointed in compliance with
accessories Approved sample
Conduits and Visual inspection Properly fixed to
accessories reinforcement in
compliance with Approved
sample

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Frequency:
Reinforcement details 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
including total no. of volumetric precast concrete components
bars and bar size concrete delivered to Site
components per
domestic block
Bar pattern of 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
reinforcement volumetric precast concrete components
concrete delivered to Site
components per
domestic block
Cover to reinforcement 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
volumetric precast concrete components
components per
domestic block
Concrete strength 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
volumetric precast concrete components
components per
domestic block
Embedded conduit 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
cover and bends volumetric precast concrete components
components per
domestic block
Sizes and routing of 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
embedded conduit volumetric precast concrete components
components per
domestic block
Embedded conduits, 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
accessories and volumetric precast concrete components
adaptable boxes concrete delivered to Site
components per
domestic block
Embedded conduits and 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
/ or connections with volumetric precast concrete components
accessories concrete delivered to Site
components per
domestic block
Conduits and 1 no. per type of All volumetric precast
accessories volumetric precast concrete components
components per
domestic block
2. Non-compliance:
a. In the event of samples failing to meet any of the requirements given above:
i. Remove the broken volumetric precast concrete components off site;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ii. Take further volumetric precast concrete components as sample for re-
test progressively according to the formula n² - 2n + 3 where n = total
number of unsuccessful volumetric precast concrete components and the
maximum value of n is limited to 3; until all samples satisfy the
requirements as above;
iii. In the event that n = 3 and not all samples satisfy the above requirements,
all volumetric precast concrete components of the same type cast on the
same date as per those samples that failed the breaking-up inspection
shall be condemned and removed off site.
b. Bear all associated costs of any further breaking-up inspections that are
instructed by the CM and no extension of time will be allowed.

VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE...... CON8 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
CON8.W010.9 OFF SITE CASTING YARD
Unless otherwise specified in this Worksection, comply with the requirements of
CON7.W010 to CON7.W090 pertaining to off-site casting.
CON8.W020.9 ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

Comply with the relevant requirements of architectural works as given in the
Worksections in CON8.D030 unless specified otherwise in this Worksection.
CON8.W030.9 BUILDING SERVICES INSTALLATION

Comply with the relevant requirements of building services installation as given in
the Worksections listed in CON8.D030.
CON8.W040.9 QUALIFIED SUPERVISION FOR VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS
1. For production of volumetric precast concrete components, assign a Precast
Quality Control Co-ordinator (PQCC), with a minimum qualification and
experience of a Grade T3 TCP under the Registered Contractor's stream in the
CoPSS, to provide full time supervision at the casting yard;
2. Submit the details of the PQCC for Approval;
3. It is permissible for the PQCC assigned under sub-clause (1) above to be the
same person assigned as the PQCC under CON5.W040 or CON7.W050
provided that the qualification and experience of the PQCC assigned under
CON5.W040 or CON7.W050 can satisfy the qualification and experience
stipulated in the sub-clause (1) above;
4. For off site casting, subject to CM’s approval, the PQCC assigned under sub-
clause (1) above may supervise the production of volumetric precast concrete
components for more than one HA Contract of the same Contractor at the same
casting yard.
SUBMISSIONS
CON8.W110.9 MOULDS
1. Submit for CM's approval details of the mould for volumetric precast concrete
construction showing its support and design to fulfil the functional requirements.
Comply with the provisions given in CON7.W210;
2. Obtain CM's approval before casting any components.
CON8.W120.9 METHOD STATEMENT

Submit a method statement, covering the following, for CM's approval:
1. Mould set up, inspection, approved mix, demoulding, curing, finishing and
lifting;
2. Method of fixing window frames or windows, in accordance with CON7.W840,
before casting of the volumetric precast concrete components commences;
3. Repair methods / procedures to typical defective components likely to be
encountered;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Method to rectify starter bars which are out of position but within tolerances;
5. Details of the proposed means of support and storage of volumetric precast
concrete components in the casting yard;
6. A layout of the storage yard which allows any components to be removed
without disturbing other components on demand and minimises the need to
sequence stacking and removal;
7. Erection of volumetric precast concrete components at their final locations in the
structure;
8. The proposed Radio Frequency Identification tag and the associated fixing
method as stipulated in Worksection COM11.
CON8.W130.9 CONDUIT SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS

Prepare shop drawings, coordinate and agree on the interfacing and connection
method with the Nominated Sub-contractor for electrical installation before
submitting shop drawings for Approval.
CON8.W140.9 PROGRAMMES
Within one month after the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit,
for Approval, the following:
1. Programme for manufacturing volumetric precast concrete components showing
the rate of manufacture for each month and the dates for clearing the area of
casting yard and associated plant upon completion of the manufacture of the
components;
2. Programme for the erection of the volumetric precast concrete components
showing the rate of erection for each month. Make due allowance for all
restrictions on the age of concrete in the volumetric precast concrete components
for handling, storage, transportation and erection.
CON8.W150.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEME FOR MANUFACTURE OF

VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
details of the Quality Assurance Scheme for manufacturing the volumetric precast
concrete components, in accordance with CON7.W040 to CON7.W060 as
applicable, for Approval.
CON8.W160.9 QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES FOR ERECTING VOLUMETRIC

PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS
Within three months after the notified date for commencement of the Works, submit
for Approval, details of erection of the volumetric precast concrete components
under Approved quality control procedures covering the following:
1. Protective measures to avoid cracking and chipping;
2. Checking the accuracy of the insitu structural members receiving the volumetric
precast concrete components, including location and level of all bearing surfaces,
joints, bolts, horizontal and vertical restraining devices and adjustment devices.
Carry out checking by means of a template or measurement frame or a similar
Approved method;
3. Checking of erection tolerances;
4. Provision and removal of temporary works;
5. Procedure for grouting of permanent structural connections with details to
prevent air lock.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MOULD ASSEMBLY
CON8.W210.9 TOLERANCE
Ensure that the mould is capable of manufacturing a component that, after erection,
will be within the overall tolerances and manufacture tolerances for volumetric
precast concrete components.
CON8.W220.9 GROUT SEALS

Ensure that:
1. The mould has grout seals appropriate to avoid leakage, or
2. If the concrete is to be vibrated, the seal design is appropriate to the means of
filling and vibration.
CON8.W230.9 GAUGES
Provide details of gauges and fittings to check the correct set up of the mould before
casting.
CON8.W240.9 FITTINGS
Ensure that the means of securing fittings to the mould is robust, suitable for
repeated use, and will result in achieving the required tolerances without damage to
the component.
CON8.W250.9 EXTERNAL FACES

Ensure that any concrete surfaces that will be external to the structure have, after
casting, no metal fixings exposed and any holes have been filled.

Replace any part of the mould system that fails to manufacture volumetric precast
concrete components within the permitted tolerance limits.

Apply mould release agent, in accordance with CON2.M210, to the surfaces of
moulds either by brush or by spraying before the fixing of steel reinforcement at a
rate in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
MANUFACTURING OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST

CONCRETE COMPONENTS
CON8.W310.9 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified in this Worksection, comply with the provisions for
manufacturing volumetric precast concrete components as given in Worksection
CON7.
CON8.W320.9 CONCRETE MIX

1. Provide concrete in quantities such that casting is continuous using the
Approved mix and method statement;
2. Arrange back up supplies for large volumetric precast concrete components if
breaks in main supply are possible.

As CON1.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.W340.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

Demonstrate, for CM's approval, that if the volumetric precast concrete components
have construction joints within it, the detail and form of those joints will satisfy the
requirements for the finishes requirement.


1. Ensure that the total chloride content of the concrete mix for volumetric precast
concrete components, subject to heat curing, is less than 0.1% by weight of that
of the cement;
2. Carry out a trial to demonstrate the adequacy of the proposed method to the
CON8.W370.9 DEMOULDING AND STRIPPING MOULDS

Demould by means of an Approved method:
1. Do not use crowbars;
2. Do not subject the mould to any form of impact;
3. Fully, or partially, strip moulds when the concrete has gained sufficient strength,
measured on specimens kept with the mould after casting;
4. Prove the stripping strength by test as given in CON8.W380 and check against
the method statement.

1. Demould the volumetric precast concrete components only after concrete has
achieved the required strength;
2. To determine if the concrete has achieved the strength required for demoulding
or handling:
used for casting the volumetric precast concrete components and cure the
concrete cubes under the same conditions as the concrete in the volumetric
precast concrete components;
c. Determine the concrete cube strength by compression test as CON7.T110
and satisfy the CM that the concrete cubes have acquired the required
strength before the demoulding or handling the volumetric precast concrete
components.

1. Mark all volumetric precast concrete components with date of manufacture and a
unique reference number;
locations of all volumetric precast concrete components;
3. Where required by the CM, each of the volumetric precast concrete components
is to be delivered to Site with an appropriate QA certificate endorsed by the
Quality Control Engineer;
4. Update the records stipulated in above sub-clause (2) above for all volumetric
precast concrete units to the RFID Web-Based Database System.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

embedded metal works, building services installations or any other items etc. before
casting the volumetric precast concrete components.
CON8.W410.9 SCOPE OF MINOR REPAIR

1. Use suitable filler to fill blow holes, small voids and repair non structural
damage in accordance with the Approved procedures as given in the method
statement required under CON8.W120;
2. Test those procedures and, if required by the CM, demonstrate the procedures on
the study mock-up.
CON8.W420.9 DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS

1. Any volumetric precast concrete components that falls outside the manufacture
tolerance is considered defective and must be rejected. Apply indelible mark on
rejected units for identification purposes;
2. For other defects, including but not limited to minor chipping, damage to
finishes or exposed conduits, etc., quarantine for inspection in accordance with
the Approved QA scheme within the casting yard. Agree with the CM special
repair methods or rejection of any defective volumetric precast concrete
components that cannot be repaired and finished by the Approved repair
methods / procedures as required under CON8.W120;
3. In the event of the CM agreeing to accept any quarantined volumetric precast
concrete components, execute all necessary remedial and modification work to
CM's satisfaction.
CON8.W430.9 CLEANING
1. Ensure that all fittings that will be used to make connections in-situ are cleaned
and checked prior to delivery of the volumetric precast concrete components to
Site;
2. Ensure that all internal surfaces of the volumetric precast concrete components
are cleaned to the standard agreed with the CM before the components are
delivered to Site.
CON8.W440.9 PROTECTION
Protect volumetric precast concrete components to ensure that no damage is done
during and after storage, lifting, transportation or erection.
CON8.W450.9 LIFTING
1. Lift volumetric precast concrete components only when the concrete has
achieved the required lifting strength, measured on specimens kept with the
volumetric precast concrete components in accordance with the Approved
method statement required under CON8.D940 and CON8.W380;
2. Lift volumetric precast concrete components within the yard by means of a
lifting system designed in accordance with CON8.D810 to CON8.D830;
3. Ensure that lifting plant and equipment complies with the requirements of
CON7.W540.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON8.W460.9 SIZE AND WEIGHT OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS FOR TRANSPORTATION AND CRANEAGE
1. Indicate, in the method statement required under CON8.D940, the maximum
projected horizontal and vertical dimensions of the component, including any
protection, packing or protruding steel, beyond transportation vehicles, to ensure
compliance with the limitations stipulated by local legislation;
2. Indicate, in the method statement required under CON8.D940, the maximum
weight of the component including the weight of any props, supporting frame,
protection or packing. Make clear any lifting or other components that are not
included in this value. This weight shall not be exceeded;
3. Weigh each type of volumetric precast concrete components prototype
component and any subsequent components as required by the CM.
CON8.W470.9 TEMPORARY STORAGE SUPPORT

1. Provide temporary support for storage of volumetric precast concrete
components that does not place excessive bearing, compressive, tensile or
flexural stresses on the component or cause spalling, cracking or unintended
deformations;
2. Provide calculations to demonstrate that the likely deformation of volumetric
precast concrete components, temporarily supported in the storage yard, is not
detrimental to the manufacture tolerances, and, after erection, to the overall
tolerance;
3. Ensure that stacking of volumetric precast concrete components does not
generate unintended bearing, compressive, tensile or flexural stresses on the
component or cause spalling, cracking or unintended deformations;
4. Store volumetric precast concrete components in the vertical plane on a levelled,
well-drained and maintained concrete surface and protect against staining or
physical damage.
CON8.W480.9 TRANSPORTATION
1. Provide a transportation system, complying with CON7.W510 to CON7.W560,
such that damage to the component is prevented preferably without reliance on
any protection cover;
2. Maintain lorries or wagons used for the transportation of the volumetric precast
concrete components in a good condition. Ensure wagons are equipped with
suspension systems to minimize shock loading;
3. Ensure all lifting of volumetric precast concrete components during
transportation, including loading and unloading from lorries or wagons, comply
with the lifting method as per CON8.W450.
ERECTING VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS
Provide, at the end of each week during erection of the volumetric precast concrete
components, records in a form to be agreed with the CM, showing:
1. Delivery and installation dates, and the locations of joints and permanent
structural connections completed on a location plan for each floor;
2. Dates of removal and locations of any props and temporary supports to the
volumetric precast concrete components.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

Allow and facilitate inspection of the volumetric precast concrete components at any
time before and after erection.

1. Prove, by demonstration, that the lifting method is capable of meeting the design
requirements given in CON8.D810 to CON8.D830;
2. Lift the volumetric precast concrete components using the lifting system
complying with CON8.W450;
volumetric precast concrete components in a vertical direction. Provide the
cables with devices for the adjustment of their length;
fixing the volumetric precast concrete components to the main structure.

Repair or replace as agreed with the CM any volumetric precast concrete
components which have been damaged on transportation, lifting or erection in
accordance with the Approved repair methods / procedures as required under
CON8.W120.
JOINTS AND PERMANENT STRUCTURAL

CONNECTIONS
CON8.W610.9 GENERAL
Prepare and construct joints strictly in accordance with the Approved drawing details
and in accordance with the relevant manufacturer's recommendations so as to
provide continuous weathertightness of buildings and give a neat, uniform and
smooth appearance.
CON8.W620.9 GROUTING OF PERMANENT STRUCTURAL CONNECTION

Clean the connection by methods approved by the CM before the grout is placed.
Take measures to prevent the accumulation of dirt and other material at the
connection and the presence of air lock.
CON8.W630.9 JOINT WIDTH

Unless otherwise Approved, the installed joint width must not be less than 6 mm nor
greater than 30 mm.
CONDUIT SYSTEM
CON8.W710.9 APPLICATION
Supply and install concealed rigid plain PVC conduit system complete with steel
draw wires for volumetric precast concrete components as shown on Drawings.
CON8.W720.9 COMPLETION CERTIFICATION

Comply with CON7.W1010.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CONDUIT AND WIRING INSTALLATION

As CON7.W990.

As CON7.W1000.
PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP
CON8.W910.9 PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP
1. Erect a prototype mock-up on Site, in full accordance with the Approved as-built
drawings of the study mock-up;
2. If proposed by the Contractor and approved by the CM, the prototype mock-up
can be part of the permanent works;
3. Obtain Approval from the CM upon inspection of the completed prototype
mock-up to set the standard and quality of workmanship necessary for all
volumetric precast concrete components;
4. Do not alter, move, or destroy the Approved prototype mock-up unless permitted
by the CM.
CON8.W920.9 REMOVAL OF PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP

Subject to CM's approval, remove the prototype mock-up as well as the surrounding
structural frames upon completion of erection of all the volumetric precast concrete
components.
CON8.W930.9 VERIFICATION OF PROTOTYPE MOCK-UP

1. Carry out watertightness tests on the jointing system of the full size prototype
mock-up specified in CON8.W910 in accordance with the procedures set out in
CON8.T320;
full size prototype mock-up all to the requirements specified in COM2.T210;
3. Conduct tests to finishes in accordance with the relevant clauses in Worksections
FIN1 to FIN7 as referred to in CON8.D030.

VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE...... CON8 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
SAMPLING AND TESTING

CON8.T010.9 RECORDS
CM;
test.

Assurance Scheme:
1. Make monthly records of sampling and testing available for inspection by the
CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory.

1. Schmidt hammer tests and cover meter tests on the construction quality of
precast concrete components;

witness of the CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer’s factory
unless otherwise instructed by the CM;
resident at manufacturer’s factory in batches;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
representatives resident at manufacturer’s factory immediately without any delay;
manufacturer’s factory for endorsement.
CON8.T040.9 FULL SCALE MOCK UP FOR VPB AND VPK

1. Where required by the CM, design and provide full scale mock up as detailed in
the Project Specific Specification to demonstrate that the volumetric precast
bathroom (VPB) and volumetric precast bathroom (VPK) components, the
installation of the VPB and VPK, and the workmanship of jointing are adequate,
all to the satisfaction of the CM;
2. If agreed by the CM, the requirements of this full scale mock up shall be
provided and demonstrated by the study mock-up as stipulated under
CON8.D1110 to CON8.D1310.
As CON1.T510.

As CON1.T520.

CONCRETE CUBES
As CON1.T610.

As CON1.T620.

As CON1.T630.

As CON1.T640.

CONCRETE MIXES
As CON1.T650.

As CON1.T660.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

As CON1.T670.
MIX TESTS
CON8.T110.9 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified in this Worksection, comply with the requirements for
trial concrete mixes and associated tests of both concrete and grout as given in
Worksections CON1, CON4 and CON7.

hammer test on the volumetric precast concrete components by the CM or his
representatives resident at manufacturer’s factory when the concreting age of the
volumetric precast concrete components is at least 3 days;
TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ON EARLY

CORES FOR VPB, VPK, VOLUMETRIC PRECAST
LIFT SHAFT AND VOLUMETRIC PRECAST LIFT
MACHINE ROOM COMPONENTS
CON8.T130.9 GENERAL
particular batch of volumetric precast bathroom (VPB), volumetric precast
kitchen (VPK), volumetric precast lift shaft and volumetric precast lift machine
room components in order not to affect the construction work on Site. In such
case, carry out core test in accordance with the procedures set out in CON1.T710
to CON1.T760 to prove the compliance of that particular batch of VPB, VPK,
volumetric precast lift shaft and volumetric precast lift machine room
components to compressive test on cores as stipulated in this Specification.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
saturated density.

Testing samples:
samples by the DTC from each of the following volumetric precast components
of the same concreting day, at locations decided by the CM:
a. Volumetric precast bathroom (VPB) including Combined VPB components;
b. Volumetric precast kitchen (VPK) including Combined VPK and Combined
VPB and VPK components;
c. Volumetric precast lift shaft components;
d. Volumetric precast lift machine room.
2. Size of core sample:
a. 75 mm diameter core samples;
b. For vertically casted VPB, VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and volumetric
precast lift machine room components, the length of core samples shall be at
least 90 mm;
c. For horizontally casted VPB, VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and
volumetric precast lift machine room components, the length of core
samples shall be at least 90 mm, plus top 50 mm or 20% of depth of
concrete being cored whichever is greater.

CON8.T170.9 ASSESSING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ON EARLY CORES

In assessing the results of compressive strength on early cores, the volumetric precast
bathroom (VPB), volumetric precast kitchen (VPK), volumetric precast lift shaft and
volumetric precast lift machine room components of the same concreting day
represented by the early cores are deemed to comply with this Specification if the
strength of the early core, when adjusted for length / diameter ratio and converted to
estimated insitu cube strength in accordance with CS1:2010, is:

STRENGTH OF CONCRETE CORES FOR VPB, VPK, VOLUMETRIC
PRECAST LIFT SHAFT AND VOLUMETRIC PRECAST LIFT MACHINE
ROOM COMPONENTS
1. For volumetric precast bathroom (VPB), volumetric precast kitchen (VPK),
volumetric precast lift shaft and volumetric precast lift machine room
components of the same concreting day represented by the early cores that the
compressive strength of the early cores comply with CON8.T170, their core test
results are deemed to be acceptable under this Specification, and further coring
test at 28 days is not necessary unless compressive strength test of concrete cube
of the same batch of concrete not comply with CON8.T062 or instructed
otherwise by the CM;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. For VPB, VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and volumetric precast lift machine
room components of the same concreting day represented by the early cores that
the compressive strength of the early cores do not comply with CON8.T170:
a. if the concreting ages of the VPB, VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and
volumetric precast lift machine room components are less than 28 days,
carry out further early core tests by DTC. If the result of the further early
core test does not comply with CON8.T170, the VPB, VPK, volumetric
precast lift shaft and volumetric precast lift machine room components are
not allowed to be lifted into place or installed on Site, and further early core
test may be carried out in accordance with this sub-clause;
b. if the concreting ages of the VPB, VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and
volumetric precast lift machine room components are 28 days or over, carry
out further core test by DTC in accordance with CON1.T710 to CON1.T760.
If the result of this further core test does not comply with CON1.T760, the
VPB. VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and volumetric precast lift machine
room components are not allowed to be lifted into place or installed on Site.
All relevant concrete of the VPB, VPK, volumetric precast lift shaft and
volumetric precast lift machine room components represented by this further
core test in the same concreting day is deemed not complying with this
Specification. Investigate the extent of non-compliance and re-execute the
works in accordance with CON1.T1210 to CON1.T1260.

As CON1.T770.
CON8.T195.9 TESTING ON NON-SHRINK GROUT

As CON4.T070.

As CON4.T080.
TESTING FIXINGS
CON8.T210.9 TENSILE AND SHEAR TESTING
As CON4.T110 and CON4.T120.
SITE WATERTIGHTNESS TESTS TO EXTERNAL

FACES ELEMENT OF VOLUMETRIC PRECAST
CONCRETE COMPONENTS
Carry out watertightness tests to the jointing system of the external faces of the
properly installed volumetric precast concrete components at the rate of 100% of
each particular type in accordance with the procedures set out in CON8.T320.

Test joints on each selected external face of volumetric precast concrete components
according to the procedures as follows:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Working from the exterior, wet the external face of the volumetric precast
concrete components selectively, starting from the lowest horizontal joint,
followed by the vertical joints and then the horizontal joint above;
240 kPa at the nozzle inlet to the joint and perpendicular to the external face of
the volumetric precast concrete components. Move the nozzle slowly along the
joint, at a distance of 300 mm from it, for a period of 5 minutes in every 1.5
metre of joint length while an observer carefully inspects on the interior side of
the external face of the volumetric precast concrete components with the
assistance of adequate lighting where necessary;


The volumetric precast concrete components and joints are deemed to have failed if
signs of water seeping through the joints or through the external face of the
volumetric precast concrete components, including signs of damp patches, are
observed during the test and within the subsequent 2 hours after the test.
CON8.T350.9 REMEDIAL WORK TO VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS FOR RE-TEST
Carry out remedial work to volumetric precast concrete components and joints which
fail in the watertightness test. Methods of carrying out the remedial work are subject
to Approval. After the remedial work is completed, re-test the external face of the
volumetric precast concrete components and joints as CON8.T320 until all specified
criteria have been satisfied.
SITE TESTING OF JOINTS AND PERMANENT

STRUCTURAL CONNECTIONS
CON8.T410.9 SITE TESTING OF JOINTS AND PERMANENT STRUCTURAL
CONNECTIONS
1. When instructed, carry out the following tests on Site in the presence of the CM
or his representatives:
a. Prior to grouting the joints or permanent structural connections:
i. Check integrity of welds of any structural steelworks, for connection
purpose, present at the permanent structural connections in accordance
with STR1.T120, as appropriate, against the acceptance criteria as
stipulated in STR1.T130.
b. Upon completion of grouting:
i. Check location and cover of rebars, with the use of Approved steel
reinforcement detector or cover meter, against Approved drawings.
2. Non-compliance:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. In the event that any test result on a weld does not comply with the
acceptance criteria, conduct further weld test in accordance with
STR1.T120 (5);
b. Cut out and repair all defective welds in accordance with STR1.T140 and re-
test the welds in accordance with STR1.T120;
c. Bear all costs of any further tests and no extension of time will be allowed.
LIFTING ANCHOR
manufacturer.

capacity.

for testing by DTC.

issued by:
FACTORY VERIFICATION TESTS

CON8.T610.9 WATER FLOOD TEST TO INTERNAL INSTALLATIONS
1. Testing Arrangements:
a. Carry out water flood test on the completed internal waterproofed
volumetric precast bathroom (VPB) components at a rate of 1 to 25 numbers
at the manufacturer’s factory;
b. Place the VPB component on an elevated temporary support platform and
connect the floor drains where necessary for carrying out water flood test;
c. Submit three copies of the test reports, or other number of copies as required
by the CM for the water flood tests for record.
2. Testing Methods:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Seal all outlets and do not permit any debris to enter into the drainage
pipeworks;
b. Carefully flood the internal floor of the VPB component to levels agreed
with the CM or his representatives resident at manufacturer's factory,
generally no less than 50 mm, but in no case higher than the curb levels and
maintain for 24 hours;
c. Mark the top water level at clearly visible locations and regularly inspect for
leaks;
d. Carry out joint inspections with the CM or his representatives resident at
manufacturer's factory at the external side of the walls and at the underside
of the floor slab to check that there is no water leakage, water seepage or
visible damp patch within half an hour after the flooding has maintained for
24 hours;
e. If required by the CM, provide records in the form of photos or video clips
to prove that the inspected surfaces are free from water leakage, water
seepage or visible damp patch;
f. Subject to CM’s approval, in case the test results cannot be verified due to
wet weather, record such condition in the test report and the whole batch of
VPB components can be exempted from this test.
3. Non-compliance:
a. In the event that any VPB component fails to meet the requirement
stipulated in sub-clause (2)(d) above:
i. Carry out re-test to the non-complying VPB component, after repaired
according to the Approved remedial works, and until the criteria
stipulated in sub-clause (2)(d) above are complied with;
ii. Carry out further water flood tests to the batch of VPB components
represented by the non-complying VPB component according to the
following formula:
Nos. of further water flood tests = (n²-2n+3)
Where n is equal to the total number of the failed water flood tests
progressively until all the water flood tests complied with the criteria
specified;
iii. Bear all associated costs and expenses incurred for the re-tests and
further tests. No extension of time will be allowed.

OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR...... CON9 > GENERAL
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON9 OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING

BAR PREFABRICATION YARD
GENERAL
SCOPE AND TYPES

CON9.G005.9 APPLICATION
1. Subject to any exclusions specified in sub-clause (3) of CON9.G010,
prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products supplied by a Type 1 Yard as defined
in CON9.G020 may be used for any part or parts of the Works. The Contractor
shall not use prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products supplied by yards other
than a Type 1 Yard for any parts of the Works;
2. Notwithstanding sub-clause (1) above, in the event that special circumstance
arises which renders the Contractor unable to comply with the requirement under
sub-clause (1) above, the Contractor shall submit an alternative proposal on the
use of prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products with justification to the CM
for approval. The CM may at his sole discretion approve or reject such
alternative proposal. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of
time, additional payment or compensation arising out of or in connection with
his inability for whatsoever reason to comply with the requirement under sub-
clause (1) above or arising out of or in connection with the execution of the
Contractor’s alternative proposal.
CON9.G010.9 SCOPE OF OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR PREFABRICATION

YARD
1. Worksection CON9 applies where off-site steel reinforcing bar prefabrication
yard (OSRPY) is adopted;
2. The scope of OSRPY in this Worksection covers the following:
a. Storage of steel reinforcing bar, where steel reinforcing bar is defined in
Clause 1.2.18 of CS2:2012;
b. Cutting and bending of steel reinforcing bar;
c. Fabrication of reinforcement cage; and
d. Threading of steel reinforcing bar for coupling with reinforcement
connectors.
3. This Worksection is not applicable to the prefabrication of the following:
a. Precast concrete component produced outside the Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region; and
b. All fabric reinforcement.
CON9.G020.A TYPES OF OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR PREFABRICATION

YARD
The OSRPY shall be one of the following:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. An OSRPY on the “List of Approved Steel Reinforcing Bar Prefabrication

Yards” (the “List”), referred to as “Type 1 Yard”. The List has been set up and
maintained by the Civil Engineering and Development Department (CEDD) in
accordance with the Development Bureau Technical Circular (Works) No.
10/2018. All prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products supplied from a Type 1
Yard shall be tested and fabricated under the supervision by CEDD prior to
delivery;
2. An OSRPY not on the List which includes:
a. An OSRPY at the Contractor’s workshop and run by the Contractor, referred
to as “Type 2 Yard”;
b. An OSRPY other than the types in sub-clauses (1) and 2(a) above referred to
as “Type 3 Yard”.
SUBMISSION
CON9.G110.9 GENERAL
1. For Type 1 Yard, submit the following within one month from the notified date
for commencement of the Works for CM’s information:
a. The name, address with street map of the OSRPY;
b. Details of the organisation structure of the OSRPY, including the
management and supervision teams;
c. Self-certified true copy of the valid registration document under the List as
stated in CON9.G020 (1);
d. Monthly production capacity of the OSRPY in terms of tonnage and the
current workload;
e. Where carrying out of the fabrication of reinforcement cage or threading for
steel reinforcing bar using reinforcement connector is involved, records
showing separate approval from the Government has been obtained for such
fabrication process to be carried out at this prefabrication yard; and
f. The storage and traceability system of steel reinforcing bar products within
the Site for identifying the steel reinforcing bar and the prefabricated steel
reinforcing bar products produced by this prefabrication yard and other steel
reinforcing bar for on-site cutting and bending or for fabrication of
reinforcement cage or threading for steel reinforcing bar using reinforcement
connector for on-site installation. Approval from the CM shall be obtained
for such storage and traceability system prior to the delivery of prefabricated
products to the Site.
2. For Type 2 Yard, submit the following within one month from the notified date
for commencement of the Works for CM’s approval:
a. The address with street map of the OSRPY and details of the quality
management system as stipulated in CON9.G120;
b. A scaled and dimensioned layout plan of the OSRPY with fenced
boundaries showing locations of entrances, exits, designated storage areas
for incoming steel reinforcing bar, and prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products, and areas for prefabrication;
c. Details of the security and traceability requirements as stated in CON9.G310
and CON9.G320 respectively.
3. For. Type 3 Yard, submit the following within one month from the notified date
for commencement of the Works for CM’s approval:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. The name, address with street maps, organisation structure, and job
reference of the OSRPY and details of the quality management system as
stipulated in CON9.G120;
b. A scaled and dimensioned layout plan of the OSRPY with fenced
boundaries showing locations of entrances, exits, designated storage areas
for incoming steel reinforcing bar and prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products, and areas for prefabrication;
c. Details of the security and traceability requirement as stated in CON9.G310
and CON9.G320 respectively.
CON9.G120.9 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

1. The Type 3 Yard shall be certified to the requirements of ISO 9001 and ISO
14001 by a relevant certification body accredited by the Hong Kong
Accreditation Service (HKAS) or an accreditation body which has entered into
mutual recognition agreement with HKAS for key operations of the yard with a
scope relating but not limited to storage, handling, fabrication, sampling, testing
and supply of prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products in accordance with the
requirements stipulated in the CS2:2012, BS4449:2005+A2:2009, BS4482:2005,
BS 8666:2005, etc. where appropriate;
2. Both the Type 2 and Type 3 Yards, shall establish, document and maintain a
quality management system complying with the relevant provisions of
Worksection CON3.
TYPE 1 YARD
CON9.G210.9 SURVEILLANCE AUDIT / INSPECTION
The CM or his representatives shall be allowed to enter the OSRPY to carry out
surveillance audit / inspection at any time without advance notice. They shall be
allowed to:
1. Check and make copy, if necessary, of all quality control records, test reports
and certificates associated with the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products
of the Contract, which have been or will be delivered to the Site;
2. Inspect and take photo of, if necessary, all the steel reinforcing bars and
prefabrication steel reinforcing bar products of the Contract at the designated
storage area and the prefabrication lines.
CON9.G220.9 TRACEABILITY
When the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products are delivered to Site, they shall
be affixed firmly with traceability tags which shall include, but not be limited to, the
information such as contract title, contract number, delivery note number / stockist
certificate number, test report number, bending schedule number, bar marks, shape,
bar size quantity and fabrication date.
CON9.G230.9 PREFABRICATED STEEL REINFORCING BAR PRODUCTS SUMMARY

REPORT
Submit a summary report on the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products monthly
or at an interval agreed by the CM. The report shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
1. Quantities of each size of each type of prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products delivered to the Site but not yet installed at the beginning of the
reporting period;
products delivered to the Site within the reporting period;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Tentative quantities of each size of each type of prefabricated steel reinforcing

bar products planned to be delivered to the Site in the next reporting period;
4. Accumulated quantities of each size of each type of prefabricated steel
reinforcing bar products delivered to the Site since the notified date for
commencement of the Works;
5. Bending schedule of each size of each type of prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products delivered to the Site within the reporting period with details of bar
marks, bar types, bar size, quantities, dimensions, bending shape codes and
weights;
6. Copy of mill certificates issued by the stockist suppliers and the test report
issued by the Direct Testing Contractor (DTC) and / or Housing Department’s
Materials Testing Laboratory (HDMTL) and / or CEDD’s Public Works
Laboratories showing that the test results of the prefabricated steel reinforcing
bar products delivered to the Site within the reporting period meet the
requirements of CS2:2012 or BS4449:2005+A2:2009 as appropriate.
CON9.G240.9 OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR PREFABRICATION YARD

REMOVED FROM THE LIST
All prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products produced by the Type 1 Yard and
delivered to the Site shall be attached with a certificate issued by the OSRPY
confirming that all the products are fabricated under a valid registration of the List.
In the event that the OSRPY is removed from the List, all of the OSRPY’s products,
fabricated on and after the removal date, whether or not delivered to the Site shall
not be used. Bear all time and cost for, including but not be limited to, the removal
of non-conforming prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products delivered on Site,
dismantling the non-conforming prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products that
were installed, reinstating and making good all damages to the Works arising out of
or in connection with the removal of the OSRPY from the List and no extension of
time or monetary claims will be entertained under the Contract.
TYPE 2 AND TYPE 3 YARDS

CON9.G310.9 REQUIREMENTS ON SECURITY PROCEDURE
1. The CM and his representatives shall be allowed to enter the OSRPY to carry
out inspection at any time without advance notice. They shall be allowed to:
(a) Check and make copy, if necessary, of all quality control records, test
reports and certificates associated with the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products of the Contract, which have been or will be delivered to the Site;
(b) Inspect and take photo of, if necessary, all the steel reinforcing bars and
prefabrication steel reinforcing bar products of the Contract at the designated
storage area and the prefabrication lines.
2. At least two closed circuit television (CCTV) cameras shall be provided at
opposite corner of the designated storage area to monitor and video record all of
the steel reinforcing bar stored at the designed storage area at all times subject to
CM’s satisfaction that the Contractor’s proposed number and / or position of the
cameras(s) can have clear and full view of the designed storage area. The CCTV
cameras shall also be positioned in such a way that they can record the arrival
and departure of the steel reinforcing bar to and from the designated storage area.
Sign(s) shall be put up indicating the steel reinforcing bar is to be used for HA’s
contracts with the contract information, i.e. contract title, contract number,
contractor’s name, etc., of each contract clearly shown to the CCTV for ease of
identification and monitoring;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. The internal transportation of the steel reinforcing bar between designated

storage area and prefabrication lines shall be monitored by CCTV camera(s) at
all times. If this cannot be achieved throughout the whole route, then the
movement of the steel reinforcing bar shall be monitored and recorded by a car
video recorder or an equivalent equipment at all times during the transportation.
Sign(s) shall be put up on top of the steel reinforcing bar or attached at suitable
location of the steel reinforcing bar with the contract information, i.e. contract
title, contract number, contractor’s name, etc., and clearly shown to the CCTV or
equivalent equipment for ease of identification and monitoring during the
transportation process;
4. The steel reinforcing bar at the prefabrication lines shall be monitored by CCTV
camera(s) or equivalent equipment at all times. The video recording at the
prefabrication lines shall include the recording of the arrival of the steel
reinforcing bar from the designated storage area, the prefabrication process at the
prefabrication lines, and the departure of the steel reinforcing bar and
prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products from the prefabrication lines. Sign(s)
shall be put up on top or attached at suitable location of the steel reinforcing bar
and / or the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products with the contract
information, i.e. contract title, contract number, contractor’s name, etc., and
clearly shown to the CCTV or equivalent equipment for ease of identification
and monitoring during the transportation and prefabrication process;
5. The prefabrication of the steel reinforcing bar shall be executed in a designated
time slot. No prefabrication of reinforcement of other non-HA contract(s) shall
be carried out in this designated time slot and in this prefabrication lines to avoid
the mixing up of the steel reinforcing bar. A schedule showing the designated
time slot for the prefabrication of the steel reinforcing bar shall be submitted to
the CM one month prior to the commencement of prefabrication of the steel
reinforcing bar or at a time interval agreed by the CM. Any revised schedule(s)
shall be submitted to the CM at least one week or at a time interval agreed by the
CM prior to the prefabrication of the steel reinforcing bar;
6. The external transportation of the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products
from the OSRPY to the Site shall be monitored and recorded by a car video
recorder or an equivalent equipment at all times during the transportation.
Sign(s) shall be put up on top or attached at suitable location of the prefabricated
steel reinforcing bar products with the contract information, i.e. contract title,
contract number, contractor’s name, etc., and clearly shown to the car video
recorder or equivalent equipment for ease of identification and monitoring
during the transportation process;
7. Video records of all CCTV cameras, car video recorders and equivalent
equipment, if any, shall have the date and time shown in the video, and shall be
retained for 60 days. Moreover, a copy of all video records shall be submitted to
the CM within 24 hours of the recording or at a time interval agreed by the CM
for monitoring / inspection; and
8. Photo records as means of recording the storage and internal and external
transportation of steel reinforcing bar or prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products are not acceptable unless under unforeseen incident, i.e. sudden
breakdown of CCTV or video recorder. Any such incident shall be reported
with the photo records to the CM within 3 days and a written report shall be
submitted to the CM within 7 days of the incident. Any breakdown of CCTV or
video recorder shall have their functions restored within 24 hours or a period
agreed by the CM.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON9.G320.9 REQUIREMENTS ON TRACEABILITY PROCEDURE

1. All steel reinforcing bars shall be stored in designated storage areas. Sign(s)
shall be put up at the designated storage area indicating the steel reinforcing bar
is to be used for HA’s contracts with the contract information, i.e. contract title,
contract number, contractor’s name, etc., of each contract clearly shown for ease
of identification and monitoring;
2. All steel reinforcing bar shall be traceable with unique tags or equivalent means
(Unique Tags) affixed firmly when the steel reinforcing bar is delivered to
OSRPY. The Unique Tags shall include information such as, but not limited to,
the identification that the reinforcement is to be used for HA’s contract, the
contract title, the contract number, the contractor’s name, the delivery note
number / stockist certificate number, the steel reinforcing bar’s type and size and
length, the bundle weight and / or number of bars, and the heat / lot number;
3. All Unique Tags shall always be available and kept in good condition for
inspection throughout the period from delivery, storage, internal transportation
and up to prefabrication processes;
4. After prefabrication, the Unique Tags shall be updated, or a second set of
traceability tags (Traceability Tags) for the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products shall be provided, to include information such as the contract title, the
contract number; the contractor’s name, the delivery note number / stockist
certificate number, the testing report number, the bar bending schedule number,
the bar mark, the shape, the bar size, and the quantity.
CON9.G330.9 PREFABRICATED STEEL REINFORCING BAR PRODUCTS SUMMARY

REPORT
Submit a summary report on the prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products monthly
or at an interval agreed by the CM. The report shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
products delivered to the Site but not yet installed at the beginning of the
reporting period;
products delivered to the Site within the reporting period;
3. Tentative quantities of each size of each type of prefabricated steel reinforcing
bar products planned to be delivered to the Site in the next reporting period;
4. Accumulated quantities of each size of each type of prefabricated steel
reinforcing bar products delivered to the Site since the notified date for
commencement of the Works;
5. Bending schedule of each size of each type of prefabricated steel reinforcing bar
products delivered to the Site within the reporting period with details of bar
marks, bar types, bar size, quantities, dimensions, bending shape codes and
weights;
6. Copy of mill certificates issued by the stockist suppliers and the test report
issued by the Direct Testing Contractor (DTC) and / or Housing Department’s
Materials Testing Laboratory (HDMTL) and / or CEDD’s Public Works
Laboratories showing that the test results of the prefabricated steel reinforcing
bar products delivered to the Site within the reporting period meet the
requirements of CS2:2012 or BS4449:2005+A2:2009 as appropriate.

OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR...... CON9 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
REINFORCEMENT GENERALLY
CON9.M010.9 STOCKIST'S OR SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATION
1. For bar reinforcement delivered to the OSRPY, submit certificates from quality
assured stockist and / or supplier to demonstrate that the bar reinforcement
supplied complies with the requirements of Section 4 of CS2: 2012;
2. For reinforcement delivered in the form of coil (coil reinforcement) to the
OSRPY, submit certificate from quality assured stockist and / or supplier to
demonstrate the coil reinforcement supplied complies with the requirements of
Section 4 of CS2: 2012 or alternatively compliance of the following
requirements:
a. The coil reinforcement has been manufactured and tested to comply with the
requirements of BS 4449:2005+A2:2009 Sections 7 and 8;
b. The coil reinforcement is produced by a manufacturer certified by a third
party certification body. The certification body shall be accredited by the
Hong Kong Accreditation Service or its ‘Multilateral Recognition
Agreements / Arrangements’(MLA) partner(s) to the requirements of ISO
9001 for its quality management system with a scope related to good
practices of reinforcing steel production to meet requirements of BS
4449:2005+A2:2009.
CON9.M020.9 VERIFICATION OF SOURCE

When Instructed, provide evidence that each load of steel reinforcing bar delivered
to the OSRPY forms part of the same consignment and originates from the same
source as that in respect of which the specimen and the manufacturer’s certificate are
related.
CON9.M030.9 COLOUR CODE SYSTEM OF REINFORCEMENT

Submit for Approval a colour code system in the Quality Control System as
stipulated in PRE.B8.1425 for identification of steel reinforcing bar unloaded to
designated areas in the OSRPY:
1. For different batches, as defined in CON9.T110, before any testing:
a. Use white, yellow, blue, grey or other specific colours for marking at the
ends of reinforcement bar or at an agreed location with the CM for the coil
reinforcement;
b. Avoid to use any colours similar to rust and do not use green and / or red
colours.
2. For each batch available with all test results, including the re-test results as
permitted in the Specification, add markings in:
a. Green colour: for reinforcement conforming to the Specification;
b. Red colour: for reinforcement not conforming to the Specification.
REINFORCEMENT
CON9.M110.9 BAR / COIL REINFORCEMENT
Quality requirement:

OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR...... CON9 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Bar reinforcement of hot rolled steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with

CS2:2012;
2. Coil reinforcement of hot rolled steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with
CS2:2012 or BS 4449:2005+A2:2009;
3. The bar / coil reinforcement shall be classified as follows:
a. Class 1 steel reinforcing bar that is fully traceable to their manufacturer and
production data;
b. Class 2 steel reinforcing bar that is traceable to their manufacturers and
production data except their heat / cast number.
ANCILLARY MATERIALS
CON9.M210.9 COVER SPACERS
Cover spacers shall be in accordance with CON3.M210.
CON9.M220.9 CHAIRS AND SUPPORTS

Chair and supports shall be in accordance with CON3.M220.
CON9.M230.9 REINFORCEMENT TYING WIRE

Reinforcement tying wire shall be in accordance with CON3.M230.

OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR...... CON9 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERAL
CON9.W010.9 STORAGE OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR DELIVERED TO OSRPY
BEFORE PREFABRICATION
Store:
1. All steel reinforcing bar in designated storage area(s);
2. All steel reinforcing bar on a levelled, well-drained and maintained hard-
standing ground in a manner that will avoid damage, deformation and
contamination of the steel reinforcing bar;
3. Different types and sizes of steel reinforcing bar separately.
CON9.W020.9 SURFACE CONDITION OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR

Surface condition of steel reinforcing bar shall be in accordance with CON3.W020.
CON9.W030.9 CONTAMINATED OR HEAVILY RUSTED REINFORCEMENT

Remove contaminated or heavily rusted reinforcement from the designated area of
the OSRPY unless it has been cleaned or satisfactorily treated by an Approved
method.
CON9.W040.9 COLOUR MARKINGS OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR BY STOCKISTS

OR SUPPLIERS PRIOR TO DELIVERY TO THE OSRPY
1. Obtain steel reinforcing bar preferably without red and green colour markings
from stockists / suppliers;
2. If steel reinforcing bar with red colour marking, or with a colour marking
covering a previous marking in red, or with green colour marking is to be
supplied, then:
a. Provide in advance an explanation to the CM before delivery to the OSRPY.
In addition, for steel reinforcing bar with red colour marking or a colour
marking covering a previous marking in red, provide to the CM before
delivery to the OSRPY confirmation from each of the Contractor, the
stockist / supplier and owner of the OSRPY as far as it is aware, the
reinforcement is not non-compliant with CS2:2012 or
BS4449:2005+A2:2009 whichever is appropriate and / or is rejected by
other project;
b. The CM may reject the use of the steel reinforcing bar if:
i. No explanation is provided in advance; or
ii. The provided explanation is not satisfactory.
CON9.W110.9 CUTTING AND BENDING STEEL REINFORCING BAR
1. Steel reinforcing bar shall be cut and bent in accordance with the dimensional
requirements of BS 8666:2005 unless otherwise shown on the Drawing;
2. For coil reinforcement, it shall be straightened before cutting and bending in
accordance with sub-clause (1) above. The straightening process shall be done
by Quality Assured (QA) Coil Processor with an automated machine made for
this purpose.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
CON9.W120.9 COLD BENDING

Bend steel reinforcing bar in accordance with CON3.W120.
CON9.W130.9 SECURING REINFORCEMENT

Secure reinforcement in accordance with CON3.W130.
CON9.W140.9 LOCATING REINFORCEMENT

Provide sufficient cover spacers, chairs and supports in accordance with
CON3.W140 where appropriate.
CON9.W150.9 WELDING
Welding of reinforcement shall be in accordance with CON3.W150.
CON9.W160.9 CONCRETE COVER

The provision of concrete cover shall be in accordance with CON3.W160.
CON9.W170.9 COMPLIANCE WITH DRAWINGS

Checking of completed reinforcement shall be in accordance with CON3.W170.

1. Ensure all prefabricated steel reinforcing bar products delivered to the Site are
inspected by the CM before carrying out any work, including erecting any
formwork adjacent to the reinforcement, which makes access for inspection
difficult;
2. Notify the CM within 24 hours, or a shorter period agreed by the CM, prior to
carrying out the inspection work.
Assign an OSRPY Quality Control Coordinator (OSRPY-QCC), with a minimum
qualification and experience of a Grade T1 TCP under the Registered Contractor’s
stream in the CoPSS, to:
1. Supervise steel reinforcing bar prefabrication works and ensure that these are all
carried out in accordance with approved plans and comply with the requirements
on quality and workmanship;
2. Devise inspection check list of the off-site steel reinforcing bar prefabrication
works;
3. Provide full time continuous supervision of the off-site steel reinforcing bar
prefabrication works, including sampling of steel reinforcing bars.

1. Record the following details in an inspection log book:
b. The date, time, items inspected and inspection results.
2. Keep the inspection log book in the prefabrication yard and a copy of it on Site
for CM’s inspection when required and submit the inspection log book to the
CM upon completion of the works.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOLERANCES
CON9.W210.9 GENERAL
The tolerances shall comply with CON3.W210.

OFF-SITE STEEL REINFORCING BAR...... CON9 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
GENERAL
CON9.T010.9 TESTING ARRANGEMENT
Unless otherwise stated, testing arrangement of steel reinforcing bar in the OSRPY
as defined in CON9.G020 shall be in accordance with this Worksection.
DEFINITIONS
CON9.T110.9 BATCH OF STEEL REINFORCING BAR
1. Subject to the maximum tonnage in sub-clause (2) below, a batch of steel
reinforcing bar is the quantity of steel reinforcing bar delivered to the OSRPY
within a week under one delivery order, of one nominal diameter, and one steel
grade and produced by the same manufacturer;
2. The maximum tonnage of a batch shall not exceed:
a. For steel reinforcing bars of diameter 20 mm and above : 200 tonnes;
b. For steel reinforcing bars of diameter less than 20 mm : 100 tonnes.
CON9.T120.9 TESTING BY DIRECT TESTING CONTRACTOR (DTC) AND HOUSING

DEPARTMENT'S MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY (HDMTL)
Unless otherwise Approved or specified elsewhere, provide steel reinforcing bar
samples to the CM for testing by the DTC and / or HDMTL.

1. Allow sufficient time for the testing of specimens;
2. For Type 1 Yard, do not commence any steel reinforcing bar prefabrication work
until all relevant test specimens have successfully passed all tests carried out by
the DTC and / or HDMTL and / or CEDD’s Public Works Laboratories;
3. For Type 2 Yard and Type 3 Yard, do not commence any steel reinforcing bar
prefabrication work until all relevant test specimens have successfully passed all
tests carried out by the DTC and HDMTL.
PURCHASERS TESTING
1. For bar reinforcement and coil reinforcement complying CS2:2012, provide
adequate test specimens from each batch delivered to the OSRPY in accordance
with CS2:2012. The number of test specimens taken from each batch and the
rate of sampling shall be in accordance with Table 10 of CS2:2012;
2. For coil reinforcement complying BS 4449:2005+A2:2009, provide samples
from each batch as follows:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Class 1 coil reinforcement:

No. of test specimens per batch
Chemical
Description Mass
Size of Tensile Bend composition Bond
per
batch properties performance (product property
metre
analysis)
0 - 60
Coil 3 1 3 1 1
tonnes
Reinforcement
nominal size each
10 mm - 16 additional
mm 60 tonnes 1 Nil 1 Nil Nil
or part of
60 tonnes
0 - 80
3 1 3 1 1
Coil tonnes
Reinforcement each
nominal size additional
20 mm - 25 80 tonnes 1 Nil 1 Nil Nil
mm or part of
80 tonnes
b. Class 2 coil reinforcement:
No. of test specimens per batch
Chemical
Description Bend Mass Bond
Size of Tensile composition
per propert
batch properties performance (product
metre y
analysis)
0 - 35
Coil 3 1 3 1 1
tonnes
Reinforcement
nominal size each
10 mm - 16 additional
mm 35 tonnes 3 Nil 3 Nil Nil
or part of
35 tonnes
0 - 45
3 1 3 1 1
Coil tonnes
Reinforcement each
nominal size additional
20 mm - 25 45 tonnes 3 Nil 3 Nil Nil
mm or part of
45 tonnes
3. For steel reinforcing bar used for construction of hoardings and associated
covered walkways and gantries, the rate of sampling stated in the sub-clause (1)
CON9.T220.9 PROCEDURE
1. Under the supervision of the CM or his representatives,
a. Cut and take test specimens selected at random from steel reinforcing bar in
the OSRPY as defined in CON9.G020;
b. Each steel reinforcing bar specimen shall be minimum 1 m long;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. Test specimens taken from coil reinforcement shall have been straightened
according to BS EN ISO 15630-1:2010 Clause 4 or CS2:2012. The means
of straightening the test specimen (manual, machine) shall be indicated in
the test request form;
d. Appropriately mark and keep the test specimens or samples on yard for
collection and testing by the DTC and / or HDMTL;
e. The test specimens or samples shall be stored in a lockable steel box before
collection.
CON9.T230.9 TESTING BY HDMTL

Testing samples:
1. Provide additional steel reinforcing bar specimens to HDMTL for test as follows:
a. Take specimens from steel reinforcing bars adjacent to those from which
specimens have been cut for testing by the DTC;
b. Rate of sampling: approximately one for every five batches selected
randomly with the same number of test specimens to be tested by the DTC
for each test type as specified in CON9.T210, and the cumulative total
number of specimens tested by HDMTL shall be approximately one-fifth of
that tested by DTC;
c. Size of specimens / samples: in accordance with CON9.T220;
d. Scope, number of tests and method of testing as specified in CON9.T310
and CON9.T320.
TESTING BY DTC
CON9.T310.9 SCOPE AND NUMBER OF TESTS
Testing samples:
1. Tests shall be carried out on each specimen in accordance with
a. CS2:2012 for bar reinforcement; and
b. CS2:2012 or BS 4449:2005+A2:2009 for coil reinforcement.
2. Number of tests on each specimen shall be in accordance with
a. Table 10 of CS2:2012 for bar reinforcement; and
b. CON9.T210 (2) for coil reinforcement.
CON9.T320.9 METHODS OF TESTING

Tests will be carried out at room temperature between 5C and 35C and in
accordance with the following standards:
1. CS2:2012 for bar reinforcement;
2. CS2:2012 or BS4449:2005+A2:2009 for coil reinforcement.
COMPLIANCE
CON9.T410.9 COMPLIANCE CRITERIA – STEEL REINFORCING BAR
1. Bar reinforcement
A batch of bar reinforcement is deemed to comply with the Specification if the
test results meet the requirements of CS2:2012. Any non-complying batch of
bar reinforcement shall not be used and shall be removed from the designated
area in the OSRPY;
2. Coil reinforcement

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
A batch of coil reinforcement is deemed to comply with the Specification if the

test results meet the requirements of CS2:2012 or BS 4449:2005+A2:2009. Any
non-complying batch of coil reinforcement shall not be used and shall be
removed from the designated area in the OSRPY.
RE-TESTS
CON9.T510.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL REINFORCING BAR
Non-compliance:
If the result of any test for bar reinforcement does not comply with the specified
requirements for the property, provide additional test specimens from the same
batch for additional tests for the property in accordance with CS2:2012. The
number of additional specimens must be as stated in CS2:2012;
For each test specimen taken in accordance with CON9.T210 and failing to meet
the requirement for the mass per meter, chemical composition, tensile properties
and bend performance or bond property, two additional test specimens shall be
taken from the remainder of the same batch and be subjected to the test or tests
which the original specimen failed.
CON9.T520.9 STANDARD FOR REJECTION

A batch of bar reinforcement shall be deemed not complying with the specified
requirements for any particular property if the result of any additional test in
accordance with CON9.T510 (1) does not comply with the specified
requirements for that property. The non-complying batch of bar reinforcement
shall not be used and shall be removed from the designated area in the OSRPY;
For properties other than chemical composition, a batch of coil reinforcement
shall be deemed not complying with the Specification if any of the additional
tests in accordance with CON9.T510 (2) fails. For chemical composition, a batch
of coil reinforcement shall be deemed not complying with the Specification if
any of them fails unless it is demonstrated to the CM’s satisfaction by alternative
method acceptable under the International Standards listed in the bibliography of
BS EN ISO 15630-1:2010. The non-complying batch of coil reinforcement shall
not be used and shall be removed from the designated area in the OSRPY.

EARTHWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR EARTHWORK
Specification Library 2022 Edition| (Batch 1) EAR /1

EARTHWORK EAR > TABLE OF CONTENTS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1 EXCAVATION AND FILLING ................................................................ 8

DESIGN ........................................................................................................................................ 8
GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 8
EAR1.D010.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................. 8
EAR1.D020.9 METHOD STATEMENT FOR TEMPORARY WORKS ................................. 8
EAR1.D030.9 EXCAVATION AND LATERAL SUPPORT PLAN (ELSP) ........................... 9
EAR1.D040.9 SHORING AND EXCAVATION PROCEDURE DETAILS .......................... 11
EAR1.D050.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS ................................................................................. 11
EAR1.D060.9 EFFECT OF WORKS ON OTHERS ................................................................ 13
EAR1.D070.9 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORITY .................................. 13
EAR1.D080.9 GEOTECHNICAL STUDY AND GROUND INVESTIGATION .................. 14
EAR1.D090.9 BUILDING REGULATIONS ........................................................................... 14
EAR1.D100.9 DESIGN OF LOAD CARRYING ELEMENTS .............................................. 14
EAR1.D110.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION ................................................................................ 14
EAR1.D120.N SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM) ................................ 15
MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 16
DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 16
EAR1.M005.9 INERT CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL ...................... 16
EAR1.M010.9 EARTHWORKS MATERIAL ......................................................................... 16
EAR1.M020.9 OWNERSHIP OF EARTHWORKS MATERIAL ........................................... 16
EAR1.M030.9 SUITABLE MATERIAL .................................................................................. 16
EAR1.M040.9 PUBLIC FILL ................................................................................................... 16
EAR1.M045.9 GRADE 200 RECYCLED ROCK FILL........................................................... 16
EAR1.M050.9 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL ............................................................................ 17
EAR1.M055.9 MARINE MUD ................................................................................................. 17
EAR1.M060.9 ROCK ............................................................................................................... 17
EAR1.M070.9 TOPSOIL .......................................................................................................... 17
EAR1.M080.9 EMBANKMENT .............................................................................................. 17
EAR1.M090.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION ................................................................................ 18
EAR1.M100.9 BULK EXCAVATION ..................................................................................... 18
EAR1.M110.N SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM) ................................ 18
FILL MATERIALS .......................................................................................................................... 18
EAR1.M210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 18
EAR1.M220.9 PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION AND TYPES OF FILL
MATERIAL ...................................................................................................... 18
EAR1.M230.9 FILTER MATERIAL........................................................................................ 19
EAR1.M240.9 HARDCORE ..................................................................................................... 20
EAR1.M250.9 HYDROSEEDING ........................................................................................... 20
EAR1.M260.9 SOFT LANDSCAPING .................................................................................... 20
WORKMANSHIP ..................................................................................................................... 21
DEFINITIONS AND SUBMISSIONS ............................................................................................ 21
EAR1.W010.9 AREAS OF FILL .............................................................................................. 21
EAR1.W020.9 EARTHWORKS FINAL SURFACE ............................................................... 21
EAR1.W030.9 FORMATION ................................................................................................... 21
EAR1.W040.9 INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL................................................................ 21
EAR1.W050.9 SUBMISSION OF PARTICULARS ................................................................ 21
EAR1.W060.N SUBMISSION OF PARTICULARS OF SELF-COMPACTING
BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM) ...................................................................... 22
USE OF BLASTING ........................................................................................................................ 23
EAR1.W110.9 USE OF BLASTING METHOD ...................................................................... 23
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SURVEYS.......................................................................................................................................... 23
EAR1.W210.9 DATUM ............................................................................................................ 23
EAR1.W220.9 COMMENCEMENT SURVEY ....................................................................... 23
EAR1.W230.9 INTERIM AND FINAL SURVEYS ................................................................. 23
EAR1.W240.9 SURVEY INFORMATION .............................................................................. 24
TEMPORARY WORKS, SLOPES AND GROUND DRAINAGE ............................................. 24
EAR1.W310.9 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM ............................................................ 24
EAR1.W320.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS TO EARTHWORKS........................................... 24
EAR1.W330.9 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................ 25
EAR1.W340.9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR OPEN EXCAVATION
EARTHWORKS ............................................................................................... 25
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 25
EAR1.W410.9 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS .......................................................... 25
EAR1.W420.9 PROTECTION FROM WATER AND WEATHER......................................... 26
EAR1.W430.9 WORK NEAR SLOPES ................................................................................... 26
EAR1.W440.9 UNSUITABLE EARTHWORKS MATERIAL................................................ 26
EAR1.W450.9 ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION AND STABILIZATION .............................. 27
EAR1.W460.9 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF EARTHWORKS MATERIAL................. 27
EAR1.W470.9 EXISTING DRAINS AND SERVICES ........................................................... 27
EAR1.W480.9 EXCAVATION ADJACENT EXISTING STRUCTURES ............................. 27
EAR1.W490.9 TRIMMING ...................................................................................................... 28
EAR1.W500.9 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES FOR UTILITIES ........................................ 28
OBSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 28
EAR1.W610.9 BURIED OBSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................. 28
EAR1.W620.9 DISUSED DRAINS AND MANHOLES ......................................................... 28
EAR1.W630.9 OLD UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES ........................................................ 28
EAR1.W640.9 BOULDERS...................................................................................................... 28
EAR1.W650.9 PILED FOUNDATIONS .................................................................................. 28
CUTTINGS ....................................................................................................................................... 28
EAR1.W710.9 SURFACES OF CUTTINGS ............................................................................ 28
EAR1.W720.9 DEPTH OF REMOVAL ................................................................................... 29
EAR1.W730.9 MAKING GOOD .............................................................................................. 29
DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL................................................................................. 29
EAR1.W810.9 UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL ................................................ 29
EAR1.W820.9 SUITABLE MATERIAL .................................................................................. 29
EAR1.W830.9 DUMPING OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIALS .................... 29
EAR1.W835.9 DISPOSAL OR REUSE OF MARINE MUD................................................... 29
EAR1.W840.9 ON SITE SORTING OF CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION
MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 30
EAR1.W845.9 TRIP-TICKET SYSTEM .................................................................................. 30
RETAINING WALLS, SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS AND OTHER STRUCTURES ............ 30
EAR1.W910.9 SIZE OF EXCAVATIONS ............................................................................... 30
EAR1.W920.9 APPROVAL OF EXCAVATION BOTTOMS................................................. 30
EAR1.W930.9 FOUNDING OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS .............................................. 30
EAR1.W940.9 PROVING BEDROCK FOR FOOTINGS (RAFTS AND PADS) ................... 31
REMEDIAL WORKS ...................................................................................................................... 32
EAR1.W1010.9 EXCAVATION BOTTOMS DAMAGED AFTER APPROVAL .................... 32
EAR1.W1020.9 OVER EXCAVATION ..................................................................................... 32
EAR1.W1030.9 DAMAGED SURFACES ................................................................................. 32
FILLING GENERALLY ................................................................................................................. 32
EAR1.W1110.9 USE OF ROCK CRUSHING PLANT .............................................................. 32
EAR1.W1115.9 USE OF GRADE 200 RECYCLED ROCK FILL ............................................ 32
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W1120.9 HAULAGE OF FILL MATERIAL .................................................................. 33

EAR1.W1130.9 REMOVAL OF EARTHWORKS MATERIAL ............................................... 33
PREPARATION FOR FILLING .................................................................................................... 33
EAR1.W1210.9 EXISTING GROUND ...................................................................................... 33
EAR1.W1220.9 WATER-COURSES ......................................................................................... 33
EAR1.W1230.9 SLOPING GROUND ........................................................................................ 33
EAR1.W1240.9 AVAILABILITY OF PLANT .......................................................................... 33
EAR1.W1250.9 SCARIFYING ................................................................................................... 33
FILLING OPERATIONS ................................................................................................................ 33
EAR1.W1310.9 DISPOSAL OF WATER .................................................................................. 33
EAR1.W1320.9 APPROVAL...................................................................................................... 34
EAR1.W1330.9 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS........................................................... 34
EAR1.W1340.9 APPROVAL OF REMEDIAL MEASURES .................................................... 34
EAR1.W1350.9 REMEDIAL MEASURES FOR DAMAGED FILL AREAS........................... 34
EAR1.W1360.9 REMEDIAL MEASURES WHERE FILL OVERLAID .................................. 34
EAR1.W1370.9 RESTRICTIONS ON USE OF FILL MATERIAL .......................................... 34
EAR1.W1380.9 MIX PROPORTIONS, MIXING AND PLACING RECONSTITUTED
SOIL .................................................................................................................. 34
EAR1.W1390.9 SETTLEMENT ................................................................................................. 34
FILLING FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES ETC............................................................ 35
EAR1.W1410.9 ADJACENT UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES ................................................. 35
EAR1.W1420.9 FILLING AROUND WATER, SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
PIPES ................................................................................................................ 35
EAR1.W1430.9 BACKFILLING TO FOUNDATIONS............................................................. 35
EAR1.W1440.9 BACKFILLING TO TRENCHES FOR AUTOMATED REFUSE
COLLECTION SYSTEM (ARCS) ................................................................... 35
FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES .................................................................................... 36
EAR1.W1510.9 PREPARATION ............................................................................................... 36
EAR1.W1520.9 FILLING ........................................................................................................... 36
BACKFILLING BEHIND RETAINING WALLS ........................................................................ 36
EAR1.W1610.9 PLACING FILTER MATERIAL ..................................................................... 36
EAR1.W1620.9 FILLING ........................................................................................................... 36
FORMING EMBANKMENTS AND PLATFORMS .................................................................... 36
EAR1.W1710.9 MATERIAL SELECTION ............................................................................... 36
EAR1.W1720.9 DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL .............................................................. 36
EAR1.W1730.9 COMPACTION ................................................................................................ 37
EAR1.W1740.9 ROCK FILL EMBANKMENTS AND PLATFORMS..................................... 37
EAR1.W1750.9 BLINDING ROCK FILL EMBANKMENTS AND PLATFORM................... 37
EAR1.W1760.9 ISOLATED BOULDERS ................................................................................. 37
EAR1.W1770.9 CULVERTS AND DRAINS ETC .................................................................... 37
EAR1.W1780.9 SURFACES USED BY CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC .................................... 38
REUSE OF MARINE MUD FOR BACKFILLING...................................................................... 38
EAR1.W1785.9 REUSE OF MARINE MUD FOR BACKFILLING ......................................... 38
USE OF SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL ......................................................... 40
EAR1.W1790.N USE OF SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM) ................. 40
COMPACTION BY PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION ........................................................ 42
EAR1.W1810.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 42
EAR1.W1820.9 TESTING .......................................................................................................... 42
EAR1.W1830.9 MOISTURE CONTENT ................................................................................... 42
EAR1.W1840.9 FIELD DENSITY ............................................................................................. 42
EAR1.W1850.9 STANDARD OF COMPACTION.................................................................... 42

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W1860.9 STANDARD OF COMPACTION BETWEEN PILE CAPS AND

SUSPENDED SLABS AND AROUND PILE CAPS ...................................... 43
COMPACTION BY METHOD SPECIFICATION ...................................................................... 43
EAR1.W1910.9 ADOPTION ...................................................................................................... 43
EAR1.W1920.9 ROLLERS ......................................................................................................... 43
EAR1.W1930.9 COMPACTION METHOD .............................................................................. 43
EAR1.W1940.9 COMPACTION OF GENERAL FILL MATERIAL WITH A LARGE
PORTION OF COARSE MATERIAL ............................................................. 43
INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL ............................................................................................. 44
EAR1.W2010.9 DEPOSITING ................................................................................................... 44
EAR1.W2020.9 COMPACTION ................................................................................................ 45
COMPLETION OF GENERAL EARTHWORKS SURFACES ................................................. 45
EAR1.W2110.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 45
EAR1.W2120.9 COMPACTION ................................................................................................ 45
EAR1.W2130.9 PROOF ROLLING ........................................................................................... 45
EAR1.W2140.9 MAKING GOOD DEFECTS............................................................................ 45
EAR1.W2150.9 PAVEMENT FORMATIONS .......................................................................... 45
EAR1.W2160.9 PROTECTION OF FORMATIONS ................................................................. 46
EAR1.W2170.9 HYDROSEEDING ........................................................................................... 46
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SOFT LANDSCAPING ............................................. 46
EAR1.W2210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 46
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE PREPARATION OF ROAD
FORMATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 46
EAR1.W2310.9 SEQUENCE ...................................................................................................... 46
EAR1.W2320.9 FORMATIONS OTHER THAN ROCK FILL ................................................. 46
EAR1.W2330.9 ROCK FILL FORMATIONS ........................................................................... 47
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FILL SLOPES ............................................................ 47
EAR1.W2410.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 47
REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY WORKS ..................................................................................... 48
EAR1.W2510.9 DISMANTLING AND REMOVAL ................................................................. 48
TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................................. 48
EAR1.W2610.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 48
TESTING ................................................................................................................................... 49
FILL MATERIAL - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 49
EAR1.T020.9 BATCH ............................................................................................................. 49
EAR1.T030.9 SAMPLES ......................................................................................................... 49
EAR1.T040.9 SAMPLE SIZE ................................................................................................. 49
SITE TESTS FOR SOIL AND GROUNDWATER ...................................................................... 49
EAR1.T110.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 49
EAR1.T115.9 COMPACTION TEST FOR FILL SLOPES .................................................... 49
FILL MATERIAL - PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION, LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTICITY
INDEX, COEFFICIENT OF UNIFORMITY AND SULPHATE CONTENT ........................... 50
EAR1.T210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 50
EAR1.T220.9 TESTING CRITERIA ....................................................................................... 50
EAR1.T230.9 TEST METHODS ............................................................................................. 51
EAR1.T240.9 NON-COMPLIANCE WITH TESTS ............................................................... 51
FILL MATERIAL - OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND MAXIMUM DRY
DENSITY .......................................................................................................................................... 51
EAR1.T310.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 51
EAR1.T320.9 LOCATION ...................................................................................................... 52
EAR1.T330.9 ADDITIONAL SAMPLES ............................................................................... 52
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.T340.9 MATERIALS NOT FOR SAMPLING ............................................................. 52

EAR1.T350.9 TESTING METHODS ...................................................................................... 52
EAR1.T370.9 INCONSISTENT MATERIALS ...................................................................... 52
FILL MATERIAL - MOISTURE CONTENT .............................................................................. 53
EAR1.T410.9 SAMPLES ......................................................................................................... 53
EAR1.T420.9 TESTING METHODS ...................................................................................... 53
EAR1.T430.9 MOISTURE CONTENT COMPLIANCE CRITERIA ..................................... 53
EAR1.T440.9 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MOISTURE CONTENT AND
OPTIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT RESULTS ............................................. 53
FILL MATERIAL - RELATIVE COMPACTION ....................................................................... 54
EAR1.T510.9 REQUIREMENT FOR TESTING .................................................................... 54
EAR1.T520.9 LOCATION OF TESTS ................................................................................... 54
EAR1.T530.9 METHODS ....................................................................................................... 54
EAR1.T540.9 IN-SITU BULK DENSITY AND IN-SITU DRY DENSITY .......................... 55
EAR1.T550.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF RELATIVE COMPACTION TEST ....................... 55
TEST METHODS FOR FILL MATERIALS ................................................................................ 55
EAR1.T710.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 55
EAR1.T720.9 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ............................................................. 55
EAR1.T730.9 GROUPING OF MATERIALS ........................................................................ 55
DETERMINATION OF THE MOISTURE CONTENT OF FINE GRAINED AND
MEDIUM GRAINED MATERIAL BY THE MICROWAVE OVEN DRYING METHOD.... 56
EAR1.T810.9 SCOPE .............................................................................................................. 56
EAR1.T820.9 APPARATUS ................................................................................................... 56
EAR1.T830.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 56
EAR1.T840.9 CALCULATION .............................................................................................. 56
EAR1.T850.9 REPORTING .................................................................................................... 57
DETERMINATION OF THE MAXIMUM CONVERTED BULK DENSITY BY THE
HILF METHOD ............................................................................................................................... 57
EAR1.T860.9 SCOPE .............................................................................................................. 57
EAR1.T870.9 APPARATUS ................................................................................................... 57
EAR1.T880.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 57
EAR1.T900.9 REPORTING .................................................................................................... 60
ADJUSTMENT OF THE MAXIMUM CONVERTED BULK DENSITY FOR
DETERMINATION OF RELATIVE COMPACTION ................................................................ 61
EAR1.T910.9 SCOPE .............................................................................................................. 61
EAR1.T920.9 APPARATUS ................................................................................................... 61
EAR1.T930.9 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... 61
EAR1.T950.9 REPORTING .................................................................................................... 62
SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL ........................................................................ 62
EAR1.T960.N TESTING .......................................................................................................... 62
EAR2 BLASTING ................................................................................................ 65

MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 65
EXPLOSIVES ................................................................................................................................... 65
EAR2.M010.9 NITRO-GLYCERINE BASED EXPLOSIVES ................................................ 65
EAR2.M020.9 PRE-SPLIT BLASTING EXPLOSIVES .......................................................... 65
WORKMANSHIP ..................................................................................................................... 66
GENERALLY ................................................................................................................................... 66
EAR2.W010.9 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 66
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR2.W020.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ...................................................................................... 66

EAR2.W030.9 RESTRICTIONS ON TIMING ........................................................................ 66
EAR2.W040.9 PARTICULARS OF BLASTING ..................................................................... 66
EAR2.W050.9 PARTICULARS OF PRE-SPLIT BLASTING................................................. 67
EAR2.W060.9 BLASTING ASSESSMENT............................................................................. 67
EAR2.W070.9 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING OFFICE (GEO)
REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 67
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, RESTRICTIONS AND BLASTING PROCEDURES ................... 68
EAR2.W110.9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS......................................... 68
EAR2.W120.9 GENERAL PROCEDURES ............................................................................. 68
EAR2.W130.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................................ 68
EAR2.W140.9 PROTECTIVE SCREENS ................................................................................ 69
EAR2.W150.9 PLASTER BLASTING ..................................................................................... 69
EAR2.W160.9 BLAST HOLES ................................................................................................ 69
EAR2.W170.9 DETONATORS ................................................................................................ 69
EAR2.W180.9 DELAY BLASTING ........................................................................................ 69
EAR2.W190.9 PROXIMITY TO CERTAIN STRUCTURES .................................................. 69
EAR2.W200.9 VIBRATIONS TO INSTALLATIONS OR STRUCTURES ........................... 69
EAR2.W210.9 VIBRATIONS TO ADJOINING LAND .......................................................... 70
EAR2.W220.9 RECORDING VIBRATIONS .......................................................................... 70
PRE-SPLIT BLASTING .................................................................................................................. 70
EAR2.W310.9 FORMING FINAL SURFACES ...................................................................... 70
EAR2.W320.9 METHODOLOGY ............................................................................................ 70
EAR2.W330.9 HOLES FOR PRE-SPLITTING ....................................................................... 71
TRIAL BLASTS ............................................................................................................................... 71
EAR2.W410.9 REASON FOR TRIAL BLASTS...................................................................... 71
EAR2.W420.9 PARTICULARS OF TRIAL BLASTING ........................................................ 71
EAR2.W430.9 PRE-SPLIT BLASTING TRIALS .................................................................... 71
EAR2.W440.9 RESULTS OF BLAST TRIALS ....................................................................... 71
EAR2.W450.9 CHANGES IN PROCEDURE .......................................................................... 71
EAR2.W460.9 COMPLETION OF TRIAL BLASTS .............................................................. 71
EAR2.W470.9 COMMENCEMENT OF BLASTING .............................................................. 72
TOLERANCES ................................................................................................................................. 72
EAR2.W510.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 72

EXCAVATION AND FILLING EAR1 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

DESIGN
GENERAL
EAR1.D010.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
1. Submit for Approval, within 7 days of the notified date for commencement of
the Works, the name and particulars of the Registered Structural Engineer (RSE)
and Registered Geotechnical Engineer (RGE) who will be employed on the
Project in accordance with the Preliminaries Worksection. The RSE and RGE
must have relevant experience to design, supervise and control all temporary
works, excavation, dewatering and any specified design and built items.
Comply with PNAP APP-141 for the division of responsibilities between RSE
and RGE in connection with the excavation and lateral support works;
2. Prior to the notified date for commencement of the Works, the CM has provided
reference design for the Excavation and Lateral Support Works (ELSW) for
permanent works construction as specified in sub-clause (2) of EAR1.D030.
The Contractor shall review and decide whether to dispense with, adopt in full or
modify the reference design provided by the CM;
3. Should the Contractor choose to adopt in full the reference design provided by
the CM, the procedures for submitting the Excavation and Lateral Support Plan
(ELSP) to the CM as stipulated in sub-clause (3) of EAR1.D030 shall be
followed;
4. Should the Contractor choose to dispense with or modify the reference design
provided by the CM, the procedures for obtaining the CM's approval of the
Contractor's design or the modified design as stipulated in sub-clause (4) of
EAR1.D030 shall be followed;
5. If the reference design provided by the CM is adopted in full by the Contractor,
the Contractor shall assume full design responsibility for the said ELSW in sub-
clause (2);
6. If the Contractor decides to dispense with or modify the reference design
provided by the CM, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design of
ELSW or the modified design (including submission of ELSP).
EAR1.D020.9 METHOD STATEMENT FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

1. Prior to commencement of the temporary work submit a method statement
which takes account of geotechnical considerations and gives full details of all
materials, plant and timing and sequence of operations involved in the
construction of the temporary work, for the structures as specified in the Project
Specific Specification;
2. As part of the information provided with the method statement submit for
Approval full details of the temporary earth support systems it is proposed to use
associated with the construction of the structures listed above;
3. Give due considerations to any drainage pipe works and existing retaining walls
nearby along any Estate Roads;
4. Ensure particulars include, but are not limited to, the following:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. A detailed programme for the works showing phases of construction with

associated traffic arrangements and provision for the existing utility services
necessitated by the method of construction;
b. Details of construction method including:
i. Plant, equipment and labour to be deployed;
ii. Sequence for temporary works installation and excavation;
iii. Sequence for temporary works removal and backfilling;
iv. Temporary drainage measures to prevent flooding during rainstorms.
c. The workmanship submission requirements specified at EAR1.W050.
5. Allow adequate time in the construction programme for the CM's processing of
the specified submissions. The time allowed must be in no circumstances less
than 42 days. Do not commence the temporary work without the CM's consent.
EAR1.D030.9 EXCAVATION AND LATERAL SUPPORT PLAN (ELSP)

1. Submit ELSP and allow at least the number of days as specified in the Project
Specific Specification for obtaining CM's approval. Allow a further number of
days as specified in the Project Specific Specification for granting of approval by
CM for each ELSP re-submission. The structural calculations and drawings
submitted are prepared and signed by the RSE referred to in sub-clause (1) of
EAR1.D010. The geotechnical report / supporting documentation for the ELSP
shall be prepared and signed by the RGE appointed in accordance with the
Preliminaries Worksection in case of having excavation depth deeper than 4.5 m
and / or involving significant geotechnical elements. ELSP submission is
required where the excavation is one of the following types:
a. Deeper than 2.5 m and greater than 5 m in length;
b. Liable to affect any road, building, structure, slope steeper than 30 degrees
or water main 75 mm in diameter or greater, the affected area being defined
as within the 45 degree line up from the base of the excavation to the ground
surface;
c. Of substantial depth, the collapse of which would cause serious
consequences to public safety as per PNAP APP-57;
d. Any other ELSW requiring ELSP submission as specified by CM.
Notwithstanding the approval of the ELSP, the commencement of the ELSW
shall be subject to the CM's written permission referred to in PRE.B4.050.
2. The reference design for the ELSW is provided for the location(s) as specified in
the Project Specific Specification with details in reference drawings listed in
Appendix U to this Specification. The reference drawings are given in good
faith for the Contractor's information and reference only, and are by no means
exhaustive nor represent the design provided therein or any part thereof being in
compliance with the Specification. Notwithstanding these reference drawings
which the Contractor is free to adopt or not, or to modify in whole or in part, the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design (including submission of
ELSP) and construction of the ELSW. The provision of these reference
drawings shall not prejudice the Contractor's obligations and liabilities under the
Contract;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Where the Contractor chooses to adopt in full the said reference design of the
ELSW referred to in sub-clause (3) of EAR1.D010, submit ELSP based on the
said reference design of the ELSW duly signed by the RSE and / or RGE as
appropriate appointed in accordance with the Preliminaries Worksection and
allow at least the number of days as specified in the Project Specific
Specification to obtain CM’s approval for such submission before
commencement of the ELSW. Notwithstanding the approval of the ELSP, the
commencement of the ELSW shall be subject to the CM's written permission
referred to in PRE.B4.050;
4. Where the Contractor chooses to dispense with or modify the said reference
design of the ELSW referred to in sub-clause (4) of EAR1.D010, the Contractor
shall submit ELSP to CM and allow at least the number of days as specified in
the Project Specific Specification to obtain CM’s approval for the new or
modified design before commencement of the ELSW. The structural
calculations and drawings submitted are prepared and signed by the RSE
referred to in sub-clause (1) of EAR1.D010. The geotechnical report /
supporting documentation for the ELSP shall be prepared and signed by the
RGE appointed in accordance with the Preliminaries Worksection in case of
having excavation depth deeper than 4.5 m and / or involving significant
geotechnical elements. Allow for a further number of days as specified in the
Project Specific Specification for granting of approval by the CM for each ELSP
re-submission. ELSP submission is required where the excavation is one of the
following types:
a. Deeper than 2.5 m and greater than 5 m in length;
b. Liable to affect any road, building, structure, slope steeper than 30 degrees
or water main 75 mm in diameter or greater, the affected area being defined
as within the 45 degree line up from the base of the excavation to the ground
surface;
c. Of substantial depth, the collapse of which would cause serious
consequences to public safety as per PNAP APP-57;
d. Any other ELSW requiring ELSP submission as specified by CM.
Notwithstanding the approval of the ELSP, the commencement of the ELSW
shall be subject to the CM's written permission referred to in PRE.B4.050.
5. The ELSP submission shall include information as specified in the Project
Specific Specification;
6. For ELSW with pile walls and bulk excavation, comply with the following:
a. Refer to the Project Specific Specification on restrictions on commencement
for pile walls driving work;
b. Comply with the requirements of the Approved ELSP;
c. At the completion of pile walls driving works, submit record plans showing
the actual penetration depth of the pile walls to CM for approval. Allow at
least of 22 days for granting of approval by CM on:
i. Certification of completion of the works using Form ICU 14;
ii. Commencement of bulk excavation works.
d. Allow sufficient time in the programme of Works for obtaining the said
Approvals. Do not commence driving of pile walls and bulk excavations
without written Approval for commencement from the CM.
7. For ELSW with bulk excavation only, comply with the following:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Refer to the Project Specific Specification on restrictions on commencement

on bulk excavation works;
b. Allow sufficient time in the programme of Works for obtaining the said
Approvals. Do not commence ELSW without written Approval for
commencement from the CM;
c. Comply with the requirements under the Approved ELSP.
EAR1.D040.9 SHORING AND EXCAVATION PROCEDURE DETAILS

1. Unless ELSP has been submitted in accordance with EAR1.D030, submit
'Shoring and Excavation Procedure Details' to CM and allow the number of days
as specified in Project Specific Specification after obtaining CM’s written
approval of such procedure details for obtaining CM’s written permission to
commence such work;
2. Comply with the requirements under the submitted 'Shoring and Excavation
Procedure Details'.
EAR1.D050.9 DESIGN PARAMETERS

1. Design temporary works, excavation and dewatering methods and submit
proposals for review and Approval. Include in the submission of the details of
the temporary earth support systems the following:
a. Design philosophy; bearing in mind that design is such that the risk of
failure is not more than that which would be adopted if the temporary works
were to be permanent. Allowance may be made in the design for the shorter
design life and for the risk to persons and property and the surface water and
ground water conditions which are likely to occur during construction;
b. Detailed design calculations and drawings;
c. Specification for the works including procedures for installation and
removal;
d. Prediction of deformation of the temporary works and ground settlement and
horizontal movement;
e. Assessment of ground vibrations resulting from the temporary works that
must not exceed the limits set down in EAR2.W200. In case where the
temporary works involve installation of pile walls by percussive or vibratory
methods, assessment of ground vibrations resulting from such works that
must not exceed the limits set down in Appendix A of PNAP APP-137;
f. Precautionary measures to safeguard the integrity of the existing drainage
pipe work and retaining wall in vicinity of the temporary works.
2. Refer to EAR1.D030 on the design requirement and method of construction of
the ELSW;
3. Include in the design contingency measures to be adopted should site conditions
deviate from the design assumptions;
4. Ensure all calculations and drawings submitted are certified and signed by the
Registered Structural Engineer referred to at EAR1.D010 and ensure all
geotechnical reports and supporting documents are certified and signed by the
Registered Geotechnical Engineer referred to in EAR1.D010;
5. Allow in the design for the subsequent removal of the temporary works while
maintaining the stability of the excavation upon completion of the Works;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Make a detailed submission to the CM to provide design parameters and design

ground water levels with supporting document/calculation/justification for the
design and:
a. Verify the proposed design parameters and design ground water levels by
carrying out necessary Approved laboratory tests and monitoring. The CM
reserves the right to reject any proposed design parameters and design
ground water levels that are not to the CM's satisfaction;
b. Submit details of all required tests to the CM's satisfaction. Arrange for
sufficient number of laboratory tests and investigation to establish the design
parameters for each major stratum with sufficient independent results for
that stratum. Carry out all laboratory tests and investigation for this purpose
at the expense of the Contractor and bear all the time involved.
7. Where the Contractor chooses to adopt in full the reference design of ELSW for
permanent works construction referred to in sub-clause (2) of EAR1.D030:
a. Refer to EAR1.D030 on the design requirement and method of construction
of the ELSW;
b. Include in the design contingency measures to be adopted should site
conditions deviate from the design assumptions;
c. Submit details of all required tests to the CM's satisfaction. Arrange for
sufficient number of laboratory tests and investigation to establish the design
parameters for each major stratum with sufficient independent results for
that stratum. Carry out all laboratory tests and investigation for this purpose
at the expense of the Contractor and bear all the time involved.
8. Where the Contractor chooses to dispense with or modify the reference design of
ELSW for permanent works construction referred to in sub-clause (2) of
EAR1.D030:
a. Design temporary works, excavation and dewatering methods and submit
proposals for review and Approval. Include in the submission of the details
of the temporary earth support systems the following:
i. Design philosophy; bearing in mind that design is such that the risk of
failure is not more than that which would be adopted if the temporary
works were to be permanent. Allowance may be made in the design for
the shorter design life and for the risk to persons and property and the
surface water and ground water conditions which are likely to occur
during construction;
ii. Detailed design calculations and drawings;
iii. Specification for the works including procedures for installation and
removal;
iv. Prediction of deformation of the temporary works and ground settlement
and horizontal movement;
v. Assessment of ground vibrations resulting from the temporary works
that must not exceed the limits set down in EAR2.W200. In case where
the temporary works involve installation of pile walls by percussive or
vibratory methods, assessment of ground vibrations resulting from such
works that must not exceed the limits set down in Appendix A of
PNAP APP-137;
vi. Precautionary measures to safeguard the integrity of the existing
drainage pipe work and retaining wall in vicinity of the temporary works.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Refer to EAR1.D030 on the design requirement and method of construction

of the ELSW;
c. Include in the design contingency measures to be adopted should site
conditions deviate from the design assumptions;
d. Ensure all calculations and drawings submitted are certified and signed by
the Registered Structural Engineer referred to at EAR1.D010 and ensure all
geotechnical reports and supporting documents are certified and signed by
the Registered Geotechnical Engineer referred to in EAR1.D010;
e. Allow in the design for the subsequent removal of the temporary works
while maintaining the stability of the excavation upon completion of the
Works;
f. Make a detailed submission to the CM to provide design parameters and
design ground water levels with supporting document/calculation/
justification for the design and:
i. Verify the proposed design parameters and design ground water levels
by carrying out necessary Approved laboratory tests and monitoring.
The CM reserves the right to reject any proposed design parameters and
design ground water levels that are not to the CM's satisfaction;
ii. Submit details of all required tests to the CM's satisfaction. Arrange for
sufficient number of laboratory tests and investigation to establish the
design parameters for each major stratum with sufficient independent
results for that stratum. Carry out all laboratory tests and investigation
for this purpose at the expense of the Contractor and bear all the time
involved.
EAR1.D060.9 EFFECT OF WORKS ON OTHERS

1. Where temporary work, ELSW and dewatering proposals could have an effect
on the properties of others, the CM may require submission of the design
proposals to be presented to the Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO),
Technical Services Division of Civil Engineering Development Department,
Highways Department, Mass Transit Railway Corporation, Kowloon Canton
Railway Corporation, Water Supplies Department and Drainage Services
Department, etc. for comments and / or acceptance;
2. When Instructed abide by such requirements;
3. Where this is the case allow sufficient time in the programme for comment by
various Government Departments. Incorporate all comments and requirements
from various Government Departments into the ELSP prior to submission to CM
in accordance with EAR1.D030;
4. Address all queries raised by the various Government Departments;
5. Do not commence construction works until formal Approval has been given.
EAR1.D070.9 INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORITY

1. Drillhole data, laboratory testing data, structural design criteria and any other
information relevant to the Works may be viewed at the Authority's office by
appointment at any time during normal office hours;
2. The following soil parameters may be taken as reference values for design of
ELSW:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Soil Parameters
Soil material
c (kPa)  (deg.)  (kN/m3) E (MPa) 
Notes to table:
a. c = effective cohesion of soil;
b.  = effective friction angle of soil;
c.  = bulk unit weight of soil;
d. E= Young’s modulus (for drained loading); and
e.  Poisson’s ratio (for drained loading)
3. The above information is given in good faith for reference only and is not meant
to be exhaustive or to be representative of the whole or any part of the Site or in
any way limiting the obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the
Contract. No guarantee can be given nor responsibility be taken by the
Employer or the CM for their accuracy, consistency or sufficiency, and no claim
whatsoever will be entertained on account of any errors, discrepancies and
insufficiency in relation to the information given.
EAR1.D080.9 GEOTECHNICAL STUDY AND GROUND INVESTIGATION

1. In addition to the general responsibilities provided under the Contract, carry out
a geotechnical study and any necessary ground investigation so as to become
fully aware of the geotechnical characteristics of the design of temporary works
or the execution of the works;
2. Comply with the requirements as specified in Project Specific Specification.
EAR1.D090.9 BUILDING REGULATIONS

Carry out calculations for temporary works in accordance with the relevant Building
Regulations made under the Building Ordinance, slope manual, geoguide and model
specification of Geotechnical Engineering Office and the relevant British Standards.
Wherever there is conflict between British Standards and Building Regulations, the
latter shall take precedence.
EAR1.D100.9 DESIGN OF LOAD CARRYING ELEMENTS

Ensure all materials used as load carrying elements conform to the relevant British
Standards in respect of quality, and that the design conforms with the safe working
stresses laid down in those Standards.
EAR1.D110.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION

Without prejudice to other provisions in the Contract, comply with the provisions in
the "Guide to Trench Excavations (Shoring Support and Drainage Measures)"
published jointly by the Highways Department and the Civil Engineering and
Development Department, Hong Kong Government or its updates as may be
promulgated from time to time in the design of temporary support to trench
excavations.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.D120.N SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM)

1. Seek the CM’s approval for the use of SCM as the alternative backfill material
for:
a. Backfilling utilities trenches;
b. Filling voids in the following areas where difficulties are anticipated in
achieving desirable performance of backfilling or compacting conventional
backfilling material (i.e. soil) in a timely manner, and thus may cause
unsatisfactory permanent reinstatement of the pavement above:
i. Between pile caps and temporary lateral supports;
ii. Between manholes, gully pits, gully sumps, other drainage chambers
and temporary lateral supports;
iii. Between underpass wall without permeable drainage and temporary
lateral supports.
2. The use of SCM as an alternative backfill material shall be subject to the
fulfilment of the following conditions:
a. Seek consent from the concerned Utility Undertaking if its existing
underground installations will be embedded by SCM;
b. Seek comments from Estate Management Division if SCM is proposed to be
used;
c. Prepare and provide as-built plan (including area, depth etc.) to Estate
Management Division where the SCM is adopted.
3. Bear all associated costs and the extra time required by reason of the progress of
the Works or any part thereof having been affected by the time due to any failure
in obtaining approval/consent as required under sub-clauses (1) and (2) above.

EXCAVATION AND FILLING EAR1 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
DEFINITIONS
EAR1.M005.9 INERT CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION MATERIAL
Rock, rubble, earth, soil, concrete, asphalt, brick, tile and masonry generated from
construction and demolition works.
EAR1.M010.9 EARTHWORKS MATERIAL

Soil, rock, or inert construction and demolition material on or below the Site at the
commencement of the Works, or which is imported to the Site to carry out the
Works.
EAR1.M020.9 OWNERSHIP OF EARTHWORKS MATERIAL

1. Ownership of the Employer - earthworks material within the Site at the
commencement of the Works, except as in sub-clause (2) below;
2. Ownership of the Contractor - earthworks material which is required to be
disposed of by the Contractor is the property of the Contractor when it is
removed from the Site. Dispose of in tips provided by the Contractor, unless
otherwise stated in the Contract.
EAR1.M030.9 SUITABLE MATERIAL

1. Naturally occurring or processed material, or inert construction and demolition
material, which at the time of deposition is capable of being compacted in
accordance with the specified requirements to form stable areas of fill;
2. Grade 200 Recycled Rock Fill as EAR1.M045 where specified in the Drawings
or approved by CM;
3. Do not use unsuitable materials as listed in EAR1.M050.
EAR1.M040.9 PUBLIC FILL

1. Public fill shall mean the inert material arising from construction and demolition
activities such as site clearance, excavation, construction, refurbishment,
renovation, demolition and roadworks. Public fill comprises material including
stone, rock, masonry, brick, concrete, soil and other inert material. There is no
size limitation on the public fill, and a small amount of timber mixed with
otherwise suitable material is permissible. The public fill may also consist of
wet soil;
2. The use of public fill as fill material for earthwork may be permitted and the size
limitation, transportation, stockpiling, deposit, spreading, compaction and any
particular requirements of such material shall be as stated in the Contract.
EAR1.M045.9 GRADE 200 RECYCLED ROCK FILL

1. Grade 200 Recycled Rock Fill (RR 200) shall mean a type of recycled rock or
inert construction and demolition material which is hard and durable, and free
from cracks, veins, and other evidence of decomposition;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. RR 200 shall be collected from the recycling facilities managed by the Fill
Management Division of Civil Engineering and Development Department as
specified in the Project Specific Specification;
3. In the event that RR200 is used in the Works, comply with the following:
a. Comply with the relevant ordering and collection procedures of RR 200 as
specified by the CEDD;
b. Complete and submit the order form to the CM at least 10 days before the
collection of RR 200 from the recycling facilities. The ordering and
collection procedures together with the order form can be obtained from the
CEDD web-site;
c. Make due allowance in the works programme for the time associated with
ordering and collection of RR200 and bear all associated costs, and no
extension of time will be allowed.
EAR1.M050.9 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

Other than Suitable Material and Grade 200 Recycled Rock Fill, and including the
following:
1. Peat, vegetation, timber, organic, soluble or perishable material, or rubbish;
2. Swelling clays or collapsible soils;
3. Dangerous or toxic material or material susceptible to combustion;
4. Material susceptible to volume change, including marine mud, materials from
swamps, nullahs, stream courses and culverts, or soil with a liquid limit
exceeding 65% or a plasticity index exceeding 35%; and
5. Metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material.
EAR1.M055.9 MARINE MUD

The term "mud" shall be as defined in Table 11 of 'Geoguide 3:Guide to Rock and
Soil Descriptions' GEO, which is broadly classified as marine deposits with fine soils
of over 35% by mass of silts and clays of particle sizes up to 0.06 mm.
EAR1.M060.9 ROCK
1. Naturally occurring hard material which in the opinion of the CM can only be
removed by:
a. Blasting;
b. Pneumatic tools other than clay spades;
c. Wedges and sledge hammers;
d. Drilling and the use of mechanical bursting;
e. Drilling and the use of expanding agents.
2. Any isolated, solid boulder or detached piece of rock exceeding 0.2 m³.
EAR1.M070.9 TOPSOIL
Soil capable of supporting vegetable growth.
EAR1.M080.9 EMBANKMENT
An area on the Site, other than a foreshore or sea-bed, where the ground level is to be
raised by filling in layers as part of the Works.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.M090.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION

Excavation starting at ground level and not exceeding 5 m in width at the surface.
EAR1.M100.9 BULK EXCAVATION

Excavation in the open, other than trench excavation.
EAR1.M110.N SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM)

1. SCM shall be backfill material using cementitious material, fine aggregate,
pulverized material, water and admixtures for controlling the rheology and
setting time of the in-situ material;
2. Cementitious material shall be Portland Cement (PC) to BS EN 197-1:2011 or
Pulverized Fuel Ash (PFA) to BS EN 450-1:2012;
3. Fine aggregate shall be clean and hard complying with CS3. Natural sand shall
not be used unless with the prior agreement of the CM;
4. Pulverized material shall be clean sedimentary rock material with the following
requirements:
a. Grain size of no more than 100 µm;
b. The clay content, determined by the methylene blue test in accordance with
BS EN 933-9:2009 shall not exceed 1.50g/100g;
c. Calcium carbonate (CaCO3) content calculated from the calcium oxide
content in accordance with BS EN 196-2:2013 shall be at least 75 % by
mass.
5. Admixtures shall comply with the following standards: BS EN 12878:2014 for
pigments, BS EN 934-2:2009 for accelerating admixtures, retarding admixtures,
water-reducing admixtures and superplasticising admixtures;
6. Water shall be clean fresh water taken from the public supply. Non-saline water
from other sources may be used subject to the CM’s approval, provided that it
can be demonstrated that the water is neutral in PH value, free from suspended
solids and liquid contaminants non-miscible with water. It shall be tested and
comply with BS EN 1008. Wash water from concrete mixer washout operations
(recycled water) shall not be used.
FILL MATERIALS
EAR1.M210.9 GENERAL
1. Use only suitable material as previously defined;
2. Unless otherwise specified, form areas of fill by general fill material;
3. Obtain fill material from excavation within the Site. If there is insufficient fill
material of the required types within the Site, provide imported fill material from
sources outside the Site subject to approval by the CM.
EAR1.M220.9 PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION AND TYPES OF FILL MATERIAL

For different types of fill material, keep particle size distribution within the following
table:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Percentage by mass passing

Type of
Size BS Test Sieve
fill material
400 mm 200 mm 75 mm 20 mm 600 m 63 m
Fine fill - - 100 - - -
General fill - 100 75 - 100 - - -
Special fill - - 100 - - 0 - 45
Granular fill - - 100 - 0-5 -
Rock fill
- 100 20 - 75 0 - 50 - -
(Grade 200)
Recycled
rock fill - 100 20 - 75 0 - 50 - -
(Grade 200)
Rock fill
100 20 - 75 10 - 30 0 - 25 - -
(Grade 400)
Notes to table:
1. Special fill material is to consist of material which has a liquid limit not
exceeding 45%, a plasticity index not exceeding 20% and a coefficient of
uniformity exceeding 50. For those special fill material which contains less than
30% by weight of particles less than 63 µm, testing on the liquid limit and
plasticity index of the material is not required;
2. Granular fill material is to consist of clean, hard, durable material including
recycled aggregates, rock and concrete;
3. Rock fill material is to consist of pieces of hard and durable rock of which the
maximum size shall not be greater than three times the minimum dimension of
individual pieces and in the opinion of the CM not more than 30% by mass is
discoloured or shows other evidence of decomposition. Crushed rock or crushed
concrete may be permitted subject to approval by the CM;
4. The soluble sulphate content of fill material placed within 500 mm of concrete,
cement bound material or cementitious material must not exceed 1.9 grams of
sulphate, expressed as SO3, per litre;
5. The total sulphate content, expressed as SO3, of fill material placed within
500 mm of metalwork must not exceed 0.5% by mass;
6. Well-graded material to consist of material which has a coefficient of uniformity
exceeding 10;
7. Uniform-graded material to consist of material which has a coefficient of
uniformity of 10 or less.
EAR1.M230.9 FILTER MATERIAL

1. Hard, durable, inert material. When placed and compacted this material, either:
a. Conforms with the grading limits specified; or
b. Other limits separately designed by the Contractor to suit the type of
adjacent material in accordance with filter rules acceptable to the GEO, as
agreed by the CM; and
c. Submitted to the CM at least 4 weeks prior to actual incorporation into the
Works; and

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
d. Graded - in accordance with Test Method 8.2 of Geospec 3: Model

Specification for Soil Testing, GEO, and free from organic or other
impurities.
2. Sampling - size of sample and method of sampling in accordance with BS 812-
102:1989.
EAR1.M240.9 HARDCORE
To comprise either:
1. Rock fill, or;
2. Broken stone, hard brick, concrete or other comparable hard, inert material, free
from dust, rubbish or deleterious foreign matter and capable of passing through a
150 mm diameter ring in every direction.
EAR1.M250.9 HYDROSEEDING
Refer to Project Specific Specification.
EAR1.M260.9 SOFT LANDSCAPING


EXCAVATION AND FILLING EAR1 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
DEFINITIONS AND SUBMISSIONS

EAR1.W010.9 AREAS OF FILL
Areas within the Site, including areas in embankments, platforms and slopes and in
excavations for structures, pits and trenches, in which fill material is deposited and
compacted as part of the permanent work.
EAR1.W020.9 EARTHWORKS FINAL SURFACE

The surface to which the work included in this Worksection is finished.
EAR1.W030.9 FORMATION
That part of the earthworks final surface on which a pavement, structure or utility, is
constructed, or on which the blinding or bedding for a pavement, structure or utility
is placed.
EAR1.W040.9 INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL

Areas of fill in which fill material is deposited and compacted directly into shallow
water or onto naturally occurring soft ground.
EAR1.W050.9 SUBMISSION OF PARTICULARS

Submit the following particulars of proposed methods of construction for earthworks
to the CM at least 14 days before relevant work starts:
1. Details of constructional plant and haulage vehicles;
2. Methods of excavation and of deposition and compaction of fill material;
3. Use of different type of excavated material and sources of imported fill material;
4. Arrangements for stockpiling, sorting and separating excavated material,
earthworks material and fill material and for reusing and disposing of such
materials;
5. Methods of controlling the moisture content of fill material;
6. Methods of controlling surface water and groundwater and of protecting
earthworks and earthworks material from damage due to water and from weather
conditions which may affect the earthworks or earthworks material;
7. Methods of monitoring groundwater levels;
8. Methods of monitoring the ground and structures for movements;
9. Methods, with detailed design of supporting excavations adjacent to slopes,
retaining walls, structures, roads, private developments or other properties;
10. Stability calculations of unsupported excavations adjacent to slopes, retaining
walls, structures, roads, private developments or other properties.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W060.N SUBMISSION OF PARTICULARS OF SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL

MATERIAL (SCM)
1. Submit the following particulars of the proposed cementitious materials, fine
aggregate, pulverized material and admixture to the CM for approval at least 14
days before the SCM is placed in the backfilling area:
a. Certificates not older than 6 months for each type of cement or PFA
materials showing the manufacturer's name, the date and place of
manufacture, the compliance with the requirements stated in the Contract
and the test results for composition;
b. Certificates/documents not older than 6 months for fine aggregate in
accordance with Clause 6.2.2 (2) of CS3 showing the compliance of
requirements as stated in the Contract;
c. Certificates/documents not older than 6 months for pulverized material
showing the compliance with the requirements stated in the Contract and the
test results for the grain size, the methylene blue value and the calcium
carbonate content.
2. Submit the following particulars of admixtures to the CM for approval at least
14 days before the SCM is placed in the backfilling area:
a. Manufacturers’ literature, descriptions of physical state, colour and
composition, recommended storage conditions and the shelf life;
b. Method of adding to the SCM mix, the recommended dosage, effect(s) of
under-dosage and over-dosage;
c. A certificate not older than 6 months for each type of admixtures showing
the manufacturer's name, the date and place of manufacture and the
compliance with the requirements stated in the Contract.
3. Submit the following particulars of each proposed designed SCM mix to the CM
for approval at least 14 days before the SCM is placed in the backfilling area:
a. Grading of fine aggregates;
b. Method of placing the SCM;
c. Source, formulation, test data for the designed SCM mix produced in the
plant(s) and test reports of site trials for the designed SCM mix proposed to
be used including test results required in sub-clause (2) of EAR1.T960
conducted on the site trial samples to demonstrate the compliance with the
criteria specified in sub-clause (2) of EAR1.T960.
4. The following particulars of the proposed production facilities shall be submitted
to the CM for approval at least 14 days before the SCM is placed in the
backfilling area:
a. The name of the suppliers and the location of each plant, including a back-
up plant and the calibration frequency of the equipment, from which the
Contractor proposes to obtain SCM;
b. Particulars of the proposed batching and mixing plant to be used on the Site,
including a layout plan and the output of the plant.
5. Submit the following particulars of the proposed placement methods of SCM to
the CM for approval at least 14 days before the SCM is placed in the backfilling
area:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Before SCM reaching its initial set and providing sufficient load bearing
capacity in the first several hours after placement, the Contractor shall
submit a plan to fence off the backfilled area properly before any subsequent
application of the surfacing materials above.
USE OF BLASTING
EAR1.W110.9 USE OF BLASTING METHOD
SURVEYS
EAR1.W210.9 DATUM
Spot levels and contours shown on the Drawings are, unless otherwise specified,
reduced to Hong Kong Principal Datum for levels and the latest edition of Hong
Kong Geodetic Datum for coordinate locations.
EAR1.W220.9 COMMENCEMENT SURVEY

1. Upon possession of the Site, and before any work is carried out, carry out and
record a topographical survey of the whole of the Site in the presence of the
representatives of the CM;
2. Obtain Approval to the method of survey and the instrument to be used from the
CM before the commencement of the survey;
3. Submit the survey drawings to the CM within 14 days after commencement of
the survey for endorsement and adopt the endorsed survey drawings as the true
record of the Site at commencement;
4. Use the endorsed survey drawings for measurement of earthwork quantities as
applicable;
5. Do not start earthworks on any location prior to the endorsement of the survey
drawings;
6. When instructed by the CM, carry out a joint survey of the Site with the previous
piling contractor immediately upon award of the Contract in the presence of the
CM or his representatives as specified in PRE.B3.080.
EAR1.W230.9 INTERIM AND FINAL SURVEYS

1. Carry out interim surveys at intervals requested by the CM;
2. Carry out final topographical survey upon completion of the works;
3. Follow instructions of the CM for any extra surveys required to resolve any
doubts on the correctness of survey records;
4. Adopt the same process for interim, final, and extra surveys as specified in
EAR1.W220;
5. When instructed by the CM, carry out a joint survey with the subsequent
building contractor after completion of the Works and upon award of the
subsequent building contract to record the site topography and the works to be
handed over to the subsequent building contractor in the presence of the CM or
his representatives as specified in PRE.B9.130.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W240.9 SURVEY INFORMATION

All topographical surveys:
1. Must be reduced to Hong Kong Principal Datum and coordinate locations to be
to the latest edition of the Hong Kong Geodetic Datum;
2. Must include plans and sections;
3. Must be reproduced on transparent film of dimensionally stable material to scale
of 1:200 (or as Instructed);
4. Must be signed by the Contractor and the responsible party involved in case of a
joint survey and the CM as being a true record of the Site.
TEMPORARY WORKS, SLOPES AND GROUND

DRAINAGE
EAR1.W310.9 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM
Rapidly disperse water, whether shed on to the excavation or earthwork or arising
from any other source, including flowing into the Site from elsewhere and:
1. Obtain Approval to the discharge points of the temporary drainage and pumping
systems;
2. Make all arrangements with and obtain necessary approvals and inspections
from the relevant authorities for discharging water to drains, watercourses or the
sea;
3. Do not start the work until the Approved arrangements for disposal of the water
have been implemented;
4. Take measures to prevent floatation of new and existing structures;
5. Provide temporary watercourses, ditches, catchpits, drains, pumping or other
means of maintaining the excavations and earthworks free from water;
6. Discharge the water into the permanent outfall of the piped drainage system
whenever possible;
7. Provide Approved means of trapping silt on temporary systems discharging into
the permanent drainage systems;
8. Ensure that temporary and permanent drainage systems are adequately
maintained and clear of rubbish and debris.
EAR1.W320.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS TO EARTHWORKS

1. Use temporary supports or other methods to maintain excavations in a stable
condition and to prevent settlement of structures or utilities due to excavation or
dewatering;
2. Do not operate or park construction plant or other vehicles adjacent to
excavations unless this has been allowed for in the design of the temporary
works for the support of the excavation. Erect barriers at a distance from
excavations not less than the depth of excavations, or where space is not
permitted, at a shorter distance from excavations as agreed with the CM;
3. Do not place earthworks material or other materials adjacent to excavations
unless this has been allowed for in the design of the temporary works for the
support of the excavation;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Securely support all sides of trenches, pits, excavations, slopes or stockpiles

exceeding 1.2 m vertical height/depth unless formed to a safe batter
substantiated by design calculation agreed with the CM.
EAR1.W330.9 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1. Carry out excavations and earthworks in such a manner to prevent erosion or
slips;
2. Do not stockpile material where it might cause a landslide;
3. Do not store excavated materials adjacent to the top edge of mass excavations,
slopes or stockpiles exceeding 1.2 m high unless otherwise agreed;
4. When Instructed trim and seal final faces of excavations to remove all loose
rocks to prevent falling which might cause injury to workmen;
5. Limit working surfaces to safe slopes and height.
EAR1.W340.9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR OPEN EXCAVATION EARTHWORKS

1. Provide open board fencing, or equivalent, and warning signs to:
a. Excavations, slopes or stockpiles exceeding the following heights:
i. Vertical slope face: 2 m
ii. Battered slope face: 3 m
b. Trenches or pits exceeding 2 m deep.
2. Provide temporary fencing or warning ribbons to excavations, slopes, stockpiles,
trenches or pits less than the heights/depth given in sub-clause (1) above but
exceeding 1.2 m.
GENERAL
EAR1.W410.9 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS
1. Carry out excavations and earthworks in dry conditions unless otherwise
permitted by the CM, except where the excavations and earthworks are required
to be carried out in or with water or other fluids;
2. Suppress dust generation during excavation and earthworks operations by
spraying the work area of any excavation or earth moving equipment operation
with water or a dust suppression chemical immediately before, during and
immediately after the operation so as to maintain the entire surface wet. Dispose
cement, pulverized fuel ash or any other dusty materials collected by fabric
filters or other air pollution control system or equipment in totally enclosed
containers;
3. Control height from which excavated materials are dropped to a practical
minimum;
4. Carry out the formation of cuttings and filling in such a manner that the surfaces
have at all times a sufficient minimum crossfall and, where practicable a
sufficient longitudinal gradient to enable them to shed water and prevent
ponding;
5. Adopt a method of working which minimises the area of exposed soil across the
Site;
6. Carry out excavation to the lines, levels, dimensions and slopes specified;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Carefully level the bottom of excavation and step or bench horizontally as

specified.
EAR1.W420.9 PROTECTION FROM WATER AND WEATHER

1. Keep earthworks after site clearance, excavation or filling and earthworks
material after excavation free of water and:
a. Protect from damage due to water;
b. Protect from exposure to weather conditions which may affect the
earthworks or earthworks material.
2. Take measures including but not limited to the following:
a. Use temporary drainage, pumping systems or other effective measures
approved by the CM. Intercept silt and debris with traps before water is
discharged from the Site;
b. Obtain Approval from the CM for the discharge points of temporary
drainage and pumping systems. Make all arrangement with and obtain the
necessary approvals and inspections from the relevant authorities for
discharging water to drains, watercourses or the sea. Do not start the
relevant works until the approved arrangements for disposal of the water
have been implemented;
c. Do not carry out works in weather conditions that may adversely affect the
works unless protection by methods agreed by the CM is provided;
d. Maintain surfaces in a stable condition;
e. Form surfaces to falls to shed water and to prevent ponding;
f. Keep the area of exposed surfaces to a minimum;
g. Seal or cover with impermeable sheeting or protect by other Approved
methods surfaces which are temporarily exposed.
EAR1.W430.9 WORK NEAR SLOPES

Do not carry out excavations on or adjacent to slopes unless measures are taken to
drain the excavation and to prevent water from the excavation entering the slopes.
EAR1.W440.9 UNSUITABLE EARTHWORKS MATERIAL

1. Replace the following materials or deal with by the methods agreed by the CM:
a. Earthworks material which has been used, or is required for use, in the
permanent work and which is allowed to become unsuitable such that in the
opinion of the CM it no longer complies with the specified requirements for
that type of material;
b. Earthworks material which is not specified to be excavated and which the
Contractor causes or allows to deteriorate such that in the opinion of the CM
the permanent work will be affected.
2. Dispose of all unsuitable material;
3. Material provided to replace earthworks material, which has been allowed to
become unsuitable, or which the Contractor causes or allows to deteriorate, shall
be an equivalent material approved by the CM. The replacement material shall
have the same volume after compaction as the material replaced.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W450.9 ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION AND STABILIZATION

When Instructed, carry out additional excavation to remove earthworks material
which in the opinion of the CM has inadequate strength, durability or stability and
treat the voids as follows:
1. Deposit and compact general fill, fine fill, or special fill material below areas of
fill and below formations other than in rock;
2. Place and compact Grade 10 concrete as specified in Worksection CON1 below
formations in rock;
3. Deposit granular fill material below standing water;
4. In other circumstances where the CM requires stabilisation of existing material,
use rock fill material (Grade 400) deposited directly into the original material
and compacted to form a stable foundation on which to construct the subsequent
work.
EAR1.W460.9 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF EARTHWORKS MATERIAL

1. Do not handle or store in a manner which will result in segregation, deterioration,
erosion or instability of the material;
2. Keep different types of earthworks material separate from each other. Maintain
earthworks material which is suitable for use as fill material in a suitable
condition and free from contamination by other materials;
3. Stockpile excavated materials away from nullahs, stream courses and covered
culverts at a point convenient for direct loading onto transport in such a manner
as to cause the minimum nuisance to the public;
4. Remove topsoil when required before starting excavation or filling and, unless
otherwise specified, deposit on Site in temporary heaps not greater than 2 m in
height for re-use. Ensure the soil is kept free from contamination and undue
compaction;
5. Temporary spoil heaps will not be allowed in certain areas. Obtain CM's
permission for location;
6. Level and drain properly the material handling and storage areas. Spray
stockpiles of material with water or a dust suppression chemical to minimize
dust generation.
EAR1.W470.9 EXISTING DRAINS AND SERVICES

During excavation and earthworks:
1. Take all precautions to prevent damage and excessive settlement to existing
drains and services;
2. Notify the CM and the Authority of any damage and any settlement in excess of
the limits allowed by relevant authority immediately and make good;
3. Temporarily divert ditches, land drains and other waterways found in excavation
and subsequently reinstate to Approval;
4. Excavate by hand adjacent to utilities that are known, proven or suspected to
exist.
EAR1.W480.9 EXCAVATION ADJACENT EXISTING STRUCTURES

Excavate by hand unless otherwise permitted by the CM.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W490.9 TRIMMING
Neatly trim the face of excavations. Do not trim the side faces of excavation for at
least 24 hours after placing any blinding concrete.
EAR1.W500.9 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES FOR UTILITIES

1. The length of trench excavation left open at any one time shall not exceed that
agreed by the CM;
2. Unless otherwise permitted by the CM, do not excavate trenches for utilities in
areas of fill until the fill material has been deposited and compacted up to the
earthworks final surface or formation or up to 1 m above the top of the utility,
whichever is lower.
OBSTRUCTIONS
EAR1.W610.9 BURIED OBSTRUCTIONS
Notify the CM without delay of the location and nature of any unforeseen
obstruction encountered during excavation.
EAR1.W620.9 DISUSED DRAINS AND MANHOLES

If required by the CM, take up disused drains encountered during the excavation,
clear away and:
1. Remove any contaminated earth;
2. Disinfect as necessary and seal off ends with concrete;
3. Break up and remove disused manholes and backfill where required, properly
compacted;
4. Submit details of filling materials to be used for Approval.
EAR1.W630.9 OLD UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES

1. If required by the CM, break out and remove old walls, foundations, piles and
other underground structures encountered during the excavation and backfill
where required, properly compacted;
2. Submit details of filling materials to be used for Approval.
EAR1.W640.9 BOULDERS
Treat boulders that intersect the earthworks final surface or formation as excavation
proceeds by methods agreed by the CM. Do not leave boulders protruding unless
permitted by the CM.
EAR1.W650.9 PILED FOUNDATIONS

Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to tops of piles during excavation.
CUTTINGS
EAR1.W710.9 SURFACES OF CUTTINGS
Remove the following from surfaces as required by the CM:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1. Inferior stone or soft material occurring between layers of compact rock;

2. Rock which the CM considers will not withstand weather sufficiently;
3. Rock fragments which move when prised with a crow-bar.
EAR1.W720.9 DEPTH OF REMOVAL

Comply with the CM's instructions on the depth from the face of cuttings to which
material is to be removed.
EAR1.W730.9 MAKING GOOD

Build up to required profile with Grade 15/20 concrete as specified in Worksection
CON1 or masonry laid with cement mortar finishing in "rock texture" similar to
adjoining natural rock faces.
DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

EAR1.W810.9 UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIAL
1. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract:
a. Take measures to sort and separate excavated material on Site for use in the
permanent works according to the Environmental Management Plan;
b. Dispose of the excavated material, which in the opinion of the CM cannot be
selected, processed or mixed in a practical manner to make it suitable for use
in the permanent work;
c. Dispose of excavated material that is surplus to the requirements of the
permanent works. Take measures to sort and separate the surplus material
according to the Environmental Management Plan before disposal.
2. Take possession of unsuitable material and surplus material, unless otherwise
provided for in the Contract.
EAR1.W820.9 SUITABLE MATERIAL

Do not remove suitable material from Site without the permission of the CM, unless
surplus to the requirements of the Contract.
EAR1.W830.9 DUMPING OF UNSUITABLE AND SURPLUS MATERIALS

Inform the CM of the proposed dumping areas and take responsibility for making
arrangements for disposal of these materials. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the
CM retains the right to direct the manner in which the dumping is carried out.
EAR1.W835.9 DISPOSAL OR REUSE OF MARINE MUD


_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W840.9 ON SITE SORTING OF CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION

MATERIALS
1. All construction and demolition (C&D) materials arising from or in connection
with the works shall be sorted on-site and be separated into different groups for
disposal at landfills, public filling areas, in filling areas within the Site, in filling
areas outside the Site provided by the Contractor, or recycling as appropriate.
The inert portion of the C&D material is the public fill. All public fills to be
disposed of at public filling areas shall be sorted and broken down according to
the Dumping Licence conditions. The non-inert portion of the C&D material is
the C&D waste which shall be disposed of at the landfill;
2. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, all C&D material arising from or in
connection with the works shall become the property of the Contractor when it is
removed from the Site. Promptly remove all sorted and processed materials
arising from or in connection with the works from the Site on a regular basis as
the works proceed;
3. A method statement for the sorting, processing and disposal of C&D materials
arising from or in connection with the works shall be submitted to the CM's
Representative for approval 14 days before the commencement of any sections
of the Works.
EAR1.W845.9 TRIP-TICKET SYSTEM

Comply with the Trip-ticket System as specified in Preliminaries Specification for
the disposal of construction and demolition (C&D) materials generated from the
Works.
RETAINING WALLS, SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS

AND OTHER STRUCTURES
EAR1.W910.9 SIZE OF EXCAVATIONS
1. When excavating for structures, pits, and trenches keep to the minimum size
necessary to construct the permanent work. Keep the sides of excavations
vertical unless otherwise permitted by the CM;
2. Obtain Approval for the length of trench excavation left open at any one time
and do not exceed that amount.
EAR1.W920.9 APPROVAL OF EXCAVATION BOTTOMS

Bottoms of excavations are to be Approved before any new work is laid on them.
Inform the CM when the excavation is ready for inspection.
EAR1.W930.9 FOUNDING OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS

1. All shallow foundations (rafts or pads) of the structures specified in Project
Specific Specification shall be founded on material of the type and / or bearing
capacity specified and at the founding levels shown on the drawings unless
2. The founding bases of shallow foundations shall be free of unsuitable materials.
If the base lies below the groundwater table and where necessary, proper means
shall be provided to divert and / or lower the groundwater such that the integrity
of the exposed founding material(s) and the subsequent concrete casting will be
ensured;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Sink drillholes for carrying out Standard Penetration tests (SPT) in accordance
with BS EN ISO 22476-3:2005, modified by Geoguide 2 as necessary, to the
founding materials (except for foundations on rock). The SPT shall be carried
out by a contractor on the Housing Authority List of Ground Investigation
Contractors. The minimum number and depth of the drillholes shall be as
specified in Project Specific Specification. Unless otherwise Instructed,
commence the drillhole at existing ground level before excavation for the
foundations and carry out the SPT at intervals as specified in Project Specific
Specification. Submit to the CM the preliminary test reports within 2 days and
the final test reports within 2 weeks upon completion of the SPT;
4. If Instructed, carry out Plate Load Test for shallow foundations (except for
foundations on rock) in accordance with GIN.T190 and the Code of Practice for
Foundations issued by the Buildings Department;
5. If Instructed, take down the excavations for founding of shallow foundations
(except for foundations on rock) first to not less than 300 mm above the
designed founding level and carry out dynamic probe tests or other tests. The
dynamic probe tests shall be in accordance with Appendix 7.1 of the 'General
Specification for Civil Engineering Works', The Government of the Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region, 2006 Edition. Submit the test results within 2
days and a record plan showing all the locations and levels of the dynamic probe
tests within 1 week upon completion of the tests;
6. If considered necessary after examining the actual ground exposures and / or test
results, the CM may order further excavation to deepen the founding level of the
foundations and / or other measures to ensure a satisfactory foundation. The
bases shall be inspected and approved by the CM before concreting;
7. If considered necessary the CM may order compaction of the whole or parts of
the founding bases of shallow foundations by at least 12 passes of a vibratory
roller, or other accepted construction plant, with a minimum static load per
100 mm width of roll of 2kN or 4kN. In areas adjacent to structures and utilities,
which are existing or constructed as part of the permanent works, compaction
shall be carried out by hand-rammers or manually operated power equipment in
a manner that these structures and utilities are not disturbed or damaged.
EAR1.W940.9 PROVING BEDROCK FOR FOOTINGS (RAFTS AND PADS)

1. Where footings (rafts/pads) are specified to be founded on bedrock, carry out
proving of bedrock in accordance with the following sub-clauses as directed by
the CM. Clear completed excavations for footings of all soils and loose
materials;
2. Footings shall be founded on bedrock of minimum bearing capacity as specified
in Project Specific Specification;
3. When Instructed, upon excavation reaching bedrock, take NX size cores for a
depth of 5000 mm into the bedrock and provide rock core samples and records
of bores for the CM's inspection; cores to be taken at the frequency as specified
in Project Specific Specification;
4. When Instructed, carry out laboratory compression tests or field point load tests
on recovered cores to determine rock strength;
5. Fill core holes for the full depth with 1:3 cement and sand grout with
water/cement ratio of 0.6;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. When Instructed, upon excavation reaching bedrock, proving test at the

frequency as specified in the Project Specific Specification shall be conducted
with a percussive air rock drill to be supplied by the Contractor, of not less than
35 kg in weight and fitted with newly sharpened 40 mm diameter steel drilling
bit. The proving test shall be performed with 25 mm diameter steel drilling rods.
At the completion of each 1.5 m of drilling, the drilling bit shall be replaced with
a newly sharpened 40 mm diameter bit. Additional lengths of drilling rock shall
be fitted at that time as appropriate. The rock drill shall be at all times free to
penetrate under its own weight and in a vertical direction. Perform the proving
test by drilling minimum 5.0 m below the founding level. The results of each
proving test shall be recorded by the Contractor, and he shall plot the time in
minutes taken to drill each 300 mm on a graph. A 20 mm diameter steel rod
5.5 m long shall be placed in each completed drillhole for the CM's inspection.
Fill drill holes for the full depth with 1:3 cement and sand grout with
water/cement ratio of 0.6.
REMEDIAL WORKS
EAR1.W1010.9 EXCAVATION BOTTOMS DAMAGED AFTER APPROVAL
If, due to water or other causes, the bottom of the excavation becomes unsuitable
after Approval, excavate further to a new Approved level, and backfill with Grade
15/20 concrete as specified in Worksection CON1.
EAR1.W1020.9 OVER EXCAVATION

Backfill and compact in accordance with this Specification or other Approved means
those areas where the Contractor's method involves excavation in excess of that
specified.
EAR1.W1030.9 DAMAGED SURFACES

1. Make good surfaces after excavation which, due to exposure to weather
conditions, flooding or other cause, have been allowed to deteriorate to a
condition unacceptable to the CM;
2. Where this is the case carry out additional excavation and filling in accordance
with this Specification, or by waiting until the condition of the exposed material
is, in the opinion of the CM, fit to receive the backfill.
FILLING GENERALLY
EAR1.W1110.9 USE OF ROCK CRUSHING PLANT
Do not use rock crushing plant on the Site unless permitted by the CM to do so.
EAR1.W1115.9 USE OF GRADE 200 RECYCLED ROCK FILL

Where the use of Grade 200 Recycled Rock Fill (RR 200) is specified in the
Contract, comply with the requirements stated in EAR1.W1720 to EAR1.W1750
and EAR1.W1910 to EAR1.W1930 in respect of the deposition and compaction of
this material.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W1120.9 HAULAGE OF FILL MATERIAL

Do not haul fill material to the area of fill until compaction plant operating at the
area of fill is sufficient to achieve the specified requirements for relative compaction
of the fill material.
EAR1.W1130.9 REMOVAL OF EARTHWORKS MATERIAL

Do not remove from the Site any earthworks material that is required for use in the
permanent work as fill material without prior Approval. Notify the CM before any
earthworks material is removed from the Site.
PREPARATION FOR FILLING

EAR1.W1210.9 EXISTING GROUND
Prepare the surfaces on which fill material is to be deposited after site clearance in
accordance with the following requirements:
1. Remove topsoil, grass, and other organic matter;
2. Remove soft spots, boulders, and other materials, which in the opinion of the
CM are unsuitable or unstable;
3. Deal with voids as stated in the Contract or Instructed.
EAR1.W1220.9 WATER-COURSES
Do not place fill material until watercourses have been diverted or under-drained.
EAR1.W1230.9 SLOPING GROUND

1. Cut benches and install sub-soil drainage system as stated in the Contract;
2. Do not place fill material on sloping ground until benches have been completed
at the area receiving the fill material.
EAR1.W1240.9 AVAILABILITY OF PLANT

Commence filling works only when sufficient compaction plant is in operation at the
place of deposition to ensure compliance with the requirements of this Specification
and when the CM's permission has been obtained.
EAR1.W1250.9 SCARIFYING
Scarify surfaces other than rock to a depth of 200 mm and compact to the same
standard as the fill material which is to be deposited.
FILLING OPERATIONS
EAR1.W1310.9 DISPOSAL OF WATER
1. Keep the fill area free of water;
2. Leave surfaces with no area that can retain water at the end of each day's work
and, if necessary, cut ditches to achieve this.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W1320.9 APPROVAL
Obtain Approval before deposition of fill material starts and before any fill layer is
covered.
EAR1.W1330.9 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS

Stop work when the state of the weather is such that, in the opinion of the CM, it will
adversely affect the placing and compacting of fill.
EAR1.W1340.9 APPROVAL OF REMEDIAL MEASURES

Obtain Approval for and prior to carrying out remedial measures.
EAR1.W1350.9 REMEDIAL MEASURES FOR DAMAGED FILL AREAS

Adopt one of the following procedures when material placed and compacted or
awaiting compaction reaches a condition which, in the opinion of the CM does not
comply with this Specification or has been damaged either by weather or in any
other way:
1. Remove the material from Site, replacing it with equivalent suitable material;
2. Remove the material to stockpile until it is in a condition suitable for re-use;
3. Make good the material by mechanical or chemical means;
4. Cease work on the material until it is in a suitable physical condition for re-use.
EAR1.W1360.9 REMEDIAL MEASURES WHERE FILL OVERLAID

Remove, and adopt sub-clause (1) or (2) in EAR1.W1350 for any material not
complying with this Specification that has been overlaid by more recently laid
material.
EAR1.W1370.9 RESTRICTIONS ON USE OF FILL MATERIAL

1. Do not use excavated material required for use in the permanent works which is
capable of being selected, processed and mixed to make it suitable for use as fill
material for any other purposes unless permitted by the CM;
2. Replace any such excavated material which the CM permits to be removed from
the Site or used for other purposes by an equivalent Approved material of the
same volume after compaction as the material replaced.
EAR1.W1380.9 MIX PROPORTIONS, MIXING AND PLACING RECONSTITUTED SOIL

1. For reconstituted soil use 1:3:12 cement, sand, special filling material by weight;
2. Mix in a concrete mixer with sufficient water to ensure the mix is just damp
enough to enable it to be properly mixed and compacted;
3. Place each batch in its final position and compact within 30 minutes of the water
being added. Mixed material not placed and compacted within this time limit
will be rejected;
4. Hand mixing of small quantities may be permitted by the CM.
EAR1.W1390.9 SETTLEMENT
Make good, to the satisfaction of the CM, settlement in filling and backfilling and
any consequential damage that may occur up to the end of the Maintenance Period.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FILLING FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES ETC

EAR1.W1410.9 ADJACENT UTILITIES OR STRUCTURES
1. Within 500 mm of a structure or utility except as stated in EAR1.W1420, deposit
fill material of:
a. Fine fill material, unless otherwise stated in the Contract;
b. The fine fill material may contain no more than 5% by weight of fresh,
slightly decomposed or moderately decomposed rock fragments of up to
200 mm maximum size provided that these rock fragments do not cause any
damage to the structures or utilities and do not interfere with compaction
requirements.
2. Do not deposit fill material adjacent to or above structures or utilities until the
construction of the structure or utility is sufficiently advanced to accept the
imposed forces without disturbance or damage;
3. Deposit evenly on all sides of structures or utilities and in such a manner that the
structure or utility is not disturbed or damaged;
4. Compact the fill material in such a manner that the structure or utility is not
disturbed or damaged;
5. Where sheet piling, timbering or other temporary supports to the excavations are
not to be left in place, remove the sheet piling, timbering or other temporary
supports as deposition of fill material proceeds, in such a manner that the
stability of the adjacent ground is maintained and the compacted fill material is
not disturbed.
EAR1.W1420.9 FILLING AROUND WATER, SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE PIPES

Where these have been laid as part of the permanent works:
1. Use special filling material unless otherwise stated in the Contract;
2. Deposit the fill material in layers not exceeding 100 mm thick to a level of
300 mm above the top of the pipe;
3. Deposit the fill material in such a manner that the layer on one side of the pipe is
not more than 100 mm higher than the layer on the other side;
4. Compact the fill material by hand rammers or manually operated power
equipment;
5. Compact the fill material within 300 mm above the top of sewage and drainage
pipes to obtain a relative compaction of at least 85% throughout.
EAR1.W1430.9 BACKFILLING TO FOUNDATIONS

Backfill to top of foundations with general filling materials.
EAR1.W1440.9 BACKFILLING TO TRENCHES FOR AUTOMATED REFUSE

COLLECTION SYSTEM (ARCS)
Backfill to top of trenches with excavated or Approved general filling materials.
Cover to ARCS conveyance pipe to be minimum 600 mm generally and 800 mm in
vehicle circulation areas.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES

EAR1.W1510.9 PREPARATION
Divert existing watercourses and channels as required and clear the same of all
vegetation growth and unsuitable material.
EAR1.W1520.9 FILLING
Filling materials and method of construction to be used are specified in Project
Specific Specification.
BACKFILLING BEHIND RETAINING WALLS

EAR1.W1610.9 PLACING FILTER MATERIAL
1. Carefully place filter material to avoid contamination and damage;
2. Bed in layers simultaneously with the filling material and compact.
EAR1.W1620.9 FILLING
Unless otherwise specified place special filling material as backfilling and compact
by the Performance Specification method of compaction: EAR1.W1810 -
EAR1.W1860. Compaction plant is to be of such a size as to ensure that no undue
stress is placed on the wall during compaction.
FORMING EMBANKMENTS AND PLATFORMS

EAR1.W1710.9 MATERIAL SELECTION
Form embankments with special fill material unless otherwise specified.
EAR1.W1720.9 DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

1. Deposit fill material obtained from excavation within the Site in its final location
as soon as practicable after it has been excavated;
2. Build up embankments evenly over the full width;
3. Control the construction method to ensure that any compaction of the fill
material resulting from the passage of construction plant or haulage vehicles is
uniform;
4. In areas of fill formed of fill material other than rock fill material, form
earthworks final surfaces sloping at a gradient exceeding 1 to 3 (vertical to
horizontal) by over-filling and cutting back after compaction. Extend the over-
filling beyond the earthworks final surface by a horizontal distance of 500 mm
or three times the thickness of the compacted layer, whichever is greater;
5. Deposit fill material in layers of a thickness appropriate to the compaction
method to be used. In deposition of fill material, ensure that a good bonding is
achieved between layers of fill, and unless otherwise directed by the CM, do not
place fill material on previously compacted layers unless the surface has been
scarified or otherwise broken up and, if necessary, watered.;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Unless otherwise permitted by the CM, construct layers of fill material

horizontally, except for any gradient required for drainage, and keep the
thickness of each layer uniform over the area to be filled. Bring up the fill
material from the bottom in uniform horizontal layers, with the top of each layer
graded to enable surface water to drain readily;
7. If the difference in level between adjacent areas to be filled exceeds 1 m, bench
the edge of the higher area before fill material is placed against it;
8. Except for intermediate fill area, do not deposit fill material by end-tipping, by
pushing loose material down slope faces or by other methods which may result
in segregation or inadequate compaction of the fill material;
9. Make good damage to compacted layers caused by construction traffic.
EAR1.W1730.9 COMPACTION
1. Compact filling material, other than rock fill and material as stated in
EAR1.W1940 in accordance with the Compaction by Performance Specification:
EAR1.W1810 - EAR1.W1860 unless otherwise specified;
2. Compact rock fill material in accordance with the Compaction by Method
Specification: EAR1.W1910 - EAR1.W1930;
3. Compact general fill material with a large portion of coarse material in
accordance with EAR1.W1940.
EAR1.W1740.9 ROCK FILL EMBANKMENTS AND PLATFORMS

1. Place rock fill material so that the final compacted thickness of each layer
exceeds 1.5 times and does not exceed twice the nominal Grade size of the rock
fill material;
2. Spread and level the fill material by a crawler tractor weighing not less than 15
tonnes and compact the fill material in accordance with the Compaction by
Method Specification: EAR1.W1910 - EAR1.W1930;
3. Ensure each layer consists of reasonably graded rock and fill the surface voids
with fragments of rock before the next layer is deposited.
EAR1.W1750.9 BLINDING ROCK FILL EMBANKMENTS AND PLATFORM

1. Blind the top surface and side slopes with fine fill material to seal the surface;
2. Top soil may be used to blind side slopes and verges.
EAR1.W1760.9 ISOLATED BOULDERS

At the discretion of the CM isolated boulders, each within the range 0.015 m³ to
0.1 m³ in volume, may be incorporated into embankments not of rock fill, provided
that the specified compaction requirements are met. Any boulders exceeding
0.015 m³ must be placed at a minimum of 2 m below formation level of
carriageways or hard shoulders.
EAR1.W1770.9 CULVERTS AND DRAINS ETC

Form embankments equally on both sides of culverts or drain pipes and the like.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W1780.9 SURFACES USED BY CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC

1. Where surfaces of embankments are required for use by construction traffic,
build up and maintain at a minimum of 300 mm above formation level, the area
between extremities of carriageways, including any central reserve and hard
shoulders before subsequently trimming to formation level;
2. Make good surface damage;
3. Ensure that no construction traffic uses the area once trimming to final formation
level has commenced, with the exception of constructional plant necessary for
such trimming and ensure that no damage is caused to the surface by such
constructional plant.
REUSE OF MARINE MUD FOR BACKFILLING

EAR1.W1785.9 REUSE OF MARINE MUD FOR BACKFILLING
Where specified to reuse marine mud for backfilling, at least 28 days before
commencement of excavation works, obtain CM's approval for backfilling with
cement-stabilized marine mud, which shall have undergone an approved cement-
stabilization process to avoid undue ground settlement in future, and comply with the
following requirements:
1. Submit a detailed method statement of the proposed cement-stabilization and
backfilling processes, which shall include but not be limited to the method and
procedure of the proposed cement-stabilization process, the sorting and
temporary storage of the materials to prevent cross-contamination with other
materials, the mix proportion with cement, granular soil, water and other
approved additives, the methods of mixing, backfilling, compacting, curing,
sampling and testing of the cement-stabilized materials to achieve 7-day cube
test of 100 kN/m² minimum in accordance with CS1;
2. Prepare sufficient test samples on Site and test the cement-stabilized materials at
7-day in accordance with CS1 for determination of the 7-day cube strength to
demonstrate the suitability of the proposed mix proportion and method of
construction. Appoint a HOKLAS accredited testing laboratory approved by the
CM to carry out the test;
3. Carry out trials on Site and all necessary testing to demonstrate the suitability of
the proposed cement-stabilization and backfilling processes for the Works to the
satisfaction of the CM;
4. Backfill with and compact the cement-stabilized materials in accordance with
the approved method statement and in layers of not greater than 300 mm thick to
achieve a standard of compaction as stipulated in EAR1.W1850 and
EAR1.W1860, unless otherwise approved by the CM;
5. All areas backfilled with cement-stabilized marine mud should be covered on
top by suitable materials all in accordance with Worksection EAR1 and/or other
specified materials for a minimum thickness of 500 mm;
6. For piling works, do not backfill the fill areas between future ground level and
1.5 m below the future ground level with cement-stabilized marine mud unless
otherwise approved by the CM;
7. Do not backfill the fill areas between top of pile caps and underside of ground
slabs of domestic blocks with cement-stabilized marine mud without CM's prior
approval. Restrictions on backfilling of cement-stabilized marine mud for
external areas are as follow:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Pipes/ducts Range in level at Range in level at Drainage for

carriageway where locations other than Cable /valve
ducts/pipes are carriageway where pit required
located with which ducts/pipes are
no backfilling of located with which
Cement–Stabilized no backfilling of
Marine Mud is Cement–Stabilized
allowed Marine Mud is
allowed
Water Pipes From FGL to - From FGL to - Yes
1400 mm below 1000 mm below
FGL FGL
Gas Pipe From FGL to - From FGL to - Yes
1300 mm below 1000 mm below
FGL FGL
Power Cable NA NA Yes
Duct
Telecom NA NA No.
Cable Duct
(FGL = Finished Ground Level)
Backfilling by cement-stabilized marine mud directly underneath the cable pits
or valve pits is not allowed for proper drainage of water from the pits. Water
pipes and gas pipes are not allowed to be directly surrounded by backfilled
cement-stabilized marine mud for ease of maintenance. Cable ducts are allowed
to be surrounded by cement-stabilized marine mud subject to proper
coordination of works sequence with utility undertakings and sub-contractors;
8. Sink drillholes for carrying out Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) in accordance
with BS1377:Part 9:1990 (Test 3.3), modified by Geoguide 2 at 1.5 m intervals
to below the backfilled material to demonstrate that the relative strength of the
stabilized material is achieved. Appoint a contractor on the Housing Authority
List of Ground Investigation Contractors to carry out the SPT 7 days after
backfilling. The minimum number of the drillholes shall be one drillhole for
100 m³ of the backfilling or part thereof in each foundation base on each
operation day, and to a depth and location as directed by the CM;
9. Submit to the CM preliminary test reports within 1 day and final test reports
within 1 week upon completion of the SPT;
10. In any situation, a SPT N-value of less than 10 shall render the backfilling
unsuccessful. In this situation, submit a remedial proposal, which shall include
but not be limited to excavation of the backfilled material, adjustment of the mix
proportion and method of construction, and re-execution of the Works, to the
CM for approval. Bear all costs and no extension of time is allowed for the
remedial works and all associated consequences;
11. Obtain EPD's permit for disposal of all surplus cement-stabilized materials to a
suitable dumping facility and dispose the materials accordingly after the
backfilling. Make reference to ETWB Technical Circular (Works) No. 34/2002
and 19/2005 and other relevant regulations and guidelines for obtaining the
permit;
12. Refer to the drawing in Appendix APC to this Specification for the profile of
backfilling around foundations.
13. Provide adequate personal protective equipments to the workers to protect them
against direct contact with contaminated marine mud.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
USE OF SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL

MATERIAL
EAR1.W1790.N USE OF SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL (SCM)
1. Batching and mixing
a. Measuring and weighing equipment for batching SCM shall be maintained
in a clean and serviceable condition. The equipment shall be zeroed daily
and calibrated at a frequency provided in the submission under sub-clause (4)
of EAR1.W060. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within
3% of the quantity of cementitious materials, total aggregates or water being
measured and within 5% of the quantity of admixtures being measured;
b. The quantities of cementitious materials, fine aggregate and pulverized
material shall be measured by mass. The mass of aggregates shall be
adjusted to allow for the free moisture content of the aggregates;
c. Separate weighing equipment shall be used for cementitious material;
d. The quantity of water shall be adjusted for the free moisture content of the
aggregates and shall be measured by mass or volume;
e. Liquid admixtures shall be measured by mass or volume and powdered
admixtures shall be measured by mass;
f. The quantities of SCM mixed and the speed of operation of a mixer shall
comply with the supplier's recommendations;
g. A mixer shall not be loaded in excess of its rated capacity and shall be
emptied before being re-charged. A mixer that has been out of use for more
than 30 minutes shall be cleaned before fresh SCM is mixed in it;
h. If a mixer has been used to mix concrete, it shall be thoroughly cleaned
before mixing fresh SCM in it.
i. Mixing times or the number and rate of revolutions of mixer drums shall not
be less than those recommended by the supplier unless it is demonstrated in
the production of SCM that a shorter time or fewer or slower revolutions are
adequate. Constituents shall be thoroughly mixed and admixtures shall be
uniformly distributed throughout the SCM;
j. Water shall be added to truck mixed SCM at the batching plant and shall not
be added in transit or at the Site.
2. Transportation of SCM
a. SCM shall not be transported in a manner that will result in contamination,
segregation or loss of constituents;
b. SCM batched off the Site shall be transported to the Site in purpose-made
agitators operating continuously or in truck mixers;
c. Truck mixers transporting SCM shall be thoroughly cleaned before loading
and transporting fresh SCM.
3. Records of SCM
a. Delivery notes shall be provided for each delivery of SCM to the Site. The
delivery notes shall be kept on the Site and available for inspection by the
CM at all times. Delivery notes shall contain the following details:
i. Serial number of the delivery note;
ii. Date;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
iii. Name and location of the batching and mixing plant;

iv. Registration number of the delivery vehicle;
v. Name of the purchaser;
vi. Name and location of the Site;
vii. Designation of SCM mix;
viii. Sources of cementitious materials and fine aggregate;
ix. Quantity of SCM;
x. Time of introduction of water to SCM;
xi. Source, formulation and proprietor of the SCM mix.
b. Records of backfilling operations shall be kept by the Contractor on the Site
and available for inspection by the CM at all times. Records shall contain
the following details:
i. Date;
ii. Designation of SCM mix;
iii. Total quantity of each SCM mix produced that day;
iv. Serial number of the delivery note;
v. Arrival time of the delivery vehicle;
vi. Time of completion of the discharge;
vii. Location where SCM is placed;
viii. Results of flowability tests;
ix. Details of test cubes made for compressive strength tests;
x. Details of test samples made for hardening time tests;
xi. Details of testing locations for initial strength tests and thermal
conductivity tests;
4. Placing of SCM
a. Prior to placement of the SCM, consent from existing underground
installations owners should be available if their existing underground
installations will be embedded by the SCM;
b. Permission from the CM shall be obtained before SCM is placed in any part
of the permanent work. If placing of SCM is not started within 24 hours of
the permission having been given, permission shall be obtained from the
CM again. The Contractor shall inform the CM before backfilling starts and
allow sufficient time for the CM or his representatives to inspect the work to
be backfilled;
c. Fresh SCM shall be placed in its final position within 2½ hours of the
introduction of water to the SCM mix;
d. Additional protective sheets shall be used around the discharging area to
avoid any splashing of SCM. In addition, trunking or chutes shall be used to
place SCM which will fall more than 2.7 m to further control the splashing
unless otherwise permitted by the CM. Trunkings or chutes, where being
used, shall be clean and used in such a way to avoid segregation and loss of
constituents of the SCM;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
e. SCM shall be placed in horizontal layers in a manner that non-permanent

components of lateral support can be removed after placement;
f. SCM can be placed with concrete pumps, which shall be operated and
maintained in accordance with the supplier’s recommendations. The pumps
and pipelines shall be maintained in a clean condition. Joints in pipelines
shall be tightly fixed to ensure no grout loss.
COMPACTION BY PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATION
EAR1.W1810.9 PROCEDURE
1. Compact fill material in areas of fill in uniform layers to a stable condition as
soon as practicable after deposition and in a manner appropriate to the location
and to the material to be compacted;
2. Obtain the permission of the CM before the next layer is deposited on each layer
of compact fill material;
3. Agree with the CM the thickness of each layer which is to be compatible with
the compaction plant used. Carry out carefully controlled tests to determine the
optimum placing thickness for the particular fill and the number of passes to
achieve the required density with the compaction plant provided;
4. Do not place any permanent fill until such tests have been agreed with the CM.
Earthmoving plant will not be accepted as compaction equipment.
EAR1.W1820.9 TESTING
Test each class of material to be compacted in accordance with the compaction tests
specified in the Testing section of this Worksection.
EAR1.W1830.9 MOISTURE CONTENT

Other than rock fill material and the material as stated in EAR1.W1940, the moisture
content of the fill material during compaction shall be within ±3% of the optimum
moisture content determined in accordance with the test methods specified in the
Testing section of this Worksection, provided that the fill material is still capable of
being compacted in accordance with the specified requirements to form stable areas
of fill. Take all necessary measures to achieve and maintain the specified moisture
content.
EAR1.W1840.9 FIELD DENSITY

After compaction carry out insitu field density tests in accordance with the
compaction tests specified in the Testing section of this Worksection. Test each
layer and obtain Approval before placing of the next layer.
EAR1.W1850.9 STANDARD OF COMPACTION

Unless specified otherwise, compact fill material to obtain a relative compaction of
at least 95% of the maximum dry density in general and at least 98% for fill within
200 mm of any formation level or slope profile.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W1860.9 STANDARD OF COMPACTION BETWEEN PILE CAPS AND

SUSPENDED SLABS AND AROUND PILE CAPS
The relative compaction of compacted material in the fill areas between top of pile
cap and underside of suspended slab to be minimum 90% of the maximum dry
density. Compact fill material around pile caps to achieve a relative compaction of
at least 95%.
COMPACTION BY METHOD SPECIFICATION

EAR1.W1910.9 ADOPTION
Use for rock fill material and in exceptional circumstances for other suitable material
when Approved.
EAR1.W1920.9 ROLLERS
Use vibratory rollers having a static load of at least 2 kN per 100 mm width of roll
for layers with a compacted thickness not exceeding 500 mm, and at least 4 kN for
layers with a compacted thickness exceeding 500 mm.
EAR1.W1930.9 COMPACTION METHOD

1. Compact each layer of rock fill material by at least eight passes of a vibrating
roller, or by other Approved equivalent compaction method;
2. Compact the final surface of rock fill material by at least two additional passes
of a vibrating roller or by other Approved equivalent method;
3. Fill voids as compaction proceeds.
EAR1.W1940.9 COMPACTION OF GENERAL FILL MATERIAL WITH A LARGE

PORTION OF COARSE MATERIAL
1. For general fill material of which less than 90% passes a 20 mm BS test sieve, it
will be difficult to permit determination of the moisture content and maximum
dry density according to EAR1.T350, EAR1.T420 and EAR1.T540. This type
of material shall be compacted to the requirements of sub-clauses (2), (3) and (4);
2. Spread and level each horizontal layer of general fill material with a thickness
not less than 1.5 times of the maximum size of the general fill material and not
exceeding the maximum depth of compacted layer in accordance with the
following Table. If this criterion is not met due to the presence of over-sized
coarse material in the general fill, remove and break down the over-sized coarse
material to sizes acceptable to the CM. Compact each layer systematically by a
vibratory roller with the stipulated minimum number of passes corresponding to
the minimum static load per 100 mm width of the roller;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Compaction requirement for general fill material

with a large portion of coarse material
Force per Well-graded material Uniform-graded material
100 mm width
(kN) Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
depth of no. of depth of no. of
compacted passes compacted passes
layer (mm) layer (mm)
0.25-0.45 150 16
0.46-0.70 150 12
0.71-1.25 125 12 150 10
1.26-1.75 150 8 200 10
1.76-2.30 150 4 225 10
2.31-2.80 175 4 250 10
2.81-3.50 200 4 275 8
3.51-4.20 225 4 300 8
4.21-4.90 250 4 300 8
3. Count only the number of passes of the roller when the roller is travelled on the
material to be compacted at a speed of not more than 2 km per hour with full
vibration. Disregard plant other than vibratory roller carrying out material
spreading or providing some preliminary compaction, to assist the use of heavier
plant in counting the number of passes;
4. Variation from the method or the use of plant different from that specified in
sub-clause (2) will be permitted only if the Contractor demonstrates at site trials
that equivalent compaction is achieved by the alternative method or plant.
Agree with CM and obtain CM's approval on the procedure to be adopted for
these site trials;
5. Without prejudice to the provision of the Conditions of Contract and in order
that the CM may take proper provision for the supervision of compaction in the
permanent work, apply in writing to the CM for permission to carry out
compaction not less than 24 hours before the compaction process;
6. When materials of widely divergent grading are used in embankments and fill
areas, spread and compact the materials in separate clearly defined areas;
7. If more than one class of material is being used in such a way that in the opinion
of the CM, it is not practicable to define the areas in which each class occurs,
operate the compaction plant as if only the material which requires the greatest
compaction effort is being compacted.
INTERMEDIATE AREAS OF FILL

EAR1.W2010.9 DEPOSITING
Fill material may be deposited in intermediate areas of fill by end-tipping or by
pushing into position until, in the opinion of the CM, it is sufficient to form a stable
foundation on which to construct the subsequent work.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Except in areas of fill formed of rock fill material or fill material as stated in
EAR1.W1940, compact fill material in intermediate areas of fill to a degree which in
the opinion of the CM is practicable. Compact fill material above the level stated in
clause EAR1.W2010 to obtain a relative compaction of at least:
1. 90% throughout;
2. 95% within 1500 mm of earthworks final surfaces and formations; and
3. 98% within 200 mm of formations.
COMPLETION OF GENERAL EARTHWORKS

SURFACES
EAR1.W2110.9 GENERAL
1. Complete earthworks final surfaces to a stable condition as soon as practicable
after excavation or after deposition and compaction of fill material has been
completed;
2. Carry out the subsequent permanent work or surface protection as soon as
practicable after the earthworks final surface has been completed;
3. Properly treat exposed earth by compaction, turfing, hydroseeding, vegetable
planting or sealing with latex, vinyl, bitumen, shotcrete or other suitable surface
stabilizer within six months after the last construction activity on the exposed
earth;
4. Complete earthworks final surfaces to smooth alignments without abrupt
irregularities unless otherwise stated in the Contract;
5. Complete formations above structures or utilities after construction of the
structure or utility.
Compact formations to obtain a relative compaction of at least 98% to a depth of
200 mm below the formation.
EAR1.W2130.9 PROOF ROLLING

1. Unless otherwise agreed by the CM, carry out proof rolling on formations;
2. Roll the formation in the presence of the CM by at least two passes of a non-
vibrating rubber tyred roller;
3. The roller must have a static load per 100 mm width of roll of at least 4 kN and
travel at a speed not exceeding 2 km/h.
EAR1.W2140.9 MAKING GOOD DEFECTS

Make good to Approval any defect in the formation which is revealed during proof
rolling by deformation of the formation which in the opinion of the CM is excessive.
EAR1.W2150.9 PAVEMENT FORMATIONS

After all other formation work and testing have been completed and damage caused
by testing reinstated, roll any pavement formation with one pass of a smooth steel-
wheeled non-vibrating roller. The roller must have a load per 100 mm width of roll
of at least 2 kN.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W2160.9 PROTECTION OF FORMATIONS

Carry out the following procedures:
1. Unless otherwise permitted by the CM, protect formation surfaces which will
not be immediately covered by the subsequent permanent work by methods
agreed by the CM;
2. Maintain earthworks final surfaces and formations in a stable condition and
protect from damage due to water or other causes and from exposure to
conditions which may adversely affect the surface;
3. Do not allow formations to be used by construction plant or vehicles other than
those which, in the opinion of the CM, are essential to construct the subsequent
work.
EAR1.W2170.9 HYDROSEEDING
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SOFT

LANDSCAPING
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE

PREPARATION OF ROAD FORMATIONS
EAR1.W2310.9 SEQUENCE
Carry out preparation and surface treatment of the road formation after completion of
any specified sub-grade drainage and, unless otherwise agreed by the CM,
immediately prior to laying the sub-base or the road-base where no sub-base is
required.
EAR1.W2320.9 FORMATIONS OTHER THAN ROCK FILL

Carry out the following sequence of operations:
1. Remove all mud and slurry from surfaces below carriageways, lay-bys, cycle
tracks, footpaths and hard shoulders after general reinstatement of any soft areas;
2. Unless otherwise permitted by the CM to carry out proof rolling on the road
formation. Roll in the presence of the CM by at least 2 passes of a non-vibrating
roller with rubber tyres. Roller to have a static load per 100 mm width of at least
4 kN and travel at speeds not exceeding 2 km/h;
3. Make good any defect in the formation during proof rolling where required by
the CM;
4. Trim the formation after testing and when any damaged reinstatement has been
carried out;
5. Roll the trimmed formation by one pass of a smooth steel-wheeled non-vibrating
roller having a minimum load per 100 mm of 2 kN.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.W2330.9 ROCK FILL FORMATIONS

Carry out the following sequence of operations:
1. Trim and blind the formation as EAR1.W1740 and EAR1.W1750;
2. Roll the trimmed formation as EAR1.W2320 (5);
3. Make good with Grade 15/20 concrete as specified in Worksection CON1 any
surface irregularities under the formation which remain after trimming the rock
excavation.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FILL SLOPES

1. Comply with the following sub-clauses for the fill slopes as specified in the
Drawings and submit to the CM the date of commencement of the filling works
for these slopes;
2. Notwithstanding the requirements on filling works as specified in other clauses
of this Worksection, comply with the "Standards for Filling Works" specified in
Appendix A of PNAP APP-15;
3. During construction, submit monthly reports to the CM giving records of tests
on compaction of fill slopes together with a covering assessment on the
adequacy of compaction. Submit the format of the report to the CM for prior
approval. The reports shall be prepared and signed by the TCP Grade T4 and
the AS of RSC(SF) (provided in accordance with the Preliminaries Worksection);
4. Incorporate in the report all the test results determined in accordance with this
clause and the Testing section of this Worksection, including those tests carried
out by the Direct Testing Contractor(s). Keep records on drawings the soil type,
plan location and elevation reference to Principal Datum of each test. Graphs of
dry density vs. moisture content, laboratory test record sheets, field sheets,
calculation sheets and a complete soil description are to be kept in a companion
folder;
5. Carry out all tests under the supervision of the TCP Grade T4 as mentioned in
sub-clause (3);
6. Include in the contents of the covering assessment:
a. A summary of the results of insitu density tests and laboratory compaction
tests of the fill, highlighting areas of non-compliance with the specified
compaction standards;
b. Details of any corrective measures taken to rectify areas of inadequate
compaction; and
c. An overall assessment to all the filling works completed at the time of
assessment.
7. Keep records of compaction tests also on site for inspection by the CM, ICU and
the officers of Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO). The costs of providing
the monthly reports are deemed to be included in the Contract rates of the filling
works;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Where there is reason to believe that the placed fill may be loose, or if the CM
from time to time directs, carry out field checks under the CM's direction,
initially by dynamic probe tests (supplemented by observations of fill materials
in trial pits if an appreciable cobble and boulder content in the fill is suspected).
Provide the necessary equipment, apparatus and labourers for the dynamic probe
tests and trial pit excavation. Carry out dynamic probe tests in accordance with
Appendix 7.1 of the 'General Specification for Civil Engineering Works', The
Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, 2006;
9. If loose fill is detected, arrange for the Approved Laboratory to carry out insitu
density tests of the loose layer in accordance with the Testing section of this
Worksection in the presence of the CM or his representatives. Carry out the
tests within seven days after the detection of the loose fill. If the test results fail
to comply with the Contract requirements, rectify the filling works to the
satisfaction of the CM as a matter of urgency. Where extensive loose fill is
found which could pose a significant threat if not rectified, the CM may issue an
order to suspend the progress of the Works in accordance with GCC Clause 9.2;
10. If the filling work has been done after compliance with the requirements of GCC
Clause 7.3, and is found to be executed in accordance with the Contract, the
expense of investigation, testing, reinstating and making good the same shall be
valued at the relevant Contract rates but in any other case the expense shall be
borne by the Contractor;
11. Upon completion of the filling work, submit to the CM:
a. "As-built" plans and sections of the work showing its relationship to existing
and proposed structures; and
b. Records of insitu density tests and laboratory compaction tests of the fill.
The costs of providing as-built records are deemed to be included in the Contract
rates of the filling works;
12. Bear all associated costs and make due allowance in the programme of the
Works for the provisions as stated in the above sub-clauses. No claim for
extension of time will be entertained in connection therewith.
REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY WORKS

EAR1.W2510.9 DISMANTLING AND REMOVAL
Dismantle and remove temporary works after completion of the permanent works
unless otherwise agreed by the CM.
TOLERANCES
Refer to Appendix H 'Schedule of Tolerances' to this Specification.

EXCAVATION AND FILLING EAR1 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
FILL MATERIAL - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

EAR1.T020.9 BATCH
A batch of fill material is any quantity of fill material of the same type and which, in
the opinion of the CM, has similar properties throughout. For the purpose of testing
for moisture content and relative compaction, a batch is also any fill material which
is deposited in a single layer in any area of fill presented by the Contractor for testing
on one occasion.
EAR1.T030.9 SAMPLES
Each sample of fill material must consist of at least four increments taken from
different parts of the batch. Combine the increments and thoroughly mix and divide
by quartering or by using a riffle box to obtain specimens of an appropriate size to
carry out the individual tests.
EAR1.T040.9 SAMPLE SIZE

Take the size of samples of fill material, other than rock fill, in accordance with
Clauses 2.5.1, 4.2 and Table 2.1 of 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil Testing',
GEO, 2001. Each sample of rock fill material of grade size not exceeding 200 is to
have a mass of at least 250 kg and each sample of rock fill material of grade size
exceeding 200 must have a mass of at least 1000 kg.
SITE TESTS FOR SOIL AND GROUNDWATER

EAR1.T110.9 GENERAL
1. Arrange for an independent laboratory to carry out the tests described in
'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil Testing', GEO, 2001;
2. Select the laboratory from one of those listed on the Development Bureau's List
of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works:
Soil and Rock Testing and Approved. In addition, the laboratory must be
accredited by HOKLAS for the said tests.
EAR1.T115.9 COMPACTION TEST FOR FILL SLOPES

1. Arrange for independent laboratories as stated in EAR1.T110 on a roster system
to carry out compaction tests stated in EAR1.T510 to EAR1.T550 for all fill
slopes specified in the Drawings. No independent laboratories shall carry out
compaction tests for a cumulative period longer than 3 months within any
twelve-month period;
2. Instruct the independent laboratories to deliver directly to the CM in a sealed
envelope or by other means agreed by the CM, without routing through the
Contractor, a copy of all test reports including preliminary testing results
compiled by the independent laboratories, not later than the copy sent to the
Contractor;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. In addition, where considered necessary, the CM will order Direct Testing

Contractor(s) (DTC) to carry out the same tests as mentioned in sub-clause (1)
above;
4. Provide attendance on the DTC and render all necessary assistance to the DTC
including:
a. Provision of all facilities for the DTC in the taking of samples;
b. Provision of information for the preparation of the report, all as required by
the DTC; and
c. Reinstatement and making good of the sampled areas to its original
condition where Instructed.
5. Carry out additional tests for relative compaction in accordance with
EAR1.T550 if the result of any test for relative compaction of fill material does
not comply with the specified requirements;
6. Investigate and report findings on any non-compliance or irregularities identified
by the compaction tests and carry out rectification as necessary to the
satisfaction of the CM before proceeding to the next stage of the filling works;
7. Bear all associated costs and allow sufficient time in the programming of the
filling works for the compliance with this clause. No claim whatsoever will be
entertained for the interruption, if any, due to the DTC's works.
FILL MATERIAL - PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION,

LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTICITY INDEX,
COEFFICIENT OF UNIFORMITY AND SULPHATE
CONTENT
EAR1.T210.9 GENERAL
The size of sample and method of sampling to be in accordance with "Geospec 3:
Model Specification for Soil Testing published by GEO". Where required test
samples of fill material for particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index
coefficient of uniformity and sulphate content and deliver results at least 14 days, or
such shorter period agreed by the CM, before deposition of the fill material starts.
Provide samples from each batch as stated in the following table:
Description Size of Batch No. of samples per Batch
Special fill 0 - 3,000 m³ 3
material
Exceeding 3,000 m³ 1 for each 1,000 m³or part
thereof
Fill material other 0 - 15,000 m³ 3
than special fill
material Exceeding 15,000 m³ 1 for each 5,000 m³or part
thereof
EAR1.T220.9 TESTING CRITERIA

For samples of fill material in the table to EAR1.T210:
1. Particle size distribution: test as EAR1.T230 (1);
2. Special fill material: test for the coefficient of uniformity as EAR1.T230 (2);

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Liquid limit: test all samples other than rock fill material (unless otherwise
agreed by the CM) as EAR1.T230 (3);
4. Plasticity index: as sub-clause (3) above and EAR1.T230 (4);
5. Soluble sulphate: test each sample of fill that will be deposited within 500 mm
of concrete, cement bound, or cementitious material, or metalwork as
EAR1.T230 (5).
EAR1.T230.9 TEST METHODS

Test in accordance with 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil Testing', GEO,
2001 as follows:
1. Particle size: test as Test Method 8.1 or 8.2 whichever is Instructed for particles
passing a 75 mm BS Test Sieve. Take the size of particles of fill material which
do not pass a 75 mm BS test Sieve as the largest dimension measured in any
plane;
2. Coefficient of uniformity: calculate the coefficient of uniformity (Cu) from the
equation:
Cu = D60/D10
where:
D60 and D10 are the equivalent sieve sizes in millimetres, interpolated from
the particle size distribution curve, through which 60% and 10% of the fill
material would pass respectively;
3. Liquid limit: test in accordance with Test Method 6.1 for that proportion of fill
passing a 425 micron BS Test Sieve;
4. Plasticity index: test in accordance with Test Method 6.1 for that proportion of
fill passing a 425 micron BS Test Sieve;
5. Soluble sulphate: test as Test Method 9.3;
6. Total sulphate: test as Test Method 9.3.
EAR1.T240.9 NON-COMPLIANCE WITH TESTS

Where the tests show non-compliance, adopt the following procedures:
1. Soluble sulphate content: test each sample to determine the total sulphate
content as in Test Method 9.3 of 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil
Testing', GEO, 2001;
2. Particle size distribution, liquid limit, plasticity index, coefficient of uniformity
or total sulphate content: provide additional samples, in numbers as stated in the
table to EAR1.T210, from same batch and retest as before.
FILL MATERIAL - OPTIMUM MOISTURE

CONTENT AND MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY
EAR1.T310.9 GENERAL
Where required, test samples of fill material for optimum moisture content and
maximum dry density and deliver results at least 72 hours, or such shorter period
agreed by the CM, before deposition of the fill material starts. Provide samples from
each batch as specified in the table to EAR1.T210.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.T320.9 LOCATION
Inform the CM of the exact location in which the fill material from which each
sample is taken is to be deposited.
EAR1.T330.9 ADDITIONAL SAMPLES

Take additional samples to test for optimum moisture content and maximum dry
density after the fill material has been deposited in its final position, at intervals of
not more than 28 days.
EAR1.T340.9 MATERIALS NOT FOR SAMPLING

Do not take samples from the following material:
1. Fill material including rock fill material which contains an insufficient
proportion of particles passing a 20 mm BS Test Sieve to permit determination
of the moisture content and maximum dry density; and
2. Fill material which is to be deposited as intermediate areas of fill, as specified
under EAR1.W2010.
EAR1.T350.9 TESTING METHODS

1. Test each sample for:
a. Optimum moisture content, as Test Method 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 10.6,
10.7 or 10.8 of 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil Testing', GEO,
whichever is Instructed;
b. Maximum dry density, as for sub-clause (1)(a) above and whichever is
Instructed.
2. If agreed by the CM, use the Hilf method as specified in EAR1.T860 to
EAR1.T900 instead of the methods stipulated in sub-clause (1) above to
determine the optimum moisture content and maximum dry density;
3. If in the opinion of the CM that there is any undue discrepancy between the
results of tests for optimum moisture content of fill material using methods as
stipulated in sub-clause (1)(a) above and the results of tests using the Hilf
method, adopt only the results of tests using methods stipulated in sub-clause
(1)(a) above.
EAR1.T370.9 INCONSISTENT MATERIALS

Where tests for optimum moisture content or maximum dry density indicate
inconsistencies in the fill material and are likely, in the opinion of the CM, to affect
subsequent relative compaction tests:
1. Divide the batch into smaller batches of material with similar properties
throughout;
2. Provide additional samples from each of the smaller batches, the number of
samples being as in accordance with the table to EAR1.T210;
3. Carry out additional tests for optimum moisture content and maximum dry
density, of each sample.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FILL MATERIAL - MOISTURE CONTENT

EAR1.T410.9 SAMPLES
1. Test samples of fill material for moisture content during deposition and
compaction and not more than 1 hour after the fill material has been deposited in
its final position;
2. Provide the number of samples from each batch in accordance with the table to
EAR1.T440. Do not provide samples if, in accordance with EAR1.T340 (1) or
EAR1.T340 (2), the optimum moisture content has not been determined.
EAR1.T420.9 TESTING METHODS

Test each sample to determine moisture content by Method 1, or by Method 2 if
agreed by the CM, as follows:
1. Method 1: Test Method 5.1 or 5.2 of 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil
Testing', GEO, whichever is Instructed;
2. Method 2: Microwave oven drying method as specified in EAR1.T810 to
EAR1.T850.
EAR1.T430.9 MOISTURE CONTENT COMPLIANCE CRITERIA

If, in the opinion of the CM, there is any undue discrepancy between the results of
tests for moisture content of fill material using Method 1 and the results of tests
using Method 2, adopt only the results using Method 1.
EAR1.T440.9 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MOISTURE CONTENT AND OPTIMUM

MOISTURE CONTENT RESULTS
1. If the result of any test for moisture content of fill material differs from the
optimum moisture content by more than the specified amount and, if Instructed,
adjust the moisture content of the whole of the batch of fill material;
2. Provide additional samples from the same batch and undertake additional tests
for moisture content;
3. Take the number of additional samples as stated in the following table:
Number of samples to be tested for moisture content and number of tests for
relative compaction
Description Size of area of fill in No. of samples/ tests per
batch batch
Areas of fill in 0 - 100 m² 3
excavations for
structures pits and 100 - 500 m² 2 for each 100 m²or part
trenches and on thereof
formation Exceeding 500 m² 1 for each 100 m² or part
thereof
0 - 1 ha 4 for each 1000 m² or part
thereof
Other areas of fill
1 - 10 ha 3 for each 1000 m²or part
thereof
Exceeding 10 ha 2 for each 1000 m²or part
thereof

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FILL MATERIAL - RELATIVE COMPACTION

EAR1.T510.9 REQUIREMENT FOR TESTING
1. Unless otherwise agreed by the CM, test each batch of fill material to determine
relative compaction;
2. Carry out each test after the fill material has been deposited and compacted in its
final position;
3. The number of tests will be in accordance with the requirements of the table to
EAR1.T440;
4. Do not test the following:
a. Fill material including rock fill materials which contain an insufficient
proportion of particles passing a 20 mm BS test sieve to permit
determination of the relative compaction; and
b. Fill material which has been deposited as intermediate areas of fill as
EAR1.W2010.
EAR1.T520.9 LOCATION OF TESTS

Carry out tests at positions which, in the opinion of the CM, are representative of the
batch of compacted fill material as a whole.
EAR1.T530.9 METHODS
1. Adopt Method 1, or adopt Method 2 if agreed by the CM, to determine the
relative compaction of fill material as follows:
a. Method 1: Test Method 11.4, Geospec 3, GEO
Determine the relative compaction (RC) of fill material from the equation:
RC = IDD/MDD x 100%
where:
IDD is the in-situ dry density determined as EAR1.T540;
MDD is the maximum dry density determined as EAR1.T350 (1)(b);
b. Method 2: The relative compaction (RC) shall be calculated from the
equation:
RC = IBulkD/MCBulkD x 100%
where:
IBulkD is the in-situ bulk density determined as EAR1.T540;
MCBulkD is the maximum converted bulk density determined by Hilf
method as EAR1.T350 (2). If the amount of material retained on a 20 mm
BS test sieve is more than 5% of the mass of the sample, adjust the
maximum converted bulk density (MCBulkD) of fill material in accordance
with EAR1.T910 to EAR1.T950.
2. If in the opinion of the CM that there is any undue discrepancy between the
results of tests for relative compaction of fill using Method 1 stipulated in sub-
clause (1)(a) above and the results of tests using Method 2 stipulated in sub-
clause (1)(b), adopt only the results of tests using the Method 1.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.T540.9 IN-SITU BULK DENSITY AND IN-SITU DRY DENSITY

Adopt Method 1, or adopt Method 2 if agreed by the CM, to determine in-situ bulk
density and in-situ dry density as follows:
1. Method 1: Test Method 11.1 or 11.2 of 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for
Soil Testing', GEO, as appropriate to the grain size of the fill material;
2. Method 2: Nuclear densometer method in accordance with Test Method 11.3 of
'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil Testing', GEO.
EAR1.T550.9 NON-COMPLIANCE OF RELATIVE COMPACTION TEST

If the result of any test for relative compaction of fill material does not comply with
the specified requirements for relative compaction, carry out additional tests for
relative compaction on the same batch. The number of additional tests are stated in
the table to EAR1.T440.
TEST METHODS FOR FILL MATERIALS

EAR1.T710.9 GENERAL
The definitions, terms, abbreviations symbols, and grouping of materials stated in the
relevant parts of 'Geospec 3: Model Specification for Soil Testing', GEO, apply
except as stated in EAR1.T720 and EAR1.T730.
EAR1.T720.9 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

Terms used in this Worksection and in the relevant parts of 'Geospec 3: Model
Specification for Soil Testing', GEO, are identified by the following abbreviations
and symbols:
Abbreviation/Symbol Term
BulkD Bulk density
CBulkD Converted bulk density
DD Dry density
IBulkD In-situ bulk density
IDD In-situ dry density
MDD Maximum dry density
MCBulkD Maximum converted bulk density
RC Relative compaction
w Moisture content
wi In-situ moisture content
wo Optimum moisture content
EAR1.T730.9 GROUPING OF MATERIALS

1. Fine grained material is material of which at least 90% passes a 2 mm BS Test
Sieve;
2. Medium grained material is material of which at least 90% passes a 20 mm BS
Test Sieve and more than 10% is retained on a 2 mm BS Test Sieve.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
DETERMINATION OF THE MOISTURE CONTENT

OF FINE GRAINED AND MEDIUM GRAINED
MATERIAL BY THE MICROWAVE OVEN DRYING
METHOD
EAR1.T810.9 SCOPE
This method covers the determination of the moisture content of fine grained and
medium grained material as a percentage of the mass of the dry material.
EAR1.T820.9 APPARATUS
Use the following apparatus:
1. A microwave oven with a timer and an adjustable power setting;
2. An airtight container of microwave safe and non-reflective material;
3. A balance readable and accurate to 0.01 g;
4. A desiccator containing anhydrous silica gel.
EAR1.T830.9 PROCEDURE
Adopt the following procedure:
1. The container must be clean, dry and weighed to the nearest 0.01 g (m1);
2. Crumble a specimen and place loosely in the container and replace the lid.
Ensure each specimen of fine grained material is at least 30 g and each specimen
of medium grained material at least 300 g. Specimens of medium grained
material may be tested in several parts each less than 300 g and the results
aggregated;
3. Weigh the container and contents to the nearest 0.01 g (m2);
4. Remove the lid of the specimen container and place the container with its lid and
content in the microwave oven and dry. Consider the specimen to be dry when,
after an initial drying period, successive weighing at intervals of 1 minute
produce results which are the same to the nearest 0.01 g. Alternatively, the oven
may be set to an appropriate time and power setting to dry the specimen as
determined by calibration of the oven on soil of a similar type;
5. After drying, remove the container and contents from the microwave oven and
place in the desiccator to cool;
6. Replace the lid and weigh the container and contents to the nearest 0.01 g (m3).
EAR1.T840.9 CALCULATION
Calculate the moisture content of the material (w) as a percentage of the dry mass of
the material from the equation:
w = (m2 - m3)/(m3 - m1) x 100%
where:
- m1 is the mass of the container (g)
- m2 is the mass of the container and contents before drying (g)
- m3 is the mass of the container and contents after drying (g).

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR1.T850.9 REPORTING
Report on the following:
1. Source and identification of the soil;
2. The moisture content of the material to the nearest 0.1%;
3. That the test method used was in accordance with this Specification.
DETERMINATION OF THE MAXIMUM

CONVERTED BULK DENSITY BY THE HILF
METHOD
EAR1.T860.9 SCOPE
This method covers the determination of the maximum converted bulk density and
the difference between the optimum moisture content and the in-situ moisture
content of a material by relating the converted bulk density and the moisture content
added.
1. Apparatus in accordance with Geospec 3, Test Method 10.1 or 10.2, whichever
as Instructed by the CM;
2. Apparatus for determination of the moisture content in accordance with either
Geospec 3, Test Method 5.1 or 5.2 or EAR1.T820, whichever as Instructed by
the CM;
3. Apparatus to extract specimen from the mould;
4. Apparatus, such as a warm air blower, for rapid drying of the material.
Adopt the following procedures:
1. Take a sample of material immediately after completing the in-situ bulk density
test at the same location as the test. The sample shall be obtained by digging to
the same depth as that of the in-situ bulk density test, keeping the sides of the
excavation vertical and bottom lat and level. The size of the sample shall be
sufficient to yield a maximum of 10 kg after screening over a 20 mm BS test
sieve;
2. Weigh the sample to the nearest 0.01 g;
3. Screen the sample over a 20 mm BS test sieve, ensuring that moisture loss is
kept to a minimum and that any free moisture appearing in the container is
worked back into the sample;
4. Weigh the amount retained on the sieve to the nearest 0.01 g and express as a
percentage of the mass of the sample. If the percentage exceeds 5%, adjust for
coarse material in accordance with EAR1.T910 to EAR1.T950. If the
percentage does not exceed 5%, no adjustment is required;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Mix the material to be tested thoroughly and divide by quartering or by using a

riffle box to obtain a maximum of four specimens of at least 2,500 g each,
ensuring that the moisture loss is kept to a minimum. Alternatively, if it has
previously been ascertained that the material is not susceptible to crushing, use a
single specimen of at least 2,500 g for repeating the testing;
6. Weigh each specimen to the nearest 0.01 g and take the result as the mass of the
specimen at the in-situ moisture content;
7. Place and seal each specimen and any remaining material in separate moisture-
tight containers;
8. Plot the converted bulk density of at least three specimens against the amount of
water added or removed as a percentage of the mass of the specimen at the in-
situ moisture content (z) on a graph as shown in Civil Engineering and
Development Department Standard Drawing No. C2006, in accordance with the
procedure stated in sub-clauses (9) to (15) below;
9. Obtain the first point on the graph as follows:
a. Compact a specimen at its in-situ moisture content in accordance with
Geospec 3, Test Method 10.1, Clause 10.1.5 or Test Method 10.2, Clause
10.2.5, whichever is Instructed by the CM;
b. Cut a diametrical slice of approximately 400 g to 500 g from the specimen
along its entire length. Determine the in-situ moisture content of the slice
(wi) in accordance with either Geospec 3, Test Method 5.1 or 5.2 or
EAR1.T810 to EAR1.T850, whichever as Instructed by the CM;
c. Calculate the bulk density (BulkD1) as stated in EAR1.T890 (1) and plot on
the 0% ordinate of the graph as the converted bulk density (CBulkD1).
10. Obtain the second point on the graph as follows:
a. Examine a second specimen and, if the in-situ moisture content obviously
exceeds the optimum moisture content, follow the procedure stated in sub-
clause (11) below;
b. Increase the moisture content of the specimen by adding an amount of water
equal to 2% of the mass of the specimen. Mix the specimen thoroughly and
compact in accordance with the method stipulated in sub-clause (9) above;
c. Calculate the bulk density (BulkD2) as stated in EAR1.T890 (1), adjust to
converted bulk density (CBulkD2) as stated in EAR1.T890 (2) and plot on
the +2% ordinate of the graph.
11. If the in-situ moisture content of the second specimen obviously exceeds the
optimum moisture content, dry and cool the specimen until the amount of water
removed is approximately 2% of the mass of the specimen. Mix the specimen
thoroughly and compact in accordance with the method stipulated in sub-clause
(9) above. Determine the amount of water removed. Calculate the bulk density
(BulkD2) as stated in EAR1.T890 (1), adjust to converted bulk density (CBulkD2)
as stated in EAR1.T890 (2) and plot on the negative ordinate of the graph at a
point which corresponds to the amount of water removed;
12. Obtain the third point on the graph as follows:
a. If the plotted value of CBulkD2 is equal to or greater than the plotted value
of CBulkD1, increase the moisture content of the third specimen by adding
an amount of water equal to 4% of the mass of the specimen. Alternatively,
if the procedure of sub-clause (11) above has been followed, dry and cool
the specimen until the amount of water removed is approximately 4% of the
specimen after cooling;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
b. If the plotted value of the CBulkD2 is less than the plotted value of CBulkD1,
dry and cool the third specimen until the amount of water removed is
approximately 2% of the specimen after cooling. Alternatively, if the
procedure of sub-clause (11) above has been followed, increase the moisture
content by adding an amount of water equal to 2% of the mass of the
specimen;
c. Mix the specimen thoroughly and compact in accordance with the method
stipulated in sub-clause (9) above. Determine the amount of water removed
if applicable;
d. Calculate the bulk density (BulkD3) as stated in EAR1.T890 (1), adjust to
converted bulk density (CBulkD3) as stated in EAR1.T890 (2) and plot on
the graph at a point corresponds to the amount of water added or removed.
13. If the centre point of the three points plotted is lower than one of the other two
points, or is higher than one point and equal to the other, obtain an additional
point or points by proceeding in 2% increments or decrements as appropriate;
14. If it is apparent that the moisture condition of the material is such that a total five
points will not result in the determination of the optimum moisture content,
adopt increments or decrements of 3% moisture content for the entire procedure;
15. Draw a smooth parabolic curve to the plotted points. Determine the peak of the
curve as the maximum converted bulk density (MCBulkD);
16. Determine the amount of water added of removed as a percentage of the mass of
the specimen at the in-situ moisture content corresponding to the maximum
converted bulk density (zm);
17. Determine the value of moisture correction curve passing through the peak value
of the plotted parabolic curve (zc). If there is no moisture correction curve
passing through the peak value of the curve, draw a moisture correction curve
through the peak by interpolating to the nearest 0.1%.
1. Calculate the bulk density (BulkD) from the equation:
BulkD = (m2 – m1)/V Mg/m³
where:
m1 is the mass of the mould and base (g)
m2 is the mass of the mould and base and wet material (g)
V is the mass of the volume of the mould (mL).
2. Calculate the converted bulk density (CBulkD) from the equation:
CBulkD = BulkD/(1 + z/100) Mg/m³
where:
z is the amount of water added or removed as a percentage of mass of the
specimen at the in-situ moisture content (%)
z is negative for values below the in-situ moisture content.
3. Calculate the difference between the optimum moisture content (wo) and the in-
situ moisture content (wi) of the material from the equation:
wo – wi = zm + zc %
where:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
zm is the amount of water added or removed as a percentage of mass of the

specimen at the in-situ moisture content corresponding to the maximum
converted bulk density (%)
zc is the value of the moisture correction curve passing through the peak value of
the plotted parabolic curve (%).
4. Calculate the optimum moisture content (wo) from the equation:
wo = wi + (1 + wi/100)zm %
where:
wi is the in-situ moisture content of the material (%).
5. Calculate the maximum dray density (MDD) from the equation:
MDD = MCBulkD/(1 + wi/100) Mg/m³
where:
MCBulkD is the maximum converted bulk density of the material (Mg/m³).
6. Calculate the relative compaction (RC), if required, from the equation:
RC = IBulkD/MCBulkD x 100 %
where:
IBulkD is the in-situ bulk density of the material determined in accordance with
Geospec 3, Test Method 11.1 or 11.2 as appropriate to the grain size of the
material.
2. The graph showing the plotted points and the parabolic curve passing through
them;
3. The maximum converted bulk density to the nearest 0.01 Mg/m³;
4. The optimum moisture content to the nearest 0.1%;
5. The maximum dry density to the nearest 0.01 Mg/m³;
6. The relative compaction to the nearest 0.1 %, if determined;
7. The percentage retained on the 20 mm BS test sieve and the percentage retained
on the 37.5 mm BS test sieve to the nearest 1%;
8. Whether the test was carried out using individual specimens or repeat testing of
a single specimen;
9. Whether a manual or an automatic compaction rammer was used;
10. That the test method used was in accordance with this Specification.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ADJUSTMENT OF THE MAXIMUM CONVERTED

BULK DENSITY FOR DETERMINATION OF
RELATIVE COMPACTION
EAR1.T910.9 SCOPE
This method covers the adjustment of the maximum converted bulk density
determined in accordance with EAR1.T860 to EAR1.T900 for the determination of
relative compaction of a material containing more than 5% of the mass of the
material at the in-situ moisture content retained on a 20 mm BS test sieve.
1. Apparatus in accordance with EAR1.T870;
2. A 20 mm and a 37.5 mm BS test sieve;
3. A mould with collar as used for determination of the California Bearing Ratio
(CBR mould);
4. An extrusion device as used for determination of the California Bearing Ratio.
Adopt the following procedures:
1. If the amount of material retained on the 20 mm BS test sieve exceeds 5% and
does not exceeds 20%, compact the material passing the sieve in accordance
with EAR1.T860 to EAR1.T900. Determine and adjust the maximum converted
bulk density (MCBulkD) as stated in EAR1.T940;
2. If the amount of material retained on the 20 mm BS test sieve exceeds 20%,
screen the retained material over the 37.5 mm BS test sieve. Follow the
procedure stated in either sub-clause (3) or (4) below as appropriate;
3. If the amount of material retained on the 37.5 mm BS test sieve does not exceed
5%, follow the procedure stated in sub-clause (5);
4. If the amount of material retained on the 37.5 mm BS test sieve exceeds 5% and
does not exceed 20%, replace the retained material with an equal mass of
material which is of similar nature and which is retained on a 20 mm BS test
sieve but passes a 37.5 mm BS test sieve. Follow the procedure stated in sub-
clause (5) below;
5. Follow the procedure in EAR1.T860 to EAR1.T900 except that the material
shall be compacted into the CBR mould and each layer shall be subject to 62
blows of the rammer.
Calculate the maximum converted bulk density (MCBulkD) from the equation:
MCBulkD = MCBulkD20[1 + m(1 – MCBulkD20/Gs)/(1 + z/100)] Mg/m³
where:
MCBulkD20 is the maximum converted bulk density of the material passing 20 mm
BS test sieve (Mg/m³)
m is the mass of material not passing the 20 mm BS test sieve expressed as a fraction
of the mass of the material at the in-situ moisture content
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Gs is the specific gravity of the material not passing 20 mm BS test sieve

z is the amount of water added as a percentage of the mass of the specimen at the in-
situ moisture content corresponding to the maximum converted bulk density (%)
2. The results in accordance with EAR1.T900;
3. The mass of the original material not passing the 20 mm BS test sieve and
37.5 mm BS test sieve as a percentage of the mass of the material at the in-situ
moisture content to the nearest 0.1%;
4. The type of mould used;
5. The number of blows per layer;
6. Whether the specific gravity was measured or assumed and, if measured, the
method used;
7. That the test method used and the results adjusted were in accordance with this
Specification.
SELF-COMPACTING BACKFILL MATERIAL

EAR1.T960.N TESTING
1. Testing and sampling
a. The sampling of fresh SCM shall be done according to CSl:2010 Section 1
where samples are collected from the first batch and from subsequent
batches after discharge of every or less than 25 cubic meters. Samples are
collected from the first vehicle delivering SCM in the above batches. The
number of tests for flowability, density of fresh SCM, compressive strength
of SCM may be reduced if, in the opinion of the CM, the standard of quality
control is satisfactory;
b. The density of fresh SCM shall be tested according to CS1 Section 5 where
two samples are collected from a batch;
c. The flowability of SCM shall be tested according to ASTM D6103 or
equivalent, where two samples are collected from a batch. The flowability
shall be tested from every batch before placement of SCM;
d. Two samples are collected from a batch for determination of the
compressive strength after 28 days, where a pair of testing cubes shall be
made from each sample. The size of the test cube shall be 100 mm and the
method of making test cubes shall be in accordance with CS1. The method
of testing shall be in accordance with CS1;
e. The load placement capability of the SCM surface shall be tested according
to ASTM D6024 or equivalent prior to further backfilling or other works are
to be carried out over the SCM backfilled area. The CM shall appoint a
representative testing location, where the load placement capability test shall
be conducted in five consecutive times for every 20 m2 of the in-place SCM
or part thereof;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
f. The thermal conductivity of SCM shall be carried out when backfilling

utility trench with power cables and tested according to ASTM D5334 or
equivalent. The CM shall appoint no less than five locations, where the
thermal conductivity test shall be conducted, for every 20 m2 of the in-place
SCM or part thereof.
2. Compliance criteria
a. The compressive strength of SCM at 28 days shall be not less than 0.3 MPa
and not more than 1 MPa (for utility trench backfilling) or 2 MPa (for other
void backfilling);
b. The density of fresh SCM shall be in range of 1900-2100 kg/m3;
c. The flowability of the SCM shall be no less than 200 mm without
segregation according to ASTM D6103;
d. The indentation diameter of five measurements under the load placement
capability test shall be no more than 75 mm and is considered ready for
placement of subsequent layers and open to traffic;
e. Five measurements under the thermal conductivity test shall be greater than
1.1 W/mK when moisture content >10%.
3. Non-compliance
a. If the result of either the flowability test or the density test carried out on a
sample taken from the first vehicle of the batch does not comply with the
requirements in sub-clause (2)(b) or (2)(c) above, the SCM in that vehicle
shall not be placed in the backfill area. Sample(s) from the subsequent
vehicle(s) of the same batch shall be collected for testing the flowability or
the density until compliance with such requirements;
b. If the compressive strength of the proposed SCM at 28 days does not
comply with the requirements in sub-clause (2)(a) above, the Contractor
shall be required to propose rectification measures and carry out rectification
measures such as manual excavation of spare SCM bulk sample prepared
from the same batch of SCM used in the backfilling works to demonstrate
that the hardened non-compliant SCM can still be excavated with hand tools
without sharp edges to the satisfaction of the CM and Utility Undertakings if
their existing installations are embedded by the non-compliant SCM such
that hardened non-compliant SCM is not necessary to be removed. The
proposed rectification measures and arrangement shall be included under
consent requirement in sub-clause (4)(a) of EAR1.W1790. The Contractor
shall bear all associated costs and the extra time required for the remedial
works in case of non-compliance of the requirements in sub-clause (2)(a)
above;
c. If indentation diameter after the five measurements under the load placement
capability test does not meet the requirement in sub-clause (2)(d) above, an
additional load placement capability test in the vicinity of the non-compliant
testing location shall be conducted at appropriate intervals, such as hourly
until such requirement is met such that works over the backfilled area can be
resumed;
d. If any of the five measurements under the thermal conductivity test does not
comply with the requirements in sub-clause (2)(e) above, the Contractor
shall remove the hardened non-compliant SCM, backfill the trench and
reinstate pavement above with an appropriate method as agreed with the CM.
The Contractor shall bear all associated costs and the extra time required for
the remedial works in case of non-compliance of the requirements in sub-
clause (2)(e) above.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

BLASTING EAR2 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR2 BLASTING
MATERIALS
EXPLOSIVES
EAR2.M010.9 NITRO-GLYCERINE BASED EXPLOSIVES
Do not use.
EAR2.M020.9 PRE-SPLIT BLASTING EXPLOSIVES

Only use explosives for pre-split blasting that are specifically recommended by the
explosives manufacturer for pre-splitting.

BLASTING EAR2 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
GENERALLY
EAR2.W010.9 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
1. Comply with conditions and restrictions imposed by the Commissioner of Mines
for:
a. Blasting operations;
b. Supply, transportation, storage, use and disposal of explosives.
2. Make all arrangements with and obtain all licences and permits from the
Commissioner of Mines in connection with blasting operations;
3. Ensure that the Mines and Quarries Division, Civil Engineering Development
Department is given adequate notice to arrange visits to the site to consider
blasting conditions, and thereafter comply promptly and fully with any
instruction issued by the Commissioner of Mines, or his representative, in
connection with blasting;
4. Allow access to the Site by the staff of the Mines and Quarries Division at all
times;
5. Employ at least one registered shotfirer who holds a valid Hong Kong Mine
Blasting Certificate and is approved by the Mines and Quarries Division and the
CM.
EAR2.W020.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL

Liaise with the Hong Kong Police Force in respect of traffic control on adjacent
roads during blasting operations.
EAR2.W030.9 RESTRICTIONS ON TIMING

Do not carry out blasting at the following times:
1. General holidays;
2. Before 8:30 am or after 5:30 pm on any day;
3. When a Hong Kong Observatory thunderstorm warning is in force (unless
permitted by the Commissioner of Mines);
4. When strong wind signal or tropical cyclone warning No. 3 or higher is hoisted
(unless permitted by the Commissioner of Mines).
EAR2.W040.9 PARTICULARS OF BLASTING

Submit the following particulars to the CM at least 48 hours before blasting starts:
1. Any conditions or restrictions imposed by the Commissioner of Mines, including
copies of applications, licences, permits and correspondence;
2. Names, qualifications and experience of the persons responsible for the design
and supervision of blasting operations;
3. Location, diameter, inclination and depth of holes to be charged with explosive;
4. Type and total mass of explosive to be used and its mass and distribution in each
hole;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Dimensions of stemming and decking;

6. Initiation sequence, delay periods and mass of explosive per delay;
7. Burden and bench height;
8. Ratio of diameter of explosive to diameter of hole;
9. Arrangements for and methods of instrumentation and monitoring the effects of
blasting;
10. Details of velocity seismographs, including manufacturer's literature;
11. Method of controlled blasting;
12. Details of blasting trials; and
13. Protective measures.
EAR2.W050.9 PARTICULARS OF PRE-SPLIT BLASTING

In addition to the data required by clause EAR2.W040 submit to the CM the
following information at least 48 hours before pre-split blasting starts:
1. Plan showing proposed method of working;
2. Pre-split burden;
3. No of pre-split holes to be fired at each delay;
4. Distance from the pre-split face to the nearest primary blast drillholes;
5. Decoupling ratio;
6. Delay arrangements between pre-split and primary blasts.
EAR2.W060.9 BLASTING ASSESSMENT

Prior to carrying out blasting works, submit to the Geotechnical Engineering Office a
Blasting Assessment containing the following information:
1. Assessment of site geology and the condition of existing structures, slopes,
retaining walls and services;
2. Assessment of the stability of existing structures, slopes and retaining walls
under the effects of blasting;
3. Proposals for preventive and precautionary measures to be implemented to
ensure stability and integrity of the affected structures, slopes, retaining walls
and services both during blasting and in the long term;
4. Outline blast design to demonstrate the practicability of satisfying any
constraints imposed under sub-clause (3) above;
5. Proposals for instrumentation and monitoring of the effects of blasting;
6. Details of site supervision to ensure professional input during the blasting work
by the Blasting Control Engineer; and
7. Curriculum vitae of the Blasting Control Engineer who prepared the Blasting
Assessment.
EAR2.W070.9 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING OFFICE (GEO) REQUIREMENTS

Comply with all requirements, comments and conditions imposed on the blasting
works by the GEO in respect of the submitted Blasting Assessment.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, RESTRICTIONS AND

BLASTING PROCEDURES
EAR2.W110.9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
1. The CM may regulate, restrict or prohibit blasting if, in his opinion, it is
necessary to do so for the safety of persons or property, to limit noise or to
safeguard the Works. Notify the CM, by not later than noon of the previous day,
any intention to bring any Explosives to the Site or to carry out any blasting;
2. Store, transport and use explosives at all times in accordance with the Dangerous
Goods Ordinance (Cap 295) and such other Statutory Regulations concerned
with the possession and use of explosives which may be in force. Do not store
explosives and detonators on the Site overnight unless permitted by the
Commissioner of Mines;
3. Safeguard, and relocate if necessary, any structures or services within the Site;
4. Consult Power Companies when blasting near high voltage underground or
overhead cables and observe restrictions imposed by these Companies; make
good any damage caused by, or consequential to, blasting operations;
5. Provide a system approved by the CM for warning and preparing the general
public and all site personnel of an impending blast, both by audible and visual
means, and ensure that the blasting area is cleared of all personnel immediately
prior to blasting. This warning system is to comply with all statutory
requirements;
6. Take all necessary precautions to prevent accident, injury or loss to persons and
damage to works or property, within and outside the Site, resulting from the use
or handling of explosives. Obtain agreement from the CM of such precautions
and the method of handling and using explosives;
7. Blasting will be allowed only within the area outlined on the site plan attached to
the Commissioner of Mines permit;
8. Do not use ANFO or emulsion, that is not in cartridged form, for blasting within
5 m from an excavation free face;
9. Dispose of unused explosives and detonators at the end of each day as stipulated
by the Commissioner of Mines.
EAR2.W120.9 GENERAL PROCEDURES

1. Wet areas within 30 m from the blasting area with water prior to blasting;
2. Clear all loose materials to expose the final rock face as soon as practicable after
the blast and scale all final rock faces to remove loose rock fragments;
3. Do not blast to form drainage channel, cascade, catchpit and the like, on the final
rock face;
4. Utilise uncharged guide holes to form any corner in the final slope profile.
When the final profile design includes the provision of berms between slopes,
exercise extreme care to ensure no drilling below berm level and in the selection
of toe charging details to produce the required profile.
EAR2.W130.9 SURFACE PREPARATION

Before assessments of blasting safety precautions are made, remove all vegetation,
overburden, and soft or loose materials, and expose the rock that is to be blasted.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR2.W140.9 PROTECTIVE SCREENS

Unless otherwise permitted by the Commissioner of Mines, erect screens and other
protective covers to prevent the projection of flying fragments of material resulting
from blasting. Construct screens using wire mesh securely supported on steel frames;
use wire of nominal diameter at least 3.5 mm and wire mesh size not exceeding
25 mm.
EAR2.W150.9 PLASTER BLASTING

Do not use plaster blasting unless permitted by the Commissioner of Mines.
EAR2.W160.9 BLAST HOLES

Unless otherwise permitted by the Commissioner of Mines provide blast holes
stemmed and decked using free-flowing granular materials. Cover charges with
thick gunny sacking and 2 m by 2 m square of steel fabric reinforcement weighted
down with filled sandbags. Except on slopes cover surface detonating cords, knots,
detonating relay conductors and initiating detonators with a 300 mm thickness of
sand or soil.
EAR2.W170.9 DETONATORS
Do not use electrical detonators within 60 m of overhead power lines unless
permitted by the Commissioner of Mines. When using electrical detonators in the
vicinity of static or mobile radios transmitters comply with BS 6657:1991.
EAR2.W180.9 DELAY BLASTING

Use delay-blasting at all times with millisecond delays unless otherwise permitted by
the Commissioner of Mines, or as specified under pre-splitting.
EAR2.W190.9 PROXIMITY TO CERTAIN STRUCTURES

Unless permitted by the CM, do not carry out blasting within a distance of:
1. 60 m from water retaining structure or water tunnels; and
2. 6 m from water mains or other water supply structures or installations.
EAR2.W200.9 VIBRATIONS TO INSTALLATIONS OR STRUCTURES

Unless permitted by the CM the vibrations at structures and installations due to
blasting, measured in terms of peak particle velocity and vibrational amplitude, must
not exceed the values stated in the following table:
Type of structure or installation Peak particle velocity Vibrational
(mm/s) amplitude (mm)
Water retaining structures. 13 0.1
Water tunnels.
Under any reinforced concrete
structure that has been cast less
than 24 hours previously.
Water mains. 25 0.2
Other structures and pipes.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR2.W210.9 VIBRATIONS TO ADJOINING LAND

Unless otherwise permitted by the CM, the vibration at adjoining slopes and land
due to blasting measured in terms of peak particle acceleration and peak particle
velocity must not exceed the values stated in the Contract.
EAR2.W220.9 RECORDING VIBRATIONS

1. Take measurements of vibrations due to blasting at locations stated in the
Contract, or instructed by the CM, at all times when blasting is carried out.
Keep records of vibrations on the Site and provide a copy for the CM. Make any
arrangements for installing instruments and taking measurements both inside and
outside the Site;
2. Measure vibrations due to blasting in terms of peak particle velocity, peak
particle acceleration and vibration amplitude. Take peak values as the maximum
resultant calculated by vector summation of the three components of velocity
and amplitude respectively, measured as instantaneously as the resolution of the
recording instrument permits;
3. Take measurements with velocity seismographs, which have operating
instructions in English of a type agreed by the CM. Seismographs must be
capable of:
a. Recording vibrations in terms of peak particle velocity and vibration
amplitude over a frequency of 0 - 200 Hz in three mutually perpendicular
directions; and
b. Producing a permanent record of vibrations by tracing an ultra-violet light
beam on sensitised paper, or by other methods agreed by the CM;
4. Check the accuracy of seismographs at regular intervals agreed with the CM.
PRE-SPLIT BLASTING
EAR2.W310.9 FORMING FINAL SURFACES
1. Form earthworks final surfaces and formations, which are to be formed by
blasting, and which slope at a gradient exceeding 2 vertical to 1 horizontal and
exceed 3 m in height by pre-splitting. Do not use other methods of controlled
blasting unless permitted by the CM;
2. Ensure that:
a. Other blast holes are located at a sufficient distance from the earthwork final
surface to avoid damaging the surface; and
b. The row of blast holes nearest to that surface is inclined parallel to the slope
face.
EAR2.W320.9 METHODOLOGY
1. Carry out pre-splitting and other methods of controlled blasting in such a manner
that the rock mass is cleanly split on the required plane and that rock outside the
earthworks final surface is not shattered or loosened;
2. Faces formed by pre-splitting or other methods of controlled blasting must not
exceed 15 m in height in any one blasting operation unless permitted by the CM.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
EAR2.W330.9 HOLES FOR PRE-SPLITTING

1. Drill a single row of holes at the appropriate inclination along the line of the
earthworks final surface. Load holes with explosives not exceeding half the
diameter of the hole. Detonate the explosives simultaneously or with the
minimum amount of delay necessary to reduce ground vibrations;
2. Drill holes for pre-splitting at least 50 mm in diameter with the ratio of the
distance between the centre of the holes and the diameter of the hole not
exceeding 10;
3. Form the holes so that they are within a distance of 0.015 times the length of the
hole from their designed position;
4. Do not drill holes for pre-splitting into the sub-grade below berm levels.
Remove rock which remains in position on berms after blasting by method other
than blasting.
TRIAL BLASTS
EAR2.W410.9 REASON FOR TRIAL BLASTS
Carry out trial blasts to demonstrate that:
1. The procedure is safe;
2. The resulting ground vibrations at locations stated in the Contract or instructed
by the CM can be satisfactorily predicted, recorded and are within acceptable
limits, do not adversely affect the safety and stability of adjoining structures,
installations, slopes and land.
EAR2.W420.9 PARTICULARS OF TRIAL BLASTING

Submit to the CM details of blasting trials in accordance with EAR2.W040 at least
14 days in advance of blasting.
EAR2.W430.9 PRE-SPLIT BLASTING TRIALS

Carry out the blasting trials for pre-splitting and other methods of controlled blasting
to form a face at least 6 m wide by 6 m high, on rock which has similar properties to
that of the earthwork final surface and which is at least 6 m away from the earthwork
final surface.
EAR2.W440.9 RESULTS OF BLAST TRIALS

If in the opinion of the CM any aspect of the proposed blasting procedures as
demonstrated by blasting trials is unsatisfactory, submit details of proposed changes
in the procedure to the CM. Carry out further blasting trials until the procedure is
satisfactory.
EAR2.W450.9 CHANGES IN PROCEDURE

Do not vary the satisfactorily Approved blasting procedure. Demonstrate any
proposed changes in procedure by further blast trials, unless otherwise permitted by
the CM.
EAR2.W460.9 COMPLETION OF TRIAL BLASTS

1. Complete all trials at least 7 days before the related blasting is due to start;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Carry out blasting trials in accordance with the trial procedure submitted to and
agreed by the CM. The location and size of blasting trials shall be as agreed by
the CM.
EAR2.W470.9 COMMENCEMENT OF BLASTING

Do not proceed with blasting until in the opinion of the CM the procedure as
demonstrated by the relevant blasting trials is satisfactory.
TOLERANCES
EAR2.W510.9 GENERAL
Refer to Appendix H 'Schedule of Tolerances' to this Specification.

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) STR /1

STRUCTURAL STEELWORK STR > TABLE OF CONTENTS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TR1 STRUCTURAL STEEL ............................................................................. 8

GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 8
STANDARDS ...................................................................................................................................... 8
STR1.G010.9 CODE OF PRACTICE AND STANDARDS ..................................................... 8
STR1.G020.9 STATUS OF THE SPECIFICATION ................................................................ 8
STR1.G030.9 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER ............................................................................. 8
STR1.G040.9 MINOR STEEL STRUCTURES ........................................................................ 8
DESIGN ........................................................................................................................................ 9
GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 9
STR1.D010.9 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN ...................................................................... 9
STR1.D020.9 DESIGN STANDARDS ..................................................................................... 9
STR1.D030.9 WIND LOADING ............................................................................................... 9
STR1.D040.9 SEISMIC LOADING .......................................................................................... 9
STR1.D050.9 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN ................................................................................. 9
STR1.D060.9 DESIGN SUBMISSION FOR MINOR STEEL STRUCTURE ......................... 9
FABRICATION AND ERECTION DOCUMENTS ....................................................................... 9
STR1.D110.9 FABRICATION DOCUMENTS ........................................................................ 9
STR1.D120.9 ERECTION DOCUMENTS ............................................................................. 10
STR1.D150.9 WELDING SYMBOLS .................................................................................... 10
STR1.D160.9 DRAWINGS RESPONSIBILITY .................................................................... 10
STR1.D170.9 RECORD DRAWINGS .................................................................................... 10
DESIGN OF SPACE FRAMES ...................................................................................................... 10
STR1.D210.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 10
STR1.D220.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY ........................................................................... 10
STR1.D230.9 SCOPE OF WORKS ......................................................................................... 11
STR1.D240.9 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS ........................................................................... 11
STR1.D250.9 SPACE FRAME SYSTEM ............................................................................... 11
STR1.D260.9 TENDER INFORMATION .............................................................................. 11
STR1.D270.9 DESIGN ............................................................................................................ 11
STR1.D280.9 ERECTION INFORMATION .......................................................................... 11
MATERIALS FOR AND FABRICATION OF SPACE FRAMES ............................................. 12
STR1.D310.9 MATERIALS STANDARDS ........................................................................... 12
STR1.D320.9 ROOF FALLS ................................................................................................... 12
STR1.D330.9 SIZE OF MEMBERS ........................................................................................ 12
STR1.D340.9 FABRICATION ................................................................................................ 12
STR1.D350.9 CUTTING AND FITTING ............................................................................... 12
STR1.D360.9 FASTENERS .................................................................................................... 12
STR1.D370.9 LIGHT FITTINGS ............................................................................................ 13
STR1.D380.9 ACCESS CATWALKS .................................................................................... 13
STR1.D390.9 SECURITY GATE............................................................................................ 13
STR1.D400.9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..................................................................... 13
TREATMENTS AND FINISHES TO SPACE FRAMES ............................................................ 13
STR1.D510.9 ELECTROPLATING ........................................................................................ 13
STR1.D520.9 HOT DIP GALVANIZING .............................................................................. 13
STR1.D530.9 POWDER COATINGS ..................................................................................... 13
ERECTION OF SPACE FRAMES ................................................................................................ 14
STR1.D610.9 ERECTION SUBMISSION .............................................................................. 14
STR1.D620.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS ............................................................................. 14
STR1.D630.9 FIXINGS ........................................................................................................... 14
STR1.D640.9 PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 14
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.D650.9 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION .................................................................. 14

DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN FOOTBRIDGES ............................................................................. 14
STR1.D710.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 14
STR1.D720.9 DRAWINGS AND DETAILS .......................................................................... 14
STR1.D730.9 FABRICATION APPROVALS ........................................................................ 15
STR1.D740.9 APPROVED FIRMS ......................................................................................... 15
STR1.D750.9 ERECTION APPROVALS ............................................................................... 15
STR1.D760.9 ERECTION PROPOSALS ............................................................................... 15
STR1.D770.9 ERECTION PROCEDURE .............................................................................. 15
STR1.D780.9 BRIDGE BEARINGS ....................................................................................... 16
MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................. 17
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 17
STR1.M020.9 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ........................................................... 17
STR1.M030.9 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 17
STR1.M040.9 SAFETY............................................................................................................ 17
STR1.M050.9 METHOD OF MANUFACTURE .................................................................... 17
STR1.M060.9 STEEL GRADES .............................................................................................. 17
STR1.M070.9 HOT ROLLED SECTIONS .............................................................................. 17
STR1.M080.9 COLD ROLLED SECTIONS ........................................................................... 18
STR1.M090.9 COLD ROLLED HOLLOW SECTIONS ......................................................... 18
STR1.M100.9 PLATES, FLATS AND BARS ......................................................................... 18
STR1.M110.9 SURFACE QUALITY ...................................................................................... 18
STR1.M120.9 SURFACE DEFECTS AND REPAIR .............................................................. 18
STR1.M130.9 SURFACE RUSTING ...................................................................................... 18
STR1.M140.9 MAXIMUM CARBON EQUIVALENT .......................................................... 18
STR1.M150.9 MARKING STEELWORK............................................................................... 19
STR1.M160.9 NON-AVAILABLE MATERIALS .................................................................. 19
STR1.M170.9 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATES ........................................................... 19
STR1.M180.9 CLASS OF STEEL ........................................................................................... 19
BOLTS, ACCESSORIES, CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS ................................................... 19
STR1.M210.9 STEEL GRADE FOR CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS .............................. 19
STR1.M220.9 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS AND NUTS ........................................................ 19
STR1.M230.9 BS 4190 HOLDING DOWN BOLTS AND NUTS .......................................... 20
STR1.M240.9 BS 3692 HOLDING DOWN BOLTS AND NUTS .......................................... 20
STR1.M250.9 BLACK BOLTS AND NUTS........................................................................... 20
STR1.M260.9 DRIVE SCREWS.............................................................................................. 20
STR1.M270.9 PLAIN WASHERS FOR BLACK BOLTS ...................................................... 20
STR1.M280.9 SPRING WASHERS FOR BLACK BOLTS .................................................... 20
STR1.M290.9 TAPERED WASHERS ..................................................................................... 20
STR1.M300.9 BOLT LENGTHS ............................................................................................. 20
STR1.M310.9 HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS ................................................ 20
STR1.M320.9 RIVETS............................................................................................................. 20
STR1.M330.9 TURNBUCKLES OR SIMILAR ...................................................................... 20
STR1.M340.9 MARKING BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES ..................................................... 21
WELDING CONSUMABLES ......................................................................................................... 21
STR1.M410.9 QUALITY OF ELECTRODES, RODS AND WIRES ..................................... 21
STR1.M420.9 CONSUMABLES FOR WELDING STEELS TO BS EN 10025 .................... 21
STR1.M430.9 ELECTRODES FOR WELDING GRADE S355 AND S450 STEELS ........... 21
STR1.M440.9 COVERED ELECTRODES FOR MANUAL METAL ARC
WELDING ........................................................................................................ 21
STR1.M450.9 FILLER WIRES FOR GAS-SHIELDED WELDING ...................................... 21
STR1.M460.9 CORED ELECTRODES ................................................................................... 21

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.M470.9 FILLER WIRES AND FLUXES FOR SUBMERGED ARC

WELDING ........................................................................................................ 21
STR1.M480.9 CONTINUOUS COVERED ELECTRODES ................................................... 21
STR1.M490.9 MANUFACTURER'S TEST CERTIFICATES ................................................ 21
STR1.M500.9 STORAGE OF ELECTRODES ........................................................................ 21
WORKMANSHIP ..................................................................................................................... 22
TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE ........................................................................................ 22
STR1.W010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 22
STR1.W020.9 HANDLING...................................................................................................... 22
STR1.W030.9 SPECIAL HANDLING .................................................................................... 22
STR1.W040.9 BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, AND SCREWS ................................................. 22
STR1.W050.9 EXPOSURE TO POLLUTANTS ..................................................................... 22
STR1.W060.9 ROAD TRANSPORT ....................................................................................... 23
STR1.W070.9 SEA TRANSPORT ........................................................................................... 23
STR1.W080.9 REPAIR OF DAMAGE INCURRED IN TRANSPORT ................................. 23
FABRICATION ................................................................................................................................ 24
STR1.W110.9 ACCESS............................................................................................................ 24
STR1.W120.9 GEOMETRIC FORM ....................................................................................... 24
STR1.W130.9 IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................... 24
STR1.W140.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................................ 24
STR1.W150.9 POST CLEANING............................................................................................ 24
STR1.W160.9 EXECUTION .................................................................................................... 24
STR1.W170.9 SETTING OUT ................................................................................................. 24
STR1.W180.9 TEMPORARY ATTACHMENTS.................................................................... 25
STR1.W190.9 END PLATES ................................................................................................... 25
STR1.W200.9 JIGS................................................................................................................... 25
STR1.W210.9 MEASUREMENT AND SETTING OUT MARKS ......................................... 25
STR1.W220.9 CONTINUOUS STRUCTURES ...................................................................... 25
STR1.W230.9 STRAIGHTENING BENDING AND CAMBERING OF STEEL
SECTIONS........................................................................................................ 25
STR1.W240.9 POST FABRICATION MAKING GOOD ....................................................... 25
STR1.W250.9 CUTTING STEEL ............................................................................................ 25
STR1.W260.9 CUT EDGES ..................................................................................................... 26
STR1.W270.9 MACHINING GENERALLY ........................................................................... 26
STR1.W280.9 FLAME CUTTING ........................................................................................... 26
STR1.W290.9 FORMING HOLES FOR BOLTS AND RIVETS ............................................ 26
STR1.W300.9 BUILT-UP SECTIONS .................................................................................... 27
STR1.W310.9 REMOVING BURRS ....................................................................................... 27
STR1.W320.9 HOLES FOR BLACK BOLTS ......................................................................... 27
STR1.W330.9 HOLES FOR HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS.......................... 27
STR1.W340.9 FITTED BOLTS, PINS OR RIVETS ............................................................... 27
STR1.W350.9 SLOTTED HOLES ........................................................................................... 28
STR1.W360.9 PREVENT MOISTURE INGRESS .................................................................. 28
MECHANICAL JOINTING ........................................................................................................... 28
STR1.W410.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................................ 28
STR1.W420.9 USE OF HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS ................................. 28
STR1.W430.9 WRENCH CALIBRATION ............................................................................. 28
STR1.W440.9 CALIBRATION OF BOLT LOAD METER .................................................... 29
STR1.W450.9 BLACK OR PRECISION BOLTED CONNECTIONS ................................... 29
STR1.W460.9 ALIGNMENT, TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS AND PERMANENT
FIXINGS ........................................................................................................... 29
STR1.W470.9 BOLTED CONNECTIONS WITH PROVISION FOR SLIDING ................... 29

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WELDING ........................................................................................................................................ 30
STR1.W510.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 30
STR1.W520.9 USE OF WELDING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES ............................ 30
STR1.W530.9 PREPARATION FOR WELDING ................................................................... 30
STR1.W540.9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SITE WELDING ............................. 30
STR1.W550.9 METHOD OF WELDING ................................................................................ 31
STR1.W560.9 REMOVAL OF SLAG ..................................................................................... 31
STR1.W570.9 TACK WELDS ................................................................................................. 31
STR1.W580.9 WELD DEFECTS ............................................................................................. 31
STR1.W590.9 FILLET WELDS ............................................................................................... 32
STR1.W600.9 BUTT WELDS.................................................................................................. 32
STR1.W610.9 STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS ....................................................................... 32
ERECTION OF STEELWORK ..................................................................................................... 32
STR1.W710.9 ERECTION ....................................................................................................... 32
STR1.W720.9 ERECTORS ...................................................................................................... 32
STR1.W730.9 SAFETY............................................................................................................ 32
STR1.W740.9 STABILITY ...................................................................................................... 32
STR1.W750.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS ...................................................................... 33
STR1.W760.9 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ 33
STR1.W770.9 PREVENTION OF DISTORTION ................................................................... 33
STR1.W780.9 APPROVED SEQUENCE ................................................................................ 33
STR1.W790.9 FALSEWORK .................................................................................................. 33
STR1.W800.9 SETTING OUT, LEVELLING AND LOCATION .......................................... 33
STR1.W810.9 ERECTION OF STEELWORK ........................................................................ 33
STR1.W820.9 STEELWORK BY SUB-CONTRACTOR ....................................................... 34
CLEANING, SURFACE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION (POST FABRICATION) ... 34
STR1.W910.9 CLEANING AND COATING IN THE SUPPLIERS WORKSHOP ............... 34
STR1.W920.9 CLEANING SURFACES OF BARE METAL ................................................. 34
STR1.W930.9 CONTAMINATED SURFACES...................................................................... 34
STR1.W940.9 PAINTED AND OTHER COATED SURFACES............................................ 34
STR1.W950.9 ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION....................................................................... 35
STR1.W960.9 BLAST CLEANING ......................................................................................... 35
STR1.W970.9 MECHANICAL CLEANING ........................................................................... 35
STR1.W980.9 PICKLING ........................................................................................................ 35
STR1.W990.9 FLAME CLEANING ........................................................................................ 35
STR1.W1000.9 NEW GALVANIZED SURFACES .................................................................. 35
STR1.W1010.9 PREVIOUSLY PAINTED GALVANIZED SURFACES ................................ 36
STR1.W1020.9 CLEANED OR COATED MEMBERS ............................................................ 36
APPLICATION OF METAL COATINGS .................................................................................... 36
STR1.W1110.9 HOT DIP GALVANIZING .............................................................................. 36
STR1.W1120.9 SPRAYED METAL COATING ....................................................................... 37
STR1.W1130.9 ELECTROPLATING ........................................................................................ 37
STR1.W1140.9 CHROMIUM PLATING .................................................................................. 37
STR1.W1150.9 METAL COATING ON PART ONLY OF ASSEMBLED SECTION ............ 37
STR1.W1160.9 PROTECTION OF HSFG BOLTED JOINTS .................................................. 37
STR1.W1170.9 PROTECTION OF OTHER BOLTED JOINTS ............................................... 37
STR1.W1180.9 PROTECTION OF NON-BOLTED JOINTS ................................................... 38
STR1.W1190.9 SURFACES ADJACENT TO TREATED JOINTS ......................................... 38
STR1.W1200.9 PAINTING AND SEALING OF JOINTS ........................................................ 38
STR1.W1210.9 APPLICATION OF PAINT .............................................................................. 38
STR1.W1220.9 PAINTING STEELWORK ............................................................................... 39
STR1.W1230.9 PAINT FOR STEELWORK PROTECTION SYSTEMS................................. 40

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ACCURACY AND TOLERANCES ............................................................................................... 40

STR1.W1310.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 40
OFF-SITE FABRICATION ............................................................................................................ 40
STR1.W1410.9 SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................................ 40
STR1.W1415.9 SUBMISSIONS FOR MINOR STEEL STRUCTURES
FABRICATED OFF-SITE ................................................................................ 41
STR1.W1420.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QA) SCHEME ...................................................... 41
STR1.W1430.9 REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER .................................................. 41
TESTING ................................................................................................................................... 42
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 42
STR1.T010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 42
STR1.T020.9 TESTING BY MANUFACTURER .................................................................. 42
STR1.T030.9 TESTING OF BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS ............................................ 42
STR1.T040.9 TEST CERTIFICATES .................................................................................... 42
STR1.T050.9 TESTING OF SECTIONS ................................................................................ 42
STR1.T060.9 FAILURE OF TESTS ....................................................................................... 43
STR1.T070.9 ULTRASONIC TESTING ................................................................................ 43
STR1.T080.9 ABILITY OF WELDERS ................................................................................. 43
STR1.T090.9 PARTICULARS OF INSPECTING AUTHORITY ......................................... 43
STR1.T093.9 BATCH OF WELDING CONSUMABLE ....................................................... 43
STR1.T094.9 TESTING OF WELDING CONSUMABLES .................................................. 44
STR1.T095.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA - WELDING CONSUMABLES ......................... 44
STR1.T096.9 FAILURE OF TESTS ....................................................................................... 44
STR1.T097.9 STANDARD FOR REJECTION ...................................................................... 45
STR1.T100.9 STANDARD OF WELD PROCEDURE TESTING ........................................ 45
STR1.T110.9 ADDITIONAL DESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTS AS SELECTED BY
THE CM............................................................................................................ 45
STR1.T120.9 ADDITIONAL NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF STEEL,
STAINLESS STEEL AND ALUMINIUM....................................................... 45
STR1.T130.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ............................................................................. 46
STR1.T140.9 WELD REPAIR ................................................................................................ 46
STR1.T150.9 ENGAGEMENT OF SPECIALIST TESTING CONTRACTOR (FOR
FABRICATION ON SITE) .............................................................................. 46
TESTING OF PAINTS .................................................................................................................... 46
STR1.T210.9 SAMPLING AND TESTING ........................................................................... 46
STR1.T220.9 PAINT SAMPLES ............................................................................................ 47
STR1.T230.9 TESTING PAINTS ........................................................................................... 47
STR1.T240.9 TESTING LABORATORY .............................................................................. 47
STR1.T250.9 GLOSS FINISH ................................................................................................ 47
SPACE FRAMES - WARRANTIES AND TESTING .................................................................. 47
STR1.T310.9 SUITABILITY WARRANTY .......................................................................... 47
STR1.T340.9 TESTING OF SECTIONS ................................................................................ 47
STR1.T350.9 WELDING TESTS ........................................................................................... 48
STR1.T360.9 PROOF LOAD TESTING ................................................................................ 48
STR1.T370.9 NODAL JOINTS OF SPACE FRAMES .......................................................... 48
STR1.T380.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR NODAL JOINT TESTS ............................. 48
STR1.T390.9 FAILURE AND RE-TESTING OF NODAL JOINTS ..................................... 48
STR1.T400.9 LOADING TESTS ............................................................................................ 49
OFF-SITE FABRICATION ............................................................................................................ 49
STR1.T510.9 TESTING AND SURVEILLANCE VISITS AT FABRICATION
YARD ............................................................................................................... 49

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

OFF-SITE FABRICATION)............................................................................. 49
APPENDIX STR1/I ................................................................................................................... 51

STR1.APPEND1.9 CALCULATION OF NUMBER OF FURTHER INSPECTIONS /
TESTS ............................................................................................................... 51

STRUCTURAL STEEL STR1 > GENERAL
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

GENERAL
STANDARDS
STR1.G010.9 CODE OF PRACTICE AND STANDARDS
1. Comply with the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 issued by
the Buildings Department;
2. Unless otherwise approved, comply with the British Standards stated in this
Specification. Where the Contractor proposes to substitute any other standard or
code of practice either in its entirety or in part, for any of those specified, submit
details of such together with two complete copies for Approval. Generally,
Approval will only be given where the CM considers the proposals to give at
least an equivalent standard of the finished work;
3. In the case of any conflict, ambiguity or contradiction between the Code of
Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 and the British Standards or other
Approved Standards, unless expressly stated otherwise in this Specification, the
conditions of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 shall
prevail.
STR1.G020.9 STATUS OF THE SPECIFICATION

Where this Specification includes provisions additional to, or more stringent than
those of the aforementioned Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011
and the British Standards, the provisions of this Specification shall prevail overall.
STR1.G030.9 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER

Employ a Registered Structural Engineer as specified in PRE.B6.060 to take up the
role of Responsible Engineer stated in the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of
Steel 2011. The Responsible Engineer shall take responsibility for the design,
erection and construction of all permanent and/or temporary works and falsework for
the construction of major structural steelwork. No consent or dissent of the CM will
relieve the Contractor of his sole responsibility for the design, construction and
obtaining Approval.
STR1.G040.9 MINOR STEEL STRUCTURES

1. The list of minor steel structures is given in the Project Specific Specification;
2. Specification clauses not applicable to the minor steel structures are listed in the
Project Specific Specification.

STRUCTURAL STEEL STR1 > DESIGN
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
DESIGN
GENERAL
STR1.D010.9 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
Comply with the information given on the Drawings and the following information.
In general member sizes on the Drawings will be given as serial sizes and loads will
be indicated under dead and superimposed live loads only. Wind loading, seismic
loading and thermal loading will not generally be shown.
STR1.D020.9 DESIGN STANDARDS

Ensure compliance of the design with the requirements of Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel 2011 for all building works. For steel bridges the design
must also comply with BS 5400 and the Structure Design Manual for Highways and
Railways issued by the Highways Department.
STR1.D030.9 WIND LOADING

Calculate the wind loads in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects in
Hong Kong 2004 issued by the Buildings Department.
STR1.D040.9 SEISMIC LOADING

Ensure that seismic loading, (where this needs to be considered) is in compliance
with the appropriate national standard for the design of structures in relation to
earthquakes.
STR1.D050.9 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN

Loading tests in accordance with Chapter 16 of the Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel 2011 may be used to verify alternative design or construction
that is not entirely in accordance with the design requirements of the same Code.
STR1.D060.9 DESIGN SUBMISSION FOR MINOR STEEL STRUCTURE

1. Notwithstanding the submission requirements stated in PRE.B6.085, submit for
CM's approval calculation and drawings, which have been certified by a
Registered Structural Engineer, to demonstrate that the design of minor steel
structure, including the details of the materials of the structure, shown on the
manufacturer's drawings, manuals or catalogues complied with the Specification
and the Code of Practice for Structural Use of Steel 2011;
2. Agree with CM the programme for submission.
FABRICATION AND ERECTION DOCUMENTS

STR1.D110.9 FABRICATION DOCUMENTS
1. Prepare and submit to the CM at least six weeks before starting fabrication,
complete details of fabrication to include the following:
a. All connections including relevant calculations;
b. Methods of fabrication;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. Welding process and procedure, see STR1.T090 and STR1.T100;

d. Temporary guys and bracing for use during the erection;
e. Details of holding down bolts and fittings to be built into the concrete or
masonry.
2. Do not commence fabrication or deviate from the Drawings prior to receiving
Approval.
STR1.D120.9 ERECTION DOCUMENTS

1. Prepare and submit to the CM at least six weeks before starting to erect
steelwork, details of the following:
a. Method of erection;
b. Type of craneage;
c. Calculations of erection stresses;
d. Temporary guys and bracing for use during the erection.
2. Do not commence erection or deviate from the Drawings prior to receiving
Approval.
STR1.D150.9 WELDING SYMBOLS

Show welding on the drawings using welding symbols to the Code of Practice for
the Structural Use of Steel 2011.
STR1.D160.9 DRAWINGS RESPONSIBILITY

Accept responsibility for any errors in fabrication drawings subsequently found
whether or not Approval to the drawings has been obtained.
STR1.D170.9 RECORD DRAWINGS

On completion of the erection, revise or redraw fabrication drawings to show any
agreed modifications made during the course of the Contract. Submit one copy
negative or velograph of each drawing to the CM for record purposes.
DESIGN OF SPACE FRAMES

STR1.D210.9 GENERAL
This Specification and the Drawings show the works for the purpose of defining the
design intent and performance requirements. Details show the preferred
arrangements to other building elements and do not provide solutions to structural
and thermal movements, fixings and anchorages etc.
STR1.D220.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

Accept responsibility for the complete suitability of the design. Approval to the
design does not relieve the Contractor from this responsibility.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.D230.9 SCOPE OF WORKS

The space frame works comprise the design, supply and erection of the whole of the
space frame structure in accordance with this Specification including delivery to the
site, all testing as required by this Specification, assembling, erecting in position and
painting.
STR1.D240.9 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

Design the space structure with dimensions as indicated in the Project Specific
Specification. General Layout, structural supports and all other relevant information
pertaining to the space frame are depicted in Project Specific Specification.
STR1.D250.9 SPACE FRAME SYSTEM

1. Propose a specialist supplier/contractor on the Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region Development Bureau's 'List of Approved Suppliers of
Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works' in the category of Space
Frame System for the CM's approval and obtain the space frame from the
Approved specialist supplier/contractor;
2. Design the space frame which shall be a proprietary system complying with the
details as specified in the Project Specific Specification.
STR1.D260.9 TENDER INFORMATION

Provide the following information with return of Tender:
1. The manufacturer's certificate of origin, certificates of chemical composition and
physical tests;
2. A complete design calculation of the space frame structure certified by a
Registered Structural Engineer;
3. The approximate total weight, loads on each supports, anchorages/anchor bolts
required for the fixing of the space frame structure;
4. Method of erection.
STR1.D270.9 DESIGN
Design proprietary space frame system:
1. To comply with the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 for
steel or BS 8118 for aluminium, as appropriate;
2. To be capable of withstanding thermal movement and induced stresses under a
temperature variation ranging from 0ºC to 40ºC and other loads as shown on
Drawings.
STR1.D280.9 ERECTION INFORMATION

1. Submit for the CM's consent at least one month before the proposed erection of
the space frame:
a. Organization chart and details of the erection supervisory staff;
b. Detail programme for erection;
c. Method and procedure of erection with the system employed complete with
sketches, drawings, or photographs;
d. Details including capacities of all lifting equipment to be used;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
e. A quality control & assurance system for the verification of the compliance
of specification in all materials and workmanship;
f. A copy of full set of design calculations including those for the erection
stage, certified by the Responsible Engineer;
g. Four copies of a full set of shop drawings of the space frame structure and
the supporting parts complete with bearings, required for the proper
execution of works, certified by the same Responsible Engineer; and
h. Manufacturer's certificates of origin and chemical composition of, and
certificates of results of physical tests for, structural elements showing
compliance with the specification.
2. The CM undertakes to reply to the Contractor's submissions and re-submissions
within 42 days.
MATERIALS FOR AND FABRICATION OF SPACE

FRAMES
STR1.D310.9 MATERIALS STANDARDS
Design with materials of standard hollow section complying with Code of Practice
for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 for steel, and BS 1471:1972 or BS EN 755 part
1-2:1997, Part 3-6:1996, part 7-8:1998, Part 9:2001 as appropriate for aluminium.
Use members of circular section connected by spherical nodes of the same material.
Make the configuration of the nodes such that all resultant forces from members
coincide with the centroid of nodes. Where a proprietary space frame is proposed
based on other recognized international standards, submit the relevant material
specification for Approval.
STR1.D320.9 ROOF FALLS

Design the finished roof with a minimum fall as specified in the Project Specific
Specification. Fall to be effected by the space frame structure and/or the purlin
systems, after being loaded with all roofing materials.
STR1.D330.9 SIZE OF MEMBERS

Give consideration to providing an aesthetic proportion and balance between
members when selecting member sizes.
STR1.D340.9 FABRICATION
Ensure all members are free from twist, true to profile and dead straight or truly
curved as shown on the Drawings. Materials damaged whilst being straightened or
curved to be rectified or rejected as the CM directs.
STR1.D350.9 CUTTING AND FITTING

Cut to exact lengths the ends of members and other parts abutting against or upon
other parts, true and square, so as to provide a good bed or joints as the case may be.
Proper cover plates must be provided where necessary.
STR1.D360.9 FASTENERS
1. Provide and fit all bolts with washers, splayed if necessary, to give a level and
even bearing on the nuts;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Washers to be minimum of 2.4 mm thick;

3. When required by the CM, provide tapered washers for connections with a
difference in slope of 3 degrees or greater. Tapered washers are to be used with
bolts through flanges. As far as possible, fix the bolt heads to the upper side of
the connections.
STR1.D370.9 LIGHT FITTINGS

Provide supports for all light fittings and as shown on drawings and as specified in
the Project Specific Specification. Derive support from nodal joints and not from
chords, unless otherwise Approved.
STR1.D380.9 ACCESS CATWALKS

Provide internal catwalks together with catladders to the layout shown on the
Drawings. Number of catladders required are as specified in the Project Specific
Specification. Design catwalks to fit within the depth of the space frame structure
and be minimum 600 mm wide unless otherwise stated. Catwalks to be maximum
400 mm from each light fitting. The position of each light fitting may be adjusted
from the position shown on the Drawings by up to maximum of 200 mm in any
direction to accommodate the design and construction method of the space frame
structure and the catwalks.
STR1.D390.9 SECURITY GATE

Allow for provision of a 600 mm wide hinged, opening inward, lockable gate at
location as shown on Drawings and specified in the Project Specific Specification.
STR1.D400.9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Allow for provision of screw holes or other suitable connection points for the
purpose of connection, by the Nominated Sub-contractor for electrical installation
and of equipotential bonding conductors as required by the IEE Wiring Regulations.
TREATMENTS AND FINISHES TO SPACE FRAMES

STR1.D510.9 ELECTROPLATING
Electroplate spherical nodes with zinc layer 25 microns minimum.
STR1.D520.9 HOT DIP GALVANIZING

Hot dip galvanize all other components (both inside and outside of tube members) to
BS EN ISO 1461:2009 with minimum mean coating thickness of 45 microns to 85
microns depending on thickness of tube walls as stipulated in Table 3 of BS EN ISO
1461:2009, unless otherwise specified.
STR1.D530.9 POWDER COATINGS

Apply finishing coat to space frame members of factory applied polyester powder.
Coat of minimum dry film thickness of 80 microns. Colour to be selected from
Standard colour chart.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ERECTION OF SPACE FRAMES

STR1.D610.9 ERECTION SUBMISSION
Submit for the CM's consent the proposed method and procedure of erection of the
space frame prior to installation. Ensure compatibility with the requirements of the
proposed construction programme and the site conditions. Demonstrate to the
satisfaction of the CM that the effects of the forces and stresses imposed in the
structure during erection of the space frame shall not exceed the originally allowed
for in the design of the structure.
STR1.D620.9 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS

Allow for the provision and the CM's consent of all necessary temporary bracing and
supports prior to final fixing.
STR1.D630.9 FIXINGS
Provide installation details of all anchorages/anchor bolts, that must avoid conflicting
with the reinforcement of supporting elements.
STR1.D640.9 PROTECTION
Allow for taking necessary precautions to prevent damage to the existing structure
and finishes thereof if applicable, during erection. Protect floors when cranes or
other plant are to be used internally for erection.
STR1.D650.9 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERVISION

Provide a suitable experienced engineer full time on Site to supervise the erection of
the space frame structure until physical completion of the works. The engineer must
have previous experience in space frame construction. Submit for Approval the
name and qualifications of the engineer who may be the employee of the Specialist
Sub-contractor.
DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN FOOTBRIDGES

STR1.D710.9 GENERAL
Design steel footbridges using structural steelwork to Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel 2011, BS 5400 and the Structure Design Manual for
Highways and Railways issued by the Highways Department unless otherwise
particularly specified.
STR1.D720.9 DRAWINGS AND DETAILS

Submit to the CM, at least 42 days before fabrication, two copies of all detailed
working drawings and calculations for the erection and for temporary works and,
where applicable, the following information:
1. Specification of materials used in the temporary works;
2. Locations, sizes, lengths and form of joint, angle between fusion faces, gap
between parts of all welds. Symbols conforming to Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel 2011 should be used for standard weld forms, but full
details must be given of any non-standard welds;
3. Where welds are to be made in the shop or elsewhere;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Details of stress relieving;

5. Details of testing and inspection methods.
STR1.D730.9 FABRICATION APPROVALS

Do not commence fabrication until Approval to the proposals has been received.
Such Approval does not relieve the Contractor of any obligation under the Contract.
STR1.D740.9 APPROVED FIRMS

1. Select a specialist contractor from the Development Bureau's "List of Approved
Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works" in the
category of Structural Steelwork for CM's approval;
2. Employ the Approved specialist contractor and accept all normal obligations
under the Contract including responsibility for works carried out by the specialist
contractor.
STR1.D750.9 ERECTION APPROVALS

Before commencing erection of footbridges:
1. Obtain approvals from Highways Department, Commissioner of Police, and
Commissioner for Transport for proposed method of erection of footbridges;
2. Comply with all requirements of the Highways Department and the
Commissioners at Contractor's own expense and without any claim for extension
of time.
STR1.D760.9 ERECTION PROPOSALS

1. Prepare and submit the erection proposal at an appropriate time having regard to
the programme of work and the time taken for checking by the CM, obtaining
replies and Approvals from the Highways Department and the Commissioners,
and making any necessary amendments as required by the Highways
Department, the Commissioners and the CM. Details of the erection proposal
submitted must include:
a. A method statement including the type of plant and equipment to be used;
b. Drawings and calculations of any proposed temporary falsework system;
c. All drawings properly numbered, fully detailed and dimensioned. All
calculations and drawings submitted certified and signed by a Registered
Structural Engineer, stating that the design is adequately safe.
2. Amend details as necessary to meet the CM's requirements and then submit
through the Authority, to the aforesaid authorities for obtaining their approvals;
3. The giving of consent by the CM to the proposal does not relieve the Contractor
of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract including his
responsibility to obtain the necessary approvals from the aforesaid authorities.
Allow a minimum of four weeks for comments from various Government
Departments on the erection proposal.
STR1.D770.9 ERECTION PROCEDURE

1. Ensure that all falsework used does not interfere with normal traffic flow, and
not reduce the width of the traffic lanes. Comply with the minimum clearance
restriction imposed by relevant authorities for falsework spanning across
carriageways and footways;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Assemble, fit and temporarily bolt or tack weld members to Approval prior to
final riveting or welding;
3. Submit records of inspection of the completed formwork and falsework to the
CM for information before carrying out any further works that may affect the
stability of the formwork and falsework. Such records are to be certified by a
contractor's superintendent holding qualification equivalent to TCP Grade T4 in
civil or structural engineering discipline;
4. Monitor falsework levels and make any necessary adjustments for settlement, or
other deflection or movements.
STR1.D780.9 BRIDGE BEARINGS

1. Prepare bearing surfaces for bridge bearings by removing all oil and grease by
use of a suitable solvent all mill scale, rust and dirt removed by shot blasting;
2. Protect the proposed surface by covering with tape or similar material. The
surfaces must not be primed or painted at any time prior to application of the
bonding agent.

STRUCTURAL STEEL STR1 > MATERIALS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS
GENERAL
STR1.M020.9 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Ensure that all structural steelwork is in accordance with the Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel 2011 for building and general work and in accordance with
BS 5400 and the Structure Design Manual for Highways and Railways issued by the
Highways Department for bridge works except where specified otherwise.
STR1.M030.9 APPROVALS
Prior to commencing construction, submit for Approval any details required of the
welding plant, techniques and procedures, jigs, workshop facilities and construction
devices e.g. cranes, scaffolding etc, which the Contractor proposes using for the
fabrication and erection of the steelwork. The information must be in sufficient
detail to enable the CM to approve or otherwise.
STR1.M040.9 SAFETY
Comply with safety recommendation contained in BS EN 1011-1:2009 and with the
Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance throughout the fabrication,
transport, handling and erection of structural steelwork.
STR1.M050.9 METHOD OF MANUFACTURE

Do not use the following method of steel manufacture:
1. Steel made by the Bessemer process;
2. Rimming steel.
STR1.M060.9 STEEL GRADES

Structural steelwork to comprise weldable structural steel in accordance with the
following standards as appropriate:
1. Hot rolled sections (excluding hollow sections) and plates:
BS EN 10025 Part 1-6:2004 Grade S275, S275JR, S355JR, S355J0, S450J0;
2. Hot finished hollow sections:
BS EN 10210-1:2006, Grade S275J0H, S355J0H, S450J0;
3. Cold formed hollow sections:
BS EN 10219-1:2006: Grade S275J0H, S355J0H;
4. Cold rolled galvanized sections:
either BS 2989:1992 Grade Z35, coating type G600, surface finish N, or Hot
dipped coated steel sheets to BS EN 10147:1992 Grade FE E3509, coating type
G600, surface finish N.
STR1.M070.9 HOT ROLLED SECTIONS

Dimensions, mass, tolerances and rolling margins for:
1. Universal beams, columns, joists, tees and channels to BS 4:Part 1:2005;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Hollow sections to BS EN 10210-2:2006;

3. Angles to BS EN 10056-1:1999 and BS EN 10056-2:1993.
STR1.M080.9 COLD ROLLED SECTIONS

1. Dimension, mass and tolerances of cold rolled sections to BS 2994:1976 (1987);
2. Do not use cold rolled sections without Approval.
STR1.M090.9 COLD ROLLED HOLLOW SECTIONS

1. Dimension, mass and tolerances of cold rolled hollow sections to BS EN 10219-
2:2006;
2. Do not use as substitute for hot finished hollow sections.
STR1.M100.9 PLATES, FLATS AND BARS

1. Comply with the standards as follows:
a. For plates dimensions and mass tolerances to BS EN 10029:2010;
b. For wide flats dimensions and mass tolerances to Euronorm 91 Class II
thicknesses tolerances;
c. For bars dimensions and mass tolerances to Euronorm 59 - Square bars,
Euronorm 60 - Round bars, Euronorm 61 - Hexagonal bars.
2. Ensure tolerances on thickness are wholly over that shown on the drawings
unless otherwise specified.
STR1.M110.9 SURFACE QUALITY

Surface quality of steel to be in accordance with the following:
1. Sections: BS EN 10163 Part 3:2004 Class C;
2. Plates and wide flats: BS EN 10163 Part 2:2004 Class A.
STR1.M120.9 SURFACE DEFECTS AND REPAIR

1. Steel with surface defects within the limits of the following may be repaired and
used:
a. Sections: BS EN 10163 Part 3:2004 Class C;
b. Plates and wide flats: BS EN 10163 Part 2:2004 Class A.
2. Obtain Approval to carry out surface defect repairs by welding.
STR1.M130.9 SURFACE RUSTING

Use only steel with Grade A, B or C surface rusting in accordance with BS 7079:
Part A1:1989 (1994).
STR1.M140.9 MAXIMUM CARBON EQUIVALENT

Steel used in built-up welded assemblies or at welded connections must have a
carbon equivalent value not exceeding that appropriate to the grade of steel given in
Annex D1.1 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 where this
may be required for the avoidance of hydrogen cracking in welds unless the
Contractor's proposed welding procedures are such to make this requirement
unnecessary.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.M150.9 MARKING STEELWORK

Clearly mark all steelwork for identification and erection purposes as follows:
1. Identification: ensure that all steel elements are identified in accordance with BS
EN 10025:2004, indicating grade, cast number and manufacturer's identification
mark. Where indicated on the Drawings as being unmarked, tag steelwork and
leave free of all other marking or hard stamping;
2. Grade S355 and S450 steel: in addition to marking in accordance with BS EN
10025:2004 mark steel with a continuous pale blue water paint line. Mark
immediately, with light blue water painting any part cut from S355 and S450
steel which does not have a light blue marking;
3. Cold work steel: mark cold worked areas of member with orange water paint;
4. Marking for erection purposes: tag, hard stamp or pencil weld each member
with an individual identification mark, which can not be obliterated by surface
coatings. Prepare a marking drawing identifying markings and indicating
position of member in structure;
5. Permanent identification: supply and fix to structure after erection, a brass
identification plate. Plate to indicate with lettering not less than 15 mm high,
etched or punched to a depth not less than 1.5 mm, the following:
a. Steelwork Contractor's name;
b. Grade of steel in structure;
c. Date of fabrication.
STR1.M160.9 NON-AVAILABLE MATERIALS

Obtain Approval for any equivalent alternative required when the specified material
is not available.
STR1.M170.9 MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATES

Provide the manufacturer's certificates for all steel sections, rivets, bolts, screws, nuts
and washers delivered to Site.
STR1.M180.9 CLASS OF STEEL

Use only the Class of steel as stated in the Project Specific Specification, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings and/or Approved.
BOLTS, ACCESSORIES, CONNECTIONS AND

FITTINGS
STR1.M210.9 STEEL GRADE FOR CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS
Use Grade S275 steel as a minimum, subject to design suitability, unless otherwise
specified.
STR1.M220.9 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS AND NUTS

1. To BS 3692:2001:Grade 8.8;
2. To the strength of BS 3692:2001:Grade 8.8 and the tolerances of BS 4190:2001;
3. To BS EN 14399:2005 used as ordinary high strength bolts in accordance with
BS 4604:Part 1:1970, without the hardened steel washers.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.M230.9 BS 4190 HOLDING DOWN BOLTS AND NUTS

Holding down bolts and nuts to BS 4190:2001:Grade 4.6. Unless otherwise agreed
by the CM, holding down bolts shall be encased in concrete or grout and with either
one of the following:
1. Normal bolt head at the exposed end;
2. Screwed ends with two nuts at the exposed end.
STR1.M240.9 BS 3692 HOLDING DOWN BOLTS AND NUTS

Holding down bolts and nuts to BS 3692:2001:Grade 8.8. Unless otherwise agreed
by the CM, holding down bolts shall be encased in concrete or grout and with either
one of the following:
1. Normal bolt head at the exposed end;
2. Screwed ends with two nuts at the exposed end.
STR1.M250.9 BLACK BOLTS AND NUTS

To BS 4190:2001:Grade 4.6.
STR1.M260.9 DRIVE SCREWS

Use self-tapping metallic drive screws to BS 4174:1972.
STR1.M270.9 PLAIN WASHERS FOR BLACK BOLTS

Round washers to be to BS 4320:1968, Form A made from cold rolled strip in the
hardened condition to BS 1449:Part 1:1991:Section 1.15, Grade CS4 chamfered on
one outside edge.
STR1.M280.9 SPRING WASHERS FOR BLACK BOLTS

Washers to be single coil square or rectangular steel spring washers to
BS 4464:1969 (1990).
STR1.M290.9 TAPERED WASHERS

Made from cold formed strip in the hard condition to BS 1449:Part 1:1991:Section
1.15, Grade CS4 to similar dimensions and tolerances as shown in BS EN
14399:2005.
STR1.M300.9 BOLT LENGTHS

Ensure threaded portion of each bolt projects through the nut by at least one thread.
STR1.M310.9 HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS

Use bolts and associated nuts and washers to BS EN 14399:2005 unless otherwise
specified.
STR1.M320.9 RIVETS
Use mild steel rivets for general engineering purposes to BS 4620:1970 (1988).
STR1.M330.9 TURNBUCKLES OR SIMILAR

Obtain Approval for specially made elements and components such as turnbuckles.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.M340.9 MARKING BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES

Clearly mark all bolts, screws, nuts and washers by either embossed or indented
markings identifying the relevant British Standard. (See also STR1.W040).
WELDING CONSUMABLES
STR1.M410.9 QUALITY OF ELECTRODES, RODS AND WIRES
Select to give weld metal properties not less than the minimum specified for the
grade of steel being welded.
STR1.M420.9 CONSUMABLES FOR WELDING STEELS TO BS EN 10025

To BS EN 1011-1:2009.
STR1.M430.9 ELECTRODES FOR WELDING GRADE S355 AND S450 STEELS

To be capable of depositing no more than 15 ml of diffusible hydrogen per 100 g of
deposited weld metal, as defined in BS EN ISO 2560:2009.
STR1.M440.9 COVERED ELECTRODES FOR MANUAL METAL ARC WELDING

To BS EN ISO 2560:2009.
STR1.M450.9 FILLER WIRES FOR GAS-SHIELDED WELDING

To BS EN ISO 14341:2011.
STR1.M460.9 CORED ELECTRODES

To BS EN ISO 17632:2015.
STR1.M470.9 FILLER WIRES AND FLUXES FOR SUBMERGED ARC WELDING

To BS EN ISO 14171:2010.
STR1.M480.9 CONTINUOUS COVERED ELECTRODES

Of an Approved manufacture.
STR1.M490.9 MANUFACTURER'S TEST CERTIFICATES

Provide CM with relevant manufacturer's certificates for each batch of
electrodes/rods/coils of wire.
STR1.M500.9 STORAGE OF ELECTRODES

Keep electrodes in unbroken packets in accordance with BS EN 1011-1:2009. Any
drying or baking of consumables before issue shall be carried out in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations.

STRUCTURAL STEEL STR1 > WORKMANSHIP
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WORKMANSHIP
TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

STR1.W010.9 GENERAL
Make all necessary arrangements for transport of steel from the fabrication yard to
the site.
STR1.W020.9 HANDLING
Carefully load, stack, and unload to avoid damage of any description. Replace
damaged items at Contractor's own expense unless the CM permits rectification of
damage.
STR1.W030.9 SPECIAL HANDLING

1. Where necessary; use, special slings or lifting points or both for handling,
loading and unloading in fabrication shops, during transit and on Site;
2. Provide special supports, packings and lashings on vehicles, trucks and on ship
(if appropriate) to prevent chafing;
3. Ensure small components receive special handling and stacking;
4. Ensure unpainted components, e.g. high strength friction grip bolts and
associated nuts and washers are adequately protected against corrosion.
STR1.W040.9 BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, AND SCREWS

1. Transport and store in sealed or wire clipped bags labelled to identify:
a. Contents;
b. Number;
c. Grade;
d. Standard;
e. Manufacturer;
f. Batch or cast number.
2. Store in a dry area dedicated to the purpose;
3. Do not mix contents of opened bags.
STR1.W050.9 EXPOSURE TO POLLUTANTS

1. Take precautions to minimise exposure of steelwork to atmospheric or chemical
pollution before and after fabrication;
2. Store and stack steel members in such a manner that markings are clearly visible;
3. Either one of the following:
a. For superstructure works:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
i. Store steelwork awaiting erection clear of a levelled, well-drained and

maintained hard-standing ground and keep different members separate.
Lay or stack to avoid accumulation of water or dirt on or against any of
the surfaces. Provide suitable packings between layers of stacked
steelwork. Ventilate covered steelwork sufficiently to preclude
condensation.
b. For works other than that in sub-clause (3)(a):
i. Store steelwork awaiting erection clear of the ground and keep different
members separate. Lay or stack to avoid accumulation of water or dirt
on or against any of the surfaces. Provide suitable packings between
layers of stacked steelwork. Ventilate covered steelwork sufficiently to
preclude condensation.
STR1.W060.9 ROAD TRANSPORT

1. Use vehicles long enough to carry components with permitted overhang at either
end;
2. Provide intermediate supports to which a component can be tied with strops to
prevent oscillation;
3. Sit components on softwood supports covered with soft clean pads;
4. Ensure buckles to strops do not touch components.
STR1.W070.9 SEA TRANSPORT

1. Containerise steelwork destined to be shipped overseas;
2. Do not ship steelwork as deck cargo unless in containers;
3. Ensure containers can be handled at ports of exist and entry if vehicle cannot be
ferried;
4. Pack containers so that no components touch. Use softwood with soft padding
and man-made fibre ropes and strops to prevent movement and contract;
5. Bag fasteners and accessories;
6. Bundle small components and prevent contact;
7. Chromate dip galvanized steel, which is not to be overcoated, when it is to be
containerised for longer than three weeks or when going to go through the
tropics.
STR1.W080.9 REPAIR OF DAMAGE INCURRED IN TRANSPORT

1. Inspect steelwork after transportation;
2. Set aside components with damage to steel or coatings;
3. Report damaged steel to the CM;
4. If damaged component is not rejected by the CM repair by agreed method;
5. Repair coatings as specified immediately.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FABRICATION
STR1.W110.9 ACCESS
Provide access for the CM at all reasonable times to all places where work is being
carried out, with all necessary facilities for inspection during fabrication and off-site
assembly.
STR1.W120.9 GEOMETRIC FORM

Keep all material, before and after fabrication, straight unless required to be of
curvilinear form. Keep free from twists. Avoid excessive stack-up of sections to
prevent damage and distortion.
STR1.W130.9 IDENTIFICATION
Identify at all stages of fabrication, structural steel as described in STR1.M150.
STR1.W140.9 SURFACE PREPARATION

Before fabrication remove all oil and grease by use of a suitable solvent from all bare
surfaces and remove all mill scale, rust and dirt by either:
1. Shot blasting to surface finish designation Sa 2 to BS 7079:Part A1:1989 (1994);
2. Mechanical wire brushing to surface finish designation St 2 to BS 7079:Part
A1:1989 (1994).
STR1.W150.9 POST CLEANING

After cleaning adopt one of the following methods:
1. Apply a coat of blast primer, not greater than 20 microns DFT. Where
subsequent welding is to be carried out ensure that a weld through blast primer is
used which will not give off noxious fumes during welding. Ensure
compatibility with final protective system; or
2. Fabricate steelwork within four hours of cleaning and apply protective system
primer (See STR1.W1220); or
3. Reclean steel after fabrication by shot blasting or mechanical wire brushing to
standard required for protective coating and apply protective system primer (See
STR1.W1220).
STR1.W160.9 EXECUTION
1. Carry out all fabrication to:
a. The Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 for hot rolled
sections and cold formed sections in building;
b. BS 5400:Part 6:1980 for plates and sections in bridgework.
2. Conform with the requirements for accuracy of construction with respect to
levels, dimensions, alignment and fabrication tolerances of members and joints
given in the above Code of Practice and British Standard.
STR1.W170.9 SETTING OUT

Set out all holes and cuts along the length of a member from one datum line
perpendicular to its longitudinal axis. Mark centres of all holes at standard back
marks/cross centre unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W180.9 TEMPORARY ATTACHMENTS

Design and fabricate all temporary attachments for use as assembly/erection aids to
ensure their use will not damage the structure of its surface protection.
STR1.W190.9 END PLATES

1. For flexible end plate connections:
a. To be not less than 12 mm thick;
b. To extend across, but not be connected to the top flange;
2. For sealing hollow sections;
a. Suspend suitable desiccant (Silica-gel) in bags in each void prior to sealing
up;
b. Weld sealing plate over end.
STR1.W200.9 JIGS
Use jigs for repetitive, interchangeable or complicated work.
STR1.W210.9 MEASUREMENT AND SETTING OUT MARKS

Make all measurements by steel tape or bands calibrated at 20°C and used at the
correct tension.
STR1.W220.9 CONTINUOUS STRUCTURES

Make allowance in setting out continuous structures for dimensional variations due
to temperature variations.
STR1.W230.9 STRAIGHTENING BENDING AND CAMBERING OF STEEL SECTIONS

Submit proposals to the CM where steel sections are required to be straightened, bent
to a specified radius or precambered and methods to be adopted to perform these
operations, for his approval in each case. Ensure that the adopted method does not
weaken or deface the member.
STR1.W240.9 POST FABRICATION MAKING GOOD

Clean and prepare all mechanical damage, weld burns and welded surfaces as
follows:
1. By shot blasting; or
2. Mechanical or hand wire brushing;
3. All bare and welded surfaces must also be made good and primed in accordance
with STR1.W150;
4. Plates over 25 mm that are to be connected by high strength friction grip bolts
and found to be bowed or rippled must be machined flat before the steel leaves
the fabrication works.
STR1.W250.9 CUTTING STEEL

1. Cut by sawing, shearing, cropping, nibbling, laser or machine flame cutting,
unless otherwise Instructed. Do not use manual gas cutting without Approval;
2. Shearing must not distort steelwork;
3. Saw cut slightly oversize to allow for machining and/or grinding;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Flame cut oversize where necessary to allow for removal of notches by

machining.
STR1.W260.9 CUT EDGES

1. Remove burrs, sharp arrises and slag from edges of all cut members;
2. Dress machine sheared or cropped edges to a neat finish, free from distortion.
STR1.W270.9 MACHINING GENERALLY

1. Grind stiffeners, plates and the like to fit the profile of the parent member with
diagonal cuts to clear the root radius;
2. Machine stanchion splices and butt joints of compression members true and
square;
3. Splay cut projecting corners of cleats, plates, etc and machine the edges and ends
of all flanges and end plates of girders or other members except where Universal
beams or flats with reasonably square edges are used;
4. Machine the edges of all web and flange plates of welded girders square unless
specified otherwise. Where plates are specified to be planed, cut to sufficient
size to permit 3 mm to be planed off all edges. The edges of floor plates, gutter
plates, and trough flooring may be sheared;
5. Machine square all butt ends of compression members and those in close contact
throughout so that applied loads are evenly transmitted over the entire area of the
section.
STR1.W280.9 FLAME CUTTING

Grind off heat affected metal or notches where gas cutting is used. Where gas
cutting is applied to Grade S275 steel over 25 mm thick or to Grade S355 & S450
steel of all thicknesses, machine any gas cut edge which is to be subject to
fluctuating stresses along its length but not subsequently incorporated in a weld so as
to remove not less than 3 mm of the flame cut profile.
STR1.W290.9 FORMING HOLES FOR BOLTS AND RIVETS

1. Form holes by any of the following methods:
a. Drilling full size;
b. For plate less than 15 mm thick: punching 2 mm less in diameter than the
required size and subsequently reaming out to the required diameter;
c. Punching full size and meeting the following conditions:
i. The punching operations must not in the opinion of the CM unduly
distort the material;
ii. The holes must be free from burrs which would prevent solid seating of
the parts when tightened;
iii. The thickness of the material through which the hole is punched must
not exceed the diameter of the hole;
iv. The thickness of the material must not be greater than 12 mm unless
Approved;
v. In spliced connections the holes in the mating surfaces must be punched
from the same direction.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
d. Holes must not to be punched full size in any of the following conditions:
i. In tension flanges at locations where plastic hinges have been assumed
in the design analysis;
ii. In elements of rigid connections in which local yield lines have been
assumed;
iii. Where repetition of loading makes fatigue critical in the member design.
2. Comply with clause 14.2.5 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
2011.
STR1.W300.9 BUILT-UP SECTIONS

1. Drill after the members have been assembled and tightly clamped together;
2. Where not practicable, drill the holes to a diameter at least 2 mm less than the
required size and ream after assembly to the full diameter.
STR1.W310.9 REMOVING BURRS

Remove all burrs from holes from assembly. Parts which have been drilled to
receive black bolts need not be separated to remove burrs. Parts drilled to receive
HSFG bolts to be separated and the surfaces cleaned of all burrs and drilling fluid to
ensure the coefficient of friction is not compromised.
STR1.W320.9 HOLES FOR BLACK BOLTS

Finished holes for black bolts must not be more than 2 mm in diameter larger than
the diameter of the bolt passing through them for bolt diameters up to 24 mm, and
not more than 3 mm larger than the diameter of the bolts for bolt diameters over
24 mm, unless otherwise specified or required by the design.
STR1.W330.9 HOLES FOR HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS

Use hole sizes specified in STR1.W320 where the number of plies in the grip does
not exceed three, if the number of plies exceed three, form the holes in the two outer
plies as before and the diameter of the hole in the inner plies not more than 3 mm
larger than that of the bolt.
STR1.W340.9 FITTED BOLTS, PINS OR RIVETS

1. Holes for rivets:
a. All matching holes for rivets to register with each other so that a gauge
2 mm less in diameter than the diameter of hole will pass freely through the
assembled members in a direction at right angles to such members;
b. Finished holes to be more than 2 mm in diameter larger than the diameter of
the rivet passing through them, for rivet diameters up to 24 mm, and not
more than 3 mm greater than the diameter of the rivet for rivet diameters
over 24 mm, unless otherwise specified;
c. Holes for rivets must not be formed by a gas cutting process.
2. Holes for fitted bolts:
a. Drill holes for fitted bolts to a diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the
shank subject to a tolerance of +0.15 mm and -0 mm;
b. Use tacking bolts or cramps on parts connected together with fitted bolts.
Drill through all the thicknesses at one operation and ream to size;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. All holes not drilled through a thicknesses at one operation are to be drilled
to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not
practicable, drill and ream the parts separately through hard bushed steel jigs.
STR1.W350.9 SLOTTED HOLES

Drill first then ream out smooth to required size.
STR1.W360.9 PREVENT MOISTURE INGRESS

Make provision to prevent moisture ingress to sealed hollow members where these
are holed for bolts.
MECHANICAL JOINTING
STR1.W410.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Prepare and prime the contact surfaces at riveted, bolted and screwed joints. If the
contact surfaces are specified to be coated or otherwise treated, e.g. machined
surface finish, obtain Approval to the joint before assembly.
STR1.W420.9 USE OF HIGH STRENGTH FRICTION GRIP BOLTS

1. Clean the interface of members jointed with high strength friction grip bolts to
the specified surface preparation and leave unpainted;
2. Use high strength friction grip bolts in accordance with BS 4604:Part 1:1970.
Tighten the bolts and nuts by the torque-control method using a calibrated
power-operated or a hand-operated torque wrench to achieve the proof loads set
out below:
Nominal size Proof Load, kN
(minimum shank tension)
M12 49.4
M16 92.1
M20 144
M22 177
M24 207
M27 234
M30 286
3. Use tapered washers on surfaces with a slope >3°.
STR1.W430.9 WRENCH CALIBRATION

1. Maintain the wrench in a proper working condition in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Calibrate the wrench regularly using a
calibrated bolt load meter and using a bolt from the batch of bolts to be used in
the works as follows:
a. At the commencement of each new working day or shift;
b. With each change of bolt diameter;
c. With each change of bolt grip length in excess of 1/5th of the length used in
the calibration of the wrench in accordance with BS 4604:Part 1:1970.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Re-apply the wrench to bolts previously tightened in a multi-bolt connection to

ensure all bolts have the correct torque;
3. Ensure that the bolt used in the calibration is, as far as is practicable,
representative of bolts to be used in the works. No additional lubrication should
be applied unless it is to be applied to bolts incorporated in the permanent works.
STR1.W440.9 CALIBRATION OF BOLT LOAD METER

The bolt load meter for measuring bolt shank tension must be calibrated by an
Approved laboratory before tightening of bolts and nuts commences and at regular
intervals agreed by the CM. During re-calibration, a replacement calibrated bolt load
meter must be provided on the Site. Submit calibration results to the CM at least one
week before the bolt load meter is used.
STR1.W450.9 BLACK OR PRECISION BOLTED CONNECTIONS

1. Keep all bolts, nuts and washers free from rust and dip in linseed oil
immediately before connections;
2. Provide each bolt with at least one steel washer placed under the nut or bolt head,
whichever element is to be rotated during the tightening operation;
3. Tighten all bolt heads and nuts against surfaces normal to the bolt axes. Use
tapered washers as necessary to meet this requirement. Where bolted
connections are subject to vibration provide the nuts with lock nuts or castle nuts
and split pins.
STR1.W460.9 ALIGNMENT, TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS AND PERMANENT

FIXINGS
1. Do not distort holes or members during alignment;
2. Do not enlarge holes without prior Approval;
3. Drifts used during the fabrication or erection of the steelwork must be of such
shape and dimensions as to locate the work accurately. Drifts must not cause
any damage to or deformation of the component parts, nor alter in any way the
sizes of the holes provided for the permanent bolts;
4. Temporary bolts used for the initial or trial assembly of any part of the steelwork
must have the same hole clearances as the permanent bolts;
5. Tighten all bolts securely in the finished work so that the length of each bolt
after tightening projects at least one thread beyond the other face of the secured
nut.
STR1.W470.9 BOLTED CONNECTIONS WITH PROVISION FOR SLIDING

Provide slotted hole through one member and a round hole in the other. Connect
with shouldered bolts, spring washers, flat washers, castle nuts and splits pins. Form
round holes with a diameter less than the width of the slot and place the shoulder of
the bolt against the faying surface of the unslotted member enabling the bolt to be
tightened on this member. Locate the spring washer under the head of the bolt and
the flat washer under the castle nut.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WELDING
STR1.W510.9 GENERAL
1. Prior to fabrication of bridgework carry out welding and flame cutting trials
using representative samples of materials to be used in the work in accordance
with BS 5400:Part 6:1980;
2. Provide an experienced and competent operative to supervise welding. Submit
evidence that all welders are capable in accordance with STR1.T080;
3. When directed by the CM, keep a site record that identifies the welders
responsible for major welds.
STR1.W520.9 USE OF WELDING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

1. Use welding plant, equipment and accessories that comply with the requirements
of BS 638;
2. Use individual transformers or motor generator that are fitted with a current
density control and situated close to the welder so that he may adjust the current;
3. Store and use welding consumables in accordance with BS EN 1011-1:2009, BS
EN ISO 2560:2009 and the manufacturers recommendations;
4. Store electrodes in dry conditions and where necessary keep in heated quivers
while in use;
5. Use covered electrodes to BS EN ISO 2560:2009;
6. Regularly calibrate, using an ammeter, the transformers or motor generators to
ensure that current is kept within the range specified by the manufacturers for
electrodes;
7. Do not open packets except for sampling or when electrodes are to be used;
8. Reject electrodes with broken, damp or damaged coatings.
STR1.W530.9 PREPARATION FOR WELDING

1. Submit in writing, for Approval, details of proposed welding procedure for each
type of welded connection in accordance with STR1.T100;
2. Keep the surfaces to be welded free from all scale, grease, paint, rust and other
matter. Prepare all parts to be welded in a manner that ensures a close fit;
3. Prepare fusion surfaces to BS EN 1011-1:2009. Dry surfaces and warm as
necessary, to remove any condensation.
STR1.W540.9 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SITE WELDING

1. Surfaces to be welded must be clean, free from paint, grease, contaminants dry
and free from condensation. Where the steel is damp or the temperature is low
then warming with a low temperature flame may be used. Thermal indicating
crayons may be used to determine the plate temperature and the area pre-heated;
2. Protection from the weather: provide adequate protection to shield the welding
from the weather. Tent type structures made from fireproof and waterproof
material may be used to shield the weldment from the wind and rain. Such
temporary structures to be mounted on stable scaffolding supports, and a stable
platform to be provided for the welder. Where welding to hollow sections is
required ensure draughts are prevented from blowing through the section;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Electrodes: bake on site at a temperature between 100°C and 150°C and where
necessary store in heated quivers for use at the welders convenience;
4. Power supply: may be from a transformer or generator to provide a three phase
power supply of the required voltage. Locate the generator or transformer as
close as possible to the welder to prevent a drop in voltage along the cables
length. Ensure all the cables are as short as possible, routed away from the path
of construction vehicles, and adequately protected;
5. Earth run: adequately earth all electrical plant. Ensure the welding return from
the weldment is adequate in cross section and correctly connected and earthed;
6. Weld detail: ensure the welded joint is of the correct profile and fit up. As a
general guide do not carry out welding where the gap is less than 1 mm or more
than 3 mm unless a backing strip is provided. Where a backing strip is provided
the weld gap is not to exceed the greater of 5 mm or the thickness of the material
being welded. Adequately support all welded joints with props or restraints that
ensure relative movement of the fusion faces is prevented;
7. Work in confined spaces: provide adequate ventilation and formulate plans of
evacuation and escape before the work commences.
STR1.W550.9 METHOD OF WELDING

1. Carry out welding in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 1011-1:2009.
Manual metal-arc weld unless otherwise specified;
2. Execute welding in a flat or horizontal position wherever possible. Do not weld
overhead without Approval;
3. Ensure electrodes used in conjunction with fluxes give a weld deposit having
mechanical properties at least equal to the minimum specified for the parent
metal. Use electrodes and fluxes strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
STR1.W560.9 REMOVAL OF SLAG

Remove welding slag by chipping before depositing subsequent runs, and
thoroughly wire brush the surfaces.
STR1.W570.9 TACK WELDS

Do not use tack welding unless Approved. Tack welds to be minimum 50 mm long.
Form location welds, where Approved, of the same quality and size as the first run of
the main weld which when completed, fuse completely with the ends of the location
welds and form a reasonably regular finished profile. Do not weld temporary
attachments to principle joints. Obtain Approval of the position of welds for
temporary attachments.
STR1.W580.9 WELD DEFECTS

1. Welds will be rejected if they do not meet the acceptance criteria of welds
stipulated in clause 14.3.6.7 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of
Steel 2011;
2. Take particular care when welding hollow sections, plates and angles to avoid
distortion by using correct sequences and speeds.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W590.9 FILLET WELDS

Deposit fillet welds to the required length, throat thicknesses and with partial or full
penetration as specified.
STR1.W600.9 BUTT WELDS

1. Form butt welds as full penetration welds between prepared fusion faces, unless
otherwise directed;
2. Carry out back chipping, grinding or gouging of the deposited weld as required
to obviate imperfections in the root run such that the root edges or root faces are
not out of alignment by more that 1/8 of the thickness of the thinner material for
material up to 12 mm thick or by more than 1.5 mm for thicker material;
3. Grind butt welds flush without loss of parent metal;
4. In the fabrication of built-up assemblies ensure, all butt welds in each
component are completed, wherever possible, before the final assembly.
STR1.W610.9 STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS

Weld stud shear connectors by automatic stud welding gun strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations unless specified otherwise.
ERECTION OF STEELWORK
STR1.W710.9 ERECTION
1. Carry out all erection to:
a. The Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 for hot rolled
sections and cold formed sections in building;
b. BS 5400:Part 6:1980 for plates and sections in bridgework.
2. Conform with the requirements for accuracy of construction in respect of levels,
dimensions and alignment given in the above Code of Practice and British
Standard and those contained in the "Schedule of Tolerances" in Appendix H to
this Specification.
STR1.W720.9 ERECTORS
Carry out all work employing trained and experienced erectors. Provide evidence of
the erector's competence when directed by the CM.
STR1.W730.9 SAFETY
Comply with the relevant regulations on safety including the 'Factories and Industrial
Undertakings Ordinance', the recommendations of BS 5531:1988 as applicable and:
1. Use only recently tested equipment for lifting and remove from site any
damaged equipment;
2. Do not carry out complex operations at a height except from safe platforms large
enough to take operators and equipment. Maintain platforms and safe access
until work has been accepted and any added protection completed.
STR1.W740.9 STABILITY
Ensure stability of structure at all stages of construction.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W750.9 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Prepare and submit details of the proposed method of erection for the CM's consent.
Details submitted must include type of plant and equipment to be used and if
necessary drawings and calculations of any temporary work. The giving of consent
by the CM will not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for safe
erection of permanent work or the safe erection and subsequent dismantling of
temporary work.
STR1.W760.9 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Do not employ any plant or equipment which is, or in the CM's opinion likely to be,
unsuitable, unsafe, or likely to cause damage to the structure during erection or
damage to existing buildings etc.
STR1.W770.9 PREVENTION OF DISTORTION

Do not distort steelwork or exceed the stresses specified in the Code of Practice for
the Structural Use of Steel 2011 or BS 5400:Part 3:1982 for bridgework during
erection.
STR1.W780.9 APPROVED SEQUENCE

Erect structural steel according to the sequence agreed with the CM.
STR1.W790.9 FALSEWORK
When specified, design, construct and dismantle falsework to BS 5975:1982.
Supply all staging and all labour, tools, erection plant, lifts, services, nuts and
washers and other necessary materials. Provide temporary bracings and guys to
ensure adequate resistance to wind and stability against collapse during construction.
1. Submit records of inspection of the completed formwork and falsework to the
CM for information before carrying cut any further works that may affect the
stability of the formwork and falsework. Such records are to be certified by a
contractor's superintendent holding qualification equivalent to TCP Grade T4 in
civil or structural engineering discipline;
2. Monitor falsework levels and make any necessary adjustments for settlement, or
other deflection or movements.
STR1.W800.9 SETTING OUT, LEVELLING AND LOCATION

Set out, level and position:
1. Using steel tapes or bands for setting out that are calibrated at 20°C and used at
the correct tension;
2. To a level that is levelled to a datum point and aligned to a base line during
erection. Agree both datum point and setting out lines before commencement;
3. That ensures all steelwork is accurately and securely located to the correct
profile and camber, if any, before assembly;
4. That ensures the structural steelwork is not subjected to stresses in excess of
those for which it was designed.
STR1.W810.9 ERECTION OF STEELWORK

1. Do not erect fabricated steelwork until all welded joints and specified protective
coatings have been inspected, tested where required, and Approved;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Align structural members accurately to the specified tolerances and obtain

Approval before any permanent welding or tightening of bolts is carried out;
3. Do not bed stanchion bases or grout anchor bolts until the steelwork has been
plumbed, levelled, aligned and Approved.
STR1.W820.9 STEELWORK BY SUB-CONTRACTOR

1. Take responsibility for checking all the work prepared by others that may be
incorporated into the work or the dimensions of any structure affecting steel
erection. As a result of the check report any discrepancies or shortfalls to the
CM immediately;
2. Ensure that the Sub-contractor supplies any items required to be cast into
concrete. Cast in such items using templates provided by the Sub-contractor
where these are necessary.
CLEANING, SURFACE PREPARATION AND

PROTECTION (POST FABRICATION)
STR1.W910.9 CLEANING AND COATING IN THE SUPPLIERS WORKSHOP
Ensure that the supplier provides sufficient covered and enclosed workshop space to
enable blast cleaning, priming coat and undercoat painting to be carried out in close
sequence. The blast cleaning section of the workshop must be fitted with extractors
and filters to prevent and deposition of dust on metal surfaces to be painted.
STR1.W920.9 CLEANING SURFACES OF BARE METAL

Thoroughly clean down to remove all dirt, grease and the like, using a suitable
solvent and thoroughly chip, scrape, wire-brush flame clean or grit blast to remove
all loose scale back to clean metal.
STR1.W930.9 CONTAMINATED SURFACES

1. Weld spatter: clean of all surfaces, keep paint films free of embedded foreign
metallic particles;
2. Concrete deposits etc: wash or clean off immediately they occur and if
necessary make the surfaces good to the satisfaction of the CM;
3. Oil or grease: clean with white spirit.
STR1.W940.9 PAINTED AND OTHER COATED SURFACES

Unless otherwise directed by the CM clean the final workshop applied coating to the
external surfaces on site by:
1. Washing with a solution of an Approved liquid detergent followed by rinsing
with clean fresh water and allowed to dry thoroughly before overcoating;
2. Thoroughly cleaning rivet heads, bolts heads and the surfaces surrounding them;
3. Removing all loose particles, dust and debris immediately prior to application of
paint.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W950.9 ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION

Do not apply protective coating to surfaces bearing atmospheric corrosion products
or other chemicals which may be harmful to the coating or succeeding coating.
Clean off these contaminants, which may include any remaining after surface
preparation as specified in this Worksection and any produced by welding, to an
Approved extent that is compatible with the specified protective system.
STR1.W960.9 BLAST CLEANING

1. Carry out blast cleaning in accordance with BS 7079:Part A1:1989 (1994) and
that produces surface qualities as follows:
a. For surfaces to be galvanized to 140 microns: Sa 2 (prior to pickling).
Note: Surfaces to be galvanized to 85 microns do not require blast cleaning;
b. For surfaces to be metal sprayed: as specified in BS EN ISO 2063:2005;
c. For surfaces to be painted: Sa 2½ .
2. Non-metallic abrasive should be free from contamination and recovered material
is to be cleaned to the satisfaction of the CM before re-use;
3. Do not exceed a maximum amplitude (peak to trough) of the blast-cleaned
surface of 0.1 mm;
4. Clean blasted surfaces by brush or vacuum. Do not touch by hand. Do not
contaminate in any other way;
5. Apply protective coating within 4 hours of blast cleaning;
6. Before commencing any follow on operations submit, for Approval, a sample
blast cleaned steel panel measuring not less than 150 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm
thick adequately protected by sealed clean polythene wrapping. The Approved
sample will be retained by the CM for comparison with the prepared steelwork.
STR1.W970.9 MECHANICAL CLEANING

Carry out mechanical cleaning to surface quality designation St 2 of
BS 7079:Part A1:1989 (1994) by power driven tools, such as carborundum grinding
discs, chipping hammers and needle guns, followed by steel-wire brushing and
dusting to remove all loosened material. Avoid excessive brushing of the metal
through prolonged application to rotary wire brushes. Protect surfaces within 48
hours of mechanical cleaning.
STR1.W980.9 PICKLING
Carry out pickling of steel by the "Footner" process as specified in BS 5493:1977.
Apply the first priming coat of paint as soon as the steel has dried and is still warm.
STR1.W990.9 FLAME CLEANING

Plan and control the sequence of operations for flame cleaning steelwork to avoid the
risk of distortion and buckling. Clean the flame cleaned surfaces of all loosened
material. Apply priming coat while the steel is still warm. Control the heat input so
that no harmful distortion of the steelwork occurs.
STR1.W1000.9 NEW GALVANIZED SURFACES

Thoroughly clean to remove all dirt, oil and grease and pre-treat with either an
etching primer or Approved etching compound.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W1010.9 PREVIOUSLY PAINTED GALVANIZED SURFACES

Thoroughly degrease previously painted galvanized surfaces. Where corrosion has
spread under the paint film, remove old paint with an organic solvent type paint
remover.
STR1.W1020.9 CLEANED OR COATED MEMBERS

1. Ensure that, unless specified otherwise, exposure times for blast cleaned, wire
brushed or coated surfaces (other than at joints) are not longer than those given
in the following table:
Surface Enclosed Workshop Outside
a. Blast cleaned 4 hours Nil
b. Metal Sprayed 4 hours Nil
c. Mechanically Cleaned 48 hours Nil
d. Blast Primer on 'a' Maximum exposure of 8
weeks with up to 2 weeks
of this time outside
e. Etch primer on 'b' 24 hours Nil
f. Primer on 'c' 48 hours Nil
g. 1st Undercoat on 'd', 'e' or 'f' 48 hours Nil
h. Subsequent Undercoats As agreed by the CM
Note: 'Outside' refers to any area outside a fully enclosed workshop.
2. The tabulated exposure times refer to any part of the surface being blast or
mechanically cleaned, metal sprayed or painted;
3. For surface condition 'd' where blast primed steelwork is exposed outside, the
minimum dry paint film thickness over the peaks of the blast cleaned steel must
not be less than 13 microns;
4. Zinc rich coated steelwork may only be exposed outside for the minimum period
to allow movement at the fabricator's works. Such movement to be under the
supervision of the CM or his representatives and unless the weather conditions
are favourable the sections are to be covered;
5. Where it is necessary to overcoat two pack paints of the epoxide or polyurethane
type, re-coat within 48 hours of application. Where it is not possible to overcoat
within this time the paint film to be abraded to produce a roughened surface,
given a flash coat of suitable primer, and allowed to dry for at least 4 hours
before application of the next coat of the system;
6. No steelwork to be loaded for transport until the paint system has been
Approved as being sufficiently dry for handling;
7. Keep steelwork to be site painted clean and dry. Where necessary provide
temporary shelters to simulate, as far as is practicable, workshops conditions.
APPLICATION OF METAL COATINGS

STR1.W1110.9 HOT DIP GALVANIZING
1. To BS EN ISO 1461:2009: minimum mean coating thickness of 45 microns to
85 microns depending on thickness of steel sections as stipulated in Table 3 of
BS EN ISO 1461:2009, unless otherwise specified;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Apply metal coatings to BS EN ISO 1461:2009 only to components of a tensile

strength up to and including that of general grade high strength friction grip bolts
unless otherwise specified;
3. Make good small areas of galvanized coating damaged by welding, cutting or by
rough treatment during transit or erection either by the use of low melting point
zinc alloy repair rods, powders made specifically for this purpose, or by the use
of at least two coats of zinc rich paint to BS 4652:1995. Apply sufficient
material to provide a zinc coating at least equal in thickness to the galvanized
coating.
STR1.W1120.9 SPRAYED METAL COATING

To BS EN ISO 2063:2005. The nominal thickness of coating to be 100 microns.
Apply one flood coat of polyurethane (or similar approved) sealer immediately after
spraying.
STR1.W1130.9 ELECTROPLATING
1. To BS 3382:Parts 1 and 2:1961;
2. Coating thickness: 5 microns minimum.
STR1.W1140.9 CHROMIUM PLATING

To BS 4641:1986 (1996). Ensure that the protection offered is at least the same as
that provided for the adjacent main structural steel element.
STR1.W1150.9 METAL COATING ON PART ONLY OF ASSEMBLED SECTION

Apply the metal coating before the remainder receives its priming coat.
STR1.W1160.9 PROTECTION OF HSFG BOLTED JOINTS

1. Zinc or aluminium sprayed steelwork: where the metal spray is carried over the
interfaces of the HSFG bolted joints, take the etch primer on the parent metal
between 10 mm and 20 mm inside the perimeter of the joint area. The outer
surfaces and edges of the joint material may also be given a coat of the same
primer in order to reduce surface preparation required after the joint has been
made;
2. Painted steelwork: where metal spray is specified only at the interfaces of
HSFG bolted joints, carry the metal spray between 10 mm and 20 mm outside
the perimeter of the joint area and the blast primer taken between 10 mm and
20 mm inside the perimeter. If the outer surfaces and edges of the joint materials
are metal sprayed, these may be given a coat of etch primer in order to reduce
subsequent surface preparation;
3. Painted steelwork: where the interfaces of HSFG bolted joints are bare steel,
take the blast primer between 10 mm and 20 mm inside the perimeter of the joint
area. The outer edges and surfaces of the joint material may also be given a coat
of blast primer in order to reduce subsequent surfaces preparation.
STR1.W1170.9 PROTECTION OF OTHER BOLTED JOINTS

1. Shop joints: apply metal spray plus etch primer or blast primer alone to parent
and joint material. Assemble the joint immediately after the first undercoat of
the parent system has been applied to the contact surfaces;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Site joints: apply to all surfaces, excepting those of fasteners, the same painting
system in the shop as is to be applied to the parent metal surfaces, unless
STR1.W1180.9 PROTECTION OF NON-BOLTED JOINTS

1. Riveted joints: shop and site joints: apply metal spray plus etch primer or blast
primer alone, to parent and joint material. Assemble the joint immediately after
the first undercoat of the parent system has been applied to the contact surfaces;
2. Welded joints: unless otherwise specified, treat welds and surfaces which have
been affected by welding with the protective system which is applied to the
parent surfaces.
STR1.W1190.9 SURFACES ADJACENT TO TREATED JOINTS

1. Keep metal spray at least 15 mm clear of areas to be welded and mask off these
areas during spraying;
2. Where paints other than blast primers are to be applied to the parent surfaces
before the making of a joint they must be stepped back at 30 mm intervals
commencing at 80 mm from welded joints and at 10 mm from the perimeter of
all other joints.
STR1.W1200.9 PAINTING AND SEALING OF JOINTS

1. As soon as possible after joints have been Approved, paint the parent and joint
material, exposed parts of bolts, nuts and washers, weld and affected areas to
bring them up to the same state of preparation and painting as the adjoining
surfaces;
2. Seal all bolted joints against the ingress of water. Before painting commences
and, subject to Approval, plug gaps at joints with an Approved filler. Seal the
perimeter of all joints with subsequent coats of paint.
STR1.W1210.9 APPLICATION OF PAINT

1. Types of paint and painting generally to be as specified at STR1.W1220 and
STR1.W1230 as appropriate for application to steelwork;
2. Only apply to surfaces which have been prepared and cleaned in accordance
with this Worksection;
3. Do not apply in the following conditions:
a. When the ambient temperature falls below 4°C or the relative humidity rises
above 90%;
b. For external works: during period of inclement weather, e.g. rain, fog or
mist or when condensation has occurred or is likely to occur on steel;
c. When the surface temperature of the metal to be painted is less than 3°C
above the dew point of the ambient air;
d. When, in the opinion of the CM, the amount of dust in the atmosphere
and/or on the surface of the material is such that the application of the paint
would be unsatisfactory;
e. For two pack paints of the epoxide resin type: when the temperate is below
5°C or as recommended by the paint manufacturer, nor when the
temperature is likely to fall below the specified minimum during the curing
period.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W1220.9 PAINTING STEELWORK

Apply the appropriate paint system as detailed in the following table at the locations
as specified in the Project Specific Specification.
System A: - primer : 1 coat of high build zinc phosphate paint;
- undercoat : 2 coats of oil based with micaceous iron oxide
phenolic paint;
- finish : 1 coat of alkyd resin paint;
- minimum 250 microns
total DFT :
System B: - primer : 1 coat of epoxy resin with aluminium mastic
paint;
- undercoat : 1 coat of epoxy resin paint;
- finish : 1 coat of epoxy resin paint;
total DFT :
System C: - primer : 1 coat of inorganic zinc silicate paint, DFT
75 microns;
- undercoat : 2 coats of high build micaceous iron oxide epoxy
paint;
- finish : 1 coat of high build amine adduct cure epoxy
paint;
total DFT :
System D: - primer : 1 coat of two pack wash primer, DFT 5 microns;
- undercoat : 1 coat of epoxy resin paint;
- finish : 1 coat of epoxy resin paint or 2 coats of
polyurethane paint;
total DFT :
System E: - Inhibitor : 'Rustoleum' or other rust inhibitor paint approved
by the CM;
- primer : Zinc phosphate or, for hot-dip galvanized or GI
surface, 'T' wash as specified in BS 5493:1977,
Section 2, Clause 11.3.2;
- undercoat : 2 coats of micaceous iron oxide paint;
- finish : 1 coat of oil based paint or 1 coat of micaceous
iron oxide paint;
- DFT of each as recommended by the manufacturer.
coat :
Notes:
1. The different types of paints within each painting system to be compatible with
each other and manufactured by the same manufacturer. Successive coats in a
painting system, including stripe coats, to be in contrasting colours to aid
identification;
2. DFT is the dry film thickness.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W1230.9 PAINT FOR STEELWORK PROTECTION SYSTEMS

1. In accordance with BS 5493:1977, Section 2, Table 4 unless specified otherwise.
Organic zinc-rich paint to comply with BS 4652:1995. Do not use lead-based
paint for finishing coats;
2. To be supplied in sealed containers of not more than 5 litres capacity. Each
container shall show the following information:
a. The name of the manufacturer;
b. The paint manufacturer's reference number;
c. Intended purposes, type of pigment and binder;
d. Batch number, date of manufacture, expiry date and pot life; and
e. Colour, gloss, drying times and flash point.
3. To be in compliance with the prescribed limits of VOC content as set out in the
Air Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulation;
4. Submit written confirmation from paints suppliers and manufacturers for the
following:
a. The VOC contents of the proposed paints are complied with the Air
Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulation;
b. The types of regulated paints that the proposed paints belong; and
c. The VOC contents of the proposed paints.

STR1.W1310.9 GENERAL
Refer to Chapter 15 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 and
Appendix H, "Schedule of Tolerances" to this Specification.
OFF-SITE FABRICATION
STR1.W1410.9 SUBMISSIONS
Where structural steelwork is to be fabricated off-site, submit the following items for
Approval within a period from the notified date for commencement of Works as
specified in the Project Specific Specification:
1. The name, fabrication yard address with street maps and job reference of the
fabricator and the following:
a. A quality assurance (QA) scheme and testing regime on fabrication of the
structural steelwork with the items as stipulated in STR1.W1420; and
b. A fabrication and delivery schedule.
2. An RSE appointed by the Contractor/fabrication yard who shall carry out the
duties as stipulated in STR1.W1430;
3. A laboratory for carrying out the tests and issuing test certificates in the QA
scheme (except for those tests specified in STR1.T520 (2)), which shall be
accredited either by Hong Kong Accreditation Scheme (HKAS) under the Hong
Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS), or an equivalent
organization which has signed a mutual recognition agreement with HOKLAS.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.W1415.9 SUBMISSIONS FOR MINOR STEEL STRUCTURES FABRICATED OFF-

SITE
1. Prior to fabrication, submit for Approval proposal of a laboratory for carrying
out tests and issuing test certificates for minor steel structures excepting the
following tests:
a. Tests specified in STR1.T520 (2);
b. Tests concerned are not applicable to minor steel structure as stated in
STR1.G040 (2).
2. The laboratory proposed in sub-clause (1) above shall be accredited either by
Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) under the Hong Kong Laboratory
signed a mutual recognition agreement with HKAS.
STR1.W1420.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QA) SCHEME

Ensure that the steelwork is fabricated under a quality assurance scheme which
covers the following items and is certified under ISO 9001:
1. Organisation chart of the fabrication yard with the qualification and experience
of key technical personnel clearly stated;
2. Responsibility of the management in respect of the fabrication process;
3. Material purchasing and delivery procedures;
4. Material / product identification, traceability process and control;
5. Fabrication and inspection process;
6. Designated welders who shall be tested to and comply with the requirements of
this Specification;
7. Quality control testing regime including welding procedural test and chemical
analysis for welding consumables used for temporary or permanent structural
steelworks on Site of steel grade as stated in STR1.M060 and shown in the
structural working drawings;
8. Control on non-compliant materials and works;
9. Transportation and storage process.
STR1.W1430.9 REGISTERED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

1. Appoint an Registered Structural Engineer (RSE) registered under Buildings
Department for ensuring and certifying the fabrication works are in compliance
with the drawings and Specification;
2. The duties and roles of the RSE include but not limited to:
a. Pay regular site visits for proper control of the works and submit reports
after each visit;
b. Carry out inspection on all activities which, in his professional judgement,
are critical and require close supervision;
3. The frequency of RSE's visits shall be a minimum of two visits per month.

STRUCTURAL STEEL STR1 > TESTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
STR1.T010.9 GENERAL
Allow sufficient time in the Works programme for the testing specified below. Do
not incorporate materials until relevant tests have been carried out and Approval
obtained.
STR1.T020.9 TESTING BY MANUFACTURER

Carry out inspection and testing on BS EN 10025:2004 products by cast and
documentation supplied in accordance with Euronorm 21. Specific testing and
documentation to include chemical analysis; tensile tests and impact tests.
STR1.T030.9 TESTING OF BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS

1. Testing arrangement:
Provide test specimens and carry out testing of bolts and associated nuts and
washers in accordance with the relevant BS in an Approved Laboratory
employed and paid for directly by the Contractor, when so directed by the CM;
2. Testing samples:
Rate of sampling to be one bolt per identifiable batch or 1% whichever is the
lesser unless otherwise specified.
STR1.T040.9 TEST CERTIFICATES

1. Submit a manufacturer's certificate of tests in accordance with the appropriate
standard for each steel batch relating to steel to be used in the works.
Documentation to include chemical analysis impact test and tensile test.
STR1.T050.9 TESTING OF SECTIONS

Testing samples:
1. Provide specimens for testing which shall be in accordance with the
requirements stipulated in the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
2011. In addition, provide further specimens for testing when otherwise stated
in the Project Specific Specification or as Instructed. For minor steel structures,
further test specimens for Class 1 Steel are not required. Test specimens to be
taken from sections selected at random on Site by the CM;
2. Prepare the test specimens to BS EN 10025:2004 or BS EN 10210:2006 as
directed and appropriately mark and deliver them to a Direct Testing Contractor
employed and paid direct by the Authority for testing. Testing and
documentation to include tensile tests and impact tests;
3. For steel sections used for construction of hoardings and associated covered
walkways and gantries, the frequency of sampling stated in the sub-clauses (1)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.T060.9 FAILURE OF TESTS

Non-compliance:
1. If any test specimens do not comply with the relevant BS, the CM may require
further tests at the Contractor's expense or reject the whole or part of the
particular consignment, which must be removed from Site forthwith.
STR1.T070.9 ULTRASONIC TESTING

When plates are subjected to through thickness tension by virtue of the type of
connection, test quality grade steel plates and flats which may, as a result of welding
be subject to lamellar tearing, using ultrasonic testing using equipment as described
in Section 2 of BS 5996:1993 and, unless otherwise specified or agreed, be of quality
LC3 as defined in Section 3 of that document.
STR1.T080.9 ABILITY OF WELDERS

1. All welders must be capable of passing the training tests to BS 1295:1987;
2. Where specified, carry out approval testing of welders by either one of the
following:
a. For welds where welding procedure approval is required to BS EN ISO
15614-1:2004: carry out approval testing of welders to BS EN 287:
Part 1:2004 for steel and stainless steel and to BS EN 287:Part 2:1992 for
aluminium as appropriate;
b. For welds where welding procedure approval is not required: carry out
approval testing of welders to BS 4872:Part 1:1982 for steel and stainless
steel and to BS 4872:Part 2:1976 (1995) for aluminium as appropriate.
3. Submit evidence to show that all welders satisfy the requirements as stated in
sub-clause (1) above.
STR1.T090.9 PARTICULARS OF INSPECTING AUTHORITY

Submit to the CM the name of the proposed inspecting authority endorsing welder
certificates and records of approval tests for welding procedures. The proposed
inspecting authority must be accredited by the Hong Kong Accreditation Service
(HKAS) under the Hong Kong Inspection Body Accreditation Scheme (HKIAS) for
welding inspection or by other accreditation bodies which have reached mutual
recognition agreement for inspection body accreditation with HKAS. The name to
be submitted at least 3 weeks before approval tests start or, if approval tests are not
required, at the same time as the welder certificates are submitted.
STR1.T093.9 BATCH OF WELDING CONSUMABLE

In this Specification, a batch of welding consumables is the quantity of welding
consumables of the same type and size, which may include one or multiple standard
lot(s) as defined in the manufacturer’s quality assurance programme, delivered to the
Site, or the off-site fabrication yard as one consignment that is covered by the
manufacturer’s certificate(s) and under one delivery order, and shall not exceed five
tonnes and twenty tonnes respectively.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.T094.9 TESTING OF WELDING CONSUMABLES

For each batch of welding consumables used for temporary or permanent structural
steelworks on Site of steel grade as stated in STR1.M060 and shown in the structural
working drawings, prepare 2 test specimens for each standard lot and carry out the
chemical analysis in accordance with BS EN ISO 2560:2009 or BS EN ISO
14341:2011 or BS EN ISO 14171:2010 or BS EN ISO 17632:2015 as appropriate,
except for the standard lot(s) where complying chemical analysis results have been
attained from the first chemical analysis under which circumstance no further
chemical analysis is required for the same standard lot(s) in subsequent batches of
welding consumables. The chemical analysis shall be carried out by an Approved
laboratory, accredited either by the Hong Kong Accreditation Service (HKAS) under
the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or an equivalent
organization which has signed a mutual recognition agreement with HKAS and is
employed and paid for directly by the Contractor. Allow sufficient time for testing
of welding consumables in the programme.
STR1.T095.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA - WELDING CONSUMABLES

A standard lot in a batch of welding consumables is deemed to comply with the
requirements of the Specification if the test results meet the requirements of BS EN
ISO 2560:2009 or BS EN ISO 14341:2011 or BS EN ISO 14171:2010 or BS EN
ISO 17632:2015 as appropriate. If the test results of the first chemical analysis of a
standard lot complied with the requirements of the Specification, further chemical
analysis on the same standard lot in all subsequent batches of welding consumables
delivered to the same Site or the same off-site fabrication yard is not required.
STR1.T096.9 FAILURE OF TESTS

Non-compliance:
If any test specimen of the welding consumables does not comply with BS EN ISO
2560:2009 or BS EN ISO 14341:2011 or BS EN ISO 14171:2010 or BS EN ISO
17632:2015, the Contractor may choose to carry out further test(s) and take further
test samples from the same lot of welding consumables at the Contractor's expense
or remove the whole lot of the particular batch from Site and / or the fabrication yard
for off-site fabrication if appropriate. If further test(s) is chosen, the number of
further test(s) is to be calculated by the application of the formula given below and
no extension of time will be allowed for the said further test(s). Bear the cost of such
further test(s).
number of further test(s) = n 2


 2n  3
where n = total number of unsuccessful inspection(s) / test(s)
progressively until all inspection(s) / test(s) is / are successful.
Typical example of calculating the number of further inspections / tests is given in
Appendix I to this Worksection, for illustration purposes only.
Acceptance criteria and further actions arising from the further test(s) shall be in
accordance with STR1.T095.
For a standard lot with any non-compliant chemical analysis results, chemical
analysis shall be carried out for the standard lot of welding consumables, as defined
in the manufacturer’s quality assurance programme, subsequently delivered to the
same Site or the same off-site fabrication yard regardless of the results of the further
test(s).

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.T097.9 STANDARD FOR REJECTION

If the result of any test or any further test does not comply with the specified
requirements in the Specification for any particular property, the standard lot in a
batch of welding consumables is deemed failing to comply with the specified
requirements for that property. Then:
1. The non-compliant standard lot in a batch of welding consumables shall be
removed from Site;
2. The non-compliant standard lot in a batch of welding consumables shall be
removed from the off-site fabrication yard if appropriate.
STR1.T100.9 STANDARD OF WELD PROCEDURE TESTING

1. Unless acceptable documentation relating to the welding of similar connections
is available, carry out approval testing of each welding procedure in accordance
with BS EN ISO 15614-1:2004 for steel and BS EN ISO 15614-2:2005 for
aluminium.
STR1.T110.9 ADDITIONAL DESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTS AS SELECTED BY THE

CM
1. Prepare specimen welds and subject to one or more of the following tests as
required:
a. Butt welds:
i. Transverse tensile test to BS EN 895:1995;
ii. Transverse bend tests to BS EN 910:1996 or BS 709:1983 as
appropriate with the root of the weld in tension and compression
respectively;
iii. Side bend tests to BS EN 910:1996 or BS 709:1983 as appropriate;
iv. Macro-examinations to BS 709:1983 or BS EN 1321:1997 as
appropriate.
b. Fillet welds:
i. Fracture tests to BS 709:1983;
ii. Macro-examinations to BS 709:1983 or BS EN 1321:1997 as
appropriate.
c. For destructive weld test, comply with the same hold time as stipulated in
clause 14.3.6.4 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011;
d. If any test specimens do not comply with the relevant BS, the CM may
require further tests at the Contractor's expense or reject the whole or part of
the particular consignment, which must be removed from Site forthwith.
2. Strictly follow the procedures of welding established in the successful Approval
test for the Works. Carry out further Approval tests if either the material or
procedure changes.
STR1.T120.9 ADDITIONAL NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF STEEL, STAINLESS

STEEL AND ALUMINIUM
1. Testing arrangement:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
a. Arrange for a percentage of each welder work to be selected by the CM and

subjected to non-destructive testing as follows:
i. Visual inspection in accordance with BS EN 970:1997;
ii. Ultrasonic in accordance with BS EN 1714:1998; or magnetic particle
inspection in accordance with BS EN 1290:1998. (Not for stainless
steel and aluminium);
iii. The scope and frequency of test shall be in accordance with clause
14.3.6.1 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011;
iv. For welds on steelworks of hoardings and associated covered walkways
and gantries, the percentages of tests stated in the sub-clause (1)(a)(iii)
b. Comply with clause 14.3.6.4 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use
of Steel 2011 for hold time before final non-destructive testing.
2. Non-compliance:
Where any weld is judged to be unsatisfactory by the CM, a further 10% of that
welder's work is to be tested. If further defects are found, then all weld in the
group should be tested by the same method.
STR1.T130.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

Non-compliance:
1. Welds on steel will be rejected if they do not meet the acceptance criteria for
welds stipulated in clause 14.3.6.7 of the Code of Practice for the Structural Use
of Steel 2011;
2. Welds on aluminium will be rejected if they do not meet the acceptance level for
welds stated in BS 8118:Part 2:1991.
STR1.T140.9 WELD REPAIR

Cut out and repair all defective welds in accordance with the Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel 2011 for steel or BS 8118 :Part 2:1991 for aluminium.

FABRICATION ON SITE)
1. Carry out tests required to satisfy the requirements of BS 4872, BS EN 287-
1:2004 and BS EN ISO 15614-1:2004 by an Approved Laboratory employed
and paid for directly by the Contractor;
2. Provide samples required by the CM (STR1.T050, STR1.T110, STR1.T120 and
STR1.T140) for tests by a Direct Testing Contractor employed and paid for
directly by the Authority.
TESTING OF PAINTS
STR1.T210.9 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Permit authorized sampling of materials on site. Set aside unopened sealed
containers of materials for testing when directed by the CM.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.T220.9 PAINT SAMPLES

Testing samples:
1. Sample each batch of paints in accordance with BS 3900:Part A1:1992.
STR1.T230.9 TESTING PAINTS

Testing method:
1. Carry out the following tests on each sample as directed by the CM in
STR1.T240:
BS 3900: Part C2:1994: Surface drying test;
BS 3900: Part C3:1990: Through dry test;
BS 3900: Part E1:1970: Bend test;
BS 3900: Part E2:1992: Scratch test;
BS 3900: Part E7:1974 (1992): Resistance;
BS 3900: Part F3:1971 (1986): Resistance to artificial weathering;
BS 3900: Part F4:1968 (1991): Resistance to continuous salt spray;
BS 3900: Part F8:1993: Resistance to humid atmospheres
containing sulphur dioxides.
STR1.T240.9 TESTING LABORATORY

Submission requirements and testing arrangement:
1. Test certificates to be submitted to the CM before painting starts;
2. Where manufacturer's test certificates are available these may be accepted in lieu
of a retest at the CM's discretion;
3. Tests for paints in STR1.T230 to be carried out by an Approved Laboratory
employed and paid for directly by the Contractor.
STR1.T250.9 GLOSS FINISH

Prepare a sample panel to indicate the standard of gloss finish and obtain Approval.
Ensure application matches agreed sample.
SPACE FRAMES - WARRANTIES AND TESTING

STR1.T310.9 SUITABILITY WARRANTY
If required, submit a warranty as specified in the Project Specific Specification.
STR1.T340.9 TESTING OF SECTIONS

1. Undertake testing of steel and aluminium sections as clauses STR1.T010,
STR1.T030, STR1.T050 and STR1.T060 except as specified at sub-clause (2)
below;
2. Provide at least two full length samples for every aluminium section of same
thickness to be used in the Works for testing to BS EN 10002-1:2001, as
appropriate.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
STR1.T350.9 WELDING TESTS

1. Testing of welds for steel and aluminium will be required;
2. Clauses STR1.T080 to STR1.T140 apply equally to welding of aluminium.
STR1.T360.9 PROOF LOAD TESTING

1. If in the opinion of the CM the relevant British Standards are not appropriate for
the welding configuration proposed, the CM may order not more than 10% of
the welded components for proof load tests at the Contractor's expense;
2. Provide suitable equipment to carry out proof load tests on welded components.
Apply a tensile load uniaxially in opposite directions of a magnitude equal to the
resultant of the worst combination of factored design loads multiplied by a factor
of 1.3. and on removal of the test load, the deflection shall be reduced by at least
20%;
3. The weld shall be deemed to comply the requirements of this Specification when
under the proof load test the weld shall exhibit no sign of crack. If any one test
of a group of welded components fails to meet this Specification, then 2
additional welded components for the same group are to be subject to load proof
tests. If any of these two further welded components continue to fail the test,
then each welded component of the group is to be subject to proof load tests.
Any cracks identified in any stage of the test are to be repaired and retested until
they all satisfy the requirements;
4. A group of welded components is defined as the welds done by the particular
welder within a specified period of time as decided by the CM.
STR1.T370.9 NODAL JOINTS OF SPACE FRAMES

Testing samples:
1. Provide one test specimen for every 100 or part thereof of each type of nodal
joint for tensile test. The test load shall be a tensile load applied uniaxially in
opposite directions of a magnitude equal to the resultant of the worst
combination of factored design loads of the possible heaviest connecting
member multiplied by a factor of safety of 1.3 acting on the nodal joints.
STR1.T380.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR NODAL JOINT TESTS

The test specimen in STR1.T370 is deemed to comply with the requirement of this
Specification under the test loading if there is no sign of crack, no deformation at
thread, buckling or rupture of any part of the nodal joint. On removal of the test load
the deflection should reduce by at least 20%.
STR1.T390.9 FAILURE AND RE-TESTING OF NODAL JOINTS

Non-compliance:
1. The CM will reject any test specimens which do not comply with the
requirements. In addition, the CM may require further tests at the Contractor's
expense or reject the whole or part of the particular consignment, which must be
removed from Site forthwith;
2. Carry out further tests if directed, provided the results of these further tests fulfil
the test requirements, all the nodal joints represented by these tests are deemed
to comply with this Specification;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. If the result of any of these additional tests fail to fulfil the test requirements, the
part of the particular consignment represented by these nodal joints must be
removed from Site forthwith.
STR1.T400.9 LOADING TESTS

If in the opinion of the CM that loading tests on parts of the space frame are
necessary, the CM may order proof tests in accordance with the Code of Practice for
the Structural Use of Steel 2011, by an Approved Laboratory employed and paid for
directly by the Contractor.
OFF-SITE FABRICATION
STR1.T510.9 TESTING AND SURVEILLANCE VISITS AT FABRICATION YARD
For off-site fabrication in Guangdong province of China, comply with the following:
1. Provide all necessary facilities and attendance required by the CM and
Consultant employed for inspection and surveillance visits and the Direct
Testing Contractors for carrying out the tests as stated in STR1.T520 (2) at the
fabrication yard;
2. Make all necessary arrangement including providing transportation to the CM
and Consultant employed for inspection and surveillance visits to the fabrication
yards. Take the staff of each of the Direct Testing Contractors to the locations of
the testing and / or parallel testing works for the first visit to the fabrication yards,
and the Direct Testing Contractors shall arrange their own transportation for
subsequent visits to the same locations of the fabrication yard.
STR1.T520.9 ENGAGEMENT OF SPECIALIST TESTING CONTRACTOR (FOR OFF-

SITE FABRICATION)
For off-site fabrication, testing arrangement shall comply with the Approved quality
assurance scheme and testing regime submitted in accordance with STR1.W1410.
The engagement of specialist testing contractor shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. Except for the testing arrangement as stated in sub-clause (2) below, all testing
shall be carried out by the Approved laboratory proposed in STR1.W1410 (3),
employed and paid for directly by the Contractor;
2. For off-site fabrication carried out in Guangdong province of China, comply
with the following:
a. The following tests shall be carried out by the Direct Testing Contractor
employed and paid for directly by the Authority:
i. Tensile tests and impact tests of steel sections;
ii. Visual inspection of welds;
iii. Ultrasonic inspection of welds;
iv. Magnetic particle inspection of welds.
b. Provide specimens for testing as specified in 2(a)(i) above, which shall be
selected from sections at random either in the fabrication yard by the Direct
Testing Contractor or on the Site by the CM or his representatives. The
preparation and delivery of the test specimens from the fabrication yard or
the Site to the laboratory for testing shall be carried out by the Direct Testing
Contractor;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. Welds for testing shall be selected and tested by the Direct Testing
Contractors in the fabrication yard.

STRUCTURAL STEEL STR1 > APPENDIX STR1/I
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX STR1/I
STR1.APPEND1.9 CALCULATION OF NUMBER OF FURTHER INSPECTIONS / TESTS
Typical Examples for Illustrative Purposes Only

1. Chemical analysis shows 2 samples failing to meet the requirements in the Specification.
2. The Contractor can either remove the standard lot of the particular batch of welding consumables
from the Site and / or the fabrication yard for off-site fabrication or at his own expense, carry out
further test(s) in accordance with the formula of:
n 2

 2n  3 = 2² - 2 x 2 + 3
= 3 further tests
3. If one of the above 3 further tests fails, the Contractor may order further tests to be carried out at the
Contractor's own expense by re-applying the formula and taking into account the total number of
failed samples. Altogether and based on the formula, the number of total retesting required:
= 3² - 2 x 3 + 3
=6
As 3 tests have already been carried out by the Contractor, the Contractor shall carry out:
6 - 3 = 3 further tests
4. If the next 3 further tests show further failed samples, the formula will be re-applied as before until all
the tests results are satisfactory.
.

APPENDIX E - MODIFICATION TO DESIGN
OF DOMESTIC BLOCKS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE APPENDIX E - MODIFICATION TO

DESIGN OF DOMESTIC BLOCKS
Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) APE /1

APPENDIX E - MODIFICATION TO DESIGN APE > TABLE OF CONTENTS
OF DOMESTIC BLOCKS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE1 SCOPE OF APPENDIX ............................................................................. 4

APE1.A010.9 APPLICATION................................................................................................... 4
APE1.A020.9 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PERMITTED
MODIFICATIONS PROPOSED IN TENDER STAGE .................................... 4
APE1.A030.9 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PROPOSALS FOR
MODIFICATIONS IN POST-CONTRACT STAGE ......................................... 4
APE1.A040.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS ................. 4
APE2 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PERMITTED

MODIFICATIONS PROPOSED IN TENDER STAGE ......................... 5
GENERALLY ..................................................................................................................................... 5
SCOPE OF MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 5
APE2.A020.9 LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................... 5
APE2.A030.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK SYSTEM ........................................................ 5
APE2.A040.9 NON-MANDATORY PRECAST EXTERNAL FACADES ............................. 5
APE2.A050.9 NON-MANDATORY SEMI-PRECAST SLABS .............................................. 5
APE2.A060.9 NON-MANDATORY PRECAST STAIRS ........................................................ 5
APE2.A070.9 MECHANISED CONSTRUCTION METHODS ............................................... 5
SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................................................................... 6
APE2.A110.9 SUBMISSIONS - GENERALLY ....................................................................... 6
APE2.A120.9 CONFLICT WITH SPECIFICATION ............................................................... 6
APE2.A130.9 MECHANISED CONSTRUCTION METHODS ............................................... 6
APE2.A140.9 PROPOSED STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS ............................................. 6
APE2.A150.9 PROGRAMME FOR FURTHER SUBMISSIONS IN POST
CONTRACT STAGE ......................................................................................... 6
DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................................................ 6
APE2.A210.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................. 6
BILLS OF QUANTITIES .................................................................................................................. 7
APE2.A310.9 AMENDMENTS................................................................................................. 7
APE2.A320.9 PREPARATORY WORKS FOR FINISHES ..................................................... 7
PRELIMINARIES ITEMS ................................................................................................................ 7
APE2.A410.9 ON-SITE PLANT AND EQUIPMENT .............................................................. 7
INFORMATION TO TENDERERS FOR NOMINATED SUB-CONTACT AND
SPECIALIST WORKS ...................................................................................................................... 8
APE2.A510.9 INFORMATION TO TENDERERS FOR NOMINATED SUB-
CONTRACT AND SPECIALIST WORKS ....................................................... 8
APE3 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PROPOSALS FOR

MODIFICATIONS IN POST-CONTRACT STAGE ............................. 9
GENERALLY ..................................................................................................................................... 9
APE3.A020.9 TERMS AND CONDITIONS ............................................................................ 9
SUBMISSIONS ................................................................................................................................... 9
APE3.A110.9 SUBMISSIONS - GENERALLY ....................................................................... 9
APE4 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS

TO DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION FOR DOMESTIC ................
BLOCKS .................................................................................................... 10
APPENDIX E - MODIFICATION TO DESIGN APE > TABLE OF CONTENTS
OF DOMESTIC BLOCKS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION............................................................................................ 10

APE4.A010.9 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS......................................................... 10
CONSTRUCTION............................................................................................................................ 10
APE4.A110.9 INSPECTION OF WORK ................................................................................ 10
APE4.A120.9 OPENINGS THROUGH STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ................................... 10
APE4.A130.9 INSTALLATION OF CONCEALED SERVICES ........................................... 10
ACCEPTABILITY OF STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS...................................................... 11
APE4.A210.9 CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTABILITY ............................................................ 11
APE4.A220.9 REDESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS .................................................................... 11
APE4.A230.9 STRUCTURAL MEMBER SIZES ................................................................... 11
APE4.A240.9 CONCRETE DESIGN ...................................................................................... 11
APE4.A250.9 REINFORCEMENT DESIGN .......................................................................... 11
APE4.A260.9 USE OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT ........................................................... 11
APE4.A270.9 PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS .................................................................... 11
APE4.A280.9 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENTS ........................................... 11
ACCEPTABILITY OF ARCHITECTURAL MODIFICATIONS.............................................. 11
APE4.A310.9 CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTABILITY ............................................................ 11
APE4.A320.9 FLOOR LAYOUTS AND ELEVATIONS ....................................................... 12
APE4.A330.9 MODIFICATIONS TO BUILDING STRUCTURE......................................... 12
APE4.A340.9 UTILITY SERVICE ROOMS .......................................................................... 12
APE4.A350.9 RENDER COAT TO WALLS .......................................................................... 12
APE4.A360.9 CONCEALMENT OF ELECTRICAL WIRING ............................................. 12
APE4.A370.9 EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES ............................................................ 12
APE4.A380.9 DIMENSIONS OF OPENINGS ....................................................................... 12
APE4.A390.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB AND SCREED FINISH ............................................... 12

SCOPE OF APPENDIX APE1
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE1 SCOPE OF APPENDIX

APE1.A010.9 APPLICATION
1. All terms and requirements set out in this Appendix shall only be applicable to
contracts with the construction of superstructure of domestic blocks.
2. All terms and requirements set out in this Appendix shall be applicable to
permitted modifications or proposals for modifications to design and/or
Specification for the domestic blocks.
3. Where any terms and requirements in Worksection APE4 of this Appendix are at
variance with those in Worksections APE2 and APE3 of this Appendix, the
terms and requirements of Worksection APE4 shall prevail.
APE1.A020.9 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PERMITTED MODIFICATIONS

PROPOSED IN TENDER STAGE
Terms and requirements applicable to permitted modifications to design and/or
Specification for the domestic blocks proposed by the Contractor in tender stage are
specified in Worksection APE2 of this Appendix.
APE1.A030.9 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PROPOSALS FOR

MODIFICATIONS IN POST-CONTRACT STAGE
Terms and requirements applicable to modifications to design and/or Specification
for the domestic blocks proposed by the Contractor in post-contract stage after the
notified date for commencement of the Works are specified in Worksection APE3 of
this Appendix.
APE1.A040.9 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS

The acceptance criteria for permitted modifications to design and/or Specification
proposed by the Contractor in tender stage and for modifications to design and/or
Specification for domestic blocks proposed by the Contractor in post-contract stage
after the notified date for commencement of the Works are specified in Worksection
APE4 of this Appendix.

TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PERMITTED...... APE2
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE2 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON

PERMITTED MODIFICATIONS
PROPOSED IN TENDER STAGE
GENERALLY
All terms and requirements included in Worksection APE2 hereunder apply to
permitted modifications to design and/or Specification for domestic blocks proposed
by the Contractor in tender stage.
SCOPE OF MODIFICATIONS
APE2.A020.9 LIMITATIONS
1. Only modifications to design and/or Specification for domestic blocks arising as
a result of complying with Items APE2.A030 to APE2.A070 inclusive are
permitted in tender stage.
2. Permitted modifications proposed and submitted by the Contractor with the
tender shall be in accordance with the Special Conditions of Tender and shall
comply with all the requirements as specified in Worksections APE2 and APE4
of this Appendix.
APE2.A030.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK SYSTEM

The further use of large panel formwork system for constructing the structural walls
(see CON2.D310 to CON2.D450).
APE2.A040.9 NON-MANDATORY PRECAST EXTERNAL FACADES

The use of precasting method for constructing the external facades of the domestic
flat units (see Worksection CON5).
APE2.A050.9 NON-MANDATORY SEMI-PRECAST SLABS

The use of semi-precasting method for constructing the slabs to areas other than
domestic flat units (see Worksection CON7).
APE2.A060.9 NON-MANDATORY PRECAST STAIRS

The use of precasting method for constructing the stairs of the domestic blocks (see
Worksection CON7).
APE2.A070.9 MECHANISED CONSTRUCTION METHODS

The use of any Approved mechanised method of construction.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SUBMISSIONS
APE2.A110.9 SUBMISSIONS - GENERALLY
Submit a schedule listing any permitted modifications to the design and/or
Specification for domestic blocks proposed by the Contractor in a letter attached to
the Form of Tender.
APE2.A120.9 CONFLICT WITH SPECIFICATION

Submit with the tender a list of all items contained in the Specification which may
conflict with the tenderer's design, and full details of proposals for any amendments
or additions to the Specification.
APE2.A130.9 MECHANISED CONSTRUCTION METHODS

Submit with the tender details of any mechanised method of construction that it is
intended to use.
APE2.A140.9 PROPOSED STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS

Submit details with the tender showing:
1. The principles of any incidental structural design modifications proposed which
shall be prepared by a Registered Structural Engineer registered with the
Buildings Department; and
2. Proposals for supervision of all aspects of the concrete work by Contractor's own
staff and the CM.
APE2.A150.9 PROGRAMME FOR FURTHER SUBMISSIONS IN POST CONTRACT

STAGE
Agree programme for submission of design calculations, framing plans,
reinforcement details, etc. with the CM prior to the notified date for commencement
of the Works. No change to the design principles submitted with the tender
documents will be permitted.
DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
APE2.A210.9 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
Notwithstanding Clause 5.15 of the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor
shall, with respect to the Contractor’s proposed modification to the design and / or
Specification, be responsible for the satisfactory performance of the Works as
modified by the Contractor’s proposed modifications to the design and / or
Specification and shall guarantee the same to the Employer. The Contractor shall
indemnify and keep indemnified the Employer, his agents and employees against
any liability, claims, demands, proceedings, damage, costs, charges and expenses
whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto, and shall compensate the
Employer for any loss or expense arising therefrom.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
BILLS OF QUANTITIES
APE2.A310.9 AMENDMENTS
1. Subject to compliance with sub-clause (2) of this clause, the Contractor may, at
time of tender, insert, delete or revise the description and / or quantity of the
measured items within the Bills of Quantities to suit any modifications to design
and / or Specification for domestic blocks proposed by him. Such insertion,
deletion or revision shall be made in accordance with the Method of
Measurement stated in the Preliminaries to the Bills of Quantities. The
Contractor shall include a schedule in his tender showing all such revisions to
the Bills of Quantities;
2.
a. No insertion, deletion or revision shall be made to the Preliminaries to the
Bills of Quantities;
b. No insertion, deletion or revision to any provisional quantities contained in
the Bills of Quantities shall be allowed to be made, although the work or
works to which the provisional quantities refer may be modified by the
Contractor in accordance with Worksection APE2 of this Appendix.
APE2.A320.9 PREPARATORY WORKS FOR FINISHES

Where items, such as plastering, rendering and screeding, have been deleted from the
Bills of Quantities as a result of the operation of sub-clause (1) of Item APE2.A310,
the cost of all preparatory work, including keying, or the use of special bonding
agent, etc., as required by the CM, to receive any subsequent finish is deemed to
have been included in the tender.
PRELIMINARIES ITEMS
APE2.A410.9 ON-SITE PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
1. For domestic blocks, where the precast concrete facade system involves early
capital cost of major and necessary items of on-Site plant and equipment which
are used intimately in association with the precast facade construction, the
Contractor may make a request for special terms of payment in respect of these
items and is advised to make known to the Employer at time of tender, by
submitting proposals in a separate letter with his tender.
2. In this connection, the Contractor is to note that any special terms of payment
proposal must be restricted to only the on-Site items of plant and equipment as
described in Clause SCT10 of the Special Conditions of Tender and the amounts
of these items must have been tendered in Bill No 1 - Preliminaries. The
acceptance of any special terms of payment proposals shall be at the discretion
of the Employer.
3. All other Preliminaries items not related to the special terms of payment
proposal shall be paid in accordance with the provisions set out in Bill No 1
Preliminaries.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INFORMATION TO TENDERERS FOR NOMINATED

SUB-CONTACT AND SPECIALIST WORKS
APE2.A510.9 INFORMATION TO TENDERERS FOR NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACT
AND SPECIALIST WORKS
1. The Contractor shall give full information and assistance to tenderers tendering
for any Nominated Sub-contract or Specialist Works on any permitted
modifications to design and/or Specification for domestic blocks which may
affect the submission of a tender for any such Nominated Sub-contract or
Specialist Works.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, claims or expenses
whatsoever and howsoever arising on Nominated Sub-contracts or Specialist
Works as a result of any permitted modification to design and/or Specification
for domestic blocks and the Final Contract Sum shall not be adjusted in respect
of any such claims.

TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON PROPOSALS...... APE3
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE3 TERMS AND REQUIREMENTS ON

PROPOSALS FOR
MODIFICATIONS IN POST-
CONTRACT STAGE
GENERALLY
All terms and requirements included in Worksection APE3 hereunder apply to
modifications to design and/or Specification for domestic blocks proposed by the
Contractor in post-contract stage after the notified date for commencement of the
Works.
APE3.A020.9 TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1. Any modifications proposed by the Contractor in post-contract stage after the
notified date for commencement of the Works shall be submitted to the CM in
accordance with Clause 11.8 of the General Conditions of Contract. Such
proposals shall be treated as Requested Variation Proposals and subject to the
CM’s agreement under Clause 11.8 of the General Conditions of Contract.
2. The proposed modifications shall comply with all the requirements as specified
in Worksections APE3 and APE4 of this Appendix.
SUBMISSIONS
APE3.A110.9 SUBMISSIONS - GENERALLY
Any modifications proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted in accordance with
Clause 11.8(2) of the General Conditions of Contract. Submit with the proposal a
report identifying the principles of any proposed structural modifications which shall
be prepared by a Registered Structural Engineer registered with the Buildings
Department.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR PROPOSED...... APE4
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE4 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR

PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS TO
DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION
FOR DOMESTIC BLOCKS
DESIGN AND/OR SPECIFICATION
APE4.A010.9 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS
1. Any permitted modifications to design and/or Specification for domestic blocks
including any incidental structural design modifications proposed by the
Contractor in tender stage, and any modifications to design and/or Specification
for domestic blocks proposed by the Contractor in post-contract stage after the
notified date for commencement of the Works shall comply with the Hong Kong
Buildings Ordinance and its subsidiary Regulations.
2. The structural design of any modifications to domestic blocks shall comply with
the Building (Construction) Regulations, Codes of Practices, Practice Notes for
Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers (PNAPs), and the Hong Kong Housing Authority
Specification Library, currently in use.
3. In the event that any element of the design of modifications is not covered by the
requirements in the Ordinance, Regulations and documents specified in sub-
clauses (1) and (2) above or any British Standards, when instructed by the CM,
the Contractor shall demonstrate by design calculation or experiment at his own
expense the suitability of any such element to comply with any other proposed
standard.
CONSTRUCTION
APE4.A110.9 INSPECTION OF WORK
Any proposal that may require the CM or his representative to carry out inspection of
any work outside normal office hours will not be considered.
APE4.A120.9 OPENINGS THROUGH STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

Ensure that all proposed modifications allow for all openings, sleeves, etc., through
structural members as shown in the Contract drawings or where necessary.
APE4.A130.9 INSTALLATION OF CONCEALED SERVICES

Ensure that all proposed modifications allow for installation of all concealed
building services provisions in concrete, brickwork and blockwork where required
under the Contract.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ACCEPTABILITY OF STRUCTURAL
MODIFICATIONS
APE4.A210.9 CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTABILITY
The following clauses in this sub-section are subject to all the conditions stated
elsewhere in the Appendix.
APE4.A220.9 REDESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS

Redesign of the foundation is not permitted.
APE4.A230.9 STRUCTURAL MEMBER SIZES

Reduction to structural member sizes is not permitted. Increase to structural member
sizes shall be subject to Approval.
APE4.A240.9 CONCRETE DESIGN

Change to lower concrete grades and/or smaller concrete covers to reinforcing bars
are not permitted.
APE4.A250.9 REINFORCEMENT DESIGN

Modification to reinforcement design, except to suit any permitted modification to
structural concrete design, is not permitted.
APE4.A260.9 USE OF FABRIC REINFORCEMENT

Fabric reinforcement may be substituted for bar reinforcement providing that the
fabric reinforcement complies with all requirements of the Specification. In the
event that a change to design is required to suit a proprietary mesh, the cross
sectional area of the reinforcement in the fabric shall not, in any location, be less
than the designed area of steel/m² for bar reinforcement for that location.
APE4.A270.9 PRECAST CONCRETE STAIRS

Where a staircase flight is required to be constructed as precast concrete, a redesign
of the staircase flight to insitu concrete is not permitted. However, modifications to
the joints between the precast concrete flight and the insitu concrete landing may be
made but such modifications will be subject to Approval.
APE4.A280.9 NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENTS

In accordance with CON4.M010 to CON4.M030, non-structural concrete elements
which are not shown on the Structural Framing Plans may be substituted with precast
concrete providing that such precast concrete complies with all requirements of the
Specification.
ACCEPTABILITY OF ARCHITECTURAL
MODIFICATIONS
APE4.A310.9 CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTABILITY
The following clauses in this sub-section are subject to all the conditions stated
elsewhere in this Appendix.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APE4.A320.9 FLOOR LAYOUTS AND ELEVATIONS

Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, modification to floor layouts and
elevations is not permitted.
APE4.A330.9 MODIFICATIONS TO BUILDING STRUCTURE

Internal non-structural walls may be constructed as a later separate operation, and
may be constructed of precast concrete, or solid concrete blocks plastered both sides.
For any proposed design changes to internal non-structural walls provide at least the
same performance standards as the walls shown on the tender drawings.
APE4.A340.9 UTILITY SERVICE ROOMS

Notwithstanding the provisions of Item APE4.A330 above, no modification or
change to utility service rooms will be permitted.
APE4.A350.9 RENDER COAT TO WALLS

For domestic blocks, all walls receiving a tile or paint finish include a 10 mm render
coat unless otherwise specified. Under no circumstances is this render coat to be
omitted. Pay special attention to spatterdash in accordance with the Specification to
ensure adequate key for this render coat.
APE4.A360.9 CONCEALMENT OF ELECTRICAL WIRING

For domestic blocks, electrical wiring is all by concealed conduit in walls and slabs
and shall comply with the requirements of the Code of Practice for the Electricity
(Wiring) Regulations published by the Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department. No modifications to the layout will be permitted without prior
Approval.
APE4.A370.9 EXTERNAL BUILDING FEATURES

Do not omit any external building features. Any non-structural external elements
may be constructed later as a separate operation.
APE4.A380.9 DIMENSIONS OF OPENINGS

Do not vary the dimensions shown on the tender drawings for all doors, windows
and other openings.
APE4.A390.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB AND SCREED FINISH

Monolithic slab and screed finish is acceptable subject to the following conditions:
1. Floor level and falls being maintained as shown on the tender drawings;
2. The removal of any stains, marks, scratches or foreign matter left on the cast
floors and making good to the satisfaction of the CM. Should there be any floors
which, in the opinion of the CM, were not properly prepared or which were left
with a bowed floor surface with a surface which is excessively marked, cut back
the entire floor surface by 25 mm and lay a 25 mm cement sand screeding at no
extra cost; and
3. Permission to use a monolithic floor finish will be withdrawn should the CM
consider, at any time, that the general standard of floor finish is unacceptable.
No monetary claims whatsoever will be entertained or extensions of time
granted in the event of such a withdrawal of permission.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APH APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF

TOLERANCES
Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) APH /1

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TABLE OF CONTENTS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APH APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES ............................... 10

INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 10
TOL.INTRO1.9 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................. 10
TOL.BRI - BRIDGE WORKS ................................................................................................. 11

TOL.BRI.010.9 BRIDGE BEARINGS ....................................................................................... 11
TOL.BRI.020.9 VEHICULAR PARAPETS ............................................................................... 11
TOL.BRI.030.9 FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS ........................................................... 11
TOL.BSW - WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS..... 12

TOL.BSW.010.9 FLOORS OF SWITCHGEAR ROOMS ........................................................... 12
TOL.BSW.020.9 LAMP STANDARDS ....................................................................................... 12
TOL.COM1 - STAINLESS STEEL WINDOWS, DOORS AND LOUVRES ..................... 13

TOL.COM1.010.9 DESIGN CLEARANCE ................................................................................... 13
TOL.COM1.020.9 VERTICALITY ................................................................................................ 13
TOL.COM2 - ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND LOUVRES ................................................ 14

TOL.COM2.010.9 DIMENSION .................................................................................................... 14
TOL.COM5 - TIMBER DOORSETS ..................................................................................... 15

DOORSETS ...................................................................................................................................... 15
TOL.COM5.010.9 WORKSIZES .................................................................................................... 15
DOOR LEAVES ............................................................................................................................... 15
TOL.COM5.110.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 15
TOL.COM5.120.9 WIDTH ............................................................................................................. 15
TOL.COM5.130.9 THICKNESS ..................................................................................................... 15
TOL.COM5.140.9 DOORSTOP WIDTH ....................................................................................... 15
TOL.COM5.150.9 REBATE DEPTH ............................................................................................. 15
TOL.COM5.160.9 CLEARANCES................................................................................................. 15
TOL.COM5.170.9 SQUARENESS ................................................................................................. 16
TOL.COM5.180.9 FLATNESS ....................................................................................................... 16
TOL.COM5.190.9 SMOOTHNESS ................................................................................................ 16
DOOR FRAMES .............................................................................................................................. 16
TOL.COM5.210.9 BOW ................................................................................................................. 16
TOL.COM5.220.9 SPRING ............................................................................................................ 16
INSTALLATION OF FRAMES AND SUB-FRAMES ................................................................. 17
TOL.COM5.230.9 PD FROM LEVEL OR VERTICALITY .......................................................... 17
TOL.COM6 - METAL DOORS............................................................................................... 18

TOL.COM6.010.9 DESIGN CLEARANCE ................................................................................... 18
TOL.COM7 - GATESETS ....................................................................................................... 19

GATE AND FRAME ........................................................................................................................ 19
TOL.COM7.010.9 VERTICALITY AND SQUARENESS ............................................................ 19
TOL.COM9 - COOKING BENCH / SINK UNITS ............................................................... 20

PRODUCT ACCURACY ................................................................................................................ 20
TOL.COM9.010.9 CROSS SECTION AND LINEAR DIMENSIONS .......................................... 20
TOL.COM9.020.9 STRAIGHTNESS OR BOW DIMENSIONS ................................................... 20
TOL.COM9.030.9 TWIST .............................................................................................................. 20
TOL.COM9.040.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNER .......................................................................... 20
TOL.COM9.050.9 FLATNESS ....................................................................................................... 20
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ERECTION ACCURACY ............................................................................................................... 20

TOL.COM9.110.9 LINES AND LEVEL ........................................................................................ 20
TOL.CON1 - INSITU CONCRETE ........................................................................................ 21

UNREINFORCED/REINFORCED CONCRETE FOUNDATION (INCLUDING RAFTS,
GROUND BEAMS, COLUMN BASES, PILE CAPS AND STRIP FOUNDATIONS) ............. 21
TOL.CON1.010.9 POSITION ON PLAN ...................................................................................... 21
TOL.CON1.020.9 DIMENSION ON PLAN .................................................................................. 21
TOL.CON1.030.9 UPPER SURFACE LEVEL .............................................................................. 21
TOL.CON1.040.9 CAST-IN FOUNDATION BOLTS .................................................................. 21
ELEMENTS OR COMPONENTS ABOVE FOUNDATIONS (EXCEPT LIFTWELLS
AND STAIRS) ................................................................................................................................... 21
TOL.CON1.120.9 SIZE AND SHAPE OF ELEMENT ................................................................. 21
TOL.CON1.130.9 VERTICALITY OF WALL AND COLUMNS ................................................ 22
TOL.CON1.140.9 SURFACE PROFILE OF WALLS AND SLAB SOFFITS .............................. 22
TOL.CON1.150.9 GRADUAL IRREGULARITIES ...................................................................... 22
TOL.CON1.160.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES ......................................................................... 22
TOL.CON1.170.9 TWIST .............................................................................................................. 22
TOL.CON1.180.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNERS........................................................................ 23
TOL.CON1.200.9 LEVEL .............................................................................................................. 23
TOL.CON1.210.9 ITEMS CAST IN .............................................................................................. 23
LIFTWELLS ..................................................................................................................................... 23
TOL.CON1.320.9 STRUCTURAL LIMITS OF WELL ACCURACY AT ANY LEVEL ............ 23
TOL.CON1.330.9 LANDING DOOR OPENINGS........................................................................ 24
TOL.CON1.340.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES OF WALLS ..................................................... 24
INSITU STAIRS (FLIGHT FROM LANDING TO LANDING) ................................................ 24
TOL.CON1.420.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 24
TOL.CON1.430.9 WIDTH OF FLIGHT ........................................................................................ 24
TOL.CON1.440.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 24
TOL.CON1.450.9 WAIST THICKNESS ....................................................................................... 24
TOL.CON1.460.9 RISE .................................................................................................................. 24
TOL.CON1.470.9 GOING .............................................................................................................. 25
TOL.CON1.480.9 TREAD LEVEL ................................................................................................ 25
OPENINGS (EXCLUDING LIFT OPENINGS) - ALL BLOCK TYPES .................................. 25
TOL.CON1.510.9 POSITION ON ELEVATION .......................................................................... 25
OPENINGS (EXCLUDING LIFT OPENINGS) - HARMONY BLOCKS ONLY .................... 25
TOL.CON1.610.9 FAIRFACED CONCRETE WALL OPENING IN FLAT A AND D .............. 25
TOL.CON1.620.9 DOOR, WINDOW AND OTHER OPENINGS ............................................... 25
OPENINGS (EXCLUDING LIFT OPENINGS) - BLOCK TYPES EXCEPT HARMONY .... 26
TOL.CON1.710.9 DOOR, WINDOW AND OTHER OPENINGS ............................................... 26
TOL.CON1.720.9 PLUMBNESS OF JAMBS ............................................................................... 26
TOL.CON1.730.9 LEVEL OF SILL OR SOFFIT .......................................................................... 26
OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF A CONCRETE FRAMED BUILDING .................................... 26
TOL.CON1.810.9 LENGTH AND WIDTH ................................................................................... 26
TOL.CON1.820.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 26
TOL.CON2 - FORMWORK .................................................................................................... 27

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
FORMWORK TO FOUNDATIONS (INCLUDING RAFTS, GROUND BEAMS,

COLUMN BASES, PILE CAPS AND STRIP FOUNDATIONS)................................................ 27
TOL.CON2.010.9 DIMENSION ON PLAN .................................................................................. 27
FORMWORK TO ELEMENTS OR COMPONENTS ABOVE FOUNDATIONS ................... 27
TOL.CON2.110.9 SIZE AND SHAPE OF ELEMENTS ............................................................... 27
TOL.CON2.120.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES ......................................................................... 27
TOL.CON2.130.9 TWIST .............................................................................................................. 28
TOL.CON2.140.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNER .......................................................................... 28
TOL.CON3 - REINFORCEMENT ......................................................................................... 29

TOL.CON3.020.9 TOLERANCES TO CONCRETE COVER - GENERALLY ........................... 29
TOL.CON3.030.9 TOLERANCES TO CONCRETE COVER - STARTER BARS ...................... 29
TOL.CON3.040.9 SPACING.......................................................................................................... 29
TOL.CON3.050.9 ANCHORAGE, LAP LENGTH AND CURTAILMENT ................................ 29
TOL.CON3.060.9 CUTTING AND BENDING ............................................................................. 29
TOL.CON4 - PRECAST CONCRETE ................................................................................... 30

TOL.CON4.010.9 ALL ELEMENTS (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED) .............................. 30
STAIRS TO STANDARD DOMESTIC (FLIGHT FROM LANDING TO LANDING) .......... 30
TOL.CON4.120.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 30
TOL.CON4.140.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 30
TOL.CON4.160.9 RISE .................................................................................................................. 30
TOL.CON4.170.9 GOING .............................................................................................................. 30
TOL.CON5 - PRECAST FACADE UNITS ............................................................................ 32

CASTING FACADE UNITS ........................................................................................................... 32
TOL.CON5.010.9 DEVIATIONS FROM DESIGN DIMENSIONS ............................................. 32
TOL.CON5.020.9 SQUARENESS ................................................................................................. 32
TOL.CON5.030.9 TWIST .............................................................................................................. 32
TOL.CON5.040.9 POSITION OF CAST-IN WINDOW FRAMES .............................................. 33
INSTALLING FACADE UNITS .................................................................................................... 33
TOL.CON5.110.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES ............................................................................ 33
TOL.CON7 - PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS ..................................................... 34

CASTING FACADE AND PRECAST CONCRETE WALL UNITS ......................................... 34
TOL.CON7.010.9 DEVIATIONS FROM DESIGN DIMENSIONS ............................................. 34
TOL.CON7.020.9 SQUARENESS ................................................................................................. 34
TOL.CON7.030.9 TWIST .............................................................................................................. 35
TOL.CON7.040.9 POSITION OF CAST-IN WINDOW FRAMES .............................................. 35
INSTALLING FACADE AND PRECAST CONCRETE WALL UNITS .................................. 35
TOL.CON7.110.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES ............................................................................ 35
STAIRS TO STANDARD DOMESTIC (FLIGHT FROM LANDING TO LANDING) .......... 35
TOL.CON7.220.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 35
TOL.CON7.240.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 36
TOL.CON7.260.9 RISE .................................................................................................................. 36
TOL.CON7.270.9 GOING .............................................................................................................. 36

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON8 - VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR

DOMESTIC BLOCKS .............................................................................................................. 37
OVERALL TOLERANCES - GENERAL ..................................................................................... 37
TOL.CON8.020.9 LENGTH AND WIDTH ................................................................................... 37
TOL.CON8.030.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 37
TOL.CON8.040.9 VERTICALITY OF WALL AND COLUMNS ................................................ 37
TOL.CON8.050.9 SURFACE PROFILE OF WALLS AND SLAB SOFFITS .............................. 37
TOL.CON8.060.9 TWIST .............................................................................................................. 38
TOL.CON8.070.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNERS........................................................................ 38
TOL.CON8.080.9 LEVEL .............................................................................................................. 38
OVERALL TOLERANCES - LIFTWELLS ................................................................................. 38
TOL.CON8.120.9 STRUCTURAL LIMITS OF WELL ACCURACY AT ANY LEVEL ............ 38
TOL.CON8.130.9 LANDING DOOR OPENINGS........................................................................ 39
TOL.DRA1 - DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND ...................................................................... 40

TOL.DRA1.010.9 VERTICALITY ................................................................................................ 40
TOL.DRA2 - DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND ..................................................................... 41

PIPELINES (EXCLUDING TERMINATION PIPES) ................................................................ 41
TOL.DRA2.010.9 GRAVITY PIPELINES .................................................................................... 41
TOL.DRA2.020.9 PRESSURE PIPELINES .................................................................................. 41
TERMINATION PIPES .................................................................................................................. 41
TOL.DRA2.110.9 TERMINATION PIPES.................................................................................... 41
MANHOLES ..................................................................................................................................... 41
TOL.DRA2.210.9 MANHOLE COVERS ...................................................................................... 41
TOL.EAR1 - EXCAVATION AND FILLING ....................................................................... 43

EARTHWORKS FINAL SURFACE TOLERANCES ................................................................. 43
TOL.EAR1.010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 43
TOL.EAR1.020.9 SETTING OUT ................................................................................................. 43
TOL.EAR1.030.9 BULK EXCAVATION/FILLING .................................................................... 43
TOL.EAR1.040.9 FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES ........................................................ 44
TOL.EAR2 - BLASTING ......................................................................................................... 45

PRE-SPLIT BLASTING .................................................................................................................. 45
TOL.EAR2.010.9 FINAL SURFACE TOLERANCES ................................................................. 45
TOL.EXT1 - SUB-BASES, BITUMINOUS ROADWAYS AND RELATED

FOOTPATHS ............................................................................................................................ 46
TOL.EXT1.010.9 ALIGNMENT ................................................................................................... 46
TOL.EXT1.020.9 MEASUREMENT OF LEVELS....................................................................... 46
TOL.EXT1.030.9 TOLERANCES IN LEVELS FOR EACH TYPE OF LAYER ........................ 46
TOL.EXT1.040.9 SURFACE LEVELS AT JOINTS .................................................................... 46
TOL.EXT1.050.9 COMBINATION OF TOLERANCES ............................................................. 46
TOL.EXT1.060.9 LEVELS OF GULLY GRATINGS .................................................................. 46
TOL.EXT1.070.9 LEVELS OF COVERS, FRAMES AND OTHER HARDWARE ................... 46
TOL.EXT1.080.9 SURFACE REGULARITY .............................................................................. 47
TOL.EXT2 - CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS ..................................................................... 48

TOL.EXT2.010.9 STRAIGHT ALIGNMENT .............................................................................. 48
TOL.EXT2.020.9 CURVED ALIGNMENT .................................................................................. 48
TOL.EXT2.030.9 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS ............................................................................... 48
TOL.EXT2.040.9 LEVEL OF SUB-BASE .................................................................................... 48
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT2.050.9 FORMWORK ................................................................................................... 48

TOL.EXT2.060.9 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT..................................................................... 48
TOL.EXT2.070.9 DOWEL BARS ................................................................................................. 48
TOL.EXT2.080.9 GROOVE DEPTH ............................................................................................ 49
TOL.EXT2.090.9 LEVELS ............................................................................................................ 49
TOL.EXT2.100.9 SLAB THICKNESS.......................................................................................... 49
TOL.EXT2.110.9 LEVEL OF COVERS, FRAMES AND OTHER HARDWARE ..................... 49
TOL.EXT3 - PATHS AND PAVED AREAS .......................................................................... 50

MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................... 50
TOL.EXT3.010.9 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE BLOCKS ...................................................... 50
TOL.EXT3.020.9 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS ...................................................... 50
TOL.EXT3.030.9 CLAY PAVERS................................................................................................ 50
WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................ 50
TOL.EXT3.110.9 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE BLOCKS, PRECAST CONCRETE
PAVING SLABS AND CLAY PAVERS......................................................... 50
TOL.EXT3.120.9 INSITU CONCRETE SURFACE FINISH ....................................................... 51
TOL.EXT5 - KERBS, EDGINGS AND QUADRANTS ........................................................ 52

TOL.EXT5.010.9 LINE ................................................................................................................. 52
TOL.EXT5.020.9 TOP LEVEL ..................................................................................................... 52
TOL.EXT5.030.9 IN SITU SURFACE FINISH ............................................................................ 52
TOL.EXT5.040.9 ACCURACY OF PRECAST UNITS ............................................................... 52
TOL.EXT6 - CONCRETE PROFILE BARRIERS ............................................................... 53

TOL.EXT6.010.9 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS OF CROSS SECTIONS ................................ 53
TOL.EXT6.020.9 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS OF CROSS SECTIONS ...................................... 53
TOL.EXT6.030.9 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT ........................................................................ 53
TOL.EXT6.040.9 FORMATION LEVEL ..................................................................................... 53
TOL.EXT6.050.9 BARRIER TOP LEVEL ................................................................................... 53
TOL.EXT6.060.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES ......................................................................... 53
TOL.EXT7 - UNTENSIONED BEAM BARRIERS .............................................................. 54

MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................... 54
TOL.EXT7.010.9 BASE METAL THICKNESS ........................................................................... 54
TOL.EXT7.020.9 STRIP WIDTH.................................................................................................. 54
TOL.EXT7.030.9 CAMBER .......................................................................................................... 54
TOL.EXT7.040.9 DISTORTION ................................................................................................... 54
TOL.EXT7.050.9 ANGLES AT BENDS....................................................................................... 54
TOL.EXT7.060.9 STEEL POSTS .................................................................................................. 54
TOL.EXT7.070.9 CLEAT AND STRUTS .................................................................................... 54
WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................ 54
TOL.EXT7.110.9 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 54
TOL.EXT8 - ROAD MARKING ............................................................................................. 55

THICKNESSES AND TOLERANCES .......................................................................................... 55
TOL.EXT8.010.9 SCREED MARKINGS ..................................................................................... 55
TOL.EXT8.020.9 WIDTH AND LENGTH ................................................................................... 55
TOL.EXT9 - FENCING, GATES AND GUARD RAILS ..................................................... 56

FENCING .......................................................................................................................................... 56
TOL.EXT9.010.9 MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 56
TOL.EXT9.020.9 WORKMANSHIP............................................................................................. 56
PEDESTRIAN GUARD RAILS ...................................................................................................... 56
TOL.EXT9.110.9 ALIGNMENT ................................................................................................... 56

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FEN - FENCING .............................................................................................................. 57

TOL.FEN.010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 57
TOL.FIN1 - PLASTERED AND RENDERED FINISHES................................................... 58

INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES...................................................................... 58
TOL.FIN1.010.9 EVENNESS AND PLUMB .............................................................................. 58
CEILING FINISHES ....................................................................................................................... 58
TOL.FIN1.110.9 LINE AND LEVEL .......................................................................................... 58
TOL.FIN2 - PLASTERBOARD............................................................................................... 59
TOL.FIN2.010.9 BRITISH STANDARD .................................................................................... 59
TOL.FIN3 - SCREEDS ............................................................................................................. 60

TOL.FIN3.010.9 LEVEL .............................................................................................................. 60
TOL.FIN4 - INSITU WALL AND FLOOR FINISHES ........................................................ 61

TOL.FIN4.010.9 LEVEL .............................................................................................................. 61
TOL.FIN5 - FLOOR AND WALL TILES AND SLABS ...................................................... 62

FLOOR TILES AND SLABS .......................................................................................................... 62
TOL.FIN5.010.9 LEVEL .............................................................................................................. 62
TOL.FIN5.020.9 LEVEL OF ADJACENT TILES....................................................................... 62
TOL.FIN5.030.9 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS ............................................................................... 62
WALL TILES ................................................................................................................................... 62
TOL.FIN5.110.9 PLANE .............................................................................................................. 62
TOL.FIN5.120.9 PLANE OF ADJACENT TILES ...................................................................... 62
MOSAIC TILES ............................................................................................................................... 62
TOL.FIN5.210.9 PLANE .............................................................................................................. 62
TOL.FIN5.220.9 PLANE OF ADJACENT TILES ...................................................................... 62
TOL.FIN6 - FLEXIBLE SHEET AND TILE FINISHES ..................................................... 64

TOL.FIN6.010.9 LEVEL .............................................................................................................. 64
TOL.FIN8 - PROPRIETARY SUSPENDED CEILINGS ..................................................... 65

INSTALLED CEILING SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 65
TOL.FIN8.010.9 LINE AND LEVEL .......................................................................................... 65
TOL.FIN8.030.9 DEFLECTION OF MAIN MEMBERS ............................................................ 65
CEILING COMPONENTS ............................................................................................................. 65
TOL.FIN8.110.9 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND GRIDS ...................................................... 65
TOL.FIN8.120.9 INFILL UNITS ................................................................................................. 65
TOL.GIN - GROUND INVESTIGATION, INSTRUMENTATION

AND SOIL TESTING 66
TOL.GIN.010.9 DEPTHS OF EXPLORATION ......................................................................... 66
TOL.GIN.020.9 VERTICAL TOLERANCE .............................................................................. 66
TOL.GWD - GROUND WATER DRAINAGE AND CONTROL ....................................... 67

TOL.GWD.010.9 DRILLING ........................................................................................................ 67
TOL.MAR - MARINE WORKS .............................................................................................. 68

TOL.MAR.010.9 DREDGING ...................................................................................................... 68
TOL.MAR.020.9 DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL .............................................................. 68
TOL.MAR.030.9 PRECAST CONCRETE SEAWALL BLOCKS AND COPINGS ................... 68
TOL.MAR.040.9 TIMBER FENDERING SYSTEMS ................................................................. 68

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAR.050.9 RUBBER FENDERS ........................................................................................ 68

TOL.MAR.060.9 SUBMARINE OUTFALLS .............................................................................. 69
TOL.MAS1 - BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND PANEL PARTITIONS ................... 70

BRICKWORK .................................................................................................................................. 70
TOL.MAS1.010.9 GENERALLY ................................................................................................... 70
BRICKWORK AND PANEL PARTITIONS ................................................................................ 70
TOL.MAS1.110.9 POSITION ON PLAN ...................................................................................... 70
TOL.MAS1.120.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 70
TOL.MAS1.130.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 70
TOL.MAS1.140.9 LEVEL OF BED JOINTS ................................................................................. 70
TOL.MAS1.150.9 THICKNESS OF BED JOINTS ....................................................................... 70
TOL.MAS1.160.9 STRAIGHTNESS ............................................................................................. 70
TOL.MAS1.170.9 VERTICALITY ................................................................................................ 70
TOL.MAS1.180.9 SETTING-OUT OF PRE-INSTALLED JUNCTION/BS 4662 BOXES
ON WALLS ...................................................................................................... 71
OPENINGS IN BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND PANEL PARTITIONS ....................... 71
TOL.MAS1.210.9 OPENINGS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS ETC. ................................................. 71
MANUFACTURING OF PANEL WALL PARTITIONS............................................................ 71
TOL.MAS1.310.9 MANUFACTURING OF PANEL WALL PARTITIONS ............................... 71
TOL.MAS2 - STONEWORK ................................................................................................... 72

RUBBLE STONE WALLING......................................................................................................... 72
TOL.MAS2.020.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 72
TOL.MAS2.030.9 HEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 72
ASHLAR STONE WALLING ........................................................................................................ 72
TOL.MAS2.120.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 72
TOL.MAS2.130.9 OVERALL HEIGHT ........................................................................................ 72
TOL.MAS2.170.9 WINDOW AND DOOR OPENINGS ............................................................... 73
NATURAL STONE CLADDING - WORKMANSHIP IN PRODUCTION .............................. 73
TOL.MAS2.210.9 FACE DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................... 73
TOL.MAS2.220.9 THICKNESSES ................................................................................................ 73
TOL.MAS2.230.9 BOW OR TWIST .............................................................................................. 73
NATURAL STONE CLADDING - ERECTION ........................................................................... 73
TOL.MAS2.320.9 LENGTH ........................................................................................................... 73
TOL.MAS2.330.9 OVERALL HEIGHT ........................................................................................ 73
TOL.MAS2.370.9 WINDOW AND DOOR OPENINGS ............................................................... 74
TOL.MEW - METALWORK .................................................................................................. 75

TOL.MEW.010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 75
TOL.MRY - MASONRY WALLING ..................................................................................... 76

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MRY.010.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 76
TOL.PIL1 - PILING AND FOOTINGS .................................................................................. 77

ALL PILE TYPES ............................................................................................................................ 77
TOL.PIL1.010.9 POSITION ON PLAN ...................................................................................... 77
TOL.PIL1.020.9 VERTICALITY ................................................................................................ 77
TOL.PIL1.030.9 OUT OF EXACT INCLINATION ................................................................... 77
TOL.PIL1.040.9 CUT-OFF LEVELS .......................................................................................... 77
TOL.PIL1.050.9 DIAMETER OF CAST INSITU PILES ........................................................... 77
PILE TYPES 1A AND 1B ................................................................................................................ 77
TOL.PIL1.110.9 DIMENSIONAL ACCURACY FOR SOLID NON-CIRCULAR
SECTION .......................................................................................................... 77
TOL.PIL1.120.9 DIMENSIONAL ACCURACY FOR HOLLOW CYLINDRICAL
SECTION .......................................................................................................... 77
TOL.PIL1.130.9 STRAIGHTNESS ............................................................................................. 77
TOL.PIL1.140.9 SUPERFICIAL CRACKS................................................................................. 78
PILE TYPE 3 .................................................................................................................................... 78
TOL.PIL1.160.9 DIAMETER OF PERMANENT LINERS ........................................................ 78
PILE TYPE 4 .................................................................................................................................... 78
TOL.PIL1.210.9 STRAIGHTNESS OF COMPLETE PILE ........................................................ 78
PILE TYPE 5 .................................................................................................................................... 78
TOL.PIL1.310.9 BORING ........................................................................................................... 78
TOL.PIL1.305.9 POSITION ON PLAN ...................................................................................... 78
TOL.PIL1.330.9 VERTICALITY ................................................................................................ 78
TOL.PLU2 - SANITARY APPLIANCES ............................................................................... 79

TOL.PLU2.010.9 HORIZONTALITY OF INSTALLATION ...................................................... 79
TOL.PSC - PRESTRESSING CONCRETE........................................................................... 80

TOL.PSC.010.9 TOLERANCES ................................................................................................. 80
TOL.SLO - SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS ........................................................................ 81

SOIL-CEMENT FILLING .............................................................................................................. 81
TOL.SLO.010.9 COMPACTION ................................................................................................ 81
SOIL NAILING ................................................................................................................................ 81
TOL.SLO.110.9 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 81
TOL.STR1 - STRUCTURAL STEEL ..................................................................................... 82

FABRICATION OF STEELWORK .............................................................................................. 82
TOL.STR1.010.9 CRITICAL DIMENSIONS AFFECTING REPETITION OR
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF UNITS ............................................................ 82
TOL.STR1.020.9 DETAILED DIMENSIONS ............................................................................. 82
ERECTION OF STEELWORK ..................................................................................................... 82
TOL.STR1.110.9 CAST-IN FOUNDATION BOLTS .................................................................. 82
TOL.STR1.120.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES ............................................................................ 82
TOL.STW - STEELWORK ..................................................................................................... 84

TOL.STW.010.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES GENERALLY ............................................ 84
TOL.STW.020.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES FOR BRIDGEWORKS .............................. 84
TOL.STW.030.9 FOUNDATION BOLTS ................................................................................... 84
TOL.STW.040.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES ............................................................................ 84
TOL.WSP - WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORK ......................................................................... 85

TOL.WSP.010.9 LINE AND LEVEL .......................................................................................... 85

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > INTRODUCTION
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
APH APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF

TOLERANCES
INTRODUCTION
TOL.INTRO1.9 INTRODUCTION
1. FORMAT: This Schedule is prepared as an Appendix so that it is in a
convenient form to use as a reference document by those concerned with site
quality control during the construction stage of HKHA projects. However the
Schedule is divided into the same Worksections as those used in the main body
of the Specification; this facilitates easy division and attachment to Specification
Worksections by main contractors for sub-contract tendering purposes;
2. PRECEDENCE: This Schedule shall not take precedence over any conflicting
or variation tolerances given in other parts of this Specification or shown on the
Drawings;
3. DEFINITIONS: The following are definitions of terms used in this Schedule of
Tolerances:
a. MASTER BENCH MARK (MBM): The level datum from which all levels
on site are derived;
b. TRANSFERRED BENCH MARK (TBM): Subsidiary level datum derived
from the master bench mark;
c. BOW: Curvature of the length or width of the component expressed as a
deviation from a straight line connecting the extremities;
d. DEVIATION: Difference between a size or position (actual, limit etc) and a
specified size or position;
e. PERMISSIBLE DEVIATION (PD): Specified limit(s) of deviation;
f. TOLERANCE: Difference between the limits within which a size or
position must lie. The tolerance is an absolute value without sign but the
dimension or axis is to which it applies must be stated.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.BRI - BRIDGE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.BRI - BRIDGE WORKS

TOL.BRI.010.9 BRIDGE BEARINGS
1. The centreline of bridge bearings shall be within 3 mm of the specified position;
2. The level of bridge bearings shall be within 0.0001 times the adjacent span or
the lesser of the adjacent spans or with 5 mm of the specified level, whichever is
less;
3. The inclination of bridge bearings shall be within 1 in 200 of the specified
inclination;
4. The horizontal axis of bridge bearings shall be within 0.005 radian of the
specified alignment;
5. Departure from the common plane between twin or multiple bridge bearings
shall be within the tolerances stated on the Drawings.
TOL.BRI.020.9 VEHICULAR PARAPETS

Vehicular parapets shall be within 10 mm of the specified position and height.
TOL.BRI.030.9 FABRICATED MOVEMENT JOINTS

The surface of fabricated movement joints shall be at least 1 mm, and not more than
3 mm, below the surrounding road surface.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.BSW - WORK FOR......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.BSW - WORK FOR ELECTRICAL AND

MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
TOL.BSW.010.9 FLOORS OF SWITCHGEAR ROOMS
The tolerance in floor levels for switchgear rooms shall be as follows:
1. ±2 mm in 1000 mm for high voltage switchgear rooms;
2. ±4 mm in 1000 mm for medium voltage switchgear rooms.
TOL.BSW.020.9 LAMP STANDARDS

Lamp standards shall be within 0.1 degrees of the vertical.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.COM1 - STAINLESS......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM1 - STAINLESS STEEL

WINDOWS, DOORS AND LOUVRES
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM1.010.9 DESIGN CLEARANCE

PD of the clearance between the frame and the
structure opening at the:
1. Jamb ...................................................................... +5 mm : -10 mm
2. Head ...................................................................... +8 mm : -10 mm
3. Sill ......................................................................... +2 mm : -3 mm
TOL.COM1.020.9 VERTICALITY
PD of frame from plumb in any 1.2 m length .......... ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.COM2 - ALUMINIUM......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM2 - ALUMINIUM WINDOWS AND

LOUVRES
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM2.010.9 DIMENSION
1. PD for peripheral dimensions:
a. Length 2 m: ±1.0 mm
b. Ditto 2 m 3.5 m: ±1.5 mm
c. Ditto 3.5 m 5 m: ±2.0 mm
d. Ditto 5 m: ±3.0 mm
2. PD for step joint: +0.5 mm : 0 mm
3. PD for diagonal dimensions:
a. Length 2 m: ±1.5 mm
b. Ditto 2 m 3.5 m: ±2.5 mm
c. Ditto 3.5 m: ±3.5 mm
4. Aluminum wall thickness:
a. Structural members: +0.16 mm : 0 mm
b. Non-structural members: +0.16 mm : 0 mm
c. Glazing bead ±0.1 mm
PD from plumb in any 1.2 m length ......................... ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.COM5 - TIMBER......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM5 - TIMBER DOORSETS

NOTE: 1. Read the tolerances given in this section in conjunction with the dimensional requirements
specified in BS 4787:Part 1:1980 unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Dimension
references given in brackets relate to these used in this BS;
2. Where smoke seals are to be used, other clearance sizes and related permissible deviations
between door leaf and jamb, head, transom and sill may be specified.
DOORSETS
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM5.010.9 WORKSIZES
PD from doorset worksizes specified in
BS 4787:Part 1:1980:
1. Height (A2 and G2) ............................................... +2.5 mm : -2.5 mm
2. Width (B2) ............................................................. +2.5 mm : -2.5 mm
DOOR LEAVES
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM5.110.9 HEIGHT
PD for leaves in all doorsets (d3) ............................... +2.5 mm : -2.5 mm
TOL.COM5.120.9 WIDTH
PD for leaves in single or double equal leaf doorsets
(e3) .............................................................................. +2.5 mm : -2.5 mm
TOL.COM5.130.9 THICKNESS
PD for all leaf thicknesses (f3):
1. Internal doorsets .................................................... +1.0 mm : -2.0 mm
2. External doorsets ................................................... +1.5 mm : -1.5 mm
TOL.COM5.140.9 DOORSTOP WIDTH

1. Internal doorsets .................................................... +2.0 mm : -2.0 mm
2. External doorsets ................................................... +2.0 mm : -0 mm
TOL.COM5.150.9 REBATE DEPTH

PD (f2) ........................................................................ +1.0 mm : -1.0 mm
TOL.COM5.160.9 CLEARANCES
PD from clearances specified in
BS 4787:Part 1:1980 or shown on drawings for:
1. Non fire resisting doors ......................................... +2.0 mm : -1.0 mm
2. Fire resisting doors without smoke seals .............. +1.0 mm : -0.5 mm
3. Fire resisting door with smoke seals ..................... See Note 2 Above
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM5.170.9 SQUARENESS
PD when measured in accordance with
BS 5278:1976 at a point 500 mm from any
corner .......................................................................... 2.0 mm
TOL.COM5.180.9 FLATNESS
PD when measured in accordance with
BS 5278:1976, due to:
1. Bending:
a. Measured horizontally ..................................... 2.0 mm
b. Measured vertically .......................................... 4.0 mm
2. Twisting of any corner in relation to the other
three:
a. Doors of type '2' construction .......................... 6.0 mm
b. Doors of types '1' and '3' construction ............. 3.0 mm
TOL.COM5.190.9 SMOOTHNESS
For any door type:
1. PD in any position:
a. When measured with a 50 mm bridge ............ 0.2 mm
b. When measured with a 200 mm bridge .......... 1.0 mm
2. PD for doors of type '2' construction, when
measured with a 200 mm bridge, at not more
than 3 points along the 4 horizontal lines and 3
points along the 2 vertical lines of each face ........ 0.5 mm
3. PD for doors of type '1' and '3' construction,
when measured with a 200 mm bridge, at not
more than 4 points along the 2 vertical lines and
4 points along the 4 horizontal lines of each face
................................................................................. 0.5 mm
DOOR FRAMES
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM5.210.9 BOW
PD in the thickness of hardwood framing members
in any 2 m length:
1. Member thickness 50 mm ................................... 2.0 mm
2. Member thickness >50 mm .................................. 6.0 mm
TOL.COM5.220.9 SPRING
PD in the width of hardwood framing members in
any 2 m length:
1. Member thickness 100 mm ................................. 4.0 mm
2. Member thickness >100 mm ................................ 6.0 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INSTALLATION OF FRAMES AND SUB-FRAMES

TOLERANCE
TOL.COM5.230.9 PD FROM LEVEL OR VERTICALITY

In any 1.2 m length ..................................................... 3.0 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.COM6 - METAL......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM6 - METAL DOORS

TOLERANCE
TOL.COM6.010.9 DESIGN CLEARANCE

PD of clearance between the frame and the
structural openings at head, sill and jambs ................. +5 mm : -10 mm
PD of frame from plumb in any 1.2 m length ........... ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.COM7 - GATESETS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM7 - GATESETS
GATE AND FRAME

TOLERANCE
TOL.COM7.010.9 VERTICALITY AND SQUARENESS

PD from plumb or level in any 1.2 m length ............. ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.COM9 - COOKING......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.COM9 - COOKING BENCH / SINK

UNITS
PRODUCT ACCURACY
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM9.010.9 CROSS SECTION AND LINEAR DIMENSIONS

PD ............................................................................... ±3 mm
TOL.COM9.020.9 STRAIGHTNESS OR BOW DIMENSIONS

PD ............................................................................... ±3 mm
TOL.COM9.030.9 TWIST
PD in the distance of any one corner from the plane
containing the other three corners .............................. ±3 mm
TOL.COM9.040.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNER

Taking the larger of two adjacent sides as the base
line, the shorter side must not vary in its distance
from a perpendicular to the base line by more than
..................................................................................... ±3 mm
TOL.COM9.050.9 FLATNESS
PD of a nominally plane surface when measured
with a 1.5 m straight edge .......................................... ±3 mm
ERECTION ACCURACY
TOLERANCE
TOL.COM9.110.9 LINES AND LEVEL

PD from horizontal plane of unit in any 1.2 m
length ......................................................................... . ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.CON1 - INSITU......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON1 - INSITU CONCRETE

Note: Tolerances given in this section should be read in conjunction with additional tolerances given in
TOL.CON2.
UNREINFORCED/REINFORCED CONCRETE
FOUNDATION (INCLUDING RAFTS, GROUND
BEAMS, COLUMN BASES, PILE CAPS AND STRIP
FOUNDATIONS)
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON1.010.9 POSITION ON PLAN

PD in plan of any point measured from the
nearest building grid line, for elements of
dimensions ...........................................................
1. 1500 mm ±35 mm
2. >1500 mm ±50 mm
TOL.CON1.020.9 DIMENSION ON PLAN

1. PD per 300 mm: ............................................. ± 10 mm
2. Maximum PD: ................................................ +50 mm : -35 mm
TOL.CON1.030.9 UPPER SURFACE LEVEL

PD in level of upper surface with reference to the
nearest TBM ......................................................... ±20 mm
TOL.CON1.040.9 CAST-IN FOUNDATION BOLTS

PD from specified position .................................. ±25 mm
ELEMENTS OR COMPONENTS ABOVE

FOUNDATIONS (EXCEPT LIFTWELLS AND STAIRS)
TOLERANCE

PD in plan of any point measured from the
nearest building grid line: ................................... ±15 mm
TOL.CON1.120.9 SIZE AND SHAPE OF ELEMENT

PD for elements of dimensions:
1. 500 mm: ........................................................ ±10 mm
2. 500 3000 mm: ............................................ ±20 mm
3. 3000 mm: ...................................................... ±30 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON1.130.9 VERTICALITY OF WALL AND COLUMNS

1. Plumbness in height 500 mm: ...................... ±10 mm
2. Ditto 500 mm 3000 mm: ........................... ±15 mm
3. Ditto 3000 mm 30 m: ................................. ±20 mm
4. 30 m: Pro-rata on ±20 mm per 30 m to the
nearest 5 mm.
Note: When separated by another plane or
member use the thickness of the plane or
member for checking verticality.
TOL.CON1.140.9 SURFACE PROFILE OF WALLS AND SLAB SOFFITS

PD from mean of surface profile across the
whole element (from extremities):
1. Surface profile 3000 mm: ............................ ±10 mm
2. Ditto 3000 mm 15 m: ................................. ±15 mm
3. Ditto 15 m: ................................................... ±20 mm
Notes: Measure deviations in two directions.
TOL.CON1.150.9 GRADUAL IRREGULARITIES

PD from 3000 mm straight edge:
1. Formwork type A: Rough board .................... ±10 mm
2. Formwork type B: Fairfaced .......................... ±10 mm
TOL.CON1.160.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES

Abrupt changes of a continuous finished
concrete surface:
1. Formwork type A: .......................................... ±4 mm
2. Formwork type B: .......................................... ±3 mm
Note: This also applies to displacement of
successive lifts for columns and walls
within one storey height.
TOL.CON1.170.9 TWIST
The distance of any one corner from the plane
containing the other three corners, i.e. a variation
from the target plane:
1. For diagonal 3000 mm:
a. Formwork type A: ..................................... 10 mm
b. Formwork type B: ..................................... 5 mm
2. For diagonal 3000 mm 15 m:
3. For each further 10 m of diagonal:

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON1.180.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNERS

Where the longer of two adjacent sides is taken
as the base line and the PD of the shorter side,
from a perpendicular to the base line, is related to
the length of the shorter side:
1. Short side 250 mm: ...................................... ±10 mm
2. Ditto 250 mm 500 mm: ............................. ±10 mm
3. Ditto 500 mm 3000 mm: ........................... ±20 mm
4. Ditto for every additional 2500 mm (to
nearest 5 mm): ................................................ ±20 mm x L/3
TOL.CON1.200.9 LEVEL
PD from designed level with reference to the
nearest TBM of the upper or lower surface, as
may be specified of any slab or other element
or component:
1. Length 8 m: .................................................. ±10 mm
2. Length 8 m 15 m: ....................................... ±15 mm
3. Length 15 m 30 m: ..................................... ±20 mm
TOL.CON1.210.9 ITEMS CAST IN

The position of, or provision for, components
fixings and holes cast in: PD from its designed
position of centre line of component, fixing or
hole: ..................................................................... ±15 mm
LIFTWELLS
TOLERANCE

Position on plan at bottom of well of any point of
each wall. PD of internal face from the designed
position in relation to the nearest parallel
reference line at the same level (distance
between the two points being not more than
15 m): .................................................................. . ±10 mm
TOL.CON1.320.9 STRUCTURAL LIMITS OF WELL ACCURACY AT ANY LEVEL

Comply with Section 3 of BS 5655:Part 6:1990 including Table 1 which is extended
as follows:
TABLE 1
Limits of accuracy of well plumb dimensions
Well height (m) Limits of accuracy (mm)
+ -
1. 30 25 0
2. 30 60 35 0
3. 60 90 50 0

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
4. 90 65 0
Read Table 1 in conjunction with figure 1 of Section 3 of BS 5655.
TOL.CON1.330.9 LANDING DOOR OPENINGS

1. Position of landing door openings in relation
to design position: ......................................... . ±15 mm
Note: It is important that landing doors come
one above another PD of actual centre line
of structural opening (to receive lift doors)
from the design position.
2. Plumbness of jamb: PD from the vertical:
a. For every 1000 mm of height: .................. ±5 mm
b. Up to a maximum of: ................................ ±15 mm
TOL.CON1.340.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES OF WALLS

Abrupt changes of inner surfaces of
walls: .................................................................... Not to exceed 5 mm
INSITU STAIRS (FLIGHT FROM LANDING TO

LANDING)
TOLERANCE

PD on plan of any point in relation to the nearest
reference point at the same level, the distance
between the points being no more than 15 m:
............................................................................... ±15 mm
TOL.CON1.420.9 LENGTH
Length on plan of clear span (excluding
landings): ............................................................. ±15 mm
TOL.CON1.430.9 WIDTH OF FLIGHT

............................................................................... ±10 mm
TOL.CON1.440.9 HEIGHT
Vertical height measured between either top
surfaces or soffit surfaces of any flight of
stairs: .................................................................... ±15 mm
TOL.CON1.450.9 WAIST THICKNESS

Thickness of waist measured at right angles to
the slope of the flight: ......................................... ±10 mm
TOL.CON1.460.9 RISE
Difference in the rise of two consecutive steps:
............................................................................... ±5 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON1.470.9 GOING
Difference in width of tread of two consecutive
steps: .................................................................... ±10 mm
TOL.CON1.480.9 TREAD LEVEL

Difference in level of tread:
1. Across the going: ............................................ ±4 mm
2. Across width of stairs per 1000 mm width
(measured between extremities of tread): ......
........................................................................... ±5 mm
3. Other widths: Pro-rata with a maximum of:
........................................................................... ±10 mm
OPENINGS (EXCLUDING LIFT OPENINGS) - ALL

BLOCK TYPES
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON1.510.9 POSITION ON ELEVATION

PD on elevation from its designed position of
centre line with reference to the nearest building
grid line: ............................................................... ±15 m

PD on plan of any point measured from the
nearest building grid line: ................................... ±15 mm
OPENINGS (EXCLUDING LIFT OPENINGS) -

HARMONY BLOCKS ONLY
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON1.610.9 FAIRFACED CONCRETE WALL OPENING IN FLAT A AND D

1. Height: ............................................................ ±6 mm
2. Width: ............................................................. ±6 mm
3. Plumb: ............................................................. ±3 mm/1.2 m
4. Level: .............................................................. ±3 mm/1.2 m
TOL.CON1.620.9 DOOR, WINDOW AND OTHER OPENINGS

Width and height:
1. 500 mm: ........................................................ ±15 mm
2. 500 mm 3000 mm: ..................................... ±20 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
OPENINGS (EXCLUDING LIFT OPENINGS) -

BLOCK TYPES EXCEPT HARMONY
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON1.710.9 DOOR, WINDOW AND OTHER OPENINGS

Width and height:
1. 500 mm: ........................................................ ±15 mm
2. 500 mm 3000 mm: ..................................... ±20 mm
TOL.CON1.720.9 PLUMBNESS OF JAMBS

PD from the vertical:
1. For every 1000 mm of height: ....................... ±5 mm
2. With a maximum of: ...................................... ±15 mm
TOL.CON1.730.9 LEVEL OF SILL OR SOFFIT

PD:
1. For every 1000 mm of length: ....................... ±5 mm
2. With a maximum of: ...................................... ±15 mm
OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF A CONCRETE

FRAMED BUILDING
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON1.810.9 LENGTH AND WIDTH

1. 15 m: ............................................................. ±25 mm
2. 15 m 30 m: ................................................. ±50 mm
3. Each subsequent 30 m: ................................... ±20 mm
Note: Measure dimensions at lowest floor level
or, if not practicable, as otherwise
specified or agreed.
To structural roof level with reference to the
TBM:
1. 30 m: ............................................................. ±40 mm
2. Each subsequent 30 m: ................................... ±15 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.CON2 - FORMWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON2 - FORMWORK
Note: Tolerances given in this section should be read in conjunction with those given in TOL.CON1.
FORMWORK TO FOUNDATIONS (INCLUDING

RAFTS, GROUND BEAMS, COLUMN BASES, PILE
CAPS AND STRIP FOUNDATIONS)
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON2.010.9 DIMENSION ON PLAN

1. PD per 300 mm: ............................................. ±10 mm
2. Maximum PD: ................................................ +50 mm : -35 mm
FORMWORK TO ELEMENTS OR COMPONENTS

ABOVE FOUNDATIONS
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON2.110.9 SIZE AND SHAPE OF ELEMENTS

PD for elements of dimensions:
1. 500 mm: ........................................................ ±10 mm
2. 500 mm 3000 mm: ..................................... ±20 mm
3.  3000 mm: ..................................................... ±30 mm
TOL.CON2.120.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES

Misalignment of joints:
1. Formwork Type A: ......................................... ±4 mm
2. Formwork Type B:
a. Small panel metal formwork: ................... ±2 mm
b. Others: ....................................................... ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.CON2 - FORMWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
containing the other three corners, i.e. a variation
from the target plane:
1. For diagonal 3000 mm:
2. For diagonal 3000 m 15 m:
3. For each further 10 m of diagonal:
TOL.CON2.140.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNER

as the base line and the PD of the shorter side,
from a perpendicular to the base line, is related to
the length of the shorter side:
1. Short side 250 mm: ...................................... ±10 mm
2. Ditto 250 mm 500 mm: ............................. ±10 mm
3. Ditto 500 mm 3000 mm: ........................... ±20 mm
4. Ditto for every additional 2500 mm: (to
nearest 5 mm) ±20 mm x L/3

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.CON3 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON3 - REINFORCEMENT
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON3.020.9 TOLERANCES TO CONCRETE COVER - GENERALLY

PD from nominal cover: ...................................... ±5 mm
TOL.CON3.030.9 TOLERANCES TO CONCRETE COVER - STARTER BARS

Starters in walls and column spots of horizontal
lift: ........................................................................ +5 mm + , -5 mm
 = diameter of starter bar
TOL.CON3.040.9 SPACING
The lesser of: ....................................................... +50 mm or 20% of specified
spacing
TOL.CON3.050.9 ANCHORAGE, LAP LENGTH AND CURTAILMENT

PD from specified length: ................................... -25 mm
TOL.CON3.060.9 CUTTING AND BENDING

Comply with the cutting and/or bending tolerances
defined in Table 4 of BS 8666 : 2000 as follows:
1. Cutting of straight lengths (including
reinforcement for subsequent bending): ............ ±25 mm
2. Bent bars:
a. Dimension of bent bars 1000 mm: ............. ±5 mm
b. Ditto 1000 mm to 2000 mm: .................... +5 mm : -10 mm
c. Ditto 2000 mm: ........................................... +5 mm : -25 mm
3. Length of wires in fabric: ................................... ±25 mm or 0.5 % of the
length (whichever is
greater)

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.CON4 - PRECAST......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON4 - PRECAST CONCRETE

TOLERANCE
TOL.CON4.010.9 ALL ELEMENTS (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)

1. Length up to 2000 mm: .................................. ±6 mm
2. Width or height up to 250 mm: ...................... ±4 mm
3. Thickness or depth up to 500 mm: ................. ±6 mm
STAIRS TO STANDARD DOMESTIC (FLIGHT

FROM LANDING TO LANDING)
TOLERANCE

between the points being not more than 15 m: ...
............................................................................... ±10 mm
landings): ............................................................. ±12 mm

............................................................................... ±6 mm
surfaces or soffit surfaces of any flight of stairs:
............................................................................... ±10 mm

the slope of the flight: ......................................... +6 mm : -3 mm
TOL.CON4.160.9 RISE
Difference in the rise of two consecutive steps:
............................................................................... ±5 mm
steps: .................................................................... ±8 mm

2. Across width of stair: ..................................... ±5 mm
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON5 - PRECAST FACADE UNITS
CASTING FACADE UNITS

TOLERANCE
TOL.CON5.010.9 DEVIATIONS FROM DESIGN DIMENSIONS

Manufacture the facade units within the
dimensional tolerances set out below:
1. Length and height:
a. Up to 2 m: .................................................. +0 : -3 mm
b. 2 m to 3 m: ................................................ +0 : -6 mm
c. 3 m to 4.5 m: ............................................. +0 : -9 mm
d. 4.5 m to 6 m or more: ............................... +0 : -12 mm
2. Thickness:
a. Up to 500 mm: .......................................... +6 mm : -3 mm
b. 500 mm to 750 mm: .................................. +8 mm : -5 mm
3. Straightness or bow (deviation from intended
line):
a. Up to 3 m: .................................................. 6 mm
b. 3 m to 6 m: ................................................ 9 mm
c. 6 m to 12 m: .............................................. 12 mm
TOL.CON5.020.9 SQUARENESS
When assessing the squareness of a corner:
1. Take the longer of the two adjacent sides
being checked as the base-line;
2. Ensure that the shorter side does not vary in
its distance from a perpendicular so that the
difference between the greatest and shortest
dimensions exceeds:
Length of shorter sides:
a. Up to and including 1000 mm: ................. 3 mm
b. Over 1000 mm to 2000 mm: .................... 5 mm
c. Over 2000 mm: ......................................... 6 mm
Ensure that no corner is more than the dimension
stated from the plane containing the other three
corners:
1. Up to and including 3 m: ................................ 6 mm
2. Over 3 m to 6 m: ............................................. 9 mm
3. Over 6 m to 12 m: .......................................... 12 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON5.040.9 POSITION OF CAST-IN WINDOW FRAMES

PD from design dimensions on plan: .................. ±6 mm
INSTALLING FACADE UNITS

TOLERANCE
TOL.CON5.110.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES

1. Install the facade units within the erection
tolerances set out below:
a. Horizontal position: In x and y directions:
..................................................................... ±5 mm
b. Plumb: per element: ................................. ±6 mm
c. Width of joint: On a nominal joint of
20 m: .......................................................... ±5 mm
2. In addition, respect the prescribed dimensions
for height, width and length, of the completed
building to within 0.1%;
3. Respect the theoretical line, both horizontal
and vertical, with the same tolerance of 0.1%,
for each storey when seen from the front.
Deviations in profile must not exceed
±10 mm.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON7 - PRECAST CONCRETE

COMPONENTS
CASTING FACADE AND PRECAST CONCRETE

WALL UNITS
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON7.010.9 DEVIATIONS FROM DESIGN DIMENSIONS

Manufacture the facade and precast concrete
wall units within the dimensional tolerances set
out below:
1. Length and height:
a. Up to 2 m: .................................................. +3 mm : -3 mm
b. 2 m to 3 m: ................................................ +6 mm : -6 mm
c. 3 m to 4.5 m: ............................................. +9 mm : -9 mm
d. 4.5 m to 6 m or ore: ................................... +10 mm : -12 mm
2. Thickness:
a. Up to 500 mm: .......................................... +6 mm : -3 mm
b. 500 mm to 750 mm: .................................. +8 mm : -5 mm
3. Straightness or bow (deviation from intended
line):
a. Up to 3 m: .................................................. 6 mm
b. 3 m to 6 m: ................................................ 9 mm
c. 6 m to 12 m: .............................................. 12 mm
TOL.CON7.020.9 SQUARENESS
When assessing the squareness of a corner:
1. Take the longer of the two adjacent sides
being checked as the base-line;
2. Ensure that the shorter side does not vary in
its distance from a perpendicular so that the
difference between the greatest and shortest
dimensions exceeds:
Length of shorter sides:
a. Up to and including 1000 mm: ................. 3 mm
b. Over 1000 mm to 2000 mm: .................... 5 mm
c. Over 200 mm: ........................................... 6 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Ensure that no corner is more than the dimension
stated from the plane containing the other three
corners:
1. Up to and including 3: .................................... 6 mm
2. Over 3 to 6: ..................................................... 9 mm
3. Over 6 to 12: ................................................... 12 mm
TOL.CON7.040.9 POSITION OF CAST-IN WINDOW FRAMES

PD from design dimensions on plan: .................. ±6 mm
INSTALLING FACADE AND PRECAST CONCRETE

WALL UNITS
TOLERANCE
TOL.CON7.110.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES

1. Install the facade and precast concrete wall
units within the erection tolerances set out
below:
a. Horizontal position: In x and y
directions: .................................................. ±5 mm
b. Plumb: per element: ................................. ±6 mm
c. Width of joint: On a nominal joint of ±5 mm
20 mm: ......................................................
2. In addition, respect the prescribed dimensions
for height, width and length, of the completed
building to within 0.1%;
3. Respect the theoretical line, both horizontal
and vertical, with the same tolerance of 0.1%,
for each storey when seen from the front.
Deviations in profile must not exceed
±10 mm.
STAIRS TO STANDARD DOMESTIC (FLIGHT

FROM LANDING TO LANDING)
TOLERANCE

between the points being not more than
15: ....................................................................... . ±10 mm
landings): ............................................................. ±12 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

............................................................................... ±6 mm
surfaces or soffit surfaces of any flight of
stairs: .................................................................... ±10 mm

the slope of the light: ........................................... +6 mm : -3 mm
TOL.CON7.260.9 RISE
Difference in the rise of two consecutive
steps: .................................................................... ±5 mm
steps: .................................................................... ±8 mm

2. Across width of stair: ..................................... ±5 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.CON8 - VOLUMETRIC PRECAST

CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR
DOMESTIC BLOCKS
OVERALL TOLERANCES - GENERAL

TOLERANCE

Permissible Deviation (PD) in plan of any point
measured from the nearest building grid
line: ..................................................................... 15 mm
TOL.CON8.020.9 LENGTH AND WIDTH

1. 15 m: ........................................................... 25 mm
2. 15 m
30 m: ........................................................... 50 mm
3. Each subsequent 30 m: ................................. 20 mm
Note: Measure dimensions at lowest floor level
or, if not practicable, as otherwise
specified or agreed.
To structural roof level with reference to the
Transferred Bench Mark (TBM):
1. 30 m: ........................................................... 40 mm
2. Each subsequent 30 m: ................................. 15 mm
TOL.CON8.040.9 VERTICALITY OF WALL AND COLUMNS

1. Plumbness in height 500 mm: .................... 10 mm
2. Ditto 500 mm 3000 mm: .......................... 15 mm
3. Ditto 3000 mm 30 m: ............................... 20 mm
4. 30 m: ........................................................... Pro-rata on 20 mm per 30 m
to the nearest 5 mm
Note: When separated by another plane or
member use the thickness of the plane or
member for checking verticality.
TOL.CON8.050.9 SURFACE PROFILE OF WALLS AND SLAB SOFFITS

Permissible Deviation (PD) from mean of
surface profile across the whole element (from
extremities):
1. Surface profile 3000 mm: ........................... 10 mm
2. Ditto 3000 mm 15 m: ............................... 15 mm
3. Ditto 15 m: .................................................. 20 mm
Note: Measure deviations in two directions.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
containing the other three corners, i.e., a
variation from the target plane:
1. For diagonal 15 m: ...................................... 20 mm
2. For each further 10 m of
diagonal: ........................................................ 10 mm
TOL.CON8.070.9 SQUARENESS OF CORNERS

as the base line and the Permissible Deviation
(PD) of the shorter side, from a perpendicular to
the base line, is related to the length of the
shorter side:
1. Short side 3000 mm: ................................... 20 mm
2. Short side for every additional 2500 mm (to
nearest 5 mm): ............................................... 20 mm x L/3
TOL.CON8.080.9 LEVEL
Permissible Deviation (PD) from designed level
with reference to the nearest Transferred Bench
Mark (TBM) of the upper or lower surface, as
may be specified of any slab or other element or
component:
Length 8 m: ...................................................... 10 mm
Length 8 m 15 m: .......................................... 15 mm
Length 15 m 30 m: ........................................ 20 mm
OVERALL TOLERANCES - LIFTWELLS

TOLERANCE

Position on plan at bottom of well of any point
of each wall. Permissible Deviation (PD) of
internal face from the designed position in
relation to the nearest parallel reference line at
the same level (distance between the two points
being not more than 15 m): ............................... 10 mm
TOL.CON8.120.9 STRUCTURAL LIMITS OF WELL ACCURACY AT ANY LEVEL

Comply with Section 3 of BS 5655:Part 6:1990 including Table 1 which is extended
as follows:
TABLE 1
Limits of accuracy of well plumb dimensions
Limits of accuracy (mm)
Well height (m)
+ -
1. 30 25 0
2. 30 60 35 0
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
3. 60 90 50 0
4. 90 65 0
Read Table 1 in conjunction with figure 1 of Section 3 of BS 5655.
TOL.CON8.130.9 LANDING DOOR OPENINGS

1. Position of landing door openings in relation to
design position: ................................................... 15 mm
Note: It is important that landing doors come one
above another Permissible Deviation (PD) of
actual centre line of structural opening (to
receive lift doors) from the design position.
2. Plumbness of jamb: Permissible Deviation (PD)
from the vertical:
a. For every 1000 mm of height: ....................... 5 mm
b. Up to a maximum of: .................................... 15 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.DRA1 - DRAINAGE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.DRA1 - DRAINAGE ABOVE GROUND

TOLERANCE
TOL.DRA1.010.9 VERTICALITY
PD of pipes from plumb when measured with a
1.2 m straight edge ..................................................... 3 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.DRA2 - DRAINAGE BELOW GROUND
PIPELINES (EXCLUDING TERMINATION PIPES)

TOLERANCE
TOL.DRA2.010.9 GRAVITY PIPELINES

PD from lines and levels shown on the Drawings:
1. Line ....................................................................... ±20 mm
2. Invert level (providing there is no backfall at any
point) ..................................................................... +6 mm : -6 mm
TOL.DRA2.020.9 PRESSURE PIPELINES

PD from lines and levels shown on the Drawings:
1. Line ....................................................................... ±50 mm
2. Invert level ............................................................ ±20 mm
TERMINATION PIPES
TOLERANCE
TOL.DRA2.110.9 TERMINATION PIPES

PD for termination pipes which are designed to
connect to pipes and fittings laid by others from the
positions, gradients and levels shown on the
Drawings:
1. Position of the centre of the termination face in
the longitudinal direction ..................................... ±10 mm
2. Position of the centre of the termination face in
the lateral direction ............................................... ±3 mm
3. Gradient ................................................................ ±0.5
4. Invert level of the termination face ...................... ±3 mm
MANHOLES
TOLERANCE
TOL.DRA2.210.9 MANHOLE COVERS

PD from specified level unless a more accurate level
is defined for adjacent surfaces in this schedule:
1. Concrete road ........................................................ +10 mm : -0 mm
2. Bituminous paving ............................................... +5 mm : -0 mm
3. Paving blocks, tiles or granolithic finish on soft
base ....................................................................... +10 mm : -0 mm
4. Paving blocks, tiles or granolithic finish on hard
base ....................................................................... +5 mm : -0 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EAR1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EAR1 - EXCAVATION AND FILLING
EARTHWORKS FINAL SURFACE TOLERANCES

TOL.EAR1.010.9 GENERAL
1. Keep earthworks final surfaces and formations within the tolerances of the
specified lines and levels tabulated in TOL.EAR1.020, TOL.EAR1.030 and
TOL.EAR1.040 below;
2. The tolerances for formations do not apply to pipes or preformed structures
which require to be supported over their complete length or area;
3. Excavation: A positive (+) tolerance refers to insufficient excavation and a
negative (-) tolerance refers to excess excavation;
4. Filling: A positive (+) tolerance refers to excess fill material and a negative (-)
tolerance refers to insufficient fill material.
TOL.EAR1.020.9 SETTING OUT

Requirement Tolerance (mm)
+ -
PD in plan of any point
measured from the nearest 35 35
building grid line
TOL.EAR1.030.9 BULK EXCAVATION/FILLING

Tolerance
Types of surface Method of forming surface (mm)
+ -
1. Formations for a. Excavation except in rock 0 25
structures and b. Excavation in rock 0 150
utilities c. Deposition and compaction 0 25
of fill material
2. Formations for a. Excavation except in rock 0 50
pavements, including b. Excavation in rock 0 150
carriageways, c. Deposition and compaction 0 50
of fill material
footways, cycletracks,
paved areas, aircraft
pavements and railway
trackbeds
3. Earthworks final sur- a. Excavation except in rock 0 100
faces, other than b. Excavation in rock 0 200

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EAR1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
formations, with a c. Deposition and compaction 0 100

of fill material
gradient not exceeding
1 vertical to 10
horizontal
4. Other earthworks final a. Excavation except in rock 100 100
surfaces b. Excavation in rock 100 200
c. Deposition and compaction 100 100
of fill material
TOL.EAR1.040.9 FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES

Tolerance
Types of surface Method of forming surface (mm)
+ -
1. Formations to receive a. Excavation except in rock 0 25
blinding or structural b. Excavation in rock 0 150
concrete
2. Width of excavation a. Excavation except in rock 0 100
b. Excavation in rock 0 200

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EAR2 - BLASTING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EAR2 - BLASTING
PRE-SPLIT BLASTING
TOL.EAR2.010.9 FINAL SURFACE TOLERANCES
A tolerance of + 100 - 200 mm from the design profile.
Notes:
1. Redrill any pre-split hole which, before firing, is found to be outside this
tolerance;
2. A positive (+) tolerance refers to insufficient blasted material and a negative (-)
tolerance refers to excess blasted material.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT1 - SUB-BASES, BITUMINOUS

ROADWAYS AND RELATED FOOTPATHS
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT1.010.9 ALIGNMENT
PD of edgelines from the dimensions indicated on
the Drawings:
1. Generally ............................................................... +25 mm : -25 mm
2. Adjacent edges of structure ................................... +6 mm : -6 mm
TOL.EXT1.020.9 MEASUREMENT OF LEVELS

Determine the levels of the surface of each layer of
sub-base, roadbase, base course, wearing and
friction courses on a grid at 10 m centres in the
longitudinal direction and at 2 m centres in the
transverse direction.
TOL.EXT1.030.9 TOLERANCES IN LEVELS FOR EACH TYPE OF LAYER

PD from the level of the surface of each layer of
sub-base, roadbase base course, wearing and friction
courses:
1. Sub-base ................................................................ +10 mm : -20 mm
2. Road-base course .................................................. +8 mm : -15 mm
3. Base course ........................................................... +6 mm : -6 mm
4. Wearing course ..................................................... +6 mm : -6 mm
5. Friction course ...................................................... +6 mm : -6 mm
TOL.EXT1.040.9 SURFACE LEVELS AT JOINTS

PD in level of the surface of wearing course and
friction course across joints ....................................... 3 mm
TOL.EXT1.050.9 COMBINATION OF TOLERANCES

Maximum reduction in thickness from specified
thickness:
1. Pavement (excluding sub-base) ........................... 15 mm
2. Bituminous wearing course .................................. 5 mm
TOL.EXT1.060.9 LEVELS OF GULLY GRATINGS

PD of gully frame from level of adjacent finished
surface ......................................................................... +0 mm : -5 mm
TOL.EXT1.070.9 LEVELS OF COVERS, FRAMES AND OTHER HARDWARE

PD of hardware from level of adjacent finished
surface ......................................................................... +5 mm : -0 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT1.080.9 SURFACE REGULARITY

Limits of irregularity as specified in EXT1.T610
and EXT1.T620 .......................................................... -:-

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT2 - CONCRETE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT2 - CONCRETE CARRIAGEWAYS

TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT2.010.9 STRAIGHT ALIGNMENT

1. PD of best fit straight line of straight joints and of
straight edges from that shown on the Drawings
................................................................................. +25 mm : -25 mm
2. PD of line of straight joints and straight edges
from the best fit straight line ................................. +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT2.020.9 CURVED ALIGNMENT

1. PD of the best fit curved line of curved joints and
of curved edges from that Approved and shown
on the Drawings ..................................................... +25 mm : -25 mm
2. PD of line of curved joints and curved edges
from the best fit curved line .................................. +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT2.030.9 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS

PD of joint continuity across intersections of joints
from the best fit straight lines or best fit curved line
of each joint ................................................................ +5 mm : -5 mm
TOL.EXT2.040.9 LEVEL OF SUB-BASE

PD from level shown on Drawings ............................ +10 mm : -20 mm
TOL.EXT2.050.9 FORMWORK
1. PD of line of formwork from that shown on
Drawings ................................................................ +10 mm : -10 mm
2. PD of level of formwork from that shown on
Drawings ................................................................ +3 mm : -3 mm
3. PD of abrupt irregularities in line and level of
formwork ............................................................... 3 mm
TOL.EXT2.060.9 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT

PD from cover specified or shown on Drawings
..................................................................................... +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT2.070.9 DOWEL BARS

1. PD of dowel bars at joints from mid-depth of
slab ......................................................................... +20 mm : -20 mm
2. PD of half the length of dowel bars from parallel
to:
a. The longitudinal joint or axis of the
carriageway where there is no longitudinal
joint ................................................................... 3 mm
b. The top surface of the slab ............................... 3 mm
c. Adjacent dowel bars ......................................... 3 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT2.080.9 GROOVE DEPTH

PD of groove depth from that shown on the
Drawings unless otherwise recommended by the
sealant manufacturer .................................................. +3 mm : -3 mm
TOL.EXT2.090.9 LEVELS
When the levels of the concrete carriageway are
determined 200 mm from the edges of each bay, at
10 m centres in the longitudinal direction and 2 m
centres in the transverse direction:
1. PD of surface fall from that shown on
Drawings .......................... (Providing that falls +6 mm : -6 mm
shall always be in the specified direction without
backfall).
3 mm
2. Maximum difference in level across joint ............
TOL.EXT2.100.9 SLAB THICKNESS

PD from specified thickness ...................................... - : -10 mm
TOL.EXT2.110.9 LEVEL OF COVERS, FRAMES AND OTHER

HARDWARE
PD from surface of adjacent carriageway ................. +0 mm : -3 mm
Surface regularity: The tolerances specified in this section should be read in
conjunction with the compliance criteria for surface regularity specified in EXT2
TESTING.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT3 - PATHS AND......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT3 - PATHS AND PAVED AREAS
MATERIALS
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT3.010.9 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE BLOCKS

PD on size ................................................................... +3 mm : -3 mm
TOL.EXT3.020.9 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING SLABS

PD as defined at 11.2.1 of BS 7263:Part 1:1994
measured in accordance with Annex A to this BS:
1. Thickness ............................................................... +3 mm : -3 mm
2. Length and width ................................................... +2 mm : -2 mm
3. Squareness on plan (difference between
diagonals) according to flag type defined in BS:
a. Flag types A, B, C and D; 6 mm
b. Flag types E, F and G. 3 mm
4. Flatness, winding and bowing:
a. Measured over 550 mm to 850 mm; +2 mm : -2 mm
b. Measured over 250 mm to 400 mm. +1 mm : -1 mm
TOL.EXT3.030.9 CLAY PAVERS

Limits of overall measurement defined in Table 2 of
BS 6677:Part 1:1986. -:-
WORKMANSHIP
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT3.110.9 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE BLOCKS, PRECAST CONCRETE

PAVING SLABS AND CLAY PAVERS
1. PD from surface level specified ............................ +3 mm : -3 mm
2. PD between adjacent slabs .................................... 2 mm
3. PD of drainage channels and gratings from level
of adjacent finished surface ................................... +0 mm : -5 mm
4. PD of covers, frames and other hardware from
level of adjacent finished surface .......................... +5 mm : -0 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT3 - PATHS AND......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT3.120.9 INSITU CONCRETE SURFACE FINISH

1. Abrupt irregularities: Maximum .......................... 3 mm
2. Gradual irregularities: Maximum in any 2 m
length ..................................................................... 10 mm
3. PD of drainage channels and gratings from level
of adjacent finished surface ................................... +0 mm : -5 mm
4. PD of covers, frames and other hardware from
level of adjacent finished surface .......................... +5 mm : -0 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT5 - KERBS,......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT5 - KERBS, EDGINGS AND

QUADRANTS
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT5.010.9 LINE
PD from line specified ............................................... +3 mm : -3 mm
TOL.EXT5.020.9 TOP LEVEL

PD from level specified .............................................. +3 mm : -3 mm
TOL.EXT5.030.9 IN SITU SURFACE FINISH

1. Abrupt irregularities: Maximum .......................... 3 mm
2. Gradual irregularities: Maximum in any 2 m
length ..................................................................... 10 mm
TOL.EXT5.040.9 ACCURACY OF PRECAST UNITS

PD's when measured in accordance with Annex A
of BS 7263:Part 1:1994:
1. Length, width or height ......................................... +3 mm : -3 mm
2. Straightness and winding:
a. Measured over 550 to 850 mm ....................... +2 mm : -2 mm
b. Measured over 250 to 400 mm ....................... +1 mm : -1 mm
3. Squareness ............................................................. 2 mm clearance

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT6 - CONCRETE PROFILE

BARRIERS
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT6.010.9 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS OF CROSS SECTIONS

PD from specified dimensions ................................... +5 mm : -5 mm
TOL.EXT6.020.9 VERTICAL DIMENSIONS OF CROSS SECTIONS

PD from specified dimensions ................................... +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT6.030.9 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT

PD from specified centre line .................................... +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT6.040.9 FORMATION LEVEL

PD from specified level .............................................. +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT6.050.9 BARRIER TOP LEVEL

PD from specified level .............................................. +10 mm : -10 mm
TOL.EXT6.060.9 ABRUPT IRREGULARITIES

Abrupt changes of a continuous finished concrete
surface ......................................................................... +3 mm : -3 mm

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT7 - UNTENSIONED BEAM

BARRIERS
MATERIALS
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT7.010.9 BASE METAL THICKNESS

PD from thickness shown on the Drawings .............. +0.2 mm : -0.2 mm
TOL.EXT7.020.9 STRIP WIDTH

PD from width shown on the Drawings .................... +2.5 mm : -0 mm
TOL.EXT7.030.9 CAMBER
PD from camber shown on the Drawings ................. +8 mm : -8 mm
TOL.EXT7.040.9 DISTORTION
PD within a 1.5 m length ........................................... 1.5 mm
TOL.EXT7.050.9 ANGLES AT BENDS

PD from angle shown on the Drawings ..................... 2 degrees
TOL.EXT7.060.9 STEEL POSTS

Within those specified in BS 4 : 1980 ....................... -
TOL.EXT7.070.9 CLEAT AND STRUTS

Within those specified in BS 4 : 1980 ....................... -
WORKMANSHIP
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT7.110.9 INSTALLATION
PD from specified position and height ...................... +10 mm : -10 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT8 - ROAD......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT8 - ROAD MARKING
THICKNESSES AND TOLERANCES

TOLERANCES
TOL.EXT8.010.9 SCREED MARKINGS

PD from specified thickness ...................................... +1.0 mm : -1.0 mm
TOL.EXT8.020.9 WIDTH AND LENGTH

PD from specified dimension .................................... +10% : -5%

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.EXT9 - FENCING,......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.EXT9 - FENCING, GATES AND

GUARD RAILS
FENCING
TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT9.010.9 MATERIALS
PDs for components as defined in Section 2 of
BS 1722 : Part 1 : 1986 -:-
TOL.EXT9.020.9 WORKMANSHIP
1. Position of posts: PD from specified position ....
................................................................................ 75 mm
2. Level of top of posts: PD from specified level ...
................................................................................ +25 mm : -25 mm
3. Verticality of posts: PD in the height of the post
rom plumb ............................................................ 5 mm
PEDESTRIAN GUARD RAILS

TOLERANCE
TOL.EXT9.110.9 ALIGNMENT
PD of line, position and height from that indicated
on Drawings ............................................................... +10 mm : -10 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FEN - FENCING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FEN - FENCING
TOL.FEN.010.9 GENERAL
Fencing shall comply with the following requirements:
1. The position of posts shall be within 75 mm of the position shown on the
Drawings;
2. The level of the top of the posts shall be within 25 mm of the level shown on the
Drawings;
3. Posts shall be vertical to within 5 mm in the height of the post.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN1 - PLASTERED......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN1 - PLASTERED AND RENDERED

FINISHES
INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL WALL FINISHES

TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN1.010.9 EVENNESS AND PLUMB

PD when measured in any direction with a
1.2 m straight edge for:
1. Plaster or render to receive mosaic or paint ......... 3 mm
2. Render to receive glazed wall tiles ...................... 6 mm
CEILING FINISHES
TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN1.110.9 LINE AND LEVEL

PD from true plane when measured in any direction
with a 1.2 m straight edge .......................................... 3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN2 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN2 - PLASTERBOARD
TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN2.010.9 BRITISH STANDARD

PD to fall within the tolerances defined in As stated
BS 8000:Part 8:1989.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN3 - SCREEDS
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN3 - SCREEDS
TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN3.010.9 LEVEL
PD when measured with a 1.2 m straight edge:
1. From specified level measured in any direction ...
................................................................................. 3 mm
2. From specified fall measured in the direction of
fall provided that, in any situation, there is no
backfall .................................................................. 3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN4 - INSITU......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN4 - INSITU WALL AND FLOOR

FINISHES
TOLERANCE
PD when measured with an 1.2 m straight edge:
1. From specified level measured in any direction ..
................................................................................ 3 mm
2. From specified fall measured along the fall
provided that in any situation there is no backfall
................................................................................ 3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN5 - FLOOR AND......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN5 - FLOOR AND WALL TILES AND

SLABS
FLOOR TILES AND SLABS

TOLERANCE
PD from specified fall when measured with a 1.2 m
straight edge in the direction of fall provided that, in
any situation, there is no backfall .............................. 3 mm
TOL.FIN5.020.9 LEVEL OF ADJACENT TILES

PD in level of adjacent tiles ....................................... 1.25 mm
TOL.FIN5.030.9 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS

1. PD of any tile from general line of joints ............. 1.25 mm
2. With a maximum non-alignment of adjacent tiles
of ............................................................................ 20% of joint width
WALL TILES
TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN5.110.9 PLANE
PD when measured with a 1.2 m straight edge in
any direction ............................................................... 3 mm
TOL.FIN5.120.9 PLANE OF ADJACENT TILES

PD in plane of adjacent tiles ...................................... 1.25 mm

of ............................................................................ 20% of joint width
MOSAIC TILES
TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN5.210.9 PLANE
PD when measured with a 1.2 m straight edge in
any direction ............................................................... 3 mm
TOL.FIN5.220.9 PLANE OF ADJACENT TILES

PD in plane of adjacent tiles ...................................... 1.25 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN5 - FLOOR AND......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________

of ............................................................................ 1.00 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN6 - FLEXIBLE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN6 - FLEXIBLE SHEET AND TILE

FINISHES
TOLERANCE
PD when measured with a 1.2 m straight edge .........
..................................................................................... 3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.FIN8 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.FIN8 - PROPRIETARY SUSPENDED

CEILINGS
INSTALLED CEILING SYSTEM

TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN8.010.9 LINE AND LEVEL

PD from true plane when measured with a
1.2 m straight edge in any direction ........................... ±3 mm

PD in width of joints between panels or strips ..........
..................................................................................... ±3 mm
TOL.FIN8.030.9 DEFLECTION OF MAIN MEMBERS

Maximum deflection between points of suspension:
1. Spans up to 1200 mm ............................................ Span x 1/400
2. Spans from 1200 mm to 1800 mm ....................... Span x 1/500
3. Spans over 1800 mm ............................................. Span x 1/600
CEILING COMPONENTS
TOLERANCE
TOL.FIN8.110.9 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND GRIDS

Tolerances not to exceed these specified in Section
2.5 of BS 8290:Part 2:1991 with particular reference
to Table 1 for Steel Sections ...................................... As stated
TOL.FIN8.120.9 INFILL UNITS

PD from manufacturers stated dimensions as
specified in BS 8290:Part 2:1991:
1. Generally: As Table 3 ........................................... As stated
2. Mineral fibre: As Table 4 ..................................... As stated
3. Steel tiles and panels formed by means other than
pressing: As Table 5 ............................................. As stated
4. Steel and aluminium linear strip: As Table 6 ....... As stated

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > - GROUND......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.GIN - GROUND INVESTIGATION,

INSTRUMENTATION AND SOIL TESTING
TOL.GIN.010.9 DEPTHS OF EXPLORATION
1. A tolerance of ±100 mm in length will be permitted on the drilled length of a
drill hole;
TOL.GIN.020.9 VERTICAL TOLERANCE

1. No nominally vertical hole shall deviate from the vertical direction by more than
1% of the vertical depth below ground level except that in underwater boreholes
or underwater drillholes the tolerance shall be 5%;
2. For inclined drillhole, the inclination shall not deviate from the instructed
inclination by more than 2o throughout the length of the hole;
3. Where required by the CM, the verticality and inclination of any hole shall be
measured by an approved method.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.GWD - GROUND......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.GWD - GROUND WATER DRAINAGE

AND CONTROL
TOL.GWD.010.9 DRILLING
1. The drillhole entry point shall be positioned within a tolerance of ±75 mm.
Deviation in alignment shall not exceed 1 in 20. Deviation from straight shall
not exceed 20 mm in any 3 m length of drillhole.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MAR - MARINE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAR - MARINE WORKS

TOL.MAR.010.9 DREDGING
The final surface of dredging shall be within 300 mm of the specified surface.
TOL.MAR.020.9 DEPOSITION OF FILL MATERIAL

1. The final surface of deposition and compaction of fill material, measured
perpendicular to the specified surface, shall comply with the following
requirements:
a. Top surfaces to receive levelling stones shall not be more than 75 mm above,
and not more than 250 mm below, the level shown on the Drawings;
b. Top surfaces of levelling stones shall be within 25 mm of the specified
surface for foundations of structures and shall be within 50 mm of the level
shown on the Drawings for submarine outfalls;
c. Other top surfaces shall be within 250 mm of the level shown on the
Drawings;
2. There shall be no abrupt change in level of the finished surface of reclamation
and levelling stones.
TOL.MAR.030.9 PRECAST CONCRETE SEAWALL BLOCKS AND COPINGS

Precast concrete seawall blocks and copings shall be within 25 mm of the position
shown on the Drawings. The gaps between adjacent blocks and between successive
layers of blocks shall not exceed 20 mm.
TOL.MAR.040.9 TIMBER FENDERING SYSTEMS

1. The dimensions of members of timber fendering systems shall be within 5 mm
of the dimensions shown on the Drawings;
2. The levels and positions of timber fendering systems shall comply with the
following requirements:
a. The top level of blocks for landings and steps shall be within 5 mm of the
level shown on the Drawings;
b. The top level of other members shall be within 10 mm of the level shown on
the Drawings;
c. The horizontal position perpendicular to the berthing face of the fendering
system shall be within 10 mm of the position shown on the Drawings;
d. The horizontal position parallel to the berthing face of the fendering system
shall be within 25 mm of the position shown on the Drawings.
TOL.MAR.050.9 RUBBER FENDERS

1. The dimensions of rubber fenders and bolt holes shall comply with the following
requirements:
a. The bolt hole diameter shall be within 2 mm of the diameter shown on the
Drawings;
b. The bolt pitch shall be within 4 mm of the pitch shown on the Drawings;

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MAR - MARINE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
c. The height, length and width of rubber fenders shall be within +4% and -2%
of the dimensions shown on the Drawings;
d. The thickness of fender sections shall be within +8% and -5% of the
thickness shown on the Drawings;
2. The positions of rubber fenders shall comply with the following requirements:
a. The centrelines shall be within 25 mm of the positions on the face of the
supporting structures shown on the Drawings;
b. The inclination shall not deviate by more than 1 in 50 from the inclination
shown on the Drawings.
TOL.MAR.060.9 SUBMARINE OUTFALLS

1. The horizontal alignment of submarine pipelines shall be within 250 mm of the
alignment shown on the Drawings;
2. The invert level of submarine outfalls shall be within 50 mm of the level shown
on the Drawings;
3. There shall be no abrupt change in alignment or level of the submarine outfall.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MAS1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAS1 - BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK

AND PANEL PARTITIONS
BRICKWORK
TOL.MAS1.010.9 GENERALLY
Comply with Table 2 Section 3 of BS 8000:Part 3:1989.
BRICKWORK AND PANEL PARTITIONS

TOLERANCE
TOL.MAS1.110.9 POSITION ON PLAN

PD ............................................................................... ±15 mm
TOL.MAS1.120.9 LENGTH
PD for:
1. Up to 5 m ............................................................... ±15 mm
2. 5 m to 10 m ............................................................ ±20 mm
3. 10 m to 20 m .......................................................... ±25 mm
4. Over 20 m .............................................................. ±30 mm
TOL.MAS1.130.9 HEIGHT
PD for:
1. Up to 3 m ............................................................... ±15 mm
2. 3 m to 6 m .............................................................. ±20 mm
3. Over 6 m ................................................................. ±25 mm
TOL.MAS1.140.9 LEVEL OF BED JOINTS

PD in any 5 m for:
1. Up to 5 m ............................................................... ±10 mm
2. 5 m to 10 m ............................................................ ±15 mm
3. Over 10 m .............................................................. ±25 mm
TOL.MAS1.150.9 THICKNESS OF BED JOINTS

PD ............................................................................... ±6 mm
TOL.MAS1.160.9 STRAIGHTNESS
1. PD in any 1.2 m ..................................................... ±6 mm
TOL.MAS1.170.9 VERTICALITY
1. PD in any 1.2 m ..................................................... ±6 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MAS1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAS1.180.9 SETTING-OUT OF PRE-INSTALLED JUNCTION/BS 4662 BOXES ON

WALLS
The deviation of the installed position of pre-installed
junction/BS 4662 boxes from the specified position as
shown on the Drawings with the following
considerations:
1. In general, the sockets outlets and lighting switches
etc. shall be at the same level in the same room.
PD for vertical levels of boxes designed at the same
level on the same panel wall: ................................... ±3 mm
2. The installed position of boxes after taking the
above tolerance into consideration shall not
contravene the requirements of the position of
switches/sockets as stipulated in the Design Manual
- Barrier Free Access 1997; nor have conflict with
other installations such as skirting, door frame, etc.;
3. Deviations exceeding the tolerance under special
site condition shall be subject to the approval of the
CM.
OPENINGS IN BRICKWORK, BLOCKWORK AND

PANEL PARTITIONS
TOLERANCE
TOL.MAS1.210.9 OPENINGS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS ETC.

PD in height and width ............................................... ±10 mm
MANUFACTURING OF PANEL WALL PARTITIONS

TOLERANCE
TOL.MAS1.310.9 MANUFACTURING OF PANEL WALL PARTITIONS

PD in:
1. Length .................................................................... ±5 mm
2. Thickness ............................................................... ±1.5 mm
3. Flatness .................................................................. ±3 mm
4. Width ..................................................................... ±2 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MAS2 - STONEWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAS2 - STONEWORK
RUBBLE STONE WALLING

TOLERANCE

PD ............................................................................... ±25 mm
PD ............................................................................... ±25 mm
TOL.MAS2.030.9 HEIGHT
PD ............................................................................... ±25 mm

PD in any 5 m ............................................................. ±25 mm
PD in any horizontal 5 m ........................................... ±25 mm
PD up to 3 m ............................................................... ±20 mm
ASHLAR STONE WALLING

TOLERANCE

PD ............................................................................... ±15 mm
PD in any 6 m ............................................................. ±15 mm
TOL.MAS2.130.9 OVERALL HEIGHT

PD up to 3 m ............................................................... ±15 mm

PD in any 5 m ............................................................. ±10 mm
1. PD up to 3 m .......................................................... ±15 mm
2. PD up to 7 m .......................................................... ±20 mm
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAS2.170.9 WINDOW AND DOOR OPENINGS

1. Width along wall: PD up to 3 m .......................... ±10 mm
2. Height: PD up to 3 m ............................................ ±10 mm
NATURAL STONE CLADDING - WORKMANSHIP IN

PRODUCTION
TOLERANCE
TOL.MAS2.210.9 FACE DIMENSIONS

PD from length and height:
1. Units 50 mm thick or less ...................................... ±2 mm
2. Units over 50 mm thick: In any 900 mm ..............
................................................................................. ±3 mm
TOL.MAS2.220.9 THICKNESSES
PD from specified thickness (minimum 19 mm) ......
..................................................................................... ±3 mm
TOL.MAS2.230.9 BOW OR TWIST

1. Natural riven faces: PD in 1.2 m length .............. ±10 mm
2. Other face finishes: PD in 1.2 m length ............... ±1.5 mm
NATURAL STONE CLADDING - ERECTION

TOLERANCE

PD ............................................................................... ±10 mm
PD in any 6 m ............................................................. ±10 mm
TOL.MAS2.330.9 OVERALL HEIGHT

PD up to 3 m ............................................................... ±10 mm

PD in any 5 m ............................................................. ±6 mm
PD in any 1.2 m .......................................................... ±3 mm
Note: The tolerance on the verticality is measured
in relation to the true vertical from the base of
the wall and is not cumulative.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MAS2.370.9 WINDOW AND DOOR OPENINGS

1. Width along wall: PD up to 3 m .......................... ±6 mm
2. Height: PD up to 3 m ............................................ ±6 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MEW - METALWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MEW - METALWORK
TOL.MEW.010.9 GENERAL
Handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. The position and height of handrailing shall be within 10 mm of the specified
position and height;
2. The level of the top rung of ladders and the top tread of stairs shall be within
75 mm of the specified level;
3. The level of flooring and curbs shall be within 3 mm of the specified level.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.MRY - MASONRY......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.MRY - MASONRY WALLING

TOL.MRY.010.9 GENERAL
1. Rubble stone walling shall comply with the following requirements:
a. The position on plan shall be within 25 mm of the specified position;
b. The length shall be within 25 mm of the specified length;
c. The height shall be within 25 mm of the specified height;
d. The level of bed joints shall be within 25 mm of the specified level in any
5 m length;
e. The walling shall be straight to within 25 mm in any 5 m length;
f. The walling shall be vertical to within 20 mm in any 3 m height.
2. Ashlar stone walling shall comply with the following requirements:
a. The position on plan shall be within 15 mm of the specified position;
b. The length shall be within 15 mm of the specified length;
c. The height shall be within 10 mm of the specified height;
d. The level of bed joints shall be within 10 mm of the specified level in any
5 m length;
e. The walling shall be straight to within 15 mm in any 5 m length;
f. The walling shall be vertical to within 15 mm in any 3 m height.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.PIL1 - PILING......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.PIL1 - PILING AND FOOTINGS
ALL PILE TYPES

TOLERANCE
TOL.PIL1.010.9 POSITION ON PLAN

Except Type 5 Piles, PD in plan of piles from their
designed positions measured at the working level of 75 mm
the piling rig:
TOL.PIL1.020.9 VERTICALITY
Except Type 5 Piles, PD from the vertical axis of the
pile through the centroid of the cross-sections at the 1 in 75
cut-off level to any level of the finished pile:
TOL.PIL1.030.9 OUT OF EXACT INCLINATION

PD from exact inclination, where specified,
measured from the centre of pile: ............................ 2º
TOL.PIL1.040.9 CUT-OFF LEVELS

PD from specified top level of pile heads: ..............
.................................................................................... +20 mm : -20 mm
TOL.PIL1.050.9 DIAMETER OF CAST INSITU PILES

Minimum proportion of specified diameter: ...........
.................................................................................... 97%
PILE TYPES 1A AND 1B

TOLERANCE
TOL.PIL1.110.9 DIMENSIONAL ACCURACY FOR SOLID NON-CIRCULAR SECTION

PD: ............................................................................. +6 mm : -6 mm
TOL.PIL1.120.9 DIMENSIONAL ACCURACY FOR HOLLOW CYLINDRICAL SECTION

1. External diameter: ................................................. +10 mm : -6 mm
2. Internal diameter: ................................................. - : -6 mm
3. Thickness: ............................................................ +25 mm : -6 mm
TOL.PIL1.130.9 STRAIGHTNESS
PD: ............................................................................. 1 in 500

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.PIL1 - PILING......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.PIL1.140.9 SUPERFICIAL CRACKS

Limits which may be tolerated at the discretion of
the CM provided that the Contractor can prove that
the cracks will not develop further:
1. Crack depth: Not deeper than: ............................ 1 mm
2. Crack width: Not wider than: ............................. 0.2 mm
PILE TYPE 3
TOLERANCE
TOL.PIL1.160.9 DIAMETER OF PERMANENT LINERS

Minimum proportion of specified diameter: ............
..................................................................................... 99%
PILE TYPE 4
TOLERANCE
TOL.PIL1.210.9 STRAIGHTNESS OF COMPLETE PILE

PD from straightness of the complete pile:
1. Along a 3 m straight edge: ................................... 3 mm
2. Overall limit: ........................................................ 1 in 1000
PILE TYPE 5
TOLERANCE
TOL.PIL1.310.9 BORING
Do not drill holes oversize by more than: ................. 20 mm
TOL.PIL1.305.9 POSITION ON PLAN

PD in plan of piles from their designed positions
measured at the working level of the piling rig:
15 mm
....................................................................................
Subject to justification and Approval, the value may
be increased to a value not exceeding 75 mm.
TOL.PIL1.330.9 VERTICALITY
PD from the vertical axis of the pile through the
centroid of the cross-section at the cut-off level to 1 in 100
any level of the finished pile:

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.PLU2 - SANITARY......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.PLU2 - SANITARY APPLIANCES

TOLERANCE
TOL.PLU2.010.9 HORIZONTALITY OF INSTALLATION

PD from horizontal plane measured across width of
appliance ..................................................................... ±3 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.PSC -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.PSC - PRESTRESSING CONCRETE

TOL.PSC.010.9 TOLERANCES
The lines of prestressing sheaths shall be within 5 mm of the specified line.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.SLO - SLOPE......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.SLO - SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS
SOIL-CEMENT FILLING
TOL.SLO.010.9 COMPACTION
1. The tolerance on the optimum moisture content percentage shall be ±3.
SOIL NAILING
TOL.SLO.110.9 GENERAL
The installation of soil nails shall comply with the following dimensional tolerances:
1. The permitted deviation of drillholes shall be within ±2º to the specified vertical
and horizontal alignments;
2. The nominal diameter of the centralizers shall not differ from the specified
diameter of the drillhole by more than 10mm.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.STR1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.STR1 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
TOL.STR1.010.9 CRITICAL DIMENSIONS AFFECTING REPETITION OR
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF UNITS
Carry out fabrication so that the critical dimensions, when measured by a tape
calibrated at 20°C, comply with the tolerances given in the Table below:
Tolerance on overall
Dimension Measured Tolerance for Single dimension of assembled
Element system of more than
one
Not exceeding 5 m ±3 mm ±3 mm
Exceeding 5 m but not ±5 mm ±6 mm
exceeding 10 m
Exceeding 10 m but not ±5 mm ±10 mm
exceeding 15 m
Exceeding 15 m ±10 mm ±10 mm
TOL.STR1.020.9 DETAILED DIMENSIONS

Comply with the fabrication tolerances in the following British Standard and Code
of Practice:
1. BS 5400:Part 6:1980 for plates and sections in bridgework;
2. The Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel 2011 for hot rolled sections
and cold rolled sections in building.
ERECTION OF STEELWORK
TOLERANCE
TOL.STR1.110.9 CAST-IN FOUNDATION BOLTS

Tilt of bolts to be not more than 1 in 40 from
specified line.
TOL.STR1.120.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES

After lining, levelling, plumbing and making the
permanent connections:
1. Level of the top of base plates and level of the
lower end of vertical or raking components in a
pocket: PD from specified levels: ....................... ±10 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.STR1 -......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2. PD from line of vertical or raking components

other than portal frames:
a. ........................................................................... 1 in 600
or
b. From specified line in every direction: .......... 10 mm
3. PD from line of vertical or raking components . in
portal frames:
a. ........................................................................... 1 in 600
or
b. From specified line normal to the plane of the
frame: .............................................................. ±10 mm
4. The position and level of components connected
with other components: PD from the specified
position and level at point of connect: .................. 5 mm
5. The difference in level between adjacent sloping
or horizontal components connected by a deck
slab: PD from specified difference in level: .........
................................................................................ ±10 mm

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.STW - STEELWORK
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.STW - STEELWORK
TOL.STW.010.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES GENERALLY
Fabrication tolerances for steelwork shall comply with BS 5950:Part 2:1992, Sub-
section 7.2 as appropriate.
TOL.STW.020.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES FOR BRIDGEWORKS

Fabrication tolerances shall comply with BS 5400:Part 6:1980, Clause 4.2.
TOL.STW.030.9 FOUNDATION BOLTS

The position of cast-in foundation bolts at the top of base plates shall be within 3 mm
of the specified position. The position of foundation bolts in bolt pockets at the top
of base plates shall be within 5 mm of the specified position. The line of bolts shall
not be tilted from the specified line by more than 1 in 40.
TOL.STW.040.9 ERECTION TOLERANCES

After lining, levelling, plumbing and making the permanent connections, steelwork
shall be erected to within the following tolerances:
1. The position in plan of vertical components at the base shall be within 10 mm of
the specified position;
2. The level of the top of base plates and the level of the lower end of vertical or
raking components in a pocket based shall be within 10 mm of the specified
level;
3. The thickness of bedding shall be within one-third of the nominal thickness or
10 mm, whichever is less, of the specified nominal thickness;
4. The line of vertical or raking components other than in portal frames shall be
within 1 in 600 and within 10 mm of the specified line in every direction;
5. The line of vertical or raking components in portal frames shall be with 1 in 600
and within 10 mm of the specified line normal to the plane of the frame;
6. The position and level of components connected with other components shall be
within 5 mm of the specified position and level relative to the other components
at the point of connection;
7. The position of components supported on a bearing shall be within 5 mm of the
specified position relative to the bearing along both principal axes of the bearing;
8. The difference in level between adjacent slopping or horizontal components
connected by a deck slab shall be within 10 mm of the specified difference in
level.

APPENDIX H - SCHEDULE OF TOLERANCES APH > TOL.WSP - WATER......
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
TOL.WSP - WATER SUPPLY PIPEWORK

TOL.WSP.010.9 LINE AND LEVEL
The line and level of pipelines for water supply pipeworks shall be within 25 mm of
the specified line and level.

HA 2022 B1 Structural 2148-2609

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HA 2022 B1 Structural 2148-2609

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HONG KONG HOUSING AUTHORITY

SPECIFICATION LIBRARY 2022 (BATCH 1) EDITION

Structural EngineeringWorks Specification

CON CONCRETE WORKS

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /1

CON1 INSITU CONCRETE ............................................................................... 30

CON1.M630.9 WATERPROOF ADHESIVE TAPE ................................................................ 37

CON1.W150.9 MIXING CONCRETE ...................................................................................... 48

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /4

LAYING HOLLOW BLOCK FOR SLABS .................................................................................. 55

CON1.W1990.9 REPAIR ACCORDING TO CLASSIFICATION ............................................ 62

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /6

CON1.T650.9 TABLE OF COMPLIANCE CRITERIA FOR DESIGNED

CON2 FORMWORK ........................................................................................... 83

CON2.D240.9 LARGE PANEL FORMWORK AND SMALL PANEL METAL

HANDLING AND STORAGE ........................................................................................................ 91

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /9

SEALING FORMWORK TIE HOLES ......................................................................................... 97

CON3 REINFORCEMENT ...............................................................................102

WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 106

CON3.W020.9 SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCING STEEL ................................. 106

TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 110

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /11

EPOXY COATED REINFORCEMENT ..................................................................................... 113

CON4 PRECAST CONCRETE ........................................................................117

MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 119

CONCRETE GRADE .................................................................................................................... 119

WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 122

TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 125

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /13

CON4.T040.9 AGREED TEST PROCEDURES ................................................................... 125

CON5 PRECAST FACADE UNITS (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) .............127

CON5.D650.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY .......................................................... 132

MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 135

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /15

WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 139

CON5.W590.9 TRANSPORT VEHICLES ............................................................................. 147

TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 151

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /17

CON5.T214.9 TABLES OF COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT FOR DESIGNED

CON5.T850.9 SUBMISSION ................................................................................................ 159

CON6 MOVEMENT JOINTS ...........................................................................161

WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 162

CON7 PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS (ENGINEER'S DESIGN)163

MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 165

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /19

PRECAST FACADE, PRECAST BALCONY, SEMI-PRECAST SLAB, PRECAST

WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 169

HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE............................................................... 175

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /21

CON7.W1180.9 COMPLETION CERTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT

TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 184

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /22

CON7.T126.9 NON-COMPLIANCE AND FURTHER TESTS ON COMPRESSIVE

CON8 VOLUMETRIC PRECAST CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /23

CON8.D120.9 SCOPE OF THE DESIGN (CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN) ............................. 195

CON8.D1130.9 SIZE OF STUDY MOCK-UP......................................................................... 201

MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 205

WORKMANSHIP ................................................................................................................... 211

Specification Library 2022 Edition (Batch 1) CON /25

MOULD ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................... 213

TESTING ................................................................................................................................. 219